Fuji FCR 5000 Service Manual PDF

AC5000 9848-600-02111/2 MON: 4512-984-30121 0.
1
REV AA
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY
CR-IR341 (FCR 5000)

CR-IR341P (FCR 5000plus)
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the unit of radiation,

and C/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation,
is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 C/kg
FCR is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright 1998-2005 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored

in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
Document No. 009-051-11 mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
1 st Edition - June 20, 1998 permission of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Miyanodai Technology Development
Revised Edition - Aug. 31, 2005 Center.
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan
009-051-11 0.1
08.31.2005 FM4710
CR-IR341 Service Manual
Getting Started 0.2 Getting Started 0.3
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Getting Started
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
have been inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
Scope If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR341 and CR-IR341P.
The machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
For the console (hereinafter abbreviated as CSL), reference should be made to the Service Inspection/calibration procedures should be performed in accordance with the inspection/
Manual for ID-T741 or CR-IR348CL. calibration manuals described in the ECN Information.
NOTES Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration
Differences between the CR-IR341 and CR-IR341P are as follows.
Name Inspection Calibration Inspection/calibration manual No.
The CR-IR341 may be connected to the ID-T741.
The CR-IR341P may be connected to the CR-IR348CL and ID-T741. Dosimeter
Units with serial number #5001 or later are called CR-IR341P.
Steel rule (150mm)
Steel rule (300mm) ECN No. FCR-A014

Notational Conventions Digital tester
In this manual, some conventions for unit symbols, cautions, warnings, etc. are followed to
Calipers ()
provide a simple, easy-to-read layout.
Push-pull gauge
Notation of unit symbols
: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration. TR1H0001.EPS
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI)
are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but are permit-
ted in the Measurement Law are used partially.
Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.
The notation formats of warning, caution, note, supplementary note, and reference are
shown below.
WARNING
Used when physical injury or death may occur if the instruction is not observed.
CAUTION
Used when a minor physical injury may be incurred or the machine may suffer serious damage
if the instruction is not observed.
NOTE
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur if the
instruction is not observed.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Used to supply information that is not related directly to the work flow but may be useful if known.
Used to indicate the section you should refer to.
009-051-07 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.2 009-051-07 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.3
08.30.2001 FM3115 08.30.2001 FM3115
Safety Precaution 0.3_1 Safety Precaution 0.3_2
Precautions for Optical Parts

Safety Precaution
Observe the following rules for all the optical parts. Otherwise, the image quality may be
degraded.
Observe the following safety precautions to avoid possible hazards and accidents during
installation and servicing. Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the
machine is powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be
damaged.
1. General Precautions Never touch the surface of optical parts.
Power Supply Do not attempt to remove dust or soil with procedures other than those specified.
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing. If servicing is performed while the power Remove optical parts in a clean environment. When removing protective housings to
remains ON, you may experience electric shock, burn, or machine malfunction. Since replace optical parts, use care to avoid saliva from spattering around. Accordingly, it is
some parts are not fully discharged (such as the photomultiplier) or remain at high desirable to wear a mask.
temperature (such as the lamp) even after power OFF, exercise due care not to touch
them. Grounding
If servicing procedures (such as voltage measurement) that cannot be performed under Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
power-OFF condition are to be performed, use due care to avoid electric shock and other protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
hazards, as instructed in this manual. safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
To restart the machine, power it OFF and wait more than five seconds before powering it restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
ON again. If the machine is powered ON within five seconds, it may shut down due to to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to
overcurrent/overvoltage protection. verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
Check on Drive Mechanisms Other General Precautions

For your safety, be sure to turn OFF the power before proceeding with inspection or adjust- General precautions to be observed when performing servicing procedures are described
ment. If inspection or adjustment that cannot be performed under power-OFF condition is to below. Note that precautions for individual procedures are described for their respective
be made, use due care, as instructed in this manual. procedures and thus be observed accordingly.
To avoid hazards and prevent damage to components, do not remove or install any
Heavy Objects part while the machine is powered. When performing checks and adjustments under
the powered condition, exercise care against electric shock.
Get an assistant to help you during installation and removal of heavy objects. Also use
suitable gear or machinery when appropriate. To avoid hazards, do not put your hand on or into any rotating part. Also use care not
to get your hand, foot, hairs, or clothes entangled in the machine.
Safety Devices Use care not to touch the erasure lamp by hand, because it remains at high
For safety devices, such as fuses, breakers, interlock switches, panels, and covers, their temperature immediately after power is turned OFF.
safety features should always be enabled. Do not make any alternation or modification that Since some components, such as the photomultiplier, are not sufficiently discharged
may impair their functionality. after power is turned OFF, exercise due care to avoid electric shock. (Do not touch any
exposed parts, such as connectors and terminals, by bare hand inadvertently.)
Fixing Adjustable Foot When servicing any LD assembly and printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-
As anti-vibration measures for the machine, fix its adjustable feet onto the floor in place. static wristband to ensure proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human
body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put another
label over them.
Upon completion of the servicing procedures, put the protective housings, retaining
screws, and cover grounding back exactly where they were, and secure them in place.
009-051-07 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.3_1 009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.3_2
08.30.2001 FM3115 08.31.2005 FM4710
Safety Precaution 0.3_3 Safety Precaution 0.3_4
2. Safety Against Laser Radiation BLANK PAGE
As indicated by the Certification and Identification Label attached on the rear cover of the
machine for overseas use, the machine complies with the U.S. Federal Regulations
concerning laser safety. The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum output of 60
mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but you will not
be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in this manual.
Precautions Against Laser Exposure

Observe the following rules to avoid laser exposure.
Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure

When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in
this manual to avoid laser exposure.
Remove and restore the scanning optics unit.
Replace the semiconductor laser unit.
Replace or clean subscanning unit parts.
After the procedures are completed, put the protective housings and retaining screws back
exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of a laser beam out of the machine.
Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance

In order to keep the machine in compliance with laser safety standards, perform preventive
maintenance programs described in Preventive Maintenance Volume at intervals specified.
Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure

Observe the following rules during servicing to avoid laser exposure.
Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you
may be exposed to laser beam radiation.
Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
Never attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.
Labels and Protective Housings for Laser Safty

Safety Labels page 0.36
Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure page 0.40
009-051-07 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.3_3 009-051-07 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.3_4
08.30.2001 FM3115 08.30.2001 FM3115
Contents Maintenance Machine Description 0.4 Contents Maintenance Machine Description 0.5
CR-IR341 Service Manual Contents

7.13 General Description of Scanning Optics System ............................................ MD-54
Machine Description (MD)
7.14 Software Terms and Definitions ..................................................................... MD-55.1
1. Overall Configuration and Nomenclature of Machine ................................................. MD-2 7.15 Data Flows ........................................................................................................ MD-55.3
8. Mechanical Control Flows ............................................................................................ MD-56
1.1 External View of Machine ..................................................................................... MD-2
8.1 How to Understand Control Flow ...................................................................... MD-56
1.2 Configuration of Machine..................................................................................... MD-3
8.2 Routine (Single-IP Conveyance)....................................................................... MD- 57
2. Features of Machine ....................................................................................................... MD-4
8.2.1 Summary of Operation ......................................................................... MD-57
2.1 Features of Mechanical Mechanism.................................................................... MD-4
8.2.2 Cassette IN ............................................................................................. MD-59
2.2 Image Network I/F Option..................................................................................... MD-5
8.2.3 Movement (Feed) of Elevation Unit ..................................................... MD- 62
3. New Parts with Better Serviceability ............................................................................. MD-6
8.2.4 IP Feed ................................................................................................... MD-67
3.1 E-ringless Housing Employed ............................................................................. MD-6
8.2.5 Feed Conveyance (IP Length Measurement) ...................................... MD-71
3.2 Snap-fit Pinion Gears Employed ......................................................................... MD-7
8.2.6 Barcode Reading and Side-Positioning ............................................... MD-74
3.3 Simple Bearing Employed.................................................................................... MD-8
8.2.7 Reading .................................................................................................. MD-82
3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment .................................................. MD-9
8.2.8 Movement of Elevation Unit (Load) ..................................................... MD- 93
3.5 Sensor Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position .......................... MD-11
8.2.9 Erasure .................................................................................................... MD-94
4. System Block Diagram ................................................................................................. MD-12 8.2.10 IP Load .................................................................................................... MD-98
5. I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions ................................................................ MD-14 8.2.11 Cassette Ejection ................................................................................. MD-103
5.1 I/O Location Diagram .......................................................................................... MD-14 8.3 Machine Operation During Secondary Erasure ............................................. MD-104
5.2 I/O List (Sensor) .................................................................................................. MD-15 8.3.1 Summary of Operation ........................................................................ MD-104
5.2.1 Models of Sensors and Parts Codes .................................................... MD-15 8.3.2 Side-Positioning (Secondary Erasure) .............................................. MD-105
5.2.2 Description of Sensor ON/OFF ............................................................. MD-16 8.3.3 Reading (Secondary Erasure) ............................................................. MD-105
5.2.3 Sensor Monitoring Screen Under Idle Condition ................................ MD-16 8.3.4 Erasure Conveyance ........................................................................... MD-108
5.3 I/O List (Actuator) ................................................................................................ MD-17 8.4 Step Operation .................................................................................................. MD-109
6. IP Flow ............................................................................................................................ MD-18 8.4.1 Summary of Operation ........................................................................ MD-109
6.1 Timing Chart ........................................................................................................ MD-18 8.4.2 Feed/Load Step Operation .................................................................. MD-109
7. Descriptions of Operations .......................................................................................... MD-20 8.4.3 Side-Positioning Step Operation ........................................................ MD-116
7.1 Elevation Unit ...................................................................................................... MD-20 8.5 Machine Operation During Conveyor Initialization........................................ MD-117
7.2 IP Removal Unit................................................................................................... MD-21 8.5.1 Summary of Operation ........................................................................ MD-117
7.3 Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor ................................................................... MD-24 8.5.2 Initialization Subscanning Grip Check .............................................. MD-119
7.4 Side-Positioning Conveyor ................................................................................ MD-26 8.5.3 IP Search............................................................................................... MD-120
7.5 Subscanning Unit ............................................................................................... MD-29 8.5.4 Processing of Feed/Load Conveyance IP.......................................... MD-135
7.6 After-Reading Conveyor..................................................................................... MD-31 8.5.5 Cassette Hold Release Operation Check ........................................... MD-138
7.7 Erasure Conveyor ............................................................................................... MD-32 8.5.6 Processing of Before-Reading Standby IP ........................................ MD-140
7.8 Electrical System Block Diagram ...................................................................... MD-34 8.5.7 Processing of Load Standby IP .......................................................... MD-143
7.9 Image Data Flow.................................................................................................. MD-35 8.5.8 Processing of After-Reading Standby IP ........................................... MD-144
7.10 Function of Each Board ..................................................................................... MD-37 8.5.9 Subscanning Grip HP Positioning ..................................................... MD-145
7.11 Power Supply ...................................................................................................... MD-45 8.5.10 Empty Cassette Ejection ..................................................................... MD-151
7.12 Scanning Optics/Scanner Unit .......................................................................... MD-46 8.5.11 Cassette Hold Release Operation ...................................................... MD-152
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
Contents Maintenance Machine Description 0.6 Contents Maintenance Machine Description 0.7
BLANK PAGE
8.6 Error Handling ................................................................................................... MD-153

8.6.1 Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 1 ................................................... MD-153
8.6.2 Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 2 ................................................... MD-154
8.6.3 Error Handling: Recovered IP Load ................................................... MD-156
8.6.4 Error Handling: Overexposure ........................................................... MD-158
8.6.5 Error Handling: Lamp Failure ............................................................. MD-158
8.6.6 Error Handling: Detection of IP with Improper Generation or
Unit Type............................................................................................... MD-159
8.6.7 Error Handling: IDT Line Error ............................................................ MD-160
8.6.8 Error Handling: ID Information Error ................................................. MD-161
8.6.9 Error Handling: After-Reading Conveyance Error ............................ MD-162
8.6.10 Error Handling: BCR Retry .................................................................. MD-163
8.7 Error Code Index ............................................................................................... MD-164
8.8 Parameters ........................................................................................................ MD-166
8.8.1 Timer Settings ...................................................................................... MD-166
8.8.2 Retry Count Settings ........................................................................... MD-171
8.8.3 Erasure Conveyance Table ................................................................. MD-172
8.8.4 Pulse Motor Parameters ...................................................................... MD-174
9. Unit Location Information .......................................................................................... MD-176
9.1 Unit Locations ................................................................................................... MD-176
9.2 Roller Locations ................................................................................................ MD-180
9.3 IP Conveyance Locations ................................................................................ MD-181
9.4 Home Position Values ...................................................................................... MD-182
9.5 Installation Locations for Members in Contact with IP Fluorescent Face... MD-185
9.6 Data on Grip Springs ........................................................................................ MD-186
10. Information on Board LEDs ....................................................................................... MD-188
11. Interlock ....................................................................................................................... MD-190
12. Initialization when Starting Up the Machine ............................................................. MD-192
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.30.2002 FM3405
Contents Maintenance Troubleshooting 0.8 Contents Maintenance Troubleshooting 0.9
Troubleshooting (MT) 03D6 After-Erasure Conveyance Error ........................................................ MT-178

03D7 Convergence Path Changeover Guide Operation Error................... MT-180
1. Document Map ................................................................................................................. MT-2 03D8 After-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error ................ MT-182
03D9 Erasure Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error ........................... MT-184
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Error Codes ................................................... MT-3
03DC After-Reading Conveyance Grip Operation Error ............................. MT-186
2.1 How to Understand Error Code ........................................................................... MT-3
03DD Elevation HP Movement error ............................................................. MT-188
2.2 Error Codes List .................................................................................................... MT-4
03DE Elevation Movement Error .................................................................. MT-190
2.3 Format of Detail Information ............................................................................ MT-106
03E8 Suction Cup Movement Operation Error ........................................... MT-192
2.3.1 Supplementary Explanation of Detail Information ............................ MT-122
13A1 Cassette Setting Error ......................................................................... MT-194
2.3.2 Format of Abort Code .......................................................................... MT-123
13A2 Cassette Hold Release Error ............................................................... MT-196
2.3.3 Priority Checks to Be Conducted upon Trouble Occurrence .......... MT-124
13A3 Cassette Shelf Error ............................................................................ MT-198
2.4 Troubleshooting flow ....................................................................................... MT-128
13A9 Barcode Read Error ............................................................................. MT-200
2.4.1 Error Code Analysis Flows ................................................................. MT-128
13AA/23AA Erasure Lamp Failure ................................................................... MT-202
03A2 Cassette hold release error / 03A3 Degeneration for all shelves .... MT-128
13AB Overexposed IP Unerased .................................................................. MT-204
03A8 Out-Of-Spec Initialization IP Size/13A8 Out-Of-Spec IP Size ........... MT-130
13AC ID Information Not Registered ............................................................ MT-206
03B1 Feed Conveyance Error ....................................................................... MT-132
13AD IP with Improper Generation or Type Detected................................. MT-208
03B2 Load Conveyance Error ...................................................................... MT-134
13AE No MPM Code Available ...................................................................... MT-210
03B3 Side-Positioning Conveyor Inlet Conveyance Error......................... MT-136
13AF IDT Line Error ....................................................................................... MT-212
03B4 Recovered IP Load Slow Conveyance Error ..................................... MT-138
13E1 Feed IP Suction Error .......................................................................... MT-214
03B5 Recovered IP Load Fast Conveyance Error ...................................... MT-140
13E2 Feed IP Dropped/13E5 Load IP Dropped ........................................... MT-216
03B6 Feed/Load Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error ...................... MT-142
13E3 IP Grip Error ......................................................................................... MT-218
03B7 Side-Positioning Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error ............ MT-144
13E4 Load IP Suction Error .......................................................................... MT-220
03B8/13B8 IP Position Information Error........................................................ MT-146
2.4.2 Cable Check Flow ................................................................................ MT-222
03B9 Load Standby Remaining IP Ejection Error....................................... MT-148
2.4.3 PC Board Check Flow.......................................................................... MT-224
03BC Side-Positioning Operation Error ....................................................... MT-150
2.4.4 HDD Check Flow .................................................................................. MT-226
03BF Side-Positioning Grip Operation Error .............................................. MT-152
2.4.5 Power Supply Unit Check Flow .......................................................... MT-228
03C0 Reading Preparation Conveyance Error ............................................ MT-156
2.4.6 Monitor Check Flow ............................................................................. MT-232
03C1 Reading Conveyance Error ................................................................. MT-158
2.5 IP Jam Handling Procedures ........................................................................... MT-234
03C2 Reading IP Leading-Edge Detection Error ........................................ MT-160
2.6 Checking for Improper IP Conveyance ........................................................... MT-245
03C6 Driving Shaft Grip Error/03C8 Driving Shaft Grip Release Error ..... MT-162
03CA Driving Shaft Grip Self-Diagnostics Error ......................................... MT-162
03C7 Driven Shaft Grip Release Error/03C9 Driven Shaft Grip Error ....... MT-164
03CB Driven Shaft Grip Self-Diagnostics Error .......................................... MT-164
03D1 After-Reading Conveyance Error ....................................................... MT-168
03D2 Switchback Conveyance Error ........................................................... MT-170
03D3 Before-Erasure Conveyance Error ..................................................... MT-172
03D4 Branch Path Changeover Guide Operation Error ............................. MT-174
03D5 Erasure Conveyance Error .................................................................. MT-176
05.30.2002 FM3405 (1) 05.30.2002 FM3405
Contents Maintenance Troubleshooting 0.10 Contents Maintenance Troubleshooting 0.11
BLANK PAGE
3. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Abnormal Images ...................................... MT-248

3.1 Troubleshooting for Scanner-Related Errors................................................. MT-248
3.2 Image Troubleshooting for Controller ............................................................ MT-255
3.3 Other Image Troubleshooting.......................................................................... MT-259
4. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Improper Operation ................................... MT-262
4.1 Remedy When Cassette Cannot be Removed ............................................... MT-262
4.2 Remedy When Machine Does Not Power Up ................................................. MT-263
4.3 Remedy When LED Is Not Lit........................................................................... MT-264
4.4 Remedy When System Goes Down Unexpectedly during Operation .......... MT-265
4.5 Main Numerical Values Used for Troubleshooting ........................................ MT-266
5. Machine Circuit Diagram ............................................................................................. MT-268
6. Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram .............................................................. MT-289
Appendix 1. Supplementary Information ............................................................................ MT_A1-1
Appendix 1.1 Setting of Error Code to be Captured for IO Trace ........................ MT_A1-1
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
Contents Maintenance Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts 0.12 Contents Maintenance Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts 0.13
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 5.13 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorbers of IP Removal Unit..................... MC-78
5.14 Checking and Replacing Elevation Changeover Guide .................................. MC-82
1. Document Map ................................................................................................................ MC-2 5.15 Replacing Vertical Conveyor Guide .................................................................. MC-84
6. Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor .............................................................................. MC-86
2. Common Procedures for Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment ............................. MC-4
6.1 Removing and Reinstalling Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor .................... MC-86
2.1 Turning ON/OFF High-Voltage Switch ................................................................ MC-4
6.2 Checking and Replacing Before-BCR IP Sensor (SC1) ................................... MC-88
2.2 Checking Various Sensors .................................................................................. MC-6
6.3 Checking and Replacing Convergence Standby IP Sensor (SC2) ................. MC-90
2.3 Clearing Backup Memory ................................................................................... MC-16
6.4 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Convergence Path Changeover
2.4 Setting Date and Time ........................................................................................ MC-18
Guide Drive Solenoid (SOLC1) .......................................................................... MC-92
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers ............................................................................. MC-20
6.5 Replacing Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor IP Transport Motor (MC1) ..... MC-94
4. Cassette Set Unit ........................................................................................................... MC-26 6.6 Replacing and Adjusting Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit .................................... MC-26 Drive Timing Belt ................................................................................................ MC-95
4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit ................................................. MC-28 6.7 Replacing Cleaning Roller ................................................................................. MC-97
4.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly ................................................ MC-30 6.8 Replacing Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor Rubber Rollers ...................... MC-99
4.4 Checking and Replacing Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 5, 9, 13).............. MC-32 6.9 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber-Attached Guide of
4.5 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 6, 10, 14) .. MC-34 Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor ................................................................. MC-100
4.6 Checking and Replacing Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 7, 11, 15).................. MC-38 7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit ................................................................. MC-106
4.7 Checking and Replacing Mammo/ST Sensors (SA4, 8, 12, 16) ...................... MC-40 8. Side-Positioning Conveyor......................................................................................... MC-110
4.8 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids (SOLA1-4) ... MC-42 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor ............................... MC-110
4.9 Checking and Replacing Elevation HP Sensor (SA17).................................... MC-47 8.2 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor (SD1)... MC-112
4.10 Replacing Inch/Metric Guides............................................................................ MC-49 8.3 Checking and Replacing Grip Release HP Sensor (SD2).............................. MC-114
4.11 Adjusting Movable Roll ...................................................................................... MC-50 8.4 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SD3) ......................... MC-116
4.12 Replacing Rubber Rollers of Cassette Set Unit ............................................... MC-55 8.5 Replacing Side-Positioning Motor (MD1) ....................................................... MC-118
4.13 Replacing Guide Plate of Cassette Set Unit ..................................................... MC-56 8.6 Replacing Grip Release Motor (MD2) .............................................................. MC-119
4.14 Mounting the Antistatic Member of the Shutter Section ............................ MC-59.21 8.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MD3)............................................................... MC-120
5. Up-Down IP Removal Unit ............................................................................................ MC-60 8.8 Replacing Barcode Reader (BCR) ................................................................... MC-121
5.1 Checking and Replacing Suction Cup HP Sensor (SB1) ................................ MC-60 8.9 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip Mechanism ...... MC-122
5.2 Checking and Replacing Cassette Inlet IP Sensor (SB2) ................................ MC-62 8.10 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Top Stopper............................... MC-124
5.3 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Each Shelf Position Sensor (SB3) ...... MC-64 8.11 Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip Release Timing Belt ................ MC-126
5.4 Checking and Adjusting Inch/Metric Sensor (SB4) ......................................... MC-66 8.12 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Side-Positioning Conveyor
5.5 Checking and Replacing Suction Sensor (SB5) .............................................. MC-67 IP Conveyance Timing Belt .............................................................................. MC-127
5.6 Replacing Suction Pump (PB1) ......................................................................... MC-68 8.13 Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Rubber Rollers ................................. MC-130
5.7 Replacing IP Leak Valve (SVB1) ........................................................................ MC-70 8.14 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorbers of Side-Positioning Conveyor MC-131
5.8 Replacing Suction Cups..................................................................................... MC-71
5.9 Replacing Suction Cup Drive Motor (MB1) ....................................................... MC-73
5.10 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MB2)................................................................. MC-75
5.11 Replacing Up-Down Drive Motor (MB3) ............................................................ MC-76
5.12 Replacing Elevation Timing Belt ....................................................................... MC-77
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
9. Scanning Optics Unit .................................................................................................. MC-132 12. Erasure Conveyor ....................................................................................................... MC-218
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width ............................................. MC-132 12.1 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Lamp Assembly ................................... MC-218
9.2 Shading/Sensitivity Correction........................................................................ MC-138 12.2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor......................................... MC-220
9.3 Removing and Reinstalling Scanning Optics Unit ..................................... MC-143.1 12.3 Checking and Replacing After-Reading Conveyance Standby
9.4 Checking and Replacing LD Assembly .......................................................... MC-145 IP Sensor (SF1) ................................................................................................. MC-222
9.5 Checking and Replacing Polygonal Mirror Assembly................................... MC-151 12.4 Checking and Replacing Changeover IP Sensor (SF2) ................................. MC-224
9.6 Checking and Replacing SYN08A Board ........................................................ MC-156 12.5 Checking and Replacing Load Standby IP Sensor (SF3) .............................. MC-226
10. Subscanning Unit ........................................................................................................ MC-162 12.6 Checking and Replacing Overrun IP Sensor (SF4)........................................ MC-228
12.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MF1) ............................................................... MC-230
10.1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board........................................................ MC-162
12.8 Checking and Replacing Erasure Lamp ......................................................... MC-231
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide .................................................................... MC-165
12.9 Replacing Thermal Switches (TSW1, TSW2) .................................................. MC-232
10.3 Checking and Replacing PMT08A Board........................................................ MC-174
12.10 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan (FANF1)........................................................ MC-234
10.4 Servicing Light-Collecting Mirror .................................................................... MC-180
12.11 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan Air Filter ....................................................... MC-235
10.5 Checking and Replacing IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1/SED08A) ............... MC-184
12.12 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Erasure Unit IP Conveyance
10.6 Checking and Replacing Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) ........ MC-186
Timing Belt ........................................................................................................ MC-236
10.7 Checking and Replacing Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3) ......... MC-187
12.13 Replacing Erasure Conveyor Rubber Rollers ................................................ MC-239
10.8 Checking and Replacing Subscanning Motor (MZ1) ..................................... MC-188
12.14 Checking and Replacing Branch Path Changeover Guide ........................... MC-240
10.9 Replacing Driving Shaft Grip Motor (MZ2) ..................................................... MC-190
12.15 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of Erasure Conveyor ................. MC-243
10.10 Replacing Driven Shaft Grip Motor (MZ3)....................................................... MC-191
13. Power Supply Unit ....................................................................................................... MC-252
10.11 Checking and Replacing SUS Belt/Rubber Belt/Tensioner .......................... MC-192
13.1 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Power Supply Unit .............................. MC-252
10.12 Checking and Replacing Kapton Belt/Tensioner/Flywheel ........................ MC-195
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses ................................................................................. MC-254
10.13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit........................ MC-199
10.14 Replacing Grip Arms ........................................................................................ MC-201 14. HDD .............................................................................................................................. MC-258
10.15 Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit .................................................. MC-202 14.1 Setting HDD ....................................................................................................... MC-258
10.16 Replacing Lower Rubber Rollers of Subscanning Unit ................................ MC-204 14.2 Replacing HDD .................................................................................................. MC-260
10.17 Replacing and Adjusting Shock-Absorbing Rubbers ................................... MC-205 14.3 Replacing the HDD (ST52160N/QM32100SE-S/WDE4550-003/
WDE9100-003/ST318416N) ............................................................................ MC-263.1
11. After-Reading Conveyor ............................................................................................. MC-208
15. FDD ............................................................................................................................... MC-264
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor ................................... MC-208
15.1 Setting FDD ....................................................................................................... MC-264
11.2 Checking and Replacing Grip Release HP Sensor (SE1) .............................. MC-213
15.2 Replacing FDD .................................................................................................. MC-265
11.3 Replacing Grip Release Motor (ME1) .............................................................. MC-215
11.4 Replacing IP Transport Motor (ME2) ............................................................... MC-216 16. Monitor ......................................................................................................................... MC-268
11.5 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of After-Reading Conveyor....... MC-217 16.1 Cleaning Monitor............................................................................................... MC-268
16.2 Replacing the Monitor ...................................................................................... MC-269
16.3 Monitor Fuse ..................................................................................................... MC-271
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
BLANK PAGE
17. PC Boards .................................................................................................................... MC-274

17.1 Board Arrangement Diagram ........................................................................... MC-274
17.2 MTH08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-275
17.3 MTH08D Board .................................................................................................. MC-277
17.4 CPU90E Board................................................................................................... MC-279
17.5 IMG07B Board ................................................................................................... MC-282
17.6 IMG08A Board ................................................................................................... MC-283
17.7 IMG08B/H Board................................................................................................ MC-284
17.8 DMC08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-285
17.9 HCP08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-286
17.10 CPU90F Board ................................................................................................... MC-287
17.11 LAN90B/D Board ............................................................................................... MC-289
17.12 DRV08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-290
17.13 SNS08A Board................................................................................................... MC-292
17.14 LED08A Board ................................................................................................... MC-294
17.15 LED08B Board ................................................................................................... MC-295
17.16 VOL08A Board................................................................................................... MC-295
17.17 BCR08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-296
17.18 FFM Board ......................................................................................................... MC-296
17.19 SCN08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-296
17.20 PMT08A Board .................................................................................................. MC-296
17.21 Removing and Installing the MTH08A/D, SNS08A, and DRV08A boards .... MC-297
18. Cleaning IP ................................................................................................................... MC-298
19. Tools ............................................................................................................................. MC-300
19.1 Standard Tools .................................................................................................. MC-300
19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments ..................................................... MC-304
19.3 Special Consumables ....................................................................................... MC-305
19.4 Semi-Standard Tools ........................................................................................ MC-306
19.5 Tools .................................................................................................................. MC-307
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.16 009-051-06

009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.17
08.31.2005 FM4710 04.20.2001
05.31.99 FM2460
FM3006
Contents Maintenance Maintenance Utility 0.18 Contents Maintenance Maintenance Utility 0.19
Maintenance Utility (MU) 7.12 NETMASKS (NETMASKS) ................................................................................. MU-62

7.13 DICOM (Base on DICOM)................................................................................... MU-63
1. Functional Organization of Service Utility ................................................................... MU-2 7.14 Backing Up Configuration File ......................................................................... MU-65
7.15 Network-Related Setup Example ...................................................................... MU-66
2. Maintenance Utility Mode Transition Diagrams ........................................................... MU-4
8. 3. TEST MODE: Operation Setup ................................................................................. MU-72
2.1 Mode Transitions in Normal State ....................................................................... MU-4
8.1 1.ROUTINE: Setting Operation Mode of Routine Processing ........................ MU-72
2.2 Mode Transitions upon Abnormality Occurrence ............................................ MU-5
8.2 2. AUTO MODE: Setting Operation Mode of Conveyance Test ..................... MU-72
3. How to Activate and Exit M-Utility ................................................................................ MU-6
9. 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY: Electrical Diagnostics ....................................................... MU-74
3.1 Activating M-Utility .............................................................................................. MU-6
3.2 Exiting M-Utility .................................................................................................... MU-9 9.1 1. ERASURE LAMP TEST: Erasure Lamp Turn-On Test ................................ MU-74
9.2 2. IMAGE MEMORY TEST: Image Memory Test .............................................. MU-74
4. Common Operating Procedures for M-Utility ............................................................ MU-10
9.3 3. DSP TEST: Self Diagnostics of Image Processing Board.......................... MU-74
4.1 Selecting a Menu................................................................................................ MU-10
9.4 4. LAN: LAN Test................................................................................................ MU-75
4.2 Quitting a Menu .................................................................................................. MU-11
9.5 5. HDD: HDD Test ............................................................................................... MU-77
4.3 Entering a Numerical Value .............................................................................. MU-12
9.6 6. FDD: FDD Test................................................................................................ MU-77
5. Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility ......................................................................................... MU-14
10. 5. SCANNER UTILITY: Scanner Diagnostics and Setting ......................................... MU-78
5.1 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility during Normal Operation ................................... MU-14
10.1 1. INITIALIZE: Initial Setting of Main-Scan System ......................................... MU-78
5.2 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Error.. MU-22
10.2 2. POLYGON: Polygon Stop/Rotation .............................................................. MU-78
6. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY: Error Log Utility .................................................................. MU-24
10.3 3. LASER: Laser ON/OFF .................................................................................. MU-78
6.1 1. LIST: Displaying Error Log ........................................................................... MU-24
10.4 4. HV: HV ON/OFF .............................................................................................. MU-79
6.2 2. CLEAR: Clearing Error Log........................................................................... MU-26
10.5 5. HV DATA: High-Voltage Setting ................................................................... MU-79
6.3 3. SAVE TO FD: Saving Error Log to Floppy Disk .......................................... MU-27
10.6 6. FORMAT: Setting Read Start Position and Read Width ............................. MU-80
6.4 4. SAVE TO HD: Saving Error Log to HD ......................................................... MU-28 10.7 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY
7. 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING: Configuration Utility ................................................ MU-30 : Setting Shading and Sensitivity Correction Data ......................................... MU-82
7.1 Editing Various Setup Files ............................................................................. MU- 31 10.8 8. DATA MANAGEMENT: Displaying Data Setup Values
and Writing to HD ............................................................................................... MU-84
7.2 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)........................................................................................ MU-33
10.9 9. DIAGNOSTIC: Self Diagnostics of Scanner................................................. MU-87
7.2.1 List of Setup Items for SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) .................................... MU-35
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Setting in Virtual Generation Mode
7.2.2 For Installation by Copying Configuration Files ........................... MU-41.10 for Image Signal ................................................................................................. MU-88
7.3 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) ...................................................................................... MU-42
11. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY: Mechanical Diagnostics .................................................. MU-90
7.4 Network-Related Setup Items ........................................................................... MU-51
11.1 1. INITIALIZE: Initialization of Motors, Actuators, and Sensors .................... MU-90
7.5 REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) ................................................................... MU-52
11.2 2. MOTOR: Operation Tests on Motor.............................................................. MU-91
7.6 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) ......................................................................................... MU-53
11.3 3. ACTUATOR: Operation Tests on Solenoids, Pumps, etc. ......................... MU-95
7.7 LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) ................................................................... MU-55
11.4 4. SENSOR: Operation Tests on Sensors........................................................ MU-97
7.8 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) ......................................................... MU-56 11.5 5. UNIT: 1. IP FEED/LOAD UNIT: Operation Tests on IP Removal
7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) .............................................................................. MU-58 Mechanism ......................................................................................................... MU-99
7.10 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) ............................................................................ MU-60 11.6 5. UNIT: 2. UP-DOWN UNIT: Operation Tests on Elevation Unit ................. MU-100
7.11 ROUTING (ROUTE) ............................................................................................ MU-61
08.31.2005 FM4710 03.20.2004 FM4275
Contents Maintenance Maintenance Utility 0.20 Contents Maintenance Maintenance Utility 0.21
11.7 5. UNIT: 3. SIDE-POSITIONING GRIP: Operation Tests 16. Software Installation Procedures ............................................................................. MU-154
on Side-Positioning Mechanism Grip ............................................................ MU-101 16.1 Installing the Software (Application).............................................................. MU-155
11.8 5. UNIT: 4. SIDE-POSITIONING UNIT: Operation Tests
16.2 Formatting Hard Disk ....................................................................................... MU-159
on Side-Positioning Mechanism..................................................................... MU-102
11.9 5. UNIT: 5. AFTER-READING GRIP: Operation Tests 16.3 Installing Menu Default FD for USA Setup File (Only for Use in USA/
on After-Reading Conveyor Grip .................................................................... MU-103 CSL Type) ......................................................................................................... MU-160
11.10 5. UNIT: 6. DRIVING GRIP: Operation Tests 17. List of Software Files ................................................................................................. MU-162
on Subscanning Driving Grip Mechanism..................................................... MU-104
17.1 SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ MU-162
11.11 5. UNIT: 7. DRIVEN GRIP: Operation Tests
17.2 LOG ................................................................................................................... MU-169
on Subscanning Driven Grip Mechanism ...................................................... MU-106
11.12 5. UNIT : 8. MIRROR UP/DOWN: Operation Tests
on Light-Collecting Mirror ............................................................................... MU-107
12. 7. FILE UTILITY: File Operation ................................................................................. MU-108
12.1 1. FORMAT FD: Formatting FD ....................................................................... MU-108
12.2 2. FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION
: Formatting HD Image Storage Partition ...................................................... MU-109
12.3 3. BACKUP: Backing Up Various Data........................................................... MU-110
12.4 4. RESTORE: Reading Various Data .............................................................. MU-116
12.5 5. EDR DATA: Saving EDR Calculation to FD ............................................... MU-121
12.6 6. PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE: Reverting Back to Previous Version
of System Software.......................................................................................... MU-123
12.7 7. EXECUTION: Loading and Executing File ................................................. MU-124
13. 8. BACKUP MEMORY: Backing Up Memory ............................................................. MU-126
14. 9. HV ON/OFF: High-Voltage Switch (Software Switch) .......................................... MU-128
15. 10. MENU SETTING: Menu Setting ........................................................................... MU-130
15.1 1. LIST: Displaying Menu ................................................................................ MU-133
15.2 2. MOVE: Changing Menu Display Location ................................................. MU-135
15.3 3. ROUTINE: Registering and Deleting (Disselecting) Routine Menu ......... MU-139
15.4 4. EDIT: Editing Menu Names and Various Parameters ............................... MU-143
15.5 5. COPY: Copying Menu .................................................................................. MU-146
15.6 6. DELETE: Deleting Menu .............................................................................. MU-148
15.7 7. FILMMARK: Editing Film Mark.................................................................... MU-150
009-051-10 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.20 009-051-10

009-051-06 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.21
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM3006
04.20.2001 FM4275
Contents Service Parts List 0.22 Contents Service Parts List 0.23
Service Parts List (SP) INDEX 10A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 ..................................................................................... SP-80
INDEX 10B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 ..................................................................................... SP-82
INDEX 01A COVER 1 ............................................................................................................... SP-8 INDEX 10C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 ..................................................................................... SP-84
INDEX 01B COVER 2 ............................................................................................................. SP-12 INDEX 11 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT .................................................................................. SP-86
INDEX 01C COVER 3 ............................................................................................................. SP-16 INDEX 12A CONTROLLER 1 ................................................................................................. SP-88
INDEX 02A FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 1 ............................................................................ SP-18 INDEX 12B CONTROLLER 2 ................................................................................................. SP-90
INDEX 02B FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 2 ............................................................................ SP-20 INDEX 12C CONTROLLER 3 ................................................................................................. SP-94
INDEX 03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 ..................................................................................... SP-22 INDEX 13 OPTION ............................................................................................................... SP-96
INDEX 03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 ..................................................................................... SP-24 INDEX 14 CABLE ................................................................................................................. SP-98
INDEX 03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 ..................................................................................... SP-26 INDEX 15 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................. SP-102
INDEX 04A UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 1 ........................................................................ SP-28 INDEX 16 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ........................................................................ SP-112
INDEX 04B UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 2 ........................................................................ SP-30 INDEX 17 TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS .......................... SP-122
INDEX 04C UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 3 ........................................................................ SP-34 INDEX 18 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS .................................................................. SP-123
INDEX 04D UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 4 ........................................................................ SP-36
INDEX 04E UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 5 ........................................................................ SP-38
INDEX 04F UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 6 ........................................................................ SP-40
INDEX 04G UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 7 ........................................................................ SP-42
INDEX 05A BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 ................................................... SP-44
INDEX 05B BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 ................................................... SP-46
INDEX 05C BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 ................................................... SP-48
INDEX 05D BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 ................................................... SP-50
INDEX 05E BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 ................................................... SP-52
INDEX 06A SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 ................................................................... SP-54
INDEX 06B SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 ................................................................... SP-56
INDEX 06C SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 ................................................................... SP-58
INDEX 06D SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 ................................................................... SP-60
INDEX 06E SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 ................................................................... SP-62
INDEX 07A AFTER-READING CONVEYOR 1 ....................................................................... SP-64
INDEX 07B AFTER-READING CONVEYOR 2 ....................................................................... SP-66
INDEX 07C AFTER-READING CONVEYOR 3 ....................................................................... SP-68
INDEX 08A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ................................................................................... SP-70
INDEX 08B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ................................................................................... SP-72
INDEX 08C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ................................................................................... SP-74
INDEX 08D ERASURE CONVEYOR 4 ................................................................................... SP-76
INDEX 09 LAMP UNIT ......................................................................................................... SP-78
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Contents Preventive Maintenance 0.24 Contents Preventive Maintenance 0.25
Preventive Maintenance (PM) (separate manual) 3.32 Setting Date and Time ....................................................................................... PM-82
3.33 Clearing Error Log ............................................................................................. PM-84
3.34 Turning ON High-Voltage Switch (Software Switch) ...................................... PM-85
1. Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................................ PM-2
3.35 Checking Image ................................................................................................. PM-86
2. Preventive Maintenance Programs by Intervals .......................................................... PM-4
3.36 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ................................................. PM-87
3. Details of Procedures .................................................................................................... PM-6
4. XXXX.............................................................................................................................. PM-88
3.1 Checking Error Log ............................................................................................. PM-6
3.2 Checking Image ................................................................................................... PM-7
3.3 Cleaning FD Drive and Magnetic Card Reader................................................ PM-12
3.4 Turning OFF High-Voltage Switch (Software Switch) .................................... PM-13
3.5 Removing Covers .............................................................................................. PM-14
3.6 Replacing Air Filters .......................................................................................... PM-16
3.7 Pulling Out Tray of Cassette Set Unit .............................................................. PM-17
3.8 Removing Cassette Set Unit ............................................................................. PM-18
3.9 Cleaning Suction Cups...................................................................................... PM-19
3.10 Replacing Suction Cups.................................................................................... PM-20
3.11 Replacing Suction Pump (PB1) ........................................................................ PM-22
3.12 Checking Shock Absorbers of IP Removal Unit ............................................. PM-24
3.13 Checking Shock Absorber Located Under Vertical Conveyor ...................... PM-28
3.14 Checking Shock Absorbers of Vertical Conveyor .......................................... PM-29
3.15 Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit .......................................................................... PM-31
3.16 Pushing in Tray of Cassette Set Unit ............................................................... PM-32
3.17 Checking Shock Absorbers of Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor .............. PM-33
3.18 Replacing Cleaning Roller ................................................................................ PM-39
3.19 Cleaning Erasure Lamp Assembly and Erasure Conveyor Filter................... PM-41
3.20 Replacing Erasure Lamps ................................................................................. PM-43
3.21 Checking Shock Absorbers of Erasure Conveyor.......................................... PM-44
3.22 Checking Shock Absorber Located Under Erasure Conveyor ...................... PM-51
3.23 Checking and Cleaning Subscanning Unit Belts ............................................ PM-54
3.24 Checking Vibration-Proof Rubbers .................................................................. PM-57
3.25 Pulling Out Scanner Unit................................................................................... PM-58
3.26 Cleaning Light-Collecting Guide and Light-Collecting Mirror ....................... PM-60
3.27 Checking Shock Absorber of After-reading Conveyor .................................. PM-66
3.28 Checking Shock Absorbers of Side-Positioning Conveyor........................... PM-72
3.29 Pushing in Scanner Unit ................................................................................... PM-75
3.30 Cleaning Rubber Rollers ................................................................................... PM-77
3.31 Reinstalling and Cleaning Covers .................................................................... PM-79
11.20.99 FM2638 08.31.2005 FM4710
Contents Installation 0.26 Contents Installation 0.27
Installation (IN) 5. Temporary Placement ..................................................................................................... IN-70

5.1 Unloading, Transfer, and Unpacking .................................................................. IN-70
1. How Installation Volume Is Organized ............................................................................. IN-2 5.2 Checking the Items Supplied ............................................................................... IN-75
2. Determination of System Configuration ......................................................................... IN-8 5.2.1 Machine main body.................................................................................. IN-75
5.2.2 Separate packaged items ........................................................................ IN-76
2.1 Connectable Peripherals and Software Versions ................................................ IN-8
5.2.3 Options ..................................................................................................... IN-77
2.2 Information on Optional Boards for CR-IR341 ................................................... IN-10
5.3 Temporary Placement Procedures...................................................................... IN-77
2.3 Basic Pattern of System Configuration .............................................................. IN-11
2.3.1 Pattern Where IDT-IV Is Connected to CPU90E .................................... IN-13 6. Installation ....................................................................................................................... IN-78
2.3.2 Pattern Where IDT-IV Is Connected to CPU90F .................................... IN-14 6.1 Work Flow .............................................................................................................. IN-78
2.3.3 Pattern Where CR-IR348CL is Connected to LAN90B .......................... IN-15 6.2 Unclamping and Installing Separate Packaged Items (Except for Boards) .... IN-79
2.4 IDT Type and CSL Type .................................................................................... IN-15.1 6.2.1 Removal of Covers .................................................................................. IN-80
3. Determination of Configuration Information ................................................................ IN-16 6.2.2 Procedures at Cassette Set Unit and Up-Down IP Removal Unit ........ IN-82
3.1 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)........................................................................................... IN-22 6.2.3 Procedures at Erasure Conveyor and Before-Side-Positioning
Conveyor .................................................................................................. IN-91
3.1.1 List of Setup Items of SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) ........................................ IN-24
6.2.4 Procedures at Side-Positioning Conveyor, Subscanning Unit,
3.1.2 Setup Items of SYSTEM to be Changed for Second and
and Power Supply Unit ............................................................................ IN-93
Subsequent Machines .......................................................................... IN-35.3
6.2.5 Procedures at Scanner Unit .................................................................... IN-98
3.2 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) ...................................................................................... IN-35.4
6.2.6 Procedures at Controller ....................................................................... IN-108
3.2.1 List of Setup Items of PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) ....................................... IN-36
6.2.7 Unclamping Check List ......................................................................... IN-110
3.3 REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) ...................................................................... IN-42
6.3 Setting and Installing Boards ............................................................................ IN-111
3.4 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) ............................................................................................ IN-43
6.3.1 MTH08A Board or MTH08D Board ........................................................ IN-111
3.5 LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) ...................................................................... IN-45
6.3.2 MMC90A Board or DIM08A Board ........................................................ IN-114
3.6 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) ............................................................ IN-46
6.3.3 CPU90E board ..................................................................................... IN-115.1
3.7 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) ................................................................................. IN-48
6.3.4 IMG07B board......................................................................................... IN-116
3.8 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) ............................................................................... IN-50
6.3.5 CPU90F board or LAN90B board .......................................................... IN-118
3.9 ROUTING (ROUTE) ............................................................................................... IN-51
6.3.6 HCP08A board ........................................................................................ IN-121
3.10 NETMASKS (NETMASKS) .................................................................................... IN-52
6.3.7 DMC08A board ....................................................................................... IN-123
3.11 DICOM (Base on DICOM)................................................................................... IN-53.1
6.3.8 IMG08B/H board ..................................................................................... IN-126
3.12 List of Setup Items Related to Network and Setup Examples .......................... IN-54
6.3.9 IMG08A board......................................................................................... IN-128
4. Preparation for Installation Environment ...................................................................... IN-62 6.3.10 Installing Board Retaining Plate ........................................................ IN-129.1
4.1 Specifications of Machine .................................................................................... IN-62 6.4 Cable Wiring Diagram......................................................................................... IN-130
4.1.1 Machine Moving and Fixing Means ........................................................ IN-64 6.4.1 Interface Cables ..................................................................................... IN-130
4.1.2 Environmental Requirements ................................................................. IN-64 6.5 Preparations for Power ON ................................................................................ IN-131
4.1.3 Electrical Specifications .......................................................................... IN-65 6.6 Turning ON the Power ........................................................................................ IN-134
4.2 Preinstallation Work ............................................................................................. IN-66 6.7 Measuring and Adjusting Voltage ..................................................................... IN-137
4.3 Tools Used............................................................................................................. IN-68 6.8 Clearing Backup Memory ................................................................................... IN-138
6.9 Setting Date and Time ........................................................................................ IN-140
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Contents Installation 0.28 Contents Installation 0.29
7. Setting Configuration File ............................................................................................ IN-142 Appendix 1. Worksheet for Determination of System Configuration ............................... IN_A1-1
7.1 Installing Configuration File .............................................................................. IN-143 Appendix 2. For Determination of Configuration Information .......................................... IN_A2-1
7.2 Editing Configuration Files ................................................................................ IN-147 Appendix 2.1 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) ............................................................. IN_A2-1
7.3 Backing Up Configuration File .......................................................................... IN-150 Appendix 2.2 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) .......................................................... IN_A2-15
7.4 Resetting Machine .............................................................................................. IN-153 Appendix 3. Common Information about M-Utility............................................................. IN_A3-1
8. Final Installation and Checks ....................................................................................... IN-154 Appendix 3.1 How to Activate M-Utility ......................................................... IN_A3-1
Appendix 3.2 How to Exit M-Utility ................................................................ IN_A3-3
8.1 Checking IP Conveyance in M-Utility ................................................................ IN-154
Appendix 3.3 Common Operations in M-Utility ............................................ IN_A3-4
8.2 Reinstalling Covers ............................................................................................ IN-157
Appendix 3.3.1 How to Select Menu ..................................... IN_A3-4
8.3 Final Placement................................................................................................... IN-158
Appendix 3.3.2 How to Quit Menu ....................................... IN_A3-5
8.4 Checks after Machine Startup ........................................................................... IN-161
Appendix 3.3.3 How to Enter Numeral Value ....................... IN_A3-6
8.5 Checking Interface Operation ............................................................................ IN-162
Appendix 4. Requirements Regarding Locally Obtained Parts ....................................... IN_A4-1
8.6 Checking Image and Adjusting Image Requirements ..................................... IN-163
Appendix 5. Settings on Units Interfaced .......................................................................... IN_A5-1
8.7 Checking and Deleting Error Logs That Occur during Setup......................... IN-168
Appendix 5.1 Settings on IDT-IV .................................................................... IN_A5-1
8.8 Checking Machine Shutdown ............................................................................ IN-169
Appendix 5.2 Settings on DMS Unit .............................................................. IN_A5-1
8.9 Cleaning Covers.................................................................................................. IN-170
Appendix 6. Installing Optional Software ........................................................................... IN_A6-1
8.10 Attachment of Labels ......................................................................................... IN-171
Appendix 7. *** ...................................................................................................................... IN_A7-1
Appendix 7.1 ***.............................................................................................. IN_A7-1
Appendix 7.2 ***............................................................................................ IN_A7-19
Appendix 8. Menu Editor Settings ....................................................................................... IN_A8-1
Appendix 9. Procedures for Connecting with CR Console (CR-IR348CL) ....................... IN_A9-1
Performance check (PC)

Installation of the FCR5000/5000plus - Checklist ........................................................ PC-2
11.20.99 FM2638 07.25.2003 FM4086
How Service Manual Is Organized 0.30 How Service Manual Is Organized 0.31
Paper Manual
How Service Manual Is Organized The Service Manual consists of the following four volumes.
<Maintenance Volume>
This Service Manual is available in two forms: electronic manual and paper manual. The Machine Description
contents described are the same, but how to access the information is different. See either Describes the summary of the machine (CR-IR341).
Electronic Manual or Paper Manual for their respective interface, depending on the
media you refer to. Troubleshooting
Describes the troubleshooting methods and servicing procedures.
Electronic Manual (currently not available) Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
An electronic version of the manual is supplied in the form of PDF data. Before consulting Describes the procedures for servicing in steps.
the electronic manual, familiarize yourself with the following matters.
Maintenance Utility
About PDF Describes the functional organization of Service Utility.
An electronic version of the manual is distributed as a PDF (Portable Document Format) file. <Service Parts Volume>
PDF is an electronic document file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc., and can be Describes the service part lists and exploded views, as well as how to read the
read with a commercially available PDF viewer. service parts lists.
<Preventive Maintenance Volume>
About Acrobat Reader
Describes the procedures for preventive maintenance.
The CD-ROM that contains electronic manuals also contains Adobe Systems Acrobat
Reader as a their PDF viewer. <Installation Volume>
To view an electronic manual, use Acrobat Reader bundled. If any PDF viewer other than Describes the specifications of the machine, installation requirements and proce-
Acrobat Reader is used, the image displayed on screen or printed out may differ from the dures, and checkpoints after installation, which are required for installation prepara-
original. tion and installation.
The recommended operating environments for running Acrobat Reader alone are as follows.
How To Search
Refer to the table of contents and document map.
Version: Acrobat Reader 3.0 or later
In order to facilitate efficient search for a desired item in the paper version of the
CPU: Pentium 133 MHz or faster processor
manual, a document map is provided in addition to the table of contents.
OS: Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0
The document map is illustratively organized so that you can visually find a location
Free memory: at least 16MB of RAM after startup of Windows NT where your desired information is described.
(at least 32 MB of RAM recommended) Open a desired chapter by referring to the chapter icon on the header.
Display: at least 800x600 dots, with color depth of at least 256 colors The header contains chapter icons to indicate the chapter where the current page is
CD-ROM drive: at least 4x speed (8x or higher speed recommended) located; the highlighted number corresponds to the chapter number for each volume.
Disk capacity: at least 5MB of free space after startup of Windows NT On the hardcopy version of the manual, you can browse pages with reference to the
chapter icon to access your desired chapter quickly.
Installing Acrobat Reader On the electronic version of the manual, you can skip pages with reference to the
For installation of Acrobat Reader, see the Read Me file in the CD-ROM that contains chapter icon to access your desired chapter quickly.
electronic manuals. If the version of Acrobat Reader is older than 3.0, the electronic manual Section number on the footer
cannot be viewed or, if it can be viewed, its specific features may not be guaranteed. Refer-
In the footer, a section number for that page is indicated.
ring to the Read Me file, install a proper version of Acrobat Reader.
On the hardcopy version of the manual, you can browse pages with reference to the
footer to access your desired section quickly.
On the electronic version of the manual, you can skip pages with reference to the
chapter icon to access your desired section quickly.
Supplementary Note about Machine Name

It should be understood in the Service Manual that the CR-IR341 is the same as the
FCR5000.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Organizational Differences from Preceding Manuals 9000 series CR-IR341 Remarks

The CR-IR341 service manual substantially differs from the preceding (9000 Series and
other) manuals in organizational structure. Structural changes have been made for the Chapter Z7 Circuit Diagrams
following three purposes. Maintenance Volume: Compiled as one Description of
To provide increased compactness. Appendix 1 Mechanical Control Flows Machine Description Machine article in the Maintenance
7. Descriptions of Operaions Volume.
To provide increased handling ease. 8. Mechanical Control Flow
To furnish additional information for reducing the downtime. Appendix 2 Troubleshooting Flows Troubleshooting Compiled as one Troubleshooting
As a result of the structural changes, the service manual is now divided into the following 4. Troubleshooting Procedures article in the Maintenance Volume.
Appendix 3 Error Messages Based on Error Codes
four volumes. 5. Machine Circuit Diagram
Maintenance Volume, Service Parts Volume, Preventive Maintenance Volume, Compiled as one Description of
Appendix 4 Descriptions of Mechanism 6. Power Supply Circuit Diagram
Machine article. Electrical system
Installation Volume Operations and scanner operations are also
The structural changes are detailed below. covered.
Appendix 5 Problems and Remedies
9000 series CR-IR341 Remarks
TR1B1014.EPS
Chapter A Installation Planning Installation Volume:
1. How Installation Volume Is Organized Compiled in a single volume
Chapter B Installation 2. Determination of System Configuration entitled Installation .
3. Determination of System Configuration Instructions are given on the
Chapter C Setting to Work Information presumption that they are
4. Preparation for Installation
Environment sequentially followed.
Chapter D Acceptance
5. Temporary Placement
6. Installation
7. Setting Configuration File
8. Final Installation and Checks
Compiled as an independent
chapter in the Maintenance Volume.
Chapter E Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Volume: Instructions are given on the
presumption that they are
sequentially followed.
Chapter F1 Error Code Maintenance Volume:

Troubleshooting Compiled under the error
2. Troubleshooting Procedures category in the Maintenance
Chapter F2 Image Troubleshooting
Based on Error Codes Volume. Software files are listed
Chapter F3 Abnormal Events 3. Troubleshooting Procedures under Maintenance Data .
Based on Abnormal Images
Chapter F4 Mechanical Parts (Checks/ 4. Troubleshooting Procedures
Replacement/ Adjustment) Based on Improper Operation The checks, adjustment, and
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment replacement procedures to be
Chapter F5 Electrical Parts (Checks/ of Parts performed for maintenance are
Replacement/ Adjustment) Maintenance Utility described in the form of reference
information.
Chapter F6 Scaning Optics Parts (Checks/
Replacement/ Adjustment)
Chapter F7 Service Modes The details of functions are given.
Compiled as one Troubleshooting

Chapter F8 IP Jams
article in the Maintenance Volume.
Chapter P Parts List Service Parts Volume: Consumables and search table are
added.
Maintenance Volume:
Compiled as one Checks,
Chapter Z1 Tool List Checks, Adjustment,
Adjustment, and Replacement
and Replacement of Parts
article in the Maintenance Volume.
15. Tools
Installation Volume:
Chapter Z2 Cable Connection Diagrams 6. Installation
6.4 Cable Wiring Diagram
Chapter Z3 I/O Layout Drawings Maintenance Volume:

Machine Description
Chapter Z4 Covers and Units Removal 11. Interlock
and Reinstallation
Checks, Adjustment,
and Replacement of Parts Compiled as one Description of
Chapter Z5 Interlock Machine article in the Maintenance
Volume.
Installation Volume:
6. Installation
Chapter Z6 Board Settings Maintenance Volume:
Checks, Adjustment,
and Replacement of Parts
16 Setting Boards and HDD
TR1B1000.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Reading the Maintenance Volume upon Failure Occurrence Remedies based on mechanical control flows
When a failure (error) occurs in the machine, take appropriate remedial action depending on 8. Mechanical Control Flows in Machine Description Volume
the purpose. The Mechanical Control Flows section furnishes flowcharts to detail the machine
To achieve prompt machine recovery operations and describe the error occurrence timing. Note the mechanical control
flowcharts to determine the machine operations performed at the time of error occur-
Remedies based on troubleshooting flows
rence and investigate the error cause.
To analyze the error cause or prevent an error recurrence
Remedies based on mechanical control flows SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
To check for improper operations When initiating a troubleshooting operation in accordance with the generated error code, refer
to the 8.7 Index of Error Codes at the end of 8. Mechanical Control Flows in Machine De-
Remedies based on descriptions of operations scription Volume.
Remedies based on troubleshooting flows

Remedies based on descriptions of operations
2.4 Troubleshooting Flows in Troubleshooting
7. Descriptions of Operations in Machine Description Volume
The Troubleshooting Flows section enables you to restore the machine to normal by
The Descriptions of Operations section furnishes diagrams to explain about the
performing the procedures indicated by the flowchart that is related to the encountered
normal operations and functions of various machine components. Read the relevant
error (error code).
descriptions of operations to check whether the machine normally operates.
The steps to be performed are outlined below.
Maintenance Space
(1) Confirm the generated error code. When performing maintenance procedures, secure sufficient space for that purpose.
Note the error code displayed on the operation panel. Height: 1900 or more
(2) Note the Index at the beginning of Troubleshooting Flows section and search for the
recovery procedure for the error code. 700 or more
Rear
The recovery procedures are set forth in numerical order.
(3) Estimate the cause of the error, with reference to the Cause in the Troubleshooting
Flows.
600 or more Machine 700 or more
The Troubleshooting Flows describe the following information.
Cause
Error-related I/O locations
Front
Error-related system block diagram 700 or more
(4) Restore the machine to normal by following the flow chart that is indicated in the Unit: mm
FR1H4029.EPS
Troubleshooting.
When replacing or adjusting parts, refer to the following sections.
Replacement parts confirmation
Service Parts List Volume
Parts replacement and adjustment
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
If the machine cannot be restored to normal by performing the specified procedures, report
the employed procedures and results to the Service Headquarters to make a request for
analysis.
Even if the machine has been restored to normal by performing procedures other than those
which are set forth in the Troubleshooting Flows, report the employed procedures, progress,
and results to the Service Headquarters. Such reports will be utilized for future service
manual improvement and machine serviceability enhancement.
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
Safety Labels 0.36 Safety Labels 0.37
List of Labels
Safety Labels
HHS Certification and Identification Label
1. Laser Precaution Labels
Label Attachment Locations CR-IR341P
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
Below are illustrated the protective housings and laser precaution labels specified in Part 1- 26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU,
TOKYO 106-8620, JAPAN
J, Federal Regulations Code Title 21 issued by the FDA of the U.S.
MODEL CR-IR 341P
SERIAL No.
MANUFACTURED
FIT
This product complies with

21 CFR Chapter 1. Subchapter J.
FR1B1261.EPS
CR-IR341
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU,
MODEL CR-IR 341

SERIAL No.
MANUFACTURED
FPE
This product complies with
21 CFR Chapter 1. Subchapter J.
HHS Label #1 FR1B1043.EPS
HHS Label #1 HHS Label #2

HHS Label #1 DANGER
EN 60825-1: 1996 DANGER Laser radiation
Class 3B Panel Label Laser radiation when open when open external cover
HHS Label #2
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
FR1B1046.EPS
EN 60825-1:1996 FR1B1045.EPS
Class 3B Panel Label

EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 1 Product Label
FR1B1067.EPS
HHS Certification and

Identification Label
HHS Label #1 EN 60825-1: 1996
Class 3B Panel Label
EN 60825-1: 1996 HHS Label #1
Class 3B Panel Label EN 60825-1: 1996
Class 1 Product Label FR1B1044.EPS
HHS Label #2
FR1B1068.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.30.2002 FM3405
Safety Labels 0.38 Safety Labels 0.39
EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 3B Panel Label List of Labels
Ratings Indication Label
CR-IR341P
Manufacturer FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU

MODEL CRIR 341P
SN
405N2895
FR1B1262E.EPS
CR-IR341
Manufacturer FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU
FR1B1047.EPS
2. Labels MODEL CRIR341
50-60Hz
Label Attachment Locations 120-240V~
Left-hand side 6.7-3.3A
SN
405N 2313A
FR1B1142.EPS
Manufacturer Label
Ratings Indication FR1B1039.EPS

Label
Manufacturer Acceptance Label
Label
EXAMINED
GOOD
Acceptance Electric Shock
Label Warning Label FUJI KIKI
FR1B1038.EPS
FR1B1035.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 03.20.2004 FM4275
Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure 0.40 Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure 0.41
Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit

Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure
The removable protective housing for the scanning optics unit is illustrated below.
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, laser beams will never leak Note that the single piece marked by in the illustration below represents a protective
out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical housing against laser exposure.
path is changed inadvertently during optics-related installation, the person in charge of
installation or other people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation.
During optics-related installation, carefully perform the procedures while checking the in-
Top cover
structions described in this manual, and after the installation procedures are completed,
restore the protective housings removed back exactly where they were.
Protective Housings of Machine

The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below.
The four covers marked by in the illustration below are protective housings against laser
exposure.
Upper rear cover

Upper left-hand side cover
Lower rear cover

Lower left-hand side cover
Upper front
cover
Upper right-hand FR1B1049.EPS

side cover
Lower right-hand
side cover
Lower front cover Lower inner front cover

FR1B1048.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Maintenance Volume Machine Description (MD) Control Sheet MD - 1
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
05/31/99 04 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages
(FM2460)
04/20/2001 05 Corrections (FM3006) MD-12, 14, 34, 36, 53, 61, 102,
124, 128, 129, 136, 140, 164,

165, 172175, 175.1, 175.2
CR-IR341/CR-IR341P 08/30/2001 07 Additional information for LAN board

(FM3115)
MD-12, 34, 36
05/30/2002 08 Additions of software terms and MD-17, 55.155.8, 132, 133, 148,
Service Manual definitions and other information
(FM3405)
149, 157, 179, 186189,
189.1189.4, 192
03/20/2004 10 LAN board/MTH board information MD-12, 15, 3436, 45, 136, 186,
additions and typographical error 189.1, 189.4
corrections (FM4275)
08/31/2005 11 Revision (FM4710) MD-56, 57, 59, 62, 67, 71, 74, 77,
82, 89, 9294, 96, 98, 103105,
107109, 116, 117, 119, 120,
Machine Description (MD) 135, 138, 140, 143145,

151154, 156, 158166, 171,
172, 174, 192199
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 1

08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 2 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 3
1. Overall Configuration and Nomenclature of 1.2 Configuration of Machine

Machine
Controller
FRONT
1.1 External View of Machine
T
ON
FR
UP-down IP
removal unit (B)
Cassette set unit (A)
IP removal
unit (B)
Multi-stage cassette
loading unit (T) Vertical conveyor (B)
Before-side-positioning
conveyor (C)
Erasure conveyor (F)
Power supply unit
T
ON
FR Light-collecting
FR1H1221.EPS
guide assembly
Scanning optics unit

Side-positioning
conveyor (D)
Subscanning unit
After-reading (Z)
conveyor (E)
Housing (G)
NOTE: An alphabet in parentheses denotes a unit symbol. FR1H1222.EPS
009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 2 009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 3

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 4 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MD - 5
2. Features of Machine 2.2 Image Network I/F Option

The CR-IR341 comes standard with an Ethernet interface for an ID network. In addition, a
2.1 Features of Mechanical Mechanism high-speed image network interface option for an image network may be installed.
Reading and erasure are performed simultaneously Hardware Specs

The CR-IR341 employs the DPR-CS (Dual Pass Reader with Cassette Stack) scheme to IEEE802.3 (10Base-TX)
perform simultaneous reading and erasure. IEEE802.3u (10Base-TX) auto-sensing & switching
Two changeover guides are provided in the IP conveyance path, and conveyance paths
other than for reading and erasure are shared.
Hardware
Compression/decompression board (HCP08A)
High-output LD for enhanced image quality
Network I/F board (CPU90F)
Because a high-output LD is used to achieve enhanced image quality. The CR-IR341 with
standard specifications retains image quality equivalent to the high-resolution mode of the Software Specs
FCR9000 series.
FINP (Fuji Integrated Network Protocol)
Each component in the scanning optics unit can be replaced Base on DICOM (OEM Network Protocol)
The scanning optics unit is structured so that the polygon assembly and LD assembly within
the unit can be replaced on an assembly-by-assembly basis.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
3. New Parts with Better Serviceability 3.2 Snap-fit Pinion Gears Employed
The employed pinion gears can be easily installed and removed without using clamps or
The CR-IR341 employs new parts with better serviceability. They should be handled in a tools.
different manner than with conventional parts. When servicing the CR-IR341 for the first
time, check the mechanisms of such new parts and their locations. The pinion gear has two latches, such that it is secured in place by snapping the protruding
portions of the latches into the notches of the shaft. For removal, pull out the pinion gear with
its two latches extended outward. For installation, slowly insert the pinion gear into the shaft
3.1 E-ringless Housing Employed until the protruding portions of the latches snap into the notches of the shaft.
NOTE
The employed housing (bearing incorporated) permits fastening to the side plates without
using E-rings which inconvenience installation and removal operations. When putting the pinion gear onto the shaft, use care not to confuse the orientation of the
pinion gear. If it is put onto the shaft in a wrong way, the latch for preventing the removal of
FRONT the pinion gear will be damaged.
Cassette set unit IP removal unit
E-ringless housing Shaft Pinion gear
Pinion gear
Latch Shaft
Vertical conveyor
Latch
: Location employed
OK NG
Before-side-positioning FR1H1494.EPS
conveyor
FRONT
IP removal
unit
Snap-fit pinion gear
Erasure conveyor FR1H4024.EPS
Latch
Vertical
conveyor
: Location employed
Before-side-
positioning
conveyor

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
3.3 Simple Bearing Employed 3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment
As a bearing for a shaft onto which relatively less load is applied, a plastic bearing that is For a timing belt that needs to be replaced during removal of a unit, a tensioner that permits
easy to install and remove is employed. the tension to be automatically adjusted by the spring force is employed.
Bearing
Procedures for removing the timing belt
FRONT Before-side- (1) Loosen the tensioner retaining screw.
positioning conveyor
The tensioner becomes movable.
(2) With the tensioner pushed to the loosened screw, secure it in place by tightening the
screw.
(3) Remove the timing belt.
Vertical conveyor
: Location employed
Timing belt
Loosen
screw Tensioner
Before-side-
positioning
conveyor
FRONT
Timing belt Tensioner
Vertical conveyor
Loosen
screw
Erasure conveyor Before-side-

Before-side- Erasure conveyor
positioning conveyor FR1H1226.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Procedures for installing the timing belt 3.5 Sensor Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position
(1) Install the timing belt.
(2) Loosen the tensioner retaining screw, and flick the timing belt two or three times with Because a snap-on type sensor that is secured onto the bracket with its four latches is
your fingers. employed, displacement of its mounting position is less likely, as compared to a screwed-
down type of sensor. As a result, inconvenience associated with its positioning is mitigated.
The tensioner is pulled by the spring force to the state where the tension of the
timing belt is adjusted. It may be somewhat difficult to snap in the latches during installation of the sensor, but it can
be snapped in more easily by pushing the latches with a 150-mm rule as illustrated below.
(3) Secure the tensioner in place by tightening the screw.
CAUTION
Vertical conveyor
Timing belt Mount the sensor exercising care not to bend its claws.
Tighten
screw Tensioner
Before-side-
positioning Sensor
Steel rule
conveyor
FRONT
Timing belt Tensioner
Vertical conveyor
Tighten
screw
Latch
Before-side- Erasure conveyor
Before-side- Erasure conveyor FR1H1227.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 12
4. System Block Diagram
LP ODF/HIC Network (DMS/IDT)
to power Serial/Ether
IDT
alternative
Ethernet
supply
option
E i/f
remote
E i/f
control
MODEM
External
Image Image Image Compress/ Network I/F VGA monitor
processing processing processing FDD option
(DMS i/f) decompress board
board board board option board option CPU board
option option option option CPU90F/ HDD
DMC08A CPU90E
IMG08A IMG08B/H IMG08H HCP08A LAN90B
Motherboard Shared memory SCSI i/f
MTH08A/D MMC90A/DIM08A Packing/unpacking
5V 12V 12V
Immunity shield area
EDR
reduction/ Scanner unit
FAN
CRT Scanner-related boards
reduction
LED08A IMG07B PMT
SHD
correction LD driver
VGA interface
Digital image data Start-point detection
POL driver Leading-edge detection Display CRT
Sensor FFM driver M
board
SNS08A M M Grip/mirror up-down (SPR)
DC motor
5V Touch panel
Power Drive unit
from CPU90E Driver
Supply M M M
remote board Panel unit
15V
DRV08A
24V SOL SOL
JPS1
P SV
IDT type
FAN Bar Code Reader
AC100/200V
remote Serial line & power supply
Fuse
LED08B*4
S S S
24V
Erasure unit
Unlit lamp sensor signal
Erasure driver
FAN
Instant-OFF thermo switch
FR1H1134.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 13
BLANK PAGE
05.31.99 FM2460
MD - 15
5. I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions 5.2 I/O List (Sensor)

Unit Symbol Name Panel display Type Function/Remarks
5.1 I/O Location Diagram Cassette set
unit (A)
SA2, 6, 10, 14 Cassette IN sensor When the cassette
has been inserted
MS Recognizes the status in pair with SA3, 7, 11,
and 15
with the cassette
hold sensor OFF:
FANG1 ON (1)
SA4, 8, 12, 16 Mammo/ST sensor For mammo MS Detects mammo and ST cassette types.
SA1 cassette: ON (1)
SA4 SA3, 7, 11, 15 Cassette hold sensor Detects the completion of cassette hold.
FANG4 During cassette PS
FANG2 SA2 hold: ON (1)
SA1, 5, 9, 13 Cassette ejection sensor During cassette PS Detects that the cassette has been ejected.
FANG5 SA6 eject: OFF (0)
SA3 SA17 Elevation HP sensor During HP: ON (1) PS Elevation HP for suction conveyor.
SA8
IP SB1 Suction cup HP sensor During HP: ON (1) PS
SA10 removal unit SB2 Cassette inlet IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SA7 (B) When located in
SA17 SA12
SA5 the shelf position:
ON (1)
SA9 SA14
SA11 SB3 Each shelf position sensor IP found: ON (1) PS
SA13 SOLA1 SB4 Inch/metric sensor PS (reflective IP width determination
SOLA2 SA15 SA16 type)
SB5 Suction sensor During IP suction: Suction sensor
SOLA3 ON (1)
MF1
SOLA4 Before-side- SC1 Before-BCR IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
positioning SC2 Convergence standby IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SF3 conveyor (C) IP sensor
SF4 SOLF1
SF2 MD1 Side- SD1 Side-positioning During HP: ON (1) PS
SF1 positioning mechanism HP sensor
MD3 conveyor (D) SD2 Grip release HP sensor During HP: ON (1) PS
MZ1 SD3 Side-positioning HP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
BCR Barcode reader Variation or option
MD2
ME2 MB3
ME1 MB1 After-reading SE1 Grip release HP sensor During HP: (1) PS
MZ3
conveyor (E)
SD3 FANG3 Erasure SF1 After-reading conveyance IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SZ3 SVB1 conveyor (F) standby IP sensor
SF2 Changeover IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SE1 SF3 Load standby IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SZ1 SB3 SB5 SF4 Overrun IP sensor IP found: ON (1) IP conveyance sensor
PS
ON
T MZ2 TSW1 Safety thermostat (separation
FR SZ2 SB1 PB1
SB4 MB2 type)
SB2
TSW1 TSW2 Safety thermostat Lamp house
LAMP15 LDSN1-1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Unlit lamp sensor Fan control
MC1
TSW2 Subscanning SZ1 (SED08A) IP leading-edge sensor IP found: ON PS (light- IP conveyance sensor
NOTE: The I/O symbol has the following meaning. FR unit (Z) (no display) receiving type)
ON FANF1 SOLC1
SD2 T
Driving-side grip release During HP: ON (1) PS
SC2 SC1 SZ2
HP sensor During HP: ON (1)
Serial number
Driven-side grip release
SZ3 HP sensor PS
BCR
Unit symbol (AG, T, Z)
Example) D: Side-positioning conveyor TR1H1003.EPS
The unit symbol may sometimes be omitted.

SD1
5.2.1 Models of Sensors and Parts Codes
I/O type
S: Sensor Code No. MS/PS Model Relevant sensor symbols
M: Motor SD2 104N0043 PS OJ-380331-701 (5mm Type I) SA1, 5, 9, 13, SB1, SD2, SE1, SZ2, 3
TSW: Thermal switch
FAN: Fan 104N0044 PS OJ-380331-702 (5mm Type L) SA3, 7, 11, 15, 17, SB3, SD1
SV: Solenoid valve 104Y0162 PS Separation type SF4
and more 113Y1038 PS 19mm Type I SB2, SC1, 2, SD3, SF1, 2, 3
FR1H1135.EPS
113Y1395 PS Reflective type SB4
128S0392 Suction sensor MPL-503 (MPL) SB5
128Y0241A MS SS-01GL111 SA2, 6, 8, 10
128Y0258B MS SS-01GL2-F + mount SA4, 8, 12, 16
TR1H1150.EPS
009-051-05
04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460 03.20.2004 FM4275
MD - 17
5.2.2 Description of Sensor ON/OFF 5.3 I/O List (Actuator)

Unit Symbol Name Type Function/Remarks
Cassette set unit SOLA1, 2, 3, 4 Cassette hold SOL Power-down Pulls in the cassette hold pin,
Transmissive sensor (A) solenoid when turned ON.
Multi-stage LEDT1, 3, 5, 7 Cassette insertable LED
cassette loading LEDT2, 4, 6, 8 Cassette removable LED
unit (T)
Up-down IP MB 1 Suction cup drive motor Pulse motor Opens the rear cover of the
removal unit (B) cassette and moves the roller.
MB 2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
MB 3 Up-down drive motor Pulse motor Moves up and down the IP
OFF(0) : OPEN ON(1) : CLOSE
suction conveyor.
FR1H1490.EPS
PB 1 IP suction DC pump Sucks when turned ON.
Reflective sensor SVB1 IP leak valve Solenoid valve Leaks when turned ON.
Before-side- MC 1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
positioning SOLC1 Convergence path Power-down Changes the path to the load
conveyor (C) changeover guide drive solenoid side when turned ON.
Side-positioning MD 1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning

conveyor (D) mechanism.
OFF(0) : OPEN ON(1) : CLOSE MD 2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Roller grip/release.
FR1H1493.EPS MD 3 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
Microswitch (SA2, 6, 10,14) After-reading ME 1 Grip release motor Pulse motor Roller grip/release.
conveyor (E) ME 2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
Erasure MF 1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.

conveyor (F) SOLF1 Branch path changeover Power-down Changes the path to the erasure
OFF(0) : OPEN ON(1) : CLOSE guide drive solenoid side when turned ON.
FR1H1491.EPS
LAMP1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Erasure lamp Fluorescent lamp Light source for erasure
FANF1 Erasure cooling DC fan
Microswitch (SA4, 8, 12, 16) Subscanning unit MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM6 Conveys the IP.
(Z) MZ2 Driving shaft grip DC motor Driving shaft grip/release.
MZ3 Driven shaft grip DC motor Driven shaft grip/release.
ON(1) : CLOSE OFF(0) : OPEN

FR1H1492.EPS
Housing (G) FANG1 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the DRV08A board.
5.2.3 Sensor Monitoring Screen Under Idle Condition FANG2 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the DRV08A board.
FANG3 CRT cooling DC fan Cools down the CRT.
SA1 - 17 : 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 FANG4 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the MTH.
SB1 - 5 : 1 0 1 0 0 FANG5 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the MTH.
SC1 - 2 : 0 0 TR1H1004.EPS
SD1 - 3 : 1 1 0
SE1 : 1
SF1 - 4 : 0 0 0 0
SZ2 - 3 : 1 0
0:QUIT
0 and 1 denote Open and Close, respectively.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.30.2002 FM3405
05.31.99 FM2460
009-051-04
6.1
6.
0ms 2500ms 5000ms 7500ms 10000ms 12500ms
CONTENTS
SA1
SA2
SA3
Timing Chart
size)
For normal reading (continuous processing of four IPs of 14"x14"
IP Flow
SA4
SA5
1
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
2
SA10
SA11
SA12
3
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA16
4
SA17
SB1
SB2
SB3
5
SB4
SB5
SC1
6
SC2
SD1
SD2
SD3
7
SE1
SF1
SF2
SF3
8
SF4
SZ2
SZ3
SOLA1
9
SOLA2
SOLA3
SOLA4
10
MB1
MB2
MB3
PB1
SVB1
MC1
SOLC1
MD1
MD2
MD3
ME1
ME2
MF1
SOLF1
FFM(MZ1)
MZ2
MD - 18
MD - 18
MZ3
FR1H1499.EPS
BCR_S
BCR_R
0ms 2500ms 5000ms 7500ms 10000ms 12500ms

CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 19
BLANK PAGE
05.31.99 FM2460
MD - 21
7. Descriptions of Operations 7.2 IP Removal Unit
7.1 Elevation Unit Suction Cup Home Position

The IP in the cassette inserted is sucked and conveyed to the feed roller.
Elevation Home Position Sensor A crank arm is attached to the suction cup so that the suction cup is moved toward the
The elevation unit performs its up-down operation by transferring the driving from the MB3 to cassette cover as MB1 is driven.
the worm gear via the timing belt. When SB1 becomes CLOSE, it detects that the suction cup is in its home position.
Operational requirements are imposed on the movement (up or down) of the elevation unit: it MB1
can be operated when the suction cups are in their home position (HP) (in order to prevent SB1
interference between the suction cup arm and the cassette set unit).
Sensor arm
Home positioning of the elevation unit is detected by SA17 (elevation HP sensor) and SB3
(each shelf position sensor), and implemented during initialization.
When the elevation operation is permitted, MB3 is driven and SA17 sensor detection is Suction cup arm
implemented (OPEN CLOSE); then SB sensor detection is implemented (OPEN
CLOSE OPEN) to ensure that the elevation unit is located at the topmost shelf position.
Subsequently, 1-pulse driving is performed by MB3, and the home position is detected by
the SB sensor (OPEN CLOSE). Crank arm
Suction cup FR1H0203.EPS
FR
ON
Timing belt
Actuator
T
IP Feed Suction
In order to suck the IP, MB1 that drives the suction cup moves from the home position toward
SA17
Hole
MB3 the cassette cover by 83 mm (250 pulses). When the suction cup arrives at the IP suction
position, it also activates the suction pump (PB1) at the same time, so that the IP is sucked
by air.
After the activation of the suction pump (PB1), if the SB5 sensor does not become CLOSE
after an elapse of 1 sec, it is judged as IP suction failure.
The suction cup moves from HP to feed suction. Atmospheric

pressure
Actuator
Hole Suction pump
SVB 1
PB 1 OFF
IP ON
SB3
FR1H0201.EPS SB5
CLOSE
Each Shelf Position Sensor Suction

sensor
When a cassette is inserted into the cassette set unit (first shelf through fourth shelf), MB3 is
IP
driven to move the elevation unit to the cassette shelf where the cassette has been inserted. Suction sensor
The cassette set unit has an actuator installed for each shelf, so the shelf position is deter- FR1H0204.EPS FR1H0205.EPS
mined by SB sensor detection (OPEN CLOSE).
FR
ON
T
Actuator
Hole
SB3
FR1H0202.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MD - 23
IP Feed Leak IP Load Leak

After the suction cup is moved to the feed roller by 88 mm (-262 pulses), the IP sucked is After the suction cup is moved toward the cassette cover by 88 mm (262 pulses), the IP
detached from the suction cup as SVB1 is activated for air leak. Because the movement sucked is detached from the suction cup as SVB1 is activated for air leak.
speed of the suction cup is the same as the rotation speed of the feed roller, the leading Because the movement speed of the suction cup is the same as the rotation speed of the
edge of the IP is fed to the feed roller. feed roller, the trailing edge of the IP is inserted into the cassette.
The IP being conveyed is prevented from coming into contact with the suction cup by mov-
ing the suction cup, which has moved to the feed roller, from the home position toward the The IP sucked is moved to
the cassette cover and detached. Atmospheric
cassette cover by 30 mm (86 pulses). pressure
For the IP conveyed, its IP leading edge is detected by the SB2 sensor (OPEN CLOSE),
thereby monitoring that it has been conveyed normally. SVB 1
ON
PB 1
Suction cup movement operation Pump and suction cup movement operation OFF
(feed suction feed leak) Atmospheric Cassette inner frame
pressure when the cover is closed
SB5
OPEN
SVB 1
ON
PB 1 Unit: mm
OFF 23.83 5.5
IP accommodation position IP
(trailing edge when IP is placed During IP leak
SB5
IP OPEN at the bottom of the cassette) FR1H0211.EPS
FR1H0210.EPS
FR1H0206.EPS
During IP leak IP
FR1H0207.EPS
IP Load Suction
In order to insert into the cassette the IP conveyed from the erasure conveyor to the eleva-
tion unit, the suction cup is moved from the suction cup home position toward the cassette
cover by 30 mm (86 pulses) and placed in the standby mode.
When the IP conveyed from the feed roller is inserted into the cassette, the suction cup that
is placed in the standby mode is moved by 30 mm (86 pulses) and the suction pump is
activated, thereby sucking the trailing edge of the IP.
The IP loaded is sucked
by the suction cup. Atmospheric
pressure
Suction pump
SVB 1
PB 1 OFF
ON
18.97
SB5
CLOSE
Suction
sensor
0.55-5.26 IP trailing-edge IP
Unit: mm stop position Suction sensor
FR1H0208.EPS FR1H0209.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MD - 25
7.3 Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor Path Changeover during IP Load Conveyance

When the IP is erased during erasure conveyance, SOLC1 of the before-side-positioning
IP Length Measurement conveyor is energized to activate the path changeover guide. The IP is passed through the
guide with its path changed, and conveyed (returned) to the up-down IP removal unit.
The IP conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit is subjected to IP length measurement by
SC1 (IP passage time through SC1) and routed to the side-positioning conveyor.
Guide
For IP length measurement, the IP size is classified into eight types according to the length SOLC1
of the IP, SB4 status during IP feed, and mammo/ST cassette sensor status. If the passage ON
time through SC1 is 2.9 sec or longer, it is judged as an IP jam.
SOLC1
Length SC1 passage
IP type setting x width time SB4 result SA4, 8, 12, 16 status
mm Sec SC2
14" x 17" 430 x 354 0.832.9 CLOSE OPEN
14" x 14" 354 x 354 0.70.83 CLOSE OPEN
10" x 12" 303 x 252 0.570.7 CLOSE OPEN
8" x 10" 201 x 252 0.57 CLOSE OPEN
18cm x 24cm ST 178 x 238 0.57 OPEN OPEN IP path
24cm x 30cmST 298 x 238 0.570.7 OPEN OPEN
Before-side- SC1
18cm x 24cm HR 178 x 238 0.57 OPEN CLOSE
FR1H0213.EPS
24cm x 30cm HR 238 x 298 0.57 CLOSE CLOSE
TR1H0001.EPS
After detection by the cassette inlet IP sensor SB2 (CLOSE OPEN), the SOLC1 energized
is deenergized, so that the conveyance path is changed over. A spring is attached to
Guide SOLC1, so that upon deenergization, the spring force (tension) causes the guide to be
SOLC1 Guide
OFF SOLC1 forcefully returned to its original position.
ON
Guide
SOLC1
SOLC1 OFF
SC2 SOLC1
SC2
IP path
Before-side- SC1
IP path FR1H0212.EPS
Before-side- SC1
IP path
FR1H0214.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MD - 27
7.4 Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip Roller Release

After the IP No. is read by the barcode reader (BCR) and the leading edge of the IP is
Barcode Reader (BCR) Reading conveyed to SD3, the grip roller is released, so that the IP is brought into contact with the IP
stopper by the conveyance force.
After the width/length of the IP is determined, the IP is conveyed to the side-positioning
conveyor. The IP No. is read by the barcode reader (BCR) from the IP being conveyed. For By releasing the grip roller before the IP is brought into contact with the IP stopper, skewing
an IP size of 14"x 17" or 14" x 14", the leading edge of the IP has moved beyond the side- of the IP and so forth is prevented.
positioning top stopper and reached before the subscanning unit; as such, after reading by
the barcode reader, reverse conveyance of the IP is performed to move the latch assembly
by 9.6 mm (64 pulses) from the home position and move up the side-positioning top stopper.
For IP sizes other than 14"x 17" or 14" x 14", reverse conveyance of the IP is not performed;
instead, after reading by the barcode reader, the side-positioning top stopper is moved up. IP
Barcode reader (BCR) mounting position
BCR
Grip roller release
FRONT
IP stopper
FR1H0217.EPS
Side Guide Operation

For the IP brought into contact with the IP stopper, MD2 is activated to rotate the cam, while
the side guide is activated to detach the feed roller from the IP. Subsequently, the latch
assembly initiates its operation to push the IP against the side guide, so that the IP is moved
REAR
MD1 Side-positioning away from the side plate by 3 mm.
mechanism (shuttle)
FR1H0215.EPS
Up/down operation of side-positioning top stopper
Latch assembly
Guide of side-positioning top stopper IP
Guide plate
Shaft
Shaft
Side-positioning top stopper
UP condition
Latch assembly (as seen from right)
(UP condition) Guide of side-positioning top stopper
Guide plate FRONT
Guide plate
Shaft FRONT
Side-positioning top stopper Side guide

DOWN condition
(as seen from right)
FR1H0216.EPS
FR1H0218.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MD - 29
Side-Positioning Operation 7.5 Subscanning Unit

The latch assembly moves by a distance corresponding to the width of the IP already de-
tected, thereby performing side-positioning operation. Driving Shaft Roller/Driven Shaft Roller
During the side-positioning operation, as the IP is aligned against the side guide, the IP is The IP conveyed to the driven shaft of the scanner unit is conveyed by the driving of FFM
pushed into by two latches. Because a tension is applied by a spring to the two latches, they (MZ1) and operation of the driven shaft roller and driving shaft roller to initiate reading.
are brought down when loaded, so that the IP is pressed with a fixed pressure.
To drive the upper driven shaft roller and upper driving shaft roller, their respective motors
This operation is executed twice, thereby determining an accurate horizontal position of the are used; as the cam attached thereto is rotated, the upper driven shaft roller or upper
IP. driving shaft roller is operated (up and down). The rotation of the cam facilitates smooth up/
This not only prevents contact of the IP with the side plate, but also determines the reading down operation of the upper rollers, thereby preventing uneven IP fluctuations.
position in the main-scan direction for the scanner unit.
Light-collecting mirror
Laser beam line

MD3
FF shaft Driven shaft
IP
SZ1
Side-positioning
SD3 reference/location of
side-positioning latch
Subscanning unit Side-positioning conveyor
MZ2 MZ3 Sensor arm for SZ3
SZ2 SZ3
Sensor
FRONT arm for SZ2 Cam Cam
MZ2 MZ3
Grip (solid line) : Z2 (OPEN) Grip (solid line) : SZ3 (CLOSE)
Grip release (dotted line) : SZ2 (CLOSE) Grip release (dotted line) : SZ3 (OPEN)
Latch FR1H0220.EPS
Driven Shaft Grip

For the IP conveyed to the driven shaft, in order to initiate gripping of the driven shaft roller,
MZ3 is activated to cause the driven shaft roller to move down (descend), thereby gripping
IP
the IP. The descend position is detected as the sensor SZ3 becomes CLOSE from the
OPEN status. After gripping of the driven shaft roller is completed, the driving of FFM (MZ1)
FR1H0219.EPS
is initiated, thereby conveying the IP to the IP leading-edge sensor (SZ1).
Subsequently, the latch assembly moves to its home position and the IP stopper moves FFM (MZ1)
down. MD2 is also activated to rotate the cam, so that the roller grips the IP and the side
guide is accommodated, thereby conveying the IP to the scanner unit.
CCW: reading
conveyance
After-reading conveyor side
SZ2
Conveyance
direction
MZ2
Side-positioning IP
conveyor side
Sensor arm MZ3 Sensor arm for SZ3
for SZ2
SZ3
FR1H0221.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Driving Shaft Grip 7.6 After-Reading Conveyor

For the IP conveyed from the driven shaft roller, the IP leading edge is detected, and then
image reading is initiated. After-Reading Grip
After the IP leading edge is detected (by SZ1), MZ2 is activated when the IP is conveyed by The grip operation is terminated as the sensor SE1 becomes CLOSE from the OPEN status,
a predetermined amount, so that the driving shaft roller slowly descends to grip the IP. so that the IP is conveyed by ME2 to the erasure conveyor.
The descend position is detected as the sensor SZ2 becomes OPEN from the CLOSE
status.
ME1
FFM (MZ1)
After-reading conveyor side
ME2
Conveyance direction CCW: reading
IP
conveyance
REAR
Sensor arm
SZ2 SE1
Cam
(for grip open/close)
Side-positioning conveyor side

MZ2
Sensor arm for SZ3

Sensor arm for SZ2 MZ3 Cam
SZ3
FFM (MZ1) Driving

The driving shaft driven by FFM (MZ1) transfers its drive to the driven shaft through the steel
belt. By use of the steel belt, belt elongation and so forth is prevented, while transferring the
reading speed from FFM (MZ1) accurately.
Furthermore, by gripping the IP conveyed, the IP can be read accurately while maintaining
the reading speed constant.
Steel belt
FR1H0223.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
7.7 Erasure Conveyor IP Reverse Conveyance

After the path changeover guide is activated, the IP is conveyed to the inlet of the erasure
Inverting Stocker conveyor by the driving of MF1.
The IP conveyed from the after-reading conveyor is temporarily conveyed to the inverting
stocker in order to change the conveyance path. The conveyance stops after the IP passes
SF2 (CLOSE OPEN), and IP overrun (conveyance beyond specified value) is monitored
by SF4 (overrun IP sensor).
IP inverting stocker Guide
SOLF1
ON
IP path
IP path SOLF1
Guide
FR1H0227.EPS
IP Erasure
For the IP conveyed to the erasure conveyor, the image data of that IP is erased by the
erasure lamps.
FRONT
IP path Five erasure lamps are used to erase the image data of the IP. In order to maintain a re-
quired level of light intensity for the erasure lamps, the turn-on of the erasure lamps is
initiated immediately after the completion of the IP length measurement performed by the
Path changeover mechanism
FR1H0225.EPS
before-side-positioning conveyor, thereby making erasure preparation.
IP Path Changeover
For IP path changeover, after the IP passes SF2 (CLOSE OPEN), SOLF1 is energized to
activate the path changeover guide, thereby changing the IP conveyance direction toward
the erasure conveyor.
Guide
SOLF1
ON Lamp
IP path
SOLF1
Guide
FR1H0226.EPS
IP
FR1H0228EPS
For the IP conveyed to the erasure unit, its image data is erased by the erasure lamps.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
7.8 Electrical System Block Diagram 7.9 Image Data Flow

The electrical system consists of the following boards. A process flow for image data is described below.
The scanner unit is comprised of the LDD08A board (laser diode control board), SYN08A
board (start-point detection board), and polygon driver. Basic Configuration of Boards and Outline of Image Data Flow
LP ODF/HIC Network(DMS/IDT) Serial/Ether MTH08A/D

to power IDT
alternative
Ethernet
supply
option
E i/f
remote
E i/f
control
MODEM
External
Image Image Image Compress/ Network I/F VGA monitor HDD
processing processing processing FDD option
(DMS i/f) decompress board
board board board option board option CPU board
option option option option CPU90F/ HDD
DMC08A CPU90E
IMG08A IMG08B/H IMG08H HCP08A LAN90B
CPU90E
Motherboard Shared memory SCSI i/f
MTH08A/D MMC90A/DIM08A Packing/unpacking
5V 12V 12V

Immunity shield area
EDR IMG07B
reduction/ Scanner unit
FAN
CRT Scanner-related boards
reduction
From scanner
LED08A IMG07B PMT
SHD
correction LD driver IMG08A
VGA interface
BUSCON
Digital image data Start-point detection
POL driver Leading-edge detection Display CRT
Shared
Sensor FFM driver M memory
board DMC08A
SNS08A M M Grip/mirror up-down (SPR)
DC motor
5V Touch panel
Power
Driver Drive unit
from CPU90E Supply
board M M M
remote 15V Panel unit
DRV08A
24V SOL SOL
JPS1
FR1H0230.EPS
P SV
FAN Bar Code Reader

IDT type Basic-configuration image data flow
AC100/200V 1. While the data from the scanner is read into the shared memory, the data is distributed
remote Serial line & power supply
to the EDR and CRT reduction board.
Fuse
2. After the completion of the reading, the data is temporarily saved to the HDD, and one
frame is freed for the next image acquisition.
LED08B*4
S S S
3. After the write to the HDD is completed, the shared memory is used for a pin-pong
24V buffer, so that a portion of the image is loaded in the shared memory.
Erasure unit 4. While handshaking with the shared memory, image processing is performed for output
Unlit lamp sensor signal to the LP.
Erasure driver 5. As with step 3 above, the data for DMS output is loaded in the shared memory.
FAN
6. As with step 4 above, the output is provided to the DMS.
Instant-OFF thermo switch
FR1H6519.EPS
Electrical System Block Diagram

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Full-Optional Board Configuration and Outline of Image Data Flow 7.10 Function of Each Board
MTH08A/D
The functions and block diagrams of standard and optional boards connected within the rack
are described.
HDD
CPU90E Board
The 68EN360 (25 MHz), available from Motorola, is used as a CPU, with 16 MB of DRAM as
CPU90E
main memory, 1 MB of EPPROM and FEPROM, and 128 KB of SRAM.
The SRAM contents, as well as the date and time, are backed up by a battery (lithium ion
cell).
IMG07B A PD72070 floppy disk controller (FDC) is used to control the floppy disk drive (FDD).

From scanner
IMG08A
BUSCON
The 128KB SRAM contains gamma correction values.

IMG08B Shared
memory
In addition, the CRT controller supports a VGA monochrome monitor.
HCP08A With VRAM (4M bits, x3), an image plane is displayed with 640 x 480 pixels (12 bits), while a
text plane is displayed with 640 x 480 pixels (4 bits).
When an image is displayed on the CR-IR341s monitor, gamma correction is performed.
CPU90F/ Thus, in order to achieve gamma correction quickly, the monitor screen goes blank, and an
LAN90B image is then displayed after gamma correction.

Loop back
rotation
FR1H0231.EPS
Optional-configuration image flow

1. While the data from the scanner is read into the shared memory, the data is distributed
to the EDR and CRT reduction board.
2. After the completion of the reading, the data is temporarily saved to the HDD, and one
frame is freed for the next image acquisition.
3. After the write to the HDD is completed, the shared memory is used for double buffer,
so that a portion of the image is loaded in the shared memory.
4. While handshaking with the shared memory, optional image processing is performed
for output to the LP.
5. As with step 3 above, the data for network output is loaded from the HDD into the
shared memory.
6. If rotation is required, the loopback path of BUSCON is used to implement rotation.
The result of processing requires one screen worth of frame.
7. While handshaking with the shared memory, compression is performed.
8. Compressed blocks are sequentially saved to the HDD.
9. Once the process described in step 8 is completed for one frame, the data is read on a
block-by-block basis for transfer to the LAN board. If distributed processing is provided
(FINP), the data is block-transferred from the HDD to the shared memory for each
distribution destination.
10. For each distribution destination, the image is transferred from the shared memory on
a block-by-block basis and sent to the LAN.
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
CPU90F Board (Optional)

A 133MHz Pentium CPU is used to perform I/O initialization within the board, communication
with an upper-layer host, and control of the LAN.
16 MB of main memory (two 8 MB SIMMs) is installed.
Its LAN controller supports IEEE 802.3-compliant 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, and auto-negoti-
ates the speed for automatic switching; as such, only one RJ-45 connector is provided.
On this board, eight software control LEDs and six LAN communication status indication
LEDs are located.
Of them, the LAN communication status indication LEDs and their block diagram are illus-
trated below.
FR1H0232.EPS
CPU90E Block Diagram
FR1H0233.EPS
CPU90F Block Diagram

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
IMG08A Board (Optional) DMC08A Board (Optional)

The IMG08A, which is an LP interface board, is responsible for normalization (Sk/Gp conver- The DMC08A, which is a DMS interface (I/F) board, outputs data to the E I/F. It also per-
sion) and pixel density conversion processing, basic image processing (frequency/gradation forms normalization (Sk/Gp conversion) and pixel density conversion processing, and
processing, DR compression, 1-D USM), and image enlargement/reduction for the LP. For accumulation to and reoutput from the DMS
image processing, it contains a 128K-word (24-bit) SRAM and a 1M-word (16-bit) DRAM. For image processing, it contains a 128K-word (24-bit) SRAM and a 1M-word (16-bit)
DRAM.
Image processing board

The data that is image-processed by the IMG board is written to the HDD and then read
from the HDD for output to the E I/F at high or standard resolution.
External External External External LP
i/f
circuit High resolution or standard resolution is judged in an image transfer reservation response
from the output destination.
Address/ Input Input/ Output Address/

This information is stored for each DMS after boot-up.
data bus output data bus
register It should be noted that when a break status is detected on the line, the E I/F clear its
Interrupt B DSP Interrupt A memory.
Interrupt A i/f circuit Interrupt B
BUS Pixcel Pixcel BUS

counter counter Image processing board (IMG08A)
CON CON
i/f i/f
circuit Input Output circuit
HOST i/f register register
HOST i/f
circuit register register circuit
DMS External
Image data Image data i/f
input output circuit
BUSCON (output) Address/

BUSCON (input)
data bus
To motherboard FR1H0234.EPS
Interrupt B
Interrupt A
IMG08A Block Diagram
BUS Pixcel BUS Pixcel

CON counter CON counter
i/f i/f
circuit Input circuit Output
HOST i/f
register register
circuit register register
Image data Image data

input output
BUSCON (output) BUSCON (input)
To motherboard FR1H0235.EPS
DMC08A Block Diagram
009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 40 009-051-04

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99
05.31.99 FM2460
FM2460 (1)
HCP08A Board (Optional) SNS08A Board

The HCP08A board, which supports Fuji Protocol (FINP) during network connection, per- The SNS08A board provides direct control of a sensor input system, as well as control of
forms normalization (Sk/Gp conversion) and pixel density conversion processing, and drive I/O. A drive I/O control signal is transferred to the DRV08A board for driving.
compression/decompression processing. Measures to cope with chattering and noise during sensor control are provided by software.
JPEG-compliant compression with compression ratios of 1/2, 1/5, 1/10, and 1/20 is sup-
ported.
The sensor input system controls the buzzer, touch panel, magnetic card reader, and key-
board, in addition to various sensors.
CPU bus
HOST I/F circuit
Sensor input
Address/data bus From various sensors
circuit
AS signal
ALE signal
Address MPX signal
OS signal
Input image bus Input data REG Interlock control
R/W signal
DTACK signal Pulse motor

INT signal control circuit
(FPMCx10)
Image output
Board internal bus

Output data register Power-down
multiplexer solenoid
control circuit x3
Output image bus

Solenoid valve
To DRV08A board
Photocoupler interface circuit

control circuit x1
Arithmetic
Compression/ FIFO
discompression
gate array
HCP010 Keyboard control Pump
FR1H0236.EPS From keyboard
circuit control circuit x1
HCP08A Block Diagram

Magnetic card reader MCR/touch panel DC motor
From touch panel control circuit control circuit x3
To LED08A board LED board FFM

To FFM board
To LED08B board I/F circuit control circuit
Erasure inverter
To erasure inverter
I/F circuit
FR1H0237.EPS
SNS08A Block Diagram

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
DRV08A Board 7.11 Power Supply

The DRV08A board receives control signals sent from the sensor board (SNS08A) to directly
drive the actuators within the machine. The power supply unit provides power supplies of +5VDC, +12VDC, +15VDC, and +24VDC
Control signals from the SNS08A board are transferred through a photocoupler interface. to the respective boards.
Main functions are as follows. The power supply unit contains an inverter power supply circuit for control of lamp turn-ON,
thereby allowing the erasure lamp to turn ON.
I/O name I/O drive For protection of the power supply circuitry, the output of the power supply unit is discon-
Pulse motor drive 24 VDC 10 circuits nected upon detection of overvoltage or overcurrent.
Power-down solenoid 24 VDC 6 circuits
For recovery, manually turn OFF the breaker and back ON again.
Solenoid valve 24 VDC 1 circuit
DC pump 24 VDC 1 circuit The details of the outputs are described below.
DC motor 24 VDC 2 circuits Variable Output current
15 VDC 1 circuit Output Output Voltage Output
voltage
terminal voltage accuracy Minimum Steady state Maximum destination
range
TR1H0002.PCT
CN4 +5V 5% Fixed 0.1A 0.1A 0.1A LED08A
TB2 +5V 5% 10% 2.0A 37A 37A MTH08A/D
Pulse string Pulse motor driver
(STK672-050: Sanyo), DCOUT1 +12V 5% 10% 1.0A 9.5A 9.5A MTH08A/D
x10 circuits DCOUT2 +5V 5% Fixed 0.5A 3.0A 3.0A SNS08A
To each pulse motor
Power-down signal Power-down DCOUT3 +15V 5% 10% 0A 0.6A 2.4A DRV08A
control circuit
+24V 5% 10% 0.52A 2.77A 3.1A
Breakdown
protection circuit +24V 5% 10% 0A 2.77A 3.1A
+24V 5% 10% 0A 2.77A 3.1A
Full-power excitation signal Power-down solenoid +24V 5% 10% 0A 2.77A 3.1A
To each solenoid
5%
Photocoupler interface circuit
Power-down excitation signal drive circuit x3 (power DCOUT4 +24V Fixed 0A 8.0A 12A LAMP
transistor: MP4504) DCOUT5 +24V 5% 10% 0A 0.26A 0.26A LAMP
From SNS08A board FAN
DCOUT6 +5V 5% 10% 1.0A 3.2A 3.2A SCN08A
Solenoid valve drive To solenoid valve
Drive signal
circuit x1 (power +24V 5% 10% 0A 0.3A 0.6A
transistor: MP4504) +15V 5% 10% 0.1A 2.15A 3.0A
-15V 5% 10% 0.1A 0.95A 3.0A
DCOUT7 +5V 5% Fixed 0A 0.1A 0.1A FFM
Pump drive circuit x1 To pump
Drive signal
(power transistor:
+15V 5% 10% 0A 0.4A 2.0A
MP4504) TR1H0004.EPS
Drive signal To each DC motor

DC motor drive circuit x3
+5 VDC generation
circuit
FR1H0238.EPS
DRV08A Block Diagram

05.31.99 FM2460 03.20.2004 FM4275
7.12 Scanning Optics/Scanner Unit Scanner Data Flow
Summary Machines RAM (primary memory)

HD Automatically loaded upon
startup: (a), (b), (c), (d), (e)
: Used for actual operation.
Data will disappear when power is
The SCN08A board controls the LDD08A board (laser diode control board), SYN08A board turned OFF or reset.
(a): Shading data
(start-point detection board), polygon driver, the photomultipliers PMT08A board (LOG (b): Polygon data (a): Shading data The data in the machines
amp), and SED08A board (leading-edge detection board) located in the scanning optics/ (c): Sensitivity data (b): Polygon data RAM is rewritten after
(d): Format data (c): Sensitivity data calculation in step 5-7-2.
scanner unit. (e): Other scanner data (d): Format data
5-8-1 : (a), (b) (e): Other scanner data
5-8-2 : (c)
An analog image signal sent from the PMT08A board is transferred to the IMG08A board as 5-8-3 : (d)
digital image data that is analog-to-digital converted by the SCN08A board. 7-4-1
: (a), (b), (c),
(d), (e) 5-8-5-1 : (a), (b)
5-8-5-2 : (c)
NOTE 1 7-3-1
: (a), (b), (c),
Image data (d), (e)
Analog Image data
Image signal
signal A/D Image bus
processing conversion I/F Image block
Correction FD
signal
HV noise error Shading Polygonal facet
Polygon control signal Scanner
correction signal
Polygon
HV status signal Polygon Index signal (a): Shading data 5-8-6
Control control (b): Polygon data : (a), (b), (c)
Erasure level signal Status signal
Erasure signal (c): Sensitivity data
level (d): Format data
detection
Control (e): Other scanner data
signal
HV control signal
HV control LD control signal
Laser
control LD status
NOTE 1: Data will not be changed unless the machine is restarted after RESTORE. FR1H1754.EPS
Quasi-read
control signal Quasi-read
control 5-7-2: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY, and 2. CALCULA-
TION in sequence.
Start-point 5-8-1: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT, and 1. SAVE SHAD-
detection signal
ING AND POLYGON DATA in sequence.
Leading-edge Sync signal generation 5-8-2: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT, and 2. SAVE SENSI-
detection signal
TIVITY in sequence.
5-8-3: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT, and 3. SAVE FOR-
MAT DATA in sequence.
5-8-5-1: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY, 5. LOAD FROM
Control bus signal FD, and 1. SHADING AND POLYGON in sequence.
Control bus I/F To each I/O
5-8-5-2: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY, 5. LOAD FROM
FD, and 2. SENSITIVITY in sequence.
5-8-6: Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY, and 2. CALCULA-
Analog 15V
Machine power
Power Analog 5V
TION in sequence.
supply
Digital +5V 7-3-1: Select 7. FILE UTILITY, 3. BACKUP, and 1. SCANNER DATA in sequence.
supply
unit
Power system +24V
FR1H0239.EPS
7-4-1: Select 7. FILE UTILITY, 4. RESTORE, and 1. SCANNER DATA in sequence.
For more detail, see 4. Maintenance Utility, 4.10 Scanner Diagnostics and Setting: 5.
Scanning Optics/Scanner Unit Block Diagram SCANNER UTILITY, and 4.12 File Operation: 7. FILE UTILITY.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
SCN08A Board Shading correction

The SCN08A board, which is located between the MTH board and scanning optics/scanner Shading correction is implemented in hardware to achieve high-speed processing.
unit, controls each I/O of the scanning optics/scanner unit in accordance with an instruction Analog image data sent from the PMT08A board (log amp board) is corrected for shading.
from the MTH board.
Shading correction compensates for differences in beam-collecting efficiency of the light-
Polygon driver/laser/HV control is performed so that a start-point detection signal detected collecting/scanning optics system in the main-scan direction.
by the SYN08A board and a leading-edge detection signal detected by the SED08A board
are acquired as sync signals to control the image acquisition timing. Furthermore, as its self-
Filtering
diagnostic function, image quasi-read control is implemented to generate a quasi-read LED
output voltage. The image signal response is adjusted to achieve sharpness balance between main scan-
ning and subscanning.
For image acquisition, an analog image signal is inputted from the PMT08A board (log amp
board), and after shading correction and filtering, it is analog-to-digital (A/D) converted for
output to the IMG08A board (image processing board) as digital image data.
Image signal acquisition

A block diagram, from input of an analog signal from the PMT08A board (log amp board) to
A/D conversion for output to the IMG08A board (image processing board), is illustrated
below. The digital image data acquired is transferred to the IMG08A board at high speed.
Quasi-reading
Input buffer Filtering Output buffer
IMG board
Shading correction A/D conversion
Laser
PMT board Light-collecting guide
Scan over IP
Accelerated phosphorescence light is guided to PMT

Output level
by the light-collecting guide
PMT output signal in main-scan direction FR1H0240.EPS
Image Signal Acquisition Block Diagram
Image acquisition timing is shown below.
OFCLKL
OLCLKL
OLCLKL
Enlarged view
OPCLK
Image data [10 : 0] D1 D2 D3 D4

FR1H0241.EPS
009-051-04
05.31.99 FM2460
05.31.99 FM2460 (1) 05.31.99
05.31.99 FM2460
FM2460 (1)
A/D converter HV control

An analog image signal filtered is converted to a digital image by an A/D converter. HV can artificially control the turn-ON/OFF of the output by use of a software switch of the
Maintenance Utility and a slide switch (S1) located on the SCN08A board.
ADC buffer This information is reported to the CPU, so that when HV is OFF, a dialog indicative of the
HV OFF status is displayed on the monitor.
The HV control signal is routed from the SCN08A to the PMT08 board.
Image signal CLK
This signal is outputted at an analog level of 0 (= OFF) 10 V.
+ 1V shift VINA
The resulting output, multiplied by 100 (i.e., 0 V to -1000 V), is outputted as HV.
VINB
11 11
SENSE ADC 74ALS574
0 - 3V
Data bus Latch DAC 8-bit
Multiplied
+ 1V by 2.5
VREF
3.3 F
0.1 F
Reference voltages
for other ADC and DAC - 2.5V
Multiplied PMT08
X (- 10) - 10V Soft ON/OFF by -1 LPF
HV decoder
X (2.5) + 2.5V
HVON : 2.5 10V
X (- 2.5) - 2.5V HVOFF : 0V
FR1H0243.EPS
Hard ON/OFF
A/D converter
Erasure level detection

FR1H0245.EPS
An erasure level signal is outputted from the PMT08A board and inputted into the SCN08A
board, where a maximum value within one screen is detected. Because this signal is nonlin-
HV Control Block Diagram
ear, it is eventually converted to a dose by software-based table correction.
The IP erasure time is determined according to this dose detected.
Reference voltage - 10V
Erasure level signal

(PMT08) Differential A/D
Analog conversion
Reference voltage - 2.5V input level peak hold
Shading correction signal shift 8bit
CLK
P
Digital
Latch Erasure comparator
ZLCLKL
HSYNCL signal level data Q
FCLKL generation latch
decoder CLR P>Q
ERASENAL
(Erasure level detection enable) Erasure level data
Buffer
8
FR1H0244.EPS
Erasure Level Detection Block Circuit

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Quasi-read control LED functions

A troubleshooting signal is generated when an image anomaly occurs. The SCN08A board has eight LEDs mounted on its surface to permit visual inspection of
It is used to distinguish probable causes of the failure into either of scanning optics section, signals. Their locations on the board and signals detected are shown below.
light-collecting section (PMT/log amp), or scanner control board.
By selecting this mode and scanning an unexposed IP, a quasi-image signal can is
generated from each selected point to check if a normal image is obtained and to isolate the
probable cause of the failure. SCN08A board
HVON (HV ON LED)
This LED is OFF when reading operation is performed under
1. With LIGHT, a fixed amount of light can be inputted to the photomultiplier from the LED the HV ON condition. To check the LED, HV should be turned
OFF.
on the light-collecting sections PMT board to check if a normal solid image is
obtained. If the resulting image is normal, the probable cause of the image anomaly is SOH (leading-edge sensor check LED)
Normal if this LED is ON, or if the leading edge of the IP is
the scanning optics unit, subscanning unit, IP, or extraneous noise. located at SZ1 (IP leading-edge sensor) with this LED OFF.
If this LED is OFF or blinking (slow blinking), with the IP not
2. With LOGAMP, a fixed amount of current can be inputted to the log amp on the PMT
D16 located at SZ1, and the laser is normal, then it is necessary to
board to check if a normal solid image is obtained. If the resulting image is normal, the check SZ1.
probable cause of the image anomaly is the photomultiplier, high-voltage power
supply, leaked light during erasure or due to extraneous light, IP optical noise, or so SOS (staring-point sensor LED)
forth. Normal if this LED is ON. If this LED is blinking (slow blinking)
3. With SCN08INPUT, a fixed amount of voltage can be inputted to the scanner control
S1 or OFF and the laser is normal, then it is necessary to check
the start-point sensor board.
board to check if a normal solid image is obtained. If the resulting image is normal, the
probable cause of the image anomaly is the PMT board, extraneous noise to the PMT
board, or cable connection between the PMT board and SCN board. POLLOCK (polygon lock LED)
When this LED is ON, the polygonal mirror is rotating at a
4. If all of the results obtained at steps 1 through 3 above are abnormal, the probable D15 constant speed. If it is OFF or blinking, it is necessary to check
the polygonal mirror.
cause is the SCN board, extraneous noise of SCN, or image board(s) that are
subsequent to the SCN board.
PCLK (pixel clock check LED)
When this LED is ON, a pixel clock is generated during
Polygon control D14 reading. If this LED is OFF and the laser is normal, it is
necessary to check the SCN08A board.
After power-ON, the polygonal mirror is rotated.
D13
Laser diode (LD) control LCLK (line clock check LED)
When this LED is ON, a line clock is generated during reading.
Beam-intensity detection is performed for two lasers, so that if it is less than half the nominal If this LED is OFF and the laser is normal, it is necessary to
level, it is judged as a failure. D12 check the SCN08A board.
If either of the lasers experiences a light-emitting failure, it is reported as insufficient laser

intensity (user notification warning); if both of the lasers experience light-emitting failures,
FCLK (frame clock check LED)
they are handled as laser error (system down). D11 When this LED is ON, reading is in progress. If LED is OFF
even though the leading edge of the IP is detected
(leading-edge sensor check LED is OFF) and the laser is
Error detection normal, then it is necessary to check the SCN08A board.
The SCN08A board detects errors related to the polygon, LD, image signal, etc. D10
Error detection item Monitoring LD2OK (second laser check LED)
Polygon A lock signal of the polygon motor (indicating that it rotates at a constant rate) When this LED is ON, the laser is normal. If it is OFF, it is
is monitored. D9 necessary to check the first or second laser.
Laser beam intensity The beam intensity of two LDs is monitored.
Start-point detection It is checked to see that a signal is generated at nominal timings.
Leading-edge detection
(during self-diagnostics)
It is checked to see that a signal is detected upon incident laser beam. D8 LD1OK (first laser check LED)
When this LED is ON, the laser is normal. If it is OFF, it is
Leading-edge detection During a series of reading sequences, the time from the activation of necessary to check the first or second laser.
(during reading timeout) the subscanning motor to the generation of a leading-edge detection signal
FR1H4031.EPS
(until the IP reaches its laser scanning position) is monitored.
End-of-screen timeout During a series of reading sequence, the time from the leading-edge
detection to the generation of an end signal is monitored.
HV power supply The output voltage and noise of the high-voltage power supply provided to
the PMT is monitored.
PMT analog power supply It is checked if the power supply to the PMT08A board is normal.
TR1H0003.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
04.20.2001 FM3006
7.13 General Description of Scanning Optics System Accelerated phosphorescence light emitted from a latent image due to laser beam irradiated
onto the latent image on the IP surface is collected by the light-collecting mirror, and the
excited light (660 nm laser light) is cut off by the filter mounted on the photomultiplier
Two laser diodes installed on the LDA08A board of the scanning optics unit irradiate red-
colored laser beams of 60 mW max./660 nm onto a six-faceted polygonal mirror. section, and the resulting light is guided to the photomultiplier (PMT).
The dust-shield guide prevents dust deposits onto an area between the light-collecting
For the laser beam scanned by the polygonal mirror in the main-scan direction, its scan start
timing is detected by the main-scan synchronization sensor of the SYN08A board to estab- guide/mirror section and scanning optics unit.
lish synchronization. Laser light
Light-collecting
guide
Light-collecting mirror
IP surface
Accelerated phosphorescence light
FR1H0249.EPS
Accelerated Phosphorescence Light
FR1H0247.EPS
Laser irradiation
The laser beam reflected by the polygonal mirror passes through f lenses, and the laser
beam is irradiated by the reflective mirror onto the IP surface under the scanning optics unit.
f lenses
Main-scan
direction
Sub-scan direction
Light-collecting
mirror
IP surface
Light-collecting guide FR1H0248.EPS
Laser Irradiation onto IP

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 55.1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 55.2
7.14 Software Terms and Definitions Subsystems

Divisions of the entire software system that are defined according to functionality and
Basic Structure
processing type
The basic structure consists of the OS, basic software, application software, device
MFC : Exercises primary control over the systems startup, initialization, and shutdown
drivers, and hardware.
processes and mode management.
Application software PNL : Exercises panel control over M-Utility, U-Utility, and window display/reception.
Basic software
IMG : Exercises image input control of the IMG07B board/scanner board.
OS Device drivers
CSL : Exercises ID input control over ID information processing (CSL type).
Hardware
FR1H6526.EPS
LIF : Exercises interface control over the IMG08A/B/C/H board.
OS FOT : Controls FINP output image data.
VxWorks JNL : Controls an error logging process.
Basic software IPH : Provides IP conveyance control and IP mechanism control (subscanning
included).
Software offering the functions that are commonly used by the application software. IIF : Exercises interface control over IDT communications.
Basic ISC Inter-subsystem communication management DST : Provides image data flow control.
software
SED Subsystem status/external event processing mechanism
DIF : Exercises interface control of the DMC08A board.
Management IMM Image data/ID information management control
system FIN : Exercises FINP input image data control of the network boards (CPU90F, LAN,
QUM Processing request (queue) management control for image input/output subsystems
and HCP).
CDM Shared data (information about machine setup and external device connection setup)
management control DOT : Exercises DICOM output control of the network.
IDM Image information (parameter) management control
TR1H1321.EPS
Subsystem connections
Application software The subsystems are interconnected by a software bus, which consists of the subsystems,
SEDs, and ISCs.
Control application software.
SED : Processes the messages (events) from the remote subsystems and the state of
Device drivers the local subsystem.
Software offered for device access common procedures ISC : Manages message exchanges between the subsystems.
SIO : Driver for serial transmission/reception
MFC IMM QUM CDM IDM
SCSI : Driver for SCSI interface control
FDC : Driver for floppy disk control
Ethernet : Driver for network interface control
DMA : Driver for overall DMA control
JNL PNL
DSP : Driver for image processing board (DSP) control
SCN : Driver for processing an interrupt notification from the scanner board
Video : Monitor system control driver
Sensor : Driver for sensor status change (ON/OFF detection) notification IPH DST LIF DIF FOT FIN DOT
FPMC : Pulse motor system control driver
Timer : System clock system control driver (CPU clock incorporation into the OS)
SMCU : IDT/DMS/LP (E interface) communication protocol
Polling : Driver for transmission/processing request confirmation during each IMG
communication
Keyboard : Driver for keyboard control
IOT : Driver for performing a sensor status trace
IIF
LAN : Driver for network board DMA control
Touch panel : Driver for touch panel control
: SED
Card : Driver for magnetic card reader control
Hardware CSL : ISC FR1H6527.EPS
PC boards
009-051-08 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 55.1 009-051-08 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 55.2
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
7.15 Data Flows LP Output [E-I/F] (Subsystem: LIF)

MTH08A/D IMG08B/H
Scanner Reading/CRT Display (Subsystem: IMG)

Image resolution conversion process
MTH08A/D IMG07B
Normalization process
Image data
Monitor reduced
image processing MMC90A/DIM08A
MFP process
EDR reduced
image processing
IMG08A
MMC90A/DIM08A
HDD Image resolution conversion process
Normalization process
CPU90E
Image frequency process
HDD VGA90E CRT
Image gradation process LP
MMC90A
HDD MTH08A/D MTH08A/D IMG08B/H
/DIM08A
MTH08A/D IMG08A LP
Image data MTH08A/D IMG07B MTH08A/D CPU90E CRT FR1H6529.EPS
MMC90A HDD
MTH08A/D
/DIM08A
FR1H6528.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
DMS Output [E-I/F] (Subsystem: DIF) FINP Input (Subsystem: FIN)

MTH08A/D DMC08A MTH08A/D CPU90F/LAN90B
Image resolution conversion process Network process Network

MMC90A/DIM08A
Normalization process DMS
MMC90A/DIM08A
HCP08A
Image compression process
HDD Image decompression process

HDD
Image resolution conversion process
DICOM process
CPU90F MMC90A
Network MTH08A/D MTH08A/D HDD
HDD
/LAN90B /DIM08A
MMC90A
HDD MTH08A/D MTH08A/D DMC08A DMS
/DIM08A
FR1H6530.EPS
MMC90A
MTH08A/D MTH08A/D HCP08A
/DIM08A
MMC90A
MTH08A/D MTH08A/D HDD
HDD
/DIM08A
FR1H6531.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
FINP Output (Subsystem: FOT) DICOM Output (Subsystem: DOT)

MTH08A/D HCP08A MTH08A/D HCP08A
Image compression process Image compression process

MMC90A/DIM08A MMC90A/DIM08A
Image decompression process Image decompression process
Image resolution conversion process Image resolution conversion process
DICOM process DICOM process
HDD HDD
CPU90F/LAN90B CPU90F/LAN90B
Network process Network Network process Network
MMC90A MMC90A
HDD
HDD MTH08A/D MTH08A/D
MTH08A/D HCP08A MTH08A/D HDD MTH08A/D MTH08A/D HCP08A
/DIM08A /DIM08A
MMC90A
MMC90A MMC90A CPU90F MTH08A/D MTH08A/D HDD MTH08A/D
MTH08A/D MTH08A/D Network /DIM08A
/DIM08A /DIM08A /LAN90B
FR1H6532.EPS
MMC90A CPU90F
MTH08A/D Network
/DIM08A /LAN90B
FR1H6533.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
8. Mechanical Control Flows 8.2 Routine (Single-IP Conveyance)

8.2.1 Summary of Operation
8.1 How to Understand Control Flow
(1) Machine Operation during Single-IP Conveyance (Overall/General Flow)
A legend of conventions used in the control flow is described below.
The machine operation during single-IP conveyance is as follows.
START : Start of sequence
The general relationship between unit components and processes along the conveyance
paths is illustrated on the next page.
: User operation
Fig. 2.1.1 Machine Operation during Single-IP Conveyance
START
: Normal processing
Cassette set unit

In this sequence, the hold on the cassette inserted is detected
and confirmed. Cassette IN
N : Decision block
Y See 8.2.2
Up-down IP removal unit

In this sequence, the elevation unit is moved to the shelf where Movement of elevation unit (feed)
: Subroutine name the cassette that loads the IP has been set.
See 8.2.3

03XX : Occurrence of error In this sequence, the IP is removed from the cassette and IP feed
conveyed to the before-side-positioning conveyor.
See 8.2.4
Before-side-positioning conveyor
In this sequence, the IP from the up-down IP removal unit is
END : End of sequence conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor. During the conveyance,
IP length measurement is performed. Feed conveyance (IP length measurement)
After the IP length measurement, the erasure lamp turn-on process
is performed. See 8.2.5
PB11 : Control parameter for pulse motor Side-positioning conveyor

Number (serial number) In this sequence, the barcode on the back of the IP is read during Barcode reading and side-positioning
the conveyance; subsequently, positioning of the start point for IP
Unit number (B through F) reading (i.e., side-positioning) is performed. See 8.2.6
Subscanning unit After-reading conveyor

TA11 : Timer value or timeout value In this sequence, after the IP data is read, the IP is conveyed to the Reading
Number (serial number) conveyance-inverting stocker.
See 8.2.7
Unit number (A through D, F, Z)
In this sequence, the elevation unit is moved to the shelf where the Movement of elevation unit (load)
NA11 : Retry value cassette that loads the IP has been set.
See 8.2.8
Number (serial number)
Unit number (A, B, D) Erasure conveyor
FR1H0300.EPS The IP in the inverting stocker is passed under the erasure lamp Erasure
(data is erased) by switching the conveyance path of the erasure
conveyor, and conveyed to the before-side-positioning conveyor. See 8.2.9
The erasure lamp turn-off process is also performed.
Before-side-positioning conveyor Up-down IP removal unit IP load

The IP sent from the erasure conveyor is conveyed to the up-down
IP removal unit by switching the conveyance path, and loaded into See 8.2.10
the cassette.
Cassette set unit

In this sequence, the hold on the cassette into which the IP has Cassette ejection
been loaded is released, so that the cassette
See 8.2.11
END
FR1H0301.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Machine Unit Components 8.2.2 Cassette IN
Controller (1) Overall/General Sequence
This is for the operation of the cassette set unit.

In this sequence of cassette IN operation, after the cassette inserted is detected, it is held,
and then whether it has been held properly is detected.
Housing
Elevation
unit
Fig. 2.2.1 Cassette IN (1/2)
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1
Units related to descriptions of START
Up-down mechanical control

In response to the sequence,
IP removal unit A: Cassette feeder such as initialization, during
Cassette set unit B: Up-down IP removal unit startup, this step indicates Check for READY condition LEDT1 of
Before-side-
C: Before-side-positioning that the cassette feeder is all the shelves are turned on.
positioning unit
conveyor ready to accept a cassette.
Power supply unit
D: Side-positioning conveyor
Z: Subscanning unit
Erasure conveyor B
E: After-reading conveyor
F: Erasure conveyor
User operation Cassette setting
Units not mentioned in SA of all the shelves are
descriptions checked in sequence.
Subscanning of mechanical control The leading edge of the Is SA2 closed?
unit G: Housing cassette causes the N
Y
H: Power supply unit sensor SA2 to turn
J: Control unit ON, so that cassette IN
is detected.
After-reading Side-positioning
conveyor unit C
FR1H0302.EPS Cassette hold Cassette hold

mechanism activated DRIVE (SOLA1/OFF)
(3) IP Conveyance Paths
Cassette hold is Is SA3 closed within TA14?
N
confirmed. Y
Is the number of retries made greater

than the retry count (NA12)?
Cassetteset unit SB2 N
Y
Level 2 error log

Up-down IP 23A1 Cassette hold
removal unit Level 1 error failure retry
13A1 Cassette setting
Before-side- Remedial error
positioning action for Cassette hold Retry
Power supply unit release
SF4 conveyor cassette upon
SF2 SC2 setting error Message display Fig. 2.2.2 cassette
Erasure conveyor "Reload cassette." hold
DELAY TA15
failure
SF1
SC1
SF3 BCR Cassette ejection C
Subscanning A message, "Unload cassette,"

unit A Fig. 2.11.1 is not issued. FR1H0304.EPS
Side-
After-reading positioning
conveyor conveyor
SZ1 SD3 FR1H0303.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
Fig. 2.2.1 Cassette IN (2/2) (2) Detailed Sequence of Hold Release
The operation is to release the cassette hold.

A
If an attempt to release the hold fails five times in succession, the relevant shelf is marked by
level 1 error, cassette hold release failure.
Detection of
instant removal Is SA2 closed?
of cassette and N Fig. 2.2.2 Cassette Hold Release
Y
its remedy are
performed. Cassette hold Preprocessing: Fig. 2.2.1, Fig. 2.11.1, Fig. 5.4.3, Fig. 5.10.1, Fig. 6.1.1, Fig. 6.3.1, Fig. 6.7.1, and Fig. 6.8.1
release START
LEDT1 is turned off Fig.2.2.2
A
B B
Cassette hold release
DRIVE (SOLA1/ON)
END
FR1H0305.EPS
Cassette
Table 2.2.1 Operation Parameters Table 2.2.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing hold Is SA3 closed within TA11? *: Push the cassette once to draw it out.
N The cassette cannot be drawn out by merely pulling it.
Symbol Description Value I/O name in flow release is Y
TA14 Hold timeout 0.5 sec Topmost confirmed.
I/O name 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
TA15 Wait for hold retry shelf position position position
2 sec Is the number of retries made greater
position
NA12 Hold retry 5 times than the retry count (NA11)?
SA1 SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13
TR1H0010.EPS N
SA2 SA2 SA6 SA10 SA14 Y
SOLA1 SOLA1 SOLA2 SOLA3 SOLA4 Level 1 error Level 2 error
23A2
LEDT1 LDET1 LDET3 LDET5 LDET7 13A2 Cassette hold Cassette hold
TR1H0011.EPS release failure failure retry
Condition where the cassette has been set (loaded) Message display
"CASS. HOLD RELEASE
FAILURE CS#
* Check cassette position and Retry upon
Remedial press HOLD RELEASE key". failure of
action cassette
for cassette Cassette hold hold release
Topmost stage hold release release
failure Cassette hold release
2nd stage DRIVE (SOLA1/OFF)
SOLA1 Operation stopped
3rd stage
Cassette that has been Level 2 error DELAY TA12
set in the 3rd stage SOLA2 23A3 Degeneration for shelf
where relevant cassette
4th stage SOLA3 is set A
Degeneration or all shelves?

SOLA4 N
Y
SA2 Level 0 error

03A3 All shelves
Hold pin degeneration
Cassette loading
direction
OFF ON END
SA3 FR1H0307.EPS
OFF:CLOSE
ON :OPEN
SOLA1 Table 2.2.2 Operation Parameters Table 2.2.2a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow
Symbol Description Value I/O name in flow
FR1H0306.EPS TA11 Hold release timeout 0.5 sec Topmost
I/O name 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
TA12 Wait for hold release retry 2 sec shelf
position position position position
NA11 Hold release retry 5 times
TR1H0012.EPS SOLA1 SOLA1 SOLA2 SOLA3 SOLA4
TR1H0013.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460
8.2.3 Movement (Feed) of Elevation Unit (2) Detailed Sequence of Suction Cup HP Positioning
(1) Overall/General Sequence This sequence is performed when home positioning (HP) is performed for the suction cups.
In this sequence, the elevation unit is moved to a designated shelf of the cassette set unit in Fig. 2.3.2 Suction Cup HP Positioning (1/2)
order to feed IPs.
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.3.1, Fig. 2.3.3, Fig. 2.4.2, Fig. 2.4.3, Fig. 2.4.4,
The movement of the elevation unit cannot be performed if the suction cups are not in their Table 2.3.2 Operation Parameters
Fig. 2.6.4, Fig. 2.8.1, Fig. 2.10.3, Fig. 2.10.4,
Fig. 4.2.2, Fig. 4.2.3, Fig. 4.3.1, Fig. 5.1.1, and Fig. 5.3.2
home position (HP). Symbol Description Value
PB50 Suction cup movement (initial driving) 1p
START
If there is any IP being fed, the machine waits until the suction cup movement process PB51 Suction cup movement (HP positioning) + infinite P
described in 8.2.6 (3) Sequence of Side-Positioning Conveyance is completed. PB52 1-pulse suction cup driving (HP movement 1) -1p
PB53 Suction cup movement (HP positioning) - infinite P
Fig. 2.3.1 Movement of Elevation Unit MB1 phase start-point
PB54 Suction cup movement (HP movement 2) -6p
forced return (2-phase)
TB51 Wait for suction cup HP settlement 0.5sec 2-phase/1-pulse driving
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.2.1 and Fig. 3.1.1
TB52 Suction cup HP detection preparation timeout 1.3sec for driver initialization
Suction cup driving
START TB53 Suction cup HP detection timeout 5.3sec
(initial driving)
It is initiated when the following condition is met. TB54 Suction cup HP 1-pulse driving timeout 20sec
Is the movement of the elevation DRIVE (MB1/PB50)
Movement of the elevation unit permitted: Fig. 2.7.1 NB51 Side-positioning HP retry 2 times
unit permitted? The sequence is not initiated until the movement (load) of C
( )
TR1H0016.EPS
N
Y the elevation unit is performed to load the previous IP and
the loading of that IP is completed.
DELAY TB51
The suction cup Is SB1 closed?
N Level 2 error
HP is confirmed. Y
23E8 Suction cup HP return
failure Is SB1 closed?
A DELAY TB17 Y
N
Retry at the time
MB3 moves the of HP detection failure Suction cup driving With deceleration time setting and
Fig.2.3.2
elevation unit to a Movement of elevation unit (positioning) LIMIT stop, it is fed by a specified
designated shelf. DRIVE(MB3/PB_) Movement of suction cup DRIVE (MB1/PB53) amount after sensor edge detection.
For its parameters, (HP feed leak)
see Table 2.3.1a. DRIVE(MB1/PB19)
A Is SB1 closed within TB53?
It is confirmed that Is SB3 closed? N
the elevation unit is N 1) Y
in a proper shelf Y Side-
position. Elevation unit HP positioning positioning for Suction cup driving stop
Fig.2.3.3 preparation of DRIVE (MB1/OFF) (Soft)
Retry at the time Is the number of retries made greater suction cup
END of shelf position than the retry count (NB101)? HP detection
Y
detection failure N Level 0 error DELAY TB51
03DE Elevation movement
Leve 2 error error
23DE Elevation shelf movement
Table 2.3.1 Operation Parameters Suction cup driving (return)
failure retray DRIVE (MB1/PB51)
Symbol Description Value A
FR1H0308.EPS
PB19 Suction cup movement -12 p
(HP feed leak)
Is SB1 opened within TB52?
TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec 2) N
Y
NB101 Elevation movement retry 2 times Return for
preparation Suction cup driving stop
TR1H0014.EPS Sensor arm Suction cup driving stop DRIVE (MB1/OFF) (Soft)
Table 2.3.1a Elevation Unit Movement Parameters for SA17 of suction cup
HP detection DRIVE (MB1/OFF)
(PB_) SA17 (attached at the Level 2 error
elevation unit) (Soft) 23E6
Movement of Pulse Suction cup HP detection
Ascend
Symbol CW
elevation unit count (P) Cassette feeder preparation retry
Elevation unit DELAY TB51
Topmost stage 2nd stage PB112 -3,470 Rack MB3
SB3
B
Topmost stage 3rd stage PB113 -6,930 4 pulses = 0.1mm travel
(360 (= 400 pulses) A
Topmost stage 4th stage PB114 -10,392 Reduction ratio: 1/20 FR1H0310.EPS
2nd stage topmost stage

Sensor arm for SB3
PB121 3,470
2nd stage 3rd stage PB123 -3,460
2nd stage 4th stage PB124 -6,922 Elevation
3rd stage topmost stage 6,930
unit
PB131
3rd stage 2nd stage PB132 3,460
3rd stage 4th stage PB134 -3,462 Cassette feeder
4th stage topmost stage PB141 10,392 Condition as seen from Condition as seen from
4th stage 2nd stage 6,922 the cassette loading side the right-hand side
PB142
(front)
4th stage 3rd stage PB143 3,462 FR1H0309.EPS
TR1H0015.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 2.3.2 Suction Cup HP Positioning (2/2) (3) Detailed Sequence of Elevation Unit HP Positioning
This operation is performed during IP feed conveyance or load conveyance, or when the
A elevation unit is not in a proper shelf position.
It is also performed during initialization.
2w-1-2 1-pulse driving process Parameter Suction cup 1-pulse driving
phase (HP movement 1) DRIVE (MB1/BB52) Fig. 2.3.3 Elevation Unit HP Positioning (1/2)
3)
Sensor edge Preprocessing: Fig. 2.3.1, Fig. 2.8.1, and Fig. 5.1.1
detection Is SB1 closed within TB54?
N START
Y
MB1 phase start-point Is SB1 closed?

forced return (2-phase) Y
N
Suction cup driving (HP movement 2) Side-positioning

DRIVE (MB1/PB54) Level 2 error
for suction cup HP 23E8
4) Suction cup HP return error
detection preparation
HP positioning
DELAY TB51 For up/down movement
of the up-down IP DELAY TB17
removal unit, it is
prerequisite that the
Is SB1 closed? suction arm is in its
N Suction cup HP positioning
Y home position in order to
avoid interference. Fig. 2.3.2
23E7 Level 2 error
Suction cup HP detection retry MB3 phase start-point forced return (2-phase)
2-phase/1-pulse
END
driving for
B
driver initialization Elevation unit movement (initial driving)
DRIVE (MB3/PB101)
than the retry count (NB51)?
N C Is SA17 closed?
Y
Y
N
03E8
Level 0 error Elevation unit movement UP
Suction cup movement error DRIVE (MB3/PB101)
FR1H0311.EPS
Explanation of HP Detection Operation Is SA17 closed within TB101?

The home position (HP) is detected when the sensor N
arm attached to the suction arm shields SB1. Y
The suction cups are moved by MB1 driving and stops It is confirmed that
at their home position according to the following steps. the up-down IP
1) Positioning for suction cup HP detection preparation MB1 removal unit is near Elevation unit movement stop
When SB1 is OPEN: Positioning operation (backward the topmost shelf by DRIVE (MB3/OFF) (Soft)
movement) is performed to seek the home position, and SB1 checking that sensor
after SB1 is CLOSE, the suction cups are fed by a SA17 is CLOSE. Elevation unit movement DOWN
specified amount and then stop. Sensor arm DRIVE (MB3/PB102)
When SB1 is CLOSE: Proceed to the next step.
2) Return for suction cup HP detection
The return operation (forward movement) is performed,
and after SB is OPEN, the suction cups are fed by a Suction arm Is SA17 opened within TB102?
N
specified amount and stop. Y
3) Suction cup HP detection: Sensor edge detection
The positioning operation is performed by 1-pulse
driving, and the sensor edge is detected when SB1 is Elevation unit movement stop
CLOSE. DRIVE (MB3/OFF) (Soft) Elevation unit movement stop
4) Suction cup HP detection: HP positioning DRIVE (MB3/OFF) (Soft)
The suction cups are fed from the edge by a specified Suction cup
amount, and the positioning operation is stopped.
If normal, this stop point represents the home position. Suction cup HP positioning condition Level 0 error
FR1H0312.EPS A 03DD
Elevation HP movement error
FR1H0313.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 2.3.3 Elevation Unit HP Positioning (2/2) Table 2.3.3 Operation Parameters
Symbol Description Value
8.2.4 IP Feed
PB100 Elevation (initial driving) 1p
A
PB101 Elevation (UP) + infinite P (1) Overall/General Sequence
PB102 Elevation (DOWN) - infinite P
Elevation unit movement UP PB103 Elevation 1-pulse driving (edge movement) 1p
DRIVE (MB3/PB101) PB104 Elevation (HP movement)
In this sequence, an IP is removed from the cassette and fed to the before-side-positioning
60 p
TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec conveyor.
HP positioning preparation TB101 Elevation reference seek timeout 1 14.5 sec
operation Sensor SB3 is Is SB3 closed within TB103? The IP conveyance path is from the up-down IP removal unit to the before-side-positioning
N TB102 Elevation reference seek timeout 2 2.4 sec
engaged with the actuator
for topmost shelf detection.
Y
TB103 Elevation topmost shelf seek timeout 1 2.4 sec conveyor to the before-side-positioning conveyor.
TB104 Elevation topmost shelf seek timeout 2 2.4 sec
TB105 Elevation HP 1-pulse driving timeout 20 sec
In order to prevent conflict with the returning (loading) IP, this sequence is performed after
Elevation unit movement stop conveyance path clearing is confirmed.
NB100 Elevation HP retry 2 times
DRIVE (MB3/OFF) (Soft)
TR1H0017.EPS
Fig. 2.4.1 IP Feed (Overall Sequence)

Elevation unit movement DOWN
DRIVE (MB3/PB102)
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1, and Fig. 3.1.1
Operation START
for Is SB3 opened within TB104?
elevation N
edge Y
detection
preparation <Sequence start requirements>
Elevation unit movement stop
When all the following requirements are met, Is IP feed permitted?
DRIVE (MB3/OFF) (Soft) the sequence starts. N
Sensor SB3 Y
detects the edge IP feed permission enabled: Fig. 2.7.3
(lower end) Elevation unit movement stop
of the actuator for 1-pulse driving process Parameter DRIVE (MB3/OFF)
HP positioning. Elevation unit movement UP (to edge) (Soft) The IP in the cassette is sucked by the Feed suction
Operation DRIVE (MB3/PB103) suction cups.
for Fig. 2.4.3
elevation The IP sucked by the suction cups is
edge Is SB3 closed within TB105? Feed suction gripping
detection gripped by the grip rollers of the
N
Y up-down IP removal unit. Fig. 2.4.3
03DE Level 0 error The IP gripped by the grip rollers is Feed gripping and conveying
Elevation unit movement error conveyed.
MB3 phase start-point Fig. 2.4.4
forced return (2-phase)
Moved by 60p to the center of END

FR1H0315.EPS
the actuator, which corresponds
Elevation unit movement UP (to HP)
to the home position of the
DRIVE (MB3/PB104) Conveyance Path and IP Driving
up-down IP removal unit
(travel: 1.5 mm).
Is SB3 closed? Level 2 error
N 23DE
Y Elevation shelf movement failure retray
SB2
IP
than the retry count (NB100)?
END N A
Y
SF4
Level 0 error SF2 SF3 SC2
03DE
Elevation shelf movement error
FR1H0314.EPS
SF1
SC1
BCR
SZ1SD3
FR1H0316.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Feed Suction Sequence (3) Sequence of Feed Suction Conveyance
This is for the operation of the up-down IP removal unit. This is for the operation of the up-down IP removal unit.
In this sequence, the IP sucked is removed from the cassette and fed to the grip rollers of
In this sequence, the IP in the cassette is sucked by the suction cups.
the IP removal unit.
This sequence is also performed during a search for any remaining IP. This sequence is also performed during a search for any remaining IP.
Fig. 2.4.3 Feed Suction Conveyance
Pump/Suction Cup Operation Fig. 2.4.2 Feed Suction
Atmospheric Preprocessing: Fig. 2.4.1
pressure START
START
The grip rollers rotate
at the rate of suction Conveyance driving
SVB 1 Leak valve suction condition DRIVE (MB2/PB21)
PB 1 OFF DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) cup movement.
ON The suction cups While the suction cups
Suction cup movement are moved from feed the IP to the grip Is SB5 closed?
their home position N
SB5 (HP feed suction)
to suck an IP in
rollers, the IP is Y
DRIVE (MB1/PB11) monitored so that it is
CLOSE the cassette. 13E2 Level 1 error
not dropped. IP leak Feed IP dropped
Suction pump ON
DRIVE (PB1/ON) OPEN: IP dropped DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
CLOSE: IP sucked DRIVE (SVB1/ON) IP leak
Is SB5 closed within TB11? DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
When the leading edge DRIVE (SVB1/ON)
During IP suction IP N
Y
Level 2 error
of the IP is fed to the DELAY TB13 SB4 monitoring
23E1 Feed IP suction grip rollers, air leak occurs completed
failure retry so that the IP is released
FR1H0319.EPS
DELAY TB12 from the suction cups. Is SB1 closed?
IP leak The suction Y DELAY TB17 Remedial sequence
Atmospheric
DRIVE (PB1/OFF) condition N when the IP is dropped
END DRIVE (SVB1/ON) and suction Suction cup HP
pressure
cup position
is reset. Level 2 error positioning
It is confirmed that DELAY TB17 23E8 Suction cup HP return
SVB 1
Fig. 2.3.2
the suction cups suck failure
ON the IP securely. Suction HP Leak valve suction
PB 1 detection condition
OPEN: IP suction not completed
OFF CLOSE: IP suction completed Fig. 2.3.2 DRIVE (SVB1/OFF)
DELAY TB17
Is the number of retries Error handling
SB5 made greater than the
Remedial sequence
OPEN at the time of suction Cassette ejection 2
retry count (NB11)? Suction cup HP
N cup operation failure positioning Fig. 6.2.1 FR1H0321.EPS
Y
Fig. 2.3.2
Level 1 error
Feed IP suction The suction Suction cup movement Table 2.4.3 Operation Parameters
13E1
During IP leak failure cups fail to (HP feed leak) Symbol Description Value
IP suck the IP, DRIVE (MB1/PB19) PB12 Suction cup movement (feed suction feed leak) -262 p
Leak valve suction so it is
PB19 Suction cup movement (HP feed leak) -12 p
condition judged that
FR1H0319.EPS DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) there is no PB21 Conveyance (feed suction standby) 675 p
IP left in the END TB13 Wait for feed leak 0.1 sec
Error handling cassette.
TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec
Cassette ejection 1
TR1H0019.EPS
Fig. 6.1.1 FR1H0317.EPS
Pump/Suction Cup Operation Operation of Suction Cup Movement (Feed Suction Feed Leak)
Operation of Suction Cup Movement (HP Feed Suction)

Atmospheric
Table 2.4.2 Operation Parameters pressure
PB11 Suction cup movement (HP feed suction) 250 p 75
SVB 1 .1
TB11 Feed suction timeout 1 sec ON
TB12 Wait for feed suction 0 sec
PB 1
74
.7 7
OFF
NB11 Feed suction retry 3 times
SB5
TR1H0018.EPS
OPEN
Suction cup movement (feed suction feed leak)

FR1H0323.EPS
During IP leak
Suction cup movement (HP feed suction) IP
FR1H0320.EPS
FR1H0322.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(4) Feed Conveyance Sequence 8.2.5 Feed Conveyance (IP Length Measurement)
This is for the operation of the up-down IP removal unit. (1) Overall/General Sequence
In this sequence, the IP fed by the grip roller is routed to the before-side-positioning con- In this sequence, the IP sent from the IP removal unit is fed through the erasure conveyor to
veyor. the side-positioning conveyor.
Fig. 2.4.4 Feed Conveyance During the conveyance, IP length measurement is performed.
If the IP length measurement is completed normally, the erasure lamp, if unlit, is lit.
START Fig. 2.5.1 Passage through Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor and IP Length Measurement
(Overall Sequence)
Leak valve closed
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) START
After feed leak, the suction cups
advance by 98p and stop. The Suction cup movement (feed leak load standby) IP feed conveyance
(Sequence initiation requirement)
stop point corresponds to a DRIVE (MB1/PB18) When the following requirement is met, the permitted?
position where the suction cups sequence starts. Y
N
are retreated to feed the IP IP feed conveyance permission OK: Fig. 2.9.1
removed. Conveyance driving
DELAY TB18 To the conveyance path of the up-down IP
removal unit, the IP is not fed with the driving DRICE (MD3/PD31)
motor, but with the belt drive, from the DRIVE (MC1/PB22)
before-side-positioning conveyor. DRIVE (MB2/PB22)
The leading edge of the IP fed by
the grip rollers is detected. Is SB2 closed? Data for determination of IP type is obtained. IP length measurement
N
(The leading edge of the IP Y Fig.2.5.2
shields SB2.) Conveyance driving
DRIVE (MB2/PB26) IP determination
Table 2.4.4 Operation Parameters
Symbol Description Erasure lamp lit? Fig.2.5.3
Value Y
PB18 Suction cup movement (feed leak load standby) 98 p Is SB2 closed within TB14? N
Y
PB26 Conveyance (grip retry) + infinite P N
The erasure Erasure lamp lit
TB14 Grip timeout 1 sec Conveyance stop lamp is lit. DRIVE (LAMP 1-5/ON)
TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec DRIVE (MB 2/OFF) Conveyance stop
TB18 Wait for feed 0.05 sec (Soft) DRIVE(MB2/OFF)(Soft)
END
TR1H0020.EPS
(MB2 excitation OFF) FR1H0326.EPS
SB4 monitoring Symbol Description Value

completed SB4 monitoring completed PB22 Conveyance (feed) + infinite P
PC11 Conveyance (feed) - infinite P
PD31 Conveyance (feed) - infinite P Structure and Operation of Path Changeover Mechanism
The conveyance path of the before-side-positioning
DELAY TB17 TR1H0021.EPS
conveyor is normally in the feed state.
END Upon load request, the convergence path changeover
Relationship between Conveyance Path guide driving solenoid SOLC1 is turned ON to implement
Suction cup HP and IP Driving path changeover.
positioning After the IP has been passed (sensor SB2 is CLOSE OPEN),
the solenoid is turned OFF to reset it to its original state.
Fig. 2.3.2
Level 1 error SB2
13E3 Guide Guide
IP grip failure
when SOLC1 when SOLC1
Operation of Suction Cup Movement (Feed Leak Feed Standby) is OFF is ON
Error handling IP
Cassette ejection 2 SOLC1
Fig. 6.2.1 FR1H0324.EPS SF4
SF2 SF3 SC2
SC2
SF1
SC1
2 4.9 2
BCR
IP path
Before-side-positioning SC1
conveyor
Suction cup movement (feed leak load standby) IP path
FR1H0328.EPS
FR1H0325.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Sequence of IP Length Measurement (3) Sequence of IP Determination
This sequence is performed while the IP is fed by the before-side-positioning conveyor. The sequence for IP type determination and upon detection of out-of-spec IP is as follows.
In response to the result of this IP length measurement, the type of the IP being fed is Fig. 2.5.3 IP Determination
determined.
Fig. 2.5.2 IP Length Measurement

Preprocessing: Fig. 2.5.1, and Fig. 5.6.1 START
START
IP determination As per Table 2.5.3.
IP Determination Criteria
IP leading-edge Is SC1 closed within TC11?
detection timeout N Combination is applicable?
Y N Level 1 error
Y
13A8 IP size is out of
specification
The time required for
IP feed is detected.
The resulting value Start of passage time count Error handling
END
is used for IP Recovered IP load
determination. Fig. 6.3.1 FR1H0330.EPS
Is SC1 opened within TC12?
N Table 2.5.3 IP Determination Criteria
Y
IP trailing-edge IP type Length State of
SC1 passage time (sec)
detection timeout setting x width, SB4 result SA4, 8, TC21 TC21TC22 TC22TC23 TC23TC12
in mm 12, 16 (0.57) (0.570.7) (0.70.83) (0.832.9)
End of passage time count Conveyance stop 14x17 I 430x354 CLOSE OPEN
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (Hard) 14x14 I 354x354 CLOSE OPEN
DRIVE (MD1/OFF) (Soft) 10x12 I 303x252 CLOSE OPEN
DRIVE (MD2/OFF) (Soft)
8x10 I 201x252 CLOSE OPEN
MD3, MC1, MB2 excitation OFF
Conveyance stop 18x24 ST 178x238 OPEN OPEN
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (Hard) 24x30 ST 298x238 OPEN OPEN
DRIVE (MD1/OFF) (Soft) 03B1 Level 0 error 18x24 HR 178x238 OPEN CLOSE
DRIVE (MD2/OFF) (Soft) Conveyance error 24x30 HR 238x298
CLOSE CLOSE
TR1H0023.EPS
END
FR1H0329.EPS

TC11 Feed conveyance timeout 3.5 sec
TC12 IP length measurement timeout 2.9 sec
TR1H0022.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.2.6 Barcode Reading and Side-Positioning (2) Sequence of Barcode Reading
(1) Overall/General Sequence This sequence is performed during IP feeding at the side-positioning conveyor.
This is for the operation of the side-positioning conveyor. The barcode reader (BCR) is located near the inlet of the side-positioning conveyor.
Barcode reading is performed in the middle of conveyance. Fig. 2.6.2 BCR
For 14"x17" and 14"x14" sizes, reverse conveyance is performed before side-positioning to Preprocessing: Fig. 2.6.1
implement IP leading-edge positioning; for other sizes, this IP leading-edge positioning with START
reverse conveyance is not necessary.

A
The side-positioning conveyance grip HP positioning is performed concurrently with the BCR reading start
after-reading grip HP positioning of the reading sequence. DRIVE (BCR/ON)
BCR conveyance driving
For more detail, see 8.2.7 (3) and 8.2.7 (5). Reading is implemented DRIVE (MD3/PD32)
according to IP size and Is the BCR reading completed
ST/HR information. within PD32?
Fig. 2.6.1 Barcode Reading and Side-Positioning (Overall Sequence) In this case, no error N
notification is issued, Y Is the number of retries made greater
but a notification is made than the retry count (ND31)?
Y
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1 upon loading of this IP. Does the IP generation N
comply with the V type?
START N Level 2 error Level 1 error
Y
Level 1 error 23A9 Barcode reading 13A9 Barcode
Does the machine comply with 13AD IP with improper retry reading error
IDT connection type? generation/type detected
N BCR reading complete BCR reading complete
Y DRIVE (BCR/OFF) DRIVE (BCR/OFF)
Other than
In this sequence, the barcode V type IDT request Recovered
TD33 start Side-positioning Side-positioning IP load
located on the back of the IP is Barcode reading conveyance conveyance
When BCR data is process
read during the IP conveyance. Fig.2.6.2 obtained during Wait for PD32 completion Fig.2.6.3 Fig.2.6.3
For 14"x17" and 14"x14", reverse conveyance, a request
Side-positioning Side-positioning
conveyance is performed before is immediately issued BCR reading completed
Side-positioning Fig.2.6.4
side-positioning to position the to the IDT. DRIVE (BCR/OFF) Fig.2.6.4
conveyance
leading edge of the IP. Fig.2.6.3 Error handling Error handling
END BCR retry Recovered IP load
IP side-positioning is performed. Side-positioning Fig.6.10.1 Fig.6.3.1
Retry sequence of
Fig.2.6.4 barcode reading A
FR1H0333.EPS
CSL/IDT information
check BCR Installation Location
Fig.2.6.6 BCR
END
FR1H0331.EPS
PD23
Relationship between Conveyance Path and IP Driving Conveyance grip (HP return) 400 p
PD32 Conveyance (BCR) -972 p
ND31 BCR retry 3 times
TR1H0024.EPS
SB2 SB2
SF4 SF4
SF2 SF3 SC2 SF2 SF3 SC2
SF1 SF1 REAR

SC1 SC1 MD1 Side-positioning
BCR BCR mechanism
Side-positioning conveyor
FR1H0334.EPS
IP IP
SZ1SD3 SZ1SD3
During barcode reading Upon completion of

side-positioning conveyance
FR1H0332.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
(3) Sequence of Side-Positioning Conveyance (4) Sequence of Side-Positioning

The IP conveyed to the side-positioning stopper is side-positioned.
The IP fed from the side-positioning conveyor is positioned for its start point for side-position-
ing top stopper after conveyed to the side-positioning top stopper. The operation of the side-positioning stopper is performed during the sequence of side-
positioning conveyance described in the preceding subsection 8.2.6 (3).
For 14"x17" and 14"x14" sizes, the leading edge of the IP moves beyond the side-positioning
IP sensor (SD3), which is located at the inlet of the subscanning unit, and into the Right-hand side Fig. 2.6.4 Side-Positioning
subscanning unit, upon completion of BCR reading, because of their IP length. Thus, plate of side-
positioning Preprocessing: Fig. 2.6.1, Fig. 2.6.2, Fig. 3.2.1, and Fig. 5.6.1
reverse conveyance is performed to position the leading edge of the IP.
conveyor
START
For other sizes, such reverse conveyance is not necessary. Side guide
(out)
Table 2.6.3a Operation Parameters Side-positioning conveyance grip release
DRIVE (MD2/PD21)
PB13 Suction cup movement (load standby HP) -86 p
DELAY TD11
PD11 Side-positioning (HP stopper) 64 p
PD35 Conveyance (side-positioning) - infinite P
Side-positioning
TD32 Wait for side-positioning return 0.2 sec The IP conveyed (stopper side-positioning 1)
from the before- DRIVE (MD1/PD12)
TR1H0025.EPS The side-positioning
side-positioning
Table 2.6.3b Operation Parameters conveyor to the DELAY TD12 operation is performed
FR1H0338.EPS side-positioning twice in order to increase
Symbol Description Mode 14x17 I 14x14 I 10x12 I 8x10 I 18x24 ST 24x30 ST 18x24 HR 24x30 HR
Side-positioning positional accuracy.
Side-Positioning Mechanism and Driving Section conveyor is
PD34
Conveyance IDT 242 p 242 p side-positioned. (side-positioning 1 back) The second side-positioning
(side-positioning conveyance return) CSL 116 p DRIVE (MD1/PD13) movement is so small that it is
difficult to visually check that
IDT 2.17 sec 2.33 sec 2.24 sec 2.45 sec 2.50 sec 2.25 sec 2.50 sec 2.37 sec
TD34 Side-positioning timeout DELAY TD13 movement.
CSL 2.16 sec 2.32 sec 2.34 sec 2.55 sec 2.60 sec 2.35 sec 2.60 sec 2.47 sec
TR1H0026.EPS Latch Side-positioning
assembly (back side-positioning 2)
Side-Positioning Stopper Driving Mechanism
Fig. 2.6.3 Side-Positioning Conveyance DRIVE (MD1/PD14)
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.6.1, Fig. 2.6.2, Fig. 3.2.1, and Fig. 5.6.1 Sensor arm DELAY TD14
Latch assembly for SD1
START Side-positioning conveyance grip (slow)
FRONT DRIVE (MD2/PD24)
MD3 excitation stability point reset (2-phase) Side-positioning (side-positioning 2 HP)
DRIVE (MD1/PD15)
Is IP size14"x17" or 14"x14"?
N
Y
Side-positioning stopper
Is SD1 closed?
Side-positioning SD1 N
(UP condition) conveyor Y Level 2 error
DELAY TD32 23BC
Guide plate FRONT Side-positioning operation
error
Return conveyance driving
Latch assembly DRIVE (MD3/PD34)
Belt Side-positioning
Column of latch assembly HP positioning
Guide of side-positioning stopper MD1 Fig.2.6.5
DELAY TD32 OK
Guide plate
Shaft Side-positioning mechanism END
FR1H0337.EPS
FR1H0339.EPS
The IP stopper Suction cup movement
located at Side-positioning movement
(HP stopper) (load standby HP)
IP stopper the edge of the DRIVE (MB1/PB13)
Side-positioning stopper unit is turned DRIVE (MD1/PD11)
UP condition Table 2.6.4a Operation Parameters
(as seen from right) ON (UP condition). Side-positioning driving
DRIVE (MD3/PD35)
PD21 Conveyance grip release 256 p
Latch assembly Column of latch assembly
Is SD3 closed within TD34? PD24 Conveyance grip (slow) 144 p
Guide of side-positioning stopper N
Y TD11 Wait for settlement of IP that is not side-positioned 0.2 sec
Conveyance stop
Guide plate TD12 Wait for side-positioning return 0.1 sec
Shaft DRIVE (MD3/OFF)
(Soft) TD13 Wait for re-side-positioning 0.1 sec
Conveyance stop
MD3 excitation OFF TD14
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) Wait for settlement of IP that has been side-positioned 0.2 sec
Side-positioning stopper (Hard) Level 0 error TR1H0027.EPS
03B3 Side-positioning Table 2.6.4b Operation Parameters
Side-positioning stopper conveyance inlet
Symbol Description 14x17 I 14x14 I 10x12 I 8x10 I 18x24 ST 24x30 ST 18x24 HR 24x30 HR
DOWN condition END Conveyance error
(as seen from right) FR1H0335.EPS PD12 Side-positioning (stopper side-positioning 1) 98 p 98 p 778 p 778 p 872 p 872 p 840 p 440 p
FR1H0336.EPS
PD13 Side-positioning (side-positioning 1 back) 68 p 68 p 68 p 68 p 68 p 68 p 34 p 34 p
PD14 Side-positioning (back side-positioning 2) -68 p -68 p -68 p -68 p -68 p -68 p -34 p -34 p
PD15 Side-positioning (side-positioning 2 HP) 162 p 162 p 842 p 842 p 936 p 936 p 904 p 504 p
TR1H0028.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
(5) Detailed Sequence of Side-Positioning HP Positioning Fig. 2.6.5 Side-Positioning HP Positioning (2/2)
A
In this sequence, the home position of the IP side-positioning mechanism of the side-posi-
tioning conveyor is located. 1-pulse driving process parameter
2w-1-2 Side-positioning 1-pulse driving
It is performed during initial operation and side-positioning operation. phase (HP movement 1)
DRIVE (MD1/PD52)
Fig. 2.6.5 Side-Positioning HP Positioning (1/2)
Is SD1 closed within TD54?
N
Y
START
MD1 excitation
stability point reset (2-phase)
MB1 excitation
stability point reset (2-phase) 2-phase/1-pulse Side-positioning driving
driving for Side-positioning (HP movement 2)
Side-positioning driving (initial driving) driver initialization HP detection DRIVE (MD1/PD54)
DRIVE (MD1/PD50)
When OPEN, MD1 is C DELAY TD51

driven to fit the DELAY TD51
actuator into SD1.
Is SD1 closed?
N
Is SD1 closed? Y
Y With deceleration Level 2 error
N 23BA Side-positioning HP
time setting and
LIMIT stop, it is detection retry
Side-positioning driving (positioning) fed by a specified END B
DRIVE (MD1/PD53) amount after
sensor edge Is the number of retries made greater
It is than the retry count (ND51)?
confirmed Side- detection.
Is SD1 closed within TD53? N C
that SD1 positioning N Y
Y
is CLOSE. HP
detection Level 0 error
preparation Side-positioning driving stop
DRIVE (MD1/OFF) 03BC Side-positioning operation
(Soft) error FR1H0342.EPS
DELAY TD51
Side-positioning driving (return)

DRIVE (MD1/PD51)
Return for side- Is SD1 closed within TD52?

positioning HP N Side-positioning Table 2.6.5 Operation Parameters FRONT
Y
detection driving stop Symbol Description Value
Guide plate
preparation DRIVE (MD1/OFF) PD50 Side-positioning (initial driving) 1p
Side-positioning driving stop
(Soft) PD51 Side-positioning (HP return) + infinite P
DRIVE (MD1/OFF)
(Soft) Level 2 error PD52 Side-positioning 1-pulse driving (HP movement 1) -1 p
23BB Side-positioning PD53 Side-positioning (HP positioning) - infinite P
DELAY TD51 HP detection PD54 Side-positioning (HP movement 2) -18 p
preparation retry
TD51 Wait for side-positioning HP settlement 0.5 sec
SD1
TD52 Side-positioning HP detection preparation retry 1 sec
A B
FR1H0340.EPS TD53 Side-positioning HP detection timeout 8 sec
Sensor SD1 and Its Actuator TD54 Side-positioning HP 1-pulse driving timeout 10 sec
ND51 Side-positioning HP retry 3 times
Sensor arm TR1H0029.EPS
Latch assembly for SD1
MD1 Belt
Side-positioning mechanism (view seen from above)

FR1H0343.EPS
MD1 Belt SD1

FR1H0341.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(6) Sequence of CSL/IDT Information Check (7) Sequence of IP Determination Check

HR/ST information is updated according to the barcode information.
This is the process performed by the controller.
The IDT information read, machine type, and CSL information are identified, and whether Fig. 2.6.7 IP Determination Check
the ID and other information has been entered/registered is checked accordingly.
Fig. 2.6.6 CSL/IDT Information Check
START

Is the IP size Is the IP size 24x30 HR? Is the IP size Is the IP size
START 8x10 ST? 18x24 HR? 18x24 ST?
N N N N
Y Y Y Y
CSL: Logical reading and high- CSL: Logical reading or high-
sensitivity reading are sensitivity reading is END
disabled in Config Setting. enabled in Config Setting.
BC information BC information BC information BC information
IDT
ST HR HR ST
HR ST ST HR
Does the IDT respond within TD33? Wait for
N
Y CSL input END END END END
No MPM code available ID not registered

Level 1 error Updated to Updated to
13A8
ID information OK Out-of-spec IP size IP size = 1824ST IP size = 1824HR
Level 1 error Level 1 error

Level 1 error
13AE
No MPM code available
13AC ID information 13AF
IDT line error
not registered Error handling END END
Recovered IP load
Fig. 6.3.1
Error handling Error handling
Error handling
ID information IDT line error
Recovered IP load
not registered END
Fig.6.3.1 FR1H0345.EPS
IP determination Fig.6.8.1 Fig.6.7.1
check
Fig.2.6.7
END
FR1H0344.EPS

TD33 IDT response timeout 120 sec
TR1H0030.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.2.7 Reading (2) Sequence of Reading Preparation
(1) Overall/General Sequence This is for the operation of the subscanning unit.
In this sequence, prior to IP data reading, preparation for IP conveyance is performed.
In this sequence, the IP data is read and then the IP is conveyed to the conveyance inverting
stocker. Fig. 2.7.2 Reading Preparation
Reading preparation and reading are performed by the subscanning unit.
Fig. 2.7.1 Reading (Overall Sequence) START
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1 Table 2.7.2 Operation Parameters

Conveyance driving Symbol Description Value
START DRIVE (MD3/PD36) PD21 Conveyance grip release 256 p
PD36 Conveyance (preparation for reading) -180 p
Driven shaft grip driving (fast) TZ34 Driven shaft grip timeout 2 sec
DRIVE (MZ3/ON) TR1H0031.EPS
Preparation prior to IP reading Reading preparation
Fig.2.7.2
Is SZ3 closed within TZ34?
N
Movement of elevation Y
The IP conveyed is scanned. Reading unit (feed) permitted Driven shaft grip stop
Fig.2.7.3 Fig.2.3.1 Driven shaft DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
grip driving (fast) Driven shaft grip stop (Soft)
DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
CSL/IDT information check 2 (Hard)
03C9
Level 0 error
Fig.2.7.7 Driven shaft grip error
END Side-positioning After-reading conveyance After-reading

FR1H0346.EPS Side-positioning grip release
conveyance grip grip release conveyance
DRIVE (MD2/PD21)
release DRIVE (ME1/PD21) grip release
Relationship between Conveyance Path and IP Operation Both of the releases
should be completed.
SB2 SB2
END
FR1H0348.EPS
IP conveyance during reading preparation Location of driving shaft/driven shaft and nearby mechanism (initial condition)
SF4 SF4 Light-collecting Laser beam line

SF2 SF3 SC2 SF2 SF3 SC2 FFM (MZ1)
mirror
CCW: reading
SF1 SF1 conveyance MD3
SC1 SC1 After-reading Driving Driven
conveyor side shaft shaft
BCR BCR
SZ2
Conveyance
direction SZ1
Side-positioning
IP IP SD3 reference/location
of side-positioning latch
SZ1 SD3 SZ1 SD3 MZ2 IP
Side-positioning Subscanning unit Side-positioning conveyor
conveyor side
Sensor arm MZ3 MZ2 MZ3 Sensor arm
During reading preparation and start During reading for SZ2 Sensor arm for SZ3
FR1H0347.EPS SZ3 for SZ3
FRH0349.EPS
SZ2 SZ3
Sensor arm Cam Cam

for SZ2
MZ2 MZ3
Grip (solid line): SZ2 (OPEN) Grip (solid line): SZ3 (CLOSE)
Grip release (dotted line):SZ2 (CLOSE) Grip release (dotted line):SZ3 (OPEN)
FR1H0350.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
Table 2.7.3a Operation Parameters
(3) Sequence of Reading
PD22 Conveyance grip 144 p
This is for the operation of the subscanning unit. Fig. 2.7.3 Reading (2/3) PE12 Conveyance grip -256 p
TZ12 Driving shaft grip start (ST/HR) 2.10/ 4.20 sec
In this sequence, the IP data is scanned. A
TZ15 Wait for subscanning stop 0.3 sec
Fig. 2.7.3 Reading (1/3) Preprocessing: Fig. 2.7.1 End-of-screen interrupt?
TZ21 Driving shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10 sec
N TZ22 Lower limit for driving shaft grip spec ( ST/HR) 1.6 / 3.3 sec
Y
Level 0 error
0549 TZ23 Upper limit for driving shaft grip spec ( ST/HR) 2.8 / 6.0 sec
START From End-of-screen error
the scanner TZ24 Driving shaft grip release timeout (fast/HR) 2 sec
board DELAY TZ14
TZ31 Driven shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10s ec
Both of the releases FFM reading speed setting TZ32 Upper limit for driven shaft grip spec ( ST/HR) 1.2 / 3.0 sec
FFM stop DRIVE (MZ1/OFF)
should be completed. (Soft) TZ33 Upper limit for driven shaft grip spec ( ST/HR) 2.4 / 4.9 sec
TR1H0032.EPS
FFM reading driving
DRIVE (MZ1/ON) DELAY TZ15
Is SD3 opened within TD35? After-reading conveyance grip

N DRIVE (1/PE12) Side-positioning conveyance grip
Y Level 0 error DRIVE (MD2/PD22)
Conveyance error
03C1
(reading conveyance) Is SE1 closed? Is SD2 closed?
Y
To <Sequence N
N
Y
IP feed permission start condition> After-reading Side-

From the scanner board Does the IP leading-edge detection described in Fig. 2.4.1 conveyance
Level 2 error positioning
The scanner issues an interrupt upon 23DC After-reading conveyance Level 2 error conveyance
grip
interrupt occur within TZ11? grip operation error 23BF
Side-positioning grip operation error grip
detection of the leading edge or at the N
end of the screen, and the conveyance Y After-reading conveyance
software receives this interrupt. Level 0 error To isolate causes grip HP positioning Side-positioning conveyance grip
03C2 Reading IP leading of TZ11 OUT, Fig. 2.7.4 HP positioning
edge detection error the timer is set Fig. 2.7.5
to TZ11 > TD35. Driving shaft grip release driving
DRIVE (MZ2/ON)
Variations in
Driven shaft
FFM speed grip release Is SZ2 closed within TA24?
N
DELAY TZ12 DELAY TZ13 W.F. monitoring are monitored (fast) Y Driving shaft grip release stop
and the time DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) (Soft)
Driving shaft Fig. 2.7.3 (3/3) upon occurrence
Driven shaft grip Driving shaft grip release stop
grip driving release driving of such variations DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) Level 0 error
03C8
DRIVE DRIVE (MZ3/ON) B is measured. Releases should be (Hard) Driving shaft grip release error
(MZ2/ON) TZ31 START completed for both
TZ21 START of the parallel grips.
Timer START
Is SZ2 opened Timer START END
FR1H0352.EPS
within TZ21? Is SZ3 opened within TZ31?
N N N
Y Y
Table 2.7.3b Operation Parameters
Driving shaft grip stop Driven shaft grip
Driving shaft Symbol Description Mode 14x17 I 14x14 I 10x12 I 8x10 I 18x24 ST 24x30 ST 18x24 HR 24x30 HR
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) release stop Driven
Driving grip release Driven shaft grip Normal reading IP trailing-edge detection timeout 20.1 sec 16.0 sec 13.4 sec 8.0 sec 6.8 sec 13.1 sec 11.5 sec 17.8 sec
(Soft) DRIVE (MZ3/OFF) shaft
TD35
shaft stop release stop
(Soft) grip TZ11 Subscanning IP leading-edge detection timeout 21.1 sec 17.0 sec 14.4 sec 9.0 sec 7.8 sec 14.1 sec 12.5 sec 18.8 sec
grip DRIVE DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
TZ13 Driven shaft grip release start 18.5 sec 14.5 sec 11.8 sec 6.4 sec 5.2 sec 11.6 sec 10.4 sec 16.8 sec
Level 0 error (MZ2/OFF) (Hard) Level 0 error release
(NOTE) 03C6 (NOTE) TZ14 Wait for subscanning stop Standard reading 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec
Driving shaft (Hard) 03C7 Driven shaft grip
grip error (conveyance compensation for logical reading) 18x38 portrait center 0 sec
Timer STOP Timer STOP release error
10x8 landscape upper right 0 sec 0 sec
Timer > TZ23 or 10x12 portrait upper right 0 sec 0 sec
Timer <TZ22 ? Timer > TZ33 or Timer <TZ32 14x14 top 0 sec
Y N Y
N
N
Y N
Y 10x8 upper right 0 sec
Error log Pantomo portrait right center 0.5 sec
Error log
(detailed information)
(detailed information) TR1H0033.EPS
Timer data recording
Level 2 error
23C6 Level 2 error 23C7 Driven shaft grip release
Driving shaft grip operation error
A operation error
NOTE: It is affected by the designation of reading mode (HR/ST). FR1H0351.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 2.7.3 Reading (3/3) (4) Detailed Sequence of After-Reading Conveyance Grip HP Positioning
B This is for the after-reading conveyance grip HP positioning operation performed in the IP
reading sequence.
W.F monitorin latch reset
(to SNS board) Fig. 2.7.4 After-Reading Conveyance Grip HP Positioning (1/2)

Timer STRT
START
W.F. error?
N ME1 excitation
Y stability point reset (2-phase)
2-phase/1-pulse driving
for driver initialization
Grip driving (initial driving)
DRIVE (ME1/PD60)
W.F.
monitoring C
Level 2 error
23C5 DELAY TD61
FFM driving W.F. error
At home position of side-positioning grip

W.F. monitoring latch reset Is SE1 closed?
(to SNS board) Y
N
The rollers are

Grip driving (positioning) in the grip state.
End-of-screen interrupt? DRIVE (ME1/PD63)
N
Y
Is SE1 closed within TD63? The wire should no be

Side- N tense.
Y
END positioning
FR1H0353.EPS
for grip HP Driving system of side-positioning grip
detection Grip driving stop
IP conveyance during reading Location of driving shaft/driven shaft and nearby mechanism (initial condition) preparation DRIVE (ME1/OFF)
(soft)
ME1
After-reading conveyor side Light-collecting Laser beam line
Conveyance FFM (MZ1) mirror
DELAY TD61 REAR
direction
IP CCW: reading MD3
conveyance Driving Driven
shaft shaft
Grip driving (return)
DRIVE (ME1/PD61)
SZ2
SZ1 Is SD2 closed within Sensor arm
Side-positioning TD62? SE1
SD3 reference/location N
Side-positioning of side-positioning latch Y Cam
MZ2 conveyor side Return for (for grip open/close)
Subscanning unit Side-positioning conveyor grip HP Grip driving stop
Sensor arm detection
MZ3 for SZ3 MZ2 MZ3 Sensor arm Grip driving stop DRIVE (ME1/OFF)
Sensor arm SZ3 preparation (soft)
for SZ3 DRIVE (ME1/OFF) Sensor arm
for SZ2 (soft)
SZ2 SZ3
FR1H0354.EPS Level 2 error
After-reading conveyance SE1
Sensor arm Cam Cam 23DB
grip HP detection CLOSE
for SZ2 DELAY TD61 preparation retry
FR1H0357.EPS
MZ2 MZ3
Grip (solid line): SZ2 (OPEN) Grip (solid line): SZ3 (CLOSE)
Grip release (dotted line):SZ2 (CLOSE) Grip release (dotted line):SZ3 (OPEN) A B
FR1H0356.EPS
FR1H0355.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 2.7.4 After-Reading Conveyance Grip HP Positioning (2/2) (5) Detailed Sequence of Side-Positioning Conveyance Grip HP Positioning
This side-positioning conveyance grip home positioning operation is performed, concurrently

A
with the after-reading conveyance grip home positioning operation, at the end of the reading
sequence described in section 8.2.7 (3).
1-pulse driving process
Parameter Fig. 2.7.5 Side-Positioning Conveyance Grip HP Positioning (1/2)
2w-1-2-phase Grip pulse driving (HP movement 1)
DRIVE (ME1/PD63)
Is SE1 closed within TD64? START

N
Y
MD2 excitation stability point reset

(2-phase) 2-phase/1-pulse driving
MD2 excitation stability
point reset (2-phase) for driver initialization
Grip driving (initial driving)
DRIVE (MD1/PD60)
At home position of side-positioning grip
Grip driving
(HP movement 2) C
DRIVE (ME1/PD64)
Grip HP DELAY TD61
detection
DELAY TD61 The rollers are
Is SD2 closed? in the grip state.
Y
N
The wire should

Is SE1 closed? no be tense.
N Grip driving (positioning)
Y Right-hand side
DRIVE (MD2/PD63) plate of side-
positioning
Level 2 error conveyor
Side guide
23DA After-reading conveyance
grip HP detection retry Side- Is SD2 closed within TD63?
positioning N
B Y
for grip HP
detection Driving system of side-positioning grip
than the retry count (ND61)? Grip driving stop
END preparation
N C DRIVE (MD2/OFF)
Y For side guide out/return
(soft)
For side-positioning grip open/close
Level 0 error DELAY TD61 MD2 Sensor arm
After-reading conveyance
03DC
grip operation error
FR1H0358.EPS Grip driving (return)
DRIVE (MD2/PD61)
SD2
Is SD2 opened within TD62? 2-stage cam
Return for N
grip HP Y Sensor arm
detection Grip driving stop SD2
preparation Grip driving stop DRIVE (MD2/OFF) CLOSE
Table 2.7.4 Operation Parameters DRIVE (MD2/OFF) (soft)
Symbol Description Value (soft) Level 2 error FR1H0361.EPS
PD60 Conveyance grip (initial driving) 1p Side-positioning

23BE conveyance
PD61 Conveyance grip (HP return) - infinite p DELAY TD61
grip HP detection
PD63 Conveyance grip (HP positioning) + infinite p
preparation retry
PD64 Conveyance grip (HP positioning 2) 6p A B
FR1H0360.EPS
TD61 Wait for side-positioning grip HP settlement 0.5 sec
TD62 Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation timeout 1.2 sec
TD63 Side-positioning grip HP detection timeout 13.3 sec
TD64 Side-positioning HP 1-pulse driving timeout 10 sec
ND61 Conveyance grip HP retry 3 times Cam
TR1H0034.EPS
After-reading conveyance grip mechanism

FR1H0359.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
Fig. 2.7.5 Side-Positioning Conveyance Grip HP Positioning (2/2) (6) Sequence of After-Reading Conveyance
This is for the operation of the after-reading conveyor and erasure conveyor.
A
In this sequence, the IP that has been read is fed into the conveyance inverting stocker via
the after-reading conveyor and erasure conveyor.
1-pulse driving process parameter
2w-1-2- Grip pulse driving (HP movement 1) Fig. 2.7.6 After-Reading Conveyance
phase DRIVE (MD1/PD63)
Is SD2 closed within TD64? START
N
Y
MD2 excitation After-reading conveyance driving

stability point reset (2-phase) DRIVE (ME2/PE21)
DRIVE (MF1/PF11)
Is SF1 closed within TF11?
Grip HP Grip driving (HP movement 2) N
detection DRIVE (MD2/PD64) Y After-reading conveyance stop
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
MF1, ME2 excitation OFF
DELAY TD61
Level 0 error
Conveyance error
03D1
Does SF4 remain closed (after-reading conveyance)

Is SD2 closed? The actuations of the during TF12?
N sensors during normal N
Y Y
operation are as follows:
Level 2 error SF2: OPEN CLOSE After-reading conveyance stop
23BD Side-positioning conveyance grip SF4: OPEN CLOSE DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
HP detection retry DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
END
Monitoring of SF4 is MF1, ME2 excitation OFF
B implemented in case SF2 Is SF2 opened?
N
Is the number of retries made greater becomes faulty. Y
than the retry count (ND61)? Level 0 error
N C 03D2 Conveyance error
Y
(Switchback)
After-reading conveyance stop
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (hard)
Level 0 error
03BF Side-positioning grip
operation error FR1H0362.EPS SF4 normal?
N
Y
Table 2.7.5 Operation Parameters 23D2

Level 2 error
Description
Conveyance sensor error
Symbol Value
1p END
PD60 Conveyance grip (initial driving)
Side-positioning FR1H0364.EPS
PD61 Conveyance grip (HP return) - infinite p mechanism

PD63 Conveyance grip (HP positioning) + infinite p
PD64 Conveyance grip (HP positioning 2) 6p
0.5 sec
Side-positioning Table 2.7.6a Operation Parameters
TD61 Wait for side-positioning grip HP settlement
top stopper
TD62 Side-positioning grip HP detection 1.2 sec Symbol Description Value
preparation timeout PE21 Conveyance (after-reading conveyance) - infinite P
TD63 Side-positioning grip HP detection timeout 13.3 sec PF11 Conveyance (after-reading conveyance) - infinite P
TD64 Side-positioning HP 1-pulse driving timeout 10 sec TF11 After-reading conveyance IP leading-edge detection timeout 2.67 sec
ND61 Conveyance grip HP retry 3 times TR1H0036.EPS
TR1H0035.EPS SD3 Table 2.7.6b Operation Parameters
TF12 After-reading conveyance IP trailing-edge detection timeout 3.17 sec 3.01 sec 2.9 sec 2.68 sec 2.63 sec 2.89 sec 2.63 sec 2.76 sec
TR1H0037.EPS
Side-positioning conveyance
grip mechanism Cam
FR1H0363.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(7) Sequence of CSL/IDT Information Check 2 8.2.8 Movement of Elevation Unit (Load)
This is the process performed by the controller. (1) Overall/General Sequence
It is performed in response to the result of the sequence described in 8.2.6 (6) Sequence of In this sequence, the elevation unit is moved to a designated shelf of the cassette set unit in
CSL/IDT Information Check performed at the end of BCR reading and side-positioning. order to feed IPs.
If the ID information is obtained normally, the process continues. This sequence cannot be performed if the suction cups are not in their home position.
For more detail, see Section 8.2.3 Movement of Elevation Unit (Feed).
Fig. 2.7.7 CSL/IDT Information Check 2
Fig. 2.8.1 Movement of Elevation Unit (Load)
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1, Fig. 3.1.1, Fig. 5.6.1, Fig. 5.7.1, Fig. 5.8.1
START
START
(Sequence initiation requirement)
Initiation is awaited under the following
Is the movement of the elevation unit permitted? condition.
CSL: Logical reading and high-sensitivity N The process waits until the next cassette
reading are disabled in Config Setting. Y
The suction cup is set and reading preparation for the IP
HP is confirmed. in that cassette is completed.
Is SB1 closed?
N
IDT or CSL: Logical reading or high-sensitivity Y Level 2 error
23E8 Suction cup HP return error
reading is enabled in Config Setting.
Same as in A DELAY TB17
Fig. 2.3.1 Retry at the time
Suction cup HP positioning of HP detection
Movement of elevation unit failure
Wait for ID information registration? MB3 moves the DRIVE (MB1/PB_) Fig. 2.3.2
N
Y elevation unit to Suction cup movement
a designed shelf. (HP feed leak)
For its parameters, DRIVE (MB1/PB19)
see Table 2.8.1a.
A
Is SB3 closed?
N
Wait for ID information Wait for Y
CSL input Elevation unit HP positioning
registration from IDT
Retry at the Fig. 2.3.3
It is confirmed time of shelf Is the number of retries made greater
that the elevation position than the retry count (NB101)?
unit is in a proper Y
detection N
shelf position. Level 0 error
Suction cup movement failure 03DE
Level 2 error Elevation shelf
END (HP load standby) 23DE Elevation shelf movement error
FR1H0365.EPS DRIVE (MB1/PB14) movement error retry
To sequence initiation A
requirement in Fig. 2.10.1 IP load permission OK FR1H0366.EPS
END
Table 2.8.1a Elevation Unit Movement Parameters (PB_)
Movement of Pulse
Symbol
elevation unit count (P)
Topmost stage 2nd stage PB112 -3,462

Topmost stage 3rd stage PB113 -6930
Topmost stage 4th stage PB114 -10,392
2nd stage topmost stage PB121 3,470
2nd stage 3rd stage PB123 -3,460
2nd stage 4th stage PB124 -6,922
Table 2.8.1 Operation Parameters 3rd stage topmost stage PB131 6,930
Symbol Description Value 3rd stage 2nd stage PB132 3,460

PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby) 86 p 3rd stage 4th stage PB134 -3,462
PB19 Suction cup movement (HP feed leak) -12 p
4th stage topmost stage PB141 10,392
4th stage 2nd stage PB142 6,922
NB101 Elevation movement retry 2 times
TR1H0038.EPS 4th stage 3rd stage PB143 3,462
TR1H0039.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.2.9 Erasure (2) Sequence of Before-Erasure Conveyance
(1) Overall/General Sequence In this sequence, after path changeover in the erasure conveyor, the IP is fed from the
This is for the operation of the erasure conveyor. conveyance inverting stocker to the erasure section.
In this sequence, the path of the erasure conveyor is changed over to feed the IP in the
inverting stocker to the erasure conveyor where the IP data is erased. Fig. 2.9.2 Before-Erasure Conveyance Table 2.9.2 Operation Parameters
The erasure lamp is lit (turned on), if unlit, once the IP length measurement is completed Symbol Description Value
normally. Preprocessing: Fig. 2.9.1 PF12 Conveyance (before-erasure conveyance) 1,044 p

TF13 Wait for switchback 0.2 sec
Meanwhile, the erasure lamp is unlit (turned off) if the second IP is not in the feed condition START
TF14 Before-erasure conveyance IP leading-edge 2 sec
at the end of erasure conveyance. detection timeout
TR1H0040.EPS
Conveyance changeover guide driving
Fig. 2.9.1 Erasure (Overall Sequence) DRIVE (SOLF1/ON)
START DELAY TF13
Is the after-reading conveyance permitted?

N
Y
Is SF2 closed within TF14? Before-erasure driving
N DRIVE(MF1/PF12)
Y
After-reading conveyance IP feed conveyance
MF1 excitation OFF
permission OK
(Sequence initiation requirement) Level 0 error Is SF1 opened?
After path changeover, the IP is END N
loaded from the inverting stocker to Before-erasure conveyance If the following requirement is met 03D3 Conveyance error Y
as logic, the sequence is initiated. (before erasure) MF1 excitation OFF
the erasure conveyor. Fig.2.9.2
After-reading conveyance Forced terminationof reading
The data of the IP conveyed permission OK: Fig. 2.10.1
Erasure conveyance END Level 0 error
is erased. 03D4
Fig.2.9.3 Branch path changeover
guide operation error
Is only one IP left in the machine? FR1H0369.EPS
N
Y Two IPs
Erasure lamp
One IP Inverting Stocker
turn-off
Erasure lamp turn-off and preheating
DRIVE (LAMP1-5/preheating)
END
FR1H0367.EPS
IP inverting stocker
(located under
the top frame)
Relationship between Conveyance Path and IP Operation
SB2 SB2
Path Changeover Mechanism
IP IP path
SF4 SF4
SF2 SF3 SC2 SF2 SF3 SC2
Guide Guide
SF1 SF1 SOLF1 SOLF1
SC1 SC1
ON OFF
BCR BCR
IP
FRONT
FR1H0371.EPS
IP path
SZ1SD3 SZ1SD3 SOLF1
IP path Guide
During before-erasure conveyance During after-erasure conveyance FR1H0370.EPS
FR1H0368 EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
(3) Sequence of Erasure Conveyance (4) Sequence of After-Erasure Conveyance
In this sequence, the IP is erased and fed to the IP removal conveyor. In this sequence, after the IP is erased, it is fed to the up-down IP removal unit via the
After this sequence, the erasure lamp turn-off process is performed. For more detail, see before-side-positioning conveyor.
Section 8.2.9 (1). This operation is collaboratively performed by the erasure conveyor, before-side-positioning
conveyor, and up-down IP removal unit.
Fig. 2.9.3 Erasure Conveyance
Fig. 2.9.4 After-Erasure Conveyance
START
START
Is SF3 closed, as the conveyance
of PF14 is performed with erasure
Is SF2 opened? conveyance?
Y Y After-erasure conveyance
N N
DRIVE (SOLC1/ON)
Order DRIVE (MF1/PF15)
of activation DRIVE (MC1/PC12)
DRIVE (MB2/PB23)
Erasure conveyance
2w-1-2 phase TF18 START
DRIVE (MF1/PF13)
TF17 START
TF21 START
Is SF2 opened within TF15? Is SF3 opened

N
Y within TF17?
N
Y If the IP is small, the initial value of SF4 may be OPEN.
Erasure conveyance stop

Erasure conveyance stop DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
Elevation unit DRIVE (MF1/OFF) MF1 excitation OFF Is SC2 opened within TF18?
N
movement (load) (soft) Y
Level 0 error
03D5 Conveyance error
(erasure)
2w-1-2 phase Specified erasure conveyance
DRIVE (MF1/PF14)
Is SB2 closed?
MF1 excitation N
Y
stability point reset (2-phase)
Is SB2 closed
END within TB21?
FR1H0372.EPS
N
Y
After-erasure conveyance stop After-erasure conveyance stop
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
IP inverting stocker DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF)
DRIVE (SOLF/OFF) DRIVE (SOLF/OFF)
MF1, MC1, MB2 MF1, MC1, MB2
END
excitation OFF excitation OFF
IP path Level 0 error Level 0 error
Table 2.9.3 Operation Parameters 03D6 Conveyance error 03D7 Convergence path
Symbol Description Value (after erasure) changeover guide operation
PF13 Conveyance (erasure 1) + infinite p error FR1H0374.EPS
PF14 Conveyance (erasure 2) 15,992 p

Erasure lamp
TF15 Erasure conveyance IPtrailing-edge Variable Table 2.9.4 Operation Parameters
detection timeout depending Symbol Description Value
on exposure PB23 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) - infinite p
TR1H0041.EPS FRONT IP path PC12 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) + infinite p
PF15 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) + infinite p
TB21 After-erasure conveyance timeout 3.6 sec
Path changeover TF17 After-erasure conveyance IP trailing-edge detection timeout 1 2.2 sec
mechanism TF18 After-erasure conveyance IP trailing-edge detection timeout 2 2.8 sec
Erasure conveyor TR1H0042.EPS
FR1H0373.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
8.2.10 IP Load (2) Sequence of Load Conveyance
(1) Overall/General Sequence This is for the operation of the IP removal unit.
In order to load the IP into the cassette, the IP is conveyed to the grip rollers of the IP re-
This is for the operation of the IP removal unit. moval unit.
In this sequence, the IP fed via the side-positioning conveyor and erasure conveyor is loaded Driving is performed collectively for the side-positioning conveyor and erasure conveyor
into the cassette. during erasure conveyance.
Fig. 2.10.1 IP Load (Overall Sequence)
Fig. 2.10.2 Load Conveyance
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1, Fig. 3.1.1, and Fig. 5.4.3
START Preprocessing: Fig. 2.10.1
START
Is the IP load permitted?
N
Y (Sequence initiation requirement)
When the following requirement is
The IP that has been erased is conveyed
via the before-side-positioning conveyor to After-erasure et, the sequence starts. Is SB2 closed within TB22?
the up-down IP removal unit. conveyance IP load permission OK: Fig. 2.8.1 N
Y
Fig. 2.9.4
The IP is conveyed to the cassette inlet. Load conveyance

Load conveyance stop
Fig. 2.10.2 Load conveyance stop DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
The IP conveyed is sucked by the suction
Load suction DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (hard)
cups.
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (hard) DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft)
Fig. 2.10.3
DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft) MF1, MC1, MB2 excitation OFF
The IP sucked is loaded into the cassette. Load suction conveyance
Fig. 2.10.4 Level 0 error
03B2 Conveyance error
It is checked if the IP loaded has been After-reading conveyance (during load conveyance)
processed normally. Erasure check
permission OK
Fig. 2.10.5 To the sequence END
FR1H0377.EPS
initiation requirement
END in Fig. 2.9.1 FR1H0375.EPS
Table 2.10.2 Operation Parameters Structure and Operation of Path Changeover Mechanism
Symbol Description Value The conveyance path of the before-side-positioning
Relationship between Conveyance Path and IP Driving conveyor is normally in the feed state.
TB22 Load timeout 2.9sec
TR1H0043.EPS
Upon load request, the convergence path changeover
guide driving solenoid SOLC1 is turned ON to implement
path changeover.
SB2 SB2 IP After the IP has been passed (sensor SB2 is CLOSE OPEN),
the solenoid is turned OFF to reset it to its original state.
Guide Guide
when SOLC1 when SOLC1
SF4 SF4 is OFF is ON
SF2 SF3 SC2 IP SF2 SF3 SC2
SOLC1
SF1 SF1
SC1 SC1
BCR BCR
SC2
SZ1SD3 SZ1SD3
At the start of IP load conveyance At the end of IP load conveyance IP path

FR1H0376.EPS
Before-side-positioning SC1
conveyor
IP path
FR1H0378.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
(3) Load Suction Sequence (4) Sequence of Load Suction Conveyance
This is for the operation of the elevation unit. This is for the operation of the elevation unit.
The IP fed from the grip rollers of the up-down IP removal unit is sucked by the suction cups. In this sequence, the IP sucked by the suction cups is loaded into the cassette. It is in the
reverse order of IP feed.
Fig. 2.10.3 Load Suction
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.10.1, Fig. 5.4.1, Fig. 5.6.1, Fig. 5.7.1, and Fig. 6.3.2 Fig. 2.10.4 Load Suction Conveyance
START Preprocessing: Fig. 2.10.1, Fig. 5.4.1, Fig. 5.6.1, Fig. 5.7.1, and Fig. 6.3.2
The grip rollers convey START

Leak valve close DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) the IP in the return Roller rotation Value
Symbol Description
direction at the same (at the equal speed of the arm)
The suction cups move from Suction movement The suction cups move PB16 Suction cup movement (load suction load leak) 264p
Suction cup movement speed of the suction cups.
the load standby position to (load standby load suction) from the HP to the (HP load standby) Suction cup DRIVE (MB2/PB25) PB17 Suction cup movement (load leak HP) -250p
the maximum retreat position DRIVE (MB1/PB15) load standby position. DRIVE (MB1/PB14) load preparation PB25 Conveyance (load suction synchronization) - infinite p
The suction cups suck Suction cup movement
(see illustration below). the trailing edge of the (load suction load leak)
TB16 Wait for load leak 0.1 sec
Suction pump ON DRIVE (PB1/ON) TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec
IP and load it into the DRIVE (MB1/PB16)
TR1H0045.EPS
cassette
Roller rotation stop
It is detected that the suction (see illustration below).
Is SB5 closed within TB11? DRIVE (MB2/OFF)
cups suck the trailing edge of N (soft)
the IP. Y Level 2 error While the suction cups
OPEN: IP suction not 23E4 Load IP suction failure Is SB5 closed?
load the IP into the N
completed retry Y
CLOSE: IP suction cassette, it is checked
DELAY TB15 IP leak if the IP is not dropped. 13E5
Level 1 error
completed DRIVE (PB1/OFF) Load IP dropped
Load IP Suction leak DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
DRIVE (SVB1/ON) suction
END failure After the suction cups IP leak
DELAY TB17 retry load the IP into the Suction pump OFF DRIVE (PB1/OFF) DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
cassette and air leak DRIVE (SVB1/ON)
Suction cup
HP positioning occurs, the IP is released
DELAY TB16
Fig. 2.3.2 from the suction cups. DELAY TB17 Remedial
Is the number of retries made greater After load leak, the sequence
suction cups return to Suction movement (load leak HP) at the time
than the retry count (NB11)? Suction cup
N their home position. DRIVE (MB1/PB17) when the IP
Y HP positioning
Fig. 2.3.2 is dropped
Is SB1 closed?
Level 1 error Y Leak valve suction condition
13E4 N
Load IP suction failure DRIVE (SVB1/OFF)
Leak valve suction condition Level 2 error
Load suction 23E8 Error handling
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) failure Suction HP check Suction cup HP return failure
Cassette ejection 2
Error handling Fig. 6.2.1
Suction cup HP positioning
Cassette ejection 2
Fig. 6.2.1 FR1H0379.EPS
Fig. 2.3.2
Leak disabled
PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby) 86 p
DRIVE (SB1/OFF)
PB15 Suction cup movement (load standby load suction) -100 p FR1H0382.EPS
TB11 Feed suction timeout 1 sec

END
TB15 Wait for load suction 0 sec
TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1sec
TR1H0044.EPS
Pump/Suction Cup Operation Operation of Suction Cup Movement (Load Standby Load Suction)
Operation of Suction Cup Movement (Load Standby Load Suction) Pump/Suction Cup Operation
Atmospheric pressure
Atmospheric pressure
SVB 1
ON 78
.9 2
SVB 1 PB 1
Cassette inner frame
PB 1
OFF OFF
2 7.6 when the cover is closed
18.97 ON
SB5
OPEN
SB5
CLOSE Unit: mm
23.83 5.5
IP accommodation position
(trailing edge at the time when IP is
0.55 5.26 IP trailing-edge stop position placed at the bottom of the cassette)
During IP leak IP
Unit: mm
During IP suction IP Suction cup movement (load suction load leak)
Suction cup movement (load standby load suction) FR1H0383.EPS
FR1H0384.EPS
FR1H0380.EPS
FR1H0381.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(5) Erasure Check 8.2.11 Cassette Ejection

In this sequence, it is checked if the IP data has been erased, and if erasure failed, its (1) Overall/General Sequence
remedial action is taken.
This is for the operation of the cassette set unit.
Fig. 2.10.5 Erasure Check In this sequence, the cassette hold is released at the time of IP loading so that the cassette
can be taken out.
START Fig. 2.11.1 Cassette Ejection
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.1.1, Fig. 3.1.1, Fig. 5.4.1, Fig. 5.6.1,

Is the erasure lamp lit? Fig. 5.6.2, Fig. 5.7.1, and Fig. 5.8.1
N
Y START
Level 1 error
13AA
Erasure lamp failure
Error handling Fig. 2.2.2
Erasure lamp
Fig.6.5.1 The cassette removable
LEDT2 is turned on
condition is indicated.
Is an overexposed IP indicated?
Y
N
Cassette removal Operation performed
13AB
Level 1 error by the operator
Overexposed IP unerased
Suction Cup Cassette Hold Mechanism
Is SA1 opened?
Error handling N
Overexposed IP Y SA1
END Fig.6.4.1
FR1H0385.EPS
DELAY TA13
Instant return of cassette

Is SA2 opened? is supported. SA2
N
Y
Cassette loading Hold pin
direction
LEDT2 is turned off SA3 OFFON
The ready condition is OFF:CLOSE
indicated. ON :OPEN SOLA1
LEDT1 is turned on
END
Operation at the time of
FR1H0386.EPS cassette hold release
FR1H0387.EPS

TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec
TR1H0046.EPS
Table 2.11.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing
I/O name in flow
Topmost
shelf 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
I/O name position position
position position

SOLA1 SOLA1 SOLA2 SOLA3 SOLA4
LEDT1 LEDT1 LEDT3 LEDT5 LEDT7
TR1H0047.EPS
009-051-05
04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.3 Machine Operation During Secondary Erasure 8.3.2 Side-Positioning (Secondary Erasure)
8.3.1 Summary of Operation (1) Overall/General Sequence
This is for the sequence of secondary erasure conveyance in the Maintenance Utility. Unlike in the routine (single-IP conveyance), the barcode reading is not performed.
It is different from the routine (single-IP conveyance) in the following five points. Fig. 3.2.1 Side-Positioning (Secondary Erasure)
(Overall Sequence)
1. Barcode reading : The sequence is skipped. See Section 3.2. Preprocessing: Fig. 3.1.1
2. Reading : The sequences for reading START
preparation and reading are different. See Section 3.3. This step is skipped in the secondary erasure.
3. Erasure : The sequence of steps is the same, The barcode located on the back of the IP is Barcode reading
read during the IP conveyance.
but at different conveyance speeds. See Section 3.4.
Same as in the routine
For 14"x17" and 14"x14", reverse conveyance Side-positioning
(1) Machine Operation during Secondary Erasure (Overall/General Flow) is performed before side-positioning to position conveyance
the leading edge of the IP. Fig.2.6.3
Fig. 3.1.1 Machine Operation during Secondary Erasure Same as in the routine
The start point for reading, which is the next Side-positioning
START sequence, is located.
Fig.2.6.4
CSL/IDT
Same as in the routine information check
Cassette set unit Cassette IN Fig.2.6.6
See 8.2.2
END
FR1H0389.EPS
Same as in the routine Movement of elevation unit
UP-down IP removal unit (feed) 8.3.3 Reading (Secondary Erasure)
See 8.2.3
Same as in the routine (1) Overall/General Sequence

Up-down IP removal unit IP feed
See 8.2.4 The sequence of reading preparation and reading conveyance is different than in the routine
Same as in the routine Passage through before-side- (single-IP conveyance).
Before-side-positioning conveyor positioning conveyor and IP length
measurement Fig. 3.3.1 Reading (Overall Sequence)
See 8.2.5
Barcode reading is not performed.
The reset are the same as in the routine. Side-positioning (secondary erasure) Preprocessing: Fig. 3.1.1
Side-positioning conveyor See 8.3.2
START
The reading preparation and reading
conveyance are different than in the routine. Reading (secondary erasure)
Reading conveyor after-reading conveyor Different than in the routine
See 8.3.3 Reading preparation
erasure conveyor Preparation prior to IP reading
Movement of Fig.3.3.2
elevation unit Different than in the routine
(load) The IP conveyed is scanned. Reading
See 8.2.8 Fig.3.3.3
The erasure conveyance speed is different
than in the routine. Erasure CSL/IDT information
The rest are the same as in the routine. Same as in the routine
See 8.3.4 check 2
Erasure conveyor Fig.2.7.7
Same as in the routine END
IP load
Before-side-positioning conveyor FR1H0390.EPS
up-down IP removal unit See 8.2.10

Cassette set unit Cassette ejection
See 8.2.11
END
FR1H0388.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Reading Preparation Sequence (3) Reading Sequence
This is for the operation of the subscanning unit. This is for the operation of the subscanning unit.
It is the sequence of reading preparation during secondary erasure. It is the reading sequence during secondary erasure.
Fig. 3.3.2 Reading Preparation (Secondary Erasure)

Fig. 3.3.3 Reading (Secondary Erasure)
Preprocessing: Fig. 3.3.1 Preprocessing: Fig. 3.3.1
START START
Reading secondary
Conveyance driving erasure conveyance
DRIVE (MD3/PD36) DRIVE (MZ1/ON)
DRIVE (MD3/PD37)
Driven shaft grip driving DRIVE (ME2/PE22)
DRIVE (MZ3/ON) Is SD3 opened within TD36?
N
Driving shaft grip driving Y Reading secondary
DRIVE (MZ2/ON) erasure conveyance stop
TZ21 START Is SZ3 closed within TZ34? DRIVE (MZ1/OFF) (soft)
Timer START N DELAY TZ17 DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
Y Driven shaft
Driven shaft grip stop grip driving DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MZ3/OFF) (fast) Reading secondary Level 0 error
03C1
(soft) erasure conveyance stop Conveyance error
Driven shaft grip stop IP feed permission DRIVE (MZ1/OFF) (soft) (reading conveyance)
DRIVE (MZ3/OFF) DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
(hard) DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
Level 0 error No wait for completion
03C9
Is SZ2 opened within TZ21? Driven shaft grip error DELAY TZ18 of driven shaft slow grip
N
Y
Driving Driving shaft grip stop Driven shaft grip Conveyance grip release
Driving shaft grip (HP return)
shaft grip DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) release driving release driving
(ST) Driving shaft grip release stop (soft) DRIVE (MD3/ON) DRIVE (MD2/PD23)
DRIVE (MZ2/ON)
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) TZ31 START
(hard) Level 0 error Timer START
03C6 Is SZ2 closed
Driving shaft grip error within TZ24? Is SZ3 opened
N
Driving shaft Y within TZ31?
Timer STOP N
grip release Driving shaft Y
(fast) grip release stop Driving shaft grip Driven shaft grip
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) release stop Driven shaft grip release stop
(soft) DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) release stop DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
Timer > TZ23 or Timer <TZ22 (hard) DRIVE (MZ3/OFF) (soft)
Y
N (hard)
Level 0 error Level 0 error Driven
03C8
Error log (detailed information) Driving shaft grip 03C7 Driven shaft grip shaft
Timer data recording release error Timer STOP release error grip
release
(ST)
23C6
Level 2 error
END
Driving shaft grip operation error FR1H0391.EPS Timer > TZ33 or Timer <TZ32
Y
N
Table 3.3.2 Operation Parameters Error log
Value
(detailed information)
Symbol Description
PD36 Conveyance (reading preparation) -180 p
TZ21 Driving shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10 sec Level 2 error
TZ22 Lower limit for driving shaft grip spec (ST/HR) 1.6 / 3.3 sec 23C7 Driven shaft grip
TZ23 Upper limit for driving shaft grip spec (ST/HR) 2.8 / 6 sec release
TZ34 Driven shaft grip timeout (fast/slow)
END operation error
2 / 10 sec FR1H0392.EPS
TR1H0048.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.3.4 Erasure Conveyance 8.4 Step Operation

The sequence is the same as in the routine (single-IP conveyance), except that the convey- 8.4.1 Summary of Operation
ance speed is different. Note, however, that 2-phase excitation is used.
The step operation is performed in the Service Menus and Maintenance Utility at the time of
troubleshooting and machine adjustment.
The following step operations may be performed.
1. Feed/load step operation See Section 8.4.2

2. Side-positioning step operation See Section 8.4.3
8.4.2 Feed/Load Step Operation

(1) Overall/General Sequence
This operation is to check the IP handling at the cassette set unit and IP removal unit.
At each step, the process halts to accept an input, and then the next step is performed.
From 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY of the Maintenance Utility menus, select either feed or
load step operation and execute it.
Fig. 4.2.1 Feed/Load Step Operation
START
Feed step operation

Fig. 4.2.2
Wait for step input
IP positioning
Wait for step input
Load step operation

Fig. 4.2.3
END
FR1H0393.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Detailed Sequence of Feed Step Operation Fig. 4.2.2 Feed Step Operation (2/3)
It is the sequence of feed step operation in the Maintenance Utility. A
From its menu, select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 4. UNIT 1. IP FEED/LOAD 2. FEED

to execute this sequence of operation.
Wait for step input
Fig. 4.2.2 Feed Step Operation (1/3)
Suction movement
Preprocessing: Fig. 4.2.1 Conveyance driving (feed suction feed leak)
DRIVE (MB2/PB21) DRIVE (MB1/PB12)
START
Is SB5 closed?
Wait for cassette IN N
Y
Level 1 error
Leak valve suction condition While the suction cups feed 13E2
Feed IP dropped
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) the IP to the grip rollers, the
IP is monitored so that it is
not dropped. IP leak IP leak
Suction cup movement (HP feed suction)
DRIVE (MB1/PB11) OPEN: IP dropped DRIVE (PB1/OFF) DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
CLOSE: IP sucked DRIVE (SVB1/ON) DRIVE (SVB1/ON)
Suction pump ON
DRIVE (PB1/ON) SB4 monitoring
When the leading Wait for step input completed
Is SB5 closed edge of the IP is Remedial
within TB11? fed to the grip
N DELAY TB17 sequence
Y rollers, air leak at the time
IP leak
occurs so that the when the
Level 2 error
DRIVE (PB1/OFF) Suction cup
IP is released IP is dropped
It is confirmed that the suction 23E1 Feed IP suction These steps DRIVE (SVB1/ON) HP positioning
from the suction
cups suck the IP securely. failure retry correspond to cups. Fig. 2.3.2
OPEN: IP suction not "Feed Suction Is SB1 closed?
DELAY TB12 IP leak Y
These steps completed Conveyance" N Leak valve suction condition
correspond to CLOSE: IP suction completed DRIVE (PB1/OFF) The suction DRIVE (SVB1/OFF)
DRIVE (SVB1/ON) condition described in
"Feed Suction"
described in
A and suction Fig. 2.4.3. Level 2 error Error handling
Fig. 2.4.2. cup position 23E8 Suction cup Cassette ejection 2
DELAY TB17 is reset. HP return failure
Fig. 6.2.1
Suction cup HP positioning DELAY TB17
Fig.2.3.2
Suction cup After the suction
Is the number of retries made HP positioning cup HP positioning
greater than the retry count (NB11)? Fig. 2.3.2 is performed, it is
N retreated by 12p,
Y
Suction cup movement and feed leak occurs.
(HP feed leak)
13E1
Level 1 error DRIVE (MB1/PB19)
Feed IP suction failure The suction
cups fail to DELAY TB13
FR1H0395.EPS
suck the IP,
Leak valve suction condition so it is B
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) judged that
there is no
Error handling IP left in the
Cassette ejection 1 cassette.
Fig.6.1.1 FR1H0394.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 4.2.2 Feed Step Operation (3/3) (3) Detailed Sequence of Load Step Operation
B It is the sequence of load step operation in the Maintenance Utility.

From its menu, select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 4. UNIT 1. IP FEED/LOAD 2.
FEED/LOAD to execute this sequence of operation.
Leak valve close
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) Fig. 4.2.3 Load Step Operation (1/3)

Suction cup movement
(feed leak load standby) START
DELAY TB18 DRIVE (MB1/PB18)
Leak valve close
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) The suction cups move
from the home position
Suction cup movement to the load standby
Is SB2 closed?
N (load standby load suction) position.
Y DRIVE (MB1/PB15) Suction cup movement
(HP load standby)
Conveyance driving
Suction pump ON DRIVE (MB1/PB14)
DRIVE (MB2/PB26)
DRIVE (PB1/ON)
The leading edge
of the IP fed by the Is SB2 closed within TB14?
grip rollers is Y Is SB5 closed within TB11?
N N
detected. (The leading Y
edge of the IP shields Level 2 error
These steps 23E4 Load IP suction failure
Conveyance stop
correspond to SB2.) Conveyance stop
These steps
retry
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) correspond to It is confirmed that the
"Feed DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) "Load Suction"
(soft) suction cups suck the IP leak
Conveyance" (MB2 excitation OFF) described in IP securely. DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
described in Fig. 2.10.3. OPEN: IP suction not DRIVE (SVB1/ON) Load IP
Fig. 2.4.4. completed DELAY TB15 suction
SB4 monitoring completed CLOSE: IP suction DELAY TB17 failure
completed retry
Suction cup
A
HP positioning
DELAY TB17 Fig. 2.3.2
Is the number of retries made
END greater than the retry count (NB11)?
N
Suction cup HP positioning Y
Fig. 2.3.2 Level 1 error

13E4 Load IP suction failure
Level 1 error retry
13E3
IP grip error Leak valve suction Load
condition suction
DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) failure
Error handling Error handling
Cassette ejection 2 Cassette ejection 2
Fig. 6.2.1 FR1H0396.EPS Fig. 6.2.1 FR1H0397.EPS

PB12 Suction cup movement (feed suction feed leak) -262 p
Table 4.2.2 Operation Parameters PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby ) 86 p
Symbol Description Value PB15 Suction cup movement (load standby load suction) -100 p
PB11 Suction cup movement (HP feed suction) 250 p PB17 Suction cup movement (load leak HP) -250 p
PB12 Suction cup movement (feed suction feed leak) -262 p PB25 Conveyance (load suction synchronization) + infinite p
PB18 Suction cup movement (feed leak load standby) 98 p NB11 Feed suction retry 3 times
PB19 Suction cup movement (HP feed leak) -12 p TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec
PB21 Conveyance (feed suction synchronization) 675 p TB11 Feed suction timeout 1 sec
PB26 Conveyance (grip retry) + infinite p TB15 Wait for load suction 0 sec
NB11 Feed suction retry 3 sec TB16 Wait for load leak 0.1 sec
TB11 Feed suction timeout 1 sec TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec
TB12 Wait for feed suction 0 sec TR1H0053.EPS
TB13 Wait for feed leak 0.1 sec

TB14 Grip timeout 1 sec
TB18 Wait for feed 0.05 sec
TR1H0052.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 4.2.3 Load Step Operation (2/3) Fig. 4.2.3 Load Step Operation (3/3)
A B

Wait for step input
Fig. 2.2.2
Roller rotation (at the equal speed of the arm)
LEDT2 is turned on The cassette removable
DRIVE (MB2/PB25)
Suction movement (load suction load leak)
DRIVE (MB1/PB12)
Is SA1 opened?
N
Roller rotation stop Y
DRIVE (MB2/OFF)
These steps DELAY TA13

Is SB5 closed? are the same
N
Y as in Is SA2 opened?
While the suction Fig. 2.11.1. N
Y
cups load the Suction leak Level 1 error
13E5
IP into the cassette, DRIVE (SVB1/ON) Load IP dropped
it is checked if the LEDT2 is turned off
IP is not dropped. Suction pump OFF IP leak
DRIVE (PB1/OFF) DRIVE (PB1/OFF)
After the suction DRIVE (SVB1/ON) Operation performed
Cassette removal
cups load the IP by the operator
into the cassette DELAY TB16 DELAY TB17 Remedial
and air leak occurs, sequence
the IP is released The ready condition
Suction movement at the time LEDT1 is turned on
from the suction Suction cup is indicated.
These steps (load leak HP) when the
cups. After load HP positioning
correspond to DRIVE (MB1/PB17) IP is
"Load Suction leak, the suction Fig.2.3.2 dropped
Conveyance" cups return to their END
FR1H0399.EPS
described in home position. Wait for step input Leak valve suction condition
Fig. 2.10.4. DRIVE (SVB1/OFF) Table 4.2.3 Operation Parameters Table 4.2.3a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing
Symbol Description Value I/O name
Suction leak Error handling I/O name
PB12 Suction cup movement (feed suction feed leak) -262 p Topmost
DRIVE (SVB1/ON) Cassette ejection 2 in flow
PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby ) 86 p position position position
position
Fig.6.2.1 PB15 Suction cup movement (load standby load suction) -100 p
Suction pump OFF SA1 SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13
PB17 Suction cup movement (load leak HP) -250 p
DRIVE (PB1/OFF) SA2 SA2 SA6 SA10 SA14
PB25 Conveyance (load suction synchronization) + infinite p
DELAY TB16 TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec
TR1H0055.EPS
TB11 Feed suction timeout 1 sec
TB15 Wait for load suction 0 sec
Is SB1 closed? TB16 Wait for load leak 0.1 sec
Y
N TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1 sec
TR1H0053.EPS
Level 2 error
Suction HP 23E8
Suction cup HP return failure
check 2

Fig.2.3.2
Leak disabled
DRIVE (SB1/OFF)
B
FR1H0398.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.4.3 Side-Positioning Step Operation 8.5 Machine Operation During Conveyor Initialization
(1) Overall/General Sequence 8.5.1 Summary of Operation
This operation is to check the IP handling at the side-positioning mechanism. Normally, the machine takes about four minutes to boot up, and every time it automatically
At each step, the process halts to accept an input, and then the next step is performed. searches for any remaining IP left in the machine and ejects it.
Select the step operation from 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY of the Maintenance Utility menu. It is not until the remaining IP is ejected or it is checked to see that there is no remaining IP
left in the machine that the initialization self-diagnostics are completed. This section only
Fig. 4.3.1 Side-Positioning Step Operation Table 4.3.1a Operation Parameters addresses sequences that are different than in the routine operation (single-IP conveyance).
START A PD11 Side-positioning (HP stopper) 64p
PD16 Side-positioning (stopper HP) -64p
PD21 Conveyance grip release 256p
Wait for IP size input DELAY TD14
PD23 Conveyance grip (HP return) 400p
Side-positioning Side-positioning PD24 Conveyance grip (slow) 144p

(HP stopper) (side-positioning 1 back) TD11 Wait for settlement of IP that is not side-positioned 0.2sec
DRIVE (MD1/PD11) DRIVE (MD1/PD13) TD12 Wait for side-positioning return 0.1sec
TD13 Wait for re-side-positioning 0.1sec
Side-positioning DELAY TD13
TD14 Wait for settlement of IP that has been side-positioned 0.2sec
conveyance grip release
DRIVE (MD2/PD21) Side-positioning TR1H0056.EPS
(back side-positioning 2)
DELAY TD11 DRIVE (MD1/PD14)
DELAY TD14
Wait for step input
Side-positioning Wait for step input

(stopper side-positioning)
DRIVE (MD1/PD12) Side-positioning conveyance grip (slow)
DRIVE (MD2/PD24)
DELAY TD12
Side-positioning (side-positioning 2 HP)
DRIVE (MD1/PD15)
Wait for step input Wait for step input

Side-positioning
(side-positioning 1 back) Side-positioning (HP stopper)
DRIVE (MD1/PD13) DRIVE (MD1/PD11)
Conveyance grip (HP return)

DELAY TD13 DRIVE (MD2/PD23)
Side-positioning Side-positioning (stopper HP)

(back side-positioning 2) DRIVE (MD1/PD16)
DRIVE (MD1/PD14)
Is SD1 closed?
N
A Y Level 2 error
23BC Side-positioning
operation error
Side-positioning
HP positioning
Fig.2.6.5
END FR1H0400.EPS

PD12 Side-positioning (stopper side-positioning 1) 98 p 98 p 778 p 778 p 872 p 872 p 840 p 440 p
PD13 Side-positioning (side-positioning 1 back) 68 p 68 p 68 p 68 p 68 p 68 p 34 p 34 p
PD14 Side-positioning (back side-positioning 2) -68 p -68 p -68 p -68 p -68 p -68 p -34 p -34 p
PD15 Side-positioning (side-positioning 2 HP) 162 p 162 p 842 p 842 p 936 p 936 p 904 p 504 p
TR1H0057.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
(1) Overall/General Sequence 8.5.2 Initialization Subscanning Grip Check

Fig. 5.1.1 Machine Operation during DPR Conveyor Initialization (1) Overall/General Sequence
START Fig. 5.2.1 Initialization Subscanning Grip Check Table 5.2.1 Operation Parameters
TZ21 Driving shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10sec
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.1.1 TZ34 Driven shaft grip timeout (fast/HR) 2 / 10sec
Side-positioning grip HP positioning TZ51 Wait for initialization grip operation 0.5sec
START
See "Routine" (during single IP conveyance) in Fig. 2.7.5. TR1H0058.EPS
Side-positioning HP positioning Is SZ2 opened?

Mechanical
initialization See "Routine" (during single IP conveyance) in Fig. 2.6.5. N
Y
(first stage)
After-reading conveyance grip HP positioning
See "Routine" (during single IP conveyance) in Fig. 2.7.4. Driving shaft grip driving
DRIVE (MZ2/ON)
TZ21 START
Initialization subscanning grip check
Fig. 5.2.1
Driving N
If suction cup HP IP search Y
shaft grip Driving shaft grip stop
positioning is Fig. 5.3.1 (ST)
executed during DRIVE (MZ2/OFF)
DPR IP search, (soft)
this operation is Suction cup HP positioning
Driving shaft grip release stop
not performed. See "Routine" (during single IP conveyance) in Fig. 2.3.2. 03C6
Level 0 error
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF)
Processing of Driving shaft grip error
(hard)
remaining IP Processing of feed/load conveyance IP
(first stage)
Fig. 5.4.1
Up-down HP positioning Is SZ3 closed?

Mechanical Y
initialization See "Routine" (during single IP conveyance) in Fig. 2.3.3. N
(second stage)
Cassette hold release operation check Driven shaft griprerelease
(ST)
Fig. 5.5.1
Fig. 5.9.4
N
Processing of before-reading standby IP Y
DELAY TZ51
Fig. 5.6.1
Driven Driven shaft grip stop
Processing of DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
remaining IP Processing of load standby IP shaft
driving (soft) Driven shaft grip
(second stage)
Fig. 5.7.1 (fast) Fig. 5.9.5
Processing of load standby IP Driven shaft grip stop Level 0 error
03C9
DRIVE (MZ3/OFF) Driven shaft grip error
Fig. 5.8.1 (hard)
Subscanning grip
Lamp initialization
HP positioning
Fig. 5.9.1 Lamp turn-on process only
Mechanical END
FR1H0402.EPS
initialization Empty cassette ejection
(third stage)
Fig. 5.10.1
Cassette hold release operation

Fig. 5.11.1
END
FR1H0401.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.5.3 IP Search Fig. 5.3.1 IP Search (2/3)

A
SF2 CLOSE
Fig. 5.3.1 IP Search (1/3) C Status of each sensor?

START
SF1&SF2 Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 3 Special

Is SB2 closed? &SF3 OPEN SF1 CLOSE& SF3 CLOSE & SF2 CLOSE SF1 & SF3 CLOSE
N
Y SF3 OPEN SF1 OPEN
Search for
cassette inlet IP (NOTE) Three steps marked by * in the figure, * Search for
Fig. 5.3.2 "search for feed conveyance remaining load conveyance
IP," "processing of before-reading remaining IP Movement of Movement of
conveyance remaining IP," and Processing of Fig. 5.3.8 after-reading load conveyance
IP found
No IP "search for load conveyance remaining cassette inlet conveyance remaining IP
(after search)
IP," are activated concurrently. IP remaining IP Fig. 5.3.10
Fig. 5.3.9 Processing of
SB2 CLOSE &
SC1 OPEN & SB2 is CLOSE SB2 is OPEN After-reading after-reading
(SF1 | SF2 | SF3 CLOSE) standby conveyance
SF3 IP found remaining IP
SB2 & SC1 CLOSE
OPEN & SB2 & SC1 &
(SF1 | SF2 | SF3 CLOSE) SF1 & SF2 & SF3 Positioning of load standby IP
SB2 CLOSE &
OPEN (NOTE) OTHERS
SC1 & SF1 & SF2 & SF3 SB2 CLOSE & Fig. 5.3.11
OPEN SC1 OPEN &
SB2 OPEN &
(SF1 | SF2 | SF3 CLOSE)
Movement SC1 CLOSE Fig. 5.3.1 No IP Load standby IP found
Movement C
of feed/load of feed (2/3)
conveyance conveyance * Search for
remaining IP remaining IP feed conveyance
Fig. 5.3.3 Fig. 5.3.4 remaining IP
Search for feed To Fig. 5.3.1 (3/3)
conveyance Fig. 5.3.5
B Processing of before-reading
remaining IP conveyance remaining IP FR1H0404.EPS
Fig. 5.3.5
SB2 OPEN & SB2 SB2
(SC1 | SF2 CLOSE) SB2 OPEN & SB2 CLOSE CLOSE OPEN
SF3 CLOSE
SB2 OPEN
IP found
Positioning of (after search) IP found
feed/load No IP (after Processing of
conveyance (SF1 | SF2 | SF3 CLOSE) search) feed/load
remaining IP No IP conveyance IP
(SF1 | SF2 | SF3 CLOSE)
Fig. 5.3.6
Fig. 5.3.7
IP found IP found
(after search) (after search)
(SF1 | SF2 CLOSE)
or
SF1 & SF2 & SF3 CLOSE
A To Fig. 5.3.1 (3/3)

Processing of before-reading conveyance remaining IP To Fig. 5.3.1 (2/3)
Processing of
after-reading
B conveyance
remaining IP FR1H0403.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
Fig. 5.3.1 IP Search (3/3) (2) Detailed Sequence of Search for Cassette Inlet IP
B
Fig. 5.3.2 Search for Cassette Inlet IP

Status of each sensor?
START
SC1 & SD3 SD3 CLOSE SC1 CLOSE

OPEN Suction cup HP positioning
Processing of Fig. 2.3.2
Search for before- Movement of before- Movement of before-
side positioning before-reading Leak valve closed
reading conveyance reading conveyance
conveyance remaining IP conveyance DRIVE(SVB1/OFF)
remaining IP remaining IP
remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.13 Fig. 5.3.12 Fig. 5.3.14
(HP load suction)
SC1 remains SD3 CLOSE DRIVE(MB1/PB81)
OPEN
Suction pump ON
DRIVE(PB1/ON)
No IP Before-reading standby
IP found
Is SB5 closed within TB11?
N
Y
DELAY TB15
Corresponds to Is there any after-reading standby IP?
N
Fig. 5.3.1 (2/3) A. Y
IP found (before search) No IP
Search for after-reading

Suction leak
conveyance remaining IP
Processing of DRIVE(SVB1/ON)
Fig. 5.3.15
after-reading
conveyance Suction pump OFF
remaining IP DRIVE(P1/OFF)
SF1 OPEN SF1 CLOSE
After-reading DELAY TB16 Table 5.3.2 Operation Parameters

No IP
standby IP found
Suction cup movement PB81 Suction cup movement (HP load suction) -14 p
(load suction HP) PB82 Suction cup movement (load suction HP) 14 p
DRIVE(MB1/PB82) TB11 Feed suction timeout 1 sec
END
FR1H0405.EPS TB15 Wait for load suction 0 sec
Is SB1 closed? TB16 Wait for load leak 0.1 sec
Y
N TR1H0059.EPS
23E8
Level 2 error
Suction cup Suction cup HP return error
HP check

Fig. 2.3.2
Leak released
DRIVE(SB1/OFF)
END
FR1H0406.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(3) Detailed Sequence of Movement of Feed/Load Conveyance Remaining IP (4) Detailed Sequence of Movement of Feed Conveyance Remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.3 Movement of Feed/Load Conveyance Remaining IP Fig. 5.3.4 Movement of Feed Conveyance Remaining IP
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.3.1, and Fig. 5.3.3 Symbol Description Value
START
PB71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p
START
Feed conveyance DOWN direction PC71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p
DRIVE (MB2/PB71) TB72 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 7.6 sec
DRIVE (MC1/PC71) Feed conveyance DOWN direction TR1H0061.EPS
DRIVE (MF1/PF71) DRIVE (MB2/PB71)
DRIVE (MC1/PC71)
When SB2 is not opened within TB72, or
when SF1/SF2/SF3 is not closed within TB72 When SF1/SF2/SF3 is closed
N
Y
Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop When SB2 is opened Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
Level 0 error
03B6 Feed/load conveyance DELAY TF13 Level 0 error
Positioning of feed/load
remaining ejection error 03B6 Feed/load conveyance
remaining IP ejection error
Branch 1 Fig.5.3.6
Movement of feed
Fig. 5.3.4 END
FR1H0408.EPS
When SC1/SF2/SF3 is not closed within TB79 When SF3 is closed
When SC1/SF2 is closed

Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop
(5) Detailed Sequence of Search for Feed Conveyance Remaining IP
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop Fig. 5.3.5 Search for Feed Conveyance Remaining IP
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) Table 5.3.5 Operation Parameters
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) Preprocessing: Fig. 5.3.1
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) Symbol Description Value
Level 0 error START PC72 Initialization conveyance (UP direction) - infinite p
03B6 Feed/load conveyance PD72 Initialization conveyance (UP direction) - infinite p
remaining IP ejection error TB71 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP search timeout 11.2 sec
DELAY TF13 DELAY TF13 Feed conveyance UP direction
TR1H0062.EPS
DRIVE (MD2/PD72)
DRIVE (MC1/PC72)

Branch 2 Branch 3 N
Y
Positioning of feed/load Positioning of load
conveyance remaining IP conveyance remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.6 Fig. 5.3.7 FR1H0407.EPS
Feed conveyance UP direction stop Feed conveyance UP direction stop
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
PB71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p
PC71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p Feed/load conveyance IP found No IP
PF71 Initialization conveyance (after-reading conveyance direction) - infinite p
TB72 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 7.6 sec
TB79 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP movement timeout 2 10.7 sec
END
TR1H0060.EPS FR1H0409.EPS
009-051-04
05.31.99 FM2460
04.20.2001 FM3006 05.31.99 FM2460
(6) Detailed Sequence of Positioning of Feed/Load Conveyance Remaining IP (8) Detailed Sequence of Search for Load Conveyance Remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.6 Positioning of Feed/Load Conveyance Remaining IP Fig. 5.3.8 Search for Load Conveyance Remaining IP
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.3.1, and Fig. 5.3.3 Table 5.8.4 Operation Parameters
Symbol
Description Value
START TZ31 Driven shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10 sec
START
TZ32 Lower limit for driven shaft grip release spec (ST/HR) 1.5 /3.0 sec
TZ33 Upper limit for driven shaft grip release spec (ST/HR) 2.0 /4.0 sec
TR1H0063.EPS
Feed conveyance UP direction
DRIVE (MB2/PB72)
DRIVE (MC1/PC72) Is SC2 closed?
N
Y

N
Y
Feed conveyance UP direction stop Convergence path changeover
guide driving
DRIVE(SOLC1/ON)
Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) Level 0 error
03B6 Feed/load conveyance Erasure conveyance direction
remaining IP ejection error DRIVE (SOLF1/ON)
Feed/load conveyance IP found DRIVE (MF1/PF72)
When SF3/SC2 is not closed within TF73 When SC2 is closed

END
FR1H0410.EPS
When SF3/SC2 is closed Erasure conveyance direction stop
Erasure conveyance direction stop DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft) Erasure conveyance direction stop
DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft)
(7) Detailed Sequence of Positioning of Load Conveyance Remaining IP DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft) DELAY TF13
No IP
Fig. 5.3.7 Positioning of Load Conveyance Remaining IP SB2 may be Branch 2
CLOSE. DELAY TF13
Movement of after-reading
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.3.1, and Fig. 5.3.3 Table 5.3.7 Operation Parameters
Symbol Description Value Branch 1 Fig. 5.3.9
START
PB72 Initialization conveyance (UP direction) - infinite p
END Positioning of load standby IP
PC72 Initialization conveyance (UP direction) - infinite p
Feed conveyance UP direction PF72 Initialization conveyance (erasure conveyance direction) + infinite p
Fig. 5.3.11 FR1H0412.EPS
DRIVE (SOLC1/ON) Feed/load conveyance remaining IP movement timeout 2

TB79 10.7 sec
DRIVE (MB2/PB72) Table 5.3.8 Operation Parameters
TR1H0064.EPS
DRIVE (MC1/PC72) Symbol Description Value
DRIVE (MF1/PF72) PF72 Initialization conveyance (erasure conveyance direction) + infinite p
TF13 Wait for switchback 0.2sec
Is SB2 closed within TB79? TF73 Erasure conveyance remaining IP search timeout 4.9sec
N
Y
Feed conveyance UP direction stop TR1H0065.EPS
Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE(SOLC1/OFF (soft)

DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE(MB2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE(MC1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE(MF1/OFF) (soft)
Level 0 error
03B6 Feed/load conveyance
Feed/load conveyance
IP found remaining IP ejection error
END
FR1H0411.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(9) Detailed Sequence of Movement of After-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP (10) Detailed Sequence of Movement of Load Conveyance Remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.9 Movement of After-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP Fig. 5.3.10 Movement of Load Conveyance Remaining IP

START Table 5.3.10 Operation Parameters
START PF71 Initialization conveyance (after-reading conveyance direction) - infinite p
PF72 Initialization conveyance (erasure conveyance direction) + infinite p
Is CMOS information being erased? TF13 Wait for switchback 0.2 sec
N
Y TF71 After-reading conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 7.6 sec
After-reading conveyance direction TF72 Erasure conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 6.8 sec
DRIVE (ME2/PE71)
DRIVE (MF1/PF71) Branch path changeover guide driving
DRIVE (SOLF1/ON)
Is SF2 opened closed The actuation of the sensors during
closed within TF71? normal operation are as follows:
N SF2: OPEN CLOSE OPEN After-reading conveyance direction
Y DRIVE (MF1/PF71)
SF4: OPEN CLOSE CLOSE
Monitoring of SF4 is implemented in Is SF4 is opened closed closed

Is SF2 closed opened within TF71?
case SF2 becomes faulty. N
within TF71? Y
N
Y
Is SF4 is closed opened
within TF71? The actuation of the sensors during
N
After-reading conveyance Y normal operation are as follows:
After-reading conveyance direction stop SF2: OPEN CLOSE OPEN
direction stop
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft) SF4: OPEN CLOSE CLOSE
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft) After-reading conveyance direction stop After-reading conveyance
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) direction stop Monitoring of SF4 is implemented in
Level 0 error DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) case SF2 becomes faulty.
DELAY TF13 03D8 After-reading conveyance
remaining IP ejection error DELAY TF13
Erasure conveyance direction Level 0 error
DRIVE (SOLF1/ON) Erasure conveyance 03D8 After-reading conveyance
direction remaining IP ejection error
DRIVE (MF1/PF72)
DRIVE (SOLF1/ON)
DRIVE (MF1/PF72)
When SF1/SF3 is not closed within TF72
When SF1 is closed When SF1/SF3 is not closed
within TF72 When SF1 is closed
When SF3 is closed When SF3 is closed
SF1: After-reading conveyance Erasure conveyance direction stop

DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft) Erasure conveyance direction stop Erasure conveyance direction stop
standby IP detection DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft) Erasure conveyance direction stop DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft)
SF3: Load standby IP detection DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
DELAY TF13 After-reading conveyance direction stop DELAY TF13

Erasure conveyance direction stop Level 0 error Level 0 error
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft) Erasure conveyance
DRIVE (SOLF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
03D9
remaining ejection error
03D4 Branch path changeover
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) guide operation error
SF1: After-reading Positioning of load standby IP

Positioning of load
conveyance Fig. 5.3.11
standby IP standby IP
Level 0 error Level 0 error
Fig. 5.3.11 detection
03D9 Erasure conveyance
03D4 Branch path changeover SF3: Load standby IP
remaining ejection error guide operation error detection END FR1H0414.EPS
END
FR1H0413.EPS

PE71 Initialization conveyance (after-reading conveyance direction) - infinite p
TF71 After-reading conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 7.6 sec
TF72 Erasure conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 6.8 sec
TR1H0066.EPS
009-051-05
04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
04.20.2001 FM3006
(11) Detailed Sequence of Positioning of Load Conveyance Remaining IP (12) Detailed Sequence of Movement of Before-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.11 Positioning of Load Conveyance Remaining IP Fig. 5.3.12 Movement of Before-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP

Symbol Description Value START
START
PF73 Initialization conveyance (load standby positioning) -510 p Side-positioning conveyance reverse direction
SF3 OPEN & TF13 Wait for switchback 0.2 sec DRIVE (MD3/PD73)
SC2CLOSE TF74 Load standby positioning timeout 1 DRIVE (MZ1/ON) Fast reverse conveyance
3.2 sec
TF77 Load standby positioning timeout 2 7.6 sec
SF3 CLOSE TR1H0068.EPS
Is SC1 closed within TD72?
N
Y Side-positioning conveyance
Erasure conveyance direction reverse direction stop
DRIVE (MF1/PF72) DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
Side-positioning conveyance
reverse direction stop DRIVE (MZ1/OFF) (soft) reverse
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
Level 0 error
Is SF3 opened within TF77? DRIVE (MZ1/OFF) (soft) reverse
03B7 Side-positioning conveyance
N
Y remaining IP ejection error
DELAY TD74
Erasure conveyance direction stop
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) Erasure conveyance direction stop
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) Side-positioning conveyance direction
DRIVE (MD31/PD71)
DELAY TF13 Level 0 error
03D9 Erasure conveyance
After-reading conveyance direction remaining IP ejection error
Initialization Is SD3 closed within TD75?
DRIVE (MF1/PF71) side-positioning N
Y
conveyance
Is SF3 closed within TF74? Side-positioning conveyance
N Side-positioning conveyance reverse direction stop
Y direction stop DRIVE (MD31/OFF)
DRIVE (MD31/OFF) (soft)
(soft)
After-reading conveyance direction stop Level 0 error
03B7 Side-positioning conveyance
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) After-reading conveyance direction stop Before-reading standby IP found remaining IP ejection error
After-reading conveyance direction
DRIVE (MF1/PF73) Level 0 error END
03D9 Erasure conveyance FR1H0416.EPS
remaining IP ejection error

Load standby IP found Table 5.3.12 Operation Parameters
PD71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p
PD73 Initialization conveyance (side-positioning conveyance reverse direction) - infinite p
END TD72 Side-positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 2 5.9 sec
FR1H0415.EPS
TD74 Wait for side-positioning switchback 0.5 sec
TD75 Initialization side-positioning timeout 5.8 sec
TR1H0069.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(13) Detailed Sequence of Search for Before-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP (14) Detailed Sequence of Movement of Before-Side-Positioning Conveyance Remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.14 Movement of Before-Side-Positioning Conveyance Remaining IP
Fig. 5.3.13 Search for Before-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP
START
START
Side-positioning conveyance direction

DRIVE (MD3/PD71)
Side-positioning conveyance reverse direction DRIVE (MC1/PC71)
DRIVE (MD3/PD72) DRIVE (MB2/PB71)
Is SC1 opened within TD71?

N
Is SC1 closed within TD73? Y
N
Y Side-positioning conveyance direction stop
Side-positioning conveyance direction stop DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
Side-positioning conveyance DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
direction stop DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
Side-positioning conveyance direction stop DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft) Level 0 error
Side-positioning conveyance direction
03B7 Side-positioning conveyor
DRIVE (MD3/PD71)
remaining IP discharge error
DELAY TD74
Initialization Is SD3 closed within TD75?
side-positioning N
Side-positioning conveyance direction conveyance Y
DRIVE (MD3/PD71)
Side-positioning conveyance direction stop Side-positioning conveyance direction stop

Is SD3 closed within TD75?
Initialization N DRIVE (MD3/OFF) DRIVE (MD3/OFF)
Y (soft)
side-positioning Side-positioning conveyance (soft)
conveyance direction stop
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) Before-reading standby IP found Level 0 error
Side-positioning conveyance (soft) 03B7 Side-positioning conveyor
direction stop remaining IP discharge error
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) Level 0 error
(soft) 03B7 Side-positioning conveyor
remaining IP discharge error END
FR1H0418.EPS
Is SD3 closed?
Y
N Table 5.3.14 Operation Parameters
Before-reading standby IP found PB71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p
No IP PC71 Initialization conveyance (DOWN direction) + infinite p
TD71 Side-positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 1 7.6sec
TD75 Initialization side-positioning timeout 5.8sec
END
FR1H0417.EPS
TR1H0071.EPS

PD72 Initialization conveyance (UP direction) - infinite p
TD73 Side-positioning conveyance remaining IP search timeout 5.8 sec
TD74 Wait for side-positioning switchback 0.5 sec
TD75 Initialization side-positioning 5.8 sec
TR1H0070.EPS

05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
05.30.2002 FM3405 (1)
(15) Detailed Sequence of Search for After-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP 8.5.4 Processing of Feed/Load Conveyance IP
Fig. 5.3.15 Search for After-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP (1) Overall/General Sequence
Fig. 5.4.1 Processing of Feed/Load Conveyance IP
Reading conveyance direction START

DRIVE (MZ1/ON) Fast conveyance
DRIVE (ME2/PE73)
IP search and comparison
Is SF1 closed within TF76? during feed/load
N
Fig.5.4.2
Y
Any remaining IP?
Reading conveyance direction stop Reading conveyance direction stop N
Y
DRIVE (MZ1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MZ1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
(HP load standby) Suction cup
DRIVE (MB1/PB14) load preparation
After-reading standby IP found No IP
Any IP before search?

Y
N
END
FR1H0419.EPS
Table 5.3.15 Operation Parameters Any load standby IP?

Y
Symbol Description Value N
PE73 Initialization conveyance (Reading conveyance direction) + infinite p

Feed conveyance UP direction Feed conveyance UP direction
TF76 Reading conveyance remaining IP search timeout 5.8 sec DRIVE (ME1/PB74)
DRIVE (MB2/PB74)
TR1H0072.EPS
DRIVE (MC2/PC74) DRIVE (MC1/PC74)
DRIVE (MF1/PF74)

N
Y Feed conveyance UP direction
Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (hard) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
Level 0 error
03B6 Feed/load conveyance
Load suction remaining IP ejection error
Fig.2.10.3
Load suction conveyance

Fig.2.10.4
Cassette can be inserted.

Cassette ejection
LED remains OFF.
Fig.2.11.1
END
FR1H0420.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Detailed Sequence of IP Search and Comparison during Feed/Load (3) Detailed Sequence of Remaining Ejected Cassette IN
Fig. 5.4.2 IP Search and Comparison during Feed/Load. Fig. 5.4.3 Remaining Ejected Cassette IN

START START
Is any IP found in CMOS information? READY state indicator

N LED1 or shelf of interest
Y
is turned on
Is there any search A
IP? Is there any search Status of SA2 for shelf
N IP? of interest is checked
Y N
Level 1 error Y
13B8
IP position information error
Is SA2 closed?
N
Message output Y
A
***
User selected DELAY TA16
process continued? No IP
Y B
N
IP found
A Cassette hold
DRIVE (SOLA1/OFF)
System down
Is CMOS information normal? Is SA3 closed?
N Y
N
Y
Feed/load
cassette Is the cassette located Is SA3 closed Cassette hold check
setting in the shelf of interest? within TA14?
Y N Is the number of retries made
check N
Y
greater than the retry count
Remaining IP (NA12)?
(before search/during search) N
Y
Cassette
Remaining IP (after search) hold Levl 2 error
23A1 Cassette hold
Level 0 error Remedial 13A1 Level 1 error failure retry
Message output Cassette setting error
03B0 IP feed/load conveyor action for
"Load largest empty
remaining IP discharge cassette
cassette".
impossible setting Cassette hold Retry at
error Message display the time
Remaining ejected release
"Reload cassette". of cassette
cassette IN Fig.2.2.2
hold failure
Fig. 5.4.3
DELAY TA15
Cassette ejection
END
Fig.2.11.1
FR1H0421.EPS B
Detection of
instant removal A message ""Unload cassette"
Is SA2 closed? is not issued.
of cassette and N
its remedy are Y
performed. Cassette hold release
Fig.2.2.2
LEDT1 is turned off
A
END
FR1H0422.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
8.5.5 Cassette Hold Release Operation Check Fig. 5.5.1 Cassette Hold Release Operation Check (2/2)

A
Fig. 5.5.1 Cassette Hold Release Operation Check (1/2)
E
DELAY TA51
START
C Cassette hold Cassette hold

DRIVE (SOLA1/OFF) mechanism operation
Any cassette in shelf?
N
Y
Is SA3 closed?
Y
Is SA1 closed? N
Y
N
B
D
Is SA3 closed within TA11?
N
Cassette hold release Y
DRIVER (SOLA1/ON) Is the number of retries made greater
than the retry count (NA12)?
N
Y
DELAY TA51 Level 2 error

23A1 Cassette hold release
Level 1 error
13A3 failure retry
Cassette shelf error
Is SA3 closed?
Y
N Retry at
Message display Cassette hold
the time
Processing "CASS. SET INCORRECT CS#" DRIVER (SOLA1/OFF)
of cassette
Is SA3 opened within TA11? for cassette hold failure
N hold release
Y Is the number of retries made greater Degeneration for relevant shelf
failure
than the retry count (NA11)? DELAY TA15
N
Y
Degeneration for all shelves?
N
A Y
Level 2 error E
Level 1 error
13A3 23A2 Cassette hold release
Cassette shelf error Level 0 error
failure retry 03A3
Degeneration for all shelves
Cassette hold Retry at B
Message display DRIVER (SOLA1/OFF) the time
Processing "CASS. SET INCORRECT of cassette
for cassette CS#." hold release Release for all shelves checked?
hold release DELAY TA12 failure C N
failure Y
Degeneration for relevant shelf
D END
Degeneration FR1H0424.EPS
for all shelves?

N B Table 5.5.1 Operation Parameters Table 5.5.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing
Y
TA11 Hold release timeout 0.5 sec Topmost
I/O name
TA12 Wait for hold release retry 2 sec position position
in flow
position position
Level 0 error TA15 Wait for hold retry 2 sec
03A3 SA1 SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13
Degeneration for all shelves TA51 Wait for initialization hold 0.5 sec
FR1H0423.EPS SA3 SA3 SA7 SA11 SA15
NA12 Hold retry 5 times
TR1H0077.EPS
TR1H0076.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
8.5.6 Processing of Before-Reading Standby IP Fig. 5.6.1 Processing of Before-Reading Standby IP (2/2)

A
Fig. 5.6.1 Processing of Before-Reading Standby IP (1/2)
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.1.1 Feed conveyance UP direction

START
DRIVE (ME2/PB74)
DRIVE (MC1/PC74)
DRIVE (MD3/PD74)

IP search and comparison N
Y
Fig. 5.6.2

Any remaining IP? N
N B Y
Y
Feed conveyance UP direction
Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (hard) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
SB2: Cassette inlet IP sensor DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
Up-down load movement
SC1: Before-BCR IP sensor DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
Fig. 2.8.1 SB2:OPEN CLOSE Level 0 error
SC1:CLOSE OPEN 03B6 Feed/load conveyance
Feed conveyance UP direction Load suction remaining IP ejection error
DRIVE (MB2/PB72) Fig.2.10.3
DRIVE (MC1/PC72)
DRIVE (MD3/PD72)
Load suction conveyance
Is SB2 closed and is SC1 opened within TB75? Fig.2.10.4
N
Y
Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE (MD2/PD23)
DELAY TB76
Is SB4 closed? DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft) Cassette can be inserted.
N Cassette ejection
Y Load conveyance UP direction stop LED remains OFF.
DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft) Fig.2.11.1
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
IP determining IP determining DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft) B
SB4 CLOSE SB4 CLOSE Level 0 error
DELAY TB76 03B6 Feed/load conveyance remaining
ejection error END
FR1H0426.EPS

It is checked that If the size of the IP
it is for lateral (width) It is checked that it is IP length measurement being initialized is
PB72 Initialization conveyance (up direction) - infinite p
metric size. out of spec, level 0
for lateral (width) inch size. Fig.2.5.2 Initialization conveyance (up direction) - infinite p
error occurs. PC72
PD23 Conveyance grip (HP return) 400 p
Side-positioning conveyance PD72 Initialization conveyance (up direction) - infinite p
TB74 Load remaining IP ejection timeout 7.6 sec
Fig.2.6.3
TB75 Before-reading standby remaining IP ejection timeout 14.5 sec
Suction cup
movement is TB76 Wait for side-positioning detection 0.5 sec
Side-positioning
not executed. TB77 Wait for feed switchback 0.5 sec
Fig.2.6.4 TR1H0078.EPS
A
FR1H0425.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
(2) Detailed Sequence of IP Search and Comparison 8.5.7 Processing of Load Standby IP
Fig. 5.6.2 IP Search and Comparison (1) Overall/General Sequence
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.6.1, Fig. 5.7.1, and Fig. 5.8.1
Fig. 5.7.1 Processing of Load Standby IP
START
START
Is any IP found in CMOS information?
N
Y
Fig.5.6.2
Is there any search IP?
N Is there any remaining IP?
Level 1 error Y N
13B8 Y
IP position information error
Message output
Is there any search IP? Up-down load movement
"IP may be jammed N
if CONTINUE key is pressed." Y Fig.2.8.1
User selected Is CMOS information Load conveyance derection
process continued? normal? DRIVE (SOLC1/ON)
Y N A
N Y DRIVE (MB2/PB74)
DRIVE (MC1/PC74)
A DRIVE (MF1/PF74)
No IP
Is the cassette located
System down in the fourth shelf? Is SB2 closed within TB73?
Y N
N Y
Cassette ejection
Fig. 2.11.1 Maximum Is SB2 opened within TB74?
cassette N
Y
setting
request Load conveyance direction Load conveyance direction
Message output DRIVE (ME2/OFF) (soft)
"Load largest empty
DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
cassette"
DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MF1/OFF) (soft)
DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (SOLC1/OFF) (soft)
Remaining ejected
cassette IN Load suction Level 0 error
Is the cassette located Fig. 5.4.3 Fig.2.10.3
03B9 Load standby remaining
in the shelf of interest? IP ejection error
Cassette Y
N
setting Load suction conveyance
check Fig.2.10.4
Message output
"Load empty cassette Cassette ejection Cassette can be inserted.
in following size [10x12] " LED remains OFF.
Fig.2.11.1
Remaining ejected
cassette IN END
Fig. 5.4.3 FR1H0428.EPS

IP found
PB74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) - infinite p
PC74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) - infinite p
END
FR1H0427.EPS PF74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) + infinite p
TB73 Load standby remaining IP ejection timeout 11.6 sec
TB74 Load remaining IP ejection timeout 7.6 sec
TR1H0079.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.5.8 Processing of After-Reading Standby IP 8.5.9 Subscanning Grip HP Positioning

(1) Overall/General Sequence (1) Overall/General Sequence
Fig. 5.8.1 Processing of After-Reading Standby IP Fig. 5.9.1 Subscanning Grip HP Positioning
START START A
Driving shaft grip Driven shaft grip

release (fast) release (ST)
Fig.5.6.2 Fig. 5.9.2 Fig. 5.9.4
Misalignment Misalignment
compensation DELAY TZ51 DELAY TZ51
Is there any remaining IP? compensation
N warm-up
Y warm-up
operation Driven shaft grip operation
Driving shaft grip (ST)
(fast)
Fig. 5.9.3 Fig. 5.9.5
Up-down load movement
Fig.2.8.1 DELAY TDZ51 DELAY TZ51
Driving shaft grip Driven shaft grip

Steps "after-reading conveyance " to release (fast) release (ST)
"IP load" in reading sequence of routine Fig. 5.9.2 Fig. 5.9.4
are executed (including erasure lamp DELAY TZ51
DELAY TZ51
turn-off and movement of elevation unit) HP
HP
Fig.2.1.1 positioning positioning
Driven shaft grip
Driving shaft grip (HR) (HR)
Cassette can Fig. 5.9.3 Fig. 5.9.5
Cassette ejection be inserted.
LED remains OFF. DELAY TZ51 DELAY TZ51
Fig.2.11.1
Driving shaft grip Driven shaft
release (HR) self-diagnostics
END Fig. 5.9.2 Fig. 5.9.6
FR1H0429.EPS
DELAY TZ51
END
Self-
diagnostics
Driving shaft self-diagnostics
Fig. 5.9.7
DELAY TZ51
Driving shaft grip

release (fast)
Idle
Fig. 5.9.2
positioning
DELAY TZ51
A
FR1H0430.EPS

TZ51 Wait for initialization grip operation 0.5 sec
TR1H0080.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
(2) Detailed Sequence of Driving Shaft Grip Release (Fast/HR) (4) Detailed Sequence of Driven Shaft Grip Release (Fast/HR)
Fig. 5.9.4 Driven Shaft Grip Release (HR/ST)

Fig. 5.9.2 Driving Shaft Grip Release (Fast/HR)
Table 5.9.2 Operation Parameters Table 5.9.4 Operation Parameters
START START
Symbol Description Value Symbol Description Value
TZ24 Driving shaft grip release timeout (ST/HR) 2 / 10 sec TZ31 Driven shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10sec
Driven shaft grip release driving
Driving shaft grip release driving TR1H0081.EPS DRIVE (MZ3/ON) TZ32 Lower limit for driven shaft grip release spec (ST/HR) 1.2 /3.0sec
DRIVE (MZ2/ON) TZ3 START TZ33 Upper limit for driven shaft grip release spec (ST/HR) 2.4 /4.9sec
Timer START TR1H0083.EPS
Is SZ2 closed within TZ24? Is SZ3 opened within TZ31?

N
Y N
Driving shaft grip release stop Y
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) Driven shaft grip release stop
Driving shaft grip release stop (soft) DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) Driven shaft grip release stop (soft)
(hard) DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
Level 0 error (hard) Level 0 error
03C8 03C7 Driven shaft grip release
END Driving shaft grip release error
Timer STOP error
NOTE: Slow is used only for self-diagnostics. FR1H0431.EPS
Timer > TZ33 or Timer <TZ32

(3) Detailed Sequence of Driving Shaft Grip (HR/ST) N
Y
Error log (detailed information)
Fig. 5.9.3 Driving Shaft Grip (HR/ST) Timer data recording

Level 2 error
START Table 5.9.3 Operation Parameters END
23C7 Driven shaft grip release
operation error
Symbol Description Value FR1H0433.EPS
Driving shaft grip driving TZ21 Driving shaft grip timeout (ST/HR) 5 / 10 sec
DRIVE (MZ2/ON) TZ22 Lower limit for driving shaft grip spec (ST/HR) 1.6 / 3.3 sec (5) Detailed Sequence of Driven Shaft Grip (HR/ST)
TZ21 START TZ23 Upper limit for driving shaft grip spec (ST/HR) 2.8 / 6.0 sec
Timer START Fig. 5.9.5 Driven Shaft Grip (Fast/HR)
TR1H0082.EPS
Is SZ2 opened within TZ21? Preprocessing: Fig. 5.9.1

N
Y
Driving shaft grip stop START Table 5.9.5 Operation Parameters
Driving shaft grip release stop DRIVE (MZ2/OFF)
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) Symbol Description Value
(soft) Driven shaft grip driving
(hard) TZ34 Driven shaft grip timeout (fast/HR) 2 / 10 sec
DRIVE (MZ3/ON) TR1H0084.EPS
Level 0 error
03C6
Driving shaft grip error
Timer STOP Is SZ3 closed within TZ34?
N
Timer > TZ23 or Timer <TZ22 Y Driven shaft grip stop
Y DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
N Error log (soft)
(detailed information) Driven shaft grip stop
Timer data recording DRIVE (MZ3/OFF)
(hard) Level 0 error
END
Level 2 error
23C6
03C9
Driven shaft grip error
Driving shaft grip operation error
END
NOTE: It is subject to selection of reading mode (HR/ST).
FR1H0432.EPS
NOTE: Slow is used only for self-diagnostics. FR1H0434.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(6) Detailed Sequence of Driven Shaft Self-Diagnostics (7) Detailed Sequence of Driving Shaft Self-Diagnostics
Fig. 5.9.6 Driven Shaft Self-Diagnostics Fig. 5.9.7 Driving Shaft Self-Diagnostics
START START
The previous latest data

Speed data setting (corrected) in COMS is used. The previous latest data
Speed data setting (corrected) in COMS is used.
Driven shaft grip release driving Driven shaft grip release driving
DRIVE (MZ3/ST speed ON) DRIVE (MZ2/ST speed ON)
TZ35 STRAT TZ25 STRAT
Timer START Timer START
Is SZ3 opened within TZ35? Is SZ2 opened within TZ25?

N N
Y Y
Driven shaft grip release stop Driven shaft grip release stop
DRIVE (MZ3/OFF) (hard) DRIVE(MZ3/OFF) (soft) Driven-side grip release stop Driven shaft grip release stop
DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) (hard) DRIVE (MZ2/OFF) (soft)
Level 0 error
Timer STOP 03CB Driven shaft grip release Level 0 error
self-diagnosis error Timer STOP 03CA Drive shaft grip
self-diagnosis error
Timer>TZ37 or Timer< TZ36
N
Y
Timer>TZ27 or Timer< TZ26
N
Rotation-speed Y
correction
Sequence flow chart
See 5.9 (8). Rotation-speed correction
Sequence flow chart
Speed data update See 5.9 (8).
Speed data update

DELAY TZ51
DELAY TZ51
Speed data setting

Speed data setting
END
FR1H0435.EPS END
FR1H0436.EPS

Symbol Table 5.9.7 Operation Parameters
Description Value
Driven shaft grip release timeout (self-diagnostics) Symbol Description Value
TZ35 5 sec
Lower limit for driven shaft grip release spec (self-diagnostics) TZ25 Driven shaft grip timeout (self-diagnostics) 5 sec
TZ36 1.7 sec
Upper limit for driven shaft grip release spec (self-diagnostics) TZ26 Lower limit for driven shaft grip spec (self-diagnostics) 2.2 sec
TZ37 2.0 sec
Wait for initialization grip operation TZ27 Upper limit for driven shaft grip spec (self-diagnostics) 2.4 sec
TZ51 0.5 sec
TZ51 Wait for initialization grip operation 0.5 sec
TR1H0085.EPS
TR1H0086.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 (1) 05.30.2002 FM3405
(8) Detailed Sequence of Rotation-Speed Correction Sequence Flow Chart 8.5.10 Empty Cassette Ejection
The rotation-speed correction sequence for driven-shaft and driving-shaft self-diagnostics, (1) Overall/General Sequence
and their respective parameters are as follows. Fig. 5.10.1 Empty Cassette Ejection
Fig. 5.9.8 Rotation-Speed Correction Sequence Flow Chart Preprocessing: Fig. 5.1.1
Preprocessing: Fig. 5.9.6, Fig. 5.9.7 START
START
Is SA1 opened?
Y
N
Calculate correction D/A data in each mode
(decimals omitted).
T1: Processing time acquired by Message output
measurement DHR = DoHR x T1/T0
DST = DoST x T1/T0 "Unload cassette."
It represents the value of the
timer indicated in Fig. 5.9.7. D (fast) = Do (fast) x T1/T0
Compare the upper-limit and lower-limit values of
the correction D/A data in each mode, and Fig.2.2.2
confirm the value.
Correction D/A data < lower-limit value LEDT2 is turned on The cassette removable
Substitute the lower-limit value condition is indicated.
for the correction D/A data.
Correction D/A data > upper-limit value Cassette removal Operation performed
Substitute the upper-limit value by the operator
for the correction D/A data.
In other cases Same as
Use the correction D/A data as is. in the cassette Is SA1 opened?
ejection routine N
Update the default for the subsequent calculation. Y
descried in
DoHR = DHR Fig. 2.11.1.
DoST = DST
DELAY TA13
Do (fast) = D (fast)
Instant return of
cassette is supported.
Is SA2 opened?
END N
FR1H0437.EPS Y
Table 5.9.8 Rotation-Speed Correction Parameters
MZ2 Initial value Driving-shaft grip spec Correction D/A data LEDT2 is turned off
Motor D/A output Process Lower-limit Upper-limit Lower-limit Upper-limit
D/A data
voltage voltage time value value value value
Mode
(V) (V) Do To(sec) Tmin Tmax Dmin Dmax LEDT1 is turned on
HR 3.50 1.20 61 H 36 H 255 H
ST 6.90 2.30 118 H 2.30 TZ26 TZ27 36 H 255 H
Fast 10.00 3.30 170 H 36 H 255 H Empty cassettes in all shelves are ejected?
N
Y
MZ3 Initial value Driving-shaft grip spec Correction D/A data
Motor D/A output Process Lower-limit Upper-limit Lower-limit Upper-limit
D/A data
Mode voltage voltage time value value value value END
FR1H0438.EPS
(V) (V) Do To(sec) Tmin Tmax Dmin Dmax
HR 4.30 1.43 73 H 36 H 255 H
Table 5.10.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing Table 5.10.1 Operation Parameters
ST 8.60 2.87 147 H 1.86 TZ36 TZ37 36 H 255 H
I/O name Symbol Description Value
Fast 10.00 3.30 170 H 36 H 255 H
Topmost TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec
TR1H0087.EPS
I/O name shelf 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
in flow position position position position TR1H0089.EPS

TR1H0088.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.5.11 Cassette Hold Release Operation 8.6 Error Handling

(1) Overall/General Sequence 8.6.1 Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 1
Fig. 5.11.1 Initialization Cassette Hold Release Operation
Table 5.11.1 Operation Parameters In this sequence, an error IP is returned to the
START Symbol Description Value cassette.
TA11 Hold release timeout 0.5 sec
A
TA12 Hold release retry 2 sec
The next IP processing is initiated upon return of
Check for Cassette hold release TA51 Wait for initialization hold 0.5 sec the error IP to the cassette.
next shelf DRIVE (SOLA1/ON) NA11 Hold release retry 5 times Table 6.1.1 Operation Parameters
Corresponding sequences
TR1H0090.EPS
DELAY TA51 Table 5.11.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec
I/O name
Fig. 2.4.2 Feed Suction TR1H0092.EPS
Topmost Fig. 4.2.2 Feed Step Operation (1/3) Table 6.1.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing
Is SA3 opened? I/O name shelf 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf I/O name
Y in flow position position position position
N Topmost
SA3 SA7 SA11 I/O name shelf 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
SA3 SA15
in flow position position position position
Is SA3 opened within TA11? SA1 SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13
TR1H0091.EPS
N
Y SA2 SA2 SA6 SA10 SA14
Is the number of retries made greater Fig. 6.1.1 Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 1
than the retry count (NA11)? LEDT2 LEDT2 LEDT4 LEDT6 LEDT8
N
Y Preprocessing: Fig.2.4.2, and Fig. 4.2.2 TR1H0093.EPS
Level 2 error
23A2 Cassette hold release START This elevation permission allows
13A3
Level 1 error At the time when the error IP is
Cassette shelf error failure retry returned to the cassette, an the process to start.
Retry at elevation permission is issued to If there is another IP
Check for Message display Cassette hold Elevation permission issued in the machine, up-download
initialization the time start the processing for the next IP
"CASS. SET DRIVE (SOLA1/OFF) load.
cassette of cassette in the queue.
Processing INCORRECT CS#." Error message output If there is any unprocessed
hold release hold release At the same time, removal of the
for DELAY TA12 cassette for the error IP is notified *** cassette, up-down feed
Degeneration for failure
cassette to the user. feed.
hold relevant shelf
release A Alarm disabled
failure
Degeneration for all shelves?
N Cassette removed
Y

Level 0 error
03A3
Degeneration for all shelves Fig.2.2.2
The cassette
LEDT2 is turned on removable condition
Released for all shelves? is indicated.
N Cassette ejection
Y Operation performed
Same as in the Cassette removal
by the operator
routine described
in Fig. 2.11.1.
END If hold release Is SA1 opened?
N
error occurs Y
If the shelf intended for ejection is degenerated due to initialization, during cassette
another empty cassette is put into another shelf so that the process ejection,
resumes. degeneration DELAY TA13
FR1H0439.EPS
takes place for
the relevant shelf. Instant return of
Is SA2 opened? cassette is supported.
N
Y
LEDT2 is turned off
The ready condition

LEDT1 is turned on is indicated.
END Return to normal routine

FR1H0440.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.6.2 Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 2 (2) Detailed Sequence of Cassette Hold Release
(1) Overall/General Sequence It is the cassette release operation corresponding to Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 2.
In this sequence, an error IP is returned to the Fig. 6.2.2 Cassette Hold Release 2
cassette.
The next IP processing is initiated after removal of
the error IP. START
Table 6.2.1 Operation Parameters A

Corresponding sequences Symbol Description Value Cassette hold release
Fig. 2.4.3 Feed Suction Conveyance TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec DRIVE (SOLA1/ON)
Fig. 2.4.4 Feed Conveyance TR1H0094.EPS
Fig. 2.10.3 Load Suction Table 6.2.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing Is SA3 opened? *: Push the cassette once to draw it out.
Fig. 2.10.4 Load Suction Conveyance Y The cassette cannot be drawn out by
I/O name N
Fig. 4.2.2 Feed Step Operation (2/3 and 3/3) Topmost
merely pulling it.
I/O name shelf 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
Fig. 4.2.3 Load Step Operation (1/3 and 2/3) in flow position position position position
SA1 SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13 Cassette Is SA3 opened within TA11?
N
SA2 SA2 SA6 SA10 SA14 hold Y
LEDT1 LEDT1 LEDT3 LEDT5 release is Is the number of retries made greater
LEDT7
Fig. 6.2.1 Error Handling: Cassette Ejection 2 LEDT2 checked. than the retry count (NA11)?
LEDT2 LEDT4 LEDT6 LEDT8 N
Y
Preprocessing: Fig. 2.4.3, Fig. 2.4.4, Fig. 2.10.3, TR1H0095.EPS Processing
Fig. 2.10.4, Fig. 4.2.2, and Fig. 4.2.3 for cassette Level 2 error
No matter whether there is hold release 23A2 Cassette hold failure
Removal of the cassette START any IP in the machine or failure failure retry
for the error IP is notified there is any unprocessed Level 0 error
cassette, it is placed in a 03A2 Cassette hold
to the user, and after the Error message output queue until an elevation
cassette removal, an END release error Cassette hold Retry at the
"STOP ALARM permission.
elevation permission is / UNLOAD CASS."
DRIVE (SOLA1/ON) time of cassette
issued to start the Another IP in the machine
proceeds to the load hold release
processing for the next
IP in the queue. standby condition. failure
Alarm disabled END DELAY TA12
The unprocessed cassette
Cassette removed enters the feed standby
condition.
Cassette hold System down
release 2 A
FR1H0442.EPS
Fig.6.2.2
LEDT2 is turned on The cassette removable Table 6.2.2 Operation Parameters Table 6.2.2a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow
Operation performed TA11 Hold release timeout 0.5 sec Topmost

Cassette removal I/O name 2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf
by the operator TA12 Wait for hold release retry 2 sec shelf
in flow position position position
Cassette ejection 2 position
If hold release Is SA1 opened? TR1H0096.EPS
N SOLA1 SOLA1 SOLA2 SOLA3 SOLA4
failure occurs Y
TR1H0097.EPS
during cassette
ejection 2, the
DELAY TA13
system goes
down. Instant return of cassette
Is SA2 opened? is supported.
N
Y
LEDT2 is turned off
The ready condition is

LEDT1 is turned on indicated.
This elevation permission
Elevation permission allows the process to start.
is issued If there is another IP in
the machine,up-down load
load.
If there is any unprocessed
cassette, up-down feed
Return to normal routine END feed.
FR1H0441.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
8.6.3 Error Handling: Recovered IP Load (2) Detailed Sequence of Reverse Conveyance Load
(1) Overall/General Sequence It is the detailed sequence of reverse conveyance load for Error Handling: Recovered IP
Load.
This process is performed when any IP error is detected before side-positioning conveyance.
Reverse conveyance load is performed to return the error IP to the cassette. Fig. 6.3.2 Reverse Conveyance Load
Corresponding sequences Preprocessing: Fig. 6.3.1, Fig. 6.7.1, Fig. 6.8.1, and Fig. 6.9.1
Fig. 2.5.3 IP Determination START
Fig. 2.6.2 BCR
Fig. 2.6.6 CSL/IDT Information Check Recovered IP load fast conveyance
DRIVE (MD3/PD81)
DRIVE (MC1/PC12)
Fig. 6.3.1 Error Handling: Recovered IP Load
DRIVE (MB2/PB23)
At the time when the error No matter whether there is any IP in the Is SB2 closed within TB81?
START
IP is returned to the cassette, machine or there is any unprocessed N
an elevation permission is cassette, it is placed in a queue until an Y
elevation permission.
Recovered IP load fast conveyance stop
issued to start the processing
for the next IP in the queue. Is error content out-of-spec IP? Another IP in the machine proceeds DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
Y
At the same time, removal of N to the load standby condition. DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
The unprocessed cassette enters the
Recovered IP load slow conveyance stop
the cassette for the error IP DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
is notified to the user.
Suction cup movement feed standby condition. DRIVE (MD3/PD81)
(HP load standby) Suction cup MD3, MC2, MB2, excitation OFF
load preparation DRIVE (MC1/PC12)
DRIVE (MB1/PB14)
DRIVE (MB2/PB23) Level 0 error
Reverse conveyance load 03B5 Conveyance error
Fig.6.3.2 This elevation permission allows the (Restored IP load high-speed)
Table 6.3.1 Operation Parameters process to start.
Elevation permission is issued If there is another IP in the machine, Is SB2 opened within TB22?
N
PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby) 86 p up-down load load. Y
Error message If there is any unprocessed cassette, Recovered IP load slow conveyance stop
TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5 sec "STOP ALARM / up-down feed feed. DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft)
TR1H0098.EPS UNLOAD CASS."
Table 6.3.1a List of I/O Names Used in the Flow and Drawing
Recovered IP load slow conveyance stop DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft)
I/O name Alarm disabled DRIVE (MD3/OFF) (soft) DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (soft)
I/O name
Topmost
2nd shelf 3rd shelf 4th shelf DRIVE (MC1/OFF) (soft) MD3, MC2, MB2, excitation OFF
shelf
in flow
position
position position position Cassette removed DRIVE (MB2/OFF) (hard)
SA1 SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13 Level 0 error
SA2 SA2 SA6 SA10 SA14 Cassette hold release 03B4 Conveyance error
LEDT1 LEDT1 LEDT3 LEDT5 (Restored IP load low-speed)
LEDT7 Fig.2.2.2 Load suction
LEDT2 LEDT2 LEDT4 LEDT6 LEDT8 The cassette removable
LEDT2 is turned on
TR1H0099.EPS condition is indicated. Fig.2.10.3
If reverse conveyance
Cassette ejection Operation performed by
Cassette removal
the operator
load is performed for
Same as in the Load suction conveyance any out-of-spec IP,
routine described conveyance grip
in Fig.2.11.1. Is SA1 opened? Fig.2.10.4 (HP return) is not
N
If hold release error Y executed.
occurs during cassette
ejection, degeneration
DELAY TA13 DRIVE (MD2/PD23)
takes place for the
relevant shelf. Instant return of cassette
Is SA2 opened? is supported.
N
Y
END
FR1H0444.EPS
LEDT2 is turned off
LEDT1 is turned on The ready condition is
indicated. Symbol Description Value
PB23 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) - infinite p
PC12 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) + infinite p
FR1H0443.EPS
PD81 Recovery conveyance (fast load conveyance) + infinite p
TB22 Load timeout 2.9 sec
TB81 Recovery load timeout 5.1 sec
TR1H0100.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 05.30.2002 FM3405
05.30.2002 FM3405 (1)
8.6.4 Error Handling: Overexposure 8.6.6 Error Handling: Detection of IP with Improper Generation or Unit
Type
This error handling is performed when overexposed IP is determined in the erasure check
sequence. This error handling is performed when level 1 error IP with improper generation/type de-
tected occurs in the BCR sequence.
Corresponding sequence
Fig. 2.10.5 Erasure Check Corresponding sequence
Fig. 6.4.1 Error Handling: Overexposure Fig. 2.6.2 BCR

Fig. 6.6.1 Error Handling: Detection of IP with Improper Generation or Unit Type
At the time when the START

error IP is returned to Error message output
the cassette, an elevation Stop ARARM/UNLOAD CASS.
permission is issued (via
normal routine) to start the At the time when the
processing for the next IP Stop ARARM/UNLOAD CASS.
in the queue. At the same Alarm disabled the cassette, an elevation
time, removal of the cassette permission is issued (via
for the error IP is notified to normal routine) to start the
Cassette removed
the user. processing for the next IP
Alarm disabled
in the queue. At the same
END Process continued time, removal of the cassette
for the error IP is notified to Cassette removed
FR1H0445.EPS
the user.
8.6.5 Error Handling: Lamp Failure END Process continued

FR1H0447.EPS
This error handling is performed when an unlit erasure lamp is detected in the erasure check
sequence.
Corresponding sequence
Fig. 2.10.5 Erasure Check
Fig. 6.5.1 Error Handling: Lamp Failure

START
At the time when the

the cassette, an elevation Stop ARARM/UNLOAD CASS.
permission is issued (via
normal routine) to start the
processing for the next IP
in the queue. At the same Alarm disabled
time, removal of the cassette
for the error IP is notified to Cassette removed
the user.
Subsequently, degeneration is performed
for the lamp and the IP is left unerased ***.
END Process continued

FR1H0446.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.6.7 Error Handling: IDT Line Error 8.6.8 Error Handling: ID Information Error
This error handling is performed when IDT line error occurs in the CSL/IDT information This error handling is performed when ID information not registered error occurs in the
check sequence. CSL/IDT information check sequence.
Corresponding sequence Corresponding sequence

Fig. 2.6.6 CSL/IDT Information Check Fig. 2.6.6 CSL/IDT Information Check
Fig. 6.7.1 Error Handling: IDT Line Error
Fig. 6.8.1 Error Handling: ID Information Error
START No matter whether there is any IP in the Preprocessing: Fig. 2.6.6

machine or there is any unprocessed No matter whether there is any IP in the
At the time when cassette, it is placed in a queue until
the error IP is Error message output START machine or there is any unprocessed
Stop ARARM an elevation permission. At the time when the error cassette, it is placed in a queue until
returned to the Another IP in the machine proceeds IP is returned to the
cassette, an /UNLOAD CASS. an elevation permission.
to the load standby condition. cassette, an elevation Error message output
elevation Another IP in the machine proceeds
The unprocessed cassette enters the permission is issued to Stop ARARM
to the load standby condition.
permission IDT line established Alarm disabled feed standby condition. start the processing for the /UNLOAD CASS.
is issued to The unprocessed cassette enters the
next IP in the queue. Executed without feed standby condition.
start the processing Process stopped At the same time, removal registration Alarm disabled
for the next IP in the of the cassette for the error
queue. At the same time, Suction cup movement (HP load standby)
Suction cup load preparation IP is notified to the user. Cassette removed
removal of the cassette DRIVE (MB1/PB14)
for the error IP is notified This elevation permission allows the Suction cup movement (HP load standby) Suction cup load
to the user. Reverse conveyance process to start. DRIVE (MB1/PB14) preparation
load If there is another IP in the machine,
Fig.6.3.2 up-down load load. Reverse conveyance This elevation permission allows the
If there is any unprocessed cassette, load process to start.
Elevation permission If there is another IP in the machine,
is issued up-down feed feed. Fig.6.3.2
up-down load load.
Error message output Elevation permission If there is any unprocessed cassette,
Stop ARARM/UNLOAD CASS. is issued up-down feed feed.
Error message output
IDT line error Stop ARARM
Alarm disabled /UNLOAD CASS. The IP without ID information registration
is ejected.
Alarm disabled
Cassette removed
Cassette hold release Cassette removed

Fig.2.2.2
LEDT2 is turned on The cassette removable condition is Fig.2.2.2
indicated.
The cassette removable condition is
LEDT2 is turned on
indicated.
Cassette removal Operation performed by the operator
Cassette ejection Operation performed by the operator
Cassette removal
Cassette ejection
described in Fig. 2.11.1. Is SA1 opened?
N Same as in the routine Is SA1 opened?
If hold release error Y described in Fig. 2.11.1. N
occurs during cassette Y
If hold release error
ejection, degeneration occurs during cassette
DELAY TA13
takes place for the ejection, degeneration DELAY TA13
relevant shelf. Instant return of cassette is supported. takes place for the
Is SA2 opened? relevant shelf. Instant return of cassette is supported.
N Is SA2 opened?
Y N
Y
LEDT2 is turned off The ready condition is indicated.

LEDT2 is turned off
LEDT1 is turned on Return to normal routine
LEDT1 is turned on The ready condition is indicated.

FR1H0448.EPS END If continued without registration, the IDT
waits for IP registration after reading.
FR1H0449.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.6.9 Error Handling: After-Reading Conveyance Error 8.6.10 Error Handling: BCR Retry
In this sequence, if any error occurs in the after-reading conveyance operation, the IP in the This error handling is performed when barcode retry occurs in the BCR sequence.
sequence prior to side-positioning is conveyed in reverse direction along the feed convey-
ance path so that the IP is returned to the cassette. Corresponding sequence
Fig. 6.9.1 Error Handling: After-Reading Conveyance Error Fig. 6.10.1 Error Handling: BCR Retry
START START
Process up to side-positioning is performed for second IP DELAY TC31
Suction Side-positioning (HP stopper)

Suction cup movement (HP load standby) cup load DRIVE (MD1/PD11)
DRIVE (MB1/PB14) preparation
Cassette ejection is DRIVE (MD2/PD23)
Reverse conveyance load not executed. After
Fig.6.3.2 reboot, the process Side-positioning (stopper HP)
is started. DRIVE (MD1/PD16)
END
FR1H0450.EPS
BCR return conveyance driving
DRIVE (MD3/PD33)
PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby) 86p DELAY TC31
TR1H0105.EPS
END
FR1H0451.EPS
Table 6.10.1a Operation Parameters

PD11 Side-positioning (HP stopper) 64 p
PD16 Side-positioning (stopper HP) -64 p
TC31 Wait for BCR retry 0.1 sec
TR1H0106.EPS

PD33 Conveyance (BCR return) 204 p 1752 p 2792 p 4870 p 5338 p 2894 p 5338 p 4116 p
TR1H0107.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.7 Error Code Index Table 7.1.1 CR-IR341 Error Code Index (2/2)
Code Error name Chart No. The figure in parentheses indicates the relevant page.
Table 7.1.1 CR-IR341 Error Code Index (1/2) 23A1 Cassette hold failure retry Fig. 2.1.1 (MD-59), Fig. 5.4.3 (MD-137), Fig. 5.5.1 (MD-139)
Code Error name Chart No. The figure in parentheses indicates the relevant page. 23A2 Cassette hold release failure retry Fig. 2.2.2 (MD-61), Fig. 5.5.1 (MD-138), Fig. 5.11.1 (MD-152), Fig. 6.2.2 (MD-155)
03A2 Cassette hold release error Fig. 6.2.2 (MD-155) 23A3 Degeneration for relevant cassette shelf Fig. 2.2.2 (MD-61)
03A3 All stackers degenerated Fig. 2.2.2 (MD-61), Fig. 5.5.1 (MD-138/139), Fig. 5.11.1 (MD-152) 23A9 Barcode read retry Fig. 2.6.2 (MD-75)
03B1 IP feed conveyance error Fig. 2.5.2 (MD-72) 23BA Side-positioning HP detection retry Fig. 2.6.5 (MD-79)
03B2 IP load conveyance error Fig. 2.10.2 (MD-99) 23BB Side-positioning HP detection preparation retry Fig. 2.6.5 (MD-78)
03B3 Side-positioning conveyor entrance conveyance error Fig. 2.6.3 (MD-76) 23BC Side-positioning operation error Fig. 2.6.4 (MD-77), Fig. 4.3.1 (MD-116)
03B4 Restored IP-load low-speed conveyance error Fig. 6.3.2 (MD-157) 23BD Side-positioning grip HP detection retry Fig. 2.7.5 (MD-90)
03B5 Restored IP-load high-speed conveyance error Fig. 6.3.2 (MD-157) 23BE Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation retry Fig. 2.7.5 (MD-89)
23BF Side-positioning grip operation error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-85)
03B6 IP feed/load conveyor remaining IP discharge error Fig. 5.3.3 (MD-124), Fig. 5.3.4 (MD-125), Fig. 5.3.6 (MD-126), Fig. 5.3.7 (MD-126),
Fig. 5.4.1 (MD-135), Fig. 5.4.2 (MD-136), Fig. 5.6.1 (MD-140/141) 23C5 FFM drive W.F. disorder Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-86)
23C6 Drive shaft grip operation error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-84), Fig. 3.3.2 (MD-106), Fig. 5.9.3 (MD-146)
Fig. 5.3.12 (MD-131), Fig. 5.3.13 (MD-132),
03B7 Side-positioning conveyor remaining IP discharge error 23C7 Driven grip release operation error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-84), Fig. 3.3.3 (MD-107), Fig. 5.9.4 (MD-147)
Fig. 5.3.14 (MD-133)
23D2 Conveyance sensor error Fig. 2.7.6 (MD-91)
03B9 IP load standby unit remaining IP discharge error Fig. 5.7.1 (MD-143)
23DA After-reading grip HP detection retry Fig. 2.7.4 (MD-88)
03BC Side-positioning HP operation error Fig. 2.6.5 (MD-79)
23DB After-reading grip HP detection preparation retry Fig. 2.7.4 (MD-87)
03BF Side-positioning grip operation error Fig. 2.7.5 (MD-90)
23DC After-reading grip operation error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-85)
03C1 IP reading conveyance error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-84), Fig. 3.3.3 (MD-107)
23DE Elevation shelf movement error retry Fig. 2.3.1 (MD-62), Fig. 2.3.3 (MD-66), Fig. 2.8.1 (MD-93)
03C2 Reading IP leading edge detection error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-84)
23E1 Feed-IP suction failure retry Fig. 2.4.2 (MD-68), Fig. 4.2.2 (MD-110)
03C6 Drive shaft grip error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-84), Fig. 3.3.2 (MD-106), Fig. 5.2.1 (MD-119), Fig. 5.9.3 (MD-146)
23E4 Load IP suction failure retry Fig. 2.10.3 (MD-100), Fig. 4.2.3 (MD-113)
03C7 Driven shaft grip release error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-84), Fig. 3.3.3 (MD-107), Fig. 5.9.4 (MD-147)
Drive shaft grip release error 23E6 Suction cup HP detection preparation retry Fig. 2.3.2 (MD-63)
03C8 Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-85), Fig. 3.3.3 (MD-107), Fig. 5.9.2 (MD-146)
23E7 Suction cup HP detection retry Fig. 2.3.2 (MD-64)
03C9 Driven shaft grip error Fig. 2.7.2 (MD-83), Fig. 3.3.2 (MD-106), Fig. 5.2.1 (MD-119), Fig. 5.9.5 (MD-147)
Drive shaft grip self-diagnosis error Fig. 2.3.1 (MD-62), Fig. 2.3.3 (MD-65), Fig. 2.4.3 (MD-69), Fig. 2.8.1 (MD-93),
03CA Fig. 5.9.7 (MD-149) 23E8 Suction cup HP return error Fig. 2.10.4 (MD-101), Fig. 4.2.2 (MD-111), Fig. 4.2.3 (MD-114), Fig. 5.3.2 (MD-123)
03CB Driven shaft grip release self-diagnosis error Fig. 5.9.6 (MD-148)
TR1H0109.EPS
03D1 Post-conveyor error Fig. 2.7.6 (MD-91)
03D2 IP switchback conveyance error Fig. 2.7.6 (MD-91)
03D3 Pre-erasure conveyance error Fig. 2.9.2 (MD-95)
03D4 Branch path selector guide operation error Fig. 2.9.2 (MD-95), Fig. 5.3.9 (MD-128), Fig. 5.3.10 (MD-129)
03D5 Erasure conveyance error Fig. 2.9.3 (MD-96)
03D6 Post-erasure conveyance error Fig. 2.9.4 (MD-97)
03D7 Junction path selector guide operation error Fig. 2.9.4 (MD-97)
03D8 Post-conveyor remaining IP discharge error Fig. 5.3.9 (MD-128), Fig. 5.3.10 (MD-129)
03D9 Erasure conveyor remaining IP discharge error Fig. 5.3.9 (MD-128), Fig. 5.3.10 (MD-129), Fig. 5.3.11 (MD-130)
03DC Post-conveyor grip operation error Fig. 2.7.4 (MD-88)
03DD HP up-and-down movement error Fig. 2.3.3 (MD-65)
03DE Up-and-down movement error Fig. 2.3.1 (MD-62), Fig. 2.3.3 (MD-66), Fig. 2.8.1 (MD-93)
03E8 Suction cup moving error Fig. 2.3.2 (MD-64)
0549 Image quit error Fig. 2.7.3 (MD-85)
13A1 Cassette setting error Fig. 2.1.1 (MD-59), Fig. 5.4.3 (MD-137)
13A2 Cassette hold release error Fig. 2.2.2 (MD-61)
13A3 Cassette shelf error Fig. 5.5.1 (MD-138/139), Fig. 5.11.1 (MD-152)
13A8 Non standard IP size Fig. 2.5.3 (MD-73), Fig. 2.6.7 (MD-81)
13A9 Barcode read error Fig. 2.6.2 (MD-75)
13AA Erasure lamp failure Fig. 2.10.5 (MD-102)
13AB Overexposed IP unerased Fig. 2.10.5 (MD-102)
13AC ID information not registered Fig. 2.6.6 (MD-80)
13AD IP with improper generation/type detected Fig. 2.6.2 (MD-75)
13AE No relevant MPM code Fig. 2.6.6 (MD-80)
13AF IDT line error Fig. 2.6.6 (MD-80)
13B8 IP position information error Fig. 5.4.2 (MD-136), Fig. 5.6.2 (MD-142)
13E1 Feed-IP suction error Fig. 2.4.2 (MD-68), Fig. 4.2.2 (MD-110)
13E2 Feed-IP dropped Fig. 2.4.3 (MD-69), Fig. 4.2.2 (MD-111)
13E3 Feed-IP grip error Fig. 2.4.4 (MD-70), Fig. 4.2.2 (MD-112)
13E4 Load IP suction error Fig. 2.10.3 (MD-100), Fig. 4.2.3 (MD-113)
13E5 Load IP dropped Fig. 2.10.4 (MD-101), Fig. 4.2.3 (MD-114)
TR1H0108.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.8 Parameters Symbol Description

Ref. value
Remarks
(sec.)
8.8.1 Timer Settings TC11 Feed conveyance timeout 2.1
TC12 IP length measurement timeout 1.1
Ref. value
Symbol Description Remarks 298mm (24x30 metric)
(sec.) TC21 0.57
/238mm (24x30 inch) determination
TA11 Hold release timeout 0.5
TC22 354mm (14x14 inch)/303mm (10x21 inch) determination 0.7
TA12 Wait for hold release retry 2
TC23 430mm (14x17 inch)/354mm (14x14 inch) determination 0.83
TA13 Wait for cassette OUT 0.5
TC31 Wait for BCR retry 0.1
TA14 Hold timeout 0.5
TD11 Wait for settlement of IP that is not side-positioned 0.2
TA15 Wait for hold retry 2
TD12 Wait for side-positioning return 0.1
TA16 Wait for cassette IN 0.2
TD13 Wait for re-side-positioning 0.1
TA51 Wait for initialization hold 0.5
TD14 Wait for settlement of IP that has been side-positioned 0.2
TB11 Feed suction timeout 1
TD31 Wait for BCR return 0.5
TB12 Wait for feed suction 0
TD32 Wait for side-positioning conveyance return 0.2
TB13 Wait for feed leak 0.1
TD33 IDT response timeout 120
TB14 Grip timeout 1
TD34 Side-positioning timeout IDT 0.37 14x17 inch
TB15 Wait for load suction 0
0.53 14x14 inch
TB16 Wait for load leak 0.1
0.44 10x12 inch
TB17 Wait for next operation 0.1
0.65 8x10 inch
TB18 Wait for feed 0.05
0.70 1824 ST
TB21 After-reading conveyance timeout 2.6
0.45 2430 ST
TB22 Load timeout 3.7
0.70 1824 HR
TB51 Wait for suction cup HP settlement 0.5
0.57 2430 HR
TB52 Suction cup HP detection preparation timeout 1.3
Side-positioning timeout CSL 0.36 14x17 inch
TB53 Suction cup HP detection timeout 5.3
0.52 14x14 inch
TB54 Suction cup HP 1-pulse driving timeout 20
0.54 10x12 inch
TB71 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP search timeout 10.2
0.75 8x10 inch
TB72 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 5.6
0.80 1824 ST
TB73 Load standby remaining IP ejection timeout 9.6
0.55 2430 ST
TB74 Load remaining IP ejection timeout 5.6
0.80 1824 HR
TB75 Before-reading standby remaining IP ejection timeout 12.5
0.67 2430 HR
TB76 Wait for side-positioning detection 0.5
TD35 Normal reading IP trailing-edge detection timeout 19.1 14x17 inch
TB77 Wait for feed switchback 0.5
15.0 14x14 inch
TB78 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP movement timeout 6.7
12.4 10x12 inch
TB79 Feed/load conveyance remaining IP movement timeout 2 8.7
7.0 8x10 inch
TB81 Recovery load timeout 3.1
5.8 1824 ST
TB101 Elevation reference seek timeout 1 13.5
12.1 2430 ST
TB102 Elevation reference seek timeout 2 1.4
10.5 1824 HR
TB103 Elevation topmost shelf seek timeout 1 1.4
TB104 Elevation topmost shelf seek timeout 2 1.4 16.8 2430 HR
TR1H1154.EPS
TB105 Elevation HP 1-pulse driving timeout 20
TR1H1153.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460
Ref. value Ref. value

Symbol Description Remarks Symbol Description Remarks
(sec.) (sec.)
TD36 Secondary erasure reading IP trailing-edge 3.3 14x17 inch TF12 After-reading conveyance IP trailing-edge detection 1.38 14x17 inch
detection timeout timeout
2.8 14x14 inch 1.22 14x14 inch
2.4 10x12 inch 1.11 10x12 inch
1.7 8x10 inch 0.89 8x10 inch
1.6 1824 ST 0.84 1824 ST
2.4 2430 ST 1.10 2430 ST
1.6 1824 HR 0.84 1824 HR
2.0 2430 HR 0.97 2430 HR
TD51 Wait for side-positioning HP settlement 0.5 TF13 Wait for switchback 0.2
TD52 Side-positioning HP detection preparation timeout 1 TF14 Before-erasure conveyance IP leading-edge 0.4
detection timeout
TD53 Side-positioning HP detection timeout 8
TF15 Erasure conveyance IP trailing-edge detection 14.2
TD54 Side-positioning HP 1-pulse driving timeout 10 timeout
TD61 Wait for conveyance grip HP settlement 0.5 TF17 After-erasure conveyance IP trailing-edge detection 1.2
TD62 Conveyance grip HP detection preparation timeout 1.2 timeout 1
TD63 Conveyance grip HP detection timeout 13.3 TF18 After-erasure conveyance IP trailing-edge detection 1.3
timeout 2
TD64 Conveyance grip HP 1-pulse driving timeout 10
TF51 Wait for initialization erasure lamp turn-on 5
TD71 Side-positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection 5.6
TF52 Wait for initialization erasure lamp turn-off 75
timeout 1
TF71 After-reading conveyance remaining IP ejection 5.6
TD72 Side-positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection 3.9
timeout
timeout 2
TF72 Erasure conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 4.8
TD73 Side-positioning conveyance remaining IP search 4.8
timeout TF73 Erasure conveyance remaining IP search timeout 3.9
TD74 Wait for side-positioning switchback 0.5 TF74 Load standby positioning timeout 1 1.2
TD75 Initialization side-positioning timeout 3.8 TF76 Reading conveyance remaining IP search timeout 4.8
TD91 SPR after-reading conveyance timeout 1.7 TF77 Load standby positioning timeout 2 5.6
TD92 Wait for SPR after-reading trailing-edge detection 2.57
TQ21 SPR after-erasure conveyance timeout 2.6
2.07
TQ22 SPR load timeout 3.7
1.74
TR11 SPR before-erasure conveyance timeout 0.42
1.06
0.59
0.91
1.7 0.69
0.91 0.91
1.31 0.96
TF11 After-reading conveyance IP leading-edge detection 1.51
0.7
timeout
TR1H1155.EPS 0.96
0.83
TR12 SPR erasure conveyance IP trailing-edge detection

timeout
TR1H1156.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99
05.31.99 FM2460
FM2460 (1)
Ref. value Ref. value

Symbol Description Remarks Symbol Description Remarks
(sec.) (sec.)
TZ11 Subscanning IP leading-edge detection timeout 20.1 14x17 inch
TZ31 Driven shaft grip lease timeout 5 ST
16.0 14x14 inch
10 HR
13.4 10x12 inch
TZ32 Lower limit for driven shaft grip release spec 1.5 ST
8.0 8x10 inch
3.0 HR
6.8 1824 ST
TZ33 Upper limit for driven shaft grip release spec 2.0 ST
13.1 2430 ST
4.0 HR
11.5 1824 HR
TZ34 Driven shaft grip timeout 2 Fast
17.8 2430 HR
10 HR
TZ12 Driving shaft grip start 2.10 ST
TZ35 Driven shaft grip release timeout (self-diagnostics) 5 Self-diagnostics
4.20 HR
TZ36 Lower limit for driven shaft grip release spec 1.7 Self-diagnostics
TZ13 Driven shaft grip release start (self-diagnostics)
TZ14 Wait for subscanning stop 0 Standard reading TZ37 Upper limit for driven shaft grip release spec 2.0 Self-diagnostics
(conveyance compensation for logical reading) (self-diagnostics)
18x43 portrait, center
TZ40 Mirror-up timeout 1
10x8 landscape, upper right
TZ41 Mirror-down timeout 1
10x12 portrait, upper right
TZ51 Wait for initialization grip operation 0.5
14x14, top
TR1H1161.EPS
18x8, top
Pantomo, portrait, right center

8.8.2 Retry Count Settings
TZ15 Wait for subscanning settlement 0.3 Ref. value
Symbol Description
(sec/count)
TZ16 Wait for secondary erasure grip release 3
NA11 Hold release retry 5
TZ17 Wait for end of secondary erasure reading conveyance 0.71
NA12 Hold retry 5
TZ18 Wait for secondary erasure subscanning settlement 0.5
NB11 Feed suction retry 3
TZ21 Driving shaft grip timeout 5 ST
NB12 Load suction retry 3
10 HR
NB51 Suction HP retry 2
TZ22 Lower limit for driving shaft grip spec 1.8 ST
NB100 Elevation HP retry 2
3.6 HR
NB101 Elevation movement retry 2
TZ23 Upper limit for driving shaft grip spec 2.4 ST
ND31 BCR retry 3
4.8 HR
ND51 Side-positioning HP retry 3
TZ24 Driving shaft grip release timeout 2 Fast
ND61 Conveyance grip HP retry 3
10 HR TR1H1158.EPS
TZ25 Driving shaft grip timeout (self-diagnostics) 5 Self-diagnostics

TZ26 Lower limit for driving shaft grip spec (self-diagnostics) 2.2 Self-diagnostics
TZ27 Upper limit for driving shaft grip spec (self-diagnostics) 2.4 Self-diagnostics
TR1H1157.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 08.31.2005 FM4710
8.8.3 Erasure Conveyance Table Other than V-type

PF13/PF14
(different generation)
Roller line
Erasure conveyance TF15 timeout
V-type ST X-ray dosage (mR) speed Remarks
table No. speed (sec)
(standard sensitivity) PF13/PF14 (mm/sec)
Roller line Greater Less (pps)
Erasure conveyance TF15 timeout than than
X-ray dosage (mR) speed Remarks
(mm/sec) B No limitation 471.20 3000 1.8
Greater Less (pps)
than than
4 0 85 42.00 2139 14.2 PF13/PF14 conveyance speed (pps): Equivalent to 2W1-2 phase TR1H1166.EPS
5 85 120 33.41 1702 17.8 V-type ST

(secondary erasure) PF13/PF14
6 120 200 25.13 1280 23.7 Roller line
7 200 250 21.46 1093 27.7 (mm/sec)
Greater Less (pps)
than than
8 250 300 18.38 936 32.3
0 No limitation 471.20 3000 1.8
9 300 350 15.72 801 37.8
PF13/PF14 conveyance speed (pps): Equivalent to 2W1-2 phase TR1H1167.EPS
A 350 400 13.49 687 44.1
B 400 8.40 428 70.7
V-type ST
(sub-standard sensitivity) PF13/PF14
Roller line
(mm/sec)
Greater Less (pps)
than than
4 0 85 42.00 2139 14.2
5 85 120 33.41 1702 17.8
6 120 25.13 1280 23.7
V-type ST
(high sensitivity) PF13/PF14
Roller line
(mm/sec)
Greater Less (pps)
than than
4 0 40 42.00 2139 14.2
6 40 25.13 1280 23.7

V-type HR
(standard sensitivity) PF13/PF14
Roller line
(mm/sec)
Greater Less (pps)
than than
4 0 1700 42.00 2139 14.2
5 1700 2400 33.41 1702 17.8
6 2400 4000 25.13 1280 23.7
7 4000 5000 21.46 1093 27.7
8 5000 6000 18.38 936 32.3
9 6000 7000 15.72 801 37.8

A 7000 8000 13.49 687 44.1
B 8000 8.40 428 70.7
08.31.2005 FM4710 05.31.99 FM2460 (1)
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 174
8.8.4 Pulse Motor Parameters
How to Understand Pulse Motor Parameter
Example of pulse motor parameter
UP DN (Down)
Delay
HSPD Pulse count (P)
LSPD (Equivalent to area)
Next operation
FR1H6520.EPS
Pulse count (P)
Operating direction and operating pulse count.
Negative quantity: CCW direction
No sign (equivalent to positive quantity): CW direction
HSPD (high-speed), LSPD (low-speed)
Maximum speed and minimum speed. If they differ, slow-up or slow-down control is
performed (trapezoidal driving).
UP (rise-time), DN (fall-time)
Acceleration and deceleration time during trapezoidal driving. It is set in msec.
Delay (powerdown-delay)
A setup value, from stop to issuance of a next operating instruction.
Its unit is 2 msec. 5 in the Delay column means 10 msec.
H/L (halt-limit)
It corresponds to three digits of bits.
1st digit (bit 2): 0 = drive with high power; 1 = drive with low power
2nd digit (bit 1): 0 = stop in energized condition; 1 = stop with unenergized condition
3rd digit (bit 0): 0 = with power down delay; 1 = without power down delay
The meanings of the H/L values are summarized in the table below.
Drive Stop condition Power down delay
HL value 3-bit value
1st digit of 3 bits 2nd digit of 3 bits 3rd digit of 3 bits
0 000 High power Energized condition Provided
1 001 High power Energized condition Not provided
2 010 High power Unenergized condition Provided
3 011 High power Unenergized condition Not provided
4 100 Low power Energized condition Provided
5 101 Low power Energized condition Not provided
6 110 Low power Unenergized condition Provided
7 111 Low power Unenergized condition Not provided
TR1H1320**.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 175
List of Pulse Motor Parameters
Pulse count
I/O Symbol Description Motor rotating (p), common
HSPD(pps) LSPD(pps) UP(ms) DN(ms) Delay H/L Remarks
name direction to each IP
MB1 PB11 Suction cup movement (HP feed suction) CW 250 500 300 65 109 10 0
PB12 Suction cup movement (feed suction feed leak) CCW 262 500 300 65 109 10 0
PB13 Suction cup movement (load standby HP) CCW 86 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB14 Suction cup movement (HP load standby) CW 86 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB15 Suction cup movement (load standby load suction) CCW 100 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB16 Suction cup movement (load suction load leak) CW 264 500 300 65 109 10 0
PB17 Suction cup movement (load leak HP) CCW 250 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB18 Suction cup movement (feed leak load standby) CW 98 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB19 Suction cup movement (HP feed leak) CCW 12 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB50 Suction cup movement (initial driving) CW 1 300 300 63 63 10 0
PB51 Suction cup movement (HP return) CW 0x7FFFFF 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB52 Suction cup 1-pulse driving (HP movement 1) CCW 1 300 300 63 63 400 0
PB53 Suction cup movement (HP positioning) CCW 0xFFFFFF 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB54 Suction cup movement (HP movement 2) CCW 6 300 300 63 63 10 0
PB81 Suction cup movement (HP load suction) CCW 14 500 300 100 100 10 0
PB82 Suction cup movement (load suction HP) CW 14 500 300 100 100 10 0
MB2 PB21 Conveyance (feed suction synchronization) CW 675 1185.386016 711 65 109 0 0
PB22 Conveyance (feed) CW 0x7FFFFF 1500.035339 300.0070677 220 70 0 0
PB23 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) CCW 0xFFFFFF 1500.035339 300.0070677 220 70 0 0
PB25 Conveyance (load suction synchronization) CCW 0xFFFFFF 1185.386016 711 65 109 0 0
PB26 Conveyance (grip retry) CW 0x7FFFFF 1000 600.0141355 70 70 0 0
PB27 Conveyance (maintenance IP positioning) CW 715 1000 600.0141355 70 70 0 0
PB71 Initialization conveyance (down direction) CW 0x7FFFFF 300.0070677 300.0070677 63 63 0 0
PB72 Initialization conveyance (up direction) CCW 0xFFFFFF 300.0070677 300.0070677 63 63 0 0
PB74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) CCW 0xFFFFFF 1500.035339 300.0070677 220 70 0 0
MB3 PB112 Elevation movement 1 2 CCW 3470 4000 300 150 150 10 0
PB113 Elevation movement 1 3 CCW 6930 4000 300 150 150 10 0
PB121 Elevation movement 2 1 CW 3470 4000 300 150 150 10 0
PB100 Elevation (initial driving) CW 1 300 300 63 63 10 0
PB101 Elevation (UP) CW 0x7FFFFF 1000 300 100 100 10 0
PB102 Elevation (DOWN) CCW 0xFFFFFF 1000 300 100 100 10 0
PB103 Elevation 1-pulse driving (edge movement) CW 1 300 300 63 63 50 0
PB104 Elevation (HP movement) CW 60 300 300 63 63 10 0
MC1 PC11 Conveyance (feed) CCW 0xFFFFFF 3000.070677 600.0141355 220 70 0 0
PC12 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) CW 0x7FFFFF 3000.070677 600.0141355 220 70 0 0
PC71 Initialization conveyance (down direction) CCW 0xFFFFFF 600.0141355 600.0141355 63 63 0 0
PC72 Initialization conveyance (up direction) CW 0x7FFFFF 600.0141355 600.0141355 63 63 0 0
PC74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) CW 0x7FFFFF 3000.070677 600.0141355 220 70 0 0
TR1H1159.EPS
009-051-05
04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 175.1
Pulse count
I/O Motor rotating
Symbol Description (p), common HSPD (pps) LSPD (pps) UP (ms) DN (ms) Delay H/L Remarks
name direction
to each IP
MD1 PD11 Side-positioning (HP stopper) CW 64 1000.002338 600 70 70 10 0
98p (14x17)
98p (14x14)
778p (10x12)
778p (8x10)
PD12 Side-positioning (stopper side-positioning 1) CW 1000.002338 600 70 70 10 0 872p (1824 ST)
872p (2430 ST)
840p (1824 HR)
440p (2430 HR)
68p (14x17)
68p (14x14)
68p (10x12)
68p (8x10)
PD13 Side-positioning (side-positioning 1 back) CW 1000.002338 600 70 70 10 0
68p (1824 ST)
68p (2430 ST)
34p (1824 HR)
34p (2430 HR)
68p (14x17)
68p (14x14)
68p (10x12)
68p (8x10)
PD14 Side-positioning (back side-positioning 2) CCW 1000.002338 600 70 70 10 0 68p (1824 ST)
68p (2430 ST)
34p (1824 HR)
34p (2430 HR)
PD15 Side-positioning (side-positioning 2 HP) 1000.002338 600 70 70 10 0
PD16 Side-positioning (stopper HP) CCW 64 1000.002338 600 70 70 10 0
PD50 Side-positioning (initial driving) CW 1 300 300 63 63 10 0
PD51 Side-positioning (HP return) CW 0x7FFFFF 500 300.0070677 100 100 10 0
PD52 Side-positioning 1-pulse driving (HP movement 1) CCW 1 300.0070677 300.0070677 63 63 400 0
PD53 Side-positioning (HP positioning) CCW 0xFFFFFF 500 300.0070677 100 100 10 0
PD54 Side-positioning (HP movement 2) CCW 18 300.0070677 300.0070677 63 63 10 0
MD2 PD21 Conveyance grip release CW 256 1500.003508 300 100 100 10 0
(ME1) PD22 Conveyance grip CW 144 1500.003508 300 100 100 10 0
PD23 Conveyance grip (HP return) CW 400 400 300 300 300 10 0
PD24 Conveyance grip (slow) CW 144 400 300 300 63 10 0
PD60 Conveyance grip (initial driving) CW 1 300 300 63 63 10 0
PD61 Conveyance grip (HP return) CCW 0xFFFFFF 500 300.0070677 100 100 10 0
PD62 Conveyance grip 1-pulse driving (HP movement 1) CW 1 300.0070677 300.0070677 63 63 200 0
PD63 Conveyance grip (HP positioning) CW 0x7FFFFF 500 300.0070677 100 100 10 0
PD64 Conveyance grip (HP movement 2) CW 6 300.0070677 300.0070677 63 63 10 0
MD3 PD31 Conveyance (feed) CCW 0xFFFFFF 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0
PD32 Conveyance (BCR) CCW 972 1019 1019 63 63 0 0
204p (14x17), 1752p (14x14), 2792p (10x12),
PD33 Conveyance (BCR return) CW 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0 4870p (8x10), 5338p (1824 ST), 2894p (2430 ST),
5338p (1824 HR), 4116p (2430 HR)
PD34 Conveyance (side-positioning conveyance return) 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0 IDT : 242p (14x17), 242p (14x14)
CW
1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0 CSL : 116p (14x17)
PD35 Conveyance (side-positioning) CCW 0xFFFFFF 900 240.0056542 220 70 0 0
PD36 Conveyance (reading preparation) CCW 180 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0
PD37 Conveyance (secondary erasure reading) CCW 0xFFFFFF 772 480.0113084 70 70 0 0
PD71 Initialization conveyance (down direction) CCW 0xFFFFFF 480.0113084 480.0113084 63 63 0 0
PD72 Initialization conveyance (up direction) CW 0x7FFFFF 480.0113084 480.0113084 63 63 0 0
PD73 Initialization conveyance (side-positioning conveyance direction) CW 0x7FFFFF 772 480.0113084 70 70 0 0
PD74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) CW 0x7FFFFF 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0
PD81 Recovery conveyance (fast load conveyance) CW 0x7FFFFF 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0
ME1 PE12 Conveyance grip CCW 256 1500.003508 300 100 70 10 0
ME2 PE21 Conveyance (after-reading conveyance) CCW 0xFFFFFF 1200.028271 240.0056542 220 70 0 0
PE22 Conveyance (secondary erasure reading) CCW 0xFFFFFF 772 480.0113084 70 70 0 0
PE71 Initialization conveyance (after-reading conveyance direction) CCW 0xFFFFFF 480.0113084 480.0113084 63 63 0 0
PE73 Initialization conveyance (reading direction) CCW 0xFFFFFF 772 480.0113084 70 70 0 0
MF1 PF11 Conveyance (after-reading conveyance) CCW 0xFFFFFF 3000.070677 600.0141355 220 70 0 0
PF12 Conveyance (before-erasure conveyance) CW 1044 3000.070677 600.0141355 220 70 0 0
PF13 Conveyance (erasure 1) CW 0x7FFFFF DPR4-4 63 63 0 0 Dosage/reading mode
Conveyance (erasure 1) CW 0x7FFFFF DPR4-4 600.0141355 220 70 0 0 Secondary erasure mode
PF14 Conveyance (erasure 2) CW 15992 DPR4-4 63 63 0 0 Dosage/reading mode
Conveyance (erasure 2) CW 1715 DPR4-4 600.0141355 220 70 54 0 Secondary erasure mode
PF15 Conveyance (after-erasure conveyance) CW 0x7FFFFF 3000.070677 600.0141355 220 70 0 0
PF16
PF71 Initialization conveyance (after-reading conveyance direction) CCW 0xFFFFFF 600.0141355 600.0141355 63 63 0 0
PF72 Initialization conveyance (erasure conveyance direction) CW 0x7FFFFF 600.0141355 600.0141355 63 63 0 0
PF73 Initialization conveyance (load standby positioning) CCW 510 600.0141355 600.0141355 63 63 0 0
PF74 Initialization conveyance (load conveyance) CW 0x7FFFFF 600.0141355 600.0141355 63 63 0 0
TR1H1160.EPS
009-051-05 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 175.1
04.20.2001 FM3006
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD - 175.2
BLANK PAGE
009-051-05 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 175.2
04.20.2001 FM3006
Cassette Set Unit

9. Unit Location Information
Top view
9.1 Unit Locations Side plate of vertical
Side plate of cassette set unit
conveyor
Vertical Conveyor, Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor, and Side-Positioning

Cassette set unit
Conveyor
1880.3
163.50.3 Side plate of up-down
Rear view IP removal conveyor
O NT
FR
Frame
FRONT
Side plate of vertical

conveyor Front view
Right-hand side plate of cassette set unit

(machine-specific label side)
0.5 mm or less
Side plate of before-side-positioning Cassette set unit tray
conveyor Scale 105.5 0.5mm
Cassette set unit

0.5 mm or less RES
ET
SW
Remote
tray
ON Local
OFF
Side plate of side-positioning conveyor
Top view
Positioning bracket
FR1H1700.EPS
One-plane Two-plane
alignment alignment
Erasure Conveyor and After-Reading Conveyor
F
R
O
N
T
1 mm or less
ONT FR1H1611.EPS
FR
Rear view
Side plate of erasure

conveyor
0.5 mm or less
Side plate of after-reading
conveyor
FR1H1701.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Vertical Conveyor Subscanning Unit

Top view
Vertical conveyor
FRONT Tray
T
ON FR
FR ON
T
Subscanning unit
Top view C D D
External plate
Frame
F Internal plate
A = 74 1, B = 74 1, C = 100 1
R
O
D = 188 0.3
N
T
Unit: mm
FR1H1901.EPS
0.5 mm or less 0.5 mm or less

After-Reading Conveyor
FR1H1612.EPS
Erasure Conveyor Side plate of

Side plate of
Side plate of
subscanning unit subscanning unit
after-reading conveyor
F
Erasure Side plate of Side plate of R
conveyor O
erasure conveyor before-side-positioning N A B
conveyor T
After-reading conveyor
1880.3 1880.3 A - B = 0.5 mm or less FR1H1616.EPS
FRONT
Frame
FR1H1613.EPS
Side-Positioning Conveyor
ON
RES
ET
SW
Remote
Local
Side plate of Side plate of

OFF
Side plate of subscanning unit

subscanning unit
side-positioning conveyor
F
R
O
N A B
T
A - B = 0.5 mm or less FR1H1617.EPS
009-051-05
04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460 05.30.2002 FM3405
9.2 Roller Locations 9.3 IP Conveyance Locations

T
ON
Controller FR
FRONT
10
Side plate of
Rubber roller x4
vertical
Vertical conveyor conveyor
IP
IP removal unit (B) 32mm
Cassette set unit (A) Measure
between
RES
ET
SW
Remote
them
ON Local
OFF
loading unit (T) Vertical conveyor (B)
FR1H1606.EPS
conveyor (C)
Erasure conveyor (F)
Power supply unit
Light-collecting
guide assembly

Side-positioning
conveyor (D)
Subscanning unit
After-reading (Z)
conveyor (E)
NOTES:
denotes a rubber roller.
An alphabet in parentheses denotes a unit symbol.
FR1H1046.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
9.4 Home Position Values Cassette set unit and IP removal unit
Cassette set unit

When the machine is booted, the initialization sequence is performed so that all the mecha- FR
ON
T
nisms are initialized to their home position. Subsequently, power OFF the machine and then Actuator
check the home position.
SA17
IP removal unit Hole
Check at the topmost stage
Bracket Arm Bracket
IP removal unit
101mm Shock absorber

Actuator
Hole
IP removal unit
SB3
FR1H1607.EPS
Up-down IP
removal unit
Actuator
T
ON
FR
Left-hand side plate

SD2
Timing belt CLOSE condition
Shaft wheel ONT
SB1 FR
Actuator
Bearing
flange
SD1
86.51mm CLOSE condition
Actuator
FR1H4028.EPS
FR1H1609.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Subscanning unit 9.5 Installation Locations for Members in Contact with IP

Fluorescent Face
Guide plate
Guide plate
IP removal unit
NT Cassette set unit
FRO
52.6
SB2
Cassette Vertical conveyor
138.5
54.7 24.2
Subscanning unit 9.8
Guide plate
MZ2 87
MZ3
87
SZ2 SZ3
CLOSE condition OPEN condition
Guide plate
87
Light-blocking
Cam Light-blocking Cam
plate for SZ2
plate for SZ3
67
FR1H1608.EPS 52 Guide plate
Guide plate Before-side-
positioning
After-Reading Conveyor 125.3 conveyor
80 SF2 170.6
Erasure conveyor Guide plate
Actuator 31 104 SC2
28
Guide plate
29.5
162 SF1
SF3 SC1 40.6
73 92
170 94 129.3
After-reading conveyor SE1
Guide plate 25
T CLOSE condition
ON
FR Guide plate BCR
FR1H1610.EPS
128.2
155.4
Subscanning unit
79.6 Guide plate
After-reading
conveyor
136.7 SD3
Side-positioning
conveyor
153
37.4 40 30 39.6
101.4
Guide plate 118.1 Guide plate
70 157.1 FR1H1495.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
9.6 Data on Grip Springs Mounting location Part No.

Wire diam. Coil O.D.
Free
length SERIAL NO.
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Right side (reference plane) 388N2407 104.8
Controller A 0.6 4
Left side 388N2306 117.5
FRONT
Right side (reference plane) 388N2390 0.55 89.7
B 4
Left side 388N2391 0.5 84.4
Right side (reference plane) 388N2384 78.4

Cassette set unit C 0.5 4
A B IP removal unit
Left side 388N2385 91.9
Vertical conveyor Right side (reference plane) 388N2384 78.4
D 0.5 4
Power supply Left side 388N2385 91.9
C Right side (reference plane) 388N2386 115.9

E 0.5 4
Before-side-positioning Left side 388N2387 137.9
Erasure conveyor conveyor
Right side (reference plane) 388N2395 x2
F 0.5 5 121.0 CR-IR341: #3360
Left side 388N2395
E D CR-IR341: #3360 F
I Right side (reference plane) 388N2501 x2 116.0
388N2395 0.5 5 CR-IR341: #3361
Left side 388N2395 x2 121.0
After-reading conveyor Right side (reference plane) 388N2395 x2 0.5 5 121.0

CR-IR341: #3360
Left side 388N2396 0.4 4 118.8
Subscanning G
unit Right side (reference plane) 388N2501 x2 116.0
CR-IR341: #3361 0.5 5 CR-IR341: #3361
Left side 388N2395 x2 121.8
Side- 388N2501
388N2395 Right side (reference plane) 388N2395 x2
positioning H 0.5 5 121.0
H conveyor Left side 388N2395
388N2395 Right side (reference plane) 388N2384 78.4

I 0.5 4
Left side 388N2385 91.9
G TR1H1050.EPS
CR-IR341: #3360
388N2395
388N2396
CR-IR341: #3361
388N2501
388N2395
FR1H4035.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
CPU90F Board (Network Interface Board)

10. Information on Board LEDs
CN2 CN1
CPU90E Board (CPU Board)

LED1
CN2 CN1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7 LED5 LED3 LED1
LED6 LED4 LED2 LED0

FR1B1605.EPS
D6 D8 D9 (Reserved) D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
When network data is transmitted : LED1 glows.
When network data is received : LED2 glows.
FR1B1604.EPS
When network data is transmitted : LED D6 glows.

When network data is received : LED D8 glows.
When a collision is detected : LED D9 glows.
During system initialization : LED D0 glows.
During OS kernel initialization : LEDs D0 and D1 glow.
During system clock initialization : LED D2 glows.
During monitor initialization : LEDs D0 and D2 glow.
During system task initialization : LEDs D1 and D2 glow.
During boot ROM task initialization : LEDs D0, D1, and D2 glow
During DMA initialization : LED D3 glows.
During boot device (SCSI/FD) initialization : LEDs D0 and D3 glow.
During a system code read : LEDs D1 and D3 glow.
Upon system code startup : LEDs D0, D1, and D3 glow.
During an idle state : LEDs D0 to D7 sequentially come on.
When an error occurs : LEDs D0 to D7 simultaneously blink.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
LAN90B/D Board (Network Interface Board) IMG08A Board (Image Processing Board)
CN2 CN1
CN2 CN1
D10
D13
D12 CN3
D11 D3 D4 D2 D1
CN7
FR1B1606.EPS
FR1B1608.EPS
When network data is transmitted : LED D13 glows.

During an idle state : LEDs D1, D2, D3, and D4 sequentially come on.
When network data is received : LED D12 glows.
When an error occurs : LEDs D1, D2, D3, and D4 simultaneously blink.
HCP08A Board (Compression/Decompression Board) IMG07B Board (EDR Reduction/CRT Reduction Board)
CN2 CN1
CN2 CN1
D2 D1
FR1B1609.EPS
LED3 LED2 LED1

During an idle state : LEDs D1 and D2 alternately come on.
FR1B1607.EPS
When an error occurs : LEDs D1 and D2 simultaneously blink.
During an idle state : LED1, LED2, and LED3 sequentially come on.
When an error occurs : LED1, LED2, and LED3 simultaneously blink.
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
DMC08A Board (DMS Interface Board) MTH08D Board (Motherboard)

CN2 CN1 F5 F6
F1
D5 D6
CN18 D1
CN17
CN3
D2 D1
FR1B1610.EPS
CN20
During an idle state : LEDs D1 and D2 alternately come on.
When an error occurs : LEDs D1 and D2 simultaneously blink.
D2
F2
CN29
SCN08A Board (Scanner System Board) CN1
Machine Description volume, 7.12 Scanning Optics/Scanner Unit, SCN08A D3 CN21

Board, LED functions
F3
FR1H1927.EPS
When fuse F1 is normal: D1 illuminated

When fuse F1 is abnormal: D1 extinguished
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 11 MD - 190 CONTENTS 11 MD - 191
BLANK PAGE
11. Interlock
The interlock requirements for machine protection provide that the up-down drive motor
(MB3) must not operate while the suction cup home position sensor (SB1) is OPEN.
MB3
Up-down IP removal
assembly SB1
SB1
IP removal arm
T
ON
FR Actuator
FR1B1087.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 11 12 MD - 192 CONTENTS 11 12 MD - 193
Step number display during initialization (self diagnosis)

12 Initialization when Starting Up the Machine
The application software downloaded from the HDD is divided into a plurality of subsystems
depending on the functions and units to be processed. All of the subsystems are not
Initialization (self diagnosis) to be performed when starting up the machine is described executed for the initialization (self diagnosis) but only those subsystems necessary for the
below.
initialization (self diagnosis) are executed.
Initialization Upon bootup of the application software (subsystem), the initialization (self diagnosis) is
executed.
The initialization (self diagnosis) of the machine extends from the bootup of the subsystem
The progress of the initialization (self diagnosis) is indicated by the step number on the
(MFC) until the completion of the initialization of the mechanical mechanism and the internal
display of the operation panel.
software data. The following steps are taken by the program software written in the ROM of
the CPU90E board. REFERENCE
Write/read of data recorded in the board The machine might hang up due to some trouble during the initialization (self diagnosis). In
this case, you can locate a troubled subsystem by the displayed step number. Refer to the
Download of the application software (subsystem) from the HDD
Machine Description 7.14 Software terms and definitions for detailed information on the
Startup of the application software (subsystem) downloaded from the HDD subsystems.
Display of the progress of the initialization (self diagnosis) on the display of the operation
panel [Step 99]: Panel control subsystem (PNL)
REFERENCE Initialization (self diagnosis) by the panel control subsystem (PNL)
Although the specifications of the operation panel differ between the FCR5000 and Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations.
FCR5500 systems, the CPU90E boards of the common type are employed. The operation Accepts key inputs such as the MUTL transition request.
Accepts the window display request from each subsystem, and notifies the key input.
panels are identified by the DIP switch settings of the CPU90 board. Accepts the requests for displaying the software version and the progress of the
initialization.
Controls the LED indications (CALL, ERROR, etc.).
Flow of initialization (self diagnosis)
System power ON <Components related to the self diagnosis of the panel control subsystem (PNL)>
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board, operation panel
The self-diagnostic steps are [Step 95]: Log information control subsystem (JNL)
carried out by the program Operation of the CPU90E board is checked, and the Initialization (self diagnosis) by the log information control subsystem (JNL)
software written in the ROM of message is displayed on the panel.
the CPU90E board. Registers error log acquisition functions.
Verifies whether the previous termination was normal (storage of the core dump in
the HDD).
The downloaded application software is divided into a <Components related to the self diagnosis (self diagnosis) of the log information
The application software is
plurality of subsystems depending on the functions and control subsystem (JNL)>
downloaded from the HDD.
units to be processed. Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board
[What is the main control subsystem (MFC)?]

The main control subsystem (MFC) is, as the higher-level
application software of each subsystem, responsible for
The main control subsystem the main control of startup/initialization/termination of the A
(MFC) boots up. entire software and the management of the respective FR1B1619.EPS
modes including:
Display of the progress of the initialization
Initialization of the management system and processing
when the initialization fails
Request and response for the initialization diagnosis
of each subsystem
The step numbers start to decrement.

The initialization by each
Refer to "Step number display during initialization
subsystem is performed.
(self diagnosis)".
FR1B1618.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
A B
[Step 90]: Conveyance control subsystem (IPH) [Step 70]: DMS/FINP output image data control subsystem (FOT)
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the conveyance control subsystem (IPH) Initialization (self diagnosis) by the DMS/FINP output image data control subsystem
Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations. (FOT)
Loads the conveyance parameter file. Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations.
Loads the scanner control parameters. Checks whether the board necessary for network control is present, and takes
Initializes the IP conveyance mechanism (including the subscanning system). countermeasures when an error is detected on the board.
Checks the erasure lamps. Initializes the LAN board.
Initializes the HCP subsystem.
(Initialization of the compression/decompression board is executed by the HCP
<Components related to the initialization (self diagnosis) of the conveyance control (IPH)>
subsystem.)
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board, SNS08A board,
DRV08A board, respective motors/sensors/solenoids/pumps, etc. <Components related to the self diagnosis of the DMS/FINP output image data
control (FOT)>
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board,
[Step 80]: Image input control subsystem (IMG) MMC90A/DIM08A boards, HCP08A board, CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D boards
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the image input control subsystem (IMG)
Self-diagnoses the IMG07B board (image processing board). [Step 65]: ID information input control subsystem (IIF)
Loads the DSP micro program. Initialization (self diagnosis) by the ID information input control subsystem (IIF)
Initializes and diagnoses the subscanning system (laser light, polygon, leading Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations
edge sensor, start-point sensor, etc.). (setting the ID information source, etc.).
Checks whether the board necessary for IDT control is present.
Monitors the connection/disconnection of the control line with/from the IDT and
NOTE
the timeout, and controls the display of the line conditions.
The function of automatically resetting and re-initializing the machine when any errors
of 04xx, 05xx, 0Bxx, 15xx, 25xx and 28xx are detected during the self diagnosis <Components related to the self diagnosis of the ID information input control (IIF)>
(Step 80) is added to the software of the version A12 and those later than A12. Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board
If the initialization will not proceed farther than the step 80 if retried, check around
the scanner or the IMG07B board.
[Step 60]: CSL control subsystem (CSL)
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the CSL control subsystem (CSL)
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the image input control (IMG)>
Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board, IMG07B board,
(setting the ID information source, etc.).
SCN08A board, MMC90A/DIM08A boards, PMT08A board, scanning optics unit
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the CSL control (CSL)>
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board
B C
FR1B1621.EPS
FR1B1620.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
C D
[Step 55]: Image data control subsystem (DST) [Step 30]: DMS FINP input control subsystem (FIN)
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the image data control subsystem (DST) Initialization (self diagnosis) by the DMS FINP input control subsystem (FIN)
Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations. Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations.
Checks whether the board necessary for network control is present, and takes
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the image data control (DST)>
countermeasures when an error is detected on the board.
MMC90A/DIM08A boards
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the DMS FINP input control (FIN)>
[Step 40]: LP output control subsystem (LIF) MMC90A/DIM08A boards, HCP08A board, CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D boards
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the LP output control subsystem (LIF)
Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations.

Loads the format information and the exposure menu table from the HDD, and
transfers the format information to the LP. [Step 15]: DICOM output control subsystem (DOT)
Checks whether the board necessary for LP control is present, and takes
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the DICOM output control subsystem (DOT)
countermeasures when an error is detected on the board.
Self-diagnoses the IMG08A/B/H boards (image processing boards). Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations.
Loads the DSP micro program. Checks whether the board necessary for network control is present, and takes
Monitors the connection/disconnection of the control line with/from the IDT and countermeasures when an error is detected on the board.
the timeout, and controls the display of the line conditions.
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the DICOM output control (DOT)>
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the LP output control (LIF)> Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board, MMC90A/DIM08A boards,
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board, IMG08A/B/H boards, HCP08A board, CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D boards
MMC90A/DIM08A boards
[Step 5]: Image management system control subsystem (IMM)

[Step 35]: DMS E-IF control subsystem (DIF) Initialization (self diagnosis) by the image management system control subsystem
Initialization (self diagnosis) by the DMS E-IF control subsystem (DIF) (IMM)
Acquires system information for controls at the startup and for the lines. Acquires system information necessary for subsystem operations.
Checks whether the board necessary for DMS control (DMC08A board) is Checks control of the image data/ID information management.
present, and takes countermeasures when an error is detected during the
initialization or on the board. <Components related to the self diagnosis of the image management system
Monitors the connection/disconnection of the control line with/from the IDT and control (IMM)>
the timeout, and controls the display of the line conditions. Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board
<Components related to the self diagnosis of the DMS E-IF control (DIF)>
Termination of the initialization is executed
Application software, HDD, MTH08A/D boards, CPU90E board, DMC08A board FR1B1623.EPS
D
FR1B1622.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
BLANK PAGE BLANK PAGE
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
Maintenance Volume Troubleshooting (MT) Control Sheet MT - 1
Control Sheet
(FM2460)
11/20/99 05 Corrections (FM2638) MT-3234, 49, 5153, 56, 64,
7072
04/20/2001 06 Software update (FM3006) MT-3, 4, 69, 11, 12, 2226, 28,
29, 29.1, 29.2, 30, 31, 33, 33.1,
CR-IR341/CR-IR341P 33.2, 34, 35, 44, 45, 51, 51.1,

51.2, 5760, 60.1, 60.2, 67.1,
67.2, 146, 195, 198216
Service Manual 08/30/2001 07 Support for plus
(support for software version A14)
MT-26, 28, 44, 46, 52, 60, 60.1,
60.2, 6163, 70, 72, 179, 198216
(FM3115)
05/30/2002 08 Additions of error code listings, analysis All pages
flows, and other information (FM3405)
03/20/2004 10 Detailed error code additions and MT-3121, 124, 126, 127, 129,
corrections in compliance with a software 130, 159, 161, 195, 197, 199, 224,
update, error code list corrections, circuit 228, 230, 245, 265, 269, 282, 287,
Troubleshooting (MT) diagram corrections, and typographical

error corrections (FM4275)
288
08/31/2005 11 Revision (FM4710) MT-4104, 104.1104.6, 268271,

274, 279, 280, 284, 285
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT - 1

08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 2
1. Document Map
When the machine experiences any trouble, troubleshoot it based on error codes, abnormal images, abnormal phenomena, and so forth to
take remedial measures as appropriate.
Trouble occurred
2.3.3 Priority Checks to Be Conducted

upon Trouble Occurrence
Error code is displayed Check components Image is abnormal Operation is improper
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Component check flows 3. Troubleshooting Procedures 4. Troubleshooting Procedures

Based on Error Codes Based on Abnormal Images Based on Improper Operation
"2.1 How to Understand Error Code" "2.4.2 Cable Check Flow" "3.1 Troubleshooting for Scanner- "4.1 Remedy When Cassette
Related Errors" Cannot be Removed"
"2.2 Error Code List" "2.4.3 PC Board Check Flow"
"3.2 Image Troubleshooting for "4.2 Remedy When Machine Does
"2.3 Format of Detail Information" "2.4.4 HDD Check Flow"
Controller" Not Power Up"
"2.4 Troubleshooting Flows" "2.4.5 Power Supply Unit Check
Flow" "3.3 Other Image Troubleshooting" "4.3 Remedy When LED Is Not Lit"
"2.5 IP Jam Handling Procedures" "2.4.6 Monitor Check Flow"
"4.4 Remedy When System Goes
"2.6 Check for IP Conveyance" Down Unexpectedly during
Operation"
"4.5 Main Numerical Values Used

for Troubleshooting"
Trouble Not Fixed
See "Machine Description 8. Mechanical Control Flows."

FR1H4040.EPS

05.30.2002 FM3405 (1)
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 3
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Error Codes

2.1 How to Understand Error Code
A format of error code is shown below. Indicates the reference volume
abbreviation and section number.
Code Name Significance/Occurrence Condition Probable Cause/Remedy Detail
[During initialization/normal processing]

Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 failed to close, Perform the troubleshooting procedure for
allowing the maximum retry count (ND51) to be exceeded. Error 03BC (MT-2.4.1).
Check the MD1 (MU-11.2/MC-8.5).
03BC Side-positioning HP Check the SD1 (MC-8.2).
<I/O name> D-5
operation error Check the side-positioning conveyor
MD1; Side-positioning motor
SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-8).
Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-16.12).
<Reference> Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-16.13).
MD-8.2.5
Indicates the reference volume

abbreviation and section number. See "Section 2.3,
The checks to be performed are listed in random Format of Detail Information".
XYZZ Hexadecimal notation order. Judge the target machine condition and
change the order of checks as needed to begin
by checking on the most probable error cause.
00-FF: Reference number according to error classification

0-9, A-F: Error classification
0-3: Error level
X: Error level Y: Error classification
FATAL error: 0 0: OS (operating system software), CPU, library 8: Printer interface control
Error where the normal processing cannot be resumed. 1: Overall control, information gathering function, 9: DMS interface control
It is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action immediately. output destination control function A: ID information setup function
WARNING: 1, 2, 3 2: Panel control B: Network output image processing
Errors where the processing may be resumed by performing retry 3: Conveyor-related control C: FINP control
operation, etc. 4: Image processing related (reading) D: DICOM control
This category includes an error that is merely logged as history information 5: Scanner control E: Undefined
and an error where the processing is resumed but its error code is displayed 6: Image processing related (printer) F: Other (software install, version update, etc.)
on screen. 7: IDT interface control
ZZ: Reference number

Managed according to the error classification
FR1H1316.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275
MT-4
2.2 Error Codes List
Check the board insertion location (MC-17).

[During initialization]
0100 Board insertion position error The board insertion slot position was found to be abnormal when it was checked.
Check for improper board setup (MC-17). A-8
Check the board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17).
Check for an improper software update (MU-16).

Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
0101 ID information control system The ID information control system (IMM) was found to be abnormal.
An error was detected because the software was directly updated from
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). F
initialization error version A08 or earlier to version A13 or later.
Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-16).

0102 Common data control system [During initialization]
An error was detected in the common data control system (CDM).
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
F
initialization error Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-16).

0110 Image control system [During initialization/normal processing]
An error was detected in the image control system (IDM).
F

0111 HD image display area [During initialization/normal processing]
An error was detected in the HD image display area.
F
Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6).

Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8).
Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9).
[During initialization/normal processing] Check the CPU90F board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10).
0112 No effective option An error was detected when shared memory allocation was attempted for option Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). F
configuration. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710 CR-IR341 Service Manual [ 2.2 ] MT-4
MT-5

0120 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a configuration file
A-1
(NETMASKS).

0121 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a configuration file
A-1
(NETMASKS).

0122 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a configuration file
A-1
(NETMASKS).
Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

[During initialization] Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
0123 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file (NETMASKS). Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
A-1

0130 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a configuration file
A-1
(HOSTS ADDRESS).

0131 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a configuration file
A-1
(HOSTS ADDRESS).

0132 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a configuration file
A-1
(HOSTS ADDRESS).
009-051-11
MT-6

0133 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file (HOSTS ADDRESS). Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
A-1

0134 File setting value error An error was found in the settings contained in a configuration file (HOSTS
A-1
ADDRESS).
0140 Boot line-related error An error was detected in the backup memory data.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). F

0141 Routing information-related An error was found in the settings contained in a configuration file
F
error (ROUTING/HOSTS ADDRESS).

[During initialization/normal processing] Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
01A0 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).
D

01A1 ID information update error An error was detected when an attempt was made to update ID information. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).
D

01A2 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
D
009-051-11
MT-7

01A3 EQUIP file format error An error was found in the format contained in a configuration file (EQUIPMENT). Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
-

[During U-Utility mode]
0200 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to delete an image queued for
-
processing.

0301 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a subsystem (IPH)
D-1
file on the HDD.

[During initialization] Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
0302 File format error An error was found in the data format of a subsystem (IPH) file on the HDD. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
D-1

0303 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data contained in a subsystem (IPH) file on the
D-1
HDD.

0304 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a subsystem (IPH) file
D-1
on the HDD.
0311 FPMC device error An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize the FPMC device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). D-3
for the CPU memory (CPU90E board).
009-051-11
MT-8
[During initialization/normal processing] Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).

0312 Motor stop timeout Although a pulse motor drive request or stop request was issued, a timeout Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12). D-3
occurred because the target pulse motor could not be driven or stopped. Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
0322 SNS device error An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize the SNS device.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). D-3
[During initialization/normal processing/M-Utility mode/abnormality processing]

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned ON, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to open, allowing Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03A2
the maximum retry count (NA11) to be exceeded. (MT-2.4.1).
Check the SOLA1/2/3/4 (MC-4.8).
<I/O name> Check the SA3/7/11/15 (MC-4.6).
03A2 Cassette hold release error SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid Check the cassette set unit mechanism (MC-4).
D-5
SA3/7/11/15; Cassette hold sensor Check the cassette.
MD-8.6.2
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03A3

(MT-2.4.1).
Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned ON, the SA3/7/11/15 did not open.
Check the SA3/7/11/15 (MC-4.6).
<I/O name>
Check the cassette set unit mechanism (MC-4).
03A3 All stackers degenerated SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid
Check the cassette.
D-5
SA3/7/11/15; Cassette hold sensor
Check the fuse (F10) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2/8.5.5/8.5.11
Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03A8/13A8
When the IP size was checked, the CLOSE time combination of the SA4/8/12/16,
(MT-2.4.1).
SB4, and SC1 did not agree with the IP size data stored in the machine.
Check the IP and cassette.
Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
<I/O name>
03A8 Nonstandard initialization IP SA4/8/12/16; Mammo/ST sensor
Check the SA4/8/12/16 (MC-4.7).
D-5
size SB4; Inch/metric sensor
Check the SB4 (MC-5.4).
SC1; Before-BCR IP sensor
Check the SC1 (MC-6.2).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.5 (IP identification condition table)
009-051-11
MT-9
IP feed/load conveyor When the machine was searched for IPs, the remaining IP process could not be Check the SA1/5/9/13 (MC-4.4).
performed for one of the following reasons: Check the SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.5).
03B0 remaining IP discharge Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset (MC-2.3).
D-5
impossible Cassette detection was not achievable. Check the cassette.
The CMOS information was abnormal.
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B1

(MT-2.4.1).
Although the MC1/MD3 turned ON, the feed conveyance operation could not be
performed for one of the following reasons:
A timeout occurred because the SC1 failed to close.
A timeout occurred because the SC1 failed to open.
Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
03B1 IP feed conveyance error (MD-7.2/MC-5).
D-5
<I/O name>
Check the before-side-positioning conveyor mechanism
MC1/MD3; IP transport motor
(MD-7.3/MC-6).
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.5

Although the MB2/MC1/MF1 turned ON, the SB2 failed to open. Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B2
Therefore, a retry operation was performed. (MT-2.4.1).
A retry operation was performed because the SB2 failed to close when Check the MB2 (MU-11.2/MC-5.10).
the IP passed it. Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
Check the MF1 (MU-11.2/MC-12.7).
03B2 IP load conveyance error <I/O name> Check the SB2 (MC-5.2).
D-5
MB2/MC1/MF1; IP transport motor Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
SB2; Cassette inlet IP sensor (MD-7.2/MC-5).
MD-8.2.10
009-051-11
MT-10

Although the MD3 turned ON, the SD3 did not close after the SC1 closing.
Therefore, a retry operation was performed.
(MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name>
03B3 Side-positioning conveyor MD3; IP transport motor
Check the SD3 (MC-8.4).
Check the side-positioning conveyor mechanism
D-5
entrance conveyance error SC1; Before-BCR IP sensor
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
SD3; Side-positioning IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.6
[During normal processing/abnormality processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B4
Although the MD3/MC1/MB2 turned ON, the SB2 did not open. (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
03B4 Restored IP load low-speed MD3/MC1/MB2; IP transport motor
SB2; Cassette inlet IP sensor
Check the MB2 (MU-11.2/MC-5.10).
D-5
conveyance error Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
<Reference> (MD-7.2/MC-5).
MD-8.6.3 Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
[During normal processing/abnormality processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B5
Although the MD3/MC1/MB2 turned ON, the SB2 did not close. (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
03B5 Restored IP load high-speed MD3/MC1/MB2; IP transport motor
D-5
conveyance error Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
009-051-11
MT-11
Although the MB2/MC1/MF1 turned ON, an abnormal termination
occurred for one of the following reasons:
The SB2 did not open or the SF1/SF2/SF3 did not close.
The SC1/SF2/SF3 did not close.
Although the MB2/MC1 turned ON, an abnormal termination occurred
for one of the following reasons: Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B6
(MT-2.4.1).
The SB2 did not open. Check the MB2 (MU-11.2/MC-5.10).
The SB2 did not close. Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
[During initialization] Check the MD3 (MU-11.2/MC-8.7).
Although the SOLC1 and MB2/MC1/MF1 turned ON, the SB2 did not close. Check the ME2 (MU-11.2/MC-11.4).
[During initialization] Check the SF1/2/3 (MC-11.3/11.4/11.5).
IP feed/load conveyor Although the MB2/MC1/MD3 turned ON, the SB2 did not close and the SC1 did Check the SC1 (MC-6.2).
03B6 remaining IP discharge error not open. Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
D-5
[During initialization] Check the before-side-positioning conveyor mechanism

Although the ME2/MC1/MD3 turned ON, an abnormal termination occurred (MD-7.3/MC-6).
for one of the following reasons: Check the side-positioning conveyor mechanism
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
The SB2 did not close. Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset
The SB2 did not open after closing. (MC-2.3).
An error was found in the CMOS information. Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<I/O name>
MB2/MC1/MD3/ME2/MF1; IP transport motor
SF1/SF2/SF3; IP sensor
SOLC1; Convergence path changeover guide driving solenoid
<Reference>
MD-8.5.3/8.5.4/8.5.6
009-051-11
MT-12
Although the MD3 and MZ1 turned ON to reverse for the purpose of moving
the remaining IP in the before-reading conveyor, the SC1 did not close.
When the MD3 turned ON for feed conveyance after the SC1 close, Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B7
the SD3 did not close. (MT-2.4.1).
Although the MD3 turned ON for feed conveyance to search for a remaining Check the MD3 (MU-11.2/MC-8.7).
IP in the before-reading conveyor, the SD3 did not close. Check the MZ1 (MC-10.8).
[During initialization/normal processing] Check the SC1 (MC-6.2).
Although the MB2/MC1/MD3 turned ON for feed conveyance to move the Check the SZ1 (MC-10.5).
03B7 Side-positioning conveyor remaining IP in the before-reading conveyor, the SC1 did not open.
When the MD3 turned ON for feed conveyance after the SC1 close,
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
D-5
remaining IP discharge error the SD3 did not close. Check the subscanning unit mechanism
(MD-7.5/MC-10).
<I/O name> Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset
MB2/MC1/MD3; IP transport motor (MC-2.3).
MZ1; Subscanning motor Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
SC1; Before-BCR IP sensor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
SD3; Side-positioning IP sensor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
<Reference>
MD-8.5.3
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B8/13B8

(MT-2.4.1).
Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset
(MC-2.3).
03B8 IP position information error The machine's CMOS information (IP found) did not agree with the remaining IP
Turn the power OFF and then back ON to achieve
D-5
search result (no IP).
automatic discharge, clear the backup memory,
and then perform a reset (MC-2.3).
009-051-11
MT-13

(MT-2.4.1).
[During initialization] Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
Although the SOLC1 and MB2/MC1/MF1 turned ON, the SB2 did not Check the MF1 (MU-11.2/MC-12.7).
close upon IP leading edge detection. Check the SOLC1 (MC-6.4).
The SB2 did not open upon IP trailing edge detection. Check the SB2 (MC-5.2).
03B9 IP load standby unit <I/O name>
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
D-5
remaining IP discharge error MB2/MC1/MF1; IP transport motor (MD-7.3/MC-6).
SB2; Cassette inlet IP sensor Check the side-positioning conveyor mechanism
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
<Reference> Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset
MD-8.5.7 (MC-2.3).

Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 failed to close, allowing the maximum Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BC
retry count (ND51) to be exceeded. (MT-2.4.1).
03BC Side-positioning HP <I/O name>
D-5
operation error SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor (MD-7.4/MC-8).
MD-8.2.6
009-051-11
MT-14
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BF

(MT-2.4.1).
Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to close, allowing the maximum
retry count (ND61) to be exceeded.
03BF Side-positioning grip <I/O name>
MD2; Grip release motor
(MD-7.4/MC-8). D-5
operation error SD2; Grip release home position sensor
Check the fuse (F9/F12). for the power supply (JPS-1).
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
Clear the backup memory and then perform
<Reference>
a reset (MC-2.3).
MD-8.2.7
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C0

(MT-2.4.1).
Although the MD3 turned ON, the SZ1 closed before the SD1 closing.
Check the SZ1 (MC-10.5).
03C0 IP pre-reading conveyance <I/O name>
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
D-5
error MD3; IP transport motor
Check the subscanning unit mechanism
SZ1; IP leading edge sensor
(MD-7.5/MC-10).
SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor
Check the IP.
009-051-11
MT-15
[During normal processing]

Although the MZ1 turned ON, the SD3 did not open.
(MT-2.4.1).
Check the MZ1 (FFM) (MC-10.8).
[During secondary erasure]
Although the MZ1 and MD3/ME2 turned ON, the SD3 did not open.
Check the ME2 (MU-11.2/MC-11.4).
03C1 IP reading conveyance error <I/O name>
D-5
MZ1; Subscanning motor
(MD-7.5/MC-10).
Check the fuse (F3/F4) for the power supply (JPS-1)
MD3/ME2; IP transport motor
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3

(MT-2.4.1).
Although the MZ1 turned ON, the SZ1 did not close.
Check the IP.
Check the MZ1 (FFM) (MC-10.8).
<I/O name>
03C2 Reading IP leading edge MZ1; Subscanning motor
SZ1; IP leading edge sensor
Check the subscanning unit mechanism D-5
detection error (MD-7.5/MC-10).
Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7
Check the polygon assembly (MC-9.5).
[During initialization/normal processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C6/
Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 did not open. 03C8/03CA (MT-2.4.1).
Check the MZ2 (MU-11.2/MC-10.9).
<I/O name> Check the SZ2 (MC-10.6).
MZ2; Driving-shaft grip motor Check the subscanning unit mechanism
03C6 Drive shaft grip error SZ2; Driving-side grip release home position sensor (MD-7.5/MC-10).
D-5
<Reference> (MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3/8.5.2/8.5.9 Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
009-051-11
MT-16

Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C7/
Although the MZ3 turned ON, the SZ3 did not open.
03C9/03CB (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name>
03C7 Driven shaft grip release MZ3; Driven-shaft grip motor
D-5
error SZ3; Driven-side grip release home position sensor
(MD-7.5/MC-10).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3/8.5.9
[During initialization/normal processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C6/
Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 did not close. 03C8/03CA (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the SZ2 (MC-10.6).
03C8 Drive shaft grip release error MZ2; Driving shaft grip motor Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-10). D-5
SZ2; Driving-side grip release home position sensor Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
<Reference> Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3/8.5.9 Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).

03C9/03CB (MT-2.4.1).
Although the MZ3 turned ON, the SZ3 failed to close.
<I/O name>
Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-10).
03C9 Driven shaft grip error MZ3; Driven-shaft grip motor
D-5
SZ3; Driven-side grip release home position sensor
Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset
<Reference>
(MC-2.3).
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3/8.5.2/8.5.9
Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 did not open.
03C8/03CA (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name>
03CA Drive shaft grip self-diagnosis MZ2; Driving-shaft grip motor
SZ2; Driving-side grip release home position sensor
Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-10). D-5
error Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
<Reference>
MD-8.5.9
009-051-11
MT-17
Although the MZ3 turned ON, the SZ3 did not open. Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C7/
03C9/03CB (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the MZ3 (MU-11.2/MC-10.10).
03CB Driven shaft grip release MZ3; Driven-shaft grip motor Check the SZ3 (MC-10.7). D-5
self-diagnosis error SZ3; Driven-side grip release home position sensor Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-10).
MD-8.5.9
[During normal processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03D1
Although the ME2/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the ME2 (MU-11.2/MC-11.4).
ME2/MF1; IP transport motor Check the SF1 (MC-12.3).
03D1 Post-conveyor error SF1; After-reading conveyance standby IP sensor Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.6/
D-5
MC-11).
<Reference> Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.7/MC-12).
Although the ME2/MF1 turned ON, the SF4 opened. (MT-2.4.1).
The SF2 failed to open. Check the MF1 (MU-11.2/MC-12.7).
<I/O name> Check the SF4 (MC-12.6).
03D2 IP switchback conveyance ME2/MF1; IP transport motor Check the SF2 (MC-12.4). D-5
error SF4; Overrun IP sensor Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism
SF2; Changeover IP sensor (MD-7.6/MC-11).
Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.7/MC-12).
MD-8.2.7 Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
009-051-11
MT-18

Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03D3
Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF2 failed to close. Therefore, a retry
(MT-2.4.1).
operation was performed.
Check the SF2 (MC-12.4).
03D3 Pre-erasure conveyance <I/O name>
MF1; IP transport motor
Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.6/ D-5
error SF2; Changeover IP sensor
MC-11).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.9

Although the SOLF1 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open.
(MT-2.4.1).
Although the SOLF1 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 closed.
Check the SOLF1 (MU-11.3/MC-12.14).
03D4 Branch path selector guide <I/O name>
Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.6/
D-5
operation error SOLF1; Branch path changeover guide driving solenoid
MC-11).
MF1; IP transport motor
SF1; After-reading conveyance standby IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.9/8.5.3

Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF3 failed to close or the SF2 failed to open. Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03D5
(MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the MF1 (MU-11.2/MC-12.7).
MF1; IP transport motor Check the SF2 (MC-12.4).
03D5 Erasure conveyance error SF3; Load standby IP sensor Check the SF3 (MC-12.5).
D-5
SF2; Changeover IP sensor Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.7/MC-12).
MD-8.2.9
009-051-11
MT-19

Although the SOLC1 and MF1/MC1/MB2 turned ON, an abnormal termination
occurred for one of the following reasons:
(MT-2.4.1).
Check the SOLC1 (MC-6.4).
The SF3 failed to open and the SB2 closed after the SC2 opened.
The SB2 failed to close after the SF3 opened.
03D6 Post-erasure conveyance <I/O name>
Check the SF3 (MC-12.5). D-5
error MF1/MC1/MB2; IP transport motor
SF3; Load standby IP sensor
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
SC2; Convergence standby IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.9
Although the SOLC1 and MF1/MC1/MB2 turned ON, an abnormal termination (MT-2.4.1).
occurred for one of the following reasons: Check the SOLC1 (MC-6.4).
The SF3 failed to open and the SC2 failed to open. Check the MC1 (MU-11.2/MC-6.5).
The SF3 failed to open and the SB2 failed to close after the SC2 opened. Check the MB2 (MU-11.2/MC-5.10).
03D7 Junction path selector guide <I/O name>
D-5
operation error MF1/MC1/MB2; IP transport motor Check the before-side-positioning conveyor
SF3; Load standby IP sensor (MD-7.3/MC-6).
SC2; Convergence standby IP sensor Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
SB2; Cassette inlet IP sensor (MD-7.2/MC-5).
009-051-11
MT-20
Although the ME2/MF1 turned ON, an abnormal termination occurred for one of
the following reasons:
(MT-2.4.1).
The SF4 failed to close.
The SF2 failed to open after the overrun IP sensor (SF4) closed.
03D8 Post-conveyor remaining IP <I/O name>
Check the SF4 (MC-12.6). D-5
discharge error ME2/MF1; IP transport motor
Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism
(MD-7.6/MC-11).
SF4; Overrun IP sensor
SF2; Changeover IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.5.3
Although the SOLF1 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 and SF3 failed to close.
Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF3 failed to open.
(MT-2.4.1).
Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF3 failed to close after it opened.
Check the SOLF1 (MU-11.3/MC-12.14).
<I/O name>
03D9 Erasure conveyor remaining SOLF1; Branch path changeover guide driving solenoid
D-5
IP discharge error MF1; IP transport motor
SF1; After-reading conveyance standby IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.5.3

Although the ME1 turned ON, the SE1 failed to close, allowing the maximum Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03DC
retry count (ND61) to be exceeded. (MT-2.4.1).
03DC Post-conveyor grip operation <I/O name>
ME1; Grip release motor
Check the SE1 (MC-11.2).
D-5
error SE1; Grip release home position sensor (MD-7.6/MC-11).
MD-8.2.7
009-051-11
MT-21

Although the MB3 turned ON, an abnormal termination occurred for one of the
following reasons:
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03DD
(MT-2.4.1).
The SA17 did not close.
Although the SA17 closed, it did not open later in the descent sequence.
03DD HP up-and-down movement Check the SA17 (MC-4.9).
D-5
error <I/O name>
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
MB3; Up-down drive motor
SA17; Elevation home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.3

Although the MB3 turned ON, an abnormal termination occurred for one of the
following reasons:
The SB3 failed to close. Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03DE
Although the MB3 turned ON, the SB3 failed to open after closing. (MT-2.4.1).
Although the MB3 turned ON, the SB3 failed to close after it opened. Check the MB3 (MU-11.2/MC-5.11).
03DE Up-and-down movement The SB3 failed to close, allowing the maximum retry count (NB100/101) to be
exceeded.
D-5
error (MD-7.2/MC-5).
<I/O name> Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
MB3; Up-down drive motor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
SB3; Each shelf position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.3/8.2.8

Although the MB1 turned ON for suction cup home positioning, the SB1 failed to Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03E8
close, allowing the maximum retry count (NB51) to be exceeded. (MT-2.4.1).
<I/O name> Check the SB1 (MC-5.1).
03E8 Suction cup moving error MB1; Suction cup drive motor Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
D-5
SB1; Suction cup home position sensor (MD-7.2/MC-5).
MD-8.2.3
009-051-11
MT-22

0400 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a subsystem file
E-1
(IMG).

0401 File format error An error was found in the format of a subsystem file (IMG). Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
E-1

0402 File setting value error An error was found in the settings contained in a subsystem file (IMG). Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
E-1

0403 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a subsystem file
E-1
(IMG).
0410 DSP4 device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize the DSP4 device
Check the IMG07B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.5).
E-2
error (IMG07B board).
0411 DSP4 device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSP4 device
E-2
(IMG07B board).
009-051-11
MT-23

0412 DSP4 micro program boot An error was detected when an attempt was made to boot a micro program for
E-2
error the DSP4 device (IMG07B board) from the HDD.

0413 DSP4 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a micro program into
E-2
error the DSP4 device (IMG07B board).

0414 DSP4 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP4 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-2
(IMG07B board). Check the IMG07B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.5).

0415 DSP4 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP4 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-2

0420 DSP4 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into the DSP4 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-2
[During normal processing] Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).

0421 DSP4 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read the DSP4 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-2

0422 DSP4 image processing An image processing error was found in the DSP4 device (IMG07B board) when
Check the cable (MT-2.4.2).
E-2
error 1 image data was being read from the scanner.
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the MZ1/MZ2/MZ3 (MC-10.8/MC-10.9/MC-10.10).
Check the MD1/MD2/MD3 (MC-8.5/MC-8.6/MC-8.7).
009-051-11
MT-24

0423 DSP4 image processing An image processing error was found in the DSP4 device (IMG07B board) after
Check the cable (MT-2.4.2).
E-2
error 2 an image data read from the scanner.
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the MZ1/MZ2/MZ3 (MC-10.8/MC-10.9/MC-10.10).
Check the MD1/MD2/MD3 (MC-8.5/MC-8.6/MC-8.7).
0450 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DMA device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). E-5
(CPU90E board).

0451 Reading DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image data from
Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board
E-5
the scanner to the MMC90A/DIM08A board.
(MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

[During normal processing] Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
0452 Rotating DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to DMA-transfer 24 x 30 Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9). E-5
mammographic image data for rotation. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

0460 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write read image data from
Check the MTH08A/D board version
E-6
the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the HDD.
(MTH08A: Version E or later; MTH08D: Version B or later)
Check the version of the application software
(version A21 or later).
009-051-11
MT-25

0461 Monitor image write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write monitored image data
E-6
from the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the HDD.

0462 EDR data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write EDR-reduced image
E-6
data from the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the HDD.

0463 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID information from
E-6
the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the HDD.

0464 File close error 1 An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a file that was
E-6
opened in the read image write mode.
009-051-11
MT-26

0465 File close error 2 An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a file that was
E-6
opened in the read mode.

[During U-Utility mode] Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
0466 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information. Check the MTH08A/D board version
E-6

0467 ID information update error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID information. Check the MTH08A/D board version
E-6

0468 Monitor image read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a monitored image. Check the MTH08A/D board version
E-6
009-051-11
MT-27
Output the stored image data.

0469 Image file open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an image data file for
E-4
the purpose of retrying an image data write onto the HDD.

[During reoutput] Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
046A Image lock or unlock error When an attempt was made to reoutput an image, an error was detected Check the MTH08A/D board version E-6
because U-Utility's image lock or unlock setup was abnormal. (MTH08A: Version E or later; MTH08D: Version B or later)

0532 Polygon mirror error 1 A polygon motor lock signal error was detected when the polygon status was Check the fuse (F6) for the power supply (JPS-1) E-3
checked upon laser power ON. (MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

0534 Laser power error 1 An error was detected when the laser status was checked.
Check the fuse (F6/F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1) E-3
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the LD assembly (MC-9.4).

0536 Analog power supply error 1 An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMT08A board.
Check the fuse (F6/F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1) E-3
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the PMT08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.20).

[During initialization] Check the fuse (F1/F6/F7/F8) for the power supply
0537 Start point detection error 1 An error was detected when the start point detection status was checked. (JPS-1) (MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
E-3
Check the SYN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-9.6).
009-051-11
MT-28

0538 IP leading edge detection The IP leading edge detection signal was found to be abnormal when the leading
Check the fuse (F1/F6/F7/F8) for the power supply
(JPS-1) (MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
E-3
error 1 edge detection status was checked.
Check the SZ1 (SED08A board) (MC-10.5).
[During normal processing] Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).

An image quit interrupt was not executed within the specified time. Check the SYN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-9.6).
Check the CPU90F board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10).
0549 Image quit error <Reference> Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
E-3
MD-8.2.7 Check the polygon assembly (MC-9.5).
0701 Standard LAN initial setting [During initialization]

An error was detected during CPU90E board initialization.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). H
error
0703 System file setting value [During initialization]

An error was found in the configuration (SYSTEM) settings.
Check the configuration settings (MU-7). F
error
0704 No effective IDT An error was found in the configuration settings (EQUIPMENT/HOSTS Check the configuration settings (MU-7). F
ADDRESS).

0800 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a subsystem file
I-1
(LIF).

0801 File format error An error was found in the format of a subsystem file (LIF). Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
I-1

0802 File setting value error An error was found in the settings contained in a subsystem file (LIF). Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
I-1
009-051-11
MT-29

0803 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information into the
I-2
MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0804 Image file close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
I-2

0805 Image file read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read an image file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
I-2
[During normal processing (film reoutput)] Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
0806 Format information search An error was found in the HDD format information.
The format information about the battery backup memory was found to
I-3
error be abnormal. Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-16).

0807 Format number acquisition An error was detected when the combination of IP read size and format Check the IP. I-4
error information was checked.
0809 DMA device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a device driver Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). I-5
error (DMA).

080A DMA transfer error A DMA image transfer to the IMG board failed.
Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-5
Check the IMG08H board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).

080B Memory area securing error An error was detected when memory area allocation was attempted. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
I-6
009-051-11
MT-30

0810 DSP10 device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSP10 device
I-7
error (IMG08A board).

I-7
error the DSP10 (IMG08A board).

0812 DSP10 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data into the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7
DSP10 device (IMG08A board). Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).

0813 DSP10 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data from the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7

0814 DSP10 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP10 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). I-7
(IMG08A board). Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6).

0815 DSP10 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP10 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). I-7

0816 DSP10 image processing [During normal processing]
An image processing error was found in the DSP10 device (IMG08A board).
error Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).
009-051-11
MT-31

I-7
error (IMG08A board).

I-7
error the DSP11 device (IMG08A board).


081A DSP11 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data from the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7

081B DSP11 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP11 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). I-7

081C DSP11 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP11 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). I-7

081D DSP11 image processing [During normal processing]
009-051-11
MT-32

081E DSP20 device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSP20 device
I-7
error (IMG08B/H board).

081F DSP20 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a micro program into Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7). I-7
error the DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board). Check the IMG08H board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).

DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board). Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).


0822 DSP20 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP20 device
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

0823 DSP20 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP20 device
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
009-051-11
MT-33

An image processing error was found in the DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board).

I-7

0826 DSP21 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a micro program into Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7). I-7



I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
009-051-11
MT-34

082A DSP21 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP21 device
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

082B DSP21 image processing [During normal processing]

082C DSP22 device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSP22 device
I-7

082D DSP22 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a micro program into Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7). I-7

082E DSP22 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data into the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7

082F DSP22 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data from the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7
009-051-11
MT-35

I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

I-7
(IMG08B/H board).


I-7
error (IMG08H board).

I-7
error the DSP30 device (IMG08H board).

DSP30 device (IMG08H board). Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).

009-051-11
MT-36

(IMG08H board). Check the IMG08H board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).


An image processing error was found in the DSP30 device (IMG08H board).

083A DSP31 device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSP31 device
I-7

083B DSP31 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load the DSP31 device
I-7

083C DSP31 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data into the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7
009-051-11
MT-37

083D DSP31 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data from the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7

083E DSP31 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP31 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). I-7

083F DSP31 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP31 device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). I-7


I-7

I-7
error the DSP32 device (IMG08H board).
009-051-11
MT-38






I-7
009-051-11
MT-39

0849 DSP23 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a micro program into Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7). I-7

084A DSP23 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data into the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7

084B DSP23 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data from the Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.6). I-7

084C DSP23 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP23 device
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

084D DSP23 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP23 device
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

084E DSP23 image processing [During normal processing]
009-051-11
MT-40

0930 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load ID information into the
D
CPU memory (CPU90E board).

0931 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data into the
D

0932 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). D

0933 DPS0 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to perform a memory write Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). B
into the DSP0 device (DMC08A board). Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8).

0934 DSP0 image processing error An error was detected when an image process (DSP application startup) was Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8). B
1 performed. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

0935 DSP0 image processing error An error was detected when an image process (DSP application execution) was Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). B
2 performed.

0936 DSP0 image processing error An error was detected when an image process (DSP command cancel) was Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). B
3 performed.

0937 DMA transfer error A DMC08A board error was detected when a DMA transfer was performed.
Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8). C
009-051-11
MT-41

0950 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID information onto
D
the HDD.

0951 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data onto the
D
HDD.

0952 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.

0953 DSP0 memory write error An error was detected when the CPU90E board issued an instruction for writing Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). B
image data into the MMC90A/DIM08A board. Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8).

0954 DSP0 image processing error An error was detected when an image process (DSP application startup) was Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8). B
1 performed. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

0955 DSP0 image processing error An error was detected when an image process (DSP application execution) was Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). B
2 performed.

0956 DSP0 image processing error An error was detected when an image process (DSP command cancel) was Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). B
3 performed.

0957 DMA transfer error A DMC08A board error was detected when a DMA transfer was performed.
Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8). C
009-051-11
MT-42
0980 DSP0 device initialization An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize the DSP device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). C
error (CPU90E board).

0981 DSP0 micro program boot An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a dspLoad micro
B
error program into the DMC08A board.
0982 Output DMA device open An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the output DMA Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). B
error device (CPU90E board).
0983 Input DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the input DMA device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). B
(CPU90E board).
0984 DSP device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSP device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). -
(CPU90E board).

0985 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a dspLoad micro
A-1
program file into the CPU memory (CPU90E board).

0986 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a dspWrite micro
A-1
program file into the CPU memory (CPU90E board).

0987 DSP0 micro program load An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a dspWrite micro
B
error program into the DMC08A board.
009-051-11
MT-43

0A00 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
K-1

0A01 File format error A format error was found in a file that was read into the CPU memory (CPU90E
K-1
board).

0A02 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in a file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
K-1

0A03 File save error A file save could not be performed.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). K-1
0A04 Online connection option It was found that the type A and type B online connection options are both
Uninstall the soft key file (FD) for the connection
type irrelevant to the installation site (IN-A6).
K-2
setting error enabled (option setting inconsistency).

0B00 Image data open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an image data file.
Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14). L-1

0B01 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information into the
L-1

0B02 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID information onto
L-1
the HDD.
009-051-11
MT-44

0B03 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data into the
L-1

0B04 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data onto the
L-1
HDD.

0B05 Image data read close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-1

0B06 Image data write close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-1
0B10 DSPH device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DSPH device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). L-2
(HCP08A board).

0B11 DSPH micro program file An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a DSPH micro
L-3
open error program file on the HDD.

0B12 DSPH micro program read An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a DSPH micro Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-3
error program into the CPU memory (CPU90E board). Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).

0B13 DSPH micro program boot An error was detected when an attempt was made to boot a micro program for
L-2
error the DSPH device (HCP08A board).
009-051-11
MT-45

0B14 DSPH memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to perform a DSPH memory Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-2
write into the DSPH device (HCP08A board). Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9).

0B15 DSPH memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to perform a DSPH memory Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-2
load into the CPU memory (CPU90E board). Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9).

0B16 DSPH checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSPH device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-2
(HCP08A board). Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9).

0B17 DSPH self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSPH device Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). L-2
(HCP08A board). Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9).

An error was found in a compression/decompression process.
0B18 DSPH image processing A timeout occurred because image data could not be read from the HDD.
Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9). L-2
error Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).
An image data communication was aborted.
0B20 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DMA device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). L-4
(CPU90E board).

An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image
data to the HCP08A board.
0B21 DMA transfer error Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2). L-4
Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image
MC-17.11).
data to the MMC90A/DIM08A board.
0C00 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DMA device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). M-1
(CPU90E board).
009-051-11
MT-46

Check the CPU90F board/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/
0C01 DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image data to the
MC-17.10/MC-17.11).
M-1
CPU90F/LAN90B board.

0C10 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information into the
M-2

0C11 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data into the
M-2

0C12 Image data read close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). M-2
0C80 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DMA device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). M-1
(CPU90E board).

[During normal processing] Check the CPU90F board/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/
0C81 DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image data to the MC-17.10/MC-17.11).
M-1
MMC90A/DIM08A board. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

0C90 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID information onto
M-2
the HDD.
009-051-11
MT-47

0C91 Image data read close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). M-2

0C92 Image data open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an image data file.
Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14). M-2

0C93 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image data onto the
M-2
HDD.

0C94 Image data write close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a received input Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). M-2
image data file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).

0C95 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information into the
M-2

0C96 ID information update error An error was detected when an attempt was made to update the ID information
M-2
delivered to the HDD.

0D10 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image data into the
D

0D11 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID information into the
D
009-051-11
MT-48

0D12 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.

0D13 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file.

0D14 EDR Data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read EDR data into the
D

0D15 EDR data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an EDR data file.
0D30 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the DMA device Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). C
driver.

An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image data to
0D31 DMA transfer error the CPU90F board/LAN90B board.
MC-17.11).
C
An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer image data to
the MMC90A/DIM08A board.
0D42 Image data transmission [During normal processing]

The DICOM transmission process for the LAN board could not be continued.
MC-17.11).
G-2
error

0D60 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a subsystem file
I
(DOT).
009-051-11
MT-49

0D61 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a file into the CPU
I
memory (CPU90E board).

0D62 File format error A format error was found in a file that was loaded into the CPU memory
I
(CPU90E board).

0D70 File format error An error was found in the settings contained in a configuration file (SYSTEM). Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
J+

104A Image file access timeout A timeout was found in an image file access. Design analysis error code e-6
(for analysis) A timeout was detected in the HDD's read/write response.

104B Image file access timeout A timeout was found in an image file access. Design analysis error code e-6
(for SCSI analysis) A timeout was detected in the HDD's read/write response.

104C Image file access timeout A timeout was found in an image file access. Design analysis error code e-6
(for IMM analysis) A timeout was detected in the HDD's read/write response.
1103 Backup memory corruption An error was found in a backup memory check.

1113 HD image area uninitialized An error was found in the format data about the HDD image area. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
F
[During normal processing] Output stored image data.

1301 Image file open error The image data area on the HDD at the output destination device became full. Check the external device.
D-4
009-051-11
MT-50

1302 Image file close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an image data file. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).
D-4

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to close, allowing
(MT-2.4.1).
the maximum retry count (NA12) to be exceeded.
Check the SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.5).
<I/O name>
13A1 Cassette setting error SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid
Check the SA3/7/11/15 (MC-4.6). D-5
Check the cassette.
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2/8.5.4
[During initialization/normal processing/abnormality processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13A2
Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned ON, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to open, allowing (MT-2.4.1).
the maximum retry count (NA11) to be exceeded. Check the SOLA1/2/3/4 (MC-4.8).
Check the SA3/7/11/15 (MC-4.6).
<I/O name> Check the cassette set unit mechanism (MC-4).
13A2 Cassette hold release error SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid Check the cassette.
D-5
SA3/7/11/15; Cassette hold sensor Check the fuse (F10) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned ON, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to open,
allowing the maximum retry count (NA11) to be exceeded.
(MT-2.4.1).
Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to close,
allowing the maximum retry count (NA12) to be exceeded.
Check the SA3/7/11/15 (MC-4.6).
13A3 Cassette shelf error Check the cassette set unit mechanism (MC-4).
D-5
<I/O name>
Check the cassette.
SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid
<Reference>
MD-8.5.5/8.5.11
009-051-11
MT-51
Check the SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.5).

[During initialization/normal processing/abnormality processing]
Check the SA3/7/11/15 (MC-4.6).
Although the cassette was set in position, the SA2/6/10/14 did not close.
13A4 Cassette setting error Check the cassette.
D-5
<I/O name>
SA2/6/10/14; Cassette IN sensor

Check the SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.5).
Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA2/6/10/14 opened.
13A5 Cassette setting error <I/O name>
Check the cassette. D-5

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF upon cassette loading, the SA1/5/9/13 Check the SOLA1/2/3/4 (MC-4.8).
failed to close and the SA2/6/10/14 failed to close. Check the SA1/5/9/13 and SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.4/MC-4.5).
13A6 Cassette undetected <I/O name> Check the cassette.
D-5
SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
SA1/5/9/13; Cassette ejection sensor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA1/5/9/13 failed to close and the Check the SOLA1/2/3/4 (MC-4.8).
SA2/6/10/14 failed to close. Check the SA1/5/9/13 and SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.4/MC-4.5).
13A7 Cassette undetected <I/O name> Check the cassette.
D-5
SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
009-051-11
MT-52

Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03A8/13A8
When the IP size was checked, the CLOSE time combination of the
(MT-2.4.1).
SA4/8/12/16, SB4, and SC1 did not agree with the IP size data stored
Check the IP and cassette.
in the machine.
Although the IP size was recognized as "8" x 10" ST", the barcode
Check the SA4/8/12/16 (MC-4.7).
information indicated "HR".
13A8 Nonstandard IP size Check the SC1 (MC-6.2).
D-5
<I/O name>
SA4/8/12/16; Mammo/ST sensor
(MD-7.3/MC-6).
SB4; Inch/metric sensor
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.5/8.2.6

(MT-2.4.1).
[During normal processing] Check the BCR (MU-11.4/MC-8.8).
Although the barcode reader (BCR) turned ON to read the IP's barcode Check the IP.
information, it failed to read the barcode information, allowing the maximum Check the MD3 (MU-11.2/MC-8.7).
retry count (ND31) to be exceeded. Check the side-positioning conveyor mechanism
13A9 Barcode read error The barcode reader (BCR) installed in the machine was influenced by (MD-7.4/MC-8). D-5
external irradiation noise. Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<Reference> Check the cable connection between the SNS08A board
MD-8.2.6 (CN22) and the BCR, and attachment of the ferrite core.
Check the cable routing between the SNS08A board (CN23)
and the CPU90E board (CN11).

It was found that the LAMP1/2/3/4/5 were not properly illuminated. Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13AA/23AA
The power of the machine is turned ON within less than 30 seconds (MT-2.4.1).
after the power was turned OFF. If the power of the machine is turned OFF, Check the LAMP1/2/3/4/5 (MU-9.1/MC-12.8).
voltage of 24 V starts to drop. Since the power is turned ON while the Check the fuse (F5) for the power supply (JPS-1).
voltage is dropping, the current underconsumption detection circuit (MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.2).
13AA Erasure lamp failure activates, preventing the voltage of 24V from being supplied. Check the power supply (JPS-1) (MT-2.4.5/MC-13.1). D-3
Check the FANF1 (MC-12.10).
<I/O name> Check the TSW1 (MC-12.9).
LAMP1/2/3/4/5; Erasure lamps Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
Turn ON the power more than 30 seconds later after
<Reference> the machine power is turned OFF.
MD-8.210
009-051-11
MT-53
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13AB

(MT-2.4.1).
It was found that the IP dosage was higher than 400 mR.
Check the IP.
13AB Overexposed IP unerased Check the exposure conditions.
D-5
<Reference>
MD-8.2.10

Although the IDT was asked about the ID formation of the IP, it was not Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13AC
registered. (MT-2.4.1).
13AC ID information not registered Check the ID information.
D-5
<Reference> Check the external device (IDT).
MD-8.2.6

Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13AD
It was found that the barcode information about the IP did not agree with the IP
(MT-2.4.1).
13AD IP with improper type data stored in the machine.
Check the IP. D-5
generation/type detected <Reference>
Check the IP's barcode label.
Check the BCR (MU-11.4/MC-8.8).
MD-8.2.6

Although an attempt was made to perform an image recording process in
accordance with ID information, no relevant image recording process condition Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13AE
13AE No relevant MPM code (MPM code) was found in the machine. (MT-2.4.1). D-5
Check the image recording process condition setup.
<Reference>
MD-8.2.6
[During normal processing] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13AF
Although the IDT was called, the IDT did not respond. (MT-2.4.1).
13AF IDT line error Check the external device (IDT). D-5
<Reference> Check the CPU90F board/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/
MD-8.2.6 MC-17.10/MC-17.11).
[During initialization] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B8/13B8

The machine's CMOS information (IP found) did not agree with the remaining IP (MT-2.4.1).
search result (no IP). Clear the backup memory and then perform a reset (MC-2.3).
13B8 IP position information error Turn the power OFF and then back ON to achieve
D-5
<Reference> Automatic discharge, clear the backup memory,
MD-8.5.4/8.5.6 and then perform a reset (MC-2.3).
009-051-11
MT-54
[During initialization/normal processing/M-Utility mode] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13E1
Although the MB1 and PB1 turned ON, the SB5 failed to close, allowing the (MT-2.4.1).
maximum retry count (NB11) to be exceeded. Check the IP.
Check the PB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.6).
<I/O name> Check the SB5 (MC-5.5).
13E1 Feed-IP suction error MB1; Suction cup drive motor Check the suction cups and hose (MC-5.8/PM-3.9/PM-3.10). D-5
PB1; IP suction pump Check the cassette set unit mechanism (MC-4).
SB5; Suction sensor Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
MD-8.2.4/8.4.2 Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13E2/13E5

[During initialization/normal processing/M-Utility mode] (MT-2.4.1).
Although the MB2 turned ON after feed-IP suction, the SB5 failed to close. Check the IP.
Check the SVB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.7).
<I/O name> Check the PB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.6).
13E2 Feed-IP dropped MB2; IP transport motor Check the SB5 (MC-5.5). D-5
SB5; Suction sensor Check the suction cups and hose (MC-5.8/PM-3.9/PM-3.10).
MD-8.2.4/8.4.2 Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
[During normal processing/M-Utility mode] Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13E3
Although the MB2 turned ON after feed-IP suction, the SB2 failed to close. (MT-2.4.1).
Therefore, a retry operation was performed. Check the IP.
<I/O name> Check the MB2 (MU-11.2/MC-5.10).
13E3 Feed-IP grip error MB2; IP transport motor Check the SB2 (MC-5.2).
D-5
SB2; Cassette inlet IP sensor Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
MD-8.2.4/8.4.2 Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
009-051-11
MT-55

Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13E4
Although the MB1 and PB1 turned ON, the SB5 failed to close, allowing the
(MT-2.4.1).
maximum retry count (NB11) to be exceeded.
Check the IP.
Check the PB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.6).
<I/O name>
13E4 Load IP suction error MB1; Suction cup drive motor
Check the suction cups and hose (MC-5.8/PM-3.9/PM-3.10).
D-5
PB1; IP suction pump
SB5; Suction sensor
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.10/8.4.2
Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 13E2/

[During initialization/normal processing/M-Utility mode] 13E5 (MT-2.4.1).
Although the MB1 turned ON, the SB5 failed to close. Check the IP.
<I/O name> Check the PB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.6).
13E5 Load IP dropped MB1; Suction cup drive motor Check the SVB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.7). D-5
SB5; Suction sensor Check the suction cups and hose (MC-5.8/PM-3.9/3.10).
MD-8.2.10/8.4.2 Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
[During normal processing/M-Utility mode] Check the SVB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.7).

Although the PB1 turned OFF and the SVB1 turned ON, the SB5 failed to open. Check the PB1 (MU-11.3/MC-5.6).
Therefore, a retry operation was performed. Check the SB5 (MC-5.5).
Check the suction cups and hose (MC-5.8/PM-3.9/3.10).
13E9 IP leak error <I/O name> Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
D-5
PB1; IP suction DC pump (MD-7.2/MC-5).
SVB1; IP suction relief solenoid valve Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
SB5; Suction sensor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).

1490 Menu unregistration error It was found that the image reading parameter menu was not registered for the Upload (IDT Utility). the menu into the image reader. -
IDT.
1533 Laser power insufficient error [During initialization]

An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked.
E-3
1
009-051-11
MT-56

193A Image cannot be outputted An image output request was rejected because the HDD in the external device
Output the image data that is stored on the HDD
in the external device (DMS).
F
due to HDF full was full.

193B DMS cannot output image An image output request was rejected because the OD in the external device Change the OD. F
due to ODF full was full.

193C DMS cannot output image The DMS's image output request was rejected because the ODF did not have an Insert an OD into the ODF. F
due to no ODF OD for filing.

1980 DMS output request received Although a DMS output request was received while the DMC08A board was not
-
when the DMS is invalid mounted, no DMS output could be generated.
Check the CPU90F board/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/

MC-17.10/MC-17.11).
1D01 Option invalidated A DICOM output generation failure was detected.
Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.9). F+
1FF0 ISC message error An ISC message with an unknown destination is queued. Design analysis error code C+
1FFF Null transmission to ISC Null data is sent during ISC message transmission. Design analysis error code B+
If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error,

use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2000 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a trace data file.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A
009-051-11
MT-57

2001 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into a trace data file.

2002 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a trace data file.

2010 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a trace data file.

2011 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into a trace data file.

2012 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a trace data file.
009-051-11
MT-58

[During initialization] use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2040 Format information error It was found that the management information in the HDD image area was e-1
damaged. Format the image area of the HDD (MU-12.2).

2041 Backup data error Abnormal image management information was detected when an attempt was e-2
made to load the backup of HDD image management information. Format the image area of the HDD (MU-12.2).

[During initialization/M-Utility mode]
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2042 HD cannot be formatted A HDD access error was detected when an attempt was made to reformat the e-1
HDD image area.

2043 Insufficient shared memory The shared memory was found to be insufficient when the optional functionality e-3
was checked. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).
Check the configuration of installed boards.

2044 HD access error A HDD access error was detected when an attempt was made to read the format
e-4
Format the image area of the HDD (MU-12.2).
information or image management information in the HDD image region.
009-051-11
MT-59


[During initialization] Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
2049 Illegal option selection An error was detected when the incorporated optional functions were checked. MC-17.11).
e-3

204A Image file access error An error was detected when an image file was accessed. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). e-5
A HDD reset was performed. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

204B SCSI reset error A SCSI reset error or HDD reset error was detected. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
e-6

204C Image file access retry over The maximum retry count for image file access was exceeded. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). e-5
An error was found in a request for HDD access. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

The image data file backed up in the HDD was to be accessed, but timeout was
204E CBC reset detected. The reset signal was reset in the IO port and the CBC was reset.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4) e-5
* CBC refers to the data controller LSI mounted on the MTH08 board.
009-051-11
MT-60

2060 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a configuration file.

[During initialization] Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

2061 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/
MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

2062 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file.
Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A

2063 File size error The size of a configuration file was found to be abnormal. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A

2064 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into a configuration Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A
file. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
009-051-11
MT-61

2065 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a configuration file.

2080 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an image processing Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A-1
parameter file. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

Check for an improper software update (MU-16).
An error was found in the format of an image processing parameter file.
2081 File format error An error was detected because the software was directly updated from
Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A-1
version A08 or earlier to version A13 or later.

2082 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in an image processing parameter file.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A-1

2083 FINP data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected and Design analysis error code A-2
therefore replaced by the default value.
009-051-11
MT-62

2084 FINP data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected but could Design analysis error code A-2
not be replaced by the default value.

2085 Serial ID information data When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected and Design analysis error code A-2
error therefore replaced by the default value.

2086 Image processing table is [During normal processing]
An error was found in an image processing table.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: A-3
inappropriate Check the external device (DMS).

2087 FINP data error 2 When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected but could Design analysis error code A-4

2088 Serial ID information data When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected and Design analysis error code A-5
error therefore replaced by the default value.

2089 E-I/F image data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected and Design analysis error code A-6
therefore replaced by the default value.

208A E-I/F image data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was detected but could Design analysis error code A-6

[During a software update process]
208B File write error Files could not be written onto the HDD. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A-1
009-051-11
MT-63

2150 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a configuration file Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A-1
(REMOTE SWITCH). Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

2151 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a configuration file Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A-1

2152 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a configuration file Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). A-1

2153 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file (REMOTE SWITCH).

2154 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file (REMOTE SWITCH).
009-051-11
MT-64

2160 MTH board error When the PC boards were checked, the MTH08A/D board was found to be F
abnormal. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

2161 SCN board error When the PC boards were checked, the SCN08A board was found to be
F
abnormal.

2162 SNS board error When the PC boards were checked, the SNS08A board was found to be
F
abnormal.

2163 HCP board error When the PC boards were checked, the HCP08A board was found to be
F
abnormal.

2164 SCN board error When the PC boards were checked, the SCN08A board was found to be
F
abnormal.

21B3 No output destination host [During normal processing]
An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file (HOSTS ADDRESS).
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: DST-1
description Check the configuration settings (MU-7).
009-051-11
MT-65

21B4 Protocol error An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file (NETWORK HOST DST-1
INTERFACE).

21B5 Failure to acquire output [During normal processing]
An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file (HOSTS ADDRESS).
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: DST-1
destination IP address Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

21D0 HD open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a core dump file. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A-1+

21D1 HD write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write abnormality
A-1+
information into a core dump file.

21D2 HD close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a core dump file after
A-1+
abnormality information was written into it.

[During the power OFF sequence]
21E0 HD open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a trace data file. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A-1+
009-051-11
MT-66

21E1 HD write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write trace data into a trace
A-1+
data file.

21E2 HD close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a trace data file after
A-1+
trace data was written into it.

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to close.
<I/O name> If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
23A1 Cassette hold failure retry SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid 13A1.
D-5
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2/8.5.4/8.5.5

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned ON, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to open.
23A2 Cassette hold release failure <I/O name>

If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
03A2/13A2.
D-5
retry SA3/7/11/15; Cassette hold sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2/8.5.5/8.5.11/8.6.2
009-051-11
MT-67

Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned ON, the SA3/7/11/15 failed to open, allowing
the maximum retry count (NA11) to be exceeded. Therefore, the use of the
affected cassette shelf was suspended by the user.
23A3 Degeneration for relevant <I/O name>

03A3/13A3.
D-5
cassette shelf SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

When the IP size was checked, the CLOSE time combination of the SA4/8/12/16,
SB4, and SC1 did not agree with the IP size data stored in the machine.
23A8 Non standard IP size <I/O name> 03A8/13A8.
D-5
SA4/8/12/16; Mammo/ST sensor
SB4; Inch/metric sensor

Although the barcode reader (BCR) turned ON to read the IP's barcode
information, it failed to read the barcode information.
23A9 Barcode read retry The barcode reader (BCR) installed in the machine was influenced by
13A9.
D-5
external irradiation noise.
<Reference>
MD-8.2.6
It was found that the LAMP1/2/3/4/5 were not properly illuminated.
The power of the machine is turned ON within less than 30 seconds
after the power was turned OFF. If the power of the machine is turned OFF,
23AA Initialization erasure lamp voltage of 24 V starts to drop. Since the power is turned ON while the
voltage is dropping, the current underconsumption detection circuit
13AA.
D-3
failure activates, preventing the voltage of 24V from being supplied.
<I/O name>
LAMP1/2/3/4/5; Erasure lamps
009-051-11
MT-68

Although the MC1/MD3 turned ON, the SC1 failed to close after the SB2 closed.
23B1 Feed conveyance retry <I/O name> 03B1.
D-5
MC1/MD3; IP transport motor

Although the MB2/MC1/MF1 turned ON, a retry operation was performed for one
of the following reasons:
The SB2 failed to close.

23B2 Load conveyance retry The SB2 failed to open.
03B2.
D-5
Although the SB2 opened, the MB2 did not stop normally.
<I/O name>
MB2/MC1/MF1; IP transport motor

Although the MD3 turned ON, the SD3 failed to close after the SC1 closed.
23B3 Side-positioning conveyance <I/O name>
03B3.
D-5
entry retry MD3; IP transport motor
009-051-11
MT-69

Although the MD1 turned ON, a retry operation was performed for one of the
following reasons:
The SD1 failed to close.

The SD1 closed. The MD1 was then returned to the phase origin and turned
23BA Side-positioning HP detection ON by a predetermined number of pulses (PD54). However, the SD1 failed to
close after side-positioning motor ON.
(MD-7.4/MC-8). D-5
retry Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<I/O name>
SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.6

Although the MD1 turned ON to prepare for side-positioning mechanism home
positioning, the SD1 failed to close. Therefore, a retry operation was performed.
23BB Side-positioning HP detection <I/O name>
(MD-7.4/MC-8). D-5
preparation retry SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.6
[During initialization/normal processing/M-Utility mode]

Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 failed to close.
<I/O name>
23BC Side-positioning operation MD1; Side-positioning motor
03BC.
D-5
error SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.6/8.4.3
009-051-11
MT-70

following reasons:
The SD2 failed to close.
Although the MD2 turned ON after the SD2 closed, the SD2 failed to close.
23BD Side-positioning grip HP Check the SD2 (MC-8.2).
D-5
detection retry <I/O name>
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
SD2; Grip release home position sensor
MD2; Grip release motor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7

following reasons:
The SD2 failed to close. Check the MD2 (MU-11.2/MC-8.6).

23BE Side-positioning grip HP The SD2 failed to open. Check the side-positioning conveyor mechanism
(MD-7.4/MC-8).
D-5
detection preparation retry <I/O name> Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
MD2; Grip release motor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
SD2; Grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7

Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to close.
<I/O name>
23BF Side-positioning grip MD2; Grip release motor
03BF.
D-5
operation error SD2; Grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7
009-051-11
MT-71

When the SNS08A board checked the drive status of the MZ1, the motor rotating
speed signal was found to be abnormal. Check the MZ1 (MC-10.8).
23C5 FFM drive W.F. disorder <I/O name> (MD-7.5/MC-10). D-5
MZ1; Subscanning motor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7

The elapsed time between the instant at which the MZ2 turned ON and the
instant at which the SZ2 opened was not as specified.
23C6 Drive shaft grip operation <I/O name>

MZ2; Drive shaft grip motor
03C6.
D-5
error SZ2; Drive-side grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3/8.5.9

The elapsed time between the instant at which the MZ3 turned ON and the
instant at which the SZ3 opened was not as specified.
23C7 Driven grip release operation <I/O name>

MZ3; Driven shaft grip motor
03C7.
D-5
error SZ3; Driven-side grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7/8.3.3/8.5.9
23C8 Drive shaft grip drive speed When the driving shaft grip operation was subjected to self-diagnosis, a grip
03C8.
D-5
correction error drive speed correction error was found.
23C9 Driven shaft grip release When the driven shaft grip operation was subjected to self-diagnosis, a grip drive
03C9.
D-5
drive speed correction error speed correction error was found.
009-051-11
MT-72

Although the ME2/MF1 turned ON, a retry operation was performed for one of Check the MF1 (MU-11.2/MC-12.7).
the following reasons: Check the ME2 (MU-11.2/MC-11.4).
The SF4 failed to close and the SF2 failed to open. Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism
23D0 Switchback retry The SF4 opened. (MD-7.6/MC-11). D-5
Check the erasure conveyor mechanism
<I/O name> (MD-7.7/MC-12).
ME2/MF1; IP transport motor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
SF4; Overrun IP sensor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).

When the ME2/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 closed and then the SF2 opened.
However, when the ME2/MF1 turned OFF later, the SF4 failed to close.
<I/O name>
ME2/MF1; IP transport motor If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
23D2 Conveyance sensor error SF1; After-reading conveyor standby IP sensor 03D2.
D-5
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7

Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF2 failed to close.
23D3 Before-erasure conveyance <I/O name>
03D3.
D-5
retry MF1; IP transport motor
009-051-11
MT-73

Although the SOLC1 and MF1/MC1/MB2 turned ON, a retry operation was
performed for one of the following reasons:
The SF3 failed to open. Further, the SB2 closed after the SC2 opened.
Although the SF3 opened, the SB2 failed to close.
23D6 After-erasure conveyance If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
03D6.
D-5
retry <I/O name>
MF1/MC1/MB2; IP transport motor
SC2; Grip release home position sensor

Although the ME1 turned ON, the SE1 failed to close. Therefore, a retry
operation was performed. Check the ME1 (MU-11.2/MC-11.3).
23DA After-reading grip HP <I/O name>
(MD-7.6/MC-11).
D-5
detection retry SE1; Grip release home position sensor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7

Although the ME1 turned ON, a retry operation was performed for one of the
following reasons:
The SE1 failed to close.
23DB After-reading grip HP The SD2 failed to open.
Check the after-reading conveyor mechanism D-5
detection preparation retry <I/O name>
(MD-7.6/MC-11).
SD2/SE1; Grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7
009-051-11
MT-74

Although the ME1 turned ON, the SE1 failed to close.
<I/O name>
23DC After-reading grip operation ME1; Grip release motor
03DC.
D-5
error SE1; Grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.7

Although the MB3 turned ON, the SB3 failed to close. Therefore, a retry
23DE Elevation shelf movement <I/O name>

MB3; Up-down drive motor
03DE.
D-5
error retry SB3; Each shelf position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.3/8.2.8
[During normal processing/M-Utility mode]

Although the MB1 and PB1 turned ON, the SB5 failed to close. Therefore, a
retry operation was performed.
<I/O name>
23E1 Feed-IP suction failure retry MB1; Suction cup drive motor
13E1.
D-5
SB5; Suction sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.4/8.4.2
009-051-11
MT-75

23E2 Feed-IP drop retry 13E2.
D-5
<I/O name>
MB2; IP transport motor
SB5; Suction sensor

Although the MB2 turned ON, after feed-IP suction, the SB2 failed to close.
23E3 Feed-IP grip retry 13E3.
D-5
<I/O name>
MB2; IP transport motor

<I/O name>
23E4 Load IP suction failure retry MB1; Suction cup drive motor
13E4.
D-5
SB5; Suction sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.10/8.4.2

23E5 Load IP drop retry <I/O name> 13E5.
D-5
MB1; Suction cup drive motor
SB5; Suction sensor
009-051-11
MT-76

Although the MB1 turned ON, to achieve suction cup home positioning, a retry
operation was performed for one of the following reasons:
The SB1 failed to open.
23E6 Suction cup HP detection Check the up-down IP removal unit mechanism
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
D-5
preparation retry <I/O name>
SB1; Suction cup home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.3

operation was performed. Check the MB1 (MU-11.2/MC-5.9).
23E7 Suction cup HP detection <I/O name>
(MD-7.2/MC-5).
D-5
retry SB1; Suction cup home position sensor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.3

Although the MB1 turned ON, the SB1 failed to close.

Although the PB1 and SVB1 turned ON, the SB1 failed to close.

After the elevation unit was allowed to move for IP loading,
the SB1 failed to close. If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
23E8 Suction cup HP return error 03E8.
D-5
<I/O name>
SB1; Suction cup home position sensor
SVB1; IP suction relief solenoid valve
<Reference>
MD-8.2.3/8.2.4/8.2.8/8.2.10/8.4.2/8.5.3
009-051-11
MT-77

Although the SVB1 turned ON, the SB5 failed to open. Therefore, a retry
23E9 IP suction relief error 13E9.
D-5
<I/O name>
SVB1; IP suction relief solenoid valve
SB5; Suction sensor
[During normal processing] Check the SOLA1/2/3/4 (MC-4.8).

Cassette detection logic Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA1/5/9/13 opened. Check the SA1/5/9/13 and SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.4/MC-4.5).
23F1 failure 1 (immediately after <I/O name> Check the cassette.
D-5
cassette setting) SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
[During normal processing] Check the SOLA1/2/3/4 (MC-4.8).

Cassette detection logic Although the SOLA1/2/3/4 turned OFF, the SA1/5/9/13 opened. Check the SA1/5/9/13 and SA2/6/10/14 (MC-4.4/MC-4.5).
23F2 failure 2 (after up-down <I/O name> Check the cassette.
D-5
movement) SOLA1/2/3/4; Cassette hold solenoid Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
[During normal processing] Check the MD3 (MU-11.2/MC-8.7).

Although the MD3 turned ON, the SC1 failed to close. Check the SC1 (MC-6.2).
23F4 Feed conveyance motor error <I/O name> (MD-7.3/MC-6).
D-5
MD3; IP transport motor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
SC1; Before-BCR IP sensor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
[During normal processing] Check the MD3 (MU-11.2/MC-8.7).

Although the MD3 turned ON, the SD3 failed to close. Check the SD3 (MC-6.2).
23F5 Side-positioning conveyance <I/O name>
(MD-7.3/MC-6).
D-5
motor error MD3; IP transport motor Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
SD3; Side-positioning IP sensor Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
009-051-11
MT-78

Although the MF1/ME2 turned ON, one of the following situations was detected:
The SF2 failed to open.

The SF4 failed to close. Check the SF2 (MC-12.4).
23F6 Switchback conveyance error Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.7/MC-12). D-5
The SF4 opened. Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.12).
<I/O name>
MF1/ME2; IP transport motor

Although the MF1/MC1/MB2 turned ON, one of the following situations was
detected:
23F8 After-erasure conveyance The SB2 failed to open.
(MD-7.2/MC-5). D-5
motor error [During normal processing]
When the MF1/MC1 turned OFF, the MB2 did not turn OFF.
<I/O name>
MF1/MC1/MB2; IP transport motor

23F9 NFB trip detection An error was found in the SNS08A board.
D-2
Check the power supply (JPS-1) (MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13.1).
009-051-11
MT-79

[During U-Utility mode]
2400 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a file (CRT test Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). E-1
pattern display or like file). Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
2403 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a subsystem file
0403.
E-1
(IMG).

2423 DSP4 image processing An image processing error was found in the DSP4 device (IMG07B board) after
0423.
E-2
error 2 image data was read from the scanner.

2480 EDR data transmission An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer the EDR backup
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: E-4
designation error data about a read image.
Check the IP address (MU-7.2).

2481 Connection establishment A connection establishment error was detected when an attempt was made to
E-7
error transfer the EDR backup data about a read image.
MC-17.11).
Check the IP address (MU-7.2).

2482 EDR data transmission error A connection error was detected while the EDR backup data about a read image
E-7
was being transferred.
MC-17.11).
Check the connected device.
009-051-11
MT-80

Although the barcode information and menu were entered via the IDT in
2490 Menu replacement error accordance with the message after the image was read without being registered E-8
via the IDT, no associated menu was found in the image reader. Therefore, the
Upload (IDT Utility) the menu into the image reader.
menu code was replaced with the default one.

[During error handling] use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
Image data was to be written into the HDD, but a data write error occurs,
24A0 Image data backup file open resulting in shutdown of the system. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4) E-1
error ID information and EDR data were to be backed up in the HDD DOS region, but Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
a file open error occurs. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

24A1 Image data backup file write resulting in shutdown of the system. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4) E-1
error ID information and EDR data were to be backed up in the HDD DOS region, but Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
a data write error occurs. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

24A2 Image data backup file read resulting in shutdown of the system. The machine was restarted after the system Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4) E-1
open error shutdown, and ID information, EDR data or the like backed up in the HDD DOS Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
region were to be read, but a file open error occurs. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).

24A3 Image data backup file read resulting in shutdown of the system. The machine was restarted after the system Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4) E-1
error shutdown, and ID information, EDR data or the like backed up in the HDD DOS Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
region were to be read, but a data read error occurs. Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.4.3/IN-6.3.2).
009-051-11
MT-81

2530 Interrupt diagnosis error 1 [During scanner self-diagnosis]

It was found that a leading-edge detection interrupt could not be initiated.
Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19). E-3
(leading-edge detection) Check the fuse (F1) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the SZ1 (SED08A board) (MC-10.5).

2531 Interrupt diagnosis error 2 [During scanner self-diagnosis]
It was found that an end-of-screen interrupt could not be initiated. Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).
E-3
(end of screen) Check the CPU90F board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10).

2535 HV voltage error 1 When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19). E-3
power supply was found to be abnormal. Check the fuse (F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

2542 Polygon mirror error 2 When the polygon status was checked, the lock signal for the polygon motor was
E-3
found to be abnormal.
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
009-051-11
MT-82

2543 Insufficient laser power error [During normal processing]
An error was detected when the laser power status was checked.
E-3
2 Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).


2544 Laser power error 2 An error was detected when the laser status was checked. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
E-3
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

2545 HV voltage error 2 When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19). E-3
power supply was found to be abnormal. Check the fuse (F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).


2546 Analog power supply error 2 An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMT08A board. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
E-3
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
009-051-11
MT-83


2547 Start-point detection error 2 An error was detected when the start-point detection status was checked.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-3
Check the fuse (F1/F6/F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).


2548 IP leading-edge detection [During normal processing]
A timeout was detected when the leading-edge detection status was checked.
Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-3
error 2 Check the fuse (F1/F6/F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the SZ1 (SED08 board) (MC-10.5).
[During normal processing] If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
2549 Image quit error Although an image quit interrupt was executed, a timeout occurred. 0549.
E-3

Do not use the IP that was found to be overexposed.

Use a new IP to make an exposure at an appropriate
[During normal processing] dosage setting. The overexposed IP must be allowed
2550 Overexposure detection An overexposure (dosage of higher than 400 mR) was detected. to stand for about 16 hours and then subjected to a
E-9
primary erasure process.
If the same error (overexposure detection) occurs during

the use of an IP exposed to an appropriate radiation dose,
check the PMT08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.20).
009-051-11
MT-84

[During image read error occurrence]
2570 Polygon mirror error 3 When the polygon status was checked in the event of an image read error, the
E-3
lock signal for the polygon motor was found to be abnormal.
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

2571 Insufficient laser power error [During initialization]
An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked.
E-3
3 Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).

[During image read error occurrence]
2572 Laser error 3 An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked in the event of
E-3
an image read error.
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

[During normal processing] use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2573 Insufficient laser power error The laser status was found to be abnormal when it was checked before image E-3
4 reading. Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).
009-051-11
MT-85

2574 Laser error 4 The laser status was found to be abnormal when it was checked before image
E-3
reading.
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

[During image read error occurrence] Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).
2575 Start-point detection error 3 An abnormality was detected when the start-point detection status was checked Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-3
in the event of an image read error. Check the fuse (F1/F6/F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).

[During image read error occurrence] Check the SCN08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.19).
2576 IP leading-edge detection The IP leading-edge detection signal was found to be abnormal when the Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3). E-3
error 3 leading-edge detection status was checked in the event of an image read error. Check the fuse (F1/F6/F7/F8) for the power supply (JPS-1)
(MT-2.4.5/MT-6/MC-13).
Check the SZ1 (SED08 board) (MC-10.5).

2713 Unexpected command [During initialization/normal processing]
A device driver (SMCU) received an illegal command.
F
received Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
Check the external device (IDT).

[During initialization/normal processing] use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2714 Serial line test error An error was detected when a line test was conducted.
F
009-051-11
MT-86

2716 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to access (open/write/close) a
A-1
device driver (SMCU) file.

271C SMCU driver hard error An error was found in a device driver (SMCU).
E


The network received an illegal command.
MC-17.11).
H
received Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
Check the network-connected equipment.

[During initialization/normal processing (ID deletion mode)]
2725 Connection establishment An error was detected when an attempt was made to establish the connection
MC-17.11).
H
error with the IDT.

[During initialization/normal processing (IDT-Utility mode)]
2726 Connection establishment An error was detected when an attempt was made to establish the connection Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/ H
error with the IDT. MC-17.11).
009-051-11
MT-87

2727 Connection establishment An error was detected when an attempt was made to establish the connection for
MC-17.11).
H
error command reception.

2751 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a subsystem file (IIF).

2752 File format error An error was found in the format of a subsystem file (IIF).

2753 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write a subsystem file (IIF).

2754 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a subsystem file (IIF).
009-051-11
MT-88

2755 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a subsystem file (IIF).

2756 Image processing parameter [During normal processing]
An error was found in the checksum on an image processing parameter file. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A-1
error Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).
Format the HD and reinstall the software (MU-16).

An error was found in the format of an image processing parameter file. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A-1

An error was found in the setting data in an image processing parameter file. Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4).
A-1

2800 Serial line test error When a line test was conducted, it was found that the character string I-8
transmitted was inconsistent with the character string received. Check the external device (LP).
Check the external device (LP) cable.
009-051-11
MT-89

[During initialization/normal processing] use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2801 Undefined/unexpected An undefined or unexpected command was received from the external device I-8
command received (LP). Check the external device (LP).

2802 No response from LP The external device (LP) did not respond to a transmission.
I-8
Check the external device (LP).

2803 LP receive command Although external device (LP) command parameter information was received, an I-8
parameter error error was found in the received text. Check the external device (LP).

2804 Old I/F 14" x 17"/B4 unit [During initialization/normal processing]
The film used in the external device (LP) could not be identified.
I-8
judgement error Check the external device (LP).

2805 HYPER-DRC+USM image Although image parameter data (MFP) was entered, an image process could not I-9
processing ignored be performed because the IMG08B/H board was not detected. Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).

2806 HYPER-USM image Although image parameter data (MFP) was entered, an image process could not I-9
processing ignored be performed because the IMG08B/H board was not detected. Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.7).
009-051-11
MT-90

2807 PEM image processing Although image parameter data (PEM) was entered, an image process could not
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: I-9
ignored be performed because the IMG08H board was not detected.

A request for 4-image output was issued in relation to B4 film. However, the
2808 Output warning 1 requested image will be converted to a single image and then generated after the
Design analysis error code I-6
output of all the other currently requested films.
In response to a request for 4-image output, the requested image is converted to

2809 Output warning 2 a single image and is now being generated.
280B No UID at time of DST output The UID corresponding to the number of frames was not found. Design analysis error code I-10
reservation designation
[During initialization immediately after software update]

The backup memory was cleared because the backup memory data was If this error frequently occurs, check the CPU90E board (it is
280C LIF backup memory clear changed by the software update. Or, the backup memory was cleared when conceivable that the backup memory battery may be -
initialization was effected immediately after the CPU90E board was replaced due exhausted).
to backup memory destruction.
The connected printer is applicable to 14" x 14" film only (including the cases
280D Printer connected only for where this action was taken because of degeneration). Film output cannot be Design analysis error code I-6
14x14 film achieved unless the connected printer is set for B4 film or 14" x 17" film.
0814.
I-7
(IMG08A board).
0815.
I-7
(IMG08A board).

0816.
I-7
error
009-051-11
MT-91
281B DSP11 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP11 device
081B.
I-7
(IMG08A board).
281C DSP11 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP11 device
081C.
I-7
(IMG08A board).
281D DSP11 image processing [During normal processing]

081D.
I-7
error
0822.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
0823.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

0824.
I-7
error
0829.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
282A DSP21 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP21 device
082A.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
282B DSP21 image processing [During normal processing]

082B.
I-7
error
009-051-11
MT-92
0830.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
0831.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).

0832.
I-7
error
0837.
I-7
(IMG08H board).
0838.
I-7
(IMG08H board).

0839.
I-7
error
283E DSP31 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP31 device
083E.
I-7
(IMG08H board).
283F DSP31 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP31 device
083F.
I-7
(IMG08H board).

0840.
I-7
error
009-051-11
MT-93
0845.
I-7
(IMG08H board).
0846.
I-7
(IMG08H board).

0847.
I-7
error
284C DSP23 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the DSP23 device
084C.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
284D DSP23 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the DSP23 device
084D.
I-7
(IMG08B/H board).
284E DSP23 image processing [During normal processing]

084E.
I-7
error
Design analysis error code.
2850 Failure to transfer image to An image was not successfully transferred to the external device (LP). Reoutput takes place after the generation of all the I-11
LP previously requested film outputs.

2912 Unexpected command An undefined command was received when the DMS line connection was G
received established. Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8).
Check the external device (DMS).
009-051-11
MT-94

An undefined command was received while an operation was stopped.
G
received Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8).

2940 SMCU transmission error A command was not successfully transmitted to the DMS while image output was E
in progress.

[During normal processing] use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2941 Receive line break detection A receive line break-ON signal was received while image output was in progress.
F

2942 Unexpected command [During normal processing]
An undefined command was received while image output was in progress.
G

2943 SMCU receive error A command was not successfully received from the DMS while image output was E
in progress.

2944 Image output terminated Because an image input termination notification was received from the DMS, the F
image output operation was aborted.

2945 Output interrupted by abort [During initialization/normal processing]
An image output operation was interrupted by an abort instruction.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: F
instruction Turn ON the power.
009-051-11
MT-95

2946 DSP application execution [During initialization/normal processing]
A timeout occurred when a DSP application was started.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: B
error Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.8).

2947 Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image transfer reservation response was awaited.

2948 Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image information transfer request was awaited.

2949 Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image data transfer standby response was awaited.

294A Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image data transfer completion report was awaited.
009-051-11
MT-96

294B Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image output completion response was awaited.

294C Image data output error An error was found in the image transfer completion status.

294D Image transfer not allowed The DMS refused to output an image.
d
[During normal processing] If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error,
294E High-resolution image cannot A high-resolution image could not be output because the DMS was in the
standard resolution mode. Therefore, the DMS stored image data at the
be outputted standard resolution. Check the external device (DMS).
294F Image cannot be outputted [During normal processing]

In use by another system. F
due to use by another system The DMS refused to output an image because it was used by another system.

2950 DSP application execution [During normal processing]
A warning was detected by a DSP application.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: E
009-051-11
MT-97

2960 SMCU transmission error A command was not successfully transmitted to the DMS.
E

2961 Receive line break detection A receive line break-ON signal was received.
F

2962 Unexpected command [During normal processing]
An undefined command was received.
G

2963 SMCU receive error A command was not successfully received from the DMS.
E

2964 Image data input error An image output termination notification was received from the DMS. Or, the Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). F
DMS issued an image output termination notification. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

2965 Input interrupted by abort [During normal processing]
An input operation was interrupted by an abort instruction from the MFC.
instruction Turn ON the power.
009-051-11
MT-98

2966 DSP application execution [During normal processing]
A timeout occurred when a DSP application was started.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: B

2967 Image data input error A timeout occurred when an image data transfer preparation request was Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). F
awaited. Check the MTH08A/D board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.2/MC-17.3).

2968 Image data input error A timeout occurred when image data output completion was awaited.

2969 Image data input error A timeout occurred when image information transmission was awaited.

296A Image data input error An error was found in an image data output completion notification.
009-051-11
MT-99

296B Image data input error A timeout occurred when an image input termination response was awaited.

296C Image data input error An error occurred in an input image size check that was conducted.

296D Image information FINP Although an illegal value was found in input data, an error was detected when an
F
conversion is improper attempt was made to replace the illegal value with a default one.

296E Failure in FINP information It was found that FINP information setting data was outside the acceptable
setting range.

296F Image data open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an image data file.
D
009-051-11
MT-100

2970 DSP application execution [During initialization/normal processing]
A warning was detected by a DSP application.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: E

[During initialization] use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2980 File setting value error An error occurred in a file setting check (siosetup.idt) that was conducted.
A-1

2991 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a log file.
A-1

2992 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write a log file.
A-1

2993 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a log file.
A-1

2994 SMCU error A DMC08A board error was detected.
E
[During initialization] If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
2A00 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a file. 0A00.
K-1
2A01 File format error A format error was found in a file that was read into the CPU memory (CPU90E
0A01.
K-1
board).
009-051-11
MT-101
[During initialization] If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
2A02 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in a file. 0A02.
K-1

2A10 Magnetic card reader The magnetic card reader was found to be inoperative although the employed K-2
inoperative equipment configuration permits the use of the magnetic card reader. Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
Check the magnetic card reader.
[During initialization/normal processing] If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error,
2A11 Menu selection method Although the routine menu display setup file was absent, the menu selection
method stored in the backup memory was inconsistently for routine menu
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: K-2
inconsistent selection. Check the HDD (MT-2.4.4/MC-14).

2A20 Patient information data error Improper data was set in the patient information sent from an online-connected Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). K-3
unit. Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
MC-17.11).
Check the external device (online-connected unit).

2A21 Undefined command An undefined or unimplemented command was received from the online- Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). K-4
received connected unit. Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
MC-17.11).

2A22 Unexpected command [During initialization/normal processing]

An unexpected command was received from an online-connected unit.
Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). K-4
received Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
MC-17.11).
009-051-11
MT-102

2A23 Serial line test error An error was detected when a serial line test was conducted in relation to an Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). K-2
online-connected unit. Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
MC-17.11).

2A24 No response from external A requested response to a command did not arrive within a predetermined period Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.4). K-4
unit of time when communication was conducted with an online-connected unit. Check the CPU90F/LAN90B board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10/
MC-17.11).

2A25 Patient information search A response indicating that the patient information was not found was received
error (not found) from a type B online-connected unit.

2A26 Patient information search A response indicating that a timeout occurred in the search for the patient
timeout information was received from a type B online-connected unit.

2A30 Patient information data error It was found that the patient information read by the magnetic card reader was
K-5
abnormal.
Check the magnetic card.

2A31 Card read error An error was detected when the magnetic card was read. Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.13).
K-6
Check the magnetic card.
009-051-11
MT-103

2A32 Card without relevant search It was found that the card read by the magnetic card reader did not contain user-
key data item specified search key data.
Check the magnetic card and selected search key type.

2A40 Barcode data error It was found that the data read by the barcode reader was abnormal.
K-2
Check the barcode reader (MC-8.8)
2B18 DSPH image processing [During normal processing]

A compression/decompression process error was detected.
0B18.
L-2
error

2B30 Compressed/decompressed A compression/decompression process came to an end although image data
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: L-1
image left was left to be compressed or decompressed.

2C40 Unexpected command [During normal processing]
An unexpected command was received.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: M-3
received Check the external device (online-connected unit).

2C41 Image transfer error An error was detected while image data was being transferred.
M-5
Since an error was found in the CPU90F board, the initialization process was If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error,
continuously performed with the board changed to the CPU90E board. use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2C42 Connection LAN type Although the CPU90E board was installed, the CPU90F board was selected in Check the CPU90F board (MT-2.4.3/MC-17.10).
M-6
changed to 90E accordance with the configuration setup. Therefore, the initialization Check the configuration settings (MU-7).
process was continuously performed with the board changed to the
CPU90E board.
009-051-11
MT-104

2CC0 Unexpected command [During normal processing]
An unexpected command was received.
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: M-3

2CD0 Unexpected command [During normal processing]
A 20 line/mm image input from an external device was rejected (FIN).
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: -

2D00 SCU-related information is It was found that there was no DICOM information for the local host (DICOM G-1
illegal Storage Service SCU). Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

2D02 SCP-related information is It was found that there was no DICOM information for the output destination host G-1
illegal (DICOM Storage Service SCP). Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

2D03 PRINT output not allowed It was found that the output destination attribute in the device information was G-1
PRINT only.

2D05 SOP class designation is It was found that the output destination host defined in the DICOM information
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide: G-1
illegal file did not agree with the DICOM soft key in SOP class designation.

[During initialization] use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2D06 Older version of HCP board It was found that the installed HCP08A board was an old version, which does not F+
support 11-bit output. Replace the HCP08A board with version G or later
(MC-17.9).
009-051-11
MT-104.1

2D41 Compressed
be accepted
image cannot [During normal processing]
The external device refused to receive the transmission of a compressed image.

2D43 HD full It was found that the HDD of the external device was full.
G-2

2D44 Improper DICOM setup The negotiation for association with the output destination failed.
G-2

2D45 Image
error
data transmission [During normal processing]
An error was detected in an image data transmission.

2D50 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a file.
A

2D51 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write a subsystem file A
(DOT).

2D52 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a subsystem file A
(DOT).
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710
CR-IR341 Service Manual [ 2.2 ] MT-104.1
MT-104.2
[During software update]

User setup standard gamma The MPM code for user setup standard gamma parameter data coincidence did
3080 parameter resetting not exist. Therefore, the user setup standard gamma parameter data was
Design analysis error code A-7
replaced with the standard parameter data having a different MPM code.
30A0 LAN analysis information An error was found in a LAN task (main side or LAN side). Design analysis error code E-1++
30C0 Setup function error An error was found in the setup for SMCU. Design analysis error code A+
30C1 Break reset error A break reset error was detected. Design analysis error code A+
30C2 Break setup error A break setup error was detected. Design analysis error code A+
30C3 Send error An error was found in a transmission process. Design analysis error code A+
30C4 Receive error An error was found in a reception process. Design analysis error code A+
3717 SMCU transmission error A command transmission error was found at a device driver (SMCU). Design analysis error code E
3718 Receive line break detection A receive line break-ON signal was received. Design analysis error code F
3719 Serial line test error A timeout occurred when a control line test response was awaited. Design analysis error code F
A timeout occurred when an operation permission command response was

371A Serial line test error awaited.
Design analysis error code F
371B SMCU transmission error A timeout occurred when a data block transfer response was awaited. Design analysis error code F
3728 Network reception error Data reception over the network failed. Design analysis error code H
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710
MT-104.3
A timeout occurred when an ID deletion response to the network IDT

Error detection during ID was awaited.
3729 delete response wait An error was detected in the content of the data received from the
Design analysis error code H
network IDT.
Although an ID acquisition request was issued to the network IDT, a transmission

372B Network transmission error completion notification error was detected.
Although an ID deletion request was issued to the network IDT, a transmission

372C Network transmission error completion notification error was detected.
Although IDT utility information was transmitted to the network IDT, a

372D Network transmission error transmission completion notification error was detected.
An error was found in a setting (SIOSETUP.IDT) contained in a subsystem file

3751 File setting value error (IIF).
Design analysis error code A-1
3800 Receive line break detection A receive line break was detected. Design analysis error code I-6
3801 LP status error A line error was found in an external device (LP). Design analysis error code I-6
3802 LP level 0 error The system of an external device (LP) was found to be down. Design analysis error code I-6
3803 LP error recovery failure An external device (LP) failed in its attempt to achieve error recovery. Design analysis error code I-6
3804 Character
error
string transmission Although a character string was transmitted to an external device (LP), a
transmission completion error was detected.
3805 No FINP ID ID information (Finp) was not found. Design analysis error code I-12
3806 Board insertion error The IMG08M board (for 5000MA) was installed in the machine. Design analysis error code -
[While the line was established]

3910 SMCU transmission error An error was found in a command transmission to the DMS.
Design analysis error code E
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710
MT-104.4

[During an idle state]

3920 SMCU transmission error An error was found in an SMCU transmission.


3A50 Transmission
layer error
line data-link [During initialization/normal processing]
An abnormal termination occurred while a message was being transmitted.
Design analysis error code K-6
3A51 Receive
detection
line break-ON [During initialization/normal processing]
A receive line break was detected.
Design analysis error code K-2
3C60 Socket
error
acquisition function An error was found in the socket acquisition function (js_socket). Design analysis error code M-4
3C61 Connect function error An error was found in the connect function (js_connect). Design analysis error code M-4
3C62 BIND function error An error was found in the BIND function (js_bind). Design analysis error code M-4
3C63 LISTEN function error An error was found in the LISTEN function (js_listen). Design analysis error code M-4
3C64 ACCEPT function error An error was found in the ACCEPT function (js_accept). Design analysis error code M-4
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710
MT-104.5
3C65 Connect error An error was found in a request for control line connection. Design analysis error code M-3
3C66 Transmission
error
completion An error was found in a transmission of the FINP command. Design analysis error code M-3
3C67 Reception completion error An error was found in a data reception from an external device. Design analysis error code M-3
The socket number acquired with the socket acquisition function (js_socket) was
3C68 Socket number zero zero.
Design analysis error code -
3C69 Not transferable to

transmission task
A message could not be transferred to a transmission task due to an illegal socket
number.
3C6A Error on the receiving end An error occurred in an external device. Design analysis error code M-3
3C70 LAN initialization timeout The CPU90F/LAN90B board did not respond. Design analysis error code -
A PC board program could not be loaded from the CPU90E board because the
3C71 LAN board initialization error CPU90F/LAN90B board did not start up.
Design analysis error code M-4
3CE0 Socket
error
acquisition function An error was found in the socket acquisition function (js_socket). Design analysis error code M-4
3CE1 Connect function error An error was found in the connect function (js_connect). Design analysis error code M-4
3CE2 BIND function error An error was found in the BIND function (js_bind). Design analysis error code M-4
3CE3 LISTEN function error An error was found in the LISTEN function (js_listen). Design analysis error code M-4
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710
MT-104.6
3CE4 ACCEPT function error An error was found in the ACCEPT function (js_accept). Design analysis error code M-4
3CE5 Connect error An error was found in a request for data line connection. Design analysis error code M-3
3CE6 Transmission
error
completion An error was found in a transmission of the FINP command. Design analysis error code M-3
3CE7 Reception completion error An error was found in a data reception from an external device. Design analysis error code M-3
The socket number acquired with the socket acquisition function (js_socket) was
3CE8 Socket number zero zero.
3CE9 Not
task
transferable to reception A message could not be transferred to a reception task due to an illegal socket
number.
In a multi-frame image reception sequence, more than 90 seconds elapsed

3CEA Multi-frame timeout between the reception of the data of a frame and the reception of the data of the Design analysis error code M-3
next frame.
The reception process came to an end although the image data to be received
3CEB All image data not received was not completely received for all sizes.
Design analysis error code M-3

3D40 Line error A network line error was detected.
Design analysis error code G-2
009-051-11
08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 105
BLANK PAGE

05.30.2002 FM3405
MT-106
2.3 Format of Detail Information
Description of Each Parameter
Type Format
Form Notation Name Significance/DescriptionType
A AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DDDD Character string of variable length
BBBBBBBB File name
(up to 8 characters)
Character string of fixed length (3
CCC Extension Blank if there is no extension.
characters)
DDDD Four decimal digits Line number "_ _ _ _" is used if line number cannot be obtained as with a binary file.
A+ AAAA.BBB.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBB Three-digit character string Subsystem name Requesting subsystem
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Error status Return value from a driver (for analysis)
A-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB File name
characters)
A-1+ AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of variable length
BBBBBBBB File name
characters)
A-2 AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DD.EEEE.FF___FF
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits FINP group number (For analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number (For analysis)
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits FINP data length (For analysis)
Character string of "_ _ _ _" is used if there is no FCR image ID.
EEEE FCR image ID
fixed length (4 characters) "_ _" is used if the data length is 0.
Hexadecimal dump of variable
FF___FF Original data Blank if there is no extension (for analysis)
length
009-051-10
MT-107
Type Format
DD.EEEE.FFFF.GGGG.
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits FINP group number (For analysis)
HHHH.IIII.JJJJJJJJJJ.K
KKKKKKKKK CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number (For analysis)
Coordinate point count "_ _ _ _" when no coordinate point exists or no abnormality exists
EEEE Four hexadecimal digits
(left) (for analysis).
Coordinate point count "_ _ _ _" when no coordinate point exists or no abnormality exists
FFFF Four hexadecimal digits
(right) (for analysis).
"_ _ _ _" when the unsharp mask value (left) does not exist or no
GGGG Four hexadecimal digits Unsharp mask value (left)
abnormality exists.
Unsharp mask value "_ _ _ _" when the unsharp mask value (right) does not exist or no
HHHH Four hexadecimal digits
(right) abnormality exists.
IIII FCR image ID "_ _ _ _" when the FCR image ID does not exists.
characters)
Character string of fixed length
JJJJJJJJJJ Patient ID "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _" when the patient ID does not exist.
(10 characters)
Character string of fixed length "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _" when YYYY.MM.DD does not exist or cannot be
KKKKKKKKKK Exposure date
(10 characters) acquired.
DD.EEEE.FFFFFFFFFF BBBB Four hexadecimal digits FINP group number (For analysis)
FFFFFF.GGGGGGGGG
G.HH___HH CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number (For analysis)
EEEE FCR image ID "_ _ _ _" when the FCR image ID does not exist or cannot be acquired.
characters)
Character string of fixed
length (16 characters) "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _"when the patient ID does not exist or cannot be
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Patient ID
NOTE) 10 characters acquired.
for A07 or earlier
Character string of fixed length "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _" when YYYY.MM.DD does not exist or cannot be
GGGGGGGGGG Exposure date
(10 characters) acquired.
HH___HH Original data Original data "_ _" is used if the data length is 0. (for analysis)
length
A-5 AAAA.BBBB.CC___CC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Data start position (For analysis)
CC___CC Original data _ _ is used if the data length is 0. (for analysis)
length
009-051-10
MT-108
Type Format
A-6 AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCC.DDDDDDDDDD.E Character string of
EEE.FF___FF BBBB FCR image ID "_ _ _ _" if an unsharp mask value does not exist or is normal.
fixed length (4 characters)
Character string of
CCCCCCCCCC Patient ID "_ _ _ _" if an unsharp mask value does not exist or is normal.
Character string of
DDDDDDDDDD Exposure date YYYY.MM.DD "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _" if an exposure date does not exist.
EEEE Four hexadecimal digits Data start position (For analysis)
Hexadecimal dump
FF___FF Original data "_ _" is used if the data length is 0. (for analysis)
of variable length
A-7 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits MPM code
A-8 AAAA.B AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Slot number (For analysis)
B AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DD.EEEEEE.FFFFFF.G
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number
GGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII.JJ
JJJJ.KKKKKK Function or end-of-
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
message status
DDDDDD___KKKKKK Hexadecimal DSP detail code (For analysis)
B+ AAAA.BBBBBBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of Error detection function
BBBBBBBB
variable length name
C AAAA.B.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B Hexadecimal DMA channel number (For analysis)
Function or end-of-
message status
C+ AAAA.BB___BB.CC___ AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CC Information on error
BB___BB Character string of variable length (For analysis)
detection task, etc.
CC___CC Character string of variable length Error ISC message (For analysis)
D AAAA.BBBB.CC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code

BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID Unique number for image control purposes.
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor (For analysis)
009-051-10
MT-109
Type Format
D-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB File name
length (3 characters)
DDDD Four decimal digits Line number _ _ _ _ is used if line number cannot be obtained
D-2 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
D-3 AAAA.BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BB Two hexadecimal digits Status
D-4 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID Unique number for image control purposes.
D-5 AAAA.BB___BB.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCCC.D.E.F.G.H.I.J.KK
Assigned in alphabetical order, starting with SA1.
KK.LLLL.MMMM
Sensor status For the number of each sensor,
BB___BB
(37 locations) see "2.3.1 Supplementary Explanation of Detail Information."
0: OPEN 1: CLOSE
CCCCCCCC Eight decimal digits Barcode
D One decimal digit Shelf position 1: Top stage, 2: Second stage, 3: Third stage, 4: Bottom stage
1: H (35*43)
2: DK (35*35)
3: 4 (10*12)
4: 6 (8*10)
E One decimal digit IP size
5: 18*24ST
6: 24*30ST
7: 18*24 HR
8: 24*30 HR
0: No limitation
13: Used with CR-IR342
4: X-ray dosage (ST 0-85 mR) (HR 0-1700 mR)
Erasure speed table 6: X-ray dosage (ST 120-200 mR) (HR 2400-4000 mR)
F One hexadecimal digit
number 7: X-ray dosage (ST 200-250 mR) (HR 4000-5000 mR)
A: X-ray dosage (ST 350-400 mR) (HR 7000-8000 mR)
B: X-ray dosage (ST 400 mR -) (HR 8000 mR -)
009-051-10
MT-110
Type Format
D-5 AAAA.BB___BB.CCCC Number is assigned in alphabetical order, starting with MA1.
CCCC.D.E.F.G.H.I.J.KK G One hexadecimal digit Failed motor number For the number of each motor, see "2.3.1 Supplementary Explanation of
KK.LLLL.MMMM Detail Information."
H One hexadecimal digit Failed motor number
I One hexadecimal digit Failed motor number
0: Secondary erasure conveyance speed
1: Ce-based ST conveyance speed
Subscanning mode
J One hexadecimal digit 2: Ce-based HR conveyance speed
number
3: Eu-based ST conveyance speed
4: Eu-based HR conveyance speed
Driving shaft grip
KKKK Four decimal digits
operation time
Driven shaft grip release
LLLL Four decimal digits
operation time
Subscanning motor failure
MMMM Four decimal digits Timing from the start of reading to the occurrence of failure (in 10 msec).
timing
d AAAA.BCD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Film output unit status
Temporary storage device
C One hexadecimal digit
status
Permanent storage device
D One hexadecimal digit
status
DST-1 AAAA.B.C.DDDD.EEEE. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
FFFF.GGGG B One hexadecimal digit Image UID
C One hexadecimal digit Number of image UIDs
Image UID(for the number
DDDD___GGGG Four hexadecimal digits
of image UIDs)
E AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
End status for function or
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
message
E-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB File name
characters)
009-051-10
MT-111
Type Format
E-1+ AAAA.B.C.DDDD.EEEE. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
FFFF.GGGG Output information ID
B One hexadecimal digit
number
C One hexadecimal digit Number of image UIDs
Image UIDs (for all image
DDDD___GGGG Four hexadecimal digits
UIDs)
E-1++ AAAA.BBB.CCCCCCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
.DDDDDDDD.EEEEEEE Character string of
E.FFFFFFFF BBB Subsystem name Command-requesting subsystem
Character string of
CCCCCCCC Command name Requested command (for analysis)
DDDDDDDD Eight hexadecimal digits Error detail code (For analysis)
(For analysis)
EEEEEEEE Eight hexadecimal digits Socket number
Task ID for a DICOM process.
FFFFFFFF Eight hexadecimal digits Analysis error code OS error code or DICOM common software error code (for analysis)
E-2 AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DD.EEEEEE.FFFFFF.G
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number
GGGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII.
JJJJJJ.KKKKKK CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status (For analysis)
DDDDDD___KKKKKK Six hexadecimal digits DSP internal detail code "_ _ _ _" is used if it cannot be obtained. (for analysis)
E-3 AAAA.BB.CC.DDDD.E.F AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
.G
BB Two hexadecimal digits Scanner status port 1 (For analysis)
CC Two hexadecimal digits Scanner status port 2 (For analysis)
The time from the start of reading (leading-edge
DDDD Four decimal digits Error detection timing detection) to the detection of error, measured
in 10 msec. If it cannot be obtained, "_ _ _ _" is used.
E One hexadecimal digit SD3 sensor status _ is used when it cannot be obtained.
Character of fixed
F Reading mode G: ST R: HR _: Used when it cannot be obtained.
length (one character)
G One hexadecimal digit IP size _ is used when it cannot be obtained.
E-4 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
E-5 AAAA.B.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit DMA channel number (For analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status (For analysis)
009-051-10
MT-112
Type Format
E-6 AAAA.BBBB.CC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor (For analysis)
E-7 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
C
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Socket number (For analysis)
E-8 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Menu code
E-9 AAAA.BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
__BB_A08____
BB Two hexadecimal digits Dosage (AD value)
e-1 AAAA.BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BB Two hexadecimal digits Service number (For analysis)
e-2 AAAA.BB.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Image UID Failed image UID
e-3 AAAA.BB.CC.DDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CC Two hexadecimal digits Amount of shared memory Amount of shared memory installed (MWord)
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits Option Request option value (for analysis)
e-4 AAAA.BB.C AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
C One hexadecimal digit Internal error code (For analysis)
009-051-10
MT-113
Type Format
e-5 AAAA.BBB.CCCC.DDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
D.EEEE.FF___FF.GG__ Character string of fixed
_GG.HHHH BBB Request subsystem
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
Hard disk drive restart
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits
count
Hard disk drive restart
EEEE Four hexadecimal digits
count per image
FF___FF SCSI task condition (For analysis)
GG___GG IMM I/O task condition (For analysis)
Number of requests to
HHHH Four hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
IMM I/O task
e-6 AAAA.BB___BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Error event function
BB___BB Character string of variable length name/trace information, (For analysis)
etc.
F AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
F+ AAAA.BBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of variable length
BBB Receive command
G AAAA.BBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Two hexadecimal digits or
BBB Character string of variable length Receive command (For analysis)
G-1 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
G-2 AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
C.DDDDDDDD.EEEEEE
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status
EE
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
DICOM common software
DDDDDDDD Eight hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
execution result
Execution result for Base
EEEEEEEE Eight hexadecimal digits on DICOM common (For analysis)
software
009-051-10
MT-114
Type Format
H AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
C "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _" is used when the destination IP
address cannot be obtained.
Socket number or
command number
I AAAA.BBBBBBBBBBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
.CCCC Character string of variable length
BBBBBBBBBBBB File name
CCCC Four decimal digits Digit number "____" in the event of an OPEN error
I-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB File name
"_ _ _ _" is used if line number cannot be obtained
DDDD Four decimal digits Line number
as with a binary file.
I-2 AAAA.BBBB.CC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CC Two hexadecimal digits File discripter (For analysis)
I-3 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Format number (For analysis)
009-051-10
MT-115
Type Format
I-4 AAAA.BBBBBB.CC.DD. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
EE.FF.GG.HH.II.JJ.KK.L
LLL.MMMMM.NN.OO B One or zero hexadecimal digits Error description 1: Search format error
B One or zero hexadecimal digits Error description 2: B4 format search failure
B One or zero hexadecimal digits Error description 3: 14"x17" format search failure
B One or zero hexadecimal digits Error description 4: Image number search failure
00: B4 film 01: 14" x 17" film

CC Two hexadecimal digits Film used
02: 14"x14" film 05: 8"x10" film
01: Standard density 10" x 8 11: High density 10" x 8

02: Standard density 10" x 12 12: High density 10" x 12"
03: Standard density 14" x 14" 13: High density 14" x 14"
05: Standard density 502 8" x 10" 15: High density 502 8" x 10"
06: Standard density 9.5" x 9.5" 16: High density 9.5" x 9.5"
DD Two hexadecimal digits Read size code 08: Standard density 17" x 17" 18: High density 17" x 17"
09: Standard density 18cm x 43cm 19: High density 18cm x 43cm
0A: Standard density 24cm x 18cm 1A: High density 24cm x 18cm
0B: Standard density 24cm x 30cm 1B: High density 24cm x 30cm
0C: Standard density 35cm x 35cm 1C: High density 35cm x 35cm
0D: Standard density 35cm x 43cm 1D: High density 35cm x 43cm
0E: Standard density 30cm x 15cm 1E: High density 30cm x 15cm
0F: Standard density 24cm x 24cm 1F: High density 24cm x 24cm
009-051-10
MT-116
Type Format
I-4 AAAA.BBBBBB.CC.DD. 00: 90-degree rotation OFF
EE.FF.GG.HH.II.JJ.KK.L EE Two hexadecimal digits 90-degree rotation flag
01: 90-degree rotation ON
LLL.MMMMM.NN.OO 00: S (one-image output)
01: LR (simultaneous output of left and right of one image)
02: L-R (individual output of left or right of one image)
FF Two hexadecimal digits Film format
03: AB (two-image output, with different size or different image number)
04: SS (two-image output, with same size and same image number)
05: ABCD (four-image)
00: No location change
01: Changed (correspond to FC1 of FilmFmt.Cfg)
Film character location
GG Two hexadecimal digits 03: Changed (correspond to FC3 of FilmFmt.Cfg)
change
HH Two hexadecimal digits Area type 00: Image area 01: Film character area
00: Image area 0 (first frame)

01: Image area 1 (second frame)
02: Image area 2 (third frame)
03: Image area 3 (fourth frame)
10: Character area 0-0 (top of first frame)
11: Character area 0-1 (bottom of first frame)
II Two hexadecimal digits Area number
12: Character area 1-0 (top of second frame)
13: Character area 1-1 (bottom of second frame)
14: Character area 2-0 (top of third frame)
15: Character area 2-1 (bottom of third frame)
16: Character area 3-0 (top of fourth frame)
17: Character area 3-1 (bottom of fourth frame)
JJ Two hexadecimal digits 180-degree rotation flag 00: 180-degree rotation OFF 01: 180-degree rotation ON
00: S (one-image output)
01: LR (simultaneous output of left and right of one image)
02: L-R (individual output of left or right of one image)
KK Two hexadecimal digits LR flag 03: AB (two-image output, with different size or different image number)
04: SS (two-image output, with same size and same image number)
05: ABCD (four-image) For LR, a detail determination is made to
discriminate between LR and L-R.
009-051-10
MT-117
Type Format
I-4 AAAA.BBBBBB.CC.DD. Below 0FFF: B4 format
EE.FF.GG.HH.II.JJ.KK.L Format management 1000_1FFF: 14"x17" format
LLL.MMMMM.NN.OO LLLL Four hexadecimal digits
number 2000_2FFF: 14"x14" format
5000_5FFF: 8"x10" format
First digit: Film used

0: B4/1: 14"x17"/2: 14"x14"/5: 8"x10"
Second digit: Reading image size code
Same as the reading size code for DD
Third digit: 90-degree rotation designation
0: 90-degree rotation OFF/
90-degree rotation ON
Fourth digit: Search format
MMMMM Character string of 5 digits Format search code 0: S image character, AB character
1: LR/L_R/SS image character,
AB image
2: Different-size 1843 AB image character
4: 14"x17" or 8"x10", with ABCD image character
5: Other than 14"x17" or 8"x10", with ABCD image character
6: 100% magnification 18cm-x-24cm AB image character
Fifth digit: Film background
0: Transparent/1: Black
00: One-image normal for B4/8"x10" film

01: Two-image normal for B4
02: One-image 8"x10" landscape for B4/8"x10" film
03: Two-image pantomo for B4
05: Character position change for B4 film
06: Different-size 1843 AB for B4
07: Two-image special for B4 film
NN Two hexadecimal digits Format classification code 10: One-image normal for 14"x17"/14"x14" film
11: Two-image normal for 14"x17"
12: One-image 8"x10" landscape for 14"x17"
13: Two-image pantomo for 14"x17"
14: Four-image for 14"x17"
15: Film character position change for 14"x17"/14"x14"/8"x10"
16: Different-size 1843 AB for 14"x17"
17: Two-image special for 14"x17"
For B4/14"x14"/8"x10" film

Image number 01_08
OO Two hexadecimal digits (Detail number within For 14"x17" film
format classification code) 01_08: 14"x17" area is used.
08_10: B4 area is used.
009-051-10
MT-118
Type Format
I-5 AAAA.B.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Channel number (For analysis)
I-6 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
I-7 AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DD.EEEEEE.FFFFFF.G
10: DSP10/11: DSP11/20: DSP20
GGGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII.
21: DSP21/22: DSP22/23: DSP23
JJJJJJ.KKKKKK BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number
30: DSP30/31: DSP31/32: DSP32
33: DSP33
DDDDDD Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
EEEEEE Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
FFFFFF Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
GGGGGG Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
HHHHHH Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
IIIIII Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
JJJJJJ Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
KKKKKK Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
I-8 AAAA.BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BB Two hexadecimal digits SMCU receive command (For analysis)
I-9 AAAA.BBBB.C.D AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
C One hexadecimal digit Film used face number 0: One face, 1: Two faces (for analysis)
D One hexadecimal digit Used frame number 0: First frame 1: Second frame 2: Third frame 4: Fourth frame
I-10 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Number of frames
I-11 AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCC.DDD___DDD
BBBB Character string of four digits Image UID
CCCCCCCCCC Character string of 10 digits Barcode number
64-digit character string
DDD___DDD NOTE) 10 digits for A07 or Patient ID number
earlier
009-051-10
MT-119
Type Format
I-12 AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DD.E.F
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP group number (For analysis)
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number (For analysis)
E One hexadecimal digit Film used face number 0: One face, 1: Two faces (for analysis)
F One hexadecimal digit Used frame number 0: First frame 1: Second frame 2: Third frame 4: Fourth frame
I-13 AAAA.B.CCCCCCCCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCCCCC
B One decimal digit NG film size 0: B4; 1: 14" x 17"; 2: 14" x 14"; 3: 8" x 10"
Area available
CCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Sixteen hexadecimal digits for LP configuration Available recording area: 2 digits x 8 (for analysis)
CC
information recording
J AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCCCC
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits Barcode
J+ AAAA.BB__BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of variable length KEY name in
BB__BB
(up to 8 characters) Configuration Setting
K-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB File name
K-2 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
K-3 AAAA.B.C AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Receive command (For analysis)
C One hexadecimal digit Item number (For analysis)
K-4 AAAA.B AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Receive command (For analysis)
K-5 AAAA.B AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Item number (For analysis)
009-051-10
MT-120
Type Format
K-6 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits End status (For analysis)
K-7 AAAA.BBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
0001: Patient ID number 0002: Receipt number
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Search key type
0003: Examination number
K-8 AAAA.BBBBBBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status LAN task detail code (for analysis)
K-9 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCCCC
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status LAN task detail code (for analysis)
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits LAN task error code (For analysis)
L-1 AAAA.BBBB.CC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID UID of image data to be opened, written, or read
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor File descriptor when the image data is opened
L-2 AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DD.EEEEEE
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number DSP number (0H) for HCP
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Status End status for function or message (for analysis)
"_ _ _ _ _ _" is used if detail information internal to
DDDDDD___KKKKKK Six hexadecimal digits DSP detail information
DSP cannot be obtained or if there is no meaning (for analysis).
L-3 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
DDDD
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits File name dsphm1j
CCC Three hexadecimal digits Extension s24
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits Line number "_ _ _ _ "
L-4 AAAA.B.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Channel number Channel number used for DMA transfer (for analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status End status for function or message (for analysis)
M-1 AAAA.B.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
B One hexadecimal digit Channel number Channel number used for DMA transfer (for analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status End status for function or message (for analysis)
009-051-10
MT-121
Type Format
M-2 AAAA.BBBB.CC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID UID for image data to be opened, written, or read
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor File descriptor when the image data is opened (for analysis).
M-3 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
C
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address IP address of the device connected to the machine over the network
Socket number or command number obtained when a connection request
Socket number or
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits is made. "_ _ _ _" is used when there is no meaning
command number
(for analysis).
M-4 AAAA.BBBBBBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status (For analysis)
M-5 AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCC.DDD___DDD.EEE
BBBB Character string of 4 digits FCR image ID
EEEE
CCCCCCCCCC Character string of 10 digits Barcode number
64-digit character string
DDD___DDD NOTE) 10 digits for A07 or Patient ID
earlier
EEEEEEEE Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address IP address of the device connected to the machine over the network
M-6 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
N-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
N-2 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
CCCCC
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits Error number (For analysis)
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Socket number (For analysis)
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Command number (For analysis)
O AAAA.BB___BB.CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of
BB___BB File name
variable length
CCCC Four decimal digits Line number "_ _ _ _" if a line number does not exist.
009-051-10
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 122
2.3.1 Supplementary Explanation of Detail Information
Sensor Number Correspondence Table (Applicable to Type: D-5, Format Symbol B)
No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name
1 SA1 6 SA6 11 SA11 16 SA16 21 SB4 26 SD2 31 SF3 36 FFM
2 SA2 7 SA7 12 SA12 17 SA17 22 SB5 27 SD3 32 SF4 37 SZ1
3 SA3 8 SA8 13 SA13 18 SB1 23 SC1 28 SE1 33 SZ2
4 SA4 9 SA9 14 SA14 19 SB2 24 SC2 29 SF1 34 SZ3
5 SA5 10 SA10 15 SA15 20 SB3 25 SD1 30 SF2 35* SZ4
NOTE: 35* SZ4 is not used with the CR-IR341. The sensor information always reads 0 (OPEN). TR1H1300.EPS
Motor Number Correspondence Table (Applicable to Type: D-5, Format Symbols G, H, and I)
No. Motor name No. Motor name
0 MB1 5 MD2
1 MB2 6 MD3
2 MB3 7 ME1
3 MC1 8 ME2
4 MD1 9 MF1
TR1H1301.EPS

05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 123
2.3.2 Format of Abort Code

If any trouble occurs on the machine with an abort message displayed on the machines display panel, take remedial action in accordance with
the following procedures.
Example of Abort Message
Abort message Abort code Significance Probable cause

CDM:CdmInit:Could not allocate
memory for config data. 02120000 Failure to reserve the machine configuration area Insufficient main memory
matrix_select:Undefined event Matrix
=AAAAAAAA EVENT=BBBBBBBB 02010001 Undefined event received Illegal function call
"Memory overflow." 05050001 Failure to reserve memory Insufficient main memory
TR1H1302.EPS
Remedy
(1) Write down the top three liens of the message displayed, and notify them to the Service Headquarters.
(2) Reset the machine.

05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 124
2.3.3 Priority Checks to Be Conducted upon Trouble Occurrence
If an error (trouble) occurs, perform checks as indicated in the following table before
proceeding to perform specified troubleshooting procedures.
Troubles/Phenomena and Priority Checkpoints (1/4)
Priority checkpoints
Troubles Associated parts
Connectors Others
Not powered up (not activated by switches; no Power supply Power supply unit (JPS-1)
LED08A: CN2
lamp illumination or operation) (located on the left-hand side): CN4 LED08A board
MTH08A: CN22, CN25 MTH08A board
Stopped with "Could not initialize SCSI device" MTH08A: NFB4/F4, NFB5/F5
MTH08D: CN22, CN23 MTH08D board
displayed MTH08D: F5, F6
HDD: CNJ1, CNJ2 HDD
MTH08A: CN22, CN25, TB1
MTH08A board
MTH08D: CN22, CN23, TB1 MTH08A: NFB1/F1, NFB4/F4,
Stopped with "Attaching to <SCSI> device. . . " MTH08D board
displayed HDD: CNJ1, CNJ2 NFB5/F5
Power supply HDD
MTH08D: F1, F5, F6
(located on the right-hand side): TB2 Power supply unit (JPS-1)
Stopped with "Attaching to <SCSI> device. . ." MTH08A (MMA90A): CN17, CN18 MTH08A board
Can't mount the volume"0x1ff8ec4(tBoot): MTH08D (DIM08A): CN17 MTH08D board
mempartFree" displayed HDD: CNJ1, CNJ2 HDD
CPU90E: CN1, CN2
Stopped with "Attaching to DMA device. . . done" MTH08A: TB1 CPU90E board
"Attaching to FloppyDisc device. . . done" MTH08A board
MTH08D: TB1
"Attaching to SCSI device. . . done" displayed Power supply MTH08D board
(located on the right-hand side): TB2 Power supply unit (JPS-1)
SNS08A: CN4
CPU90E: CN1, CN2 SNS08A board
MTH08A: TB1 CPU90E board
SNS08A: NFB1/F1 MTH08A board
Stopped with "VxWorks version " displayed MTH08D: TB1
Power supply fuse: F13 MTH08D board
HDD: CNJ1, CNJ2
Power supply (located on the right- HDD
hand side): TB2, DCOUT2 Power supply unit (JPS-1)
MTH08A: CN19, CN20
SNS08A: CN7, CN9 MTH08A board
MTH08A: NFB1/F1 MTH08D board
SNS08A: CN1
Bus error MTH08D: F1 SCN08A board
Power supply (located on the right-
Power supply fuse: F1 SNS08A board
hand side): DCOUT6
Power supply unit (JPS-1)
CPU90E (VGA90E): CN7, CN19
Monitor: CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4 CPU90E board
Flickering monitor screen. VOL08A: CN2 Monitor fuse: F1 Monitor
Power supply (located on the right- VOL08A board
hand side): DCOUT1 Power supply unit (JPS-1)
CPU90E (VGA90E): CN7, CN19 CPU90E board
Monitor: CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4 Monitor
Nothing displayed on the monitor screen. LED08A: CN3 Monitor fuse: F1 LED08A board
Power supply (located on the right- VOL08A board
hand side): DCOUT1 Power supply unit (JPS-1)
CPU90E: CN6 CPU90E board
Stopped with "STEP99" displayed Power supply (located on the left- Power supply unit (JPS-1)
hand side): CN3 (Clear the backup memory.)
SCN08A board
Stopped with "STEP95" displayed SCN08A: CN1CN9 CPU90F board
LAN90B board
Stopped with "STEP90" displayed (Clear the backup memory.)
SNS08A board
MTH08A: CN20 SCN08A board
Stopped with "STEP80" displayed MTH08D: CN20 SNS08A: NFB2/F2 MTH08A board
SCN08A: CN7 MTH08D board
(Clear the backup memory.)
TR1H1304.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 125
Connectors Others
CPU90F board
Stopped with "STEP70" displayed
LAN90B board
CPU90F board
Stopped with "STEP40" displayed LAN90B board
(Initialize the HDD image area.)
Stopped with "STEP5" displayed (Clear the backup memory.)
**ERROR CODE:ffffff02**
**BUS ERROR**
task name = tJNL
d0=010825ff d1=00082714 d2=01082548 d3=ffffff02
d4=00000009 d5=01f258cc d6=01b17a22 d7=00000000
a0=ec000301 a1=0000000a a2=00000002 a3=00002400
a4=01a7c254 a5=01a87078 a6=01a86fb4 a7=01a86f6c
sr= 27000 pc=01014cd4
stack Stored as trace data.
+00:A75 01a87030 01028b16 00000002 (core.dmp) SCN08A board
+10:01a86fc0 010282ae 0103a1c8 01a872d8
+20:01a852db 00000000 00000000 00000000
++30:01a872d8 01a86fb8 01035772 01a87404
Program Counter:01014a3c(_sysAbort + 2a4)
Access address:ec000301
_exceptionHdr(1a872d8,2,1a87078,78,1e,20,3c)
_excExcHandle(2,1a87078,1a87030,3c,10010f0,78,1e)
_excStub(1a7c254,400,1e1b250,1e,1a9ec58,1ee7d10,1c4898c)
**ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION**
task name = tRestart
d0=00000000 d1=00000000 d2=01fd3188 d3=00000000
d4=00000000 d5=00000000 d6=00000000 d7=00000000
a0=00000000 a1=00000000 a2=015aa014 a3=010979e0 Stored as trace data.
a4=00000000 a5=0109d944 a6=01fd3170 a7=01fd3160 (core.dmp) CPU90E board
sr= 2000 pc=01c974bc
stack
+00:0104778 00000000 00000000 015aa014
+10:01fd3188 01c974bc 03010001 01c9741c
+20:00000000 00000000 01fd31c4 01c9741c
+30:01fd31f4 015aa014 01038e20 0102ad96
**ERROR CODE:02110009**
**IMM:ImmInit fails in check of the shared memory.**
task name = tMFC
d0=00000000 d1=00000000 d2=00000000 d3=01eda234
d4=01c339d4 a5=01c3377c a6=01a44800 a7=01a44800 MTH08A
sr= 3000 pc=01a81446 (MMC90A):
stack CN17, CN18 Stored as trace data. MMC90A board
+00:01a44860 01a81446 02110009 01a862d5 (core.dmp) MTH08A board
+10:01c14c34 01eda234 01c339d4 01f1de7c MTH08D MTH08D board
+30:07000000 01a4484c 01a4994c 0130cb88 (DIM08A):
CN17
_ImmInit(70000000,14,1b95c4d,5,1a448e2,1a448f4,1b96466)
_PowerOff(1c14c34,3c,1a4497c,1c339d4,1a448d2,1a449aa,20)
_sed_debug(1eda234,1a449aa,1f1de7c,1c339d4,0,0,0)
_sedISC(1c339d4,0,0,105c7c6,0,0,0)
**ERROR CODE:05020003** MTH08A board
**PNL:VCWindow ERROR** MTH08D board
task name = tPNL HDD
**BUS ERROR**
task name = tHCP HCP08A board
0100d974(dspDevCreate+a2a) e5000000
CPU90F board
**BUS ERROR**
LAN90B board
task name = tilmain
HDD
01c07402(cmd enter+306) bf4cf55c
TR1H1305.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 126
Connectors Others
Cassette set unit:
Cassette shelf error (13A3)
SA3, 7, 11, 15, SOLA14
Defective shelf DRV08A: CN4
(shelf 1 2 3 4 03A3) Power supply fuse: F10
Cassette set unit:CNA3
SCN08A: CN13
Power supply (located on the left-hand
Erasure lamp error (13AA) side): CN5
Power supply (located on the right-hand
side): ACOUT1, 2, DCOUT4
Serious error 03C8 Subscanning unit: CN8, CN9
Fans (FANG1-FANG3) not rotating. DRV08A: CN16
03BC Side-positioning conveyor: SD1, CNMD1
DRV08A: CN1, CN12
SNS08A: CN9
Side-positioning conveyor: CNMD2, SD2, SNS08A: NFB2/F2
03BF
CND1, CND2 Power supply fuse: F9, F12
Subscanning unit: CNZ2, CNZ6
Power supply (located on the left-hand
side): DCOUT3
03C7 Subscanning unit: CNMZ3
DRV08A: CN14
03C8 Power supply fuse: F2
Subscanning unit: CNMZ2, SZ2
03C9 Subscanning unit: CNZ3, SZ3
DRV08A: CN15
03DC After-reading conveyor: CNME1 SE1
Subscanning unit: CNZ10
DRV08A: CN6
SNS08A: CN6
03DD
Cassette set unit: SA17, CAN2
Up-down IP removal unit: CNMB3, CNB4
03DE Up-down IP removal unit: SB3
DRV08A: CN5
SNS08A: CN7
03E8
Up-down IP removal unit: CNMB1, SB1,
CNB1, CNB2,
CNB3
SCN08A: CN3
0532/0537/0538 SCN08A: NFB5/F5
Scanning optics (POL DRV): CN1
No click tone/alarm sound generated,
and cassette IN/OUT LED not SNS08A: CN12
SNS08A: NFB3/F3
illuminated VOL08A: CN1
SNS08A: CN11
Cassette IN/OUT LED not illuminated
Multi-stage cassette loading cover: CNT1
SNS08A: CN5
Cassette cannot be locked
(the lock pin remains withdrawn) Cassette set unit: CNA1, SA2, SA6,
SA10, SA14
SNS08A: CN15
Touch panel inoperative
PNL: CN3
Operation lamps unlit SNS08A: CN10
(Ready, Error lamps, etc.) LED08A: CN1
Failed erasure lamp (13AA) Power supply (located on the right-hand
Power supply fuse: F5
Erasure lamp fan (FANF1) not rotated side): DCOUT5
IP jam/freeze (offensive noise from
the IP removal unit) Up-down IP removal unit: SVB1
Cassette Setting Error (13A1) Suction cup/air piping dislocated
TR1H1306.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 127
Connectors Others
Out-of-spec IP size (13A8) Cassette set unit: SA4, 8,12, 16
SNS08A: CN22, CN23
CPU90E: CN11
Barcode Read Error (13A9)
BCR08A: CN1, CN2
Subscanning unit: CNZ1
Feed IP Suction Error (13E1) Up-down IP removal unit: SB5, CNPB1 Suction cup/air piping dislocated
Feed IP Grip Error (13E3) Up-down IP removal unit: SB2, CNMB2
DRV08A: CN8, CN13
SNS08A: CN8
Erasure conveyor: CNF1 Up-down/before-side
03B1 Side-positioning conveyor: CNMD3 -positioning belt dislocated
Before-side-positioning conveyor: Power supply fuse: F11
CNC1, CNMC1, SC1
03B3 Side-positioning conveyor: SD3
SNS08A: CN14
FFM(MZ1): CN1, CN2
03C1 Subscanning unit: CNZ4, CNZ5 Power supply fuse: F3, F4
Power supply
(located on the right-hand side): DCOUT7
After-reading conveyor: CNME2
03D1
Erasure conveyor: SF1
DRV08A: CN10
03D2
Erasure conveyor: SF2, CNMF1, CNF2
SCN08A: CN1
0534/0537/0538 Scanning optics unit (LDD assembly): CN1 SCN08A: NFB1/F1, NFB3/F3
0534/0537/0538/0536 Power supply fuse: F7, F8
SCN08A: CN5
0536 SCN08A: NFB2/F2, NFB4/F4
PMT08A: CN1
SCN08A: CN2 SCN08A: NFB6/F6, NFB7/F7
0537
Scanning optics unit: SYN08A: CN1 NFB9/F9, NFB10/F10
0537/0538 Power supply fuse: F6
SCN08A: CN4
0538 Subscanning unit: SZ1, CNZ11 SCN08A: NFB8/F8
DRV08A: CN11
03D4
Erasure conveyor: CNSOLF1
03D5 Erasure conveyor: SF3
Erasure/before-side
03D6 -positioning belt dislocated
SCN08A: CN8 MTH08A: NFB3/F3
0422 MTH08A: CN21 MTH08D: F3
MTH08D: CN21 Power supply fuse: F3, F4
TR1H1307.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 128 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 129
2.4 Troubleshooting flow 03A2/03A3

Preliminary steps:
2.4.1 Error Code Analysis Flows 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
03A2 Cassette hold release error/03A3 Degeneration for all shelves
Power OFF
N
Cause Are the hold pin holes for all the Replace the cassette.
cassettes normal?
03A2: SOLA1-4 is turned ON during cassette hold release after occurrence of 13E1-13E5, Check to ensure that there is no flash,
but SA3, 7, 11, and 15 do not turn OFF so that the cassette cannot be released. deformation, or foreign matter.
03A3: Cassette hold release is performed during initialization or during machine operation, Y
but hold release for all the shelves (SA3, 7, 11, and 15 do not turn OFF) cannot be Power OFF
detected. Is the operation of the solenoid arm

N
and hold pin normal? Adjust/replace the solenoid portion.
Supplementary explanation Lower the solenoid arm by hand to
check that it strokes properly.
Upon initialization or cassette ejection, SOLA1-4 turn ON for releasing the cassette hold.
Y
When the SOLA1-4 turn ON, the hold pin is withdrawn, so that SA3, 7, 11, and 15 turn
Power ON Power OFF
OFF, thereby detecting the release of the hold pin.
Are SOL1 4 turned ON and the N Is the fuse NFB1 on the N
An error message is displayed for a shelf where cassette hold release fails. hold pin released during initialization SNS08A board normal?
Reset the NFB1.
self-diagnostics?
This error occurs when the entire cassette hold release is not detected during the above Y
operation. Y
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Power OFF

Are the connector connections N Check the error-related system
between SOLA1 4 and block diagram and connect the
Error-related I/O locations DRV08A board normal? connectors as appropriate.
Y
Hold pin
N
Is the fuse (F10) in the power Replace the following parts.
SA3.7.11.15
Cassette hold sensor
supply unit (JPS-1) normal? Fuse (F10)
Power supply unit
Power ON Y
SOLA14
Cassette hold solenoid Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 normal?
See section 4.6 of the MC volume to Replace the DRV08A board.
SOLA14 ON :SA3.7.11.15 OPEN perform sensor checks.
SOLA1 SOLA14 OFF :SA3.7.11.15 CLOSE Y N
SOLA2 Power OFF
Cassette hold solenoid
SOLA3
Remove dust or soil from the
SOLA4 sensors. Power ON again to
check the sensors again.
FR1H0001.EPS
SOLF1 Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 normal?
Y N
Error-related system block diagram
Power OFF
SNS08A CNA2 Are the connector
CN N
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN6 connections from
SA3, 7, 11 and 15 Check the error-related system block
SA3/7/11/15 to SNS08A board diagram and connect the connectors
DC OUT2 CN4 normal? as appropriate.
DRV03D CNSOLA1
CN3 CN2
SOLA1 Y
JPS-1 CNA3
CN2 CN3 Restart the machine Replace the
CN4 SOLA2 and check its status. SNS08A board.
FR1H0003.EPS
DRV08A CNSOLA2
SOLA3
DC OUT3 CN1
CNSOLA3
SOLA4
CNSOLA4
FR1H0002.EPS
009-051-08 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT - 128 009-051-10 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT - 129
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
03A8 Out-Of-Spec Initialization IP Size/13A8 Out-Of-Spec IP Size 03A8/13A8

CAUTION: Before remedying this error, remove the cause of the IP jam, and then troubleshoot the 13A8 error.
Cause
03A8: Measurement is made on the length of the remaining IP during initialization, but the Preliminary steps:
1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
result is detected as out-of-spec. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
13A8: Measurement is made on the length of the IP during IP feed, but the result is 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
detected as out-of-spec.
Power OFF
Supplementary Explanation
Is the drive mechanism normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
03A8: Rotate the MC1/MD3 driving belts by
N
Belt/tension
Each motor is activated during initialization, and each sensor is used to detect any hand to check that the conveyor
rollers rotate smoothly.
Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
remaining IP left in the machine.
Y
The remaining IP in the machine is conveyed, and IP length measurement is performed
Power ON Power OFF
by SC1.
Are SA4, 8, 12, and 16 normal? N N
Are the connector connections
The size of the IP is determined according to the ON/OFF status of SA4, 8, 12, and 16 With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute from SA4, 8, 12, 16 to SNS08A
Check the error-related
system block diagram
(mammo/ST sensor), and SB4 (inch/metric sensor), as well as the time taken for the IP to sensor monitoring to check the board normal?
and connect the
sensor status.
pass over SC1. By turning ON/OFF the SW, make Y connectors as appropriate.
This error occurs when the size of the remaining IP is out of spec as a result of the above sure that they are normal.
operation. Y
Replace the following parts in order named.
13A8: Power ON SA4, 8, 12, 16 (faulty SW only)
Is SC1 normal? SNS08A board
IP length measurement is performed by SC1 during IP conveyance. With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute
The size of the IP is determined according to the ON/OFF status of SA4, 8, 12, and 16 sensor monitoring to check the sensor
status.
(mammo/ST sensor), and SB4 (inch/metric sensor), as well as the time taken for the IP to With a slip of paper or the like, block
pass over SC1. the sensor light path to check that the
sensor status is as follows.
This error occurs when the size of the IP conveyed is out of spec as a result of the above Light blocked: "close"
operation. Light transmitted: "open"
N
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Y
Power OFF Power OFF
Remove dust or soil from the Is the connector N
Error-related I/O locations sensor. Power ON again to
N
connection from SC1 Check the error-related
execute sensor monitoring. to SNS08A board system block diagram
SOLA4 Is SC1 normal? normal? and connect the
Y Y connectors as appropriate.
MD3 IP transport motor Replace the following parts

in order named.
SC1
Restart the machine
SNS08A board
and check its status. FR1H0006.EPS
MC1
IP transport motor
SC1 Before-BCR IP sensor
FR1H0004.EPS

CNA1 SA4 SA4
SA8 SA8
SNS08A CNF1
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN8 SC1
CNC1 SA12 SA12
DC OUT2 CN4 CN5
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
SA16 SA16
JPS-1
CNZ7
CN2 CN3
CN5 MD3
DRV08A CNMD3
CNC2
DC OUT3 CN1
CN8 MC1
CNMC1 FR1H0005.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B1 Feed Conveyance Error 03B1

Preliminary steps:
Cause 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
After the IP, which is removed from the cassette and conveyed to the elevation unit, passes 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
over SB2, SC1 does not turn ON. Or, SC1 turns ON, but is not turned OFF. Power OFF
Supplementary explanation Are the connection belts for the elevation N
unit and before-side-positioning conveyor Replace the belts, or install them properly.
The IP removed from the cassette is conveyed to the up-down IP removal unit by the installed properly?
driving of MB2 and passes over SB2. (SB2: OFF to ON) Y
The IP conveyed to the up-down IP removal unit is conveyed to the before-side- Power OFF
positioning conveyor by the driving of MC1, and passes over SC1. (SC1: OFF to ON) Is the drive mechanism of MC1 normal? N Connection belt Vertical conveyance
Rotate the MC1 driving belt by hand to Adjust/replace the following parts.
of elevation unit
IP length measurement is performed according to the time taken to pass over SC1, check that the conveyor roller rotates Belt/belt tension
smoothly. Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
thereby determining the IP size.
Y
This error occurs when the IP that is conveyed from the cassette fails to pass over SC1 Power OFF
(SC1 status does not transition from OFF to ON) after it passes over SB2, or when it does Is the drive mechanism of MD3 normal? N
Rotate the MD3 driving belt by hand to Adjust/replace the following parts.
not completely pass over SC1 (SC1 status does not transition from ON to OFF) during the Belt/belt tension Before-side-positioning conveyor
check that the conveyor roller rotates
above operation. smoothly. Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Power OFF Y
Does the convergence path changeover N

function normally? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Error-related I/O locations SOLC1/spring
SOLC1
Y Shaft/bearing
Power ON
N Replace the following parts.
Does SOLC1 operate during initialization SOLC1
self-diagnostics? DRV08A board
FR1H0009.EPS
SOLA4
Y
Power ON Power OFF
Do MC1/MD3 rotate along with the N Are the following connector
conveyor rollers during initialization N Check the error-related system
connections normal?
MD3 IP transport motor block diagram and connect the
self-diagnostics? MC1 DRV08A JPS-1
connectors as appropriate.
MD3 DRV08A JPS-1
Y
Y
Power OFF
Is the fuse (F11) in the
power supply unit (JPS-1)
MC1 normal? N Replace the following parts.
IP transport motor If the fuse (F11) is faulty, Fuse (F11)
MC1 does not rotate. DRV08A board
SC1 Power supply unit
Before-BCR IP sensor Power ON Y
FR1H0007.EPS
Is SC1 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility,
Error-related system block diagram execute sensor monitoring to
Replace the following parts.
MC1/MD3 (faulty motor only)
check the SC1 status. DRV08A board
With a slip of paper or the like,
SNS08A CNF1 block the SC1 light path to
CN
CN8 check that the sensor status is Power OFF
AC IN CN5 CN13 SC1
as follows. N
Light blocked: "close" Remove dust or soil from the
CNC1
Light transmitted: "open" sensor. Power ON again to
DC OUT2 CN4 execute sensor monitoring.
DRV03D Y Is SC1 normal?
CN3 CN2
Y N
JPS-1 Power OFF
CNZ7
CN2 CN3 Is the connector connection
CN13 MD3 from SC1 to SNS08A board
normal?
DRV08A CNMD3
CNC2 Y N
DC OUT3 CN1
CN8 MC1
Replace the following Check the error-related
CNMC1 Restart the machine parts in order named. system diagram and
FR1H0008.EPS
and check its status. SC1 connect the connector
SNS08A board as appropriate.
FR1H0010.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B2 Load Conveyance Error 03B2

Preliminary steps:
After the reading is completed, the IP conveyed from the erasure conveyor does not turn ON 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
SB2. Or it remains ON, or it does turn ON but does not turn OFF. Power OFF
Supplementary explanation Is the IP normal? Check to see that it N
Replace the IP.
is not curled, bent, or warped.
The IP conveyed from the erasure conveyor is conveyed to the up-down IP removal unit
Y
by the driving of MC1/MB2. Power OFF
The IP conveyed to the IP removal unit passes over SB2. (SB2: OFF to ON) Are the conveyance systems of the N
Adjust/replace the following parts.
erasure conveyor, before-side- Belt/belt tension
In order to return the conveyed IP back into the cassette, suction conveyance is positioning conveyor, and up-down Grip spring
performed. IP removal unit normal? Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
Rotate the MC1/MB2 driving belts by Path changeover guide (Section 6.7.4 of Chapter 6)
The IP is conveyed toward the cassette, and completely passes over SB2. (SB2: ON to hand to check that the conveyor rollers
OFF) rotate smoothly.
This error occurs when the IP has been conveyed to the up-down IP removal unit but fails Y
Power ON Power OFF
to pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not transition from OFF to ON), or when it does not N N
Do MC1/MB2 rotate along with the Are the following
completely pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not transition from ON to OFF), during the conveyor rollers during initialization connector connections Check the error-related system
above operation. self-diagnostics? normal? block diagram and connect the
MC1 DRV08A JPS-1 connectors as appropriate.
MB2 DRV08A JPS-1
Power ON
Y
Error-related I/O locations Is SB2 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute Replace the following parts in
sensor monitoring to check the SB2 order named.
status. MC1/MB2 (faulty motor only)
With a slip of paper or the like, block DRV08A board
the SB2 light path to check that the
Light blocked: "close"
Light transmitted: "open"
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF
Remove dust or soil from N N
Is the connector
Check the error-related system
the sensor. Power ON connection from SB2 to
MB2 block diagram and connect the
again to execute sensor SNS08A board normal?
IP transport motor connectors as appropriate.
monitoring. Is SB2 normal? Y
SB2 MC1
Cassette inlet IP sensor IP transport motor Y Replace the following parts
in order named.
SB2
Restart the machine SNS08A board
FR1H0011.EPS
and check its status.
FR1H0013.EPS
SNS08A CNB1
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN7 SB2
CNB2
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
CNMB2
JPS-1
CNB3 MB2
CN2 CN3
CN5
CNC2 CNMC1
DRV08A
CN8 MC1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0012.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B3 Side-Positioning Conveyor Inlet Conveyance Error 03B3

Preliminary steps:
During IP feed conveyance, SD3 does not turn ON after the IP passes over SC1. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
Supplementary explanation
Power OFF
The IP conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit is conveyed to the before-side- Is the IP normal?
N
positioning conveyor by the driving of MC1, and passes over SC1. (SC1: OFF to ON) Check to see that it is not curled Replace the IP.
or bent.
IP length measurement is performed according to the time taken to pass over SC1, The IP runs over the shaft due to
thereby determining the IP size. The latch assembly of the side-positioning conveyor is its curling.
activated so that the top stopper moves up. For 14"x17" and 14"14" sizes, however, the Y
top stopper remains in the down position. Power OFF
N
The IP is conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor by the driving of MD3, so that BCR Is the drive mechanism of the
reading is performed. side-positioning conveyor normal?
Belt/belt tension
Rotate the MD3 driving belt by
For the IP that is conveyed toward the top stopper, the IP leading edge is detected by hand to check that it rotates
Grip release mechanism
smoothly.
SD3. (SD3: OFF to ON) Make sure that the grip release
Only for 14"x17" and 14"x14" sizes, the IP is conveyed in reverse direction after BCR wire functions properly.
reading, so that the top stopper is moved up. For the IP that is conveyed again toward the Y
top stopper, the IP leading edge is detected by SD3. (SD3: OFF to ON) Power ON Power OFF
N
This error occurs when SD3 fails to detect the IP (SD3 status does not transition from Does MD3 rotate along with the Are the connector N
OFF to ON) during the above operation. conveyor roller during initialization connections from MD3 to
block diagram and connect the
self-diagnostics? DRV08A to JPS-1 board
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open normal?
Y
Y
Power ON
Is SD3 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute Replace the following parts
sensor monitoring to check the SD3 in order named.
SOLA4 MD3
status.
the SD3 light path to check that the
MD3 IP transport motor Light blocked: "close"
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF
SD3 N
Side-positioning Remove dust or soil from the N
Is SD3 installed normally? Install the sensor properly.
IP sensor sensor. Power ON again to
SC1 execute sensor monitoring. Y
Before-BCR IP sensor Is SD3 normal?
Power OFF
FR1H0014.EPS
Y
Is the connector connection N
from SD3 to SNS08A board Check the error-related system
Error-related system block diagram normal? block diagram and connect the
Y
SNS08A CNZ2
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN9 SD3 Replace the following parts
Restart the machine
CND1 and check its status. in order named.
SD3
DC OUT2 CN4 SNS08A board
DRV03D
CN3 CN2 FR1H0016.EPS
JPS-1
CNZ7
CN2 CN3
MD3
CN13
DRV08A CNMD3
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0015.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 (1) 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B4 Recovered IP Load Slow Conveyance Error 03B4

Cause CAUTION: Before remedying this error, remove the cause of the before-reading error, and then troubleshoot this 03B4 error.
Preliminary steps:
After the IP that experienced before-reading error is conveyed in fast speed mode to the 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
elevation unit, SB2 turns ON; the IP is then conveyed in slow speed mode toward the 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
cassette set unit, but SB2 remains ON. (When 03B4 error occurs, remedy the before-reading
Power OFF
error as well.)
N
Is the IP normal?
Supplementary explanation Check to see that it is not curled, Replace the IP.
bent, or warped.
The IP is conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit to the side-positioning conveyor, but
before-reading error (IDT line error, etc.) occurs. Y
Power OFF
The IP that caused the before-reading error is conveyed (returned) from the side- With all the cassettes set into all
N
positioning conveyor to the up-down IP removal unit. the shelves, does the cassette
Movable roll
cover open properly?
The IP conveyed is conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit toward the cassette by Hold pin
Y Cassette
the driving of MB2, and passes over SB2. (SB2: OFF to ON) Power OFF
N
The IP is conveyed into the cassette and completely passes over SB2. (SB2: ON to OFF) Is the drive system of the up-down
IP removal unit normal?
This error occurs when the IP does not completely pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not Rotate the MB2 driving belt by Belt/belt tension
hand to check that it rotates Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
transition from ON to OFF) during the above operation.
smoothly.
Power ON Power OFF
N N
Does MB2 rotate along with the Are the following connector
Error-related I/O locations conveyor roller during initialization connections normal? Check the error-related system
self-diagnostics? MB2, MC1 DRV08A block diagram and connect the
JPS-1 board connectors as appropriate.
Y
Y
Power ON
Is SB2 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, Replace the following parts
execute sensor monitoring to in order named.
check the SB2 status. MB2
With a slip of paper or the like, DRV08A board
block the SB2 light path to check
that the sensor status is as follows.
MB2 Light blocked: "close"
IP transport motor Light transmitted: "open"
SB2 MC1 Y N
Cassette inlet IP sensor IP transport motor
Power OFF Power OFF
N Is SB2 installed normally? N
Remove dust or soil from the Install the sensor properly.
sensor. Power ON again to
FR1H0017.EPS
execute sensor monitoring. Y
Is SB2 normal?
Error-related system block diagram Power OFF
Y
from SB2 to SNS08A board Check the error-related
SNS08A CNB1
CN normal? system block diagram and
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN7 SB2 connect the connectors as
Y appropriate.
CNB2
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D Replace the following parts
CN3 CN2 Restart the machine in order named.
and check its status. SB2
CNMB2
JPS-1 SNS08A board
CNB3 MB2 FR1H0019.EPS
CN2 CN3
CN5
DRV08A
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0018.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B5 Recovered IP Load Fast Conveyance Error 03B5

Cause CAUTION: Before remedying this error, remove the cause of the before-reading error, and then troubleshoot this 03B5 error.
The IP that experienced before-reading error is conveyed toward the cassette set unit, but Preliminary steps:
SB2 does not turn ON. (When 03B5 occurs, the cause of the IP jam should also be 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
remedied.) 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
Supplementary explanation Power OFF

N
The IP is conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit to the side-positioning unit, but Are the drive systems of the
up-down IP removal unit/side-
before-reading error (IDT line error, etc.) occurs. positioning conveyor normal? Belt/belt tension
The IP that caused the before-reading error is conveyed (returned) from the side- Rotate the MB2/MC1 driving belts
by hand to check that they rotate Grip spring
positioning conveyor to the up-down IP removal unit. smoothly.
The IP conveyed is conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit toward the cassette by Power ON
Y
Power OFF
the driving of MB2, and passes over SB2. (SB2: OFF to ON) N N
Do MB2/MC1 rotate along with Are the following connector
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not transition from the conveyor rollers during connections normal? Check the error-related system
initialization self-diagnostics? MB2, MC1 DRV08A
OFF to ON) during the above operation. JPS-1 board
Y connectors as appropriate.
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Power ON Y
Is SB2 normal?
Error-related I/O locations execute sensor monitoring to Replace the following parts
check the SB2 status. in order named.
With a slip of paper or the like, MB2/MC1 (faulty motor only)
block the SB2 light path to check DRV08A board
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF

MB2 execute sensor monitoring. Y
IP transport motor Is SB2 normal?
Power OFF
SB2 MC1 Is the connector connection N
Y
Cassette inlet IP sensor IP transport motor from SB2 to SNS08A board Check the error-related
normal? system block diagram and
connect the connectors as
Y appropriate.
FR1H0020.EPS
Replace the following parts

in order named.
Error-related system block diagram Restart the machine
SB2
SNS08A board
FR1H0022.EPS
SNS08A CNB1
CN
CNB2
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
CNMB2
JPS-1
CNB3 MB2
CN2 CN3
CN5
CNC2 CNMC1
DRV08A
CN8 MC1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0021.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B6 Feed/Load Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error 03B6

CAUTION: Before remedying this error, check the cause of IP jam and remedy it.
Cause
Preliminary steps:
During initialization, an IP is detected within the machine as a result of IP search, and it is 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
loaded to the cassette, but SB2 remains OFF, or it turns ON but does not turn OFF. (When 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
03B6 occurs, the cause of the IP jam should be checked and remedied.) 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
Power OFF
Is the IP normal? Take out the IP and N
During initialization, each motor is activated, and each sensor is used to search for any check to see that it is not curled, bent,
Replace the IP.
remaining IP left in the machine. or warped.

Y
If any IP is detected in the machine, the IP ejection process is executed. Power OFF
The IP is conveyed toward the cassette by the driving of MF1, MC1, and MB2. Are the conveyance systems of the N
erasure conveyor, before-side- Belt/belt tension
The IP is conveyed from the up-down IP removal unit toward the cassette, and passes positioning conveyor, and up-down Grip spring
over SB2. (SB2: OFF to ON) IP removal unit normal? Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
Rotate the MF1/MC1/MB2 driving belts Path changeover guide
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not transition from by hand to check that the conveyor
OFF to ON), or when it does not completely pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not rollers rotate smoothly.
transition from ON to OFF), during the above operation. Y
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open N

With all the cassettes set into all the Adjust/replace the following parts.
shelves, does the cassette cover open Movable roll
properly? Hold pin
Error-related I/O locations Cassette
Y
Power ON Power OFF
Do MF1/MC1/MB2 rotate along with Are the following
the conveyor rollers during N N
connector connections
initialization self-diagnostics? Check the error-related system
normal?
MF1 DRV08A JPS-1
MC1 DRV08A JPS-1
Power ON MB2 DRV08A - JPS-1
Is SB2 normal? Y
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute
MB2 sensor monitoring to check the SB2 Replace the following parts
IP transport motor status. in order named.
MF1 With a slip of paper or the like, block MF1/MC1/MB2 (faulty motor only)
IP transport motor the SB2 light path to check that the DRV08A board
SB2 MC1 sensor status is as follows.
Cassette inlet IP sensor IP transport motor Light blocked: "close"
SF1 Y
MD3 N
MZ1 Power OFF Power OFF
Remove dust or soil from N N
ME2 FR1H0023.EPS Is the connector
the sensor. Power ON connection from SB2 to
Error-related system block diagram again to execute sensor
monitoring. Is SB2 normal?
SNS08A board normal?
Y
SNS08A CNB1 Y
CN Replace the following parts
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN7 SB2 in order named.
SB2
CNB2 Restart the machine SNS08A board
DC OUT2 CN4 FR1H0025.EPS
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
CNMB2
JPS-1
CNB3 MB2
CN2 CN3
CN5
CNC2 CNMC1
DRV08A
CN8 MC1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0024.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B7 Side-Positioning Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error 03B7

Cause
Preliminary steps:
During initialization, a remaining IP is detected in the side-positioning conveyor or 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
subscanning unit, and it is conveyed toward the before-side-positioning conveyor by the 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
driving of MD3/MZ1, but SC1 does not turn ON. Or, after the IP trailing edge is detected by 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
SZ1, the IP is conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor, but SD3 does not turn ON. (When
03B7 occurs, the cause of the JP jam should also be remedied.) Is the IP normal?
N
Supplementary explanation Check to see that it is not curled, Replace the IP.
bent, or warped.
During initialization, each motor is activated, and each sensor is used to search for any
Y
Power OFF
A remaining IP is detected by SD3/SZ1 of the side-positioning conveyor. N
Is the drive mechanism of the
In order to execute the IP ejection process, the IP is conveyed to the before-side- side-positioning conveyor normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Rotate the MD3 driving belt by Belt/belt tension
positioning conveyor by the driving of MD3/MZ1. hand to check that it rotates Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
Grip release mechanism
When the IP conveyed to the before-side-positioning conveyor is detected by SC1, the smoothly.
Also make sure that the grip
conveyance direction is switched to the side-positioning conveyor. release mechanism functions
properly.
When SD3 of the side-positioning conveyor detects the IP, the IP is conveyed again
toward the before-side-positioning conveyor, so that the ejection process is executed. Power ON
Y
Power OFF
This error occurs when SC1 fails to detect the IP, or when SD3 fails to detect the IP after Does MD3 rotate along with the
N
Are the connector N
SC1 detects it, during the above operation. conveyor roller during initialization connections from MD3 to
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open normal?
Y
Power ON Y
Error-related I/O locations Are SD3/SC1 normal?

sensor monitoring to check the Replace the following parts
SD3/SC1 status. in order named.
SOLA4 MD3
With a slip of paper or the like, block
the SD3/SC1 light path to check that DRV08A board
the sensor status is as follows.
MD3 IP transport motor Light blocked: "close"
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF
SD3 N
Side-positioning N Are SD3/SC1 installed
IP sensor normally?
SC1 execute sensor monitoring. Y
Before-BCR IP sensor Are SD3/SC1 normal?
FR1H0026.EPS
Power OFF
Y N
Is the connector connection Check the error-related
Error-related system block diagram from SD3/SC1 to SNS08A system block diagram and
board normal? connect the connectors as
appropriate.
SNS08A CNF1 Y
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN8 SC1
CNC1
DC OUT2 CN4 CN9 SD3 Restart the machine in order named.
DRV03D
CN3 CN2 CNZ2 CND1 and check its status. SD3/SC1 (faulty sensor only)
SNS08A board
JPS-1 FR1H0028.EPS
CNZ7
CN2 CN3
MD3
CN13
DRV08A CNMD3
DC OUT3 CN1
CN2
CN14
CNZ4
CN3
MZ1
CN1
DC OUT7
FR1H0027.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B8/13B8 IP Position Information Error 03B8/13B8

Preliminary steps:
During initialization, it is determined according to the CMOS information that an IP is found, 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
but no IP is detected as a result of IP search.
Power OFF
Supplementary explanation Is there any remaining IP left
N
Power ON and clear "8. BACK UP MEMORY" of M-Utility.
During initialization, it is determined according to the CMOS information whether an IP is in the machine? Restart the machine again and check its status.
found or not in the machine. Y
During initialization, each motor is activated, and each sensor is used to search for any
This error occurs when no IP is detected as a result of IP search, although it is Power ON
determined according to the CMOS information that an IP is found in the machine, during Is the remaining IP ejected during N
Manually eject the IP left in the machine.
initialization self-diagnostics?
the above operation. Power ON and clear "8. BACK UP MEMORY" of M-Utility.
Y Restart the machine again and check its status.
Reference: This error occurs when the IP located in the machine is intentionally removed.
If the IP is manually removed, clear the backup memory through 8. BACK UP
MEMORY of M-Utility. Note, however, that when backup memory is cleared,
all the error codes stored are also cleared as well.
Restart the machine
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03B9 Load Standby Remaining IP Ejection Error 03B9

Cause
Because SF3 is turned ON during initialization, the IP is conveyed toward the cassette, but Preliminary steps:
SB2 does not turn ON. (When 03B9 occurs, the cause of the IP jam should be checked and 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
remedied.) 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.

N
During initialization, each motor is activated, and each sensor is used to search for any Are the drive systems of the
The screw is tightened in place.
up-down IP removal unit/erasure
remaining IP left in the machine. conveyor normal? Belt/belt tension
A remaining IP is detected by SF3 of the erasure conveyor. Rotate the MB2/MC1/MF1 driving
belts by hand to check that they Grip release mechanism
In order to execute the IP ejection process, the IP is conveyed from the erasure conveyor rotate smoothly.
toward the up-down IP removal unit by the driving of MF1, MC1, and MB2. Y
Power ON Power OFF
The IP is conveyed to the up-down IP removal unit, and it passes over SB2. (SB2: OFF to N
Do MB2/MC1/MF1 rotate along Are the following connectors
ON) with the conveyor rollers during normal?
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not transition from initialization self-diagnostics? MB2, MC1 DRV08A JPS-1
board
OFF to ON), or when it does not completely pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not Y Before side-positioning
Power ON MF1 DRV08A JPS-1 board
transition from ON to OFF), during the above operation. conveyor
Is SB2 normal? Y FR1H0032.EPS
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open With "6. MECH" of M-Utility,
execute sensor monitoring to
check the SB2 status. Replace the following
With a slip of paper or the like, parts in order named.
Error-related I/O locations block the SB2 light path to check MB2/MC1/MF1
that the sensor status is as follows. N
(faulty motor only)
Light blocked: "close" DRV08A board
Check the error-related system block
Light transmitted: "open" diagram and connect the connectors
as appropriate.
MF1 SF3SOLA3 Y N
IP transport motor LoadSOLA4
standby
IP sensor Power OFF Power OFF
Is SB2 normal?
Power OFF
MB2 N
Y Is the connector connection
IP transport motor Check the error-related
from SB2 to SNS08A board
system block diagram and
SB2 MC1 normal?
Cassette inlet IP sensor IP transport motor Y appropriate.
Restart the machine Replace the following parts

FR1H0030.EPS and check its status. in order named.
SB2
Error-related system block diagram SNS08A board
FR1H0033.EPS
SNS08A CNB1
CN
CNB2
DC OUT2 CN4 SF3

DRV03D
CN3 CN2 CNF1
JPS-1 CNMB2
CNB3 MB2
CN2 CN3
CN5
CNC2 CNMC1
DRV08A
CN8 MC1
DC OUT3 CN1
CN10
CNF2 MF1
CNMF1
FR1H0031.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03BC Side-Positioning Operation Error 03BC

Preliminary steps:
MD1 is activated in order to detect the side-positioning home position (HP), but SD1 cannot 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
detect the HP. (When SD1 is ON, it is detected as it transitions from ON to OFF to ON. When 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
SD1 is OFF, a transition from OFF to ON is detected.) Power OFF

Supplementary explanation Is the drive system of the side- N Adjust/replace the following parts.
positioning conveyor normal? Belt/belt tension
During initialization, MD1 is driven to detect the HP of the latch assembly. Move the side-positioning conveyor Rail
by hand to check that it moves Latch assembly
When SD1 is OFF during initialization, MD1 is driven in the HP direction, thereby turning smoothly. Belt retaining section
ON SD1. Y Positions of actuator and SD1
Power OFF
When SD1 is ON during initialization, MD1 is once driven in the side-positioning direction, Power ON
N
Does MD1 rotate and the side- N Is the connector connection
thereby turning OFF SD1. MD1 is then driven in the HP direction again to turn ON SD1. MD1 DRV08A JPS-1
positioning conveyor move during system block diagram and
As SD1 turns ON, the HP of the latch assembly is detected. initialization self-diagnostics? normal? connect the connectors
Y as appropriate.
This error occurs when SD1 does not transition from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON, or Y
from ON to OFF to ON, during the above operation. Latch assembly
Reference: If any trouble occurs on MD1/SD1 during side-positioning operation, 0422 Replace the following parts
SD1 side-positioning in order named.
DSP Image Processing Error 1 occurs. After that, during initialization upon mechanism HP sensor
MD1
power-ON again, 03BC error occurs. DRV08A board
Actuator for SD1
If any trouble occurs on the MD1/latch assembly before side-positioning
operation during reading, 03C0 Reading Preparation Conveyance Error
occurs. After that, during initialization upon power-ON again, 03BC error
occurs.
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open MD1 side-positioning motor FR1H0036.EPS
Error-related I/O locations Power ON Power OFF

SC2 SC1 Is SD1 normal? N Remove dust or soil from
Latch assembly the sensor. Power ON again
sensor monitoring to check the SD1 to execute sensor
status. monitoring. Is SD1 normal?
Move the side-positioning conveyor
to its home position by hand and Y N
SD1 block the SD1 light path to check that
Actuator side-positioning the sensor status is as follows.
for SD1 mechanism HP Power OFF
sensor
Light transmitted: "open" Is the connector
(The sensor status is "close" at the connection from
home position.) SD1 to SNS08A
board normal? N
Y Check the error-related system
MD1 side-positioning motor
FR1H0034.EPS Y connectors as appropriate.

SNS08A CNZ2 in order named.
Restart the machine
CN SD1
CN9 SD1 and check its status.
AC IN CN5 CN13 SNS08A board
FR1H0037.EPS
CND1
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
JPS-1
CNZ6
CN2 CN3
MD1
CN12
DRV08A CNMD1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0035.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03BF Side-Positioning Grip Operation Error 03BF

Cause Preliminary steps:
SD2 does not turn ON during the side-positioning grip HP detection. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
During initialization, MD2 is driven to turn ON SD2, thereby detecting the HP. START
MD2
When MD2 is driven, the actuator causes SD2 to detect ON/OFF. Grip release motor
When SD2 is ON during initialization, MD2 is driven to turn OFF SD2. The HP is detected Is the drive gear of MD2
N
Install it properly.
by driving MD2 again to turn ON SD2. installed properly?
When SD2 is OFF during initialization, MD2 is driven to turn ON SD2. Y
This error occurs when SD2 fails to turn ON, or when it does not transition from ON to Is the grip drive system of the N
OFF to ON, during the above operation. side-positioning conveyor Adjust/replace the following parts.
normal? Belt
Reference: If any trouble occurs on MD2 prior to side-positioning operation, 03C1 Rotate the cam by hand to Grip release mechanism
Reading Conveyance Error occurs. After that, during initialization upon check that it rotates smoothly. Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
power-ON again, 03BF error occurs. Drive gear
Y The screw is tightened in place.
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open FR1H0040.EPS
N
Is the SD2 light-shielding plate Mount it properly.
normal?
Error-related I/O locations Check that it is not in contact
SOLA4 with the SD2.
SC2 SC1
Y
Is +24 V present between the Are the following power supply unit Is the connector/cable connection
N
following DCOUT3 terminals of (JPS-1) fuses normal? between the power supply unit
the power supply unit (JPS-1)? N F9 (DCOUT3-2 and DCOUT3-7) (JPS-1) DCOUT3 and DRV08A
MD2 F10 (DCOUT3-3 and DCOUT3-8)
DCOUT3-2 and DCOUT3-7 board CN1 normal?
Grip release HP sensor F11 (DCOUT3-4 and DCOUT3-9)
DCOUT3-3 and DCOUT3-8
DCOUT3-4 and DCOUT3-9 F12 (DCOUT3-5 and DCOUT3-10) Y N
SD2 DCOUT3-5 and DCOUT3-10
Grip release motor Replace the cable.
Y Y
Replace the power supply unit (JPS-1).

FR1H0038.EPS Replace the fuse (F9/F10/F11/F12).

Is +5 V is present between power N Is the power supply unit (JPS-1) N Is the connector/cable connection
Power supply unit (JPS-1) DRV08A supply unit (JPS-1) DCOUT fuse (F13) normal? between the power supply unit
terminals 2-1 and 2-2? (JPS-1) DCOUT2 and SNS08A
F2 Y board CN4 normal?
AC IN +15V DC OUT3 CN1 Y
CN12 CNZ6 CNMD2 Y N
+24V MD2
F9
Replace the cable.
F10
F11 TP2
F12 CN2 CN3

Replace the fuse (F13).
A FR1H0041.EPS
SNS08A
CN2 CN3
F13 DC OUT2 CN4 F1 F2 CN9 CNZ2 CND1

+5V SD2
FR1H0039.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
A BLANK PAGE
Is +5 V present between the TP2 Is the connector/cable connection N

and TP3 (GND) on the DRV08A N between the power supply unit Replace the cable.
board? (JPS-1) DCOUT3 and DRV08A
board CN1 normal?
Y
Y
Replace the DRV08A board.
N
Is the fuse (F1/F2) on the SNS08A N Are the connector/cable connections Replace the cable.
board normal? among the SNS08A board CN9,
CNZ2, and CND1 normal?
Y
Y
Replace the SNS08A board.
N
Is the MD2 normal? N Are the connector/cable connections Replace the cable.
Perform operational checkout of among the DRV08A board CN12,
the MD2 with 6. MECH of M-Utility. CNZ6, and CNMD2 normal?
Y Y
Replace the MD2.
N
Is the SD2 normal? N Are the connector/cable connections Replace the cable.
Check the SD2 status by monitoring among the SNS08A board CN9,
it with 6. MECH of M-Utility. CNZ2, and CND1 normal?
Y Y
Replace the SD2.
N
Does the machine operate To START
normally after its restart?
OK
FR1H1916.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03C0 Reading Preparation Conveyance Error 03C0

Cause Preliminary steps:
SZ1 turns ON prior to IP reading preparation. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Power OFF
The IP conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor is temporarily stopped by the side- N
positioning stopper to perform side-positioning operation, and then moved to the side Is the drive system of the side-
positioning conveyor normal?
guide. Belt/belt tension
Move the side-positioning conveyor
Roller
by hand to check that the latch
Once the IP side-positioning operation is completed, the side-positioning stopper is assembly pushes up the stopper.
Spring
released, so that the IP is conveyed toward the subscanning unit.
Y
The IP is conveyed to the subscanning unit, and passes over SZ1. (SZ1: OFF to ON)
Power OFF
As the IP passes over SZ1 (SZ1: OFF to ON), the IP leading edge is detected. Is the IP normal?
N
Make sure that the IP is not curled,
This error occurs when the IP overruns the side-positioning stopper prior to the side- bent, or warped. If it is curled, it
Replace the IP(s).
positioning operation and passes over SZ1 of the subscanning unit (SZ1: OFF to ON) moves beyond the stopper and is
conveyed into the subscanning unit.
during the above operation. Check all the IPs as needed.
Error-related I/O locations Power OFF

N
Does the initialization self-diagnostics
SOLA4 end normally? Troubleshoot it based on a new error code displayed.
MD3 IP transport motor Replace the SCN08A board.

FR1H0044.EPS
SD3 Side-positioning
IP sensor
SZ1
IP leading edge sensor
FR1H0042.EPS
SNS08A CNZ2
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN9 SD3
CND1
DC OUT2 CN4 CN4 SZ1

DRV03D
CN3 CN2 CNZ11
JPS-1
CNZ7
CN2 CN3
MD3
CN5
DRV08A CNMD3
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0043.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03C1 Reading Conveyance Error 03C1

Preliminary steps:
After IP reading conveyance is initiated, SD3 does not turn OFF. 3. Remove the scanning optics unit.
Tensioner
After the IP side-positioning operation is completed, the side-positioning stopper is Power OFF
FR
ON SUS belt
Is the drive system of the T Rubber belt
released, and the IP is conveyed toward the subscanning unit by the driving of MD3. N
Driving
subscanning unit normal? Adjust/replace the following shaft Pulley
MZ3 of the subscanning unit is driven to perform the grip/grip release operation of the Rotate the driving shaft by hand parts.
to check that the driving shaft Kapton belt Subscanning
driven shaft, so that the IP is conveyed. rotates smoothly. unit
SUS belt/rubber belt
Move the cam to check that the
The IP is conveyed as MZ2 is driven, and the grip/grip release operation of the driving upper rubber roller moves down.
Tensioner
Upper rubber roller/shaft
shaft is performed. Y /grip spring
Grip arm/cam
For the IP conveyed, its leading edge is detected by SZ1, so that IP reading is initiated. Right-hand side
IP reading conveyance is performed by the driving of MZ1, so that the IP is conveyed transparent cover
from the subscanning unit to the after-reading conveyor, and completely passes over
Tensioner
SD3. (SD3: ON to OFF)
Kapton belt
This error occurs when the IP does not completely pass over SD3 (SD3 status does not Subscanning
transition from ON to OFF) during the above operation. unit
Pulley
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open
Flywheel
FR
ON
SOLA4 T
Power ON Left-hand side
Power OFF transparent cover FR1H0047.EPS
Is the operation of MZ1 (FFM)
MZ1 normal? Is the connector connection
N N
Subscanning motor See the MZ1 check/replacement from MZ1 to SNS08A board
MD3 IP transport motor Check the error-related system
procedure in section 10.8 of the normal?
MC volume and check the MZ1. Y connectors as appropriate.
Y Power OFF
Is the fuse (F3/F4) of the N
SD3 Side-positioning power supply unit (JPS-1)
IP sensor in order named.
normal?
Fuse (F3/F4)
Y DRV08A board
Power supply unit
FR1H0045.EPS
in order named.
MZ1
SNS08A board
Power OFF
Power ON Remove dust or soil from the
SNS08A CNZ2 sensor. Power ON again to
CN Is SD3 normal?
CN9 SD3 N execute sensor monitoring.
AC IN CN5 CN13 With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, Is SD3 normal?
CND1 execute sensor monitoring to
check the SD3 status. Y N
DC OUT2 CN4 With a slip of paper or the like,
DRV03D Power OFF
CN3 CN2 block the SD3 light path to check N
that the sensor status is as follows. Is SD3 installed normally? Install the sensor properly.
JPS-1 Light blocked: "close"
CNZ7
Light transmitted: "open" Y
CN2 CN3 Power OFF
MD3
CN5 Y Is the connector connection from N
CNMD3
DRV08A SD3 to SNS08A board normal? system block diagram and
Y connect the connectors as
DC OUT3 CN1
CN14 CN2 appropriate.
CNZ4 Replace the following parts
CN3
Restart the machine in order named.
MZ1 and check its status. SD3
SNS08A board
DC OUT7 CN1
DRV08A board
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
03C2 Reading IP Leading-Edge Detection Error 03C2

Preliminary steps:
When IP reading conveyance is initiated, SZ1 cannot detect the IP leading edge. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.

After the IP side-positioning operation is completed, the side-positioning stopper is Is the IP normal?
N
Replace the IP. Tensioner
released, and the IP is conveyed toward the subscanning unit by the driving of MD3. Make sure that the IP is not
FR
curled, bent, or warped. The IP ON SUS belt Rubber belt
T
MZ3 of the subscanning unit is driven to perform the grip/grip release operation of the runs over the shaft due to its Driving
curling. shaft Pulley
driven shaft.
Subscanning
The IP is conveyed to the subscanning unit, and passes over SZ1. (SZ1: OFF to ON) Y
unit
As the IP passes over SZ1 (SZ1: OFF to ON), the IP leading edge is detected. Power OFF
N
Is the drive system of the side- Adjust/replace the following parts.
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SZ1 (SZ1 status does not transition from positioning conveyor normal? Belt/belt tension
OFF to ON) during the above operation. Rotate the MD3 driving belt by Removal of foreign matter
hand to check that it rotates Right-hand side
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open smoothly. Also make sure that the transparent cover
IP conveyance path is free of any
foreign matter.
Tensioner
Error-related I/O locations Y
Kapton belt
Power OFF
SOLA4 Subscanning
Is the drive system of the N unit
subscanning unit normal? Adjust/replace the following
Pulley
Rotate the driving shaft by hand parts.
to check that it rotates smoothly. Kapton belt
SUS belt/rubber belt
Y Tensioner
MZ1 Upper rubber roller/upper Flywheel
Subscanning motor shaft/grip spring
Grip arm FR
ONT
Left-hand side
Power ON transparent cover FR1H0051.EPS
N Power OFF
Is the operation of MZ1 (FFM) N
Is the connector
normal?
SZ1 See the MZ1 check/replacement
connection from MZ1
IP leading edge sensor procedure in section 10.8 of the
to JPS-1 board normal?
FR1H0049.EPS
MC volume and check the MZ1. Y
Power OFF
Error-related system block diagram Y Are the connector
N
connections from MZ1
Power ON to SNS08A to JPS-1
CNZ11 board normal?
CN Is SZ1 (SED08A board) normal?
AC IN CN4 SZ1 See the SED08A board check/ Y
replacement procedure in section
DC OUT6 CN9
10.5 of the MC volume and check
the SED08A board. Replace the following parts
SCN08A
DRV03D in order named.
Y N MZ1
SNS08A board
JPS-1 Power OFF
Remove dust or soil Power OFF
CN14 CN2 from the sensor.
N Is the connection from
DRV08A CNZ4 Power ON again to
CN3 SED08A to SCN08A Check the error-related system
perform the SED08A
DC OUT3 CN1 board normal? N block diagram and connect the
board checks as
MZ1 described in section Y connectors as appropriate.
DC OUT7 CN1 10.5 of the MC volume.
Is SZ1 normal?
FR1H0050.EPS
Y

in order named.
SED08A board
SCN08A board
Restart the machine Laser assembly
FR1H0052.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
03C6 Driving Shaft Grip Error/03C8 Driving Shaft Grip Release Error 03C6/03C8/03CA
03CA Driving Shaft Grip Self-Diagnostics Error Preliminary steps:
Cause 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
03C6: MZ2 is driven before IP reading conveyance, but SZ2 does not turn OFF (IP not
Power OFF
ungripped). MD3
Is the grip mechanism of the N Driving Driven

03C8: MZ2 is driven before IP reading conveyance, but SZ2 does not turn ON (IP not subscanning unit normal? Adjust/replace the following parts. shaft shaft
gripped). Rotate MZ2 by hand to check that it Cam
rotates smoothly. MZ2 SZ1
03CA: MZ2 is driven during initialization, but SZ2 does not turn OFF. SD3
Y NOTE: When checking the
Supplementary explanation operation, put an Allen Subscanning unit
wrench into the cam to

During IP reading conveyance or during initialization, MZ2 is driven to perform the grip/ check the operation of the MZ2 MZ3
grip release operation. grip arm.

SZ2 SZ3
Either grip or grip release is detected as SZ2 turns ON/OFF.
When SZ2 is OFF, it is detected as grip; when SZ2 is ON, it is detected as grip release. Allen wrench FR1H0055.EPS
This error occurs when SZ2 does not transition from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON, Power ON Power OFF
N N
during the above operation. Does MZ2 rotate during initialization Is the connector connection
self-diagnostics? from MZ1 to SNS08A board
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open block diagram and connect the
normal?
Y Y

N
Is the fuse (F2) of the power Replace the following parts
SOLA4 in order named.
supply unit (JPS-1) normal?
Fuse (F2)
Y SNS08A board
Power ON Power supply unit
Is SZ2 normal? Replace the following parts

With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute in order named.
sensor monitoring to check the SZ2 MZ2
status. DRV08A board
Put an Allen wrench into the cam of
MZ2 and rotate it to check that the N Power OFF
sensor status is as follows. Remove dust or soil from
Light blocked: "close" the sensor.
Light transmitted: "open" Power ON again to execute
sensor monitoring.
MZ2 SZ2 Driving-side grip release Y Is SZ2 normal?
Driving shaft grip HP sensor FR1H0053.EPS
Y N
Power OFF
Is the connector connection
from SZ2 to SNS08A board
SNS08A CNZ2 Restart the machine normal?
CN and check its status.
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN9 SZ2 Y N
CNZ3
Replace the following Check the error-related
DC OUT2 CN4 parts in order named. system block diagram
DRV03D
CN3 CN2 SZ2 and connect the
SNS08A board connectors as appropriate.
JPS-1 FR1H0056.EPS
CNZ8
CN2 CN3
MZ2
CN14
DRV08A CNZ9
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0054.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03C7 Driven Shaft Grip Release Error/03C9 Driven Shaft Grip Error 03C7/03C9/03CB
03CB Driven Shaft Grip Self-Diagnostics Error Preliminary steps:
Cause 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
03C7: MZ3 is driven during IP reading conveyance, but SZ3 does not turn OFF (IP not
ungripped). START MD3
Driving Driven
03C9: MZ3 is driven during IP reading conveyance, but SZ3 does not turn ON (IP not Y shaft shaft
gripped).
Is the grip mechanism of the N SZ1
03CB: MZ3 is driven during initialization, but SZ3 does not turn OFF. subscanning unit normal? Adjust/replace the following parts. SD3
Rotate MZ3 by hand to check Cam
Supplementary explanation that it rotates smoothly. MZ3 Subscanning unit
NOTE: When checking the

During IP reading conveyance or during initialization, MZ3 is driven to perform the grip/ Y operation, put an Allen
MZ2 MZ3
grip release operation. wrench into the cam and SZ2 SZ3
rotate it clockwise to check
Either grip or grip release is detected as SZ3 turns ON/OFF. the operation of the grip arm.
When SZ3 is OFF, it is detected as grip; when SZ3 is ON, it is detected as grip release. Allen wrench FR1H0059.EPS
This error occurs when SZ3 does not transition from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON,
during the above operation.
Is +24 V present between the Are the following power supply Is the connector/cable connection
N
following DCOUT3 terminals of unit (JPS-1) fuses normal? between the power supply unit
the power supply unit (JPS-1)? N F9 (DCOUT3-2 and DCOUT3-7) (JPS-1) DCOUT3 and DRV08A
Error-related I/O locations DCOUT3-2 and DCOUT3-7 F10 (DCOUT3-3 and DCOUT3-8) board CN1 normal?
DCOUT3-3 and DCOUT3-8 F11 (DCOUT3-4 and DCOUT3-9)
SOLA4 DCOUT3-4 and DCOUT3-9 F12 (DCOUT3-5 and DCOUT3-10) Y N
DCOUT3-5 and DCOUT3-10
Y Replace the cable.
Y
MZ3 Driven shaft grip Replace the fuses (F9/F10/F11/F12).
Is +15 V is present between power N Is the power supply unit (JPS-1) N Is the connector/cable connection
SZ3 Driven-side grip release supply unit (JPS-1) DCOUT fuse (F2) normal? between the power supply unit
HP sensor terminals 3-1 and 3-6? (JPS-1) DCOUT3 and DRV08A
board CN1 normal?
Y Y
FR1H0057.EPS
Y N
Replace the cable.
Power supply unit (JPS-1) DRV08A Replace the fuse (F2).
F2 DC OUT3 CN1
AC IN +15V
CN14 CNZ8 CNZ9 Is +5 V present between power N N Is the connector/cable connection
+24V MZ3 Is the power supply unit (JPS-1)
F9 supply unit (JPS-1) DCOUT between the power supply unit
fuse (F13) normal?
terminals 2-1 and 2-2? (JPS-1) DCOUT2 and SNS08A
F10
TP2 board CN4 normal?
F11 Y Y
F12 CN2 CN3 Y N
Replace the cable.
SNS08A
CN2 CN3
DC OUT2 CN4 A Replace the fuse (F13).

F13 F1 F2 CN9 CNZ2 CNZ3
+5V SZ3 FR1H0060.EPS
FR1H0058.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405 (1)
A BLANK PAGE
N
Is +5 V present between the TP2 N Is the connector/cable connection Replace the cable.
and TP3 (GND) on the DRV08A between the power supply unit
board? (JPS-1) DCOUT3 and DRV08A
board CN1 normal?
Y
Y
Replace the DRV08A board.
N
Is the fuse (F1/F2) on the SNS08A N Are the connector/cable connections Replace the cable.
board normal? among the SNS08A board CN9,
CNZ2, and CNZ3 normal?
Y
Y
Replace the SNS08A board.
N
Is the MZ3 normal? N Are the connector/cable connections Replace the cable.
Perform operational checkout among the DRV08A board CN14,
of the drive grip mechanism with CNZ8, and CNZ9 normal?
6. MECH of M-Utility.
Y
Y
Replace the MZ3.
N
Is the SZ3 normal? N Are the connector/cable connections Replace the cable.
Check the SZ3 status by monitoring among the SNS08A board CN9,
it with 6. MECH of M-Utility. CNZ2, and CNZ3 normal?
Y Y
Replace the SZ3.
N
OK
FR1H1917.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D1 After-Reading Conveyance Error 03D1

Preliminary steps:
After after-reading conveyance grip, the IP is conveyed toward the inverting stocker, but SF1 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
does not turn ON.
Power OFF
Supplementary explanation Is the grip release mechanism of
N
Adjust/replace the following
After the IP reading conveyance is completed, ME1 of the after-reading conveyor is driven the after-reading conveyor normal?
parts.
Move each portion of the grip
to grip the IP. release mechanism by hand for Grip release mechanism
checking. Cam
The IP gripped is conveyed from the after-reading conveyor to the erasure conveyor by ME1 drive gear
the driving of ME2. Y
Power OFF
The IP conveyed is conveyed toward the inverting stocker and passes over SF1. (SF1: N
OFF to ON) Is the drive system of the after-
reading conveyor normal? Adjust/replace the following
parts.
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF1 (SF1 status does not transition from Rotate the ME2 driving belt by hand
Belt/belt tension
to check that it rotates smoothly.
OFF to ON) during the above operation. Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
Y
Power ON
Does ME2 rotate along with the

Error-related I/O locations conveyor roller during initialization
self-diagnostics?
Power OFF
SOLA4 Y N Are the connector connections
from ME2 to DRV08A to JPS-1 Check the error-related system
board normal? block diagram and connect the
SF1 connectors as appropriate.
Power ON Y
After-reading
conveyance standby Is SF1 normal?
IP sensor With "6. MECH" of M-Utility,
execute sensor monitoring to Replace the following parts
ME2 check the SF1 status. in order named.
IP transport motor With a slip of paper or the like, ME2
block the SF1 light path to check DRV08A board
Y N
FR1H0061.EPS
Power OFF Power OFF
N Is SF1 installed normally? N
Error-related system block diagram Remove dust or soil from the
Install the sensor properly.
SNS08A CNF1 Is SF1 normal?
CN Power OFF
CN8 SF1 Y
AC IN CN5 CN13 Is the connector connection from N
SF1 to SNS08A board normal?
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
JPS-1 in order named.
CNZ10
Restart the machine SF1
CN2 CN3
ME2 and check its status. SNS08A board
CN15
FR1H0063.EPS
DRV08A CNME2
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0062.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D2 Switchback Conveyance Error 03D2

Preliminary steps:
After SF1 is turned ON, the IP is conveyed toward the inverting stocker, but SF2 cannot 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
detect ON/OFF.
Power OFF
Supplementary explanation N
Is the drive system of the after-
The IP conveyed from the after-reading conveyor is conveyed toward the inverting stocker reading conveyor normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Rotate the MF1 driving belt by Belt/belt tension MF1
of the erasure conveyor. Grip release mechanism
hand to check that it rotates IP transport motor
(should be gripped)
When the IP is conveyed to the erasure conveyor, it passes from SF1 to SF2 to SF4 in smoothly.
Conveyor roller/shaft
this order. Y /bearing
After the IP passes over SF2, the path changeover guide is activated to switch the Power OFF
conveyance direction to the erasure unit. Is the drive system of the erasure
N
Adjust/replace the following
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF2 (SF2 status does not transition from conveyor normal?
parts.
Rotate the MF1 driving belt by
OFF to ON) or when it does not completely pass over SF2 (SF2 status does not transition hand to check that it rotates Belt/belt tension
Conveyor roller/shaft
from ON to OFF during the above operation. Alternatively, this error occurs when the IP smoothly.
/bearing
passes over SF4 (SF4 status transitions from ON to OFF). Y Reference: When operating the erasure conveyor by
hand, the procedures are facilitated by The screw is tightened in place.
removing the belt that connects the erasure FR1H0066.EPS
conveyor and before-side-positioning

Power OFF conveyor.
Error-related I/O locations N
Is the drive gear of MF1 installed
properly? Install it properly.
SOLA3
MF1 Y
IP transport motor SOLA4
Power ON Power OFF
N N
Do ME2/MF1 rotate along with Are the connector
SF2 the conveyor rollers during connections from MF1 to Check the error-related system
Changeover IP sensor initialization self-diagnostics? DRV08A to JPS-1 board block diagram and connect the
normal? connectors as appropriate.
Y
SF1 Y
After-reading conveyance Power ON
standby IP sensor
Is SF2 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute Replace the following
sensor monitoring to check the SF2 parts in order named.
status. MF1
the SF2 light path to check that the
FR1H0064.EPS sensor status is as follows.
Y N
SNS08A CNF1 Power OFF Power OFF

CN N
CN8 SF1 Remove dust or soil from the N Is SF2 installed normally? Install the sensor properly.
AC IN CN5 CN13
DC OUT2 CN4 Is SF2 normal?
SF2 Power OFF
DRV03D
CN3 CN2 Y N
Is the connector connection Check the error-related system
from SF2 to SNS08A board block diagram and connect the
JPS-1
CNF2 normal? connectors as appropriate.
CN2 CN3
CN10 MF1 Y
DRV08A CNMF1
DC OUT3 CN1 Restart the machine in order named.
and check its status. SF2
SNS08A board
FR1H0065.EPS
FR1H0067.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D3 Before-Erasure Conveyance Error 03D3

Preliminary steps:
After the IP is conveyed into the inverting stocker, it is conveyed toward the erasure con- 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
veyor, but SF2 does not turn ON.
Power OFF
The IP conveyed from the after-reading conveyor is conveyed into the inverting stocker of N Adjust/replace the following parts.
Is the drive system of the erasure
the erasure conveyor. conveyor normal? Belt/belt tension
Two upper rollers
After the IP passes over SF2 (SF2: ON to OFF), SOLF1 is driven and the path Rotate the MF1 driving belt to
Grip spring
check that it rotates smoothly.
changeover guide is activated.
As the path changeover guide is activated, the IP conveyance direction is switched to the Reference: When operating the erasure conveyor by
hand, the procedures are facilitated by
erasure lamp unit. Y removing the belt that connects the erasure
conveyor and before-side-positioning conveyor.
After the conveyance direction is switched, the IP is conveyed toward the erasure lamp by Power ON
the driving of MF1, and the IP passes over SF2 again. (SF2: OFF to ON) Does MF1 rotate along with the
conveyor roller during initialization
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF2 (SF2 status does not transition from self-diagnostics?
OFF to ON) after the activation of the path changeover guide during the above operation. Y N
Power OFF
Are the connector
connections from MF1 to N
DRV08A to JPS-1 board Check the error-related system
Error-related I/O locations normal? block diagram and connect the
Power ON connectors as appropriate.
SOLA3 Is SF2 normal? Y
MF1
SOLA4 With "6. MECH" of M-Utility,
IP transport motor
execute sensor monitoring to
check the SF2 status. Replace the following
With a slip of paper or the like, parts in order named.
SF4 MF1
Overrun IP sensor block the SF2 light path to check
that the sensor status is as follows. DRV08A board
SF2 Light transmitted: "open"
Changeover IP sensor
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF
N Is SF2 installed normally? N
Remove dust or soil from
Install the sensor properly.
the sensor. Power ON again
to execute sensor monitoring. Y
Is SF2 normal?
Power OFF
FR1H0068.EPS

Y
Error-related system block diagram from SF2 to SNS08A board Check the error-related system
normal? block diagram and connect the
SNS08A CNF1 Y
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN8 SF4
CF4
in order named.
Restart the machine
DC OUT2 CN4 SF2 SF2
DRV03D SNS08A board
JPS-1
CNF2
CN2 CN3
MF1
CN10
DRV08A CNMF1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0069.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D4 Branch Path Changeover Guide Operation Error 03D4

Preliminary steps:
After SOLF1 is activated, the IP is conveyed toward the erasure lamp, but SF1 turns ON. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
Power ON
The IP conveyed from the after-reading conveyor is conveyed into the inverting stocker of Check for any remaining IP left
N
Is SF1 normal?
the erasure conveyor. in the erasure conveyor. With "6. MECH" of M-Utility,
Does the IP block the SF1 light execute sensor monitoring to
After the IP passes over SF2 (SF2: ON to OFF), SOLF1 is driven and the path path? check the SF1 status.
changeover guide is activated. Y With a slip of paper or the like,
block the SF1 light path to
As the path changeover guide is activated, the IP conveyance direction is switched to the Power OFF check that the sensor status is
erasure lamp unit. Is the path changeover of the erasure conveyor
as follows.
normal?
After the conveyance direction is switched, the IP is conveyed toward the erasure lamp by Actuates the SOLF1 solenoid by hand to check
the driving of MF1, and the IP passes over SF2 again. (SF2: OFF to ON) that it actuates smoothly.
Also make sure that tension is applied by the Y
This error occurs when the IP passes over SF1 (SF1: OFF to ON) during the above spring.
N
operation. (Normally, SF1 does not turn ON once the path is changed.) Power OFF
N
Remove dust or
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open soil from the
SOLF1/path changeover guide sensor. Power ON
Y SOLF1 spring again to execute
Error-related I/O locations Power ON sensor monitoring.
Is SF1 normal?
SOLA4 Does SOLF1 operates during
initializations self-diagnostics? Y N
SOLF1 Branch path changeover guide drive Y N Power OFF

Power OFF
SF1 Is SF1 installed Install the sensor properly.
After-reading conveyance Are the following connector normally? N
standby IP sensor connections normal?
SOLF1 DRV08A JPS-1
Y N Y
Power OFF
Replace the following Check the error-related Is the connector
parts in order named. system block diagram connection from SF1 N Check the error-related
SOLF1 and connect the connectors to SNS08A board system block diagram
DRV08A board as appropriate. normal? and connect the connectors
FR1H0071.EPS as appropriate.
Y
Error-related system block diagram Replace the following

parts in order named.
Restart the machine SF1
SNS08A CNF1 and check its status. SNS08A board
CN FR1H0073.EPS
SOLF1 spring
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
JPS-1
CNSOLF1
CN2 CN3
SOLF1
CN11
DRV08A
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0072.EPS
FR1H0074.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D5 Erasure Conveyance Error 03D5

Preliminary steps:
During erasure conveyance, SF2 remains ON, or SF3 does not turn ON, or OFF. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
The IP conveyed from the after-reading conveyor is conveyed into the inverting stocker of Is the drive system of the erasure
N Adjust/replace the following parts.
Belt/belt tension
the erasure conveyor. conveyor normal? Roller/grip spring
Rotate the MF1 driving belt to Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
After the IP passes over SF2 (SF2: ON to OFF), SOLF1 is driven and the path check that it rotates smoothly.
changeover guide is activated.
Y Reference: When operating the erasure conveyor by hand, the procedures
As the path changeover guide is activated, the IP conveyance direction is switched to the are facilitated by removing the belt that connects the erasure conveyor
erasure lamp unit. and before-side-positioning conveyor.
After the conveyance direction is switched, the IP is conveyed toward the erasure lamp by Power OFF
the driving of MF1, and the IP passes over SF2 again. (SF2: OFF to ON) N
Is there any foreign matter under
the erasure lamp? Remove any foreign matter.
The IP is conveyed as erased by the erasure lamp unit, and passes over SF3. (SF3: OFF Remove the erasure lamp and
to ON) check the conveyance path.
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF3 (SF3 status does not transition from Y
OFF to ON), or when it does not completely pass over SF3 (SF3 status does not transi- Power ON Power OFF
tion from ON to OFF), during the above operation. Alternatively, this error also occurs N N
Does MF1 rotate along with the Are the connector
when the IP does not completely pass over SF2 (SF2 status does not transition from ON conveyor roller during initialization connections from MF1 to Check the error-related system
to OFF). self-diagnostics? DRV08A to JPS-1 board block diagram and connect the
Y
Power ON
Error-related I/O locations Is SF2/SF3 normal?

With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, Replace the following
execute sensor monitoring to parts in order named.
SOLA3 check the SF2/SF3 status. MF1
MF1
IP transport motor SOLA4 With a slip of paper or the like, DRV08A board
block the SF2/SF3 light path to
SF3 Load standby IP sensor
check that the sensor status is
SF2 as follows.
Changeover IP sensor Light blocked: "close"
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF
N Is SF2/SF3 installed N
normally?
Is SF2/SF3 normal?
FR1H0075.EPS
Power OFF
Y N
Error-related system block diagram from SF2/SF3 to SNS08A Check the error-related
board normal?
Y appropriate.
SNS08A CNF1
CN
DC OUT2 CN4 SF3 and check its status. SF3/SF2
DRV03D
CN3 CN2 SNS08A board
FR1H0077.EPS
JPS-1
CNF2
CN2 CN3
MF1
CN10
DRV08A CNMF1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0076.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D6 After-Erasure Conveyance Error 03D6

Preliminary steps:
After erasure conveyance, SF3 does not turn OFF. Or, SF3 turns OFF, but SB2 does not turn 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
ON.
Power OFF
Are the drive systems of the
By the driving of MF1, the IP that was erasure conveyed completely passes over SF3. up-down IP removal unit/erasure
Belt/belt tension
conveyor normal?
(SF3: ON to OFF) Rotate the MB2/MC1/MF1 driving Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
belts to check that they rotate
After the erasure is completed, SOLC1 is driven to effect path changeover in order to smoothly.
convey the IP toward the cassette.
Y Reference: When operating the erasure conveyor by hand, the procedures
The IP is conveyed from the erasure conveyor toward the cassette by the driving of MC1, are facilitated by removing the belt that connects the erasure
conveyor and before-side-positioning conveyor.
and it passes over SB2. (SB2: OFF to ON) Power OFF
N
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF3 (SF3 status does not transition from Is the path changeover of the Adjust/replace the following parts.
before-side-positioning conveyor Path changeover guide/SOLC1
OFF to ON), or when the IP fails to pass over SB2 (SB2 status does not transition from normal?
OFF to ON) after it passes over SF3, during the above operation. Actuate SOLC1 by hand to check
that it actuates smoothly.
Y
Power ON Power OFF
Error-related I/O locations Do MB2 and MC1/MF1 rotate
N
Are the following connector N
along with the conveyor rollers connections normal? Check the error-related system
during initialization MB2, MC1 DRV08A JPS-1 board block diagram and connect the
SOLA3 self-diagnostics? MF1 DRV08A JPS-1 board
MF1 SF3 connectors as appropriate.
IP transport motor LoadSOLA4
standby Y
Y
IP sensor

MB2/MC1/MF1 (faulty motor only)
DRV08A board
Power ON Power OFF
MB2 Is SOLC1 normal?
N
Is the connector connection from N
IP transport motor With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, SOLC1 to DRV08A board normal? Check the error-related system
actuate SOLC1 for checking.
SB2 Cassette inlet MC1 block diagram and connect the
IP sensor IP transport motor Y connectors as appropriate.
SOLC1 Y
Power ON
Convergence path
changeover guide drive Are SB2/SF3 normal?
FR1H0078.EPS With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, Replace the following parts
execute sensor monitoring to check in order named.
the SB2/SF3 status. SOLC1
With a slip of paper or the like, DRV08A board
Error-related system block diagram block the sensor light path to check
CNB1 Light blocked: "close"
SNS08A Light transmitted: "open"
CN
Y N
CNB2
Power OFF Power OFF
DC OUT2 CN4 SF3 N Is SB2/SF3 installed N
DRV03D Remove dust or soil from the
CN3 CN2 normally? Install the sensor properly.
CNF1 sensor. Power ON again to
SOLC1 execute sensor monitoring. Y
JPS-1 Is SB2/SF3 normal?
CNB3 CNMB2
CNSOLC1 Power OFF
CN2 CN3 CN9 MB2 Check the error-related system
CN5 Is the connector connection N
Y block diagram and connect the
CNC2 CNMC1 from SB2/SF3 to SNS08A connectors as appropriate.
DRV08A board normal?
CN8 MC1
DC OUT3 CN1 Y
CN10
Restart the machine Replace the following
CNF2 MF1 and check its status. parts in order named.
CNMF1 FR1H0079.EPS SB2/SF3
SNS08A board
FR1H0080.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D7 Convergence Path Changeover Guide Operation Error 03D7

Preliminary steps:
During erasure conveyance, the IP turns ON SF3, so that SC2 is turned ON, but both SF3 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
and SC2 do not turn OFF.
Power OFF
Alternatively, SF3 turns OFF, but SC2 does not turn ON within a certain period of time. N
Is the drive system of the
Supplementary explanation before-side-positioning conveyor Adjust/replace the following parts.
normal? Belt/belt tension
By the driving of MF1, the IP that was erasure conveyed completely passes over SF3. Rotate the MF1 and MC1 Connection belt
driving belts by hand to check Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
(SF3: ON to OFF) Grip spring
that the conveyor rollers rotate
After the erasure is complete, SOLC1 is driven to effect path changeover in order to smoothly.
convey the IP toward the cassette. Y Connection belt
Power OFF
The IP conveyed from the erasure conveyor to the before-side-positioning conveyor N
passes over SC2. (SC2: OFF to ON) Is the path changeover of the
before-side-positioning conveyor Adjust/replace the following parts.
Path changeover guide
This error occurs when the IP does not completely pass over SC2 (SC2 status does not normal?
Actuate the SOLC1 by hand to
transition from ON to OFF) during the above operation. check that it actuates smoothly.
Power ON Power OFF

Error-related I/O locations Do MF1/MC1 rotate along with N
Are the following connector
N FR1H0083.EPS
the conveyor rollers during i connections normal? Check the error-related system
nitialization self-diagnostics? MF1 DRV08A block diagram and connect the
JPS-1 board connectors as appropriate.
Y
MC1 DRV08A
JPS-1 board
Y

MF1/MC1 (faulty motor only)
DRV08A board
SOLC1 Power ON Power OFF
Convergence path N N
Does SOLC1 actuate during Is the following connector
changeover guide drive
initialization self-diagnostics? connection normal? Check the error-related system
SOLC1 DRV08A block diagram and connect the
SC2 Y
JPS-1 connectors as appropriate.
Convergence standby
IP sensor FR1H0081.EPS
Power ON Y
Is SC2 normal?
Error-related system block diagram execute sensor monitoring to
in order named.
check the SC2/SC3 status.
SOLC1
DRV08A board
SNS08A CNF1 block the SC2 light path to
CN Power OFF Power OFF
check that the sensor status is N N
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN8 SC2 as follows. Remove dust or Is SC2 installed Install the sensor properly.
Light blocked: "close" soil from the sensor. normally? N
CNC1
Light transmitted: "open" Power ON again to
CN4 execute sensor Y
DC OUT2
DRV03D Y monitoring. Power OFF
CN3 CN2
Is SC2 normal? Is the connector
JPS-1 Y connection from N Check the error-related
CNSOLC1 SC2 to SNS08A system block diagram
CN2 CN3 board normal? and connect the connectors
SOLC1
CN9 as appropriate.
DRV08A Y
DC OUT3 CN1 Replace the following

FR1H0082.EPS SC2
Restart the machine
SNS08A board
FR1H0084.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D8 After-Reading Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error 03D8

Preliminary steps:
During initialization, an IP is detected in the machine as a result of IP search, and it is 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
conveyed toward the inverting stocker, but SF2 does not turn OFF, Or, SF2 does not turn
ON, and SF4 transitions from ON to OFF. Power OFF
N
Are the conveyance systems of the
Supplementary explanation erasure conveyor/after-reading Adjust/replace the following parts.
Belt/belt tension
During initialization, each motor is activated, and each sensor is used to search for any conveyor normal?
Shaft/bearing
Rotate the ME2 driving belt by hand
remaining IP left in the machine. to check that it rotates smoothly. Grip release mechanism
If any IP is detected in the machine, MF1 is driven to perform the IP ejection process. Y
The remaining IP detected is conveyed toward the inverting stocker of the erasure Power ON Power OFF
N
conveyor, and the IP passes over SF2 and SF4 in this order. Does ME2 rotate along with the N
Are the connector
conveyor roller during initialization connections from ME2 to
After the IP passes over SF2 (SF2: ON to OFF), the driving of MF1 is stopped. self-diagnostics? DRV08A to JPS-1 board
normal?
This error occurs when the IP does not completely pass over SF2 (SF2 status does not Y
transition from ON to OFF), or when the IP passes over SF4 (SF4: ON to OFF) without Y
Power ON
being detected by SF2, during the above operation. Is SF2/SF4 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute Replace the following parts
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open in order named.
sensor monitoring to check the
SF2/SF4 status. ME2
Error-related I/O locations the SF2/SF4 light path to check that
the sensor status is as follows.
MF1 IP transport motor
SOLA3 Light transmitted: "open"
SOLA4
Y N
SF4 Overrun IP sensor Power OFF Power OFF
SF2 Changeover IP sensor N
N Is SF2/SF4 installed
SF1 After-reading conveyance Remove dust or soil from the
normally? Install the sensor properly.
standby IP sensor sensor. Power ON again to
Is SF2/SF4 normal?
Power OFF
ME1 Grip release motor Y N
from SF2/SF4 to SNS08A
board normal?
and connect the connectors
Y as appropriate.
FR1H0085.EPS Replace the following parts

Error-related system block diagram and check its status. SF4/SF2 (faulty sensor)
SNS08A board
FR1H0087.EPS
SNS08A CNF1
CN
CN8 SF1
AC IN CN5 CN13
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D SF2
CN3 CN2
JPS-1
CNF2
CN2 CN3
CN10 MF1
DRV08A CNMF1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0086.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03D9 Erasure Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error 03D9

Preliminary steps:
Because SF2 is ON during initialization, the IP is conveyed to the erasure conveyor, but SF3 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
does not turn ON. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Or, because SF3 is ON, the IP is conveyed to the cassette set unit, but SF3 does not turn
OFF. Power OFF
N
Is the drive system of the erasure
Supplementary explanation conveyor normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Belt/belt tension
During initialization, each motor is activated, and each sensor is used to search for any Rotate the MF1 driving belts to check
Roller/grip spring
that it rotates smoothly.
remaining IP left in the machine. Conveyor roller/shaft/bearing
Y
The remaining IP is detected by SF4, SF2, and SF3 of the erasure conveyor, so the IP Reference: When operating the erasure conveyor by hand, the procedures are facilitated
by removing the belt that connects the erasure conveyor and before-side-positioning
ejection process is performed. conveyor.
When SF2 detects the IP, MF1 is driven to convey the IP toward the erasure lamp unit,
Power OFF
thereby causing it to pass over SF3. (SF3: OFF to ON) N
Is there any foreign matter
When SF3 detects the IP, MF1 is driven to convey the IP toward the cassette, thereby under the erasure lamp? Remove any foreign matter.
causing it to pass over SF3. (SF3: ON to OFF) Remove the erasure lamp and
check the conveyance path.
This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF3 (SF3: OFF to ON), or when it does
not completely pass over SF3 (SF3 status does not transition from ON to OFF), during
Power ON Power OFF
the above operation. N
N
Does MF1 rotate along with the Are the connector
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open conveyor roller during initialization connections from MF1 to
normal?
Y
Power ON
SOLA3 Is SF2/SF3 normal?

MF1 With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute Replace the following
IP transport motor SOLA4 sensor monitoring to check the SF2 parts in order named.
SF3 /SF3 status. MF1
Load standby IP sensor With a slip of paper or the like, block DRV08A board
SF2 the SF2/SF3 light path to check that
Changeover IP sensor the sensor status is as follows.
Y N
Power OFF Power OFF
N Is SF2/SF3 installed N
Remove dust or soil from
normally? Install the sensor properly.
the sensor. Power ON again to
Is SB2/SF3 normal?
Power OFF
FR1H0088.EPS
Y N
Error-related system block diagram from SF2/SF3 to DRV08A
board normal?
Y appropriate.
SNS08A CNF1
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN8 SF2 Replace the following
Restart the machine parts in order named.
and check its status. SF3/SF2
DC OUT2 CN4 SF3 DRV08A board
DRV03D FR1H0090.EPS
CN3 CN2
JPS-1
CNF2
CN2 CN3
MF1
CN10
DRV08A CNMF1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0089.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03DC After-Reading Conveyance Grip Operation Error 03DC

Preliminary steps:
SE1 does not turn ON during after-reading conveyance grip HP detection. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Power OFF
During IP conveyance, ME1 is driven in order to grip the after-reading conveyor. Is the drive gear of MF1 installed N
Install it properly.
When ME1 is driven, SE1 is turned ON/OFF by the actuator. properly?
Y
As SE1 turns ON, the HP is detected, resulting in the grip condition. As SE1 turns OFF,
the grip release condition is entered.
Power OFF
This error occurs when SE1 does not turn ON or OFF during the above operation. Is the grip release mechanism of the N
Alternatively, this error occurs when SE1 fails to detect ON/OFF during initialization. after-reading conveyor normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Rotate the cam by hand to check that Belt
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open it rotates smoothly. Grip release mechanism
Shaft/bearing
Y
SOLA4
Drive gear
Power OFF The screw is tightened
N
in place.
Is the sensor arm that blocks the SE1 Install it properly. FR1H0093.EPS
light path normal?
Y
ME1 Power ON Power OFF

Grip release motor N N
Does ME1 rotate along with the cam Are the connector
during initialization self-diagnostics? connections from ME1 to Check the error-related system
DRV08A to JPS-1 board block diagram and connect the
SE1 Y normal? connectors as appropriate.
Grip release HP sensor Y
FR1H0091.EPS
Replace the following

Error-related system block diagram parts in order named.
Power ON ME1
CNZ2 Is SE1 normal? DRV08A board
SNS08A
CN With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN9 SE1 sensor monitoring to check the SE1 Power OFF
N
status. Remove dust or soil from
Block the SE1 light path to check that the sensor. Power ON again
DC OUT2 CN4 the sensor status is as follows. to execute sensor
DRV03D Light blocked: "close" monitoring.
CN3 CN2 Light transmitted: "open" Is SE1 normal?
(The sensor status is "close" at the
JPS-1 home position.)
CNZ10 N
CN2 CN3
ME1 Y
CN15 Y
DRV08A CNME1 Power OFF
CN1 Is the connector N

DC OUT3 Check the error-related system
connection from
SE1 to SNS08A block diagram and connect the
FR1H0092.EPS board normal? connectors as appropriate.
Y
Restart the machine
SE1
SNS08A board
FR1H0094.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03DD Elevation HP Movement error 03DD

Preliminary steps:
SA17 does not turn ON during elevation HP detection. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Power OFF
During initialization, MD3 is driven to move the elevation unit, thereby turning ON SA17. N
Is the drive system of the up-down IP
As SA17 turns ON, the HP of the elevation unit is detected. removal unit normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Rotate the MB3 driving belt of the Installed condition of drive gear, damage, or wear on it
When SA17 turns ON, the elevation unit is subsequently moved for detection of SB3 elevation unit by hand to check that the Shaft/bearing
(shelf 1). elevation unit moves up and down Slide rails at both ends of elevation unit
smoothly.
This error occurs when SA17 does not turn ON during the above operation.
Y
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Power OFF
N
Is the actuator that blocks the SA17 light
Error-related I/O locations path normal?
Actuator
Y Cassette set unit position adjustment
MB3 Elevation unit position adjustment
Up-down drive motor
Power ON
Power ON
SB3 Is MB3 driven with the elevation unit N
activated during initialization N Are the connector
Each shelf connections from MB3 to Check the error-related system
position sensor self-diagnostics?
SA17 Y normal? connectors as appropriate.
Elevation Power ON Y
HP sensor
Is SA17 normal?
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute sensor
monitoring to check the SA17 status.
With a slip of paper or the like, block the
MB3
SA17 light path to check that the sensor
DRV08A board
status is as follows.
FR1H0095.EPS
Y
Error-related system block diagram Power OFF N Power OFF
N N
Remove dust or soil from the Is the connector connection
sensor. Power ON again to from SA17 to SNS08A board Check the error-related system
SNS08A block diagram and connect the
CN execute sensor monitoring. normal?
Is SA17 normal? connectors as appropriate.
AC IN CN5 CN13 Y
Y
DC OUT2 CN4 CN6 SA17 Replace the following
DRV03D
CN3 CN2 CNA2 parts in order named.
SA17
JPS-1 SNS08A board
CNB4
CN2 CN3
MB3
CN6 Restart the machine
DRV08A CNMD3 and check its status.
FR1H0097.EPS
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0096.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03DE Elevation Movement Error 03DE

Preliminary steps:
SB3 does not turn ON or OFF during elevation HP movement. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Power OFF
During initialization, MD3 is driven to move the elevation unit, thereby turning ON SA17. N
Is the drive system of the up-down IP
As SA17 turns ON, the HP of the elevation unit is detected. removal unit normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Rotate the MB3 driving belt of the Installed condition of drive gear, damage, or wear on it
When SA17 turns ON, the elevation unit is subsequently moved for detection of SB3 elevation unit by hand to check that the Shaft/bearing
Slide rails at both ends of elevation unit
(shelf 1). elevation unit moves up and down
smoothly.
The stop position of the elevation unit is determined as SB3 detects a transition from ON
Y
to OFF to ON.
Power OFF
This error occurs when SB3 does not turn ON, or when it does not transition from ON to N
Is the actuator that blocks the SB3 light
OFF to ON, during the above operation. path normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Actuator
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Y Cassette set unit position adjustment
Elevation unit position adjustment
Error-related I/O locations Power ON Power ON

N Are the connector N
MB3 Is MB3 driven with the elevation unit
connections from MB3 to Check the error-related system
Up-down drive motor activated during initialization
self-diagnostics?
SB3 Y
Y
Each shelf Power ON
position sensor
Is SB3 normal?
SA17 With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, execute sensor Replace the following
Elevation monitoring to check the SB3 status. parts in order named.
HP sensor With a slip of paper or the like, block the MB3
SB3 light path to check that the sensor DRV08A board
status is as follows.
Power OFF N Power OFF

N N
FR1H0098.EPS Remove dust or soil from the Is the connector connection
sensor. Power ON again to from SB3 to SNS08A board Check the error-related system
Error-related system block diagram execute sensor monitoring. normal? block diagram and connect the
Is SB3 normal? Y
SNS08A CNB1 Y
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN7 SB3 Replace the following
CNB2
SB3
SNS08A board
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
Restart the machine
JPS-1 and check its status.
CNB4
FR1H0100.EPS
CN2 CN3
MB3
CN6
DRV08A CNMD3
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0099.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
03E8 Suction Cup Movement Operation Error 03E8

Preliminary steps:
SB1 does not turn ON or OFF during suction cup HP detection. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Power OFF
The suction cups are moved by the driving of MB1, thereby turning ON SB1. Is the drive system of the IP removal
N
In order to detect the suction cup HP, SB1s transition from ON to OFF to ON is detected unit normal? Adjust/replace the following parts.
Installed condition of MB1
Move the suction cups by hand to check
to confirm the suction cup position. that there is nothing abnormal with them. Suction arm (deformation, misaligned parallelism, misaligned
Also rotate the MB1 driving belt by hand phase, loosened screw, etc.)
MB1 is driven, and the suction cups are stopped at an accurate position by pulse driving. to check that the suction cups move Shaft/bearing at both ends of IP removal arm
Link arm at both ends of IP removal arm (deformation, foreign
This error occurs when SB1 does not turn ON, or when it does not transition from ON to smoothly.
matter trapped, etc.)
OFF to ON, during the above operation. Y Side plate (deformation, foreign matter trapped, etc.)
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Power ON Power OFF

Does MB1 rotate during initialization N N
Are the connector connections
self-diagnostics? Check the error-related
from MB1 to DRV08A to
Error-related I/O locations DCOUT3 of JPS-1 board
Y connect the connectors as
normal?
appropriate.
Power ON Y
Is SB1 normal?
MB1 Suction cup driving motor
sensor monitoring to check the SB1
status.
MB1
With a slip of paper or the like, block
DRV08A board
the SB1 light path to check that the
SB1 Y N
Suction cup
HP sensor
Power OFF
FR1H0101.EPS execute sensor monitoring.
Is SB1 normal?
Power OFF
Error-related system block diagram Is the actuator that blocks Y N
the SB1 light path normal? N Power OFF
Make sure that it is free SB1 sensor position
SNS08A CNB1 from distortion or twisting. adjustment Is the connector N
CN Check the error-related
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN7 SB1 Y Actuator adjustment connection from system block diagram and
SB1 to SNS08A connect the connectors as
CNB2 board normal? appropriate.
Y
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
CN3 CN2
Restart the machine Replace the following
JPS-1 parts in order named.
CNB3 and check its status.
CN2 CN3 SB1
CN5 MB1 SNS08A board
FR1H0103.EPS
DRV08A CNMB1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0102.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13A1 Cassette Setting Error 13A1

Preliminary steps:
The cassette is inserted into the cassette set unit, but SA3, 7, 11 and 15 do not turn OFF. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
When the cassette is inserted into the cassette set unit, either SA2, 6, 10 or 14 (relevant Power OFF
shelf) is turned ON. Are the hold pin holes the cassettes N
Replace the cassette
normal?
To hold the cassette inserted, SOLA1-4 are turned OFF.
Y
As SOLA1-4 turn OFF, the hold pin is raised, so that SA3, 7, 11, and 15 turn ON, thereby Power OFF
detecting the hold. Is the operation of the solenoid arm
and hold pin normal? N
This error occurs when SOLA1-4 turn OFF but SA3, 7, 11, and 15 fail to turn ON so that Lower the solenoid arm by hand to
Adjust/replace the solenoid portion.
the cassette hold cannot be detected during the above operation. check that it strokes properly.
Power OFF
Error-related I/O locations Are SA2, 6, 10, 14 (relevant shelf) N
Adjust SA2, 6, 10, 14.
installed normally?
Hold pin Y
Power ON Power OFF

SA3, 7, 11, 15 Are SOLA1-4 (relevant shelf) turned N Is the connector connection N
Cassette hold sensor ON and the hold pin released during between SOLA1-4 Check the error-related
initialization self-diagnostics? (relevant shelf) and DRV08A system block diagram and
SOLA14 board normal? connect the connectors
Cassette hold solenoid Y as appropriate.
Y
Power ON
SOLA14 ON :SA3, 7, 11, 15 OPEN
SOLA14 OFF:SA3, 7, 11, 15 CLOSE Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 (relevant Replace the following
SOLA1
shelf) normal? parts in order named.
SOLA2 Refer to section 4.6 of the MC volume SOLA14 (relevant shelf)
SOLA3 to perform sensor checks. DRV08A board
SOLA4 Power OFF
Y N
SF3 Remove dust or soil from the
FR1H0104.EPS
SOLF1 sensors. Power ON again to
Error-related system block diagram Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 normal?
Y N
SNS08A CNA2
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN6
SA3/7/11/15 Power OFF

DC OUT2 CN4 Are the connector
DRV03D CNSOLA1 connections from N
CN3 CN2 SA3, 7, 11, and 15
SOLA1 system block diagram and
to SNS08A board
JPS-1 connect the connectors
CNA3 normal?
as appropriate.
CN2 CN3 Y
CN4 SOLA2
CNSOLA2 Restart the machine
DRV08A and check its status. Replace the following
SOLA3 parts in order named. FR1H0106.EPS
DC OUT3 CN1 SA3, 7, 11, 15 (relevant shelf)
CNSOLA3 SNS08A board
SOLA4
CNSOLA4
FR1H0105.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
13A2 Cassette Hold Release Error 13A2

Preliminary steps:
Because the IP is returned into the cassette, SOLA1-4 are turned ON to release the 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
cassette hold, but SA3, 7, 11, or 15 does not turn OFF, so that the cassette hold cannot be
detected.
Power OFF
Supplementary explanation Are the hold pin holes for all the
N
cassettes normal?
In order to release the cassette hold, SOLA1-4 are turned ON. Check to ensure that there is no
Replace the cassette
As SOLA1-4 turn ON, the hold pin is withdrawn, and SA3, 7, 11, and 15 turn OFF, so that flash, deformation, or foreign matter.
the hold pin release is detected. Y

Power OFF
This error occurs when either SA3, 7, 11, or 15 does not turn OFF (a shelf where the
Is the operation of the solenoid arm
cassette hold cannot be released) during the above operation. and hold pin normal?
N
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Lower the solenoid arm by hand to
check that it strokes properly.
Y
Power ON Power OFF
Hold pin Are SOLA1-4 turned ON and the hold N Is the fuse NFB1 of the SNS08A N
Reset the NFB1.
pin released during initialization self- board normal?
diagnostics?
SA3, 7, 11, 15 Y
Y
SOLA14 Power OFF
N Check the error-related
Cassette hold solenoid Are the connector connections system block diagram and
between SOLA1-4 and connect the connectors
SOLA14 ON :SA3, 7, 11, 15 OPEN DRV08A board normal? as appropriate.
SOLA1 SOLA14 OFF:SA3, 7, 11, 15 CLOSE Y
SOLA2 Power OFF
SOLA3 N
Is the fuse (F10) in the power Replace the following parts.
SOLA4 supply unit (JPS-1) nomral? Fuse (F10)
SF3 Power supply unit
FR1H0107.EPS Power ON Y
SOLF1
Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 normal?
Error-related system block diagram Refer to section 4.6 of the MC volume Replace the DRV08A board.
to perform sensor checks.
Y N
SNS08A CNA2
CN Power OFF
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN6
SA3/7/11/15 sensors. Power ON again to
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D CNSOLA1 Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 normal?
CN3 CN2
SOLA1 Y N
JPS-1 CNA3
CN2 CN3
CN4 SOLA2 Power OFF
DRV08A CNSOLA2 Are the connector N

connections from Check the error-related system
SOLA3 block diagram and connect the
DC OUT3 CN1 SA3, 7, 11, and 15
CNSOLA3 to SNS08A board connectors as appropriate.
normal?
SOLA4
Y
CNSOLA4
FR1H0108.EPS Restart the machine Replace the SNS08A board.
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
13A3 Cassette Shelf Error 13A3

Preliminary steps:
During cassette ejection for initialization or at the end of initialization, cassette hold release 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
is effected (SOLA1-4 are turned ON), but either SA3, 7, 11 or 15 fails to turn OFF, so that the
cassette hold release cannot be achieved.
Power OFF
Are the hold pin holes the cassettes Replace the cassette
If there is a cassette during initialization: normal?
During cassette ejection, SOLA1-4 are turned ON to effect cassette hold release. Y
Power OFF
As SOLA1-4 turn ON, the hold pin is lowered, so that SA3, 7, 11, and 15 are turned OFF, Is the operation of the relevant shelf
thereby detecting the hold pin release. solenoid arm and hold pin normal? N
Lower the solenoid arm by hand to
This error occurs when either of the relevant shelves (SA3, 7, 11, 15) fails to turn OFF so check that it strokes properly.
that the cassette hold release cannot be achieved during the above operation. Y
If there is no cassette during initialization: Power ON Power OFF
During initialization, SOLA1-4 are turned ON to effect cassette hold release. Are SOLA1-4 (relevant shelf) turned N Is the connector connection N
ON and the hold pin released during between SOLA1-4 (relevant Check the error-related
As SOLA1-4 turn ON, the hold pin is lowered, so that SA3, 7, 11, and 15 are turned OFF, initialization self-diagnostics? shelf) and DRV08A board system block diagram and
thereby detecting the hold pin release. Y
normal? connect the connectors
as appropriate.
This error occurs when either of SA3, 7, 11, and 15 fails to turn OFF so that the cassette Y
hold release cannot be achieved during the above operation. Power ON

Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 (relevant parts in order named.
Reference: If all of SA3, 7, 11 and 15 do not turn OFF during the above operation, level 0 shelf) normal? SOLA14 (relevant shelf)
error degeneration for all shelves occurs. Refer to section 4.6 of the MC DRV08A board
volume to perform sensor checks.
Y N Power OFF
Error-related I/O locations sensors. Power ON again to
Are SA3, 7, 11, and 15 normal?
Hold pin
Y N
SA3, 7, 11, 15
SOLA14
Cassette hold solenoid Power OFF
Are the connector
SOLA14 ON :SA3, 7, 11, 15 OPEN N
connections from Check the error-related
SOLA1 SOLA14 OFF :SA3, 7, 11, 15 CLOSE
SOLA2
SA3, 7, 11, and 15 system block diagram and
SOLA3
Cassette hold solenoid to SNS08A board connect the connectors
SOLA4
normal? as appropriate.
SF3 Y
FR1H0110.EPS
SOLF1
Restart the machine
and check its status. Replace the following
Error-related system block diagram parts in order named.
SA3, 7, 11, 15 (relevant shelf)
SNS08A board
SNS08A CNA2 FR1H0112.EPS
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN6
SA3/7/11/15
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D CNSOLA1
CN3 CN2
SOLA1
JPS-1 CNA3
CN2 CN3
CN4 SOLA2
DRV08A CNSOLA2
SOLA3
DC OUT3 CN1
CNSOLA3
SOLA4
CNSOLA4
FR1H0111.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
13A9 Barcode Read Error 13A9

Preliminary steps:
The barcode of the IP conveyed cannot be read. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Power OFF
The barcode of the IP that is set is read during feed conveyance. Is the IP normal?
The barcode is read by the BCR of the side-positioning conveyor. Make sure that it is not curled
N
or bent. Replace the IP.
This error occurs when the barcode of the IP cannot be read during the above operation. Make sure that the barcode
display portion is free of soil.
Y
BCR barcode reader

Power OFF
SC2 SC1
Is the BCR reading face normal? N
Make sure that the BCR reading Clean the BCR reading face.
face is free of soil.
Y
Power ON Power OFF

Is the BCR reading face is lit? N Are the connector N
Make sure that the BCR reading connections from BCR to
face is lit in red. SNS08A board normal?
connect the connectors
Y Y as appropriate.
FR1H0113.EPS
Error-related system block diagram Replace the following

BCR
SNS08A Restart the machine SNS08A board
CN and check its status. FR1H0115.EPS
AC IN CN5 CN13
CNZ1
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03DCN22 BCR
JPS-1 CN1 CN2
FR1H0114.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13AA/23AA Erasure Lamp Failure 13AA/23AA

Preliminary steps:
During initialization or during erasure conveyance, the erasure lamp unlit condition is 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
detected.
Supplementary explanation START
The erasure lamp, which consists of five fluorescent lamps, is turned on to erasure the Y
data of the IP. N
N
Replace any bad erasure lamp.
Are the erasure lamps normal? Is the resistance between the
This error occurs when the unlit condition or blinking condition of any one of the With 4. ELECTRICAL of M-Utility, electrode ends of each erasure
check for improper erasure lamp lamp 20.5 ?
fluorescent lamps is detected during the above operation.
illumination. Y
Y N
Error-related I/O locations Are the erasure lamps blackened? Is the connector/cable connection
SOLA4 between the power supply unit
Y (JPS-1) ACOUT2/ACOUT3 and
LAMP15 erasure lamp assembly normal?
Replace any bad erasure lamp.
Y N
Replace the cable.
N
Is +24 V present between power N Is the connector/cable connection Replace the cable.
supply unit (JPS-1) DCOUT between the power supply unit
terminals 4-1 and 4-3? (JPS-1) DCOUT4 and thermal
switch (TSW1) normal?
Y
Y
FR1H0116.EPS

Is +24 V present between power N Is the power supply unit (JPS-1) N Are the connector/cable connections
Power supply unit (JPS-1) Erasure unit supply unit (JPS-1) DCOUT fuse (F5) normal? among the power supply unit
terminals 5-1 and 5-2? (JPS-1) DCOUT5, thermal switch
(TSW2), and erasure fan (FANF1)
TSW2 FANF1 Y Y
DC OUT5 normal?
F5
AC IN +24V Replace the power supply unit (JPS-1). Y N
Replace the cable.
Replace the fuse (F5).

DC OUT4 TSW1
+24V
Is +24 V present between power N Is the fan (FANF1) normal? N Replace the following parts:
supply unit (JPS-1) DCOUT It is normal as far as it operates Fan (FANF1)
LAMP terminals 4-2 and 4-3? for temperature control. Thermal switch (TSW2)
AC OUT1 15
+24V Y Y
DCOUT2
Inverter
AC OUT2 Replace the thermal switch (TSW1).
N
Is the SNS08A board fuse (F1/F3) N Is the connector/cable connection Replace the cable.
CN5 normal? between the power supply unit
(JPS-1) CN5 and SNS08A board
Y CN13 normal?
SNS08A
Y
F13 CN4 F1 F3 CN13 Replace the SNS08A board.

+5V
N
Y
FR1H0117.EPS
OK
FR1H0118.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13AB Overexposed IP Unerased 13AB

Preliminary steps:
Because the IP dosage detected during reading is greater than 400 mR, it is detected as 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
overexposure.
Power ON
Does an error occurs when another N
While the IP is read by the subscanning unit, its IP dosage is also checked. IP (IP with different dosage) is used?
Leave the error-causing IP alone for about 16 hours,
and then perform primary erasure before using it.
The exposed IP is erased by the erasure conveyor. Y
This error occurs when an IP dosage of 400 mR or greater is detected during the above Power ON
operation. Is the sensitivity setting proper? N
From M-Utility, select "2. CONFIGURATION SETTING"
and "1. SYSTEM" in sequence to change the sensitivity setting
Y (SFC/SFD).

PMT board
SCN board FR1H0119.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13AC ID Information Not Registered 13AC

Preliminary steps:
The ID corresponding to the IDT is checked during IP reading conveyance, but it has not 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
been registered yet. Power ON
Supplementary explanation Is the relevant ID card is read by N
Enter the ID information
the ID terminal?
Before IP reading conveyance is performed, the ID card of the patient is read by the ID
terminal. Y
The barcode in the cassette exposed is read by the barcode reader of the ID terminal.
IP reading conveyance is performed. Power OFF
The barcode of the IP is read by the barcode reader of the side-positioning conveyor, and Is the IP normal? N
Make sure that the barcode Clean the IP barcode indication.
is checked against the ID information read by the ID terminal for confirmation. indication is free of soil.
This error occurs when the patients ID has not yet registered in the IDT during the above Y
operation.
Power OFF
Clean the BCR reading face.
Make sure that the BCR reading
Restart the machine

05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13AD IP with Improper Generation or Type Detected 13AD

CAUTION: Before remedying this error, remove the cause of the before-reading error and then troubleshoot the 03B5 error.
Cause
Preliminary steps:
The barcode of the IP conveyed is read, but the spec of the IP type is different. 1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers.
Supplementary explanation 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
The barcode of the IP is read by the BCR of the side-positioning conveyor to determine Power OFF
the IP type. Is the IP generation within spec? N
Make sure that the IP type Replace the IP.
The IP type supported shall be type V. complies with type V.
This error occurs when an IP type other than type V is detected during the above Y
operation.
Power OFF
Is the IP normal? N
BCR barcode reader Make sure that the barcode Clean or replace the IP.
indication is free of soil.
SC2 SC1
Y
Power OFF
Make sure that the BCR reading Clean the BCR reading face.
Y
FR1H0121.EPS
Restart the machine
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13AE No MPM Code Available 13AE

Preliminary steps:
An attempt is made to perform image processing with the information of the patient exposed, 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
but no relevant image processing conditions of the machine are found.
Power ON
Does the exposure information of Check the exposure information of the patient and the image
The exposure information of the patient (exposure anatomical region, exposure menu, the patient correspond to the processing of the machine, and execute it again.
image processing conditions of
modality) is inputted to the ID terminal via an ID card. the machine?
During IP reading conveyance, the barcode of the IP is read by the BCR of the side- Y
positioning conveyor to search for image processing corresponding to the exposure
information of the patient.
Power OFF
This error occurs when image processing corresponding to the exposure information of
the patient is not found. Is the IP normal? N
Make sure that the barcode Clean the IP barcode indication.
indication is free of soil.
Y
Power OFF
Clean the BCR reading face.
Make sure that the BCR reading
Restart the machine

05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13AF IDT Line Error 13AF

Preliminary steps:
During IP reading conveyance, the IDT is inquired about the relevant ID, but there is no 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
response from the IDT.
Power OFF
Is the IDT connected properly to N
Connect the IDT to the machine and execute it again.
Before IP reading conveyance is performed, the ID card of the patient is read by the ID the machine?
Make sure that the modular jack is
terminal. Y
connected on the machine and
The barcode in the cassette exposed is read by the barcode reader of the ID terminal. IDT sides as appropriate.
IP reading conveyance is performed. Y
The IP barcode is read by the barcode reader of the side-positioning conveyor, and is
checked against the ID information read by the ID terminal for confirmation.
Power OFF
This error occurs when there is no response from the IDT when the IDT is inquired about Is the cable connecting between N
the patients ID during the above operation. Replace the connection cable.
the machine and IDT normal?
Make sure that the cable is free of
defect.
Restart the machine

05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13E1 Feed IP Suction Error 13E1

Preliminary steps:
To convey the IP in the cassette, PB1 is turned ON to suck the IP with the suction cups, but 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
SB5 does not turn ON.
Power OFF
Is the IP normal? N
To suck the IP in the cassette, the suction cups are moved from the home position toward Make sure that its sucked surface Clean or replace the IP.
the cassette by the driving of MB1. is not soiled, curled, or bent.
Y
To suck the IP with the suction cups, PB1 is turned ON.
Power OFF
When the suction of the IP by the suction cups is detected, SB5 is turned ON.
With the cassette set in the N
This error occurs when SB5 does not turn ON during the above operation. relevant shelf, does the cassette
Movable roll
cover open properly?
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Hold pin
Y Cassette
Power OFF
Are the suction cups of the IP
removal unit normal? N
Check if the suction cups are
Clean/adjust/replace the following parts.
installed properly.
Suction cup rubber
Check the suction cups for any
Suction cup hose
soil or deformation.
Y
Power OFF
SB5
Suction sensor Is the drive mechanism of the IP
Move the suction cup arm by
Suction cup arm/shaft/bearing
hand to check that it moves
PB1 smoothly.
IP suction
Y
Power ON Power OFF
Does PB1 rotate during N Are the connector connections N
initialization self-diagnostics? from PB1 to DRV08A to JPS-1
block diagram and connect
FR1H0125.EPS board normal?
Y the connectors as appropriate.
Y
Error-related system block diagram Power ON
Is SB5 normal?
SNS08A CNB1 execute sensor monitoring to in order named.
CN PB1
CN7 SB5 check the SB5 status.
AC IN CN5 CN13 DRV08A board
Y N
CNB2
DC OUT2 CN4 Power OFF
DRV03D N
CN3 CN2 Is SB5 installed normally? Install the sensor properly.
Y
JPS-1
Power OFF
CN2 CN3 N
CNB4 CNPB1 block diagram and connect
DRV08A normal?
the connectors as appropriate.
CN6 PB1 Y
DC OUT3 CN1 Restart the machine
FR1H0126.EPS Replace the following parts
in order named. FR1H0127.EPS
SB5
SNS08A board
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13E2 Feed IP Dropped/13E5 Load IP Dropped 13E2/13E5

Preliminary steps:
13E2: While the IP is being sucked and conveyed by the suction cups, SB5 is turned OFF. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
13E5: While the IP that has been loaded is being sucked and conveyed into the cassette,
Power OFF
SB5 is turned OFF.
Is the IP normal? N
Supplementary explanation Make sure that its sucked surface Clean or replace the IP.
is not soiled, curled, or bent.
13E2:
Y
The IP in the cassette is sucked and conveyed so that the IP is fed to the grip roller. Power OFF
While the IP is sucked by the suction cups, SB5 is ON. Are the suction cups of the IP
N
This error occurs when SB5 is turned OFF while the IP is being moved by predetermined removal unit normal?
Check if the suction cups are
Suction cup rubber
pulses to the grip rollers during the above operation. installed properly. Suction cup retaining screw
Check the suction cups for any
13E5: soil or deformation.
The IP that has been loaded is sucked and conveyed back into the cassette. Y
While the IP is sucked by the suction cups, SB5 is ON. Power OFF
This error occurs when SB5 is turned OFF while the IP is being moved by predetermined Is the air hose of the IP removal
pulses to the grip roller during the above operation. unit normal? N
Check if the air hose/hose joint Air hose
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open are installed properly. Hose joint
Y
Power ON Power OFF
N N
Is SB5 normal? Is SB5 installed normally? Install the sensor properly.
execute sensor monitoring to Y
check the SB5 status.
Power OFF
Y
Check the error-related system block
from SB5 to SNS08A board diagram and connect the connectors
SB5 normal?
Suction sensor as appropriate.
Y
Restart the machine Replace the following parts

and check its status. in order named.
FR1H0130.EPS
SB5
SNS08A board
FR1H0128.EPS
SNS08A CNB1
CN
CNB2
DC OUT2 CN4
DRV03D
JPS-1
FR1H0129.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13E3 IP Grip Error 13E3

Preliminary steps:
The IP that has been sucked and conveyed from the cassette is fed to the grip roller, but SB2 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
does not turn ON.
Power OFF
Is the IP normal?
The IP that has been sucked and conveyed from the cassette is fed to the grip roller. Make sure that it is not soiled,
N
Replace the IP.
curled, or bent.
The IP fed to the grip roller is conveyed to SB2 by the driving of MB2.
Y
As SB2 turns ON, the leading edge of the IP is detected.
This error occurs when the IP is fed to the grip roller but SB2 does not turn ON during the Power OFF
above operation. Is the drive mechanism of the

IP removal unit normal?
Sensor related ON: Close, OFF: Open Rotate the MB2 driving belt by N
hand to check that the conveyor
Belt/belt tension
roller rotates smoothly.
Power OFF Power OFF

Does MB2 rotate along with the N Are the connector connections N
conveyor roller during initialization from MB2 to DRV08A to JPS-1
self-diagnostics? board normal?
Y Y as appropriate.
Power ON
Is SB2 normal? Replace the following parts
With "6. MECH" of M-Utility, in order named.
execute sensor monitoring to MB2
MB2
check the SB2 status. DRV08A board
IP transport motor
block the SB2 light path to check
SB2
Cassette inlet
IP sensor
Y N
FR1H0131.EPS
Power OFF Power OFF
Remove dust or soil N Is the connector connection N
Error-related system block diagram from the sensor. Power from SB2 to SNS08A board
ON again to execute normal?
sensor monitoring. as appropriate.
Y
SNS08A CNB1 Is SB2 normal?
CN
Y Replace the following parts
CNB2 in order named.
DC OUT2 SB2
CN4
DRV03D SNS08A board
Restart the machine
CN3 CN2
CNMB2
JPS-1
CNB3 MB2
CN2 CN3
CN5
DRV08A
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0132.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
13E4 Load IP Suction Error 13E4

Preliminary steps:
To return into the cassette the IP that has been load conveyed, PB1 is turned ON to suck the 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and if any, remove it all.
IP with the suction cups, but SB5 does not turn ON.
Power OFF
Is the IP normal? N
The IP that has been erasure conveyed is conveyed through the before-side-positioning Make sure that its sucked surface Clean/replace the IP.
conveyor to the up-down IP removal unit. is not soiled, curled, or bent.
To suck the IP that is conveyed to the IP removal unit, the suction cups are moved from Y
the load standby position to the load suction position by the driving of MB1. Power OFF
To suck the IP with the suction cups, PB1 is turned ON. Are the suction cups of the IP
When the suction of the IP by the suction cups is detected, SB5 turns ON. Check if the suction cups are Suction cup rubber
installed properly. Suction cup hose
This error occurs when SB5 does not turn ON during the above operation. Check the suction cups for any
soil or deformation.
Y

Is the drive mechanism of the IP
Move the suction cup arm by Suction cup arm/shaft/bearing
hand to check that it moves
smoothly.
SB5 Power ON Power OFF

Suction sensor
Does PB1 rotate along during N Are the connector N
connections from PB1 to Check the error-related
initialization self-diagnostics?
DRV08A to JPS-1 board normal? system block diagram
PB1 Y and connect the connectors
IP suction Y as appropriate.
Power ON
Is SB5 normal?
execute sensor monitoring to in order named.
check the SB5 status. PB1
FR1H0134.EPS DRV08A board
Y N
Error-related system block diagram Power OFF
N
Is SB5 installed normally? Install the sensor properly.
SNS08A CNB1 Y
CN
AC IN CN5 CN13 CN7 SB5 Power OFF
CNB2 Check the error-related
DC OUT2 system block diagram
CN4 normal?
DRV03D and connect the connectors
CN3 CN2 Y as appropriate.
JPS-1
CN2 CN3 Restart the machine Replace the following parts
and check its status. in order named.
CNB4 CNPB1 SB5 FR1H0136.EPS
DRV08A SNS08A board
CN6 PB1
DC OUT3 CN1
FR1H0135.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
2.4.2 Cable Check Flow Checking Whether the Cable Is in a Short Circuit or Ground Fault Condition
Make measurements between all connector pins and frame.
Analysis Flow Machine
Cable
Connector
START
Is the cable conducting electricity? N

Replace the cable.
Y Service Parts List volume, 15. Connection Diagrams
N
Frame
Is the cable in a short circuit or ground Replace the cable.
fault condition? Service Parts List volume, 15. Connection Diagrams
Y
OK FR1H4050.EPS
Digital tester
Checking the Cable for Continuity
FR1H7007.EPS
Make measurements at all connector pins. Check that the measured values are greater than 1 .
Machine
Cable
Connector SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The cable is said to be in a ground fault condition when its conductor is in contact with
the frame due to cable covering breakage. In this situation, there is electrical continuity
between the frame and cable connector pins.
Cable
Torn covering Machine

Cable
Connector
Frame
Digital tester FR1H7006.EPS
Check that the measured values are not greater than 1 .
Frame
Digital tester FR1H7008.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
2.4.3 PC Board Check Flow PC Board Arrangement Diagrams
Analysis Flow
START LED08A
VOL08A
LED08B
N
Are PC board settings normal? Adjust the PC board switch settings.
Y 17. PC Boards
in Checks, Replacement,
and Adjustment of Parts
Are the results of PC board self-
diagnostic checks normal?
With 4. ELECTRICAL of M-Utility,
perform self-diagnostic checks of the
following boards:
IMG08A
IMG08B/H
DMC08A
IMG07B
N
HCP08A
MMC09A
DIM08A
Y T
ON
FR
N
Are the PC board switch settings normal? Adjust the PC board switch settings.
Y 17. PC Boards
in Checks, Replacement, SCN08A
Are PC board fuses normal? N Replace fuses as needed. DRV08A PMT08A
17. PC Boards
Y 17. PC Boards in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
in Checks, Replacement, of Parts
and Adjustment of Parts SNS08A
Are normal output voltages delivered to N Check the power supply unit. CPU90F/
the PC boards? 2.4.5 Power Supply Unit Check Flow LAN90B
Y 6. Power Supply Fuse DMC08A
System Diagram MTH08A/D or
HCP08A
Are the cables connected to the PC N Check the cables.
boards normal? IMG08B/H
2.4.2 Cable Check Flow
Y
IMG08A
Disconnect and reconnect the PC boards
and connectors.
Y BCR08A IMG07B
MMC90A
or
Does the machine operate normally after N Replace PC boards as needed. DIM08A
CPU90E
its restart? 17. PC Boards
Y in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
of Parts
OK FR1H4051.EPS
FFM
NT
F RO
FR1H4058.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
2.4.4 HDD Check Flow BLANK PAGE
Analysis Flow
START
N
Are the HDD short pins properly set? Set the HDD short pins properly.
11.1 Setting HDD
Y in Checks, Replacement,
Are the HDD test results normal? N Is +5 V present between the HDD
With 4. ELECTRICAL of M-Utility, CNJ2-3 and CNJ 2-4?
perform a HDD test.
Y N
Y 1.6 Power Supply Fuse System Diagram
in Machine Description
Is the cable between the HDD CNJ2 N Replace the cable.

and MTH08A board CN25 normal?
13. Connection Diagram
Y in Service Parts List
2.4.2 Cable Check Flow
Check the MTH08C board.

7.41 PC Board Check Flow
Is the cable between the HDD CNJ1 N Replace the cable.

and MTH08A board CN22 normal?
13. Connection Diagram
in Service Parts List
Y
Format the HDD and install the software.
Y
Appendix 1. Installing Software in Maintenance Utility
N
Does the machine operate normally Replace the HDD.
after its restart? 11.2 Replacing HDD
Y in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
of Parts
Does the machine operate normally N OK

after its restart? To START
OK FR1H4052.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
2.4.5 Power Supply Unit Check Flow A
N
Analysis Flow Is +24 V1.2 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made? 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
DC OUT3 terminals 4 and 9? and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
Y N in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram of Parts
START
N N
Is 100 V present between TB1 terminals Check the input source. Is fuse F11 in the power supply unit normal? Replace fuse F11 in the power supply unit.
L and N? 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y in Checks, Replacement,
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts
N N
Is +12 V0.5 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made? Replace the power supply unit. Replace the power supply unit.
DC OUT1 terminals 1 and 3? Y 13.1 Checking, Replacing, 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
13.1 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Power Supply Unit and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
in Checks, Replacement, of Parts of Parts
and Adjustment of Parts N
N N Is +24 V1.2 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made? 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
Is +5 V0.25 V present between TB2 Is the voltage adjustment made? Replace the power supply unit. DC OUT3 terminals 5 and 10? and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
Y N
terminals 1 and 3? 13.1 Checking, Replacing, in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
Y Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit of Parts
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
of Parts
in Checks, Replacement,
and Adjustment of Parts N
Is fuse F12 in the power supply unit normal? Replace fuse F12 in the power supply unit.
Is +5 V0.25 V present between N Is fuse F13 in the power supply unit N 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses
DC OUT2 terminals 1 and 2? normal? Replace fuse F13 in the power supply unit.
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y in Checks, Replacement,
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram Y 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses in Checks, Replacement,
and Adjustment of Parts Replace the power supply unit.
13.1 Checking, Replacing,
Replace the power supply unit. and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
13.1 Checking, Replacing, in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
N
N Is +24 V1.2 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made? 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
Is +15 V0.75 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made? 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
DC OUT3 terminals 1 and 6? and Adjusting Power Supply Unit Y N
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram
of Parts
N
Is fuse F2 in the power supply unit normal? Replace fuse F2 in the power supply unit. N
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Is fuse F5 in the power supply unit normal? Replace fuse F5 in the power supply unit.
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y in Checks, Replacement, 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses
in Checks, Replacement, 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y in Checks, Replacement,
and Adjustment of Parts in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts
Replace the power supply unit.
13.1 Checking, Replacing, Replace the power supply unit.
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
N 13.1 Checking, Replacing, in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
Is +24 V1.2 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made?
DC OUT3 terminals 2 and 7?
Y N in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment N
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram Is +5 V0.75 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made? 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
of Parts
N Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram of Parts
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts N
and Adjustment of Parts Is fuse F1 in the power supply unit normal? Replace fuse F1 in the power supply unit.
Replace the power supply unit. 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y in Checks, Replacement,
13.1 Checking, Replacing, in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit and Adjustment of Parts
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts B
N Replace the power supply unit.
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment FR1H4054.EPS
of Parts
of Parts
N
A 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
of Parts FR1H4053.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
B Power Supply Unit (JPS-1) Right Side View

N 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
Is +15 V0.75 V present between Is the voltage adjustment made?
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit DCOUT6 DCOUT7 DCOUT2 DCOUT1 DCOUT3
DC OUT6 terminals 2 and 6? +5V +12V +15V +15Va -15Va +15V1 24V2
Y N in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 3 10 9 8 7 6
Y 5. Machine Circuit Diagram of Parts 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 2 1 TB2
N Replace fuse F7 in the power supply unit. DCOUT4 DCOUT5

Is fuse F7 in the power supply unit normal? 2
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses 2
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y in Checks, Replacement, 3 2 1 1 +
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts 1
and Adjustment of Parts ACOUT4 ACOUT2
3
Replace the power supply unit. 6 1 7 1 G
13.1 Checking, Replacing, 7 2 8 2 4
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit 8 3 9 3
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment 9 4 10 4
of Parts 10 5 11 5
N
Is the voltage adjustment made? 13.1 Checking, Replacing,
12 6
Is +15 V0.75 V present between
FR1H7005.EPS
N Replace fuse F8 in the power supply unit.
Is fuse F8 in the power supply unit normal?
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Y
in Checks, Replacement, Power Supply Unit (JPS-1) Left Side View
13.1 Checking, Replacing, CN1
and Adjusting Power Supply Unit CN2
of Parts TB1 CN3 CN5
N
DC OUT6 terminals 4 and 8? and Adjusting Power Supply Unit RESET
L
Remate
N
N Replace fuse F6 in the power supply unit. Local
Y in Checks, Replacement,
CN4
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts 1 2 3 4
Replace the power supply unit. FR1H7004.EPS
of Parts
N

of Parts
N

N
Does the machine operate normally To START Replace the power supply unit.
after its restart?
of Parts
OK
FR1H4055.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
2.4.6 Monitor Check Flow Monitor Circuit Diagram

CPU90E
Analysis Flow
START
VGA90E CRT VOL08A
N
Is +12 V present between monitor Is the fuse normal? 13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses CN3 CN2
CN7 CN2
CN1 terminals 1 and 2? Y N
Y
Is the cable between fuse F1 and N Replace the cable.

monitor CN1 normal?
13 CONNECTION DIAGRAM CN19 CN4
CN1
Replace fuse F1.

13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses F1
Is +12 V present between power N Replace the power supply unit. Power supply unit (JPS-1)
supply unit DCOUT terminals 2 and 4?
13.1 Power Supply Unit (JPS-6) in Checks,
Y Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts DCOUT1
Is the cable between fuse F1 and N FR1H4057.EPS

Replace the cable.
power supply unit DCOUT1 normal?
13 CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Is the cable between fuse F1 and N Replace the cable.

monitor CN1 normal?
Replace the monitor.

14.1 CRT (Monitor)
Is the cable between the monitor CN2 N
and CPU90E board CN7 normal? Replace the cable.
Is the cable between the monitor CN4 N

and CPU90E board CN19 normal? Replace the cable.
Is the CPU90E board normal? N

Replace the CPU90E board.
15.3 CPU90E board
Y 7.41 Checking the Boards
Is the cable between the monitor CN3 N Replace the cable.

and VOL08A board CN2 normal? 13 CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Is the VOL08A board normal? N Replace the VOL08A board.

15.12 VOL08A board
Y 7.41 Checking the Boards in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts
Replace the monitor.

14.1 CRT (Monitor)
in Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts FR1H4056.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
2.5 IP Jam Handling Procedures Reference to IP

removal procedure
IP Jam Locations
Error code Error name and Detailed
CAUTIONS Procedures for IP
Jam Removal"
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is 03B0 Remedy 1/2/3/4
IP feed/load conveyor remaining IP discharge impossible
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
Before returning a jammed IP to the machine, thoroughly make sure that the IP is not 03B1 IP feed conveyance error Remedy 1/2/3/4
scratched, scaled off, or seriously warped due to rubbing. 03B2 IP load conveyance error Remedy 1/2/3/4
Do not leave a jammed IP bent in the conveyance path for prolonged periods of time because
machine malfunction or IP breakage may occur. 03B3 Side-positioning conveyor entrance conveyance error Remedy 4/5/6
IP conveyance checkout must be performed after the machine is restored to normal with a 03B4 Restored IP load low-speed conveyance error ?
jammed IP removed.
03B5 Restored IP load high-speed conveyance error ?
03B6 IP feed/load conveyor remaining IP discharge error Remedy 1/2/3/4

Removing a Jammed IP 03B7 Side-positioning conveyor remaining IP discharge error Remedy 4/5/6
When an IP jam error occurs, you should basically complete the following procedure. 03B8 IP position information error ?
(1) Turn OFF the machine.
03B9 IP load standby unit remaining IP discharge error Remedy 1/2/3/4
(2) Turn the machine back ON.
03BC Side-positioning HP operation error Remedy 4/5/6
The initialization sequence is performed.
03BF Side-positioning grip operation error Remedy 4/5/6
(3) Check whether the jammed IP is discharged in the initialization sequence.
03C1 IP reading conveyance error Remedy 6
When the IP is not discharged
03C2 Reading IP leading-edge detection error Remedy 6
Perform steps (4) and beyond.
When the IP is discharged 03C6 Drive shaft grip error Remedy 6
Check for improper IP conveyance. 03C7 Driven shaft grip release error Remedy 6
2.6 Checking for Improper IP Conveyance 03C8 Drive shaft grip release error Remedy 6
(4) Note the error code and remove the IP in a manner appropriate for the error 03C9 Driven shaft grip error Remedy 6
encountered.
03CA Drive shaft grip self-diagnosis error Remedy 6
The tables on the subsequent pages indicate the relationship between the displayed
03CB Driven shaft grip release self-diagnosis error Remedy 6
error codes and IP removal procedures. Note the tables to determine the IP removal
procedures to be performed. Remove the IP as directed under IP Jam Locations 03D1 Post-conveyor error Remedy 6/7
and Detailed Procedures for IP Jam Removal. Remedy 7/8/9/10
03D3 Pre-erasure conveyance error
(5) Restore the machine to normal.
03D4 Branch path selector guide operation error Remedy 7/8/9/10
(6) Check for improper IP conveyance.
03D5 Erasure conveyance error Remedy 7/8/9/10
2.6 Checking for Improper IP Conveyance
03D6 Post-erasure conveyance error Remedy 7/8/9/10
03D7 Junction path selector guide operation error Remedy 3/4/5/10
03D8 Post-conveyor remaining IP discharge error Remedy 6/7
03D9 Erasure conveyor remaining IP discharge error Remedy 7/8/9/10
03DC Post-conveyor grip operation error Remedy 6/7
03DD HP up-and-down movement error Remedy 1/2/3/4
03DE Up-and-down movement error Remedy 1/2/3/4
03E8 Suction cup moving error Remedy 1/2/3/4
0538 IP leading-edge detection error 1 Remedy 1/2/3/4
13A2 Cassette hold release error Remedy 1/2/3/4
13A3 Cassette shelf error Remedy 1/2/3/4

TR1H1019.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405 (1)
Reference to IP IP Jam Locations and Detailed Procedures for IP Jam Removal

removal procedure
IP Jam Locations Referring to the illustration below, check the IP jam locations and take their remedial steps
Error code Error name and Detailed as appropriate.
Procedures for IP
Jam Removal"
13A8 Out-of-spec IP size Remedy 1/2/3/4
13AD IP with improper generation/type detected Remedy 1/2/3/4
13AE No relevant MPM code ? FRONT
13B8 IP position information error ?
13E1 Feed IP suction error Remedy 1/2/3/4

Remedy 2
13E2 Feed IP dropped Remedy 1/2/3/4 Remedy 1
13E3 Feed IP grip error Remedy 1/2/3/4

Up-down IP
13E4 Load IP suction error Remedy 1/2/3/4 removal unit
13E5 Load IP dropped Remedy 1/2/3/4 Remedy 3

23A1 Cassette hold failure retry Remedy 1/2/3/4
23A2 Cassette hold release failure retry Remedy 1/2/3/4

Remedy 8
23A3 Degeneration for relevant cassette shelf Remedy 1/2/3/4
Cassette set unit
23A9 Barcode read retry Remedy 4/5/6 Remedy 4
Remedy 7
23BA Side-positioning HP detection retry Remedy 4/5/6 Remedy 9
23BB Side-positioning HP detection preparation retry Remedy 4/5/6 Remedy 10
23BC Side-positioning operation error Remedy 4/5/6

Erasure conveyor
23BD Side-positioning grip HP detection retry Remedy 4/5/6 Before-side-positioning
conveyor
23BE Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation retry Remedy 4/5/6
23BF Side-positioning grip operation error Remedy 4/5/6

23C5 FFM drive W.F. disorder Remedy 6
Subscanning
23C6 Driving shaft grip operation error Remedy 6 unit
23C7 Driven shaft grip release operation error Remedy 6
After-reading conveyor Remedy 5
23C8 Driving shaft grip drive speed correction error Remedy 6
23C9 Driven shaft grip release drive speed correction error Remedy 6
23D2 Conveyance sensor error ? Remedy 6

FR1H1391.EPS
23DA After-reading grip HP detection retry Remedy 6/7
23DB After-reading grip HP detection preparation retry Remedy 6/7
23DC After-reading grip operation error Remedy 6/7
23DE Elevation shelf movement error Remedy 1/2/3/4
23E1 Feed IP suction failure retry Remedy 1/2/3/4
23E4 Load IP suction failure retry Remedy 1/2/3/4
23E6 Suction cup HP detection preparation retry Remedy 1/2/3/4
23E7 Suction cup HP detection retry Remedy 1/2/3/4
23E8 Suction cup HP return error Remedy 1/2/3/4

TR1H1020.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
Remedy 1 Remedy 2
Jam location: Cassette set unit or up-down IP removal unit Jam location: Up-down IP removal unit
Cause: Removal failure or loading failure Cause: Conveyance failure
IP status: IP status:
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward. The IP leading edge or trailing edge has not reached the before-side-
b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward. positioning conveyor.
Recovery procedure: a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward.
Gain access from the front or right-hand side of the machine. b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward.
a Recovery procedure:
(1) Remove the upper front cover. a
(2) Remove the tray of cassette set unit. Gain access from the front or right-hand side of the machine.
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks, (1) Remove the upper front cover.
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts (2) Remove the tray of cassette set unit.
(3) Rotate the up-down IP removal unit rollers by hand to remove the IP 4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks,
b Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts
(1) Remove the upper front cover and cassette set unit. (3) Rotate the up-down IP removal unit rollers by hand to remove the IP.
4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit in Checks, Replacement, and b
Adjustment of Parts Gain access from the front, right-hand, or left-hand side of the machine.
(2) Pull out the tray of cassette set unit and remove the IP. (1) Remove the upper front cover.
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks, (2) Pull out the tray of cassette set unit.
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts 4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks,
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts
(3) Remove the up-down conveyance guide of the up-down IP removal unit to take out
the IP.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
Remedy 3 Remedy 4
Jam location: Up-down IP removal unit or before-side-positioning conveyor Jam location: Up-down IP removal unit, before-side-positioning conveyor, or side-
Cause: Conveyance failure positioning conveyor
IP status: Cause: Conveyance failure
A certain portion of the jammed IP is located in the up-down IP removal IP status:
unit with the remaining portion placed in the before-side-positioning A certain portion of the jammed IP is located in the up-down IP removal
conveyor. Therefore, these two units cannot be pulled out. unit with the remaining portions placed in the before-side-positioning
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward. conveyor and in the side-positioning conveyor. Therefore, these three
units cannot be pulled out.
b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward.
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward.
Recovery procedure:
a
Recovery procedure:
Gain access from the front or right-hand side of the machine.
a
(1) Remove the right-hand side cover.
(2) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor drive shaft by hand to convey the IP to
the up-down IP removal unit. (1) Remove the right-hand side cover.
(3) Remove the upper front cover. (2) Release the side-positioning conveyor grip.
(4) Pull out the tray of cassette set unit. (3) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor rollers by hand to convey the IP to the up-
down IP removal unit.
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks,
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts (4) Remove the upper front cover.
(5) Rotate the up-down IP removal unit rollers by hand to remove the IP. (5) Pull out the tray of cassette set unit.
b 4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks,
Gain access from the rear or right-hand side of the machine
(6) Rotate the up-down IP removal unit rollers by hand to remove the IP.
(1) Remove the rear cover from the machine.
b
(2) Remove the rear guide from the before-side-positioning conveyor.
Gain access from the rear or right-hand side of the machine.
(3) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor rollers by hand to remove the IP.
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the rear guide from the before-side-positioning conveyor.
(3) Release the side-positioning conveyor grip.
(4) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor rollers by hand to remove the IP.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
Remedy 5 Remedy 7
Jam location: Before-side-positioning conveyor or side-positioning conveyor Jam location: After-reading conveyor or erasure conveyor
Cause: Conveyance failure Cause: Conveyance failure
IP status: IP status:
A certain portion of the jammed IP is located in the before-side- A certain portion of the jammed IP is located in the after-reading
positioning conveyor with the remaining portion placed in the side- conveyor with the remaining portion placed in the erasure conveyor.
positioning conveyor. Therefore, these two units cannot be pulled out. Therefore, these two units cannot be pulled out.
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward. a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward.
b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward. b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward.
Recovery procedure: Recovery procedure:
a Gain access from the front or right-hand side of the machine.
Gain access from the front or right-hand side of the machine. a
(1) Remove the upper front cover. (1) Rotate the rollers in the after-reading conveyor and erasure conveyor by hand to
(2) Pull out the tray of cassette set unit. position the entire IP in the after-reading conveyor. The alternative is to manually
release the after-reading conveyor roller grip and then rotate the erasure conveyor
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit in Checks, rollers by hand to position the entire IP in the after-reading conveyor.
(2) Remove the right-hand side cover.
(3) Pull out the scanner unit and take out the IP.
(4) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor rollers by hand to remove the IP from the
top (frame slit) of the before-side-positioning conveyor. If you cannot directly access the IP in the subscanning unit, first remove the light-
collecting guide and then the IP.
b
b
Gain access from the rear or right-hand side of the machine.
(1) Manually release the after-reading conveyor roller grip.
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the erasure conveyor front guide and then manually convey the IP until it is
(2) Remove the rear guide from the before-side-positioning conveyor. entirely positioned in the after-reading conveyor.
(4) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor rollers by hand to remove the IP. Remedy 8
Jam location: Erasure conveyor
Remedy 6 Cause: Conveyance failure
Jam location: Side-positioning conveyor, subscanning unit, or after-reading conveyor IP status:
Cause: Conveyance failure The IP is stopped at a position immediately before the erasure conveyor
IP status: switchback point.
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward. a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward.
b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward. b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward.
Recovery procedure: Recovery procedure:
The same recovery procedure is to be performed no matter whether the IP is stopped Gain access from the front or right-hand side of the machine.
in the side-positioning conveyor, subscanning unit, or after-reading conveyor. The same recovery procedure is to be performed no matter whether the IP status is a
Gain access from the right-hand side of the machine. or b.
(1) Remove the right-hand side cover from the machine. (1) Remove the front guide from the erasure conveyor.
(2) Pull out the scanner unit and then remove the IP. (2) Remove the IP by pulling it forward until it comes of the machine.
If the IP in the subscanning unit cannot directly be accessed, first remove the light-
collecting guide and then the IP.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
Remedy 9 2.6 Checking for Improper IP Conveyance

Jam location: Erasure conveyor
Cause: Conveyance failure Allow the machine to convey various sizes of IP (five sizes including the mammo type or four
sizes without it) about 10 times each to check whether an IP jam error occurs.
IP status:
The IP is stopped at a position immediately after the erasure conveyor Items to Be Prepared
switchback point.
Provide on hand the IP cassettes of the following sizes and their corresponding IPs.
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward.
14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm)
14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm)
Recovery procedure:
10" x 12" (24cm x 30cm)
Gain access from the front of the machine.
8" x 10" (18cm x 24cm)
a
(18 cm x 24 cm mammo) Required only when the mammo type is in use.
(1) Rotate the erasure conveyor rollers by hand to convey the IP to a position
immediately before the temporary standby position. Checkout Procedure
(2) Remove the front guide from the erasure conveyor. (1) Turn ON the machine.
(3) Remove the IP by pulling it forward until it comes of the machine. (2) Touch the U-Utility button.
b The display switches to the U-Utility screen.
(1) Remove the guide from the top of the erasure conveyor temporary standby section. (3) Sequentially touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel.
(2) Remove the IP by pulling it forward until it comes of the machine. M-Utility starts.
Remedy 10 Routine screen

U-Utility screen
(screen made to CSL specification)
Jam location: Before-side-positioning conveyor or erasure conveyor
Cause: Conveyance failure Deleting images
waiting for
Processed image
reproduction Date/time setup
Read processing output
IP status:
1 Output
Touch panel destination
Click sound
A certain portion of the jammed IP is located in the before-side- 2
parallax correction selection
positioning conveyor with the remaining portion placed in the erasure 3

CRT test pattern
display
Multiframe forced
output FD operation
4
conveyor. Therefore, these two units cannot be pulled out. Menu selecting icon
8" x 10" film
a) The IP cannot be conveyed forward but can be conveyed backward. reduced output
setup
0
b) The IP cannot be conveyed forward or backward. Utility Return
Recovery procedure: U-Utility button

The same recovery procedure is to be performed no matter whether the IP status is a M-Utility screen
or b.
0. QUIT A B C
(1) Reach into the side plate hole in the before-side-positioning conveyor and properly : Area to be touched 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING D E F
position the IP (so that it can be conveyed forward). 3. TEST MODE
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 7 8 9
5. SCANNER UTILITY
(2) Pull out the up-down IP removal unit. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 4 5 6
7. FILE UTILITY
4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit in Checks, Replacement, and 8. BACKUP MEMORY 1 2 3
9. HV OFF
Adjustment of Parts 10. MENU SETTING
NOTES: For the IDT type, the "menu selecting icon" 0 . SP
(3) Rotate the before-side-positioning conveyor rollers by hand and remove the IP from does not appear. DEL BS ENT
For the initial setting, the "Multiframe forced
the top of the before-side-positioning conveyor. output" button will not appear. Caps
FR1B1086.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
(4) Sequentially select 3. TEST MODE, 2. AUTO MODE, and 2. PRIMARY (7) Position the following four types (five types if a mammo type is included) of cassettes
ERASURE. on arbitrary shelves.
A message appears to prompt for IP conveyance count input. IP conveyance starts.
(5) Set the IP conveyance count to 10. 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm)
(6) Repeatedly select 0. QUIT to exit M-Utility. 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm)
10" x 12" (24 cm x 30 cm)
0. QUIT 8" x 10" (18 cm x 24 cm)
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY (18 cm x 24 cm mammo)
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C
3. TEST MODE (8) Conduct the following checks during IP conveyance.
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
D E F
Check that the machine does not emit any abnormal sound or odor.
5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
Check that the IPs are conveyed in the order of cassette positioning.
7. FILE UTILITY
7 8 9
Check that the erasure lamp cooling fan (FANF1) operates.
8. BACKUP MEMORY (9) After completion of IP conveyance, remove all the cassettes to verify that the IPs are
9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
not scratched.
4 5 6
>3 (10) Change the positional relationships between the cassettes and shelves, and then
repeat steps (7) through (9).
0.QUIT 1 2 3
1.ROUTINE
The machine comes to an automatic stop when it repeats the IP conveyance
2.AUTO MODE sequence 10 times.
TM > 2 0 . SP (11) Remove the cassettes.
0.QUIT
(12) Press the reset button.
1.READING & ERASURE DEL BS ENT The machine restarts and becomes ready for normal use.
2.PRIMARY ERASURE
3.SECONDARY ERASURE
TM:AM > 2 Caps
0 - 99999 : 10
FR1H1822.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 249
MT - 248
(2) With reference to the examples of abnormal images described in this section, take
3. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on remedial action as appropriate in accordance with <Probable Causes> and <Check
Abnormal Images and Reference>.
(3) Use the virtual image generation mode (quasi-reading) to analyze the cause of the
abnormal image.
For image troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify a trouble spot in the machine, judging
from the characteristics of the image. In an image artifact or abnormality occurs, perform Perform image reading by generating quasi-image signals from various portions of
troubleshooting in accordance with the basic analytical flow described below. the scanner. Based on the results of the virtual image generation mode, isolate the
cause of the abnormal image.
Note, however, that troubleshooting procedures for the image output system and X-ray
exposure system are omitted in this chapter. 10.10 Setting in Virtual Generation Mode for Image Signal in Maintenance
Utility
START
Result of virtual image generation mode Isolation of problem Probable cause
Optics (including the laser)
Light-collecting guide/light-collecting mirror
The cause of the problem is present Subscanning
Failure in image Failure in IP and/or No abnormal image occurs with LIGHT. before the IP-generated light enters X-ray source
Failure in Failure in image Failure in
output or image X-ray exposure the photomultiplier. (The IP-generated IP
scanner unit processing system conveyance system light is already abnormal.) Conveyors
display system system
Erasure failure
Extraneous noise to the laser, etc.
Troubleshoot Troubleshoot the Troubleshoot the Troubleshoot the Troubleshoot the IP Photomultiplier
the scanner unit. controller. conveyance system. The cause of the problem is present High-voltage power supply (located on the PMT
image output and/or X-ray An abnormal image occurs with LIGHT, between light admittance to the
"3.1 Image "3.2 Image "3.3 Other Image system. exposure system. but not with LOG AMP. photomultiplier and photomultiplier
board)
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting for Troubleshooting" Erasure or extraneous leak light
current output (to the PMT board). Optical noise due to electrostatic buildup on the IP
for Scanner Unit" Controller" Alternatively, it is present in the high- Magnetic noise
voltage applied to the photomultiplier. SCN08A board
PMT board
An abnormal image occurs with LIGHT The cause of the problem is present Extraneous electric noise to the PMT board
and LOG AMP, but not with between PMT board input and SCN (static noise on the IP, power supply noise,
SCN08 INPUT. board input. motor noise, etc.)
Cables between PMT board and SCN board
END
FR1H1519.EPS SCN08A board
Extraneous electric noise to the SCN08A board
An abnormal image occurs with LIGHT, The cause of the problem is present (electric noise, motor noise, etc.)
3.1 Troubleshooting for Scanner-Related Errors LOG AMP, and SCN08 INPUT. in the image signal lines after image Image-related boards after SCN08 (IMG board,
signal input for the SCN board. etc.)
Cables to such boards
Procedures
TR1H1303.EPS
(1) Check the error log for the time when the abnormal image occurred.
View the error log to check for any error whose occurrence time indicated in its detail
information corresponds to the time when the abnormal image occurred.
23BA-23BE: Error codes for the subscanning mechanism
2500s: Error codes for the scanner mechanism
If an error is found, take remedial action as appropriate with reference to the probable
cause and troubleshooting procedures described in the error code list.
6.1 Displaying Error Log: 1. LIST in Maintenance Utility
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The detail information format of the error code contains chronological information, from the time
when image reading started to the time when an error occurred. Reference should be made as
needed to this detail information format.
NOTE
An error for the scanner subscanning mechanism that does not accompany any
abnormal image need not be analyzed or troubleshot, and thus be ignored.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 250
Examples of Abnormal Images

<Probable Cause>
No. 103 Horizontal streaks (2) Operation of the driving-side grip motor (MZ2)
<Probable Causes> or driven-side grip motor (MZ3) is improper.
No. 101 Tree ring-like ununiformity Leaked rays of light from LAMP1 through LAMP5
may be admitted into the scanner unit.
(Improper installation of the covers, damage Horizontal streaks are developed about 40 mm
on the light-tight member located inside the from the top edge and about 30 mm from the
Tree ring-like ununiformity is developed. cover, etc.) bottom edge.
The PMT08A board is faulty.
40
<Check and Reference>

Check if an error (2545: HV voltage error 2)
occurs concurrently with the abnormal image.
Note, however, that it will not be detected if the 30
noise is minuscule.
Unit: mm
FR1H1852.EPS
FR1H1850.EPS
<Probable Cause>
No. 104 Horizontal streaks (3) The subscanning mechanism is faulty
<Probable Cause> (improper location relative to after-reading
No. 102 Horizontal streaks (1) Leaked rays of light externally coming into the
conveyance)
machine may fall on the scanner unit. (Improper
installation of covers to the machine, especially
A horizontal streak is developed about 60
the lower front cover, improper installation of the
light-tight members around the light-collecting mm from the top edge.
Banding-like streaks are developed such that guide assembly, etc.)
intermittent thin horizontal streaks appear with
a gradual inclination to the main-scan direction
(from upper left to lower right).
60

Check for interference between the
<Check and Reference> subscanning turn guide plate and the center
guide plate.
Unit: mm
FR1H1853.EPS
FR1H1851.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 252
<Probable Causes> <Probable Causes>

No. 105 Horizontal streaks (4) The PMT08A board is faulty. No. 107 Blank image The high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A
The subscanning motor and subscanning board and the software switch are in the OFF
mechanism are faulty. position.
The subscanning motor is faulty. The PMT08A board is faulty.
A horizontal streak is developed randomly. The polygonal mirror assembly is faulty. A white blank image is generated.
70

<Check and Reference> Set the SCN08A boards high-voltage switch (S1)
and the software switch in the ON position.
Check if a scanner error (2500's) or wow-flutter
error (23C5) occurred when the abnormal image
Checking SCN08A Board
occurred.
Use the virtual image generation mode to isolate Checking PMT08A Board
the cause.
"10.10 Setting in Virtual Generation Mode for
Image Signal" in Maintenance Utility
Unit: mm

No. 106 Horizontal streaks (5) Proper shading correction has not been No. 108 Uniformly exposed image The connector (CN2) is not connected to the
performed. with midtone PMT08A board.
3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION The connector (CN5) is not connected to the
is turned OFF. SCN08A board.
The polygonal mirror is soiled. Quasi-reading mode is set.
Horizontal streaks are developed over the entire A uniformly exposed image with midtone density
surface at a pitch of 0.6 mm. (gray) is generated.

<Check and Reference> Connect the unplugged connector to the
Perform shading correction properly. PMT08A board or SCN08A board.
Set 3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION Cancel the quasi-reading mode.
to ON.
Replace the polygonal mirror.
9.5 Checking and Replacing Polygon
Assembly
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 254
3.2 Image Troubleshooting for Controller

<Probable Causes>
No. 109 Vertical white streak Relatively thin streak
Dust deposited on the light-collecting guide or <Probable Causes>
light-collecting mirror may block the laser beam. No. 201 Improper image (1) The reading system is faulty. (The high voltage is
Relatively thick streak not applied; the connector is not connected, etc.)
Streaks occur in the subscanning direction. The light-collecting guide is faulty; shading The photomultiplier or HV (PMT08A board) is
correction is improper; the lens mirror (especially, faulty.
the dust window) of the scanning optics unit is Although the film characters and border are Any of the SCN08A, IMG07B, IMG08A, IMG08B,
outputted normally, an image itself is not generated. IMG08C, and MTH08A boards is faulty, or the
soiled.
HDD and/or image memory is faulty.
<Check and Reference> <Check and Reference>

Remove the dust deposits using a blower. Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self-
Clean the light-collecting guide or light-collecting
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
mirror. results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
"Cleaning Light-Collecting Guide and Light- replace the relevant board.
Collecting Mirror" SCN08A Board
Perform shading correction properly. Check connection between each of the SCN08A,
IMG07B, IMG08A, IMG08B, IMG08C, and
Thin streak MTH08A boards and their corresponding
connectors.
Thick streak Use the virtual image generation mode to isolate
the cause.
FR1H1858.EPS "10.10 Setting in Virtual Generation Mode for
FR1H1860.EPS
<Probable Causes>
No. 303 Jitters The rotation of the polygon is improper.
The incident beam of the SYN08A board is <Probable Cause>
misaligned. No. 202 Improper image (2) The IMG08A board is faulty (the unsharp mask
Decrease in the laser power. memory is faulty).
Sync is misaligned by one or several pixels in the
main-scan direction.
Such jitters may sometimes occur in the middle An image with =0 is outputted normally. However,
of the scan line. the image is disturbed otherwise.

Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self- <Check and Reference>
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
results of the self-diagnostics indicate that any and then back ON again, to perform self-
board is faulty, then replace that board. diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
"Replacing SYN08A Assembly" results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
If the error (polygon error 2: 2542) occurred replace the relevant board.
simultaneously, check and replace the polygonal
mirror assembly.
FR1H1859.EPS
FR1H1861.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 256
<Probable Cause> <Probable Cause>

No. 203 Improper image (3) The IMG08A board is faulty. No. 205 Improper image (5) Any of the SCN08A, IMG07B, IMG08A, IMG08B,
IMG08C, and MTH08A boards is faulty.
Although IP conveyance is normal and the film Although the film characters and border are
characters are outputted normally, the image and outputted normally, the image itself is not
border are not generated. generated properly, with the same data appearing
continuously in the vertical direction.

Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self- and then back ON again, to perform self-
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error, results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board. replace the relevant board.
SCN08A Board
<Probable Cause> <Probable Causes>

No. 204 Improper image (4) The contents of the memory containing No. 206 Improper film characters (1) The Kanji ROM on the CPU90E board and/or the
enlargement/reduction ratios in the IMG08A font file is corrupted.
board is corrupted. The memory on the IMG08A board is faulty.
A full image in each size of 14" x 17" (35cm x Although the image and border are outputted
43cm), 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm), and 10" x 12" normally, the film characters are not generated
(18cm x 24cm), as well as a two-in-one image of properly.
8" x 10" (18cm x 24cm) size, is disturbed.

Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self- and then back ON again, to perform self-
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error, results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board. replace the relevant board.
Replacing and Adjusting CPU90E Board
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 258
3.3 Other Image Troubleshooting

<Probable Cause>
No. 207 Improper film characters (2) The CPU90E board and/or MTH08A board is
faulty. <Probable Causes>
No. 301 White spots or speckles Electromagnetic noise emitted from the motor,
etc. may be introduced into the image signal.
Although the film characters, border, and image Electrostatic or optical noise coming from the IP,
are outputted normally, only a portion of film etc.
characters consisting of Japanese text is disturbed. One pixel or several pixels in one line have a Dot defects in the IP.
markedly lower density, so white spots or speckles
are developed.
Regular patterns of such white spots or speckles
frequently appear.

Use the virtual image generation mode to isolate
results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board. the cause.
"10.10 Setting in Virtual Generation Mode for
Replacing and Adjusting CPU90E Board
FR1H1866.EPS
FR1H1868.EPS
<Probable Cause>
No. 208 Halos Any of the SCN08A, IMG07B, IMG08A, IMG08B,
IMG08C, and MTH08A board is faulty or image <Probable Cause>
signal cable on the board is faulty. An IP that has been stored unused outside the
No. 302 Black spots or speckles
machine for a long period of time (one week or
Multiple halos are developed outside the proper longer) might have been used without secondary
contour of the image. erasure.
Black spots or speckles are developed randomly
over the entire image. The black spots come in
various sizes, such as those extending over
several vertical lines, or as small as one line.

results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board and cable.
SCN08A Board
FR1H1867.EPS
FR1H1869.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 260

No. 304 Improper format (1) The position of the scanning optics unit is No. 306 Format slanting The side-positioning operation is improper.
improper (in the main-scan direction). The side-positioning location is improper.
The side-positioning operation is improper. The subscanning unit and side-positioning unit
The irradiation field is improper. are misaligned.
The right or left edge of the image is missing. The parameter for adjusting the main-scan format The right or left edge of the image is aslant. The subscanning grip is unbalanced.
is improper. The side-positioning conveyance grip is
unbalanced.
<Probable Causes>
No. 305 Improper format (2) The IP feed by FFM (MZ1) is improper when the
IP is fed into the subscanning unit.
The IP leading-edge sensor (SZ1) is faulty.
The rpm of the FFM (MZ1) is improper.
The irradiation field is improper.
The bottom or top edge of the image is missing.
FR1H1871.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 262
4. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on 4.2 Remedy When Machine Does Not Power Up
Improper Operation Preliminary step 1:
1. Power OFF the machine.
4.1 Remedy When Cassette Cannot be Removed Power OFF

Is AC output of the receptacle normal?
N
Check the breaker of the commercial
Preliminary steps: Ask the user for repair.
power supply, power distribution
1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers. switchboard, and wiring of commercial
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board. power supply.
Y
Power OFF
Power OFF
Visually check inside the up-down IP Branch 1
removal unit to ensure that the IP has N Are both ends of the power cable N
Return the IP to the cassette completely plugged into the machine Completely plug them in.
been returned to the cassette
completely. completely. and receptacle?
Or, remove the IP.
Y
Y
Branch 2 Preliminary step 2:

Power OFF
1. Remove the covers of the machine.
Visually check to see that there is Perform the procedures Branch 1 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
Restart the machine
nothing abnormal with SOLA1 4 described in " Cassette and check its status. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
of the up-down IP removal unit. Removal" (see below on this
page).
Step 1 Power OFF
Branch 2 N N
Is the 100V system normal? Has the power
supply fuse nn blown?
Power OFF Y
N Y
Is the breaker fuse nn of the Restore it.
DRV08A board normal? Then, restart the machine Replace the fuse.
and check its status. Then, restart the machine
Y
See Chapter Z to check
Power OFF
the wiring. Power OFF
N Step 2 N
Are the connector To check for harness N
connections from SOLA1 to continuity, the machine Is the 24V system normal? Is the breaker fuse nn
DRV08A to JPS-1 board should be powered OFF normal?
normal? beforehand. Y
Y
Y
Restore it.
Then, restart the machine
Step 3 and check its status.
in order named. Are systems other than 100V N
Replace JPS-1.
DRV08A board and 24V normal? Then, restart the machine
SOLA1 4
+ 5V, + 12V, + 15V, and 15V
systems
FR1H0138.EPS
Cassette Removal (Standard Procedures)
Step 1: Remove the upper right-hand side cover of the machine.

Step 2: Push up the cassette hold bracket for the shelf to be released.
Its lock pin is released.
Step 3: With the cassette hold bracket pushed up, pull out the cassette.
Step 4: Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover of the machine.
Cassette Removal (Simple Procedures)

If the IP has been put back completely into the cassette and if it can
be verified that the solenoid operation is faulty, then insert the cassette
hold release tools into the four small holes located on the upper
right-hand side cover of the machine to release it without removing any
cover of the machine. FR1H0137.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MT - 264
4.3 Remedy When LED Is Not Lit 4.4 Remedy When System Goes Down Unexpectedly during
Operation
Preliminary steps:
1. Power OFF the machine and remove the covers. Preliminary step 1:
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board. 1. Power OFF the machine.
Power OFF Power OFF

N N Perform the recovery procedures described in 4.2 "Remedy When
Are connector connections Replace the connection cable.
Is the power supply normal? Machine Does Not Power Up".
from LEDA to DRV08A to JPS-1 Then, restart the machine and check its status.
board normal? See Chapter Z to check the wiring. Y
Y To check for harness continuity,

the machine should be powered
OFF beforehand. Preliminary step 2:
1. Remove the covers of the machine.
Replace the following parts 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
in order named. 3. Check for any foreign matter (lead character marking chips, etc.) inside the machine, and, if any, remove it all.
DRV08A board
LEDA1 4 FR1H0139.EPS Step 1
N Set them correctly.
Are the boards set in the board
Then, restart the machine
rack correctly?
Y
Step 2
Are the DIP switches and N Set them correctly.
jumpers set correctly? Then, restart the machine
Y
Step 3
Is the memory set in the N Set it correctly.

CPU90E board correctly? Then, restart the machine
Replace the following boards.

MTH08A
CPU90E
CPU90F + ETH90F
DMC80A/HCP08A
IMG08A + IMG08B/H + IMG07B
SNS08A
DRV08A
SCN08A
JPS-1 FR1H0140.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 266
4.5 Main Numerical Values Used for Troubleshooting

ST HR
14x17 14x14 10x12 8x10 24x30 18x24 18x43 24x30 18x24

(inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm)
Main scan pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Reading
resolution
Subscan pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20
Standard pix/mm 5 5 20/3 10 20/3 10 5 10 10

Main
scan
High-res pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Output
resolution
Standard pix/mm 5 5 20/3 10 20/3 10 5 10 10
Subscan
High-res pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Standard 1760x2140 1760x1760 1670x2010 2000x2510 1576x1976 1770x2370 885x2140 2364x2964 1770x2370
No. of pixels
High-res 3520x4280 3520x3520 2505x3015 2000x2510 2364x2964 1770x2370 1770x4280 2364x2964 1770x2370
Subscan speed mm/sec 18.94 18.94 18.94 18.94 18.94 18.94 18.94 9.47 9.47
Reading time sec 22.60 18.59 15.92 10.56 15.65 9.35 22.60 24.96 18.69
Main scan frequency Hz 189.39 189.39 189.39 189.39 189.39 189.39 189.39 189.39 189.39
Sampling time sec 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
For scanner reading bit/pixel 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

Gray level
Output after image 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
bit/pixel
processing
TR1H1151.EPS

05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 MT - 267
BLANK PAGE

05.30.2002 FM3405
08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
5.
CONTENTS
RED RED
Machine Circuit Diagram

BLK
RED RED
WHT /D
1
BLK BLK
GRN BLK BLK
/
Green/yellow 113Y1555
spiral
BLK BLK
2
(Housing near (Housing near
the JPS-1 housing) the JPS-1 housing) (Housing near the rack)
RED RED
BLK BLK
3
RED
BLK
4
/137S1319
BRN
RED
RED BLK
ORG
5
YEL
GRN
BLUE RED RED

PUR BLK BLK
6
GRAY
WHT
BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
RED BLK BLK
BLK RED
RED
RED BLK BLK
BLK RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
BRN
RED
ORG
YEL
GRN
BLUE
PUR
GRAY RED RED
WHT BLK BLK
BLK RED RED
BRN BLK BLK
RED BLUE BLUE
ORG BLK BLK
YEL RED RED
GRN BLK BLK
BLUE
MT - 268
MT - 268
Model Unit
Sup.
Name Circuit Diagram name
FR1H1360.EPS
Code
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Page

08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
CONTENTS
/D
1
/
113Y1555
2
Signal name Signal name
BRN
RED
3
ORG
YEL
4
PUR
GRAY
WHT
BLK
5
BRN
6
RED
ORG
YEL
PUR
GRAY
WHT
BLK
MT - 269
MT - 269
Model Unit
Sup.
Name Circuit Diagram
FR1H1361.EPS
name
Code

08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
CONTENTS
/D
/
1
113Y1555
BRN BRN
2
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
3
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT
4
WHT
BLK BLK
5
RED RED
BLK
BLK
BLK BLK
6
RED RED
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
BLK
RED
Board cooling fan
BLK
RED RED
RED
Board cooling fan BLK BLK
YEL YEL
MT - 270
MT - 270
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1362.EPS
Name
name
Code

08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
CONTENTS
/D
1
/
113Y1555 BRN BRN Signal name Signal name
RED RED
ORG ORG
2
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
3
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
4
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
5
YEL YEL
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
6
GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
MT - 271
MT - 271
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1363.EPS
Name
name
Code

05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
RED RED
GRAY GRAY
GRAY GRAY
GRAY GRAY
1
GRAY GRAY
GRAY GRAY
GRAY GRAY
GRN GRN
2
3
4
5
BRN BRN
6
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
RED RED
BLK BLK

BRN BRN
RED RED
ORG ORG
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
(add-on option)
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
MT - 272
MT - 272
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1364.EPS
Name
name
Code

05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
1
2
3
RED RED
4
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
5
6
RED RED
BLK BLK
MT - 273
MT - 273
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1365.EPS
Name
name
Code

08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
Panel
CONTENTS
RED RED
BLK BLK
YEL YEL
RED RED
Touch panel board
1
BLK
Touch panel
BLK
RED RED
(PNL)
BLK BLK
YEL YEL
2
3
BRN BRN Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
RED RED
4
ORG ORG
(magnetic card reader)
YEL
S /
GRN
S /
852S0011 (JIS)
5
YEL
852S0012 (ISO)
GRN
6
(Japanese)
(English)
(Indent)
(Reserved)
MT - 274
MT - 274
Model Unit
Sup.
FR1H1366.EPS
name
Code

05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
1
BRN BRN BRN BRN
RED RED RED RED
2
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
Topmost stage (shelf 1)
3
GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
PUR PUR PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
4
Upper middle stage (shelf 2)
WHT WHT WHT WHT
5
BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN
RED RED RED RED
Lower middle stage (shelf 3)
6
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE

Lowermost stage (shelf 4)
MT - 275
MT - 275
Model Unit
Sup.
FR1H1367.EPS
name
Code

05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
BRN BRN BRN BRN
RED RED RED RED
1
ORN ORN ORN ORN Cassette ejection
YEL YEL sensor
YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
2
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
PUR PUR PUR PUR Cassette hold
GRAY sensor
GRAY GRAY GRAY
3
WHT WHT WHT WHT
BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN Cassette ejection
RED RED RED RED sensor
4
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
5
Cassette hold
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE sensor
PUR PUR PUR PUR
6
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT WHT WHT Cassette ejection
BLK BLK BLK BLK sensor
BRN BRN BRN BRN

RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN Cassette hold

YEL YEL YEL sensor
YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN

BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
PUR PUR PUR PUR
Cassette ejection
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY sensor
WHT WHT WHT WHT

BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN Cassette hold
RED RED RED RED sensor
ORN ORN ORN ORN

YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
Up/down HP
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE sensor
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
MT - 276
MT - 276
Model Unit
Sup.
FR1H1368.EPS
name
Code
Page
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
BRN BRN BRN BRN RED RED
RED RED RED RED BLK BLK Cassette IN sensor
1
ORN ORN ORN ORN RED RED
YEL YEL YEL YEL BLK BLK Mammo/ST sensor
2
GRN GRN GRN GRN RED RED
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLK BLK Cassette IN sensor
3
PUR PUR PUR PUR RED RED
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY BLK BLK Mammo/ST sensor
WHT WHT WHT WHT RED RED
4
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK Cassette IN sensor
BRN BRN BRN BRN RED RED

Mammo/ST sensor
5
RED RED RED RED BLK BLK

YEL YEL YEL YEL BLK BLK Cassette IN sensor
6
GRN GRN GRN GRN RED RED
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLK BLK Mammo/ST sensor
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

YEL YEL YEL YEL BLUE BLUE
RED RED RED RED ORN ORN Cassette hold



MT - 277
MT - 277
Model Unit
Sup.
FR1H1369.EPS
name
Code
Page
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
1
BRN BRN RED RED BRN BRN
RED RED GRAY GRAY RED RED
ORN ORN GRAY GRAY ORN ORN Suctioin cup HP
2
YEL YEL GRAY GRAY YEL YEL sensor
GRN GRN GRAY GRAY GRN GRN

BLUE GRAY BLUE BLUE
3
BLUE GRAY
PUR PUR GRAY GRAY PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY Cassette inlet IP
GRAY GRAY sensor
4
WHT WHT GRAY GRAY WHT WHT
BLK BLK GRAY GRAY BLK BLK
BRN BRN GRAY GRAY BRN BRN
RED RED GRAY GRAY RED RED Inch/metric
5
sensor
ORN ORN GRAY GRAY ORN ORN

YEL YEL GRAY GRAY YEL YEL
6
GRN GRN GRAY GRAY GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE GRAY GRAY BLUE BLUE Suctioin
sensor
PUR PUR GRAY GRAY PUR PUR

GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT GRAY GRAY WHT WHT
Each shelf
BLK BLK GRAY GRAY BLK BLK position sensor
MT - 278
MT - 278
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1370.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
CONTENTS
# 5001 or later
1
RED RED BLK BLK RED RED
2
YEL YEL BLK BLK YEL YEL
BLUE BLUE BLK BLK BLUE BLUE

Suction drive
WHT WHT BLK BLK WHT WHT
motor
ORN ORN BLK BLK ORN ORN
3
4
BLUE BLUE BLK BLK BLUE BLUE IP conveyance

WHT WHT BLK BLK WHT WHT motor
5
6
BLUE BLUE BLK BLK BLUE BLUE Up-down drive

WHT WHT BLK BLK WHT WHT motor
BLK BLK BLK BLK RED RED

RED RED BLK BLK BLK BLK
IP suction
BLK BLK BLK BLK RED RED

RED RED BLK BLK BLK BLK
IP leak
BLK BLK
BLK BLK
(Elevation unit side plate) (Elevation unit)
MT - 279
MT - 279
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1371.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
CONTENTS
# 5000 or earlier
1
2

Suction drive
WHT WHT BLK BLK WHT BRN motor
ORN
ORN ORN BLK BLK ORN
3
4

IP conveyance
BRN
WHT WHT BLK BLK WHT motor
ORN
ORN ORN BLK BLK ORN
5
6

Up-down drive
WHT WHT BLK BLK WHT BRN motor
BLK BLK ORN
ORN ORN ORN

IP suction

IP leak
BLK BLK
BLK BLK
(Elevation unit side plate) (Elevation unit)
MT - 280
FR1H1371(04).EPS
MT - 280
<Precautions> Model Unit
Sup.
Block (B) Unit
Title Drive Code
Date Date
registered updated
Date designed Designed by Drafted by Checked by Approved by Page
Inoue Inoue Morikawa Yamada
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
1
BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN
RED RED RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL Before-BCR
YEL YEL YEL YEL IP sensor
2
GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR
3
Convergence
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY standby
IP sensor
WHT WHT WHT WHT
4
BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN After-reading
RED RED RED RED conveyance
standby IP
sensor
5
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN

BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE Changeover
6
IP sensor
PUR PUR PUR PUR

GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT WHT WHT
BLK BLK BLK BLK Load standby
IP sensor
BRN BRN BRN BRN BLUE BLUE

RED RED RED RED WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL WHT WHT Overrun IP
sensor
GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE
MT - 281
MT - 281
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1372.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
1
2
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE IP conveyance

motor
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT
3
BLK BLK BLK BLK
4
YEL YEL BLUE BLUE
RED RED ORN ORN Convergence path
changeover guide
drive
5
YEL YEL
6
YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE IP conveyance

motor
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT
BLK BLK BLK BLK

YEL YEL BLUE BLUE
RED RED ORN ORN Branch path
changeover guide
drive
MT - 282
MT - 282
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1373.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
03.20.2004 FM4275
009-051-10
CONTENTS
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
1
BLK
2
BLK RED WHT WHT
RED RED WHT WHT
3
BLK BLK BLK
RED RED RED
4
Erasure cooling fan
WHT WHT
5
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
6
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
Socket assembly
Socket assembly
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
MT - 283
MT - 283
Model Unit
Sup.
FR1H1374.EPS
name
Code
Page
08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
# 5001 or later
CONTENTS
SEI:341A063B, ECN:2005-E-0002
CND2 CND2
BRN BRN BRN GRN BLUE BLUE
GRAY GRAY
RED RED RED GRAY GRAY PUR PUR
BLUE
ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL PUR RED RED
GRAY GRAY
GRN
1
GRN GRN GRN ORN GRAY GRAY GRN
BLUE BLUE BLUE
PUR PUR PUR RED GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
GRAY GRAY GRAY BRN GRAY GRAY WHT WHT
2
3
Side-positioning
ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN mechanism
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL HP sensor
GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN
4
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
GRN
PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR
BLUE
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY Grip release
PUR
WHT WHT WHT HP sensor
5
WHT WHT GRAY
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN
WHT
RED RED RED RED RED

BLK
6
ORN ORN
BRN Side-
YEL YEL RED positioning
GRN IP sensor
GRN
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE Side-positioning

WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT motor

Grip release
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT motor

IP conveyance
MT - 284
MT - 284
Model Unit
Sup.
FR1H1375.EPS
name
Code
Page
08.31.2005 FM4710
009-051-11
# 5000 or earlier
CONTENTS
BCR08A
SEI:341A062
GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN
1
PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
2
3
RED RED RED RED RED RED Side-positioning
ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN mechanism
HP sensor
GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN
4
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
GRN
PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR
BLUE
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY Grip release
PUR
WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT HP sensor
5
GRAY
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN
WHT
RED RED RED RED RED

BLK
6
ORN ORN
BRN Side-
YEL YEL RED positioning
GRN GRN IP sensor
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK

Side-positioning
WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT motor

Grip release

IP conveyance
MT - 285
MT - 285
<Precautions> Model Unit

FR1H1375(04).EPS
Sup.
Block (D) Unit
Title Signal/Drive Code
Date Date
registered updated
Date designed Designed by Drafted by Checked by Approved by Page
Inoue Inoue Morikawa Yamada
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN BRN BRN
1
ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL RED RED
ORN Driving grip
GRN GRN GRN GRN ORN release, HP
BLUE BLUE BLUE YEL YEL sensor
BLUE
PUR
2
PUR PUR PUR GRN
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY BLUE GRN
WHT WHT WHT WHT PUR BLUE
BLK BLK BLK BLK GRAY Driven grip
PUR
release, HP
3
BRN BRN BRN BRN GRAY sensor
RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
4
BRN BRN
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
5
BRN BRN BRN BRN

RED RED RED RED
6
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
PUR PUR PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT WHT
BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN
WHT
RED RED RED
BLK
ORN ORN ORN
BRN
YEL YEL YEL
RED
GRN GRN
ORN
BLUE BLUE
YEL
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK
RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK BLK

Driving grip
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
RED RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK
RED RED RED
Driven grip
MT - 286
MT - 286
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1376.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
1
YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
2
PUR PUR PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
3
4
RED RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
5
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE Grip release
BRN BRN WHT motor

BRN BRN
ORN ORN ORN
6
ORN ORN
RED RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE IP conveyance

BRN BRN BRN WHT motor
BRN
ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN
BLK BLK BLK BLK

RED RED RED RED
Board cooling fan
BLK
RED
BLK
RED BLK BLK BLK
RED RED RED
Board cooling fan
BLK BLK BLK

RED RED RED
CRT cooling fan
MT - 287
MT - 287
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1377.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
05.30.2002 FM3405
009-051-08
CONTENTS
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
1
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
GRN GRN
BLUE BLUE
2
RED RED
3
BLK BLK
YEL YEL
4
(LDD base)
BRN BRN
(Optics stool cover) (Side positioning conveyor)
RED RED
ORN ORN
5
YEL YEL
BRN BRN
(Subscanning side cover) (Subscanning side cover)
BLUE BLUE
6
PUR PUR
(Optics stool cover)
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT (Subscanning side cover)
(Scanner unit platform)
(After-reading conveyor)
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
YEL YEL
RED RED
BLK BLK Signal name Signal name
YEL YEL
(Shield case)
BLK
(Subscanning side cover)
BLK BLK BLK BLK

RED RED RED RED
YEL YEL YEL YEL Leading-edge
sensor
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
MT - 288
MT - 288
YEL YEL
Model Unit
Sup.
Circuit Diagram
FR1H1378.EPS
Name
name
Code
Page
03.20.2004 FM4275
009-051-10
6.
CONTENTS
Power supply unit (JPS-1) SCN08A LD assembly
CN1
Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram

F1 CN1 CN2 LAN90B board
F1 DCOUT6
TP1 LDA08B LD
CN9 LDD
+5V LAN90B(#5001)
F3 08B
1
CN4 CN1
F7 TP4 PDA08B CN15 CN1
I/F
+15V
CN16 CN2
F9
CN2 CN1
F8 TP8
-15V MTH08A
2
F6 TP27 F6
+24V
SYN08A
+5V F10
F7
3
DCOUT1
+12V
Polygon assembly
TP3 F5
F1 CN3 CN1
POL-DRV POL
F8
CN4
4
SZ1 (SED08A)
F2
CPU90E CN5
CN1
MTH08D board
CRT F4 PMT08A CN7
5
SCN08A CN8
CN8 CN7
VOL08A
CN21 CN20 MTH08D CPU90F/LAN90B
CN15 CN1
I/F
6
MTH08A CN21 CN20 CPU90F (#3421) F3 F2 CN16 CN2
CN15 CN1 F2 I/F TB2 TB1

EHT90F +5V CN13
DMC08A
F1 CN14 or
F3 F2 FAN CN27 HCP08A
Power supply
CN16 CN2 unit (JPS-1)
TB2 TB1
+5V DCOUT1
+12V CN9
CN13
DMC08A CN10 IMG08B/H
or F1
CN27 CN14
HCP08A CN7
CN8 IMG08A
CN3
CN4
IMG07B
CN9
CPU90E
CN10
IMG08B/H CN17
CRT DIM08A
CN7
CN8 IMG08A
F6 VOL08A
CN3 CPU90E
CN4 IMG07B
CN1 CN1 F1 CN18
FDD
CN17
MMC90A F2
CN24 CN11
SNS08A
CN18
MMC90A F3
CN2
CPU90E F4 CN3
CN2
F1 CN18
FDD VGA 90E
F2 F1 CN22
CN22 F1 CN11
CNJ1 SNS08A CNJ1
CN1 CN1 CNN08A
F3 TP7 F5 HDD
TP7 CNJ2
: Regulator CN25 F5 TP5 CN25
HDD F6
F4 F4 CN3
CNJ2 CN28
CN2
FANG4
CN2
CN28 CN29
FANG4 FANG5
MT - 289
MT - 289
CN29 VGA
FANG5
90E
FR1H1140.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275
009-051-10
Power supply unit (JPS-1)
CONTENTS
F3
+15V DCOUT7
F4
+5V MZ1
1
F13 (FFM)
DCOUT2
+5V SNS08A
CN14
CN4 F1 TP1
2
F2
CN6
SA1,SA3,SA5,SA7,SA9,SA11,SA15,SA17
CN7
SB1~5
3
CN8
SC1,SC2,SF1~4
CN9
SD1~3,SZ2,SZ3,SE1
F3 CN10
LED08A
4
CN11
LED08B
CN15
5
+5V Monitor
CN4
LED08A CN16
Magnetic card reader
CN17
Keyboard
6
CN12
VOL08A
CN22
Barcode reader
CN23
CPU90E
CN2 CN3
DRV08A
F2 DCOUT3
CN1 CN14
+15V MZ2,MZ3
+24V F9 TP7 TP1
CN12
MD1,MD2
F10 TP5
CN13
MD3
F11 TP6
CN15
ME1,ME2
F12 TP4
CN11
SOLF1
CN4
SOLA1~SOLA4
CN10
MF1
CN8
MC1
TP2 CN9
SOLC1
CN5
MB1,MB2
CN6
MB3,PB1,SVB1
F1
CN16 Erasure conveyor
FANG1~ FANG3
TSW2
F5 DCOUT5
+24V
+24V
DCOUT4 FANF1
TSW1
MT - 290
MT - 290
Inverter ACOUT1
CN5
SNS08A LAMP1~5
ACOUT2
: Regulator FR1H1141.EPS
MT_A1 - 1 MT_A1 - 2
BLANK PAGE
Appendix 1. Supplementary Information
Appendix 1.1 Setting of Error Code to be Captured for IO Trace
If there is any error code is be captured for IO trace, it may be set as an error code to be
captured for IO trace
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When an error code to be captured for IO trace (1XXX/2XXX) is set, the IO trace data for the error
code so set is saved in a separate memory when the error occurs.
The IO trace data saved may be written to a floppy disk by selecting 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY and
3. SAVE TO FD of M-Utility in sequence.
How to set an error code to be captured for IO trace is described below.

(1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive (FDD) of the machine.
(3) Select 7. FILE UTILITY, 3. BACKUP, and 2. CONFIGURATION DATA in
sequence.
The following files are copied to the floppy disk.
IRSET.ORG IRSET.OFG
FILMFMT.ORG FILMFMT.OFG
IRSTATUS.ORG IRSTATUS.CFG
(4) Remove the floppy disk from the FDD of the machine and insert it into the FDD of the
personal computer (PC).
When installing the configuration data that is edited on the PC to the machine, make
sure that software versions of the source and destination are the same.
If the software versions are different, an error may occur during installation.
(5) Using the editor on the PC, edit the IRSTATUS.CFG file.
Example)
To set the error code 1234 as the error code to be captured for IO trace, type in as
follows:
IOT_ERROR_CODE=1234
(6) Remove the floppy disk containing the edited file from the PC, and insert it into the
FDD of the machine.
(7) Select 7. FILE UTILITY, 4. RESTORE, and 2. CONFIGURATION DATA in

sequence.
The following files are copied to the HDD of the machine.
IRSET.CFG FILMFMT.CFG
IRSTATUS.CFG
(8) Remove the floppy disk from the machine.
(9) Press the RESET button to reboot the machine.
009-051-06 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 - 1 009-051-06 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 - 2
04.20.2001 FM3006 04.20.2001 FM3006
MT_A1 - 3 MT_A1 - 4
009-051-06 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 - 3 009-051-06 CR-IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 - 4
04.20.2001 FM3006 04.20.2001 FM3006
Maintenance Volume Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Control Sheet MC - 1
Control Sheet
(FM2460)
11/20/99 05 Corrections (FM2638) MC-2, 6, 65, 132~138, 140, 142,
143, 144, 155, 161, 205, 255.1,
255.2
04/20/2001 06 Corrections (FM3006) MC-7, 24, 25, 37, 140, 141, 143,
CR-IR341/CR-IR341P 146, 152, 154, 157, 162, 164,

174, 179, 184, 185, 202, 205,
255, 262, 263, 273, 275, 282287
Service Manual 08/30/2001 07 Design changes (FM3115) MC-5059, 59.159.20, 255,
255.1255.4, 256, 264, 266268,
272, 283
05/30/2002 08 Addition of the information about the MC-3, 17, 72, 142, 143, 162, 163,
power supply unit, PC boards, etc. 177, 189, 231, 252307
(FM3405)
03/20/2004 10 Hard disk drive procedure addition, MC-2, 3, 8, 16, 18, 25.1-25.4, 30,
scanning optics unit spacer procedure 31, 142, 143, 143.1-143.4, 144,
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment addition, MTH08A/D, SNS08A, and

DRV08A board replacement procedure
145, 152, 162-164, 174, 252-254,
258-263, 263.1-263.12, 264, 266,
additions, front shelf cover adjustment 275, 277, 278, 289, 290, 292, 293,
of Parts (MC) procedure addition, shutter section
antistatic member mounting location
296, 297, 297.1-297.8
MC_A1-2
addition, and other information additions,
and typographical error corrections
(FM4275)
08/31/2005 11 Revision (FM4710) MC-4, 5, 31, 59.21-59.24, 163,
292, 293, 304, 305, 307
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MC - 1

08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 2
1. Document Map
5. Up-Down IP Removal Unit MC - 60
2. Common Procedures for Checks, Replacement, 5.1 Checking and Replacing Suction Cup HP Sensor (SB1)
and Adjustment MC - 4 5.2 Checking and Replacing Cassette Inlet IP Sensor (SB2)
2.1 Turning ON/OFF High-Voltage Switch 5.3 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Each Shelf Position
2.2 Checking Various Sensors Sensor (SB3)
2.3 Clearing Backup Memory 5.4 Checking and Adjusting Inch/Metric Sensor (SB4)
2.4 Setting Date and Time 5.5 Checking and Replacing Suction Sensor (SB5)
5.6 Replacing Suction Pump (PB1)
5.7 Replacing IP Leak Valve (SVB1)
5.8 Replacing Suction Cups
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers MC - 20 5.9 Replacing Suction Cup Drive Motor (MB1)
5.10 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MB2)
5.11 Replacing Up-Down Drive Motor (MB3)
5.12 Replacing Elevation Timing Belt
5.13 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorbers of IP
4. Cassette Set Unit MC - 26 Removal Unit
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit 5.14 Checking and Replacing Elevation Changeover Guide
4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit 5.15 Replacing Vertical Conveyor Guide
4.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly
4.4 Checking and Replacing Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 5, 9, 13)
4.5 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette IN Sensors
(SA2, 6, 10, 14) 6. Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor MC - 86
4.6 Checking and Replacing Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 7, 11, 15) 6.1 Removing and Reinstalling Before-Side-Positioning
4.7 Checking and Replacing Mammo/ST Sensors (SA4, 8, 12, 16) Conveyor
4.8 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids 6.2 Checking and Replacing Before-BCR IP Sensor (SC1)
(SOLA1-4) 6.3 Checking and Replacing Convergence Standby
4.9 Checking and Replacing Elevation HP Sensor (SA17) IP Sensor (SC2)
4.10 Replacing Inch/Metric Guides 6.4 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Convergence
4.11 Adjusting Movable Roll Path Changeover Guide Drive Solenoid (SOLC1)
4.12 Replacing Rubber Rollers of Cassette Set Unit 6.5 Replacing Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
4.13 Replacing Guide Plate of Cassette Set Unit IP Transport Motor (MC1)
6.6 Replacing and Adjusting Before-Side-Positioning
FRONT
Conveyor Drive Timing Belt
6.7 Replacing Cleaning Roller
12. Erasure Conveyor MC - 218 6.8 Replacing Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
12.1 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Lamp Assembly Rubber Rollers
12.2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor 6.9 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber-Attached
12.3 Checking and Replacing After-Reading Conveyance Guide of Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
Standby IP Sensor (SF1)
12.4 Checking and Replacing Changeover IP Sensor (SF2)
12.5 Checking and Replacing Load Standby IP Sensor (SF3)
12.6 Checking and Replacing Overrun IP Sensor (SF4) 7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit
12.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MF1) MC - 106
12.8 Replacing Erasure Lamp
12.9 Replacing Thermal Switches (TWS1, TWS2)
12.10 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan (FANF1)
12.11 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan Air Filter 8. Side-Positioning Conveyor MC - 110
12.12 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Erasure Unit 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
IP Conveyance Timing Belt 8.2 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Mechanism
12.13 Replacing Erasure Conveyor Rubber Rollers HP Sensor (SD1)
12.14 Checking and Replacing Branch Path Changeover 8.3 Checking and Replacing Grip Release HP Sensor (SD2)
Guide 8.4 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SD3)
12.15 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber 8.5 Replacing Side-Positioning Motor (MD1)
of Erasure Conveyor 8.6 Replacing Grip Release Motor (MD2)
8.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MD3)
8.8 Replacing Barcode Reader (BCR)
8.9 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip
11. After-Reading Conveyor MC - 208
Mechanism
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor
8.10 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Top Stopper
11.2 Checking and Replacing Grip Release HP Sensor (SE1)
8.11 Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip Release
11.3 Replacing Grip Release Motor (ME1)
Timing Belt
11.4 Replacing IP Transport Motor (ME2)
8.12 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Side-Positioning
11.5 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of
Conveyor IP Conveyance Timing Belt
After-Reading Conveyor
8.13 Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Rubber Rollers
8.14 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorbers of
Side-Positioning Conveyor
10. Subscanning Unit MC - 162
10.1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide
10.3 Checking and Replacing PMT08A Board 9. Scanning Optics Unit MC - 132
10.4 Servicing Light-Collecting Mirror 9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width
10.5 Checking and Replacing IP Leading-Edge Sensor 9.2 Shading/Sensitivity Correction
(SZ1/SED08A) 9.3 Removing and Reinstalling Scanning Optics Unit
10.6 Checking and Replacing Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor 9.4 Checking and Replacing LD Assembly
(SZ2) 9.5 Checking and Replacing Polygonal Mirror Assembly
10.7 Checking and Replacing Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor 9.6 Checking and Replacing SYN08A Board
(SZ3)
10.8 Checking and Replacing Subscanning Motor (MZ1)
10.9 Replacing Driving Shaft Grip Motor (MZ2)
10.10 Replacing Driven Shaft Grip Motor (MZ3)
10.11 Checking and Replacing SUS Belt/Rubber Belt/Tensioner 13. Housings MC - 252
10.12 Checking and Replacing Kapton Belt/Tensioner/Flywheel 13.1 Replacing Power Supply Unit
10.13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit 13.2 Replacing Fuses
10.14 Replacing Grip Arms 13.3 Replacing HDD
10.15 Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit 13.4 Replacing FDD and Checking Boards Setting
10.16 Replacing Lower Rubber Rollers of Subscanning Unit 13.5 Replacing the Monitor
10.17 Replacing and Adjusting Shock-Absorbing Rubbers 13.6 Cleaning Monitor Screen
FR1H1319.EPS
11.20.99 FM2638
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 3
14. HDD
14.1 Setting HDD 17. PC Boards
14.2 Replacing HDD 17.1 Board Arrangement Diagram
14.3 Replacing HDD (ST52160N/QM32100SE-S/ 17.2 MTH08A board
WDE4550-003/WDE9100-003/ST318416N) 17.3 MTH08D board
17.4 CPU90E board
17.5 IMG07B board
15. FDD 17.6 IMG08A board
15.1 Setting FDD 17.7 IMG08B/H board
15.2 Replacing FDD 17.8 DMC08A board
17.9 HCP08A board
FRONT
17.10 CPU90F board
17.11 LAN90B/D board
16. Monitor 17.12 DRV08A board
16.1 Cleaning Monitor
17.13 SNS08A board
16.2 Replacing the Monitor
17.14 LED08A board
16.3 Monitor Fuse
17.15 LED08B board
17.16 VOL08A board
17.17 BCR08A board
17.18 FFM board
17.19 SCN08A board
17.20 PMT08A board
17.21 Removing and Installing the MTH08A/D,
13. Power Supply Unit SNS08A, and DRV08A boards
13.1 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Power Supply Unit
18. Cleaning IP
19. Tools
19.1 Standard Tools
19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
19.3 Special Consumables
19.4 Semi-Standard Tools
FR1H1330.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 4 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 5
Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch (Software Switch)

2. Common Procedures for Checks, Replacement,
9. HV OFF is displayed when the high-voltage switch is in the ON position, while 9. HV
and Adjustment ON is displayed when it is in the OFF position.
(1) Touch the U-Utility button.
INSTRUCTION
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional (2) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence.
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored M-Utility is activated.
to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the (3) Select 9. HV ON.
above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the
The high-voltage switch is turned ON, and 9. HV ON displayed on the screen
retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
switches to 9. HV OFF.
M-Utilty screen M-Utilty screen
2.1 Turning ON/OFF High-Voltage Switch 0. QUIT 0. QUIT

1. ERROR LOG UTILITY 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING
There are two methods for turning ON/OFF the high-voltage switch: one is to directly ma- 3. TEST MODE 3. TEST MODE
nipulate the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board, and the other is to use M-Utility 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY 5. SCANNER UTILITY
in a software-driven manner.
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY 7. FILE UTILITY
Turing ON/OFF High-Voltage Switch (Hardware Switch) Display in
OFF status
8. BACKUP MEMORY Display in
ON status
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV ON 9. HV OFF
When the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board is placed in the upper position, it is 10. MENU SETTING 10. MENU SETTING
turned ON; when it is placed in the lower position, it is turned OFF. > >
FR1H1417.EPS
Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch (Software Switch)

9. HV OFF is displayed when the high-voltage switch is in the ON position, while 9. HV
ON is displayed when it is in the OFF position.
HVON
HVON

S1
S1
FR
(2) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence.
ON
T ON position OFF position M-Utility is activated.
Scanner unit
(3) Select 9. HV OFF.
SCN08A board The high-voltage switch is turned OFF, and 9. HV OFF displayed on the screen
FR1H1513.EPS switches to 9. HV ON.
M-Utility screen M-Utility screen
0. QUIT 0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING
3. TEST MODE 3. TEST MODE
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY 5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY 7. FILE UTILITY
Display in 8. BACKUP MEMORY Display in 8. BACKUP MEMORY
ON status 9. HV OFF OFF status 9. HV ON
10. MENU SETTING 10. MENU SETTING
> >
FR1H1416.EPS
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MC - 4 009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MC - 5

08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 7
MC - 6
2.2 Checking Various Sensors I/O Location Diagram

FANG1
Flow of Checking Procedures SA1

SA4
FANG4 FANG2
A flow of checking procedures common to each of the sensors is described below. SA2
FANG5 SA3 SA6
CAUTION SA8
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is SA10
SA7
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. SA17 SA12
SA5
SA9 SA14
SA11
(1) Place the high-voltage switch (software switch) in the OFF position. SA13 SOLA1
SOLA2 SA15 SA16
2.1 Turning ON/OFF High-Voltage Switch
SOLA3
(2) Remove the covers of the machine. MF1
SOLA4
(3) Place the high-voltage switch (hardware switch) in the OFF position. SF3
2.1 Turning ON/OFF High-Voltage Switch SF4 SOLF1
SF2 MD1
(4) Power ON the machine. SF1
MD3
(5) Touch the U-Utility button. MZ1
MD2
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. ME2 MB3
ME1 MB1
(6) Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence. MZ3
M-Utility is activated. SD3 FANG3
(7) Drive the actuator, as needed for sensor checks. SZ3 SVB1
To Drive (DRIVE) or Stop (STOP) Actuator by Performing MECHANICAL SE1

SZ1 SB3 SB5
UTILITY Operation ON
T MZ2
FR SZ2 SB1 PB1
(8) Perform MECHANICAL UTILITY operation so that the sensor can be checked. SB4 MB2
SB2
TSW1
To Enable Sensor Checks by Performing MECHANICAL UTILITY Operation LAMP15
MC1
(9) Block the light path of the sensor to be checked with a cassette, cardboard or the like TSW2
NOTE: The I/O symbol has the following meaning. FR
to check the status of the sensor (Open/Close). ON FANF1 SOLC1
(10) Deactivate the actuator that was driven at step (7).
SD2 T
SC2 SC1
Serial number
To Drive (DRIVE) or Stop (STOP) Actuator by Performing MECHANICAL BCR
UTILITY Operation Unit symbol (AG, T, Z)
Example) D: Side-positioning conveyor
(11) Select 0. QUIT. The unit symbol may sometimes be omitted.
The screen switches back to 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY menus. SD1
I/O type
(12) Select 0. QUIT. S: Sensor
M: Motor
The screen returns to the main menu. SD2
TSW: Thermal switch
(13) Select 0. QUIT. FAN: Fan
SV: Solenoid valve
M-Utility is exited. and more
FR1H1912.EPS
009-051-05 CR-IR341 Service Manual MC - 6 009-051-06

11.20.99 FM2638 04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 8
I/O List (Sensor) Description of Sensor ON/OFF

Unit Symbol Name Panel display Type Function/Remarks Transmissive sensor
Cassette set SA2, 6, 10, 14 Cassette IN sensor When the cassette MS Recognizes the status in pair with SA3, 7, 11,
unit (A) has been inserted and 15
with the cassette
hold sensor OFF:
ON (1)
SA4, 8, 12, 16 Mammo/ST sensor For mammo MS Detects mammo and ST cassette types.
cassette: ON (1)
SA3, 7, 11, 15 Cassette hold sensor During cassette PS Detects the completion of cassette hold.
hold: ON (1)
SA1, 5, 9, 13 Cassette ejection sensor During cassette PS Detects that the cassette has been ejected.
eject: OFF (0)
FR1H1490.EPS
SA17 Elevation HP sensor During HP: ON (1) PS Elevation HP for suction conveyor.
IP SB1 Suction cup HP sensor During HP: ON (1) PS

removal unit SB2 Cassette inlet IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor Reflective sensor
(B) When located in
the shelf position:
ON (1)
SB3 Each shelf position sensor IP found: ON (1) PS
SB4 Inch/metric sensor PS (reflective IP width determination
type)
SB5 Suction sensor During IP suction: Suction sensor
ON (1) OFF(0) : OPEN ON(1) : CLOSE
IP found: ON (1) FR1H1493.EPS
Before-side- SC1 Before-BCR IP sensor PS IP conveyance sensor
positioning SC2 Convergence standby IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
conveyor (C) IP sensor Microswitch (SA2, 6, 10,14)
Side- SD1 Side-positioning During HP: ON (1) PS
positioning mechanism HP sensor
conveyor (D) SD2 Grip release HP sensor During HP: ON (1) PS
SD3 Side-positioning HP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
BCR Barcode reader Variation or option
FR1H1491.EPS
After-reading SE1 Grip release HP sensor During HP: (1) PS
conveyor (E)
Microswitch (SA4, 8, 12, 16)
Erasure SF1 After-reading conveyance IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
conveyor (F) standby IP sensor
SF2 Changeover IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SF3 Load standby IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
SF4 Overrun IP sensor IP found: ON (1) PS IP conveyance sensor
TSW1 Safety thermostat (separation
type)
ON(1) : CLOSE OFF(0) : OPEN
FR1H1492.EPS
TSW2 Safety thermostat Lamp house
LDSN1-1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Unlit lamp sensor Fan control
Sensor Monitoring Screen Under Idle Condition
Subscanning SZ1 (SED08A) IP leading-edge sensor IP found: ON PS (light- IP conveyance sensor
unit (Z) (no display) receiving type) SA1 - 17 : 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
SB1 - 5 : 1 0 1 0 0
Driving-side grip release During HP: ON (1) PS
SZ2 During HP: ON (1) SC1 - 2 : 0 0
HP sensor
Driven-side grip release SD1 - 3 : 1 1 0
SZ3 HP sensor PS
SE1 : 1
TR1H1003.EPS
SF1 - 4 : 0 0 0 0
Models of Sensors and Parts Codes SZ2 - 3 : 1 0
0:QUIT
Code No. MS/PS Model Relevant sensor symbols
0 and 1 denote Open and Close, respectively.
104N0043 PS OJ-380331-701 (5mm Type I) SA1, 5, 9, 13, SB1, SD2, SE1, SZ2, 3
104N0044 PS OJ-380331-702 (5mm Type L) SA3, 7, 11, 15, 17, SB3, SD1
104Y0162 PS Separation type SF4
113Y1038 PS 19mm Type I SB2, SC1, 2, SD3, SF1, 2, 3
113Y1395 PS Reflective type SB4
128S0392 Suction sensor MPL-503(MPL) SB5
128Y0241A MS SS-01GL111 SA2, 6, 8, 10
128Y0258B MS SS-01GL2-F + mount SA4, 8, 12, 16
TR1H1150.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
To Enable Sensor Checks by Performing MECHANICAL UTILITY Operation To select an individual sensor to enable its monitoring
There are two methods for monitoring sensors: one is to enable monitoring of all sensors,
(1) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3. SENSOR in sequence.
and the other is to select an individual sensor and enable its monitoring.
(2) Select 2. MONITOR.
To enable monitoring of all sensors A list of sensor numbers is displayed.
(1) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3. SENSOR in sequence. (3) Type in the number of the sensor to be checked.
(2) Select 3. MONITOR ALL. The machine is placed in a sensor monitoring enabled state.
A list of sensor numbers is displayed so that the machine is placed in a sensor 0. QUIT
monitoring enabled state. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
3. TEST MODE
0. QUIT 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY 5. SCANNER UTILITY D E F
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
3. TEST MODE 7. FILE UTILITY
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 8. BACKUP MEMORY 7 8 9
5. SCANNER UTILITY D E F 9. HV OFF
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 10. MENU SETTING
7. FILE UTILITY >6 4 5 6
8. BACKUP MEMORY 7 8 9
9. HV OFF 0.QUIT
1 2 3
10. MENU SETTING 1.MOTOR
>6 4 5 6 2.ACTUATOR
3.SENSOR
0 . SP
0.QUIT 4.UNIT
1 2 3
1.MOTOR MU > 3
2.ACTUATOR DEL BS ENT
3.SENSOR 0.QUIT
0 . SP
4.UNIT 1.NUMBER
MU > 3 2.MONITOR
Caps
3.MONITOR ALL
DEL BS ENT
0.QUIT MU:SEN > 2
1.NUMBER
2.MONITOR Caps
3.MONITOR ALL
MU:SEN > 3
MU:SEN > 2
1:SA1 2:SA2 3:SA3 4:SA4 5:SA5
6:SA6 7:SA7 8:SA8 9:SA9 10:SA10 A B C
11:SA11 12:SA12 13:SA13 14:SA14 15:SA15
MU:SEN > 3 16:SA16 17:SA17 18:SB1 19:SB2 20:SB3
SA1-17 : 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 21:SB4 22:SB5 23:SC1 24:SC2 25:SD1 D E F
SB1-5 : 1 0 1 0 0 A B C 26:SD2 27:SD3 28:SE1 29:SF1 30:SF2
SC1-2 : 0 0 31:SF3 32:SF4 33:SZ2 34:SZ3
SD1-3 : 1 1 0 INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR 7 8 9
SE1 : 1 D E F 1 - 34 : 4
SF1-4 : 0 0 0 0 SA4 ----> Close
4 5 6
SZ2-3 : 1 0 SA4 ----> Open
0:QUIT 7 8 9 SA4 ----> Close
SA1 ----> Close 0
1 2 3
SA2 ----> Open
4 5 6
SA2 ----> Close 0.QUIT
SA1 ----> Open 1.NUMBER 0 . SP
0 2.MONITOR
1 2 3
3.MONITOR ALL
0.QUIT MU:SEN > DEL BS ENT
1.NUMBER 0 . SP
2.MONITOR
3.MONITOR ALL Caps
MU:SEN > DEL BS ENT
FR1H1235.EPS
Caps
FR1H1514.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
I/O List (Actuator) To Drive (DRIVE) or Stop (STOP) Actuator by Performing MECHANICAL UTILITY
Operation
Unit Symbol Name Type Function/Remarks
Cassette set unit SOLA1, 2, 3, 4 Cassette hold SOL Power-down Pulls in the cassette hold pin,
(A) solenoid when turned ON. To drive (DRIVE) or stop (STOP) an actuator other than FFM (MZ1)
Multi-stage LEDT1, 3, 5, 7 Cassette insertable LED
cassette loading LEDT2, 4, 6, 8 Cassette removable LED (1) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2. ACTUATOR in sequence.
unit (T) (2) Select 2. DRIVE or 3. STOP.
Up-down IP MB 1 Suction cup drive motor Pulse motor Opens the rear cover of the A list of sensor numbers is displayed.
removal unit (B) cassette and moves the roller.
MB 2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP. (3) Enter the number of the actuator to be driven or stopped.
MB 3 Up-down drive motor Pulse motor Moves up and down the IP
suction conveyor. The actuator selected is driven or stopped.
PB 1 IP suction DC pump Sucks when turned ON.
SVB1 IP leak valve Solenoid valve Leaks when turned ON. Example: 2. DRIVE is selected
Before-side- MC 1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP. 0. QUIT
positioning SOLC1 Convergence path Power-down Changes the path to the load 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
conveyor (C) changeover guide drive solenoid side when turned ON. 3. TEST MODE
Side-positioning MD 1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning 5. SCANNER UTILITY D E F
conveyor (D) mechanism. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
MD 2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Roller grip/release. 7. FILE UTILITY
MD 3 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP. 9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
>6 4 5 6
After-reading ME 1 Grip release motor Pulse motor Roller grip/release.
conveyor (E) ME 2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP. 0.QUIT
1 2 3
1.MOTOR
2.ACTUATOR
Erasure MF 1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP. 3.SENSOR
0 . SP
conveyor (F) SOLF1 Branch path changeover Power-down Changes the path to the erasure 4.UNIT
MU > 2
guide drive solenoid side when turned ON.
LAMP1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Erasure lamp Fluorescent lamp Light source for erasure DEL BS ENT
0.QUIT
FANF1 Erasure cooling DC fan 1.NUMBER
2.DRIVE Caps
3.STOP
Subscanning unit MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM6 Conveys the IP. MU:AUT > 2
(Z) MZ2 Driving shaft grip DC motor Driving shaft grip/release.
MZ3 Driven shaft grip DC motor Driven shaft grip/release.
MU:AUT > 2
1:SOLA1 2:SOLA2 3:SOLA3 4:SOLA4 5:PB1
6:SVB1 7:SOLF1 8:SOLC1 9:LAMP STB 10:LAMP ON A B C
11:FFM
Housing (G) FANG1 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the DRV08A board. INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR
FANG2 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the DRV08A board. 1 - 11 : 1 D E F
FANG3 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the DRV08A board.
FANG4 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the MTH. 0.QUIT
1.NUMBER 7 8 9
FANG5 Board cooling DC fan Cools down the MTH.
2.DRIVE
3.STOP
TR1H1004.EPS MU:AUT > 4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . SP
DEL BS ENT
Caps
FR1H1758.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
To drive (DRIVE) FFM (MZ1) To stop (STOP) FFM (MZ1)

(1) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2. ACTUATOR in sequence. (1) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2. ACTUATOR in sequence.
(2) Select 2. DRIVE. (2) Select 3. STOP.
A list of sensor numbers is displayed. A list of sensor numbers is displayed.
1:SOLA1 2:SOLA2 3:SOLA3 4:SOLA4 5:PB1 (3) Select 11. FFM.
6:SVB1 7:SOLF1 8:SOLC1 9:LAMP STB 10:LAMP ON The FFM is stopped.
11:FFM
Example: 3. STOP is selected
INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR. 0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
1 - 11 : 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C
3. TEST MODE
Meaning: Enter the actuator number. 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY D E F
7. FILE UTILITY
(3) Select 11. FFM. 8. BACKUP MEMORY 7 8 9
9. HV OFF
The following message appears. 10. MENU SETTING
>6 4 5 6
INPUT THE ROTATION DERECTION. 0.QUIT

1 2 3
1.MOTOR
1.CW 2.CCW (FIXED=X) 2.ACTUATOR
3.SENSOR
0 . SP
Meaning: Enter the rotation direction. 4.UNIT
MU > 2
X represents the rotation direction (either 1 or 2) that is currently set. DEL BS ENT
0.QUIT
1.NUMBER
2.DRIVE Caps
3.STOP
(4) Enter the direction rotation (either 1 or 2). MU:AUT > 3
The following message appears.

INPUT THE SPEED.
1. STANDARD SUBSCANNING
MU:AUT > 3
2. RAPID SUBSCANNING 6:SVB1 7:SOLF1 8:SOLC1 9:LAMP STB 10:LAMP ON A B C
11:FFM
3. CARRY OUT INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR
1 - 11 : 11 D E F
1 - 3 (FIXED=X) :
0.QUIT
Meaning: Enter the rotation speed. 1.NUMBER 7 8 9
2.DRIVE
3.STOP
MU:AUT > 4 5 6
X represent the rotation speed (1: Standard subscanning; 2: Fast subscanning; 3:

1 2 3
Eject) that is currently set.
0 . SP
(5) Enter the rotation speed.

DEL BS ENT
The FFM is driven.
Caps
FR1H1759.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
2.3 Clearing Backup Memory The following files are cleared from the HD.
IMG
(1) Touch the U-Utility button. Set processing information, information for image number generation, HV ON/OFF
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. information
(2) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. IPH
M-Utility is activated. IP position information, subscanning grip correction data
PNL
Routine screen
(screen made to CSL specification) U-Utility screen Audible click tone enabled/disabled, parallax correction data
DST
Deleting images Processed image
Read
waiting for
processing
reproduction
output
Date/time setup Output LP information (NET/LOCAL)
1
Click sound
Touch panel
Output
destination
JNL
2
3 Error log information
CRT test pattern Multiframe forced
display output FD operation
4
Menu selecting icon LIF
8" x 10" film
reduced output
setup
Format frequency information
0
Utility Return MFC
Setup options information
U-Utility button
CSL (for CSL specification only)
M-Utility screen Multiframe-related information, set processing-related information, menu selection
information
0. QUIT A B C
: Area to be touched 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING D E F 0. QUIT
3. TEST MODE
5. SCANNER UTILITY 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY A B C
4 5 6
7. FILE UTILITY 3. TEST MODE
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
1 2 3 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
10. MENU SETTING 5. SCANNER UTILITY D E F
does not appear. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY

DEL BS ENT
For the initial setting, the "Multiframe forced 7. FILE UTILITY
output" button will not appear. Caps
9. HV OFF
FR1B1086.EPS
10. MENU SETTING
>8 4 5 6
(3) Select 8.BACK MEMORY.
0.QUIT
(4) Select 1.CLEAR. 1.CLEAR 1 2 3
The following message appears. BKM > 1
ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR THE ALL BACKUP MEMORIES?
ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL THE BACKUP MEMORIES? 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 1 0 . SP
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
BACKUP MEMORIES ARE CLEARED.
Meaning: Are you sure to initialize (clear) the backup memory? DEL BS ENT
(5) Select 1. Caps
The backup memory is initialized, with the following message displayed.

FR1H1237.EPS
Meaning: The backup memory has been initialized. (6) Select 0. QUIT repeatedly.
M-Utility is exited.
(7) Press the RESET switch of the machine.

03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 18
2.4 Setting Date and Time (2) Touch the date/time setting.
The date/time setting screen appears.
(1) Touch the U-Utility button. (3) Type in the current date and time form the keypad, as instructed in the on-screen
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. example.
Routine screen (4) After entering the date and time, touch the [ ENT ] key for confirmation.
(screen made to CSL specification) When the setting is confirmed, OK appears below the entry line.
If the date or time is entered incorrectly, press the BS (backspace) key to return to the
character to be corrected.
Read
7 8 9
1
2 Set the new date and time
in the order of Year, Month,
3 Date and Time (military time) Virtual keyboard
Ex)February 25, 1998.10:15 AM 4 5 6
4 Input 98022511015
Menu selecting icon
9802251015 1 2 3
0 BS ENT
U-Utility button
NOTE: For the IDT type, the "menu selecting icon"
does not appear.
SET DATE/TIME QUIT
FR1H1489.EPS
(5) Touch the RETURN button.

U-Utility screen The screen returns to U-Utility.
Deleting images Processed image

waiting for reproduction Date/time setup
processing output
Output
Touch panel destination
Click sound

FD operation
display output
8" x 10" film

reduced output
setup
Utility Return
NOTE: For the initial setting, the "Multiframe forced

output" button will not appear. FR1H1487.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
(10) Upper front cover (BR M4x8, x2; truss M4x8, x2)
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers Loosen the right and left truss screws, and slightly pull the top of the cover toward
yourself to pull it up and out. Because the two screws on the upper portion of the cover
Procedures are BR M4x8, while the two screws on the lower portion are truss M4x6, use care not
to confuse these screws during installation.
WARNING (11) Stack table (truss M4x6, x2)
In order to avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing any Using a 2-mm Allen wrench or so forth, first remove the screw covers and then the
procedures. screws.
(12) Lower front inner cover (BR M4x8, x8)
Because the topmost screw in the center is used to hook the lower front inner cover, it
CAUTION should not be removed.
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. Screw used to hook
the lower front inner cover
(1) Power OFF the machine.

(2) Lower front cover (truss M4x12, x2)
Loosen the truss screws, both right and left, and while slightly pulling the top of the
cover toward yourself, pull it up and out.
(3) Upper right-hand side cover (truss M4x6, x4)
Pull up the entire cover toward yourself and out.
Lower front inner cover
(4) Lower right hand side cover (truss M4x6, x9)
While slightly pulling the top of the cover toward yourself, pull it up and out.
FR1B1172.EPS
(5) Make sure that the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board is in the OFF posi-
tion. (13) Multi-stage cassette loading cover (BR M4x8, x7)
Disconnect the connector (CNT1), and then pull the cover toward yourself and out.
High-voltage switch
(5)
HVON
S1
FR
ON
T
OFF position CNT1
Scanner unit
T Multi-stage cassette
SCN08A board FR1H1418.EPS ON
FR
loading cover
BR M4x8, x6
(6) Upper rear cover (truss M4x12, x4) FR1H1419.EPS
(7) Lower rear cover (truss M4x12, x5; truss M4x20, x3)
While slightly pulling the top of the cover toward yourself, pull it up and out. The top
three screws on the left-hand side are tightened together with the cable retaining NK
clamps.
(8) Upper left-hand side cover (truss M4x12, x4)
(9) Lower left-hand side cover (truss M4x6, x3; truss M4x12, x6)
While slightly pulling the top of the cover toward yourself, pull it up and out, exercising
care to prevent the cover of the switch portion from hitting the power supply unit.
Because the three screws on the front of the machine are truss M4x6, while the six
screws on the rear of the machine are truss M4x12, use care not to confuse these
screws during installation.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Reinstallation
Upper rear cover
Upper left-hand side cover CAUTION
(6)
Before installing the cover, make sure that the high-voltage switch on the SCN08A board is ON.
(8) Lower rear cover
Lower left-hand side cover
(7)
NOTE
(9)
Accomplish positioning at the time of multi-stage cassette loading cover installation. If you do
Upper front cover
(1) not complete positioning, a cassette holding failure may occur.
Upper right-hand
side cover
(1) Mount the multi-stage cassette loading cover on the machine main body, and loosely
(13) retain the four lower screws.
(3) Lower right-hand
side cover
Screw cover (10)
Stack table loading cover
(5) (4)
(12)
(11)
SCN08A
(2) board NT
O
FR
Lower front cover Lower front inner cover (1)

Loosely retain
FR1H1200.EPS
BR M4x8, x4
FR1H1484.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(2) Insert a 300 mm scale along the right-hand side of the lowermost shelf (fourth shelf). (4) Insert a 300-mm rule along the right edge of the shelf.
Press the manual release lever to lower the hold pin. Press the manual release lever to lower the hold pin.
(3) Slide the multi-stage cassette loading cover until the scale comes into contact with the (5) Secure the multi-stage cassette loading cover.
cassette set unit entry reference guide protrusion (level difference: 0.5 1 mm), and Loosely retain the two upper screws. After completing positioning steps (3) for the
then tighten the four screws that were loosely retained. uppermost shelf (first shelf), tighten the screws.
(2) SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Because of parts machining precision, the multi-stage cassette loading cover may be slightly
warped when secured, though this will not pose any problem. Alignment with the cassette set
unit should take first priority.
Manual release (6) Connect connector CNT1.

lever
(2) Top view (4)
(3) Cassette set unit
entry reference guide
0.5 - 1mm (white plastic)
Scale Scale
Manual release
0.5 - 1mm (5) lever
Lower most shelf
Multi-stage
cassette loading Top view
cover (5) Cassette set unit
(4) BR M4x8, x2 entry reference guide
Scale
0.5 - 1mm (white plastic)
T
ON
FR
(6)
CNT1
0.5 - 1mm
Multi-stage
cassette loading cover
Scale
FR1H1485.EPS
Multi-stage
cassette loading cover
FR1H1486.EPS
(7) Reinstall the rest of the covers.

Reinstall the covers in the reverse order of removal.
Removal
(8) Make sure that the covers have been installed securely and there is no missing cover
screw.
009-051-06
04.20.2001
05.31.99 FM2460
FM3006 05.31.99 FM2460
04.20.2001 FM3006
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 25.1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC - 25.2
Adjustment of Front Shelf Cover (4) Press a rule against the center guide, and while pushing it down until the height of the
top end of the center guide is equal to or lower than that of the right and left guides,
CAUTION tighten the five stopper retaining screws in place.
If the lower portion of the cassette edge is blocked by the guide located in the cassette insertion Right and left guides
slot to prevent the cassette from being pulled out, perform the following procedures to make
adjustments as appropriate.
Adjustment
(1) Remove the front shelf cover. Push down
Removal Rule
(2) Remove the stopper.

(3) Loosen the five screws that retain the center guide.
Center guide
Front shelf cover

(4)
Tighten
BR M4x12, x5
GOOD
There shall be not gap.
FR1H7011.EPS
(5) Attach the stopper removed at step (2).

(6) Reinstall the front shelf cover.
(2)
Stopper
Truss M4x6, x4
(3)
Loosen screw
BR M4x12, x5 FR1H7010.EPS
009-051-10 CR-IR341 Service Manual MC - 25.1 009-051-10 CR-IR341 Service Manual MC - 25.2
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Pushing In
4. Cassette Set Unit
(1) While using care to prevent the connector cables, etc. from getting caught, push the
tray of the cassette set unit all the way into the machine.
This section describes procedures for removing and reinstalling the cassette set unit, and
procedures for checking and replacing parts of the cassette set unit to be replaced. (2) Secure the tray of the cassette set unit with two screws.
(3) Connect the connectors (CNA1-3 to the cassette set unit; CNB1, 3, 4 to the up-down
IP removal unit).
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit
(4) Attach the timing belt to the timing belt wheel.
(5) Put the tensioner back where it was.
CAUTION
Loosen the screw (BR M4x8) that retains the tensioner. Flick the timing belt several
When removing and installing the units, use care not to damage the cables. times to ensure that it snugly fits onto the timing belt wheel, and then secure the
tensioner in place.
3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description
Pulling Out
(1) Remove the following covers. (3) CNB4
Lower front cover, upper right-hand side cover, lower right-hand side cover, upper left- CNB3
hand side cover, upper front cover, stack table, multi-stage cassette loading cover
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CNA1-3 from the cassette set unit; CNB1, 3, 4 from the
up-down IP removal unit).
(3) Slide the tensioner until the timing belt is removed, and then secure the tensioner in CNB1
place.
Loosen the screw (BR M4x8) that retains the tensioner to slide the tensioner as
appropriate, and then secure the tensioner in place.
3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description (1)
(2)
(5) Remove the two screws that retain the tray of the cassette set unit. Tray of the cassette set unit Vertical conveyance unit
(6) Pull out the tray, exercising care so that it is not caught by the connector cables and so BR M4x8, x2
(4), (5)
forth. Cassette set unit
(3) Timing belt
CNA3
(2)
CNB4
CNB3 BR M4x8
CNA1 Tensioner
CNB1
CNA2
FR1H1621.EPS
(6)
(5)
Tray of the cassette set unit Vertical conveyor
BR M4x8, x2
(3), (4)
Cassette set unit
(2) Timing belt
CNA3
BR M4x8
CNA1 Tensioner
CNA2
FR1H1760.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit Reinstallation

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CAUTION CAUTIONS
When removing and reinstalling the unit, use care not to damage the cables. Before inserting the cassette set unit into its position, place the IP removal arm in the home
position. Also, adjust the IP removal height for the home position or the first to fourth shelf
position. If an attempt is made to insert the cassette set unit with the up-down IP removal
Removal assembly positioned elsewhere, the machine may be damaged.
(1) Pull out the tray of the cassette set unit. When placing the cassette set unit in its position, insert it along the positioning brackets
because the sensor may be damaged.
4.1 Removing and Reinstalling Tray of Cassette Set Unit When installing the cassette set unit, properly position it by pressing it against the positioning
(2) Remove the six screws that retain the cassette set unit. brackets. Screw down the cassette set unit while pushing its upper end toward the up-down
(3) Pull out the cassette set unit horizontally. IP removal unit.
NOTES
Top view
When pulling out the cassette set unit, place the IP removal in its home position or
each of the four shelf positions. If the cassette set unit is pulled out from any other Positioning bracket
position, it may be damaged.
When pulling out the cassette set unit, place the IP removal arm in the home posi-
tion. F
Cassette set unit R
O
N
T
T
ON
FR
Top stay of
up-down IP
Cassette set unit removal unit
Push top stay
BR M4x8, x6 Cassette set unit
of up-down IP
T removal unit
ON
FR FR1H1422.EPS
(3) FR1H1051.EPS
(2)
Cassette set unit
BR M4x8, x6
FR1H1422.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
4.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly Installing the Shutter Assembly
Reinstall the shutter assembly.
For reinstallation, check the following points before screwing it down.
Removal of Shutter Assembly
The shutter assembly is pushed against both right and left side plates of the cassette
(1) Pull out the tray of the cassette set unit, or take out the cassette set unit.
set unit.
4.1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit, 4.2 Removing and
The cover of the shutter assembly opens and closes smoothly.
Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
(2) Remove the shutter assembly.
Cassette set unit
Cover
(2)
Shutter assembly
Replacement of Shutter
Removal of Shutter Assembly
(2) Remove the bracket.
(3) Remove the torsion coil spring and slide bearings from the shutter.
(4) Attach to a new shutter the torsion coil spring and slide bearings that were removed at
step (2).
(2)
Bracket
(3), (4)
Sems M3x6
Slide bearing
(3), (4)
Shutter
(3), (4)
Slide bearing
(5) For shutter installation, reverse the removal procedure.

03.20.2004 FM4275 08.31.2005 FM4710
4.4 Checking and Replacing Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, Replacement

5, 9, 13) (1) Remove the shutter assembly.
(2) Disconnect the connectors (SA1, 5, 9, 13).
Checks
(3) Remove SA1, 5, 9, and 13.
(1) Place the machine in a sensor monitoring state so that SA1, 5, 9, and 13 can be
monitored. The sensor is secured to the bracket by four latches. To remove the sensor, pinch the
latches by fingers.
2.2 Checking Various Sensors
(2) Set a cassette into the shelf in place. (2)
Bracket Connector
A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel. (3)
SA1,5,9,13
(3)
Latch
This bracket should
not be removed.
SA1
SA5 T
ON
FR
SA9 Cassette set unit

Cassette FR1H1055.EPS
SA13
(4) Install a new sensor.
3.5 Sensors Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position in Machine
Description
T Cassette set unit (5) Connect the connectors (SA1, 5, 9, 13).
ON
FR
(6) Reinstall the shutter assembly.
FR1H4045.EPS
(7) Reinstall the cassette set unit.
(3) Pull out the cassette. 4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN appears on the operation panel. (8) Check the sensor replaced.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) several times to ensure that the messages appear as appro- Checks
priate.
If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace the sensor
checked, and then check it again.
(5) Select 0. QUIT.
The monitoring is exited to return to 3. SENSOR menu.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
4.5 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette IN Sensors Replacement

(SA2, 6, 10, 14) (1) Remove the cassette set unit.
4.2 Removing an Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
(2) Cut the cable tie.
Checks
monitored. (4) Remove SA2, 6, 10, and 14.
(2)
(2) Set a cassette into the shelf in place. Cut cable tie SA2 T
ON
FR
A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel.
SA6
(3) SA10
Connector
SA14
Bracket
(4)
SA2, 6, 10, 14
Double sems M2x10, x2
SA6 FR1H1057.EPS
Cassette
SA10 (5) Install new SA2, 6, 10, and 14.
(6) Connect the connectors.
SA14 (7) Restore the cable tie that was cut at step (2).
(8) Adjust the sensors replaced.
T Cassette set unit
ON
FR Adjustment
FR1H4046.EPS
(3) Pull out the cassette.

A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN appears on the operation panel.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) several times to ensure that the messages appear as appro-
priate.
(5) Select 0. QUIT.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Adjustment (7) Type in the number of the sensor to be checked (SA2, 6, 10, 14).
The machine is now in the sensor monitoring enabled state.
CAUTION (8) Loosen the screw on the mounting bracket of the sensor to be checked (SA2, 6, 10,
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is 14).
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (9) Secure the manual release lever of the cassette set unit in place with a cable tie, so
that the hold pin is withdrawn.
(1) Remove the following covers. (10) While pushing down the latch by hand, set a scale in such a position that the distance
Lower front cover, upper right-hand side cover, lower right-hand side cover, upper left- from the end face of the plate to the tip of the scale is 1.5 mm.
hand side cover, upper front cover, stack table, multi-stage cassette loading cover (11) With the tip of the scale in contact with the actuator of the sensor (SA2, 6, 10, 14) to
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers be checked, slowly move the mounting bracket bit by bit toward the scale and tighten
(2) With the cassette set unit pulled out, connect the connectors (CNA1, 2) of the cassette the screw in place where the sensor changes status from OPEN to CLOSE.
set unit. (12) Slide the scale until the distance between the end of the plate and the tip of the rule is
1.0 mm, and make sure that the sensor (SA2, 6, 10, 14) transitions to OPEN.
4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
(10)
Latch
Actuator
Plate SA2, 6, 10, 14
Cassette set unit
SA2
(10) (8), (11)
Scale Mounting bracket
BR M4x8
SA6 End of calipers

(10)
CNA1 Scale Plate end face
SA10 1.5mm : Close
T
1mm : Open
CNA2 ON
FR SA14
FR1H1412.EPS
(13) Repeat steps (6) through (12) to adjust the sensor mounting position.
(14) Cut the cable tie that was attached at step (9).
FR1H1058.EPS (15) Select 0. QUIT.
(3) Power ON the machine. The screen switches back to 5. MECHANICAL UTILITY menu.
The initialization sequence is started, and, after 30 to 60 seconds have passed, a (16) Select 0. QUIT.
software version number (Axx) appears on the operation panel. The screen returns to the main menu.
(4) Immediately after the software version number (Axx) appears, touch the upper left and (17) Power OFF the machine.
upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. (18) Check the sensor adjusted.
M-Utility is activated. Checks
If STEP 95 is indicated, any touch on the operation panel is rejected. In that case,
reset the machine and wait until the software version number (Axx) appears on the
operation panel.
(5) Select 5. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 1. INITIALIZE in sequence.
(6) Select 4. SENSOR and 2. MONITOR.
A list of sensor Nos. is displayed.

05.31.99 FM2460 04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460
4.6 Checking and Replacing Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 7, Replacement

11, 15) (1) Remove the mounting bracket together with SA3, 7, 11, 15.
(3) Remove SA3, 7, 11, 15 from the mouting bracket.
Checks
The sensor is secured to the bracket by four latches. To remove the sensor, pinch the
With no cassette inserted, the cassette hold pin is withdrawn. As such, when checking this latches by fingers.
sensor, turn OFF the solenoid so that the cassette hold pin is protruded before executing
sensor monitoring.
(1) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY, 2. ACTUATOR, and 3. STOP in sequence.
SA3
(2) Enter the number of the solenoid (SOLA1-4) corresponding to SA3, 7, 11, 15.
The solenoid is activated so that it is in the cassette hold mode (the sensor is SA7
CLOSE). SA11
(3) Place the machine in a sensor monitoring state so that SA3, 7, 11, 15 can be moni-
tored. SA15

(4) Insert a 1.5-mm Allen wrench straight into the hold manual release hole to push the
lever.
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN appears. ON
T
FR
FRONT
FR1H1056.EPS

SA3 Description
SA7 (5) Connect the connectors (SA3, 7, 11, 15).
Release hole
SA11 Lever (6) Attach the mounting bracket.
Allen wrench Screw down the mounting bracket while pushing it upward.
SA15
(7) Check the sensor replaced.
Checks
T
ON
FR
FR1H1104.EPS
(5) Pull out the Allen wrench.

A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears.
priate.
(7) Select 0. QUIT, 0. QUIT, 2. ACTUATOR, and 2. DRIVE in sequence.
(8) Enter the number of the solenoid activated at step (2).
The solenoid is activated so that it is in the cassette hold release mode (the sensor
is OPEN).
(9) Repeatedly select 0. QUIT.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
4.7 Checking and Replacing Mammo/ST Sensors (SA4, 8, 12, Replacement

16) (1) Remove the cassette set unit.
4.2 Removing an Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
Checks
(3) Disconnect the connectors (CNA4, 8, 12, 16).
monitored. (4) Remove the sensor bracket as a whole.
2.2 Checking Various Sensors (5) Replace the sensor assembly.
(2) Set a non-mammo-type cassette into the shelf in place. Cassette set unit
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN appears on the operation panel. (3)
SA4 CNA4, 8, 12, 16 (4)
SA8 Loosen screw
BR M4x8
(5)
SA12
Sensor assembly
SA16 (4)
Sensor bracket
BR M4x8
SA4
(2)
T Cut
ON
SA8 FR cable tie
FR1H1054.EPS
Cassette
SA12
(6) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
SA16
When attaching the mounting bracket for SA4, 8, 12, 16, tighten the screw while
holding it down.
O NT Cassette set unit CAUTION

FR
When retaining the cables with ties, observe the following precautions.
Ensure that the cables do not protrude beyond the side plates.
FR1H4047.EPS
Retain the cables at proper positions so that they will not be caught by rotating
rollers.
(7) Check the sensor replaced.
(4) Set a mammo-type cassette in place.
Checks
When the cassette is inserted, a message indicating that the sensor is OPEN
appears. Immediately after that, a message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE
appears.
When the cassette is removed, a message indicating that the sensor is OPEN
appears. Immediately after that, a message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE
appears.
priate.
If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace SA4, 8, 12,
16, and then check it again.
(7) Enter 0 (zero).

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
4.8 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette Hold (3) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2. ACTUATOR in sequence.
(4) Select 3. STOP.
Solenoids (SOLA1-4)
A list of sensor numbers is displayed.
(5) Enter the number of the cassette hold solenoid to be stopped.
Checks
The actuator selected is stopped.
(1) Place the machine in a cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1-4) operation enabled state.
2.2 Checking Various Sensors Example: 3. STOP is selected
0. QUIT
(2) Set a cassette in the shelf. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
3. TEST MODE
7. FILE UTILITY
9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
>6 4 5 6
0.QUIT
1 2 3
1.MOTOR
2.ACTUATOR
3.SENSOR
0 . SP
4.UNIT
MU > 2
DEL BS ENT
0.QUIT
1.NUMBER
Cassette SOLA1 2.DRIVE Caps
3.STOP
MU:AUT > 3
SOLA2
SOLA3
The solenoid number (1: SOLA1) is selected
T Cassette set unit
ON SOLA4
FR MU:AUT > 3
11:FFM
INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR
1 - 11 : 1 D E F
FR1H4048.EPS
0.QUIT
1.NUMBER
2.DRIVE 7 8 9
3.STOP
MU:AUT >
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . SP
DEL BS ENT
Caps
FR1H1762.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(6) Slightly pull the cassette to ensure that the cassette cannot be removed. Replacement
(7) Select 2. DRIVE. (1) Remove the cassette set unit.
(8) Enter the number of the solenoid selected at step (5). 4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
The actuator selected is driven. (2) Disconnect the connector for the solenoid to be replaced from the side plate.
Example: 2. DRIVE is selected (3) Remove the three solenoid retaining screws to take out the solenoid.
6:SVB1 7:SOLF1 8:SOLC1 9:LAMP STB 10:LAMP ON
11:FFM Cassette set unit (3)
INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR A B C SOLA1, 2, 3, 4
1 - 11 : 1
Sems M3x6, x3
0.QUIT D E F
1.NUMBER
2.DRIVE
3.STOP 7 8 9
MU:AUT > 2 SOLA1
6:SVB1 7:SOLF1 8:SOLC1 9:LAMP STB 10:LAMP ON 4 5 6
11:FFM SOLA2
1 - 11 : 1 1 2 3
SOLA3
0.QUIT
1.NUMBER 0 . SP
2.DRIVE SOLA4 (2)
3.STOP
DEL BS ENT Connector
MU:AUT >
T
ON
Caps FR
FR1H1210.EPS
FR1H1761.EPS
(4) Install new solenoid.

(5) Connect the connector to the side plate.
(10) Repeat steps (2) through (9) several times to ensure that there is nothing abnormal.
(6) Adjust the solenoid replaced.
If anything abnormal is found with a solenoid, replace it and then check it again.
Adjustment
(11) Select 0. QUIT.
The operation is exited to return to 2. ACTUATOR menu.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Adjustment 4.9 Checking and Replacing Elevation HP Sensor (SA17)
CAUTION
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is Checks
CAUTION
(1) Remove the shutter assembly. Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
(2) Remove the retaining bracket used for transit, which is located on the rear of the up-
down IP removal unit. (1) Power ON the machine.
(3) Loosen the three mounting screws so as to allow the solenoid mounting location to be (2) Touch the U-Utility button.
shifted. The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
(4) Remove the spring. (3) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence.
(5) Put the protruding portion of the retaining bracket used for transit into the cassette hold M-Utility is activated.
pin sliding hole, and then grip the retaining bracket used for transit with the cover-
closing roller. (4) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3. SENSOR in sequence.
(6) Raise the solenoid until the cassette hold pin contacts the protruding portion of the (5) Select 2. MONITOR.
retaining bracket used for transit, and then secure the solenoid in place. A list of sensor Nos. is displayed.
The solenoid should be raised so that the retaining bracket used for transit is not lifted (6) Type in the number of the elevation HP sensor (SA17).
up.
(5), (6) Guide plate of (7) Rotate the MB3 timing belt clockwise, as seen from the rear, until the actuator does
cassette set unit not block the SA17 light path.
Cover-closing
roller From the hole in the side plate of the IP removal unit, visually check the actuator and
SA17.
When the light path is no longer blocked, a message indicative of the sensor OPEN
status appears on the operation panel.
Protruding portion of
retaining bracket used (7)
Timing belt
Hole for transit
SOLA1
(6) Retaining bracket used for
SOLA2 transit
Hold pin
MB3
(4)
Spring
SOLA3
T FR
ON ON
FR SOLA4 (7) T
Cassette set unit Actuator

SOLA1, 2, 3, 4
SA17
FR1H1108.EPS Hole
(7) Remove the retaining bracket used for transit.

(8) Push down the iron core of the solenoid by hand.
Make sure that the cassette hold pin is located below the guide plate of the cassette
set unit.
(9) Reinstall the spring.
(10) Check the solenoid adjusted.
Checks

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(8) Rotate the MB3 timing belt counterclockwise, as seen from the rear, until the actuator 4.10 Replacing Inch/Metric Guides
blocks the SA17 light path.
When the light path is blocked, a message indicative of the sensor CLOSE status (1) Remove the shutter assembly.
appears on the operation panel. 4.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly
(9) Rotate the MB3 timing belt clockwise, as seen from the rear, until the actuator does
(2) Remove the rubber rollers at the stage where the inch/metric guides to be replace are
not block the SA17 light path.
located.
When the light path is no longer blocked, a message indicative of the sensor OPEN 4.12 Replacing Rubber Rollers of Cassette Set Unit
status appears on the operation panel.
(3) While holding down the mounting bracket, remove the four hex socket head bolts from
CAUTION the inch/metric guides.
Be sure to position the actuator below SA17. If the machine is booted up with the actuator (3)
positioned above SA17, the home position (HP) cannot be detected during initialization, so that Inch-system guide (white guide)
the IP removal unit hits the top plate of the elevation unit, probably damaging the machine. Hex socket head bolt M3x12, x2
Cap M3x10
(3)
(10) Repeat steps (7) through (9) several times. Metric-system guide (brown guide)
Hex socket head bolt M3x12, x2
If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace the sensor. Cap M3x10
Replacement
(1) Disconnect the connector (S17).
(2) Remove the elevation HP sensor (SA17).
3.5 Sensors Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position in Machine Cassette set unit
Description
FR1H1320.EPS
(4) Remove the inch/metric guides.

Bracket
(5) For installation of a new inch/metric guide, reverse the removal steps.
Bracket
Latch
(2)
SA17
(1)
Connector
FR1H1061.EPS

(4) Connect the connector (SA17).
(5) Check SA17.
Checks

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
4.11 Adjusting Movable Roll Movable roll for 24x30 mammo

The adjustment procedures are common to the first through fourth shelves.
Widthwise Adjustment (2) Loosen the two hex socket head bolts (M4x8) on the 24x30 mammo movable roll
assembly retaining bracket.
Movable roll for metric use (3) Push the manual release lever of the cassette set unit by hand to lower the hold pin,
and then insert a cassette (24x30 mammo cassette) into the cassette set unit.
(4) Take your hand off the manual release lever and secure the cassette by the hold pin in
place.
(2) Loosen the two hex socket head bolts (M4x8) and one BR (M4x8) screw on the inch/
(5) Align the cassette to the reference side of the cassette set unit.
metric movable roll assembly retaining bracket.
(6) With the 24x30 mammo movable roll assembly retaining bracket and 24x30 mammo
(3) Push the manual release lever of the cassette set unit by hand to lower the hold pin,
movable roll pushed against the cassette, tighten the two hex socket head bolts M4x8.
and then insert a cassette (24x30 cassette) into the cassette set unit.
(7) Insert the 24x30 mammo cassette, and check to see that:
place. The cassette can be inserted along the movable roll; and
(5) Align the cassette to the reference side of the cassette set unit. The cassette cover can be opened.
(6) With the inch/metric movable roll assembly retaining bracket and inch/metric movable (8) Make lengthwise adjustment for the movable roll.
roll pushed against the cassette, tighten the two hex socket head bolts M4x8 and one Lengthwise Adjustment
BR M4x8 screw.
(7) Insert the 24x30 cassette and 10"x12" cassette, and check to see that:
The cassette can be inserted along the movable roll; and
The cassette cover can be opened.
(8) Make lengthwise adjustment for the movable roll.
Lengthwise Adjustment
Movable roll for inch use

(2) Loosen the two hex socket head bolts (M4x8) and one BR (M4x8) screw on the inch/
metric movable roll assembly retaining bracket.
(3) Push the manual release lever of the cassette set unit by hand to lower the hold pin,
and then insert a cassette (24x30 cassette) into the cassette set unit.
place.
(5) Align the cassette to the reference side of the cassette set unit.
(6) With the inch/metric movable roll assembly retaining bracket and inch/metric movable
roll pushed against the cassette, tighten the two hex socket head bolts M4x8 and one
BR M4x8 screw.
(7) Insert the 24x30 cassette and 10"x12" cassette, and check to see that:
The cassette can be inserted along the movable roll; and
The cassette cover can be opened.
(8) Make lengthwise adjustment for the movable roll.

08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
Movable roll for metric use

Cassette set unit
(1) Loosen the two screws that retain the metric rearward toppling prevention bracket
ON
T (screwed down on its upper and lower portions).
FR
(2) Make necessary adjustments to ensure that the distance moved downward for the
trailing edge of the movable roll is not greater than 1 mm.
(3), (4)
Manual release lever As the rearward toppling prevention bracket is offset in the direction of the arrow
(3)
(toward the shutter assembly) as shown below, the distance moved downward for the
movable roll trailing edge is decreased.
Top view
Trailing edge of movable roll

Cassette
Top view
Movable roll for Movable roll for metric use

inch use Movable roll for metric use
24x30 mammo
movable roll (2), (6) (2)
BR M4x8 (yellow screw) Metric rearward toppling prevention
Spring bracket
(1)
Hex socket head bolt with spring and
plain washer
M4x10 (lower portion)
(6) (5)
Inch/metric movable roll assembly
Reference
retaining bracket F (1)
side R
O
Hex socket head bolt with spring
N and plain washer
T The distance moved downward M4x10 (upper portion)
is decreased.
F
R FR1H1763.EPS
24x30 mammo O
movable roll assembly N Side view
T
retaining bracket
Front end check
FRONT
The movement must be smooth.
(2), (6) Rear end check

Hex socket head bolt
M4x8, x2 (yellow screw)
FR1H1380.EPS
1 mm max.
FR1H1766.EPS

4.2 Removing the Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
(5) Push in the tray of the cassette set unit.

08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
Movable roll for inch use Movable roll for 24x30 mammo
(1) Loosen the single hex socket head bolt that retains the inch rearward toppling (1) Loosen the single screw that retains the 24x30 mammo rearward toppling prevention
prevention bracket. bracket.
(2) Make necessary adjustments to ensure that the distance moved downward for the (2) Make necessary adjustments to ensure that the distance moved downward for the
trailing edge of the movable roll is not greater than 1 mm. trailing edge of the movable roll is not greater than 1 mm.
As the rearward toppling prevention bracket is offset in the direction of the arrow As the rearward toppling prevention bracket is offset in the direction of the arrow
(toward the trailing edge of the movable roll) as shown below, the distance moved (toward the shutter assembly) as shown below, the distance moved downward for the
downward for the movable roll trailing edge is decreased. movable roll trailing edge is decreased.
Top view Top view
Trailing edge of movable roll Trailing edge of movable roll

Movable roll for inch use
Movable roll for 24x30 mammo
The distance moved downward

is decreased.
(2)
Inch rearward toppling
prevention bracket
(2)
24x30 mammo rearward toppling
prevention bracket
(1) F
R
Hex socket head bolt with spring and O
plain washer N (1)
T F
M4x10 BR M4x8 R
O
N
FR1H1764.EPS The distance moved downward T
is decreased.
Side view
FR1H1765.EPS
Front end check

FRONT Side view
Front end check
FRONT
Rear end check
Rear end check

1 mm max.
1 mm max.
FR1H1766.EPS

FR1H1766.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
4.12 Replacing Rubber Rollers of Cassette Set Unit 4.13 Replacing Guide Plate of Cassette Set Unit
(1) Remove the shutter assembly. The following procedures collectively describe removal and reinstallation of the guide plates
4.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly for the first through fourth shelves.
(2) Remove the two grip springs of the rubber roller to be removed. Sensors and other components to be removed should be identified appropriately according
to the shelf to be replaced.
(3) Remove the two bearings and two housings.
The illustration below describes the guide plate for the third shelf, by way of example.
(4) Replace the rubber roller.
(2) Removal
Grip spring
(1) Remove the cassette set unit.
(3)
Housing 4.2 Removing an Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
(3) (2) Remove the shutter assembly.
Bearing (1)
Cassette set unit
(3) Remove the sensor assembly of the mammo/ST sensors (SA4, 8, 12, and 16),
together with the sensor bracket, as a whole.
NOTE
(4) After the sensor assembly is removed, use care not to damage the sensor and not to
Rubber roller cut the cable.
(3)
Bearing
Cassette set unit
(3)
Housing
SA4
(2)
Grip spring SA8
SA12 (3)
Sensor assembly
SA16
(3)
Sensor Bracket
BR M4x8
T
ON
FR
FR1H3000.EPS
FR1H1755.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(4) Remove the cassette IN sensors (SA2, 6, 10, and 14), together with the sensor (6) Remove the four springs.
assembly, as a whole.
NOTE
After the sensor assembly is removed, use care not to damage the sensor and not to FR Half-punch
cut the cable. ON
T
Spring
FR Half-punch
ON
T
SA2
(6)
SA6 Free length: 43 mm spring x3
(located below the movable guide)
SA10 (6)
Free length: 31 mm spring
Cassette set unit (located below the latch)
FR1H3003.EPS
(4)
Sensor assembly
SA14 BR M4x8
(7) Remove the spring from the solenoid arm.
Cassette set unit FR1H3001.EPS
(5) Remove the rubber roller. FR

ON
T
Detach the grip springs, housings, and bearings located on both right and left sides of
the robber roller, before removing the rubber roller.
(5)
Free length: 120 mm Solenoid arm
FR grip spring
ON
T
(5)
Housing
(5)
Bearing Cassette set unit
(7)
(5) Spring
FR1H3004.EPS
Bearing
(5)
Housing
(5)
Free length: 106 mm (5)
grip spring Rubber roller

08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(8) Loosen the three solenoid (SOLA1-4) mounting screws. (12) Remove the cassette hold pin.
(9) Remove the screw that retains the shaft of the solenoid arm.
Guide plate
Cassette set unit
T
ON
FR
Cassette set unit

SOLA1 Solenoid arm
T
ON
FR
SOLA2
Shaft
Solenoid SOLA1
Solenoid
SOLA3
SOLA2
SOLA4 Hole
(8) (9)
Loosen screw B M3x10
Sems M3x6, x3 SOLA3
FR1H3005.EPS
SOLA4
(10) Remove the cassette hold sensors (SA3, 7, 11, and 15), together with the sensor
(11) Disconnect the connectors for the cassette IN sensors and mammo/ST sensors.
(12)
For the first shelf: SA2 and SA4 Cassette hold pin
For the second shelf: SA6 and SA8
For the third shelf: SA10 and SA12 FR1H3028.EPS
For the fourth shelf: Connectors need not be disconnected.
Cassette set unit
SA3
SA7
(11) SA11
SA10
SA15
(11)
SA12
T
ON
FR
(10)
Sensor assembly
B M3x6
FR1H3026.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(13) Remove the guide A. (16) Disconnect the connectors (CNA1 and CNA2) and remove the connector bracket.
(14) Remove the screws on the side plate that retain the stopper A, stopper B, and guide B. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
(15) Remove the single guide plate retaining screw. This procedure need not be performed when replacing the guide plates for the first and
second shelves.
(14)
(14)
BR M4x8
Bracket
FR
ON
T
(14) Cassette set unit
(13) BR M4x8
Guide A
BR4x8, x2
(14)
BR M4x8
Guide B Stopper B
FR
ON
T
(16)
CNA1
Pan-head M2.6x10, x2
Cassette set unit

(16)
Connector bracket
BR M4x8, x2
(16)
CNA2
Pan-head M2.6x10, x2
FR1H3007.EPS
(15)
BR M4x8 Stopper A
(for retaining the
guide plate)
(14)
BR M4x8
FR1H3006.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(17) Remove the five guide plate mounting screws. (18) Remove the guide plate, with the guide B, stopper A, and stopper B attached thereto.
NOTE
Use care not to deform the guide plate and side plate.
While paying attention to the following points, remove the guide plate.
(17)
BR M4x8 Detach the stoppers A and B from the half-punch on the side plate.
(17)
BR M4x8 Move upward the bends of the guide plate.
Remove the guide plate rearward of the cassette set unit.
FR
ON
T
Guide plate
Guide plate Stopper B

FR Bend
O NT
Guide
plate Stopper A
(17) (17)
BR M4x8 BR M4x8
(17)
BR M4x8
FR1H3008.EPS
FR
(18)
ON Guide plate
T
FR1H3009.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(19) Remove the guide B, stopper A, and stopper B from the guide plate. Reinstallation
(19) (1) Loosely attach the guide B, stopper A, and stopper B to the guide plate.
Guide B
BR M4x8 (1)
Guide B
(19)
Stopper B
Hex socket head bolt (1)
M4x10 Stopper B
FR
ON FR
T ON
(19) T
Stopper A
M4x10 Guide plate Guide plate Loosely attached
Hex socket head bolt M4x10
Loosely attached
BR M4x8
(1)
Stopper A
FR1H3010.EPS
Loosely attached
Hex socket head bolt M4x10 FR1H3011.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(2) Attach the guide plate to the cassette set unit. While paying attention to the following points, install the guide plate.
NOTES Install the guide plate rearward of the cassette set unit.
Use care not to deform the guide plate and side plate. Make sure that the bends of the guide plate are positioned so that they can be
Before installing the guide plate for the fourth shelf, make sure that the sensor screwed properly.
assembly is located outside the side plate. Snap the side plate half-punch to the stoppers A and B.
OK
FR
ONT
Side
plate FR (2)
ON
T
Guide plate
Sensor assembly
NG
Cassette set unit

Side
plate
FR1H3013.EPS
Bend
Bend Bend Bend
FR
ON
T
Guide plate
Bend
Stopper B
Stopper A
Half-punch Half-punch
FR1H3012.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(3) Attach the guide A. (6) Make sure that the guide plate is aligned properly to the guide A.
Attach the guide A so that the side plate half-punch is snapped into the slit of the
guide A. Side plate Top view
Loosely tighten the screw on the lower side of the guide A.
Guide plate
(4) Tighten the screws for the guide B, stopper A, and stopper B on the side plate. Guide plate
(5) Tighten the guide plate retaining screw.
Guide A
(4)
BR M4x12 Guide A
(3)
Guide A Half-punch Bracket
Guide plate
OK NG
(4)
BR M4x8
FR1H3015.EPS
Slit
(3) (7) Tighten the screws for the guide A, guide B, stopper A, and stopper B on the guide
(4)
BR M4x8 plate.
BR M4x8
(3) Securely tighten the screw that was loosely tighten on the lower side of the guide plate.
Loosely tighten Guide B
BR M4x8 Stopper B
(7)
BR M4x8
FR
ON
T
FR
ON
T
(7)
M4x10
Guide plate
Cassette set unit
(7)
BR M4x8
(7)
Hex socket head bolt M4x10
FR1H3016.EPS
(5)
BR M4x8
(for retaining the
Stopper A
guide plate)
(4)
BR M4x8
FR1H3014.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(8) Loosely tighten the five guide plate mounting screws. (9) While measuring the levelness of the guide plate, securely tighten the five mounting
screws.
(8)
(8) Loosely
FR
Loosely tighten ON
T
tighten BR M4x8 BR M4x8
FR
ON Guide plate
T
(9)
Guide plate BR M4x8, x5
300 mm scale
FR1H3018.EPS
NOTE
Guide
Adjust the gap developed when a 300 mm scale is applied to the guide plate, and
plate tighten the five mounting screws in place.
Gap adjustments should be made on the front, center, and rear of the guide plate.
The gap is 0.5 mm or greater = NG
The gap is less than 0.5 mm = OK
(8)
(8) Loosely
Loosely tighten (8)
tighten 300 mm scale
BR M4x8 Loosely tighten
BR M4x8 BR M4x8
FR1H3017.EPS
FR
ON
T
Guide plate Less than 0.5 mm
Front
Center
Rear Guide plate
FR1H3019.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(10) Attach the connectors (CNA1 and CNA2) to the connector bracket. (13) Attach the sensor assembly of the mammo/ST sensors (SA4, 8, 12, and 16).
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE When attaching the sensor assembly, tighten the screw with the sensor bracket
pushed downward.
This procedure need not be performed when replacing the guide plates for the first and
second shelves. Cassette set unit
(11) Reinstall the connector bracket. SA4
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE SA8
This procedure need not be performed when replacing the guide plates for the first and SA12 (13)
second shelves. Sensor assembly
SA16 (13)
Sensor bracket
BR M4x8
FR
ON
T
Cassette set unit
T
ON
FR
FR1H3021.EPS
(14) Attach the four springs.

NOTE
Use care not to confuse the springs, which have different lengths.
(10)
CNA1 FR Half-punch
ON
Pan-head M2.6x10, x2 T
Spring
Half-punch
(11)
Connector bracket
BR M4x8, x2
(14)
Free length: 43 mm spring x3
(10) (located below the movable guide)
CNA2
Pan-head M2.6x10, x2 (14)
FR1H3020.EPS
Free length: 31 mm spring
(located below the latch)
(12) Attach the cassette IN sensors (SA2, 6, 10, and 14), together with the sensor
4.5 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 6, 10, and
14), Adjustment
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(15) Attach the rubber roller. (16) Attach the cassette hold pin.
NOTES Fit the cassette hold pin into the cassette hold pin sliding hole.
Use care not to attach the rubber roller in a wrong direction.
Hole
Use care not to confuse the right and left grip springs, which have different lengths.
Guide plate
(15)
Free length: 120mm
FR grip spring
ON
T
Cassette set unit
T
ON
(15) FR Solenoid arm
(15) Housing
(16)
Bearing Cassette hold pin
(15) Solenoid
Bearing
(15)
Housing
(15)
Free length: 106mm (15)
grip spring Rubber roller
FR1H3024.EPS
(17) Screw down the shaft of the solenoid arm.

(18) Adjust the position of the solenoid and tighten the three mounting screws.
4.8 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids (SOLA1-4),
Adjustment
(19) Attach the spring of the solenoid arm.
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
(20) Attach the cassette hold sensors (SA3, 7, 11, and 15), together with the sensor (23) While pushing the manual release lever by hand to lower the cassette hold pin, insert
assembly, as a whole. cassettes of respective sizes into the cassette set unit.
When installing the sensor assembly, tighten the screw with the sensor assembly 24 x 30
pushed against the guide plate. 10" x 12"
24 x 30 mammo
Make sure that the stopper pin opens the cassette cover.
Cassette set unit If the cassette cover does not open, adjust the levelness of the guide plate again.
SA3

Guide plate
SA11
SA15
(20)
Sensor assembly T
ON
BM3x6 FR
FR1H3027.EPS
(21) Connect the connectors for the cassette IN sensors and mammo/ST sensors.
For the first shelf: SA2 and SA4 Cassette Manual release lever
For the second shelf: SA6 and SA8
For the third shelf: SA10 and SA12
For the fourth shelf: Connectors need not be connected. Stopper
Cassette
Pin
FRONT
Cover
FR1H3025.EPS

4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit
08.30.2001 FM3115 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3115 (1)
4.14 Mounting the Antistatic Member of the Shutter Section (1) Remove the front shelf cover.
(2) Align the half punches of the antistatic member positioning jig with the shutter
Installation procedures assembly opening.
CAUTION (3) Mark the positions for mounting the antistatic member and applying the tape by means
of the upper four slits of the antistatic member positioning jig.
Pay due attention to the edges of the shutter assembly opening when replacing the antistatic
(4) Put the antistatic member within the marking lines A.
member.
(5) Apply the tape within the marking lines B to fix the antistatic member.
NOTES
Shutter assembly Shutter assembly cover
Wipe clean the mounting location of a new antistatic member with a cloth dampened with Shutter
opening
Shutter assembly
dehydrated ethanol or the like.
assembly (2)
Use the antistatic member positioning jig to apply the tape or the antistatic member. Half punches
(3)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE Antistatic Upper four slits
member Tape
The antistatic member positioning jig is supplied together with the kit for overseas use.
Antistatic member
Antistatic member positioning jig
positioning jig
(4)
Antistatic member
FR1H4049.EPS
Marking lines A
Antistatic member
(5)
Tape
Marking lines B
FR1H4050.EPS
(6) Reinstall the front shelf cover.

08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
(9) Rotate the timing belt wheel by hand until the actuator blocks the SB1 light path.
5. Up-Down IP Removal Unit
This section describes procedures for checking and replacing parts of the up-down IP If anything abnormal is found, such as no message indicative of the sensor OPEN or
removal unit to be replaced. CLOSE status displayed, then replace the sensor.
Unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that covers that should be removed prior to checks (10) Repeatedly select 0. QUIT.
and replacement have been removed. M-Utility is exited.
Replacement
(1) Remove the cassette set unit.
5.1 Checking and Replacing Suction Cup HP Sensor (SB1)
(2) Disconnect the connector (SB1).
Checks
NOTE
CAUTION If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, rotate the MB3 timing belt to move the IP
removal unit to such a position as to facilitate its disconnection.
When moving the IP removal unit, locate the IP removal arm in its home position to
prevent damage to it.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SB1 and then check it again.
(1) Power ON the machine.
IP removal unit
(2) Make sure that the distance between the bearing flange on the left side of the IP
removal arm and the left side plate is 86.5 1 mm.
IP removal unit
Timing belt
SB1 wheel
(2)
Left side
Shaft Bearing flange plate
IP removal
arm T
ON
86.51mm FR Actuator ON
T
FR SB1
(3) Touch the U-Utility button. (3) Pull the IP removal arm toward yourself.
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. (4) Remove the suction cup HP sensor (SB1).
(4) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. 3.5 Sensors Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position in Machine
Description
M-Utility is activated.
(6) Connect the connector (SB1).
(7) Check SB1.
A list of sensor numbers is displayed.
Checks
(7) Type in the number of the suction cup HP sensor (SB1).
(8) Rotate the timing belt wheel by hand until the actuator does not block the SB1 light
path.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
5.2 Checking and Replacing Cassette Inlet IP Sensor (SB2) (9) Select 0. QUIT.
The screen returns to 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY.
(10) Select 0. QUIT.
Checks
The screen returns to the main menu.
CAUTION (11) Select 0. QUIT.
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is Exit M-Utility.
Replacement
(1) Power ON the machine. (1) Disconnect the connector bracket.
The initialization starts, and after an elapse of about 30 to 60 seconds, the software (2) Rotate the MB3 timing belt to lower the up-down IP removal unit until the connector
version number (Axx) appear on the operation panel. (CNSB2) is visible through the window.
(2) Immediately after the software version number (Axx) appears, sequentially touch the (3) Remove the protective bracket.
operation panel upper left corner and upper right corner. (4) Remove the cassette inlet IP sensor (SB2).
M-Utility is activated. (5) Disconnect the connector (SB2).
When the screen reads STEP95, the operation panel is inoperative and does not
respond at all even if you touch it. In such an instance, perform a reset and wait until
the software version number (Axx) appears.
(2)
(3) Select 5. MECHANICAL UTILITY, 1. INITIALIZE and 4. SENSOR in sequence. Timing belt
(4) Select 2. MONITOR. MB3
IP
A list of sensor Nos. is displayed. removal unit
(5) Type in the number of the cassette inlet IP sensor (SB2). Spacer
(4)
The machine is now in the sensor monitoring enabled state. 98.02.25
SB2
(6) Using a slip of paper or the like, block the sensor light path. Pan-head M3x8, x2
(5)
A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE is displayed on the operation panel.
Connector
(7) Remove the slip of paper or the like that has blocked the sensor light path.
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN is displayed on the operation panel.
(8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) several times.
Loosen screw
If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace the sensor. Sems M3x6, x2
(6), (7) (1)

Connector bracket
T
ON
FR
SB2
BR M4x8
IP removal unit Slip
of paper
(3)
Protective bracket Window
Sems M3x6 FR1H1064.EPS

(7) Check SB2.
Checks
NT
FRO
FR1H1293.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 64
5.3 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Each Shelf Position (9) Rotate the MB3 timing belt wheel clockwise, as seen from the rear, until the actuator
blocks the SB3 light path.
Sensor (SB3) A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel.
CAUTION If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace the sensor.
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is (11) Repeatedly select 0. QUIT.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace or adjust SB3. Replacement (replacement should be performed without removing the bracket
(1) Power ON the machine. where possible)
(2) Touch the U-Utility button. If the SB3-attached bracket is removed during replacement, be sure to adjust SB3.
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. (1) While holding it up, remove the each shelf position sensor (SB3).
(3) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. 3.5 Sensors Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position in Machine
M-Utility is activated. Description
(4) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3. SENSOR in sequence. (2) Disconnect the connector (SB3).
A list of sensor numbers is displayed. IP removal unit
(6) Type in the number of the each shelf position sensor (SB3). (2)
Connector Bracket
The machine is now in the sensor monitoring enabled state. Latch
(7) Make sure that the IP removal arm is accommodated.
If not, accommodate the IP removal arm.
ON
T (1)
FR
(8) Rotate the MB3 timing belt counterclockwise, as seen from the rear, until the actuator SB3
does not block the SB3 light path. FR1H1065.EPS
Visually check the actuator and SB3 through the hole located on the side plate of the (3) Connect the connector (SB3).
up-down IP removal assembly. (4) Install a new sensor.
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN appears on the operation panel. (5) Check SB3.
(8) Checks
Timing belt
Adjustment
(1) Loosen the screw on the SB3 mounting bracket.
(2) Tighten the screw on the SB3 mounting bracket in place so that the distance between
MB3 the lower portion of the side plate of the IP removal unit and the bottom of SB3 is 99.5
to 100.0 mm.
FR
ON
T Bottom
SB3
of SB3
(8)
Actuator
Hole 99.5 100.0mm
FR1H1768.EPS
SB3
FR1H1241.EPS (3) Check SB3.

Checks

05.31.99 FM2460 11.20.99 FM2638
5.4 Checking and Adjusting Inch/Metric Sensor (SB4) 5.5 Checking and Replacing Suction Sensor (SB5)
Checks Checks
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SB4. If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SB5.
2.2 Checking Various Sensors 2.2 Checking Various Sensors
NOTE
Replacement
When monitoring SB5, make sure, with PB1 driven, that the sensor is CLOSE when the suction
(1) Remove the bracket that retains SB4 in place. hose is pinched and OPEN when it is released.
NOTE
Remove the bracket before disconnecting the connector (SB4). If you attempt to
disconnect the connector with the bracket fixed, moment is applied to the connector, Replacement
thus damaging the connector. (1) Remove the SB5 retaining bracket.
(2) Remove the hose and FAST-ON terminal from SB5.
(2) Disconnect the connector (SB4). (3) Remove SB5 from the bracket.
(3) Remove the bracket from SB4.
IP removal unit
Timing belt
(2)
Connector
(3)
SB5
(1) Pump assembly
(3) Screw x2
Bracket
SB4 Sems M3x6, x2
Pan-head M3x8, x2
(2)
FAST-ON terminal
T
ON
FR
FR1H1078.EPS

(1)
NOTES Bracket
Sems M3x6
When mounting connector SB4 on the bracket, ensure that the SB4 lower surface is
flush with the bracket cut surface. (2)
Hose
SB4 Bracket
FR1H1008.EPS

Flush FR1H4015.EPS (5) Check SB5.
When mounting the bracket in the up-down IP removal unit, screw it down while Checks
pressing it downward.
(5) Check SB4.

Checks

05.31.99 FM2460 (1) 05.31.99 FM2460
5.6 Replacing Suction Pump (PB1) (4) Cut the cable tie.
(5) Disconnect the connectors (CNPB1).
(1) Rotate the timing belt until the IP removal unit is moved up (away about 250 mm from (6) Remove the hose from the PB1.
the tray of the cassette set unit) to facilitate PB1 removal.
(7) Remove the two screws (one of them should be merely loosened) that retain PB1, and
(2) Cut the cable clamp. take out the PB1 from the pump assembly.
IP removal unit
(1)
Timing belt Timing belt
MB3
(3)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x2 (2)
Cable clamp
MB1
IP removal unit (6)

Disconnect
hose (4)
ON
T Cut cable tie
FR
T
ON
FR1H1767.EPS FR
(7)
PB1
Pump
(7) (5) assembly
Remove CNPB1 (7)
Sems M3x10 Loosen
Sems M3x10
FR1H1005.EPS
(8) Install a new PB1 to the pump assembly.

(9) Restore the cable tie cut at step (4).
(10) Attach the hose removed at step (6).
NOTE
When attaching the hose, connect it to the suction nozzle (upper one of the two
nozzles arranged) of the PB1.
PB1
Suction nozzle
Hose
FR1H1496.EPS
(11) Connect the connector (CNPB1).

(12) Attach the bracket that was removed at step (3).
(13) Restore the cable clamp that was cut at step (2).

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
5.7 Replacing IP Leak Valve (SVB1) 5.8 Replacing Suction Cups

(1) Rotate the timing belt until the IP removal unit is moved up (away about 250 mm from (1) Pull out the IP removal arm toward yourself.
the tray of the cassette set unit) to facilitate SVB1 removal.
NOTE
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNSVB1).
When pulling out the IP removal arm, do not grasp its center. If its center is grasped,
(3) Cut the cable tie that retains the hose in place. the IP removal arm may be bent.
(4) Pull out the hose from SVB1.
(5) Remove SVB1.
Remove the two SVB1 retaining screws behind the machine, and take out SVB1. Up-down IP removal
unit
IP removal unit
(1)
Timing belt
(1)
IP removal arm
(3)
Cut cable tie, x2
(2)
CNSVB1 (4)
T
Hose ON
FR
T FR1H1032.EPS
ON
FR
(5)
SVB1
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H1007.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(2) Remove the guide. 5.9 Replacing Suction Cup Drive Motor (MB1)
Remove either of the right and left brackets that retain the guide, and then remove the
guide. (1) Rotate the timing belt until the IP removal unit is moved up (away about 250 mm from
(3) Replace the two suction cups and the two packings. the tray of the cassette set unit) to facilitate PB1 removal.
NOTES (2) Cut the cable clamp.
Do not rotate the suction cup retaining screws while holding the suction cup rubber (3) Remove the bracket.
portions. Rotate the suction cup retaining screws with a thin-blade screwdriver while (1)
holding the pipe joint with a wrench or like tool. Timing belt
Exercise care to avoid hose disconnection.
MB3
Guide (3)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x2 (2)
Cable clamp
IP removal (2)
arm Bracket
Sems M3x6
Suction face view

MB1
Packing (3) Retaining
Pipe joint screw
Hose IP removal unit

(3)
Packing
T
ON
FR
FR1H1767.EPS
Suction cup
(4) Remove the cable clamp.
FR1H1031.EPS
(5) Disconnect the connector (CNMB1).

(4) Put the IP removal arm back to the rear side.
(6) Remove the suction cup drive motor (MB1).
(7) Remove the timing belt from the MB1 so removed, and attach it to a new MB1.
(6)
MB1
(5) Hex socket head bolts M4x12, x3
CNMB1
(7)
Timing belt wheel
E-ring
Timing belt
T
ON
FR
FR1H1067.EPS

05.30.2002 FM3405 05.31.99 FM2460
(8) Secure MB1 in place with three hex socket head bolts. 5.10 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MB2)
At this time, put the timing belt onto the timing belt wheel.
(9) Connect the connector (CNMB1). (1) Rotate the timing belt until the IP removal unit is moved up (away about 150 mm from
the tray of the cassette set unit) to facilitate MB2 removal.
(10) Install the bracket.
(2) Remove the cable clamp from the connector (CNMB2).
(11) Put the cable clamp back where it was.
NOTE
(4) Take out MB2.
After putting the cable clamp back where it was, make sure that the motor cable does
not interfere with the vertical conveyor and so forth by allowing the IP removal unit to (5) Remove the timing belt pulley and wheel from the MB2 taken out, and attach them to a
move up and down. new MB2.
(1)
Timing belt
MB3
E-ring
(5)
Timing belt wheel
Bracket
(4)
T
ON MB2
FR
Pan-head
M4x10, x2
(2), (3)
CNMB2
(5)
Wheel
Hex socket head setscrew M4x6
FR1H1209.EPS
(6) Secure MB2 in place with two screws.

At this time, put the timing belt onto the timing belt wheel, and fit the protruding portion
of the motor into the hole of the bracket.
(7) Connect the connector (CNMB2).
(8) Put the cable clamp back where it was.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
5.11 Replacing Up-Down Drive Motor (MB3) 5.12 Replacing Elevation Timing Belt
(1) Rotate the MB3 timing belt to raise the up-down IP removal assembly to its topmost (1) Rotate the MB3 timing belt to raise the IP removal unit to its topmost position.
position. (2) Secure the up-down IP removal assembly in place with a cable tie so that it will not fall
(2) Secure the IP removal unit in place with a cable tie so that it will not fall down. down.
CAUTION CAUTION
Be sure to secure the IP removal unit in place. If not, theIP removal unit may fall down, Be sure to secure the IP removal unit in place. If not, the up-down IP removal unit may
because the worm gear becomes free when MB3 is removed. fall down, because the worm gear becomes free when MB3 is removed.
(1) (1)
Timing belt Timing belt
FR FR
ON ON
T IP removal unit T IP removal unit
(2) (2)
Cable tie Cable tie
FR1H1072.EPS
FR1H1072.EPS

(5) From the rear of the machine, remove the two MB3 retaining screws, and take out
MB3. (5) From the rear of the machine, remove the two MB3 retaining screws, and take out
MB3.
(6) Remove the timing belt wheel from the MB3 taken out, and attach it to a new MB3.
(7) Put a new timing belt onto the timing belt wheel.
FR Timing belt
ONT
(6), (7)
(3), (4) FR Timing belt
E-ring ON
CNMB3 T
(3), (4)
(6)
CNMB3
Timing belt
wheel (5)
MB3
Pan-head M4x10, x2
Timing belt
FR1H1073.EPS
wheel (5)
MB3
(7) From the rear of the machine, secure MB3 in place with two screws. Pan-head M4x10, x2
At this time, put the timing belt onto the timing belt wheel. FR1H1195.EPS
(8) Put the cable clamp back where it was. (8) From the rear of the machine, secure MB3 in place with two screws.
(9) Connect the connector (CNMB3). (9) Put the cable clamp back where it was.
(10) Cut the cable tie that retains the IP removal unit in place. (10) Connect the connector (CNMB3).
(11) Cut the cable tie that retains the IP removal unit in place.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
5.13 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorbers of IP Removal (8) Remove the two screws (one of them should be merely loosened) that retain the shock
absorber-attached guide plate (A), and take out the shock absorber-attached guide
Unit plate (A) from the stay.
(9) Loosen the two screws that retain the shock absorber-attached guide plate (B), and
Check and Replacement take out the shock absorber-attached guide plate (B) from the stay.
(10) Remove the two screws (one of them should be merely loosened) that retain the shock
Checking and replacing shock absorbers located under IP removal arm absorber-attached guide plate (C), and take out the shock absorber-attached guide
plate (C) from the stay.
(1) Rotate the timing belt to move up the IP removal unit to nearly the middle stage (away
about 150 mm from the tray of the cassette set unit). (8)
Remove screw
(2) Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed. BR M4x8
(8)
If the shock absorber is peeled or frayed, proceed to step (3) to replace the whole
Shock absorber-attached guide plate (A)
guide to which the shock absorber is attached.
(9)
(3) Remove the spring from the wire. Shock absorber-attached guide plate (B)
(4) Remove the wire from the roller. (10)
Remove screw
(5) Remove the left roller assembly from the shock absorber-attached guide plate. BR M4x8
(6) Remove the four screws (two of them should be merely loosened) that retain the right Stay
(10)
roller assembly, and take out the roller assembly from the bracket. Shock absorber-attached guide plate (C)
Up-down IP (8)
removal unit Loosen screw
(4) IP removal
unit (1) Sems M3x6
Roller
(4) Timing belt (9)
Wire Loosen screw
(3) Sems M3x6, x2 (10)
(4)
Spring Loosen screw
Roller
(2)
(5) Shock absorber-attached (11) Attach new shock absorber-attached guide plates A, B, and C to the stay.
Roller assembly guide plate
Sems M3x6, x2 When installing the guide, tighten the screws while pushing the guide against the stay.
(12) Reinstall the roller assembly removed at steps (5) and (6).
(13) Hook the wire removed at step (4) into the groove of the roller.
(6)
(14) Attach the spring removed at step (3) to the wire.
Loosen screw
BR M4x8, x2
(6) (4)
Roller assembly Roller
Bracket
T
ON
FR
(6)
Remove screw
(7) Pull out the IP removal arm toward the front.

NOTE
When pulling out the IP removal arm, do not grasp its center. If the center is grasped,
the IP removal arm may be bent.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checking and replacing shock absorbers located under IP removal unit Checking and replacing shock absorbers located on rear of IP removal unit
(1) Take out the four shock absorber-attached guides from under the IP removal unit. (1) Rotate the timing belt to move the IP removal unit up to the topmost position.
(2) Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed. Timing belt
If it is peeled or frayed, replace the whole guide to which the shock absorber is at-
tached.
(1)
(3) Reinstall the shock absorber-attached guides.
IP removal unit
Fit the lower portion of the guide into the groove of the lower shaft, and push the upper
portion of the guide against the upper shaft to secure it in place.
IP removal unit Up-down IP

removal unit
T
ON
FR
Side view FR1H1497.EPS
(1)
(2) Remove from the rear of the machine the three screws that retain the shock absorber-
attached guide plate.
Shaft
Rear of machine
Pull
Rear of IP removal unit
Vertical conveyor
(2)
Shock absorber-attached
guide plate
BR M4x8, x3
(2), (3)
Lower portion of
T
IP removal unit ON
FR
Groove Shaft FR1H1483.EPS
(3) Take out the shock absorber-attached guide plate from the front of the machine.
(4) Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed.
tached.
(5) Reinstall the shock absorber-attached guide plate.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Shock absorber-attached guide
FR1H1428.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
5.14 Checking and Replacing Elevation Changeover Guide (7) Remove the elevation changeover guide, using care to avoid interference with the side
plate of the vertical conveyor and so forth.
Check and Replacement elevation changeover guide
(1) Check if the shock absorber of the elevation changeover guide is not peeled or frayed.
If it is peeled or frayed, proceed to step (2) to replace the whole elevation changeover
guide to which the shock absorber is attached.
(2) Remove the spring of the elevation changeover guide.
(3) Remove the single screw that retains the elevation changeover guide to the arm. Vertical conveyor
Using a Phillips stubby screwdriver or the like, remove the screw.

(4) Remove the arm.
(5) Remove both the right and left E-rings that retain the elevation changeover guide.
First remove the E-ring located on the left side of the machine.
(6) Remove both the right and left slide bearings. T
ON
FR
Vertical conveyor
elevation changeover guide
T
ON
FR
FR1H1425.EPS
(8) Install a new elevation changeover guide.

(9) Reinstall both the right and left slide bearings removed at step (6).
(10) From the front side of the machine, reinstall both the right and left E-rings removed at
step (5).
First install the E-ring on the right-hand side of the machine.
(1)
Shock absorber-attached (11) Reinstall the arm removed at step (4).
up-down changeover guide
(12) Secure the elevation changeover guide to the arm in place with the single screw
removed at step (3).
Right side view of machine Left side view of machine
(6) (6) (13) Reinstall the spring removed at step (2).
Slide bearing Slide bearing
(5)
E-ring
(5) (3)
E-ring Sems M3x10 for retaining
up-down changeover guide
(4)
Arm
(2)
Spring
FR1H1424.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
5.15 Replacing Vertical Conveyor Guide (5) Remove the rubber rollers.
Dislodge the shaft on one side of the four rubber rollers (right as seen from the rear)
Perform the procedures from the rear of the machine. so that the vertical conveyor guide can be removed.
(1) Remove the idler gear from the vertical conveyor and then the timing belt. (6) Remove the elevation changeover guide.
(2) Remove the six grip springs located on both right and left of the vertical conveyor. 5.14 Replacing and Adjusting Elevation Changeover Guide
Do not remove the lowermost grip spring. Also, keep in mind that the right- and left- (7) Remove the vertical conveyor guide.
hand grip springs differ in length.
(3) Remove the gear.
3.1 E-ringless Housing Employed in Machine Description
(7)
(4) Remove the housing and bearing. Vertical conveyor guide
Remove the right and left housings and bearings of the vertical conveyor that retain BR M4x8, x2
the rubber roller in place. Do not remove the housing and bearing located at the
bottom.
Timing belt (2)

Free length: 80 mm grip spring, x3 (6)
Elevation
changeover guide
A (4)
A
Vertical conveyor guide Bearing (5)
Rubber roller x4
A
(4)
Housing
(1)
Idler gear
W
T tSe
SEmaol
ORNER
Foec
OFL
(2)
Free length: 93 mm grip spring, x3
(3) Gear
FR1H1075.EPS
FR1H1076.EPS

To install the vertical conveyor guide, tighten screws while pushing down the guide.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Installation
6. Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
(1) Insert the before-side-positioning conveyor along the rail into the machine.
This section describes procedures for removing and reinstalling the before-side-positioning Align the before-side-positioning conveyor against the positioning pin located on the
conveyor, and procedures for checking and replacing parts of the before-side-positioning left side of the machine (into the machine as seen from the direction of insertion) and
conveyor to be replaced. against the positioning bracket located on the rear side of the machine.
Unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that covers that should be removed prior to checks (2) Secure the before-side-positioning conveyor in place with two mounting screws (BR
and replacement have been removed. M4x8).
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers (3) Connect the connectors (CNC1, CNC2, CNSOLC1).
6.1 Removing and Reinstalling Before-Side-Positioning (2)

Before-side-
Conveyor positioning conveyor
BR M4x8, x2 (1)
FR
ON
Removal T
Positioning pin
(1) Shift the two tensioners until the timing belt can be removed.
Loosen the two screws (BR M4x8) that retain the tensioner to slide the tensioner as (3)
appropriate, and then secure the tensioner in place. CNC1
3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description Rail
Positioning bracket
(2) Remove the two timing belts.
(3)
(3) Disconnect the connectors (CNC1, CNC2, CNSOLC1). CNC2
(4) Remove the two screws that retain the before-side-positioning conveyor (3)
CNSOLC1 FR1H1110.EPS
(5) Pull out the before-side-positioning conveyor horizontally.
Slowly pull out the unit so that it is not caught by the connectors (CNC1, CNC2, (4) Attach the two timing belt to the timing belt wheel.
CNSOLC1). (5) Put the tensioner back where it was.
(1), (2) (1), (2) Up-down IP removal
Loosen the two screws (BR M4x8) that retain the tensioner. Flick the timing belt two or
Timing belt three times with your fingers to ensure that the belt snugly engages with the timing belt
Tensioner
pulley. Screw down the tensioner in place where a proper tension is attained.
Timing belt
BR M4x8 3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description
CNC1
BR M4x8
Erasure conveyor Before-side- Before-side- Tensioner

positioning conveyor positioning conveyor
FR
ON
T
(4)
Before-side-
BR M4x8, x2 (5)
(3)
CNC1
(3)
CNC2
(3)
CNSOLC1 FR1H1109.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
6.2 Checking and Replacing Before-BCR IP Sensor (SC1) Replacement

(1) Disconnect the connector (SC1).
(2) Remove SC1.
Checks
(1) Remove the SC1 and spacer with the connector attached.
FR
O NT
FR
O NT
Before-side-
positioning
conveyor
(2)
SC1
(1) Pan-head
SC1 M3x10, x2
Pan M3x10, x2
(1)
(1) Connector
Connector Spacer
(with taper)
(1)
Spacer FR1H1112.EPS
(tapered)
FR1H1769.EPS (3) Install a new SC1.
(2) Place the machine in an SC1 monitoring enabled state. (4) Connect the connector (SC1).
(3) Using a cardboard or the like, block the SC1 light path.
(4) Remove the cardboard or the like that has blocked the SC1 light path.
(7) Reinstall the SC1.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
6.3 Checking and Replacing Convergence Standby IP Sensor Replacement

(SC2) (1) Disconnect the connector (SC2).
(2) Remove SC2.
Checks
FR
ON
(1) Remove the SC2 and spacer with the connector attached. T
Before-side-
FR positioning
ON
T conveyor
Before-side-
positioning (2)
conveyor
(1) SC2
SC2 Pan-head
Pan-head M3x10, x2
M3x10, x2 (1)
(1) Connector
Connector
Spacer
FR1H1113.EPS
(1) (3) Install a new SC2.

Spacer
FR1H1770.EPS (4) Connect the connector (SC2).
(5) Attach a cable clamp.
(2) Place the machine in an SC2 monitoring enabled state.
(6) Check SC2.
Checks
(3) Using a cardboard or the like, block the SC2 light path.
(4) Remove the cardboard or the like that has blocked the SC2 light path.
(7) Reinstall the SC2.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
6.4 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Convergence Path Replacement

Changeover Guide Drive Solenoid (SOLC1) (1) Power OFF the machine.
(2) Remove the SOLC1 and bracket as a whole.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, adjust or replace SOLC1. When replaced, The SOLC1 shaft should also be removed along with them.
adjust and check it again.
(3) Remove SOLC1 from the bracket.
Checks (4) Attach a new SOLC1 to the bracket.
(5) Install the SOLC1 and bracket as a whole with two screws.
CAUTION While fitting the SOLC1 shaft pin into the actuator of the guide driving shaft, install the
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is SOLC1 and bracket as a whole.
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (6) Adjust SOLC1.
Adjustment
(2) Touch the U-Utility button. FR
ON
T
(3) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. (5)
Drive shaft dog
(4) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2. ACTUATOR in sequence. (2)
(5) Select 2. DRIVE. Bracket
BR M4x8, x2
A list of actuator Nos. is displayed.
(6) Enter the number for SOLC1.
SOLC1 is driven.
If SOLC1 is not driven, it is likely that cable connection is faulty. Check the cable (3), (4)
SOLC1
connection, and select 2. DRIVE again. Sems M3x6, x3
Before-side-positioning FR1H1115.EPS
If it is not driven even after that, replace SOLC1. conveyor
Adjustment
FR
ON
T Adjust the mounting position of the convergence path changeover guide drive solenoid
(SOLC1) so that the distance between the side face of the before-side-positioning
changeover guide and the back of the guide plate is 1 mm or less.
SOLC1
Guide plate
(363N1758B)
1 mm or less
Before-side-
FR1H1114.EPS Before-side-positioning
changeover guide
(7) Repeatedly select 0. QUIT to exit M-Utility.
A message prompting you to reset the machine is displayed.
(8) Press the RESET button.
FR1H1547.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
6.5 Replacing Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor IP Transport 6.6 Replacing and Adjusting Before-Side-Positioning
Motor (MC1) Conveyor Drive Timing Belt
(1) Remove the before-side-positioning conveyor. There are two before-side-positioning conveyor drive timing belts. One is driven by the IP
6.1 Removing and Reinstalling Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor transport motor (MC1) of the before-side-positioning conveyor, while the other is driven by
the IP transport motor (MF1) of the erasure conveyor.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNMC1).
Because the MC1 connector is secured to the bracket, pinch its latches to disconnect Replacement of MC1-related Timing Belt
it.
(1) Loosen the screw that retains the tensioner.
(3) Remove MC1.
Remove the MC1 while dislodging the timing belt that is located inside the before-
(2)
positioning conveyor side plate. Timing belt
FRONT
(4) Remove the timing belt wheel from the shaft of MC1.
( ) (1)
Timing belt wheel O NT Tensioner
Timing belt FR Loosen
screw
T
ON
FR MC1
(3), (4)
MC1
Pan-head
M4x10, x3
(3) Attach a new timing belt.

(4) Adjust the MC1-related timing belt.
(2) Adjustment of MC1-related Timing Belt
Bracket
(2)
CNMC1
Adjustment of MC1-related Timing Belt
Before-side- (1) Loosen the screw that retains the tensioner.
FR1H1111.EPS (2) While checking the belt tension with a push-pull gauge, adjust the position of the
tensioner.
(5) Install a new MC1.
Adjust the position of the tensioner until a proper tension is attained, and then tighten
While putting the timing belt onto the pulley, install MC1 with three screws.
the screw to secure the tensioner in place. The tension is as follows.
(6) Attach the connector (CNMC1) to the bracket.
500g, 6 1mm
(7) Connect the connector (CNMC1).
(2) 500g
(8) Install the before-side-positioning conveyor.
Timing belt 61mm
6.1 Removing and Reinstalling Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
FRONT
O NT (1)
FR
Tensioner
Loosen
screw
MC1
Before-side-

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement of MF1-related Timing Belt 6.7 Replacing Cleaning Roller
(1) Loosen the screw that retains the tensioner.
(2) Remove the timing belt. (1) Remove the single screw that retains the cleaning roller assembly of the before-side-
positioning conveyor.
FRONT
(2) Pull out the cleaning roller assembly horizontally.
T
ON
FR MC1 (1) Retaining screw
BR M4x8
(1)
Tensioner
Loosen
screw
(2) (2)
Timing belt FR
ON
T
Before-side-
(3) Attach a new timing belt.

Before-side-
(4) Adjust the MF1-related timing belt. positioning
(2) conveyor
Adjustment of MF1-related Timing Belt
Cleaning roller assembly
Adjustment of MF1-related Timing Belt

(1) Loosen the screw that retains the tensioner. FR1H1440.EPS
(2) While checking the belt tension with a push-pull gauge, adjust the position of the (3) Remove the bracket.
tensioner.
Loosen the four screws located on right and left sides of the cleaning roller assembly
Adjust the position of the tensioner until a proper tension is attained, and then tighten and remove the bracket.
the screw to secure the tensioner in place. The tension is as follows.
(4) Remove the cleaning roller.
500g, 6 1mm
FRONT (3)
T Bracket
ON
FR MC1
500g
61mm (4)
Cleaning roller
(1), (2)
Tensioner
Loosen screw Timing belt
Before-side-
(3)
Loosen
sems M3x6, x4 FR1H1441.EPS
(5) Clean dust deposited within the cleaning roller assembly.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(6) Remove the spur gear, two spacers, two slide bearings, and E-ring from the cleaning 6.8 Replacing Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor Rubber
roller.
Rollers
E-ring
(1) Remove the before-side-positioning conveyor.
Slide bearing
(2) Remove the grip spring for the rubber roller to be replaced.
(3) Remove the drive gear.
(6) 3.1E-ringless Housing Employed in Machine Description
Cleaning roller
(4) Remove the guide plate.
Slide bearing 6.9 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber-Attached Guide of Before-Side-
Spacer Positioning Conveyor
Spur gear (5) Remove the bearing and take out the rubber roller.
(7) Install the spur gear, two spacers, two slide bearings, and E-ring removed at step (6) Side view
to a new cleaning roller. FR
: Rubber roller ON
(8) Reinstall the cleaning roller to the cleaning roller assembly. T
(9) Reinstall the cleaning roller assembly in reverse order of removal.
conveyor
FR1H1116.EPS

NOTES
When installing the rubber rollers, observe the following precautions.
Ensure that the flat machined surfaces of a pair of rubber rollers face each other.
Be sure that the Bearing rotation prevention bracket is positioned toward the 20 mm
diameter roller.
65 mm diameter roller
Flat machined surface
Bearing rotation
prevention bracket
Bearing 20 mm
diameter roller
Bearing
FR1H4013.EPS
When installing the grip spring, exercise care not to erroneously orient it because its
left-hand portion is longer than the right-hand portion.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
6.9 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber-Attached Guide (8) Install the guide plate.
(9) Tighten the screw loosened at step (3).
of Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor
(10) Reinstall the cover removed at step (2).
Check and Replacement (11) Reinstall the before-side-positioning conveyor.
Checking and replacing shock absorbers located above before-side-
positioning conveyor and under cleaning roller
(1) Remove the before-side-positioning conveyor.
(2) Remove the cover of the before-side-positioning conveyor.
(3) Loosen the single screw that retains the bracket.
(4) Remove the shock absorber-attached guide plate (A).
(5) Remove the cleaning roller assembly.
(6) Remove the shock absorber-attached guide plate (B).
tached.
(2)
Cover
BR M4x8, x4
(4), (7)
guide plate (A)
Sems M3x6, x4
(3)
Loosen screw
BR M4x8
(3)
Bracket
conveyor
FR
ON
T
(5)
Cleaning roller assembly (6),(7)
BR M4x8
guide plate (B)
Sems M3x6, x2
FR1H1549.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checking and replacing shock absorbers of before-side-positioning (8) Install a new before-side-positioning changeover guide in reverse order of removal
changeover guide and before-side-positioning retention guide steps (4) through (7).
When installing the arm, tighten the screw with the arm pushed against the flat ma-
(1) Remove the before-side-positioning conveyor. chined surface.
(8)
(2) Remove the guide plate.
Arm
(3) Check if the shock absorbers on the before-side-positioning changeover guide and Sems M3x10
before-side-positioning retention guide.
If it is peeled or frayed, proceed to step (4) to replace the whole guide plate to which
the shock absorber is attached. If it is not peeled or frayed, proceed to step (14).
(3)
Shock absorber-attached FR1H1552.EPS
before-side-positioning
changeover guide
(3)
(9) Adjust the mounting position of the convergence path changeover guide drive solenoid
Shock absorber-attached (SOLC1) so that the distance between the side face of the before-side-positioning
FR
before-side-positioning changeover guide and the back of the guide plate is 1 mm or less.
ON changeover guide
T
Guide plate
(363N1758B)
1 mm or less
(2)
Guide plate
BR M3x6, x4 Before-side-positioning
Before-side-positioning changeover guide
conveyor
FR1H1550.EPS
(4) Remove the spring.

(5) Remove the arm.
(6) Remove the bearing.
FR1H1547.EPS
(7) Remove the shock absorber-attached before-side-positioning changeover guide.
(5)
Arm
Sems M3x10
(6)
Bearing
BR M4x12, x2
(4)
Spring
FR
O NT
(7)
Shock absorber-attached before-side-
positioning changeover guide
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(10) Remove the two screws and two spacers that retain the shaft of the before-side- BLANK PAGE
positioning retention guide, and take out the before-side-positioning retention guide
assembly.
(11) Remove the four screws and four spacers that retain the before-side-positioning
retention guide, and take out the before-side-positioning retention guide from the shaft.
FR
ON
T
(10)
Shaft
BR M4x8, x2
Spacer x2
conveyor (11)
retention guide
Spacer x4
Sems M3x10, x4 FR1H1553.EPS
(12) Install new before-side-positioning retention guides to the shafts.

(13) Install the before-side-positioning retention guide assembly to the side-positioning
conveyor.
NOTES
When installing the shafts, position their grooves on the right-hand side of the ma-
chine.
When installing the before-side-positioning retention guide assembly, screw it down
while retaining the shafts with an Allen wrench lodged in the shaft hole.
Allen wrench insertion hole

(13) Shaft x2
Flat machined
surface
FR
ON
T
retention guide
Groove
(12)
retention guide
FR1H1554.EPS
(14) Reinstall the guide plate removed at step (2).

(15) Reinstall the before-side-positioning conveyor.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
The cables connected to the SCN08A board should be pushed aside to the right and
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit top sides of the scanner unit, while the cables connected to the subscanning unit, both
front and back of them, should be pushed beneath the cable cover.
Pulling Out
Cable
CAUTIONS FR
ON
T
Before pulling out the scanner unit, be sure to remove the two bracket retaining screws lo-
cated on the upper portion of the SCN08A board and disconnect the connectors. If pulled out
without removing them, the SCN08A board may be damaged.
When pulling out the scanner unit, be sure to lower the adjustable feet down to the floor. If not,
the bolts of the adjustable feet would interfere with the cable cover. Cable cover
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to
electric parts mounted on the board. Cable T
ON FR
ON Cable
Cable cover FR T
FR1H1556.EPS
(1) Remove the following covers in order named.
Lower front cover, lower right-hand side cover (3) Remove the two screws that retain the bracket located on the upper portion of the
SCN08A board.
(4) Remove the two screws that retain the scanner unit.
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CN7-9, CNZ6-8, 10 on the SCN08A board, and CN1, 2, 4,
5 on the subscanning unit). (5) Pull out the scanner unit.
Subscanning unit
NOTE
(2) When pulling out the scanner unit, use care so that it is not caught by the disconnected
CNZ4 SCN08A board connectors and cables.
(2)
Remove screw
CNZ5 (BR M4x8, x2)
CNZ2
CNZ1 FR
CN7 CN8 ON
T
CN9 CNZ6
CNZ7
CNZ8
CNZ10
FR
ON
T
Scanner unit
FR1H1555.EPS
(5)
(4) (3)
Scanner unit Bracket
BR M4x8, x2 BR M4x8, x2 FR1H1557.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Push-In (3) Using two screws, secure the bracket located on the upper portion of the SCN08A
board.
CAUTIONS (4) Secure the scanner unit in place with two screws.
When removing and installing the units, exercise care not to damage the cables. (5) Connect the connectors (CN7-9, CNZ6-8, 10 on the SCN08A board; CNZ1, 2, 4, 5 on
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure the subscanning unit).
electric parts mounted on the board. Subscanning unit
(5)
(1) While pushing the stopper located on the front of the machine, put the scanner unit CNZ4
back into the machine until the stopper located on the rear side of the machine is (3)
Bracket SCN08A board
activated. CNZ5
BR M4x8, x2 (5)
CNZ2
(2) While pushing the stopper located on the rear side of the machine, put the scanner
unit all the way into the machine. CNZ1 CN7 CN8
NOTE CN9 CNZ6
CNZ7
When putting the scanner unit back where it was, use care so that it is not caught by
the connectors and cables disconnected.
FR
ONT CNZ8
CNZ10
FR
ON
T
(4)
Scanner unit
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H1771.EPS
Scanner unit
(1) (2)
Stopper Stopper
FR1H1558.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Reinstallation
8. Side-Positioning Conveyor
CAUTION
8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
When removing and installing the units, exercise care not to damage the cables.
Removal NOTE
Make sure that the scanner unit has been pulled all the way out. If not, MD3 will interfere with
CAUTION
the machine frame when the side-positioning conveyor is removed.
When removing and installing the units, exercise care not to damage the cables.
(1) Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. While pressing the bracket of the side-positioning conveyor against the block section
7. Pulling Out and Pushing in Scanner Unit of the subscanning unit and the reference side, secure the side-positioning conveyor in
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CND1, BCRCN1, CNMD1-3). place with five screws.
(3) Remove the five screws that retain the side-positioning conveyor. (2) Connect the connectors (CND1, BCRCN1, CNMD1-3).
(4) Remove the side-positioning conveyor by taking it out in a horizontal direction.
Top view
NOTE (1)
Block section of subscanning unit
Make sure that the scanner unit has been pulled all the way out. If not, MD3 will
interfere with the machine frame when the side-positioning conveyor is removed. Reference
side
Positioning screw
(should not be removed)
(2) Bracket Bracket
CNMD3
(2)
CNMD3
(4)
MD3
FR
ON
T
Positioning screw
(should not be removed) MD3
(2) (2)
CND1 CNMD1, CNMD2 (1)
(2) (3)
BCRCN1 Side-positioning conveyor Block section
BR M4x8, x5
FR1H1772.EPS
FR
(2)
ON Bracket
T (1) CNMD1, CNMD2
(2) Side-positioning conveyor
CND1 BR M4x8, x5
(2) BCRCN1 FR1H1773.EPS
(3) Push in the scanner unit.

7. Pulling Out and Pushing in Scanner Unit
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.2 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Replacement

Sensor (SD1) (1) Remove the following covers in order named.
Lower rear cover
Checks
(2) Remove the SD1 together with the bracket, with CNSD1 attached.
CAUTION (3) Disconnect the CNSD1.
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is (4) Remove the SD1 from the bracket.
(3)
(1) Remove the following covers in order named. SD1
(2)
Lower rear cover Bracket
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers Sems M3x6, x2
(1)
(2) Power ON the machine. Connector
(3) Place the machine in a state where the side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SD1) Side-positioning
can be monitored. conveyor FR1H1301.EPS
2.2 Checking Various Sensors (5) Attach a new SD1 to the bracket.
(4) Shift the actuator of the side-positioning mechanism by hand to dislocate it from the (6) Connect the CNSD1.
sensor.
(7) Install the SD1 together with the bracket to the side-positioning conveyor.
(5) Shift the actuator of the side-positioning mechanism by hand until the sensor is
CLOSE.
A message indicative of the sensor CLOSE status is displayed on the operation
panel.
If no message is displayed, it is likely that the sensor is faulty. So, replace the sensor.
Actuator
SD1
FR1H1165.EPS
(7) Enter 0 (zero).

The monitoring is quitted, and the screen returns to the 3. SENSOR menu.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.3 Checking and Replacing Grip Release HP Sensor (SD2) Replacement

Lower rear cover
Checks
CAUTION (2) Rotate the cam of the grip mechanism to dislocate the actuator from SD2.
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is (3) Remove the SD2 together with the bracket, with CNSD2 attached.
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (4) Disconnect the CNSD2.
(5) Remove the SD2 from the bracket.
Lower rear cover
(3) Place the machine in a state where the side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SD1)
(3)
can be monitored. SD2
Side-positioning (1)
2.2 Checking Various Sensors conveyor Connector
(4) Rotate the cam of the grip mechanism to dislocate the actuator from the sensor.
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN is displayed on the operation panel. (2)
Bracket
Sems M3x6, x2
T
ON
FR
FR1H1300.EPS
SW
ET
RES Remote
ON Local
OFF
(6) Attach a new SD2 to the bracket.
Side-positioning
(7) Connect the CNSD12
conveyor (8) Install the SD2 together with the bracket to the side-positioning conveyor.
SD2
T
ON
FR
Side-positioning
conveyor FR1H1299.EPS
(5) Rotate the cam of the grip mechanism until the actuator causes the sensor to be
CLOSE.
A message indicative of the sensor CLOSE status is displayed on the operation
panel.
If no message is displayed, it is likely that the sensor is faulty. So, replace the sensor.
(7) Enter 0 (zero).
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.4 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SD3) (10) Enter 0 (zero).
Checks
(12) Attach SD3 and spacer.
CAUTION (13) Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor.
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
Replacement
(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor. (1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
(2) Remove the SD3 and spacer with the connector (CNSD3) attached. (2) Remove the SD3 and the spacer together with CNSD3.
(3) Connect CND1. (3) Disconnect the CNSD3.
The initialization sequence starts, and after an elapse of about 30 to 60 seconds, the
software version number (Axx) appears on the operation panel.
(5) Immediately after the software version number (Axx) appears, touch the upper left and
upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence.
(2)
When STEP 95 appears on screen, any subsequent touch on the operation panel is Spacer
rejected. In that case, reset the machine and wait until the software version number (2)
(Axx) appears. SD3
Pan-head
(6) Make the side-positioning IP sensor (SD3) to be in the sensor monitoring enabled M3x10, x2
state. (3)
CNSD3
(7) Using a piece of cardboard, block the SD3 light path.
(8) Remove the piece of cardboard that blocks the SD3 light path. (1)
A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN is displayed on the operation panel. FR1H1779.EPS
(9) Repeat steps (7) and (8) several times. (4) Attach a new SD3 and the spacer removed at step (2).
If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace the sensor. (5) Connect CNSD3.
(3)
CND1
(2)
Spacer
(2)
SD3
Pan-head
M3x10, x2
CNSD3
FR1H1778.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.5 Replacing Side-Positioning Motor (MD1) 8.6 Replacing Grip Release Motor (MD2)
Replacement Replacement
(1) Remove the following cover. (1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
Lower rear cover 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers (2) Cut the cable tie.
(2) Cut the cable tie. (3) Disconnect CNMD2.
(3) Disconnect CNMD1. (4) Remove MD2 together with the bracket.
(4) Remove MD1 together with the bracket. (5) Remove MD2 from the bracket.
(5) Remove MD1 from the bracket. (6) Remove the timing belt wheel and stay from MD2.
(6) Remove the timing belt wheel from MD1.
(5)
BR M4x8
Side-positioning
conveyor
(4)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x3
(6)
Timing belt wheel (6) T
ON
Stay FR
Pan-head
M4x10, x2
(6)
(3) Timing belt wheel
CNMD1
(5)
MD1 FR1H1780.EPS
MD2
Pan-head M4x10, x4
(4)
Pan-head (3)
(7) Install to a new MD1 the timing belt wheel that was removed at step (6). M4x10, x2 CNMD2 FR1H1781.EPS

(7) Install to a new MD2 the timing belt wheel that was removed at step (6).
Put the timing belt onto the timing belt wheel of MD1 and then secure MD1 in place.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MD3) 8.8 Replacing Barcode Reader (BCR)
(1) Remove the following cover. (1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
Lower rear cover 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers (2) Cut the four cable ties.
(2) Cut the cable tie. (3) Disconnect BCRCN2.
(3) Disconnect CNMD3. (4) Remove the barcode reader.
(4) Remove MD3 together with the bracket. (5) Remove the four screws and take out the bracket.
(5) Remove MD3 from the bracket.
(6) Remove the timing belt wheel from MD3.
(5)
Barcode reader
Screw x4
T
ON
FR
(4)
(6) (3) Bracket
Timing belt wheel BCRCN2 Sems M3x6, x4
Side-positioning conveyor FR1H1108*.EPS
(4)
Bracket (6) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new barcode reader.
BR M4x8, x3
(5)
MD3
Pan head screw M3x10, x3
(3)
CNMD3 FR1H1782.EPS
(7) Install to a new MD3 the timing belt wheel that was removed at step (6).
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.9 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip Replacement

Mechanism (1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
(2) Remove the E-ring.
Checks
(3) Take out the triangular-shaped cam from the shaft.
CAUTION (4) Remove the wire and shaft from the triangular-shaped cam.
(3)
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is Shaft
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. Triangular-shaped cam
(1) Remove the following covers. (2)

E-ring
Lower right-hand cover, lower rear cover
(4)
(3) Make the side-positioning IP sensor (SD2) to be in the sensor monitoring enabled (4) Shaft
state. Nut
Truss M3x6
(4) Make sure that 1 is indicated for SD2 (CLOSE status).
(5) Make sure that the rubber roller is gripped.
M-Utility is exited. (4)
Wire FR1H1784.EPS
(5) Install the wire and shaft removed at step (4) to a new triangular-shaped cam.
NOTE
When installing the triangular-shaped cam to the shaft, use care not to confuse the
orientation of the triangular-shaped cam.
FRONT FRONT
FR1H1785.EPS
(6) Reinstall the triangular-shaped cam to the shaft.

(7) Reinstall the E-ring.
(9) Check the grip mechanism of the side-positioning conveyor.
Checks
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.10 Checking and Replacing Side-Positioning Top Stopper Replacement

(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
Checks
(2) Remove the spring from the stopper.
(3) Remove the four screws that retain the stopper.
(4) Remove the two slide bearings and two E-rings.
(2) Move the side-positioning mechanism to the right (small-size side) to raise the stopper.
(5) Remove the shaft.
(3) Make sure that the distance from the guide plate to the tip of the stopper is 6 1 mm.
(6) Remove the stopper.
(2)
Side-positioning
mechanism (4)
(1) E-ring
(4)
Slide bearing
Side view
Guide plate (5)

Shaft
Flat machined
Stopper
surface
Side view (5) (4)

Shaft Slide bearing
(3) (6)
Stopper (4)
Guide
plate (3) Shaft E-ring
61mm
Sems M3x6
(2)
Spring
Stopper
(6)
FR1H1786.EPS
Stopper
(3)
Sems M3x6, x4 FR1H1787.EPS
(7) Install a new stopper in reverse order of removal.

(8) Check the stopper.
Checks
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.11 Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Grip Release Timing 8.12 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Side-Positioning
Belt Conveyor IP Conveyance Timing Belt
Checks
(2) Remove MD2.
8.6 Replacing Grip Release Motor (MD2)
(2) Put a sheet or the like on the floor and place the side-positioning conveyor down on
(3) Remove MD3 together with the bracket.
the sheet, with its side down.
8.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MD3)
(3) Measure the distance A of the timing belt.
(4) Remove the single hex socket head bolt that retains the cam.
(4) With a load of 50050 g applied to the timing belt, measure the distance B.
(5) Remove the single hex socket head bolt that retains the timing belt wheel.
(6) Pull out the shaft. Tension roller MD1
T
O
P (5)
Hex socket head bolt M4x12 A
Spring washer Bearing Cam
Bushing
Timing belt
T
O
Timing belt wheel Bushing P
Spring washer
(4)
M4x12
Push-pull gauge
Tension roller MD1
T
O (7)
P
Timing belt
50050g
(6) Shaft
FR1H1789.EPS Timing belt

T
O
(8) Install a new timing belt in reverse order of removal. P
A - B = 91(mm) FR1H1790.EPS
(5) Make sure that the deflection (A - B) is 91 mm.

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement Adjustment
(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor. (1) Loosen the screw that retains the tension roller.
8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor (2) While checking the tension of the belt by use of a push-pull gauge, adjust the position
(2) Remove MD1 together with the bracket. of the tension roller.
8.5 Replacing Side-Positioning Motor (MD1) Screw down the tension roller in place where an appropriate tension is attained.
(3) Remove the retainer that retains the timing belt. The tension value is as follow.
(4) Remove the timing belt. 500 50g, 9 1 mm
Tension roller MD1
T
O (2) (3)
P
MD1 Retainer
BR M4x8, x2
(4)
Timing belt
Timing belt T
O
P
FR1H1791.EPS
(5) Install a new timing belt.

(6) Reinstall the retainer to the timing belt.
(7) Reinstall MD1. Push-pull gauge
Tension roller MD1
8.5 Replacing Side-Positioning Motor (MD1)
(8) Adjust the timing belt.
50050g
Adjustment
Timing belt
T
O
P
A - B = 91(mm) FR1H1790.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
8.13 Replacing Side-Positioning Conveyor Rubber Rollers 8.14 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorbers of Side-
Positioning Conveyor
8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor (1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
(2) Remove the bearing, grip spring, housing, belt wheel, and timing belt wheel for the 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
rubber roller to be removed.
(2) Remove the three shock absorber-attached guide plates.
(3) Replace the six side-positioning conveyor rubber rollers.
If it is peeled or frayed, replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is
attached.
(2), (3)
(2), (3)
guide plate Shock absorber-attached
(2), (3) Sems M3x6, x3 guide plate
Shock absorber-attached Sems M3x6, x4
guide plate
Sems M3x6, x3
Rubber roller
FR
ONT
Side-positioning
conveyor
FR1H1794.EPS
(4) Reinstall the shock absorber-attached guide plates.

Guide plate (5) Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor.
FR1H1793.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
[1] Checks on Image Trimming

9. Scanning Optics Unit
CAUTION
This section describes procedures for removing and reinstalling the scanning optics unit,
procedures for adjusting the scanning optics unit, and procedures for checking and replacing Before adjusting the read start position and read width, set the image trimming to 0. If it is not
parts of the scanning optics unit to be replaced.
set to 0, the IP edge may be invisible; if so, the distance between the image frame and IP edge
cannot be measured.
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width (1) Activate M-Utility.
Adjustments of the read start position and read width should be performed in the following Activating and Exiting M-Utility
sequence. (2) Select 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING and 2. PRINT in sequence.
[1] Check on Image Trimming The FILMFMT.CFG file is opened to reveal its contents.
[2] Initialization of Format Set Data (3) Make sure that the image trimming (TE) is 0.
[3] Input of Read Width Adjustment Value If it is 0, touch the CANCEL button to take the steps described in [2] Initialization of
[4] Input of Read Start Position Adjustment Value Format Set Data.
[5] Check on Adjustment Results If it is not 0, write down the displayed value on your notepad, and touch the setup
value area.
[6] Fine Adjustment of Read Width and Read Start Position
(4) Set the image trimming (TE) to 0.
If anything abnormal is found in the adjustment results, or if it is desired to adjust with
greater accuracy, perform [6] Fine Adjustment of Read Width and Read Start Position. After
fine adjustment of read width and read start position, perform [5] Check on Adjustment CAUTION
Results again. If the image trimming is changed by entering value 0, be sure to revert the trimming
back to its original value noted on your notepad after completing the adjustment of
CAUTIONS read start position and read width.
After completing the adjustment of read start position and read width, back up the scanner set
data. (5) Touch the SAVE button.
The FILMFMT.CFG file is saved, and the screen returns to M-Utility.
(6) Take the steps described in [2] Initialization of Format Set Data.
Activating and Exiting M-Utility [2] Initialization of Format Set Data

In this section, M-Utility is activated and exited very often. Thus, their respective procedures Initialization of format set data should be performed when format-related setting has been
are not described in detail. changed. It should also be performed when the scanning optics unit or any part in the scan-
ning optics unit is replaced.
Refer to the following steps as needed.
(1) Activate M-Utility.
How to activate M-Utility Activating and Exiting M-Utility
(1) Power ON the machine. (2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 6. FORMAT, 1. DEFAULT and 1. PIXEL AND
FREQ in sequence.
The format set data is initialized.
How to exit M-Utility

Repeatedly select 0. QUIT to exit M-Utility.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
[3] Input of Read Width Adjustment Value (4) Determine the actual dimension of the white blank on the IP.
(1) Activate M-Utility. The distance measured on film may not correspond to the actual size on the IP de-
Activating and Exiting M-Utility pending on the reading size. For example, since a two-in-one image of 14" x 14" (35cm
x 35cm) size has a reduction ration of 50%, the distance measured on film, multiplied
(2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 6. FORMAT and 2. FREQ ADJUST in sequence. by 2, represents the actual size on the IP.
(3) Enter the read width adjustment value and press the [ENT] key. The correspondence between reading sizes and reduction factors is presented below.
The read width is adjusted.
Two-in-one
Type in the value indicated on the label located on the side of a new scanning optics Reading size Full image
image
unit.
14" x 17" ( 35 cm x 43cm) 1/2 2/3
14" x 14" ( 35 cm x 35cm) 1/2 2/3
FR 10" x 12" ( 24 cm x 30cm) 2/3 1/1
ONT
8" x 10" ( 18 cm x 24cm) 6/7 1/1
TR1H1002.EPS
(5) Calculate the correction value for the read start position using the following formula.
FR1H1101.EPS
Note that A represents the actual size (in millimeters) determined in step (4) above.
Correction value = A x 10 + 10
(4) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT and 3. SAVE FORMAT
DATA in sequence. (6) Activate M-Utility.
The read width adjustment value so adjusted is saved in the hard disk. Activating and Exiting M-Utility
(7) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 6. FORMAT and 2. PIXEL ADJUST in sequence.
[4] Input of Read Start Position Adjustment Value (8) Enter the correction value determined in step (5).
(1) Uniformly expose a 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) IP at about The read width is adjusted.
10 mR.
If the correction value entered is positive, the resulting image is shifted to right, while it
Note that figures in parentheses are applicable when the machine is set in metric unit is to left if the value is negative.
of measure.
(9) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT and 3. SAVE FORMAT
(2) Perform recording under SENSITIVITY of the IDTs Test Menu, and generate image DATA in sequence.
output.
The read width adjustment value so adjusted is saved in the hard disk.
(3) Measure the white blank portion of the output film, in steps of 2 mm, from the outer-
(10) Exit M-Utility.
most corner of the image frame.
For measurement, use the steel rule or graduated loupe.
2mm or less (12) Turn OFF the circuit breaker.
Image frame (13) Make sure that the high-voltage switch of the SCN08A board is in the ON position.
(14) Reinstall all the covers of the machine.
(15) Turn ON the circuit breaker.
White blank
FR1H1102.EPS
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
[5] Checks on Adjustment Results Adjustment of invalid pixels

Have on hand two 150mm steel rules, and measure their outer lengths. (1) Activate M-Utility.
(1) Power ON the machine. Activating and Exiting M-Utility
Make sure that the machine starts up normally. (2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 6. FORMAT, and 3. PIXEL ADJUST in sequence.
(2) With the steel rules placed in the same position on the cassette as during adjustment, (3) Enter the correction value.
uniformly expose a 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) IP at about 1 Use the following input data. Note that 10 pixels correspond to 1mm in actual size on
mR. the IP.
(3) Perform recording under SENSITIVITY of the IDTs Test Menu, and generate image To increment the current read start position by N pixels (0 < N 999)
output.
Value of N: The image is shifted rightward relative to the image frame.
(4) Check the following points with the output film.
To decrement the current read start position by N pixels (0 < N 999)
Measure the dimension of the image of the steel rules to check that the image length
Value of -N: The image is shifted leftward relative to the image frame.
in the main-scan direction has an error of 1mm or less relative to the following
correction value. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Correction value = 150 (mm) x (1 + 23.5/d) The MP (invalid pixel) value, N, must be set so that the value after correction ranges from 60
where d (mm) is the distance from the tube to the front cover of the exposure to 180. Thus, if the MP value is 150, up to 30 may be set for positive quantity of N, and up to
unit. 90 may be set for negative quantity of N.
To check the MP value, use 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT and 4.
Check that the top/bottom and right/left blank portions around the image are all 2mm DISPLAY DATA menus.
or less in actual size on the IP.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE If an out-of-range value is set, an error results. If an error occurs, check to see that the
The white blank portions can be adjusted by setting the image trimming. procedures have been performed as instructed, and check if each of the parts is
connected properly.
(5) Quit the adjustment of the read width and read start position.
Only if anything abnormal is found with the output film, or the adjustment result is out
of specification, perform the steps described in [6] Fine Adjustment of Read Width and
Read Start Position below.
[6] Fine Adjustment of Read Width and Read Start Position

The procedures for finely adjusting the read width and read start position are described
below.
After fine adjustment, perform the steps described in [5] Check on Adjustment Results
again.
NOTE
After the adjustment, be sure to save the data to the hard disk by selecting MAINTENANCE
UTILITY, 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT, and 3. SAVE FORMAT
DATA in sequence.
Adjustment of read width

Activating and Exiting M-Utility
(2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 6. FORMAT and 2. FREQ ADJUST in sequence.
(3) Enter the correction value and press the [ ENT ] key.
Use the following input data.
To increment the current read width by N% (0 < N 5) (to enlarge the image)
To decrement the current read width by N% (-5 < N 0) (to reduce the image)
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
9.2 Shading/Sensitivity Correction [3] Conveyance of IP

Convey the IP in primary erasure mode 10 minutes after its uniform exposure.
Shading/sensitivity correction should be performed in the following sequence. (1) Change the processing mode to Primary Erasure.
[1] Initial setting for shading correction data recording
While in Routine Mode, touch the CHANGE key to select Primary Erasure.
[2] Uniform exposure of IP
(2) Set in the machine the cassette containing the uniformly exposed IP.
[3] Conveyance of IP
Primary erasure (reading and erasing without image output) is performed.
[4] Correction for shading and sensitivity
[5] Check on correction results
[6] Set Sensitivity Correction
If the correction results are abnormal or an increased degree of sensitivity correction accu-
racy is called for, make a machine shipment control sensitivity correction. After machine
shipment control sensitivity correction, verify the correction results.
CAUTION
After completing the shading/sensitivity correction, back up the scanner set data.
For shading/sensitivity correction, use the following jigs and external devices.
V-type and ST IP: Use an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm)
size, free from soil or scratch.
X-ray source
Dosimeter: Used to measure the dosage during uniform exposure.
Stopwatch: Used to check the elapsed time after uniform exposure.
ULP or LPII.
[1] Initial Setting for Shading Correction Data Recording

9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width, Activating and Exiting M-
Utility
(2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY and 1. REC MODE in
sequence.
The machine is set in the mode for recording the shading correction data.
(3) Exit M-Utility and switch to the Routine Mode.
[2] Uniform Exposure of IP

(1) Uniformly expose an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size at
0.5 to 9.99 mR (1 mR recommended).
At this time, measure the dosage with a dosimeter. The voltage should be aligned to
80 kV.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The dosage value of the X-ray exposure represents a value at the center of an IP. However,
the dosimeter cannot be located at the center of the IP during uniform exposure. The dosage
values at the center and outer periphery of the IP should be measured in advance, and the
difference between them should then be calculated to determine the correction dosage value.
(2) Determine the correction dosage value.

Round off the measured dosage value in mR to the second decimal place, and write
down the resulting value on your notepad.
11.20.99 FM2638 05.31.99 FM2460
[4] Correction for Shading and Sensitivity (5) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT, and 1. SAVE SHADING
AND POLYGON DATA in sequence.
NOTE
The shading data and polygon data so corrected is saved in the HD.
If shading is out of the correctable range, an error results. If an error occurs, take any of the
(6) If sensitivity correction has been made, select 2. SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA.
following actions.
If any white blank is found on screen, perform fine adjustment of invalid pixels. The sensitivity data so corrected is saved in the HD.
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width, [4] Input of Read Start Position (7) Exit M-Utility.
Adjustment Value
[5] Checks on Correction Results
(1) Uniformly expose a 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) IP at about 1
mR.
At this time, measure the dosage with a dosimeter. The voltage should be aligned to
80 kV.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The dosage value of the X-ray exposure represents a value at the center of an IP. However,
the dosimeter cannot be located at the center of the IP during uniform exposure. The dosage
values at the center and outer periphery of the IP should be measured in advance, and the
difference between them should then be calculated to determine the correction dosage value.
FR1H4042.EPS
Check for anything abnormal with the X-ray exposure. (2) Determine the correction dosage value.
Check to see if the mounting location of the light-collecting guide is improper or it is soiled. Write down the resulting value on your notepad.
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide (3) Perform recording under SENSITIVITY of the IDTs Test Menu, and generate image
output.
(1) Activate M-Utility. NOTE
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width, Activating and Exiting M-
Image output should be generated 10 minutes after the uniform exposure of IP.
Utility
(2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY and 2. CALCULATION
(4) After checking the film output, take out the IP used for shading correction.
in sequence.
(5) Check the following points on the output film.
(3) Select any of menu items 1 through 6.
Shading in the main scan direction has been corrected appropriately.
Normally, select 1. SHD., POLY. AND SENSITIVITY.
There are no variations or nonuniformity between polygonal facets in the
Select either of the items 2 through 6 according to the purpose.
subscanning direction.
If uniform exposure cannot be done so that normal shading data cannot be obtained
The S value on film is within the following range:
2. SHD., POLY. AND SENSITIVITY FOR BAD CONDITION
182 S value x correction dosage value 220
If sensitivity correction is not performed
3. SHD. AND POLY. (6) Quit the shading and sensitivity corrections.
If uniform exposure cannot be done and if sensitivity correction is not performed If anything abnormal is found on the output film, or it is desired to correct sensitivity
with greater accuracy, take the steps described in [6] Set Sensitivity Correction below.
4. SHD. AND POLY. FOR BAD CONDITION
If only polygon is to be calculated
5. POLYGON ONLY
If only sensitivity is to be calculated
6. SENSITIVITY ONLY
(4) For either 1, 2, or 6, enter the corrected dosage value. Otherwise, proceed to the next
step.
009-051-06
04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638 04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460
[6] Set Sensitivity Correction BLANK PAGE

NOTE
When set sensitivity correction is performed such that sensitivities of several readers are
adjusted to a consistent level, the same IP should be used. It should also be verified in advance
that there is no variation in dosage when several exposures are performed with the same
output. If the dosage varies from one exposure to another, set sensitivity correction cannot be
accomplished.
After set sensitivity correction, perform the steps described in [5] Checks on Correction
Results again.
(1) Uniformly expose a 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) IP at 0.5 to
9.99 mR.
(2) Perform recording under SENSITIVITY of the IDTs Test Menu, and generate image
output.
NOTE
Image output should be generated 10 minutes after the uniform exposure of the IP.
(3) After checking the film output, take out the IP used for shading correction.
(4) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY and 4. SENSITIVITY
DATA in sequence.
(5) Enter the current value and a desired correction value in sequence.
The correction value is set.
(6) Generate film output and confirm the correction result.
(7) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 8. DATA MANAGEMENT and 2. SAVE SENSITIVITY
DATA in sequence.
The sensitivity data after correction is saved to the hard disk.
(8) Exit M-Utility.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
9.3 Removing and Reinstalling Scanning Optics Unit Removal

(1) Pull out the scanner unit.
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit
CAUTION
(2) Write down on your notepad the read width adjustment value indicated on the label
The proper combination of scanning optics unit and other parts varies with the machine serial
located on one side of a new scanning optics unit.
number. When replacing the scanning optics unit, comply with the table below:
This read width adjustment value will be used to adjust the read start position and read
Machine serial number Scanning optics unit SCN08A board version Software version width.
CR-IR341: #2001 3240 (with the LD assembly)
Version K or later Version A10 or later (3) Disconnect the connectors (CN1-3).
Scanning optics unit (4) Remove the ground wire.
CR-IR341: #3241 and above
(with the LD assembly)
(5) Carefully take out the scanning optics unit, while using care to avoid shock to it.
(with the LD assembly)
CR-IR341: #5001 and above
(without the LD assembly) (5)
TR1H1322.EPS
BR M4x16, x4
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
Carefully handle the scanning optics unit to avoid any shock to it.
(3)
Do not tilt the scanning optics unit.
CN1, 2, 3
Never put your fingers into the projection outlet located on the bottom of the scanning optics
unit.
During removal and installation, exercise care not to let any screw drop into the subscanning
unit.
NOTE
If a scanning optics unit of the old type is to be replaced with 839Y0044, the spacers
(347N1797A) should be installed. FR
ON
T
Installation of Spacers during Replacement of Scanning Optics Unit
(4)
Scanner unit
Ground wire (x2)
BR M4x8
FR1H1123.EPS
NOTE
The scanning optics unit of the service parts does not contain the LD assembly. When
replacing the scanning optics unit, reattach the existing LD assembly to a new
scanning optics unit.
9.4 Checking and Replacing LD Assembly
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Reinstallation Installation of Spacers during Replacement of Scanning Optics Unit
NOTE (1) Remove the scanning optics unit.
To install the scanning optics unit, loosely tighten the four screws, and position the scanning Removal
optics unit by aligning it against the three reference pins located on the top of the subscanning (2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly.
unit.
(3) Remove the after-reading conveyor.
(1) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the scanning optics unit.
(4) Remove the dust cover.
Shift the dust cover rightward (right-hand side of the machine) and out.

BR M4x16, x4 (4)
Loosen screw
BR M4x8
T
ON
FR
FR
ON
T
Subscanning unit Reference pins

FR1H1124.EPS (4)
Dust cover
(2) Take the steps described in Check after Scanning Optics Unit Replacement. (4)
Remove screw
BR M4x8
Checks after Scanning Optics Unit Replacement
FR1H7013.EPS
(1) Reinstall all the covers.

Make sure that the machine starts up normally.
(3) Adjust the read start position and read width.
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width
(4) Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
9.2 Shading/Sensitivity Correction
(5) Generate image output, and verify that there is nothing abnormal with scanner control.
Uniformly expose IPs of each size at about 1 mR. Then, check the film image recorded
under SENSITIVITY from the Test Menu for scanner control failures, such as format
misalignment and shading, which may cause diagnostic problems.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(5) Attach the spacers. 9.4 Checking and Replacing LD Assembly

Align the bottom of the Align the sides of the
spacer tothe corner of spacer and guide together. Checks
the guide.
Guide
Guide CAUTION
Align the sides of
the spacer and Align the bottom
guide together. of the spacer to First check the SCN08A board before performing the procedures described in this section.
[Attach] Spacer the corner of the
[Attach] Spacer
guide. 10.1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board
CAUTIONS
Do not disconnect the connectors CN2 and 3 from the LDD08A board. If they are discon-
nected, the LD protection is disabled, so that the LD may fail.
Do not touch the patterns and ICs of the LDD08A board.
Carefully handle the scanning optics unit, exercising care to avoid shock to it.
When servicing the board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure proper ground-
ing. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts
mounted on the board.

(2) Make sure that the high-voltage switch (S1) is in the OFF position.
FR2H7015.EPS
CN7 CN8 (2)
(6) Reinstall the dust cover.
(7) Reinstall the after-reading conveyor.
HVON
CN9 S1
(8) Reinstall the light-collecting guide assembly.
S1
SCN08A board
(9) Reinstall the scanning optics unit.
Reinstallation OFF state
NFB3/F3
CN1
NFB1/F1
FR1H1275.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(3) Pull out the scanner unit. (8) Power ON the machine.
7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit [HV-OFF] appears on the operation panel.
(4) Make sure that the connectors (CN1-4) of the LDD08A board are locked. (9) Touch the U-Utility button.
If not, securely connect the connectors to lock them in place. The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
CAUTION M-Utility is activated.
When servicing the LD board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure (11) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 3. LASER, and 2. ON in sequence.
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage When ended normally:
to electric parts mounted on the board.
If the machine starts up normally, the LDD08A board is normal.
When ended in error (LD down error or LD warning error occurs):
Replace the LDD08A board.
(4) Protective top cover

CN3
CN2 LDD08A board
(4) Protective
CN2 CN3 top cover
CN4 CN1
LD assembly cover
Sponge
LDD08A board
CN1 Optics base
CN4
Top view Side view FR1H1276.EPS

(6) Make sure that connector (CN1) of the SCN08A board is locked.
If not, securely connect the connector to lock it in place.
CAUTION
When connecting CN1, use care not to touch the C33 and C94 capacitors.
(7) Make sure that the no-fuse breakers (NFB1, 3) of the SCN08A board are in their
shorted condition (button depressed).
Push the no-fuse breaker button several times to place the breaker in its shorted
condition.
NOTE
With board version J or later, the no-fuse breaker (NFB) is replaced with the fuse.
Thus, make sure that the fuse has not been blown.
009-051-06
04.20.2001
05.31.99 FM3006
FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement (7) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE
CAUTIONS
When installing the LD assembly, align the LD assembly against the three positioning
Do not disconnect the connectors CN2 and 3 from the LDD08A board. If they are discon- brackets for proper positioning.
Top view
When the top cover of the scanning optics unit is removed, use care to prevent admittance of
dust. (7)
When performing the procedures with the top cover removed, wear a mask to prevent saliva
from sputtering around.
Use care to avoid shock to the scanning optics unit.
Do not remove the LD assembly cover, because the LD may be damaged by static electricity.
Never touch the optical lens and mirror.
Positioning bracket

Scanning optics unit LD assembly
(3) Disconnect the connector (CN1) of the LDD08A board.
(4) Remove the top cover from the scanning optics unit.
(5) Remove the ground wire.
(6) Replace the LD assembly.
(4)
Top cover
Screw x7
FR1H1169.EPS
(5)
Ground cable (8) Take the steps described in Check after LD Assembly Replacement below.
Screw
(3)
(6)
CN1
LD assembly
Screw x3
FR1H1168.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checks after LD Assembly Replacement 9.5 Checking and Replacing Polygonal Mirror Assembly
CAUTION If anything abnormal is found with the polygonal mirror assembly as result of checks, replace
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is the polygonal mirror assembly and check it again.
CAUTIONS
(1) Power ON the machine. Do not touch the patterns and ICs of various boards.
dust.
If the machine does not start up normally, take the following steps to perform self- When performing the procedures with the top cover removed, wear a mask to prevent saliva
diagnostics of Scanner Utility. from sputtering around.
1. Touch the U-Utility button. Use care to avoid shock to the scanning optics unit.
Do not remove the LD assembly cover, because the LD may be damaged by static electricity.
Never touch the optical lens and mirror.
2. Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
M-Utility is activated. proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to
electric parts mounted on the board.
3. Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 3. LASER, and 2. ON in sequence.
Verify that no error occurs.
(2) Check image performance. Checks To Determine If There Is Anything Abnormal with Polygonal Mirror
3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume Assembly
Check to see that no error occurs during polygon self-diagnostics.

Self-diagnostics is automatically performed during initialization after the machine starts up.
Scan the image and check for any image anomaly.

Scan the IP with a rule exposed, and check to see that there is no image anomaly, such as
jitters, fluctuations, or ununiformity.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checks to Determine If Replacement of Polygonal Mirror Assembly Is Required (10) Make sure that D13 located on the SCN08A board is lit.
When D13 is lit:
CAUTION Turn OFF the polygon and back ON again. If D13 is lit again, the polygonal mirror
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is assembly is normal. If it is not lit second time, it is conceivable that the polygonal
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. mirror assembly may be faulty. So, replace the polygonal mirror assembly.
When D13 is not lit:
(1) Power OFF the machine. It is conceivable that the polygonal mirror assembly may be faulty. So, replace the
(2) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) located on the SCN08A board. polygonal mirror assembly.
(3) Check the SCN08A board.
(4) Make sure that the connector (CN1) on the polygon driver board and the connector S1
(CN3) on the SCN08A board are locked securely. D13
SCN08A board
(5) Verify that the no-fuse breaker (NFB5) of the SCN08A board is in its shorted condition
(button depressed).
Push the NFB5 button several times to place the breaker in its shorted condition. FR1H1277.EPS
NOTE
Polygon driver board SCN08A board

(4) (4), (5)
CN3
CN1 CN2 NFB5/F5 S1
FR
ON
T

FR1H1125.EPS

(9) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 2. POLYGON and 2. ON in sequence.
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 154
Replacement of Polygonal Mirror Assembly (11) Remove the cover from a new polygonal mirror assembly.
Release the latches of the cover, and lift up the cover so as to avoid contact with the
CAUTIONS mirror face of the polygonal mirror.
Use care not to let the polygonal mirror assembly fall or bump. If the polygonal mirror assem- Latch
Cover
bly is shocked, its axis of rotation may be misaligned and thus it may become useless.
Never touch the mirror face of the polygonal mirror (even when you are wearing gloves). If the
mirror face of the polygonal mirror is touched, the polygonal mirror will become unusable. New polygonal mirror assembly
(handling caution required)

Polygonal mirror face FR1H1405.EPS

(12) Install the new polygonal mirror assembly in reverse order of removal.
(3) Remove the scanning optics unit.
9.3 Removing and Reinstalling Scanning Optics Unit, Removal
NOTE
(4) Remove the clamp.
When installing the polygon, pay attention to its direction. Orient the polygon so that its
narrower edge width faces front, as seen from above.
(5) Cut the cable tie that retains the filter, and then remove the filter.
(6) Replace the polygon driver. (13) Take the steps described in Checks after Polygonal Mirror Assembly Replacement
Remove the polygon driver with the shield case attached. below.
(7) Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the LDD08A board.
Checks after Polygonal Mirror Assembly Replacement
(1) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
(9) Remove the polygon cover.
(10) Remove the polygonal mirror assembly.
(8)
Top cover Make sure that the machine starts up normally.
Screw x7
Polygon mounting direction (4) Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
Cable
(5) Generate image output, and check if there is anything abnormal with scanner control.
F The narrower edge under SENSITIVITY from the Test Menu for scanner control failures, such as format
Polygon R width should face
(9) O misalignment and shading, which may cause diagnostic problems.
mirror N this direction.
Polygon cover face T
Screw x4 If anything abnormal is found, make the following adjustment.
(10)
(5)
(6) Adjust the read start position and read width.
Polygonal mirror assembly
Tie
(Pay attention to its
Filter
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width, [6] Fine Adjustment of Read
mounting direction.)
Screw x4 Width and Read Start Position
Polygon mirror face Filter
(4)
Clamp
BR M4x8 (6)
Polygon driver
Screw x2
T
(7) LDD08A CN1 ON
FR FR1H1170.EPS
009-051-06
04.20.2001
05.31.99 FM3006
FM2460 04.20.2001
11.20.99 FM3006
FM2638
9.6 Checking and Replacing SYN08A Board (8) Disconnect the connector (CN1) of the LDD08A board.
First check the SCN08A board, LDD08A board, and polygonal mirror assembly before
(10) Make sure that the connector (CN1) of the SYN08A board is locked.
checking the SYN08A board.
10.1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board, 9.4 Checking and Replacing LD As- If not, securely connect the connector to lock it in place.
sembly, 9.5 Checking and Replacing Polygonal Mirror Assembly
CAUTIONS (4)
Upper cover
Do not disconnect the connectors CN2 and 3 from the LDD08A board. If they are discon- Screw x7
Carefully handle the scanning optics unit, exercising care to avoid shock to it.
dust.
When performing the procedures with the top cover removed, wear a mask to prevent saliva
from sputtering around.
electric parts mounted on the board. Scanning optics unit
Checks (5)
SYN08A board
CAUTION
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is CN1
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace the SYN08A board, and then check it
again. FR1H1175.EPS
(1) Power ON the machine. (11) Attach the top cover to the scanning optics unit.
(2) Touch the U-Utility button. (12) Connect the connector (CN1) of the LDD08A board.
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. (13) Push in the scanner unit.
(3) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. 7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit
M-Utility is activated. (14) Make sure that the connector (CN2) of the SCN08A board is locked.
(4) Select 9. HV OFF. If not, securely connect the connector to lock it in place.
The software switch is turned OFF, and 9. HV ON is displayed on the screen. (15) Make sure that the no-fuse breakers (NFB6, NFB7, NFB9, NFB10) of the SCN08A
(5) Power OFF the machine. board are in their shorted conditions (button depressed).
(6) Pull out the scanner unit. Push the no-fuse breaker button several times to place the breaker in its shorted
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit condition.
(7) Place the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board in the OFF position. NOTE

Make sure that HV-OFF is displayed on the operation panel.

05.31.99 FM2460 04.20.2001
05.31.99 FM2460
FM3006
(17) Touch the U-Utility button. Replacement
CAUTION
M-Utility is activated. Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
(19) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 3. LASER, and 2. ON in sequence.
(20) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 2. POLYGON, and 2. ON in sequence.
(21) Check if D14 of the SCN08A board is lit (blinking quickly).
If it is lit, set LASER and POLYGON to OFF, and restart the machine.
If the machine starts up normally, the SYN08A board is normal.
(3) Disconnect the connector (CN1) of the LDD08A board.
If the machine does not start up normally, replace the SYN08A board.
If it is not lit or is blinking (blinking but not quickly), replace the SYN08A board.
(5) Disconnect the connector (CN1) of the SYN08A board.
(6) Replace the SYN08A assembly.
(4)
S1
Top cover
D14 Screw x7
SCN08A board
FR101105.EPS
(6)
SYN08A assembly
BR M4x8
(5)
CN1
Spacer
(3)
LDD08A CN1
FR1H1176.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 160
(7) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the SYN08A assembly. Checks after SYN08A Assembly Replacement
NOTES (1) Reinstall all the covers.
When installing the SYN08A assembly, align the SYN08A assembly against the (2) Power ON the machine.
reference face of the mounting bracket for proper positioning. Make sure that the machine starts up normally.
The spacer that was attached before replacement should be used for reinstallation.
Fit the cable into the cable guide. (3) Generate image output, and check if there is anything abnormal with scanner control.
Scanning optics unit If anything abnormal is found, make the following adjustments.
(4) Adjust the invalid pixels
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width, [6] Fine Adjustment of Read
Width and Read Start Position
(4) Check the SYN08A board.
Checks
Top view
(8)
SYN08A assembly
Mounting bracket
Reference face
FR1H1177.EPS
(8) Perform the procedures described in Check after SYN08A Assembly Replacement.
05.31.99 FM2460 11.20.99 FM2638
Location Name Rated voltage Rated amperage
10. Subscanning Unit NFB1/F1 250 V/48 V 2A
NFB2/F2 250 V/48 V 2A
This section describes procedures for checking and replacing parts of the subscanning unit
to be replaced. NFB3/F3 250 V/48 V 1.6 A/2 A
NFB4/F4 250 V/48 V 1.6 A/2A
10.1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board NFB5/F5 250 V/48 V 1.6 A/1 A
NFB6/F6 250 V/48 V 1A
The SCN08A board is intended to control the scanner. NFB7/F7 250 V/48 V 1A
Because the SCN08A board has no memory for storing scanner control parameters, NFB8/F8 250 V/48 V 1A
parameter setting or DIP switch setting associated with replacement is not required. NFB9/F9 250 V/48 V 1A
NFB10/F10 250 V/48 V 1A
CAUTION
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric
parts mounted on the board. (6) Measure the voltage for test pins (related to the connector cables and power supply
unit) on the SCN board.
TP1 (VCC) - TP2 (GND): +5 V 0.25V
Checks TP4 (+ 15AS) - TP28 (ASG): +15 V 0.75V
TP8 (-15AS) - TP28 (ASG): -15 V 0.75V
CAUTION
TP3 (+ 24PS) - TP38 (PGND): +24 V 1.2V
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. If the voltage measured is outside the above reference value range, check the
connector cables and power supply unit. If there is nothing abnormal with the
connector cables and power supply unit, replace the SCN board.
(2) Remove the following covers.
D16
TP3 TP38
Lower front cover, lower right-hand side cover
HVON
S1
S1
(3) Put the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board in the OFF position.
OFF state
(4) Make sure that the no-fuse breakers (NFB1-10) are in their shorted condition.
Push the no-fuse breaker button several times to put the button in its depressed
condition (breaker shorted condition), and then take the following steps. TP2 TP1
D15
SCN08A
NOTE D14
TP8 TP7
With board version J or later, the no-fuse breaker (NFB) is replaced with the fuse. D13
Thus, make sure that the fuse has not been blown. If the fuse has been blown, replace D12 TP28TP29
the board with a new one.
D11
TP5 TP4
D10
D9 TP27
NFB5/F5 S1 D8
HVON
NFB8/F8
S1
NFB7/F7 FR1H1194.EPS
NFB10/F10
NFB6/F6 OFF state (7) Measure the voltage for test pins (related to the SCN board) on the SCN board.
NFB9/F9 TP5 (+ 5AS) - TP28 (ASG): + 5V 0.25V
NFB3/F3
NFB1/F1
TP27 (+ 5AS2) -TP28 (ASG): + 5V 0.25V
NFB4/F4 TP7 (- 5AS) - TP28 (ASG): - 5V 0.25V
SCN08A board
FR TP29 (- 5AS2) - TP28 (ASG): - 5V 0.25V
ON NFB2/F2
T
If the voltage measured is outside the above reference value range, replace the SCN
FR1H1193.EPS
board.
03.20.2004 FM4275 08.31.2005 FM4710
Replacement 10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide

(2) Pull out the scanner unit. CAUTIONS
Wear gloves during servicing. Otherwise, the light-collecting guide may be soiled or dam-
(3) Disconnect the connectors (CN1-6) from the SCN08A board. aged.
(4) Remove the SCN08A board (BR M4x8, x6). Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide, even when you are wearing
gloves.
(5) Make sure that the high-voltage switch (S1) of a new SCN08A board is in the ON Carefully handle the light-collecting guide to avoid damage to it due to contact with surround-
position. ing objects.
(6) Make sure that the no-fuse breaker of the new SCN08A board is in its shorted condi- Wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around on the light-collecting guide.
tion.
Push the no-fuse breaker button several times to put the button in its depressed
condition
Light-
NOTE collecting
guide
(7) Mount the new SCN08A board (BR M4x8, x6).

(8) Push in the scanner unit. Light-receiving face
FR1H1171.EPS
(9) Connect the connectors (CN1-6) to the SCN08A board.
Securely connect the connectors until they are locked in place.
CAUTION
When connecting CN1, use care not to touch the C33 and C94 capacitors.
CN7 CN8
CN3
HVON
NFB5/F5 S1
CN9
S1
NFB8/F8
CN4 NFB7/F7
NFB10/F10 ON state
CN2
NFB6/F6
NFB9/F9
CN1 C94
NFB3/F3
CN6 C33
NFB1/F1
SCN08A board
CN5 NFB4/F4
NFB2/F2
FR1H1531.EPS

(12) Check image performance.
3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
Removal Reinstallation
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. (1) Carefully install the light-collecting guide assembly onto the subscanning unit, exercis-
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit ing care to avoid contact with surrounding units.
(2) Disconnect the connectors. (PMT08A CN1, 2)
(3) Remove the brace that retains the light-collecting guide assembly retaining bracket.
CAUTIONS
(4) Remove the arm retaining screw, and lift up the arm. Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting guide assembly. If it is handled with
bare hands, the light-collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged.
By lifting up the arm, the lock on the light-collecting guide assembly is released. Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide, even when you are
(5) Take out the light-collecting guide assembly. wearing gloves.
Carefully place the removed light-collecting guide assembly down onto a soft sheet or Carefully handle the light-collecting guide to avoid damage to it due to contact with
the like, using care not to damage it. surrounding objects.
Wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around on the light-collecting guide.
When inserting the light-collecting guide assembly, align the protrusions located at
CAUTIONS both ends of the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide assembly against the
Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting guide assembly. If it is handled with reference plane in the subscanning direction, and the front protrusion against the
bare hands, the light-collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged. reference pin in the main scan direction.
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide, even when you are (1)
wearing gloves. Light-collecting guide
Carefully handle the light-collecting guide to avoid damage to it due to contact with assembly
Subscanning unit
surrounding objects.
( )
Light-collecting
PMT08A board guide assembly
FR
ON
T
(3)
Brace (2)
BR M4x12 CN1
Light-collecting guide CN2

(2) Light-receiving
assembly retaining face
bracket FR
ON
T
Top view Top view
(1) Light-collecting (1) Light-collecting
guide guide
F
R
O
N Protrusion Light-
T Light-
(4) receiving receiving face
Arm Main scan face
Scanner unit direction Protrusion
BR M4x8 Positioning pin
FR1H1795.EPS
Reference plane
Reference plane in subscan direction
in subscan
direction
Side view
(1) Light-collecting guide Sponge
Reference plane in subscan

direction
Pin Insert it along the sponge until
it presses against the pin.
The light-collecting The right- and left-hand light-

guide must be in close receiving edges of the light-
contact with the pin. collecting guide must be in close
contact with both the bottom and
the reference plane in the subscan
direction.
FR1H1796.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(2) While supporting the light-collecting guide assembly, secure it with the light-collecting (4) Make sure that the socket of the PMT08A board is fitted into the socket of the light-
guide assembly retaining arm in place. collecting guide and that the sockets of the PMT08A board and light-collecting guide
While pushing the shaft of the light-collecting guide assembly retaining arm, rotate it. are parallel to each other.
Make sure that the stopper hooks the inner protrusion of the light-collecting guide If anything abnormal is found, remove the single screw that retains the light-collecting
assembly, and then screw it down. guide retaining bracket. While holding the light-collecting guide, push in the PMT08A
board assembly, and adjust the position of the sockets of the PMT08A board and light-
NOTE
collecting guide as appropriate.
When pushing the light-collecting guide assembly retaining arm, be sure to push its
After the brace is fixed with the screw, verify again that the sockets are parallel, and
shaft portion. If the arm portion is pushed, the arm itself may be deformed.
then proceed to the next step.
(3) Secure the light-collecting guide assembly retaining bracket with the brace.
CAUTIONS
Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting guide assembly. If it is handled with
CAUTION bare hands, the light-collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged.
If the light-collecting guide assembly leaves its fixed position (i.e., position as in- Wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around on the light-collecting guide.
structed in the side view illustrated at step (1), where the right- and left-hand light-
receiving edges of the light-collecting guide must be in close contact with both the Parallel Not parallel
bottom and the reference plane in the subscan direction) when an attempt is made to
Light-collecting guide assembly
secure the light-collecting guide with the brace, adjust the mounting location of the
light-collecting guide assembly retaining bracket.
Light-collecting
guide assembly
FR
ON
T
Socket
PMT08A board
OK NG
FR1H1798.EPS
(5) Connect the connectors (CN1, 2 to the PMT08A board).
(5)
Light-collecting
assembly
PMT08A
FR
(3) (2) board ON
T
Brace Stopper
BR M4x12
(5)
Light-collecting guide CN2
assembly retaining
bracket (5)
CN1
(2) Scanner unit

Arm
BR M4x8 Push

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checks (3) Install a new light-collecting guide to the PMT08A board assembly.
(1) Remove the light-collecting guide. (4) Make sure that the socket of the PMT08A board is fitted into the socket of the light-
Removal collecting guide and that the sockets of the PMT08A board and light-collecting guide
are parallel to each other.
(2) Using a blower, remove dust deposits on the light-collecting guide.
If anything abnormal is found, push in the PMT08A board assembly while holding the
(3) Check the light-collecting guide for any soil or scratch. light-collecting guide, and adjust the position of the sockets of the PMT08A board and
If there is not any soil or scratch, reinstall the light-collecting guide in the reverse order light-collecting guide as appropriate.
of removal.
If there is any soil: CAUTIONS
Clean the light-collecting guide with an ethanol-moistened lens cleaner. Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting guide assembly. If it is handled with
Cleaning bare hands, the light-collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged.
If there is any scratch about 0.8mm in width on the light-receiving face of the light-
collecting guide:
Parallel Not parallel
Generate image output and check to see that there is no ununiformity on the resulting
image due to the scratch. Light-collecting guide assembly
Adjustment
If ununiformity is observed on the image due to scratches
Replacement
Replacement
(1) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly.
Removal Socket
(2) Take out the light-collecting guide from the PMT08A board assembly. PMT08A board
PMT08A board assembly OK NG

FR1H1798.EPS

Installation
Adjustment
(3) Generate image output, and check if there is anything abnormal with scanner control.
Light-collecting guide Uniformly expose IPs of each size at about 1 mR. Then, check the film image recorded
FR1H1800.EPS under SENSITIVITY from the Test Menu for scanner control failures, such as format
If anything abnormal is found, make the following adjustments.
(4) Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Cleaning (4) Verify that the PMT08A board socket section is in close contact with the light-collecting
guide.
(1) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly, and place it on a sheet or the like so as to
avoid contact with its light-receiving face. If anything abnormal is found, push in the PMT08A board assembly while holding the
Removal light-collecting guide, and adjust the position of the sockets of the PMT08A board and
light-collecting guide as appropriate.
(2) Fold three sheets of lens cleaning paper by half, and wipe the entire light-collecting
guide with the sheets moistened with ethanol.
CAUTIONS
CAUTIONS Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting guide assembly. If it is handled with
bare hands, the light-collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged.
Wipe the light-collecting guide in one direction at a constant rate. Wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around on the light-collecting guide.
Do not wipe the photomultiplier bonding surface.
If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
Parallel Not parallel
Light-collecting guide assembly

(3) Fold five new sheets of lens cleaning paper by half, and wipe the light-collecting guide
dry.
After wiping it dry, make sure that it has been cleaned uniformly.
5 mm approx.
(2), (3)
PMT08A board Cleaning range
Socket
PMT08A board
Socket section
Photomultiplier OK NG
bonding surface FR1H1798.EPS
FR1H1801.EPS

Reinstallation
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
10.3 Checking and Replacing PMT08A Board (4) Measure the voltage between the terminals of the PMT08A board.
PMTH-PGND: +2 3V
PMT08A
CAUTION (4)
board
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure PGND
parts mounted on the board.
Checks
HV135
CAUTION
CN2
To check the PMT08A board, the SCN08A board should be first checked before checking the Light-collecting
PMTH
log amp and high-voltage power supply sections of the PMT08A board. guide assembly FR1H1803.EPS
If any of the voltages measured is out of spec as a result of the checks on the log amp and
high-voltage power supply sections of the PMT08A board, then replace the PMT08A board. (5) Power ON the machine.
Checks on log amp section The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
(1) Check the SCN08A board. (7) Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence.
(8) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE, and 2. LOG AMP in se-
If the SCN08A board is normal, proceed to step (2). quence.
If the SCN08A board is faulty, replace it. (9) Measure the voltage between the terminals of the PMT08A board.
(2) Make sure that the connectors (CN5, CN6) of the SCN08A board have been locked. PMTH-PGND: -0.5 +0.5V
(3) Verify that the no-fuse breakers (NFB2, 4) of the SCN08A board are in their shorted PMT08A
(9)
condition. board
Push the no-fuse breaker button several times to place the breaker in its depressed PGND
condition.
NOTE
HV135
CN2
Light-collecting
PMTH
guide assembly FR1H1804.EPS
SCN08A board
CN6
CN5 NFB4/F4
NFB2/F2
FR1H1802.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.31.99 FM2460
(10) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE, and 4. ROUTINE in (4) Connect the connectors (CN1, 2) to the PMT08A board.
sequence.
PMT08A board top view
CAUTION CN1 CN1

CN2
After checks, be sure to select ROUTINE under VIRTUAL IMAGE of SCANNER
UTILITY to reset the scanner back to its initial condition. If it is not reset to its initial CN2
condition, an image with lower contrast will be outputted. D3
PMT08A board
Checks on high-voltage power supply section CN3
(1) Make sure that the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board is in the OFF
position.
FR1H1537.EPS

High-voltage switch The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
(1) (7) Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence.
HVON
S1 (8) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY and 5. HV DATA in sequence.
(9) Type in 250 as a high-voltage setup value.
FR
ON
T The high voltage is set to 250 V.
OFF position (10) With the terminals (HV135, PGND) touched by the probes of the tester, turn ON the
Scanner unit high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board.
SCN08A board FR1H1535.EPS
(2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly. CAUTION

10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide When making voltage measurements on the PMT08A board, be sure to touch the
(3) Take out the light-collecting guide from the PMT08A board assembly. terminals of the board by the tester probes with the high-voltage switch in its OFF
position, and then turn ON the high-voltage switch. It is dangerous if the high-voltage
PMT08A board assembly switch is turned ON, because high voltage is applied to the PMT08A board.
(11) Measure the voltage between the terminals of the PMT08A board.
HV135-PGND: -17.8 2V
(11)
CN2
HV135(TP5)
PMT08A board
Light-collecting guide
FR1H1800.EPS
PGND
FR1H1538.EPS
009-051-04
05.31.99 FM2460
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
(12) Place the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board in its OFF position. (6) Check the PMT08A board.
(13) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY and 5. HV DATA in sequence. Checks
(14) Type in 0 as a high-voltage setup value. NOTE
The high-voltage setting is turned OFF. After replacement of the PMT08A board, be sure to check the PMT08A board.
Replacement
(7) Place the high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08A board in its ON position.
(2) Remove the four screws.
(3) Remove the three spacers and nut. 3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume
(4) Remove the PMT08A board.
(5) Install a new PMT08A board in reverse order of removal. Check on Short Pin (TN1)
NOTES
Do not forget to tighten the PMT08A board retaining nut. If the nut is left loose, Function of short pin (TN1)
abnormal images (irregular rings) may occur.
Use care not to confuse the orientation for installing the clip washer located between It sets connection of a command value to the high-voltage power supply.
the PMT08A board and nut (the clipped side of the washer faces the PMT08A By shorting 1-2 of TN1, an upstream command value is connected to GND.
board). If it is put in a wrong orientation, an abnormal image (fine-grained pattern,
etc.) may result. Short pin setting
Make sure that the short pin (TN1) is set as follows.
Light-collecting guide
(2) PMT08A board
Screw x4
(3)
Spacer x3
(4)
PMT08A board
Bracket
TN1
3
2
CN1 1
Clip washer
(Pay attention to
TN1: 1-2 shorted Light-collecting guide
its orientation.) assembly FR1H1913.EPS
(3)
Nut
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
For TN1, the following steps may be taken to check its condition.
PMT08A board
(2) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE, and 2. LOG AMP in sequence.
The virtual image output is set.
FR1H1873.EPS (3) Return to the Routine Mode.
(4) Read an erased IP (of any size), using the sensitivity of the test.
(6) Select 1. ERROR LOG Utility, 1. LIST, 1. ALL, and 3. BOTH in sequence.
The error log is displayed.
(7) Check if TN1 is normal.
HV voltage error occurred: TN1 abnormal
HV voltage error did not occurred: TN1 normal

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
04.20.2001 FM3006
10.4 Servicing Light-Collecting Mirror (8) Attach the two take-out screws to the light-collecting mirror.
They facilitate grasping the light-collecting mirror to prevent it from dropping into a gap.
(9) Remove the two screws that retain the light-collecting mirror in place.
CAUTIONS
(10) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
When removing and installing the unit, use care not to damage the cables.
Wear gloves during checks and replacements. If not, the light-collecting mirror may be soiled Grasp the take-out screws and remove the light-collecting mirror while using care to
or damaged. avoid contact with surrounding objects.
Never touch the reflection face of the light-collecting mirror even when you wear gloves.
(8)
Carefully handle the light-collecting mirror to avoid damage to it due to contact with surround- (9), (10)
Take-out screw
ing objects. Light-collecting mirror M3
BR M4x8, x2
Wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around on the light-collecting mirror.
Removal
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide Reflection
(2) Remove the after-reading conveyor. face

(3) Disconnect the connectors (CN1-3 from the SCN08A board).
(4) Remove the ground wire.
(5) Remove the four screws that retain the scanning optics unit.
(6) Carefully remove the scanning optics unit, using care not to shock it.
(7) Remove the two screws (one of them should be merely loosened) that retain the dust
cover, and remove the dust cover.
Slide the dust cover to the right (right-hand side of the machine), thereby taking out the ONT
FR
dust cover. FR1H1541.EPS
(5), (6)
Scanner optics unit
BR M4x16, x4
(4)
Ground wire
BR M4x8
(3)
(7) CN13
Loosen screw
BR M4x8
O NT
FR
(7)
Dust cover
(7)
Remove screw
BR M4x8 FR1H1810.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Reinstallation Replacement
(1) Attach the light-collecting mirror. (1) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
Align the right and left positioning pins of the light-collecting mirror to the respective Removal
supports of the subscanning unit, and secure it in place with two screws. (2) Attach a new light-collecting mirror.
Top view Reinstallationl
(1)
Adjustment
Support If anything abnormal is found even after the adjustments, replace the light-collecting mirror.
Positioning pin
FRONT Light-collecting
mirror (3) Generate image output, and check if there is anything abnormal with scanner control.
BR M4x8, x2
Positioning pin Uniformly expose IPs of each size at about 1 mR. Then, check the film image recorded
Support misalignment and shading, which may cause diagnostic problems.
If anything abnormal is found, make the following adjustments.
T
ON
FR (4) Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
FR1H1543.EPS

(2) Remove the take-out screws (M3).
(3) Attach the dust cover. Cleaning
While aligning the sponge located at the bottom of the dust cover against the bracket (1) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
of the light-collecting mirror, snugly fit the top sponge by hand into the scanning optics
unit. Removal
(4) Reinstall the scanning optics unit in reverse order of removal. (2) Fold two thicknesses of lens cleaning paper into four, and dampen the paper with
ethanol.
(5) Install the light-collecting guide assembly.
(3) Wipe the reflection face of the light-collecting mirror with the ethanol-moistened lens
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide cleaning paper.
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor CAUTIONS
Do not wipe the light-collecting mirror with dry paper because the reflection face of
Checks
the mirror may be scratched.
(1) Remove the light-collecting mirror. If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
Removal Clean the light-collecting mirror until the lens cleaning paper is no longer soiled.
(2) Check the light-collecting mirror for any soil or scratch.
If there is any soil:
Clean the light-collecting mirror with an ethanol-moistened lens cleaner. Light-collecting mirror
Cleaning
If the light-collecting mirror surface is scratched:
Generate image output and check to see that there is no ununiformity on the result-
ing image due to the scratch.
Adjustment
If the ununiformity persists even after the shading/sensitivity correction: Reflection
face
Replacement FR1H1900.EPS
(4) Attach the light-collecting mirror.

Reinstallation
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
10.5 Checking and Replacing IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1/ (14) Block the sensor hole of the SED08A board with a piece of cardboard or the like.
Verify that D15 on the SCN08A board is not lit. If D15 is lit, replace the SED08A board.
SED08A)
(15) Remove the piece of cardboard that blocks the sensor hole.
Verify that D15 on the SCN08A board is lit. If D15 is not lit, replace the SED08A board.
CAUTION
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is Replacement
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (1) Pull out the scanner unit.
Checks (2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly.
Check the SCN08A board first, before checking the SZ1/SED08A board. 10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide
10.1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board (3) Remove the scanning optics unit.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. 9.3 Removing and Reinstalling Scanning Optics Unit
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit (4) Remove the subscanning unit guide.
(2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly. 10.15 Replacing Subscanning Unit Guide
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide (5) Remove the cable clamp.
(3) Make sure that there is no IP left in the scanner unit. (6) Disconnect the connector (SZ1).
If any, remove all the IPs left in the scanner unit. (7) Remove SZ1.
(4) Install the light-collecting guide assembly. (8) Install a new SZ1 by reversing the removal steps.
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide When installing SZ1, screw it down while pressing it against the front side.
(5) Set the scanner unit in position.
(7)
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit T
ON
FR
(6) Make sure that the connector (CN4) of the SCN08A board has been locked. NT SZ1
NRTO
FROF
(7) Make sure that the no-fuse breaker (NFB) 8 of the SCN08A board is shorted (in the Subscanning unit Screw x2
ON position).
NOTE
(8) Turn OFF the light in the room where the machine is placed.
If the sun is shining in through the window, draw the curtain to darken the room.
(9) Power ON the machine. Top view
(10) Make sure that the LD (laser) is not emitting light. (8)
F
Verify that D15 on the SCN08A board is not lit. If D15 is lit, replace the SED08A board. R
O
N SZ1
(11) Touch the U-Utility button. T

M-Utility is activated. Positioning direction
FR1H1313.EPS
(13) Select 5. SCANNER UTILITY, 3. LASER, and 2. ON in sequence.

The LD (laser) emits light.
009-051-06
04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460 04.20.2001 FM3006
05.31.99 FM2460
10.6 Checking and Replacing Driving-Side Grip Release HP 10.7 Checking and Replacing Driven-Side Grip Release HP
Sensor (SZ2) Sensor (SZ3)
Checks Checks
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SZ2. If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SZ3.
2.2 Checking Various Sensors 2.2 Checking Various Sensors
NOTE NOTE
When monitoring SZ2, insert an Allen wrench into the cam of MZ2 and rotate it clockwise to When monitoring SZ3, insert an Allen wrench into the cam of MZ3 and rotate it clockwise to
check the OPEN/CLOSE status of SZ2. check the OPEN/CLOSE status of SZ3.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. (1) Pull out the scanner unit.
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit
(2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly. (2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly.
10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide 10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide
(3) Remove the after-reading conveyor. (3) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
(4) Disconnect the connector (SZ2). (4) Disconnect the connector (SZ3).
(5) Remove the SZ2 bracket. (5) Remove the SZ3 bracket.
(6) Take out SZ2 from the bracket. (6) Take out SZ3 from the bracket.
Left side of
subscanning unit
Rear side plate Left side of
T Subscanning unit subscanning unit
ON NT
FR RO Rear side plate
Subscanning unit F
(5)
Bracket
T Sems M3x6
ON
FR
(4)
Connector T
ON
(5) FR
(6) (4)
SZ2 Bracket (6) Connector
Sems M3x6 SZ3
FR1H1288.EPS
FR1H1287.EPS
(7) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new SZ3.

(7) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new SZ2.
(8) Check SZ3.
(8) Check SZ2.
Checks
Checks
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
10.8 Checking and Replacing Subscanning Motor (MZ1) Replacement

Checks Lower front cover, lower left-hand side cover, lower left-hand side transparent cover
CAUTION
(2) Remove the Kapton belt.
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. 10.12 Checking and Replacing Kapton Belt/Tensioner/Flywheel
(3) Disconnect the connectors (CN1-3) of MZ1.
(1) Remove the following covers. (4) Remove MZ1.
Lower front cover, lower left-hand side cover, lower left-hand side trsnsparent cover
(4)
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers MZ1
(2) Power ON the machine. BR M4x8, x5

(3)
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. CN1, 2, 3
M-Utility is activated. Spring
(5) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2. ACTUATOR in sequence. (2)

Kapton belt
(6) Select 2. DRIVE.
A list of actuator Nos. is displayed. Subscanning unit
(7) Type in the number of MZ1 (FFM).

(8) Set up an operation parameter as instructed by the onscreen message.
(1)
MZ1 operation starts. Left-hand side transparent cover
(9) Measure the voltage between OK and 5G on MZ1.
(5) Install a new MZ1 by reversing the removal steps.
5G MZ1 NOTE
(FFM)
When installing MZ1, the same settings for S1-S6 of a new MZ1 should be made as
OK
those for the older one.
S1 S1
CN1 ON
6
OFF
5
FR1H1874.EPS 4
CN2
3
MZ1 2
(10) Select 3. STOP. CN3 1
(FFM)
A list of sensor Nos. is displayed. FR1H1926.EPS
(11) Type in the number of MZ1 (FFM).

MZ1 stops. (6) Perform the procedures described in Check after MZ1 Replacement.
(12) Change the operation parameter for MZ1 at step (7) as follows, and repeat steps (5)
through (10). Check after MZ1 Replacement
Rotation in normal direction (1) Power ON the machine.
Rotation in reverse direction Make sure that the machine starts up normally.
If MZ1 rotates for all of the operation parameters and the voltage between OK and 5G (2) Check MZ1 again to ensure that the motor operates normally.
on MZ1 is about 5 V, then the check is completed. (3) Check image performance.
If MZ1 does not rotate or the voltage between OK and 5G on MZ1 is less than 1 V for 3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume
any of the operation parameters, then replace the MZ1.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.30.2002 FM3405
10.9 Replacing Driving Shaft Grip Motor (MZ2) 10.10 Replacing Driven Shaft Grip Motor (MZ3)
Removal Removal
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. (1) Pull out the scanner unit.
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 7. Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit
(2) Remove the after-reading conveyor. (2) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor 8.1 Removing and Reinstalling Side-Positioning Conveyor
(3) Remove the FAST-ON terminals (MZ2(+), MZ2(-)). (3) Remove the FAST-ON terminals (MZ2(+), MZ2(-)).
(4) Remove the right-hand side transparent cover. (4) Remove the right-hand side transparent cover.
(5) Remove the SZ2-attached bracket as a whole. (5) Remove the MZ3-attached bracket as a whole.
(6) Remove the ring and cam from the MZ2 shaft. (6) Remove the ring and cam from the MZ3 shaft.
(7) Remove MZ2. (7) Remove MZ3.
(4) (4)
Right-hand side transparent cover Right-hand side transparent cover
BR M4x8, x2 BR M4x8, x2
Subscanning unit
T
ON
FR
T
ON
FR
Subscanning
unit
Positioning bracket Left side of subscanning unit

Rear side plate
(6) T
ON
Ring FR
T
Hex socket head setscrew ON
FR
M3x6 (5) (5)
(6) Bracket Bracket
Cam BR M4x8, x4 BR M4x8, x4
(7) (6) (7)
SZ2 MZ2 Cam MZ3
Sems M3x6, x3 Sems M3x6 x3
(3) (3)
FAST-ON terminal (+) FAST-ON terminal (-)
(3) Positioning (6) (3)
FAST-ON terminal (-) bracket Ring
SZ3 FAST-ON terminal (+)
Hex socket head
setscrew
M3x6
(8) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new MZ2. (8) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall MZ3.
When installing the MZ2 bracket, screw it down while pressing it against the position- When installing the MZ3 bracket, screw it down while pressing it against the position-
ing bracket. ing bracket.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
10.11 Checking and Replacing SUS Belt/Rubber Belt/Tensioner Replacement
CAUTION
CAUTIONS Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
Wear gloves during checks and replacement, because the SUS belt may be soiled or dam-
aged. Replacement of SUS belt/rubber belt
Checks Lower front cover, lower right-hand side cover
(1) Remove the following covers. 3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers
Lower front cover, lower right-hand side cover (2) Remove the transparent cover located on the right-hand side.
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers Using a blower, remove dust deposited on the transparent cover.
(2) Remove the transparent cover located on the right-hand side. (3) Remove the tensioner spring located on the right-hand side.
Using a blower, remove dust deposited on the transparent cover. (4) Replace the SUS belt or rubber belt.
(3) While rotating the drive shaft, check the SUS belt, rubber belt, pulley, and tensioner for To remove the rubber belt, rotate the drive shaft while keeping the center of the belt
any soil or flaw. tense, and take out the belt.
If any soil is found, clean it off.
Drive shaft
SUS belt: Clean any soil off with an ethanol-moistened cloth. Tensioner
Rubber belt: Clean any soil off with a moistened cloth.
Subscanning
If any flaw is found, replace the SUS belt or rubber belt. unit
(2) Tensioner
FR (4)
ON SUS belt Rubber belt Rubber belt
T
Drive (4)
shaft Pulley SUS belt
(3)
Subscanning unit Subscanning Spring
unit
FR1H1190.EPS
(5) Install new SUS and rubber belts in reverse order of removal.
NOTES
Subscanning Right-hand side transparent cover
unit After installing the SUS belt or rubber belt, rotate the drive shaft to check that the
BR M4x8, x2
SUS belt or rubber belt does not come off the pulley.
FR1H1189.EPS After replacing the SUS or rubber belt, check MZ1.
(4) Reinstall the right-hand side trsnsparent cover.

(6) Reinstall the right-hand side transparent cover.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement of tensioner 10.12 Checking and Replacing Kapton Belt/Tensioner/Flywheel

Lower front cover, lower right-hand side cover CAUTIONS
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
(2) Remove the transparent cover located on the right-hand side. powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
Wear gloves during checks and replacement, because the Kapton belt may be soiled or
Using a blower, remove dust deposited on the transparent cover.
damaged.
(3) Remove the tensioner spring located on the right-hand side.
(4) Replace the SUS belt.
(5) Replace the tensioner. Checks
Drive shaft Lower front cover, lower left-hand side cover
Subscanning unit (2) Remove the transparent cover located on the left-hand side.
Using a blower, remove dust deposited on the transparent cover.
(3) Check the Kapton belt, tensioner, and flywheel for any soil or flaw.
E-ring
If any soil is found, clean it off with an ethanol-moistened cloth.
(4) If any flaw is found, replace the flawed part.
SUS belt
(5)
Tensioner
(3)
Spring Tensioner
(2) Kapton belt
Right-hand side transparent cover
Subscanning
BR M4x8, x2
unit
FR1H1813.EPS
Pulley
NOTE
Flywheel
After installing the right-hand side tensioner and SUS belt, rotate the drive shaft to
check that the SUS belt or rubber belt does not come off the pulley. FR
(2) ON
T
Left-hand side
(7) Power ON the machine. transparent cover
(8) Check MZ1.
Make sure that the motor rotates normally. (4) Reinstall the left-hand side transparent cover.
10.8 Checking and Replacing Subscanning Motor (MZ1) (5) Power ON the machine.
(9) Check image performance. (6) Check MZ1.
3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume Make sure that the motor rotates normally.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement Replacement of tensioner

NOTES (1) Remove the following covers.
To install the Kapton belt, orient the belt with the arrow printed on its front facing the Lower front cover, lower left-hand side cover
subscanning unit.
The arrow mark on the front of the Kapton belt may disappear over a certain period of time.
When removing or reinstalling the existing Kapton belt, you may mark an arrow on the belt (2) Remove the transparent cover located on the left-hand side.
surface with a marker so as not to confuse its mounting orientation. Using a blower, remove dust deposited on the transparent cover.
After installation of the Kapton belt, rotate the flywheel to ensure that the belt does not come
off the pulley.
(5) Replace the tensioner.
Replacement of Kapton belt
Lower front cover, lower left-hand side cover
(5)
3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers Tensioner
(2) Remove the transparent cover located on the left-hand side. (3)
Using a blower, remove dust deposited on the transparent cover. Spring

(4) Replace the Kapton belt.
E-ring
Subscanning unit
(4)
Kapton belt FR
ON
(3) (2) T
Spring Left-hand side
transparent cover

Subscanning unit (8) Check MZ1.
(4) Make sure that the motor rotates normally.
Kapton belt
(2)
FR
Left-hand side ON
T
transparent cover
FR1H1815.EPS 3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume
Screw x2

(7) Check MZ1.
Make sure that the motor rotates normally.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement of flywheel 10.13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit
(3) Remove the light-collecting mirror
10.4 Servicing Light-Collecting Mirror
(4) Remove the transparent cover located on the left-hand side.
(4) Lift up the brace that retains the rubber roller and slide it to a position that facilitates
(5) Remove the spring. removal of the rubber roller.
(4)
(7) Insert an Allen wrench or so forth into the hole of the shaft located inside the side plate Rubber roller
to secure it in place, and remove the nut that retains the flywheel.
(8) Replace the flywheel.
(5) Remove the rubber roller from the subscanning unit.
(6) Remove the shaft, bearings, E-rings, and caps from the rubber roller.
(7) Install the shaft, bearings, E-rings, and caps removed at step (6) to a new rubber roller,
Side plate and reinstall the rubber roller to the subscanning unit.
Hole
(5)
Spring
Spring
Brace
Shaft
ONT
FR
Allen wrench
Subscanning unit FR1H1526.EPS
(7) (8)
Nut Flywheel
(6) FR
ON
Kapton belt T
(4)
Left-hand side
Cap
transparent cover FR1H1817.EPS
BR M4x8, x2 E-ring
Bearing
(9) Install a new flywheel by reversing the removal steps.
NOTE Rubber roller
After installing the flywheel, rotate it by hand to ensure that the Kapton belt does not
come off the pulley.
Bearing
(11) Check MZ1.
Make sure that the motor rotates normally.
3.2 Checking Image in Preventive Maintenance Volume Shaft
E-ring
Cap FR1H1528.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 200
(8) Secure the rubber roller in place with the brace. 10.14 Replacing Grip Arms
Make sure that the brace is located between the E-ring and cap.
NOTE (1) Remove the rubber roller located above the subscanning unit.
If the spring that should be attached to the lower portion of the brace has been dislo- 10.13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit
cated, be sure to reattach the spring to the lower portion of the brace and to the pin (2) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
located on the back of the side plate of the subscanning unit. 10.4 Servicing Light-Collecting Mirror
(3) Remove MZ1 (FFM).
Brace (4) Remove the flywheel.
10.12 Checking and Replacing Kapton Belt/Tensioner/Flywheel, Replacement
of flywheel
(5) Remove the right-hand side transparent cover.
(6) Remove the two screws that retain each of the two grip arms.
Rubber roller
10.15 Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit
(7) Take out the grip arm from the subscanning unit.
E-ring
(8) Remove the bearing and shaft from the grip arm.
Grip arm
NT Cap Hex socket head setscrew
O
FR M4x8
Spring
FR1H1527.EPS
Grip arm
Hex socket head setscrew
M4x8
Shaft
Bearing
FR1H1544.EPS
(9) Attach the bearing and shaft removed at step (8) to a new grip arm.
(10) Reinstall the grip arm to the subscanning unit.
(11) Reinstall the right-hand side transparent cover.
(12) Reinstall the flywheel.
10.12 Checking and Replacing Kapton Belt/Tensioner/Flywheel, Replacement
of flywheel
(13) Reinstall the MZ1 (FFM).
(14) Reinstall the light-collecting mirror.
(15) Reinstall the rubber roller located above the subscanning unit.
10.13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 202
(16) Make sure that there is a gap between the upper rubber roller and lower rubber roller. (5) Remove the four screws and one spacer that retain the subscanning unit guide plate.
If there is no gap, make adjustment as appropriate by rotating the adjustment screw. (6) Slide the right-hand-side grip arm removed at step (4) to remove the subscanning unit
guide plate.
Grip arm Adjustment screw (7) Install a new subscanning unit guide plate in reverse order of removal.
D NOTES
Upper rubber roller
To install the subscanning unit guide plate, loosely tighten the four screws and then
align the guide plate in the arrow directions illustrated below to position it as appro-
E priate.
Top view
A BR M4x12 + Spacer
Adjustment screw F F
B R
O
N Subscanning unit guide plate
T
Lower rubber roller
T
ON C
FR
Gap (reference value): 0<AF0.3 (mm)
Subscanning unit FR1H6521.EPS
10.15 Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit After installing the subscanning unit guide plate, place a rule or the like on the lower
rubber rollers, and rotate the drive shaft to check if the rule is moved, thereby
(1) Remove the rubber roller located above the subscanning unit.
verifying that the surface of the lower rubber rollers is above the subscanning unit
guide plate (at six locations).
10.13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit
(2) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
(3) Remove the right-hand side transparent cover.
Subscanning unit guide plate
(4) Remove the two screws that retain the grip arm located on the right-hand side of the
machine.
Lower rubber roller
(4)
Grip arm retaining screw
BR M3x6, x2
Grip arm
Drive shaft
Scale
T
ON
FR
FR1H4018.EPS
T
ON
FR Subscanning unit
(3)
Subscanning unit Right-hand side transparent cover
BR M4x8, x2 FR1H1529.EPS (9) Check image performance.
009-051-06
05.31.99 FM2460
04.20.2001 FM3006 05.31.99 FM2460
MC - 204
10.16 Replacing Lower Rubber Rollers of Subscanning Unit 10.17 Replacing and Adjusting Shock-Absorbing Rubbers
(1) Remove the guide plate of the subscanning unit. When replacing the shock-absorbing rubbers, be sure to replace all the four shock-
absorbing rubbers.
10.15 Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit
The shock-absorbing rubbers should be removed and installed one by one.
(2) Remove the SUS belt and rubber belt.
10.11 Checking and Replacing SUS Belt/Rubber Belt/Tensioner Replacement
(3) Remove the two respective screws that retain the bearings of the lower rubber rollers. On the after-reading conveyor side
(3)
BR M4x8, x4 11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor
(2) Remove the three screws and two spacers that retain the shock-absorbing rubber.
Lower rubber roller (3) While lifting up the subscanning unit slightly, take out the shock-absorbing rubber.
Bearing Bearing
O NT
FR Subscanning unit
Subscanning unit
FR1H1818.EPS
Shock-absorbing
rubber Scanner unit
(4) Pull out the two lower rubber rollers.
BR M6x12, x3 T
ON
(5) Remove the two bearings and two wave washers. Spacer x2 FR FR1H1819.EPS
(6) Attach to a new rubber roller the two bearings and two wave washers removed at step (4) Reinstall the shock-absorbing rubber in reverse order of removal.
(5).
(5) Make adjustment after replacement of the shock-absorbing rubber.
(7) Reinstall the rubber roller in reverse order of removal.
Adjustment
On the side-positioning conveyor side
(2) Remove the three screws and two spacers that retain the shock-absorbing rubber.
(3) While lifting up the subscanning unit slightly, take out the shock-absorbing rubber.
FR
ON
T
Shock-absorbing
rubber
BR M6x12, x3
Spacer x2
Scanner unit FR1H1820.EPS
(4) Reinstall the shock-absorbing rubber in reverse order of removal.

(5) Make adjustment after replacement of the shock-absorbing rubber.
Adjustment
05.31.99 FM2460 11.20.99 FM2638
04.20.2001 FM3006
MC - 206
Adjustment BLANK PAGE

(1) Loosen the two respective retaining screws on the four shock-absorbing rubbers.
The screw that retains the stay of the subscanning unit and the shock-absorbing
rubber should not be loosened.
(2) Adjust the position of the subscanning unit so that its distances from the tray are as
indicated by adjustment values (A, B, and C) shown below.
Top view
FRONT Tray
FR
ON
T
Subscanning unit
A = 74 1, B = 74 1, C = 100 1
Shock-absorbing rubber x4 Unit: mm

Loosen two screws
FR1H1615.EPS
(3) Tighten the screws that were loosened at step (1).

(4) Check again the distances from the subscanning unit to the tray.
If the adjustment values (A, B, and C) are out of range, repeat steps (1) through (3) all
over again.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 208 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 209
Removal
11. After-Reading Conveyor
This section describes procedures for removing and reinstalling the after-reading conveyor, 10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide
and procedures for checking and replacing parts of the after-reading conveyor to be re- (2) Disconnect the connectors (CNSE1, CNME1, CNME2).
placed. (3) Remove the five screws (four screws for the old type) that retain the after-reading
Unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that covers that should be removed prior to checks conveyor.
and replacement have been removed. (4) Pull out the after-reading conveyor horizontally.
NOTE
Make sure that the scanner unit has been pulled all the way out. If not, ME2 will
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor interfere with the machine frame when the after-reading conveyor is removed.
Remove the after-reading conveyor with the scanner unit pulled out. <New type>
There are two types of the after-reading conveyor: old and new types. Removal and
reinstallation procedures for each specific type should be employed. (2)
CNME2
Old type New type

Two screw retaining brackets are added.
(4) (2)
CNME1
FR FR
ON ON Scanner unit
T T
(3) (2)CNSE1
T After-reading conveyor
ON
FR
BR M4x8, x5
<Old type>
(2)
CNME2
T T (4) (2)
ON ON
FR FR CNME1
A screw retaining stay is added.

FR1H1563.EPS
(2)
CNSE1
Scanner unit
(3)
T After-reading conveyor
ON
FR
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Reinstallation (4) Tighten the three screws on the left bracket of the after-reading conveyor.
NOTE
Make sure that the scanner unit has been pulled all the way out. If not, ME2 will interfere with
the machine frame when the after-reading conveyor is removed. Bracket
(4) BR M4x8, x2
New type
The four bumps of the right and left brackets of the after-reading conveyor should be
aligned against the block sections of the subscanning unit.
(2) Secure the right-hand side of the after-reading conveyor to the subscanning unit by
tightening the two screws in order from (2)-1 to (2)-2 as illustrated below.
(3) Make sure that the three bumps (two bumps on the right-hand side and one of the two
bumps on the left-hand side) are aligned against the block sections of the subscanning
unit. Bracket
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Both of the two bumps on the right-hand side should be brought into contact with the block
section. At least one of the two bumps on the left-hand side may be in contact with the block After-reading
FR (4) BR M4x8
section. ON conveyor
T
FR1H1565.EPS
If any of the bumps is detached from the block section of the subscanning unit, loosen
the two screws and repeat step (2) all over again. If the bumps are detached from the block section of the subscanning unit, loosen the
three screws and repeat step (4) all over again.
Top view Side view
(5) Connect the connectors (CNSE1, CNME1, CNME2).
(1), (3) Left-hand side Right-hand side (1), (3)
Block sections
of subscanning New after-reading 10.2 Servicing Light-Collecting Guide
unit conveyor
Bracket
Bumps (At least
Bumps (Both of
one of them Block section
them should be
should be
contacted.)
contacted.)
New after-reading
Bracket conveyor Bracket
(2)-1
BR M4x8
(2)-2
BR M4x8
After-reading
conveyor Block section FR1H1564.EPS
Subscanning unit
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Old type 11.2 Checking and Replacing Grip Release HP Sensor (SE1)
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SE1 and then check it again.
Secure the after-reading conveyor in place with four screws, while pressing the
bracket of the after-reading conveyor against the block section of the subscanning unit Checks
and reference side.
(2) Connect the connectors (CNSE1, CNME1, CNME2). CAUTION
(1) Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
After-reading
conveyor (1) Power ON the machine.
Block
section The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
(2)
CNME2 A list of sensor Nos. is displayed.
(6) Type in the number of SE1.
ME2 (2)
CNME1 (7) Using a rule or the like, block the SE1 light path.
(1) (8) Remove the rule that blocks the SE1 light path.
(2)
CNSE1 (9) Repeat steps (7) and (8) several times.
T Bracket
ON Scanner unit If no message appears, it is likely that the sensor is faulty. So, replace the sensor.
FR
(1)
After-reading conveyor

After-reading
conveyor
SE1
O NT
FR
After-reading
conveyor FR1H1292.EPS

A message prompting you to reset the machine is displayed.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Replacement 11.3 Replacing Grip Release Motor (ME1)

(1) Disconnect the connector (SE1).
(2) Remove the bracket. The grip release motor (ME1) must be replaced with the lower front cover and lower front
inner cover removed. It is not necessary to pull out the scanner unit.
(3) Remove SE1 from the bracket.
(4) Install a new SE1.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNME1).
Description (3) Remove ME1.
(5) Connect the connector (SE1). Remove the two screws that retain the front side of the ME1. Also remove the single
screw that retains the stay on the inner side of the ME1 by accessing it from the side
(6) Attach the mounting bracket. plate.
(7) Check SE1. (4) Remove the stay and timing belt wheel from ME1.
Checks
After-reading
conveyor
(3)
BR M4x8
(3)
After-reading SE1
conveyor (1)
Connector
(2)
Bracket
Sems M3x6 x2 (2)
ONT CNME1
FR
T (4)
ON
FR Stay
FR1H1291.EPS Pan M4x10
(4)
ME1
Timing belt wheel
(3) (3)
Pan M4x10 x2 ME1
FR1H1128.EPS
(5) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new ME1.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
11.4 Replacing IP Transport Motor (ME2) 11.5 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of After-Reading
Conveyor
The IP transport motor (ME2) must be replaced with the scanner unit pulled out.
(1) Remove the after-reading conveyor. (1) Remove the after-reading conveyor.
11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor 11.1 Removing and Reinstalling After-Reading Conveyor
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNME2). (2) Remove the shock absorber-attached guide plate.
(3) Remove ME2. (3) Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed.
(4) Remove the timing belt wheel from ME2. If it is peeled or frayed, replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is
attached.
After-reading conveyor (2), (3)

guide plate
Sems M3x6, x3
(4)
Timing belt wheel
(2)
CNME2
(3)
ME2
Pan M4x10 x3
CNME2 FR
ON
T
T
FR1H1290.EPS ON
FR
(5) Install a new ME2 by reversing the removal steps.

After-reading conveyor FR1H1605.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Reinstallation
12. Erasure Conveyor
(1) Reinstall the erasure lamp assembly to the erasure conveyor.
This section describes procedures for removing and reinstalling the erasure lamp and era-
sure conveyor, and procedures for checking and replacing parts of the erasure conveyor to CAUTION
be replaced. Carefully handle the erasure lamp. If it is hit, the erasure lamp may be broken, so you
Unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that covers that should be removed prior to checks may get injured.
and replacement have been removed.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When installing the erasure lamp assembly, align the positioning pin located on the right-hand
12.1 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Lamp Assembly side of the inlet into the hole of the erasure lamp assembly, and push it all the way into the
erasure conveyor.
Removal
(1) Disconnect the connectors (ACOUT1, ACOUT2, DCOUT4, DCOUT5). (2) Connect the connectors (DCOUT 4, 5; ACOUT 1, 2).
(2) Remove the single screw that retains the erasure lamp assembly.
(2)
(3) Pull out the erasure lamp assembly horizontally. Power supply
DCOUT4 DCOUT5
CAUTION ACOUT1 ACOUT2
Carefully handle the erasure lamp. If it is hit, the erasure lamp may be broken, so you
may get injured.
(1) Power supply (1)

Erasure lamp assembly
DCOUT5 BR M4x8
DCOUT4
Erasure conveyor
ACOUT1 ACOUT2
(3)
T
ON
FR
FR1H1515.EPS
(2)
Erasure conveyor Erasure lamp assembly
BR M4x8
T
ON
FR
FR1H1180.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor Reinstallation

(1) Install the erasure conveyor along the shock absorber-attached cover into the machine.
Align the erasure conveyor against the positioning bracket located on the left side of
Removal
the machine (into the machine as seen from the direction of insertion), and secure it in
(1) Remove the erasure lamp assembly. place.
12.1 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Lamp Assembly (2) Attach the timing belt onto the timing belt wheel.
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CNC1, CNF1,2, CNSOLF1). (3) Put the tensioner back where it was.
(3) Slid the tensioner until the timing belt can be removed. Loosen the single screw that retains the tensioner. Flick the timing belt several times to
Loosen the one retaining screw and slide the tensioner as appropriate, and then ensure that it snugly fits onto the belt wheel, and then tighten the screw on the
tighten the screw. tensioner in place where appropriate tension is attained.
3.4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description
(4) Remove the timing belt. Erasure conveyor
(2)
(5) Remove the two screws that retain the erasure conveyor, and take out the erasure
Timing belt
conveyor horizontally. BR M4x8 CNC1 to the
(4) Connect the connectors (CNF1, 2, CNSOLF1 to the erasure conveyor;
(3)
Tensioner
(2) (4) CNC1
CNF1 (2) Timing belt
CNSOLF1
(2) (3)
CNF2 Tensioner Erasure conveyor Before-side-positioning
conveyor
Positioning bracket
BR M4x8
(2)
CNC1
(1)
Erasure conveyor Before-side-positioning
Conveyor Shock absorber-
attached cover
ONT
FR (1)
Erasure conveyor
(5) Spacer x2
before-side-positioning conveyor).
T
ON
FR (5)
Erasure conveyor
Spacer x2
BR M4x8 x2 FR1H1703.EPS CNF1
CNSOLF1
CNF2
CNC1
Erasure conveyor Before-side-positioning

conveyor
FR1H1518.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.3 Checking and Replacing After-Reading Conveyance Replacement

Standby IP Sensor (SF1) (1) Disconnect the connector (SF1).
(2) Remove SF1.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SF1 and then check it again. (3) Install a new SF1.
(4) Connect the connector (SF1).
Checks
(5) Check SF1.
CAUTION Checks

(3) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. Erasure conveyor
M-Utility is activated. Spacer
(2)
SF1
(4) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3. SENSOR in sequence. Pan-head M3x10, x2
(5) Select 2. MONITOR. (1)
Connector
(6) Type in the number of the after-reading conveyance IP sensor (SF1). FR1H1260.EPS

(7) Using a piece of cardboard or the like, block the SF1 light path.
A message indicating that SF1 is CLOSE is displayed on the operation panel.
(8) Remove the piece of cardboard that blocks the SF1 light path.
A message indicating that SF1 is OPEN is displayed on the operation panel.
If anything abnormal is found, such as no message displayed, then replace the sensor.
SF1

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.4 Checking and Replacing Changeover IP Sensor (SF2) Replacement

(1) Remove SF2.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SF2 and then check it again. (2) Disconnect the connector (SF2).
(3) Install a new SF2.
Checks
CAUTION (5) Check SF2.

(2) Touch the U-Utility button. Spacer (1)
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. SF2
Pan-head M3x10, x2
M-Utility is activated. Connector

Erasure conveyor
A list of sensor Nos. is displayed. FR1H1262.EPS
(6) Type in the number of the changeover IP sensor (SF2).

(7) Using a piece of cardboard or the like, block the sensor light path.
SF2

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.5 Checking and Replacing Load Standby IP Sensor (SF3) Replacement

(1) Disconnect the connector (SF3)
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SF3 and then check it again. (2) Remove SF3.
(3) Install a new SF3.
Checks
CAUTION (5) Check SF3.
(1) Remove SF3 without disconnecting the connector.

Spacer (2)
SF3
(3) Touch the U-Utility button. Pan-head M3x10, x2
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. (1)
Connector
Erasure conveyor
FR1H1264.EPS
(7) Type in the number of the load standby IP sensor (SF3).
(8) Using a piece of cardboard or the like, block the SF3 light path.
(9) Remove the cardboard that blocks the SF3 light path.
SF3
Erasure converyor FR1H1263.EPS

(13) Install SF3.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.6 Checking and Replacing Overrun IP Sensor (SF4) (12) Power OFF the machine.
(13) Install the SF4-attached bracket as a whole.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace SF4 and then check it again.
Replacement
Checks (1) Disconnect the connector (SF4).
(2) Remove the SF4-attached bracket as a whole.
CAUTION
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (4) Disconnect the connector (SF4) from the bracket.
(5) Remove SF4 (both on the light emitting and light receiving sides).
(1) Remove the SF4-attached bracket as a whole. (6) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new SF4.
Replacement (7) Check SF4.
(2) Power ON the machine. Checks
(5)
SF4
(4) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence. Sems M3x6 x4
(7) Type in the number of the overrun IP sensor (SF4).
The machine is now in the sensor monitoring enabled state. (3)
(8) Using a rule or the like, block the SF4 light path. Cut cable tie (1), (4)
Connector
SF4
(2)
Bracket
BR M4x8

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MF1) 12.8 Checking and Replacing Erasure Lamp
(1) Remove the erasure conveyor.
Check
12.2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor
(1) Remove the erasure lamp assembly.
12.1 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Lamp Assembly
(3) Disconnect the connector (CNMF1).
(4) Remove the connector from the side plate.
(3) Remove the five erasure lamps.
Because the connector portion of the motor is secure by a latch onto the side plate of
the erasure conveyor, push down the latch to remove the connector. (4) Measure the resistance between the erasure lamp electrodes.
(5) Remove MF1. Reference value: 20.5
(6) Using an Allen wrench, remove the set screw, and take out the wheel from MF1. If the measured resistance is outside the above reference value range, perform the
erasure lamp replacement procedure set forth below.
(7) Remove the E-ring and take out the timing belt wheel.
Lamp
Erasure conveyor
(3)CNMF1
FR1H1269.EPS
(4) Connector
Replacement
(3) Remove the five erasure lamps.
(4) Wipe the white reflection face within the erasure lamp assembly and the white reflec-
tion face behind the bracket with a dry cloth.
(7) E-ring
FR (3)
ON
(5) (7) Timing belt wheel T
Erasure lamp x5
MF1
(6) Pan M4x10 x4
Wheel
Hex socket head setscrew FR1H1144.EPS (4)
M4x4 Reflection
face
(2)
(8) Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a new MF1. Bracket
Sems M3x6 x2
(4)
Reflection
face
FR1H1266.EPS
(5) Install five new erasure lamps.

(6) Attach the bracket.
(7) Reinstall the erasure lamp assembly.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.30.2002 FM3405
12.9 Replacing Thermal Switches (TSW1, TSW2) Replacement of TSW2

Replacement of TSW1 12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor
(1) Remove the erasure lamp assembly. (2) Remove the bracket.
12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor (3) Remove the five erasure lamps.
(2) Remove the bracket of the erasure lamp assembly. (4) Remove the leaf spring.
(3) Remove the FAST-ON terminals (TSW1COM, TSW1NO). (5) Remove the FAST-ON terminals (TSW2COM, TSW2NO).
(4) Replace TSW1. (6) Remove TSW2.
(5) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. (7) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2)
(3)
Bracket
BR M4x8 x2 Erasure lamp x5
(2)
(3)
TSW1COM Bracket
(3) BR M4x8, x2
TSW1NO
(6)
(4) TSW2
(4) Pan
TSW1 Leaf spring
Sems M3x6, x2 M3x4, x2
Pan M3x6 x2
Nut
(5)
TSW2NO
(5)
TSW2COM
FR1H1268.EPS
Erasure lamp assembly FR1H1267.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.10 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan (FANF1) 12.11 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan Air Filter
(1) Power OFF the machine. (1) Power OFF the machine.
(2) Remove the erasure lamp assembly. (2) Remove the lower front cover and lower right-hand side cover.
12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor (3) Remove the air filter.
(2)
(4) Remove the cable clamp. Lower right-hand
side cover
(5) Disconnect the connector (CNFANF1). (3)
(6) Remove the four screws that retain the fan assembly. Air filter
(7) Replace the FANF1.
Velcro tape
(3)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x2
(5) (4)
CNFANF1 Cable clamp
BR M4x8
CNFANF1
(6) (2)
Sems M3x45, x4 Lower front cover
Erasure lamp
assembly
FR1H1270.EPS
(4) Attach a new air filter.

Attach the air filter so as to cover the Velcro tape located on the lower right-hand side
cover.
(7)
FANF1
FR1H1520.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.12 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Erasure Unit IP Replacement

Conveyance Timing Belt (1) Remove the erasure conveyor.
12.2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor
Checks (2) Remove MF1.
If anything abnormal is found during checks, replace or adjust the erasure unit IP convey- 12.7 Replacing IP Transport Motor (MF1)
ance timing belt. (3) Remove the timing belt.
(1) Power OFF the machine. (4) Attach a new erasure unit IP conveyance timing belt.
(2) Remove the erasure conveyor. (5) Adjust the tension.
12.2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor Adjustment
(3) Measure the tension value for the erasure unit IP conveyance timing belt.
With a load of 300 50g applied, the deflection should be 11 1mm.
Erasure conveyor
Timing belt
FRONT
Tensioner
300g 50g (2)
11 1mm Timing belt wheel
MF1 M4x20
Spacer
FR
Erasure conveyor ON
T
FR1H1188.EPS
FR
(3) ON
T
Timing belt
FR1H1271.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Adjustment 12.13 Replacing Erasure Conveyor Rubber Rollers

(1) Measure the tension value for the timing belt.
With a load of 300 50g applied, the deflection should be 11 1mm. (1) Remove the erasure conveyor.
(2) Shift the tensioner position to adjust the tension of the timing belt until the specification 12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor
is met. (2) Remove the grip spring for the rubber roller to be replaced.
(3) Remove the drive gear.
3.1 E-ringless Housing Employed in Machine Description
Timing belt (4) Remove the simple bearing.
FRONT
Tensioner 3.3 Simple Bearing Employed in Machine Description
300g 50g (5) Replace the erasure conveyor rubber roller.
11 1mm
Side view
MF1
: Rubber roller
FR
Erasure conveyor ON
T
FR1H1273.EPS
T
ON
FR
Erasure conveyor
FR1H1272.EPS
(6) Accomplish reassembly by reversing the removal steps.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
12.14 Checking and Replacing Branch Path Changeover Guide Replacement

After replacement, be sure to check.
Check
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNSOLF1).
CAUTION (3) Remove the changeover guide drive solenoid assembly (SOLF1).
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (2)
CNSOLF1

(1)
M-Utility is activated. Spring
NT
(4) Select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY, 2. ACTUATOR and 2. DRIVE in sequence. FRO
A list of actuator Nos. is displayed. Erasure conveyor

(5) Select 7.SOLF1. (3)
Changeover guide
The branch path changeover guide is driven to the front of the machine. drive solenoid assembly
BR M4x8 x3
If the branch path changeover guide is not driven, it is likely that the cable connection FR1H1257.EPS
or sensor is faulty. So, check the cable connection, and then select 2. DRIVE again.
If it is not driven after that, replace SOLF1.
Branch path
changeover guide
Changeover guide
drive solenoid
Erasure conveyor
FR1H1258.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 (1) 05.31.99 FM2460
(4) Loosely retain the positioning bracket by loosening its retaining screw. 12.15 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of Erasure
(5) Loosely attach a new changeover guide drive solenoid assembly.
Conveyor
Be sure that the spring pin is lodged in the U-shaped groove in the arm.
(6) Install the spring.
CAUTION
(7) Connect the connector (CNSOLF1).
When removing and installing the units, use care not to damage the cables.
(8) Move the changeover guide drive solenoid assembly along the guide and then fully
tighten it.
Pull the changeover guide drive solenoid assembly to the left and above by sliding it Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber on Before-Side-Positioning Conveyor Side
along the guide. When the arm begins to leave the stopper support, return the
changeover guide drive solenoid assembly until the arm comes into contact with the (1) Remove the erasure conveyor.
stopper support, and then fully tighten the assembly. 12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE (2) Remove the shock absorber-attached guide plate.
Ensure that the arm is in contact with the stopper support but not depressed. (3) Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed.
(9) Screw down the positioning bracket while pressing it against the changeover guide attached.
drive solenoid assembly.
(2), (3)
(5), (8) (4), (9) Shock absorber-attached
Changeover guide Positioning bracket guide plate
drive solenoid Guide Sems M3x6, x4
Spring pin Nut, x4
Arm
(6)
Spring
Branch path changeover Stopper support

guide assembly FR1H1413.EPS
T
ON
FR
Erasure conveyor
FR1H1623.EPS
(4) Reinstall the guide plate in reverse order of removal.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of Filter (8) Reinstall the lamp assembly.
(1) Remove the erasure conveyor. (9) Attach the bracket removed at step (2).
12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor (10) Attach the grip spring removed at step (1).
(2) Remove the grip spring.
(2)
Grip spring
Erasure
conveyor
FR1H1624.EPS
(3) Remove the two bracket retaining screws (one of them should be merely loosened)
and remove the bracket.
(4) Remove the lamp house assembly.
NOTE
When removing the lamp house assembly, use care not to damage the shock
absorber.

If it is peeled or frayed, replace the whole filter to which the shock absorber is at-
tached. If it is not peeled or frayed, proceed to step (8).
(6) Remove the shock absorber-attached filter.
(3)
Remove screw
BR M4x8 (3)
Loosen screw
BR M4x8
(3)
Bracket
(4)
Lamp house assembly
BR M4x8, x4
(5)
Shock
absorber
T
ON
FR
(6)
Erasure conveyor Only one shorter (6)
screw is used. Shock absorber-attached filter
Sems M4x6 Spacer x5
BR M4x8, x5
FR1H1625.EPS
(7) Attach a new shock absorber-attached filter.
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber Located Above Erasure Conveyor (6) Remove the shock absorber-attached guide plate.
(1) Remove the erasure conveyor. (7) Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed.
12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor If it is peeled or frayed, replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNSF4). attached.
(3) Remove SF4 together with the bracket. (6), (7)

(4) Disconnect the connector (CNSF2). Shock absorber-attached guide plate
Sems M3x6, x4
(5) Remove SF2 together with the spacer.
(5)
Spacer
(5)
SF2
Pan head screw
M3x10, x2
(4)
CNSF2
(3) (2)
SF4 CNSF4
(3)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x2
T
ON
FR
Erasure conveyor
FR1H1627.EPS

(9) Reinstall the SF2 together with the spacer.
(10) Connect the connector (CNSF2).
(11) Reinstall the SF4 together with the bracket.
(12) Connect the connector (CNSF4).
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber of Branch Path Changeover Guide (7) Remove the bearing.
(1) Remove the erasure conveyor. (8) Remove the branch path changeover guide assembly.
12.2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor The arm should be removed as attached to the shaft of the branch path changeover
(2) Remove the guide plate. guide assembly.
(9) Remove the arm, bearing, and slide bearing from the branch path changeover guide
assembly.
attached.
If it is not peeled or frayed, reinstall the guide plate in reverse order of removal.
(9)
Slide bearing
(3)
Shock absorber-attached branch
path changeover guide T
Erasure conveyor
ON
FR (8)
(7), (9)
Shock absorber-attached Bearing
branch path changeover guide BR M4x12
(9)
Arm
Sems M3x10
FR1H1630.EPS
(2) (10) Attach the arm, bearing, and slide bearing removed at step (9) to a new shock ab-
T Guide plate Erasure conveyor sorber-attached branch path changeover guide.
ON
FR BR M3x6, x4 FR1H1628.EPS
(11) Fit the spring pin into the U-shaped groove of the arm.
(4) Remove the spring. (12) Reinstall the branch path changeover guide assembly.
(5) Remove the two screws that retain the stopper support, and remove the stopper (13) Attach the bearing.
support. (14) Install the stopper support while the branch path changeover guide is opened (the
(6) Remove SF1 without disconnecting the connector. spring pin is pushed against the end surface of the square hole of the changeover
guide driving solenoid).
NOTES
Make sure that the spring pin is securely pushed against the end surface of the
square hole.
(6) Arm Make sure that the stopper support is in contact with the arm. Also, verify that the
SF1 (4)
Pan head screw
spring pin or arm does not move.
Spring
M3x10, x2
End surface of
the square hole
Spring pin
Branch path changeover (5)
Arm
guide assembly Stopper support
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H1629.EPS
Stopper support FR1H1821.EPS
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
(15) Reinstall the SF1 together with the connector, which was removed at step (6). BLANK PAGE
(16) Attach the spring removed at step (4).
Changeover guide
driving solenoid (16)
Spring pin
(14)
End surface of
(15) square hole
SF1 Arm
Branch path changeover (14)

guide assembly Bearing Stopper support
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H1631.EPS
(17) Attach the guide plate removed at step (2).
05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 253
MC - 252
Replacement
13. Power Supply Unit
This section describes procedures for replacing the power supply unit. (2) Disconnect the connectors (AC OUT1, 2, DCOUT1-7, TB1, 2, CN1-5).
Unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that covers that should be removed prior to (3) Remove the four screws that retain the power supply unit.
replacement have been removed. (4) Pull out the power supply unit horizontally.
(3)
Loosen screw
BR M4x8, x2
13.1 Checking, Replacing, and Adjusting Power Supply Unit T
ON
FR
Check/Adjustment Procedure
WARNING
(3)
(4)
To avoid possible electric shock hazards from high voltage, observe the following precautions. Power supply unit
Before removing and installing the power supply unit, unplug the power plug from the outlet.
Do not touch the power supply terminals.
When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probes (metal portions) of a tester.
T SW
SE
RE Rem
ote
l
ON Loca
Make voltage measurements at the following points. OF

F
(3)
Remove screw
BR M4x8, x2
Measurement point Adjustment point Specified value
TB2 1-3 +5V 5.1 5.3V
DC OUT1 1-3 +12V 12.0 12.6V Right side view of power supply Left side view of power supply
(2) DC OUT2 (2)
DC OUT3 1-6 +15V 14.5 15.5V DC OUT1
DC OUT6 DC OUT7 DC OUT3 CN3
DC OUT3 2-7 +24V1 23.0 25.0V DC OUT4 CN5
ON RESET SW
DC OUT3 4-9 +24V2 23.0 25.0V

OFF Remote
DC OUT5 Local
DC OUT6 2-6 +15Va 14.5 15.5V

NT AC OUT1
F RO AC OUT2 TB2 TB1 CN4
DC OUT6 3-7 -15Va -14.5 -15.5V FR1H1248.EPS
Side view
(5) Install a new power supply unit.
DCOUT6 DCOUT7 DCOUT2 DCOUT1 DCOUT3
+5V +12V +15V +15Va -15Va +15V1 24V2 (6) Connect the connectors (AC OUT1, 2, DCOUT1-7, TB1, 2, CN3-5).
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 3 10 9 8 7 6
2 1 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 TB2
4 3 2 1
DCOUT4 DCOUT5
2 2
3 2 1 1 +
1
ACOUT4 ACOUT2
3
6 1 7 1 G
7 2 8 2 4
8 3 9 3
9 4 10 4
10 5 11 5
12 6
FR1B1127.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
MC - 254
13.2 Power Supply Unit Fuses Checking the fuses
Glass-tube fuse
Fuse Arrangement Diagram
(1) Remove the power supply unit horizontally.
Top view 13.1 Replacing Power Supply Unit
FRONT
(2) Remove the six screws and take out the cover of the power supply unit.
(2)
Cover
Screw x6
F5 F11 F9
F8 F7
F6
F12 F10
T
ON
FR F13
F4
T SW
F3
ON
RE
SE
Rem
ote
Loc
al
F1
OF
F
F2
Power supply unit
FR1B1269.EPS
Fuse Ratings
Name Rated voltage/amperage Remarks
F1 250V, 5A For SCN08A +5V (DCOUT6) Power supply unit
F2 250V, 4A For DRV08A +15V (DCOUT3) FR1H1523.EPS
F3 250V, 4A For FFM +15V (DCOUT7)

F4 250V, 500mA For FFM +5V (DCOUT7)
F5 250V, 500mA For erasure lamp cooling fan
+24V (DCOUT5)
F6 250V, 2A For SCN08A +24V (DCOUT6)
F7 250V, 5A For SCN08A +15V (DCOUT6)
F8 250V, 5A For SCN08A -15V (DCOUT6)
F9 250V, 4A For DRV08A +24V (DCOUT3)
F13 250V, 5A For SNS08A +5V (DCOUT2)
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 256
(3) Check the fuses. BLANK PAGE
Measure the resistance value across the fuse.
Fuse
FR1H1924.EPS
If the measured resistance value is 100 or greater, it is judged that the fuse has
been blown.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting)
should be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with
respect to the measured value of the fuse.
Top view
(3)
FRONT
F5 F11 F9
F8 F7
F6
F12 F10
T
ON
FR F13
F4
T SW
F3
ON
RE
SE
Rem
Loc
ote
al
F1
OF
F
F2
Power supply
unit
FR1H1524.EPS
(4) Attach the cover of the power supply unit.

(5) Reinstall the power supply unit.
Action to be Taken When the Fuse Has Been Blown

Replace any blown fuse.
Checking the fuses
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 258
<For SEAGATE/ST318416N (850Y0112)>
14. HDD
HDD bottom
14.1 Setting the HDD

J2
TP2
TE
Short-pin settings for each HDD are illustrated below.
<For SEAGATE/ST52160N (850S0107)>
J6
<For 850S0107> 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
HDD bottom
FRONT
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
13 11 9 7 5 3 1 FR1H7031.EPS
<For HITACHI/DK32DJ-18MW (850Y0117)>

14 12 10 8 6 4 2
HDD bottom
FRONT
FRONT
FR1H7028.EPS
<For QUANTUM/QM32100SE-S (850S0121)>

HDD bottom
J5 TE
C4
2 4 6 8 10 12
FRONT C3
FR1H7029.EPS 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
1 3 5 7 9 11
<For Western Digital/WDE4550-003 (850S0080)>
Short pin setting unnecessary 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
<For Western Digital/WDE9100-003 (850S0085)>
FR1H7032.EPS
HDD bottom
<For SEAGATE/ST336607LW (850Y0131)>
33 34
31 32 HDD bottom
29 30 J2
27 28 TERM PWR 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
25 26 FRONT
23 24 SCSI TERM
21 22 TRGT INIT 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
19 20 J6
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 Short pin setting unnecessary
17 18
15 16 J5 11 9 7 5 3 1
13 14
11 12 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
9 10 Short pin setting unnecessary
FRONT 12 10 8 6 4 2
7 8
5 6 Short pin setting unnecessary
3 4 FR1H7033.EPS
1 2
FR1H7030.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
MC - 260
14.2 Replacing the HDD Reinstallation

(1) Check the HDD settings.
NOTES 14.1 Setting the HDD
When handling the HDD, do not shock it. (2) Peel off the adhesive-coat protection film from the silicone surface of the heat radiation
When removing and installing the HDD, do not use a magnet screwdriver. sheet.
When the HDD is to be replaced, the heat radiation sheet should also be replaced together.
(3) Attach the heat radiation sheet onto the parts-mounted surface of the HDD.
Removal CAUTION
(1) Disconnect the connector (CNJ2). When attaching the heat radiation sheet onto the HDD, make sure that the silicone
surface of the heat radiation sheet faces the parts-mounted surface of the HDD.
(2) Remove the connector (CNJ1) together with the CNN08A board as a whole.
If the heat radiation sheet is attached with its aluminum surface facing the parts-
(3) Remove the HDD together with the bracket as a whole. mounted surface of the HDD, a short-circuit may occur.
(4) Detach the HDD from the bracket.
(3) [Attach]
(3) Aluminum surface
Heat radiation sheet
[Loosen]
BR M4x8, x2
HITACHI/DK32DJ-18MW
(850Y0117) (2) [Remove] CNJ1/CNN08A
SEAGATE/ST336607LW (1) [Disconnect] CNJ2 T

(850Y0131) ON HDD (2) [Peel]
FR Protection film
Parts-mounted surface
(4) [Remove]
6-32 UNC, x4
Bracket
HDD
FR1H7034.EPS
T
O
P
FR1H7035.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
MC - 262
(4) Peel off the adhesive-coat protection film from the aluminum surface of the heat (6) Install the HDD together with the bracket as a whole.
radiation sheet attached. For reinstallation, reverse the removal procedures.
(5) Install the HDD to the bracket. (7) Install the connector and CNN08A board to the HDD.
NOTES (8) Connect the connector (CNJ2) to the HDD.
When inserting the HDD into the bracket, use care not to cause the adhesive- (9) Format the HDD and reinstall the software.
coated surface of the heat radiation sheet to stick to the bracket.
16.2 Formatting Hard Disk in the Maintenance Utility Volume
Align the threaded holes while inserting the HDD into the bracket, and bring the
heat radiation sheet into close contact with the bracket. 16.1 Installing the Software (Application) in the Maintenance Utility Volume
When installing the HDD to the bracket, push the HDD toward the bracket (in the (10) Turn ON the power and make sure that the machine starts up normally.
direction of the arrow illustrated below) to secure it in place.
(5) #3
Bracket
(4) [Peel]
(5) #1
Protection film (5) #2
[Loosely Tighten/
Secure]
6-32 UNC, x4
Heat radiation sheet Aluminum

surface
(5) #4
T
O
P
HDD
DETAIL A
Bracket Heat radiation sheet
HDD
FR1H7036.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 263.1 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 263.2
14.3 Replacing the HDD (ST52160N/QM32100SE-S/WDE4550- SEAGATE/ST52160N (850S0107)

QUANTUM/QM32100SE-S (850S0121)
003/WDE9100-003/ST318416N)
345N1234C
This section describes the procedures for replacing the old-type HDD with a new one
(DK32DJ-18MW/ST336607LW).
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Parts to be replaced differ depending on the type of the HDD. Refer to the information on the
relevant parts replacement list.
356N5849A
Parts Replacement List by HDD Type
SEAGATE/ST52160N (850S0107)
PART NAME PART No. QTY.
HDD 850S0107 1
Bracket 356N5849A 1
Western Digital/WDE4550-003 (850S0080)
Heat radiation sheet - -
CNN08A board - -
345N1234C HITACHI/DK32DJ-18MW (850Y0117)
Shield plate 345N1234C 1 SEAGATE/ST336607LW (850Y0131)
898Y0864
QUANTUM/QM32100SE-S (850S0121)
345N1368A 345N1366B
HDD 850S0121 1
Bracket 356N5849A 1
CNN08A board - -
356Y0200
Shield plate 345N1234C 1
356Y0200
(reused)
HITACHI/DK32DJ-18MW (850Y0117)
Western Digital/WDE4550-003 (850S0080) SEAGATE / ST336607LW(850Y0131)
PART NAME PART No. QTY. PART NAME PART No. QTY.
HDD 850S0080 1 HDD 850Y0117/850Y0131 1
Bracket 356Y0200 (reused) 1 Bracket 356Y0200 1
Heat radiation sheet - - Heat radiation sheet 379N0113A 1 SEAGATE/ST318416N (850Y0112)
CNN08A board - - CNN08A board 113Y1660A 1 345N1366B (reused)
898Y0864 113Y1660A
345N1368A 1
Shield plate 345N1234C 1 Shield plate 345N1368 379N0113A
345N1366B 2

HDD 850S0085 1
Bracket 356Y0200 (reused) 1
CNN08A board - -
Shield plate 345N1234C 1

356Y0200
SEAGATE/ST318416N (850Y0112)
(reused)
HDD 850Y0112 1
Bracket 356Y0200 (reused) 1 379N0113
Bracket 356N8865 1
356N8865
Heat radiation sheet 379N0113 1 FR1H7038.EPS
CNN08A board - -
345N1368 1
Shield plate
345N1366B (reused) 2 FR1H7037.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Removal Reinstallation
(1) Disconnect the connector (CNJ1, 2). (1) Check the settings of a new HDD (DK32DJ-18MW/ST33607LW) to be installed.
(2) Remove the HDD together with the bracket as a whole. 13.1 Setting the HDD
(3) Detach the HDD from the bracket. (2) Peel off the adhesive-coat protection film from the silicone surface of a new heat
radiation sheet to be attached.
SEAGATE/ST52160N (850S0107) (2) (3) Attach the heat radiation sheet onto the parts-mounted surface of a new HDD
QUANTUM/QM32100SE-S (850S0121) [Loosen] (DK32DJ-18MW/ST33607LW) to be installed.
BR M4x8, x2
(1) [Disconnect] CNJ1
(1) [Disconnect] CAUTION
T
ON
CNJ2 FR When attaching the heat radiation sheet onto the HDD, make sure that the silicone
HDD surface of the heat radiation sheet faces the parts-mounted surface of the HDD.
If the heat radiation sheet is attached with its aluminum surface facing the parts-
mounted surface of the HDD, a short-circuit may occur.
(3) [Attach]
Aluminum surface
Heat radiation sheet
(3) Screw x4
Bracket
(2) [Peel]
Protection film
Western Digital/WDE9100-003 (850S0085) (2)
SEAGATE/ST318416N (850Y0112) [Loosen] Parts-mounted surface
BR M4x8, x2
(1) [Disconnect] CNJ1
(1) [Disconnect] T
ON
CNJ2 FR
HDD
HDD
T
O
P
(3) FR1H7035.EPS
6-32 UNC, x4
Bracket
FR1H7039.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(4) Peel off the adhesive-coat protection film from the aluminum surface of the heat (7) Connect the CNN08A board to the connector (CNJ1).
radiation sheet attached.
(5) Install the HDD to the bracket. HDD
NOTES
[Connect]
When inserting the HDD into the bracket, use care not to cause the adhesive-coated CNN08A board
surface of the heat radiation sheet to stick to the bracket.
Align the threaded holes while inserting the HDD into the bracket, and bring the heat
radiation sheet into close contact with the bracket.
When installing the HDD to the bracket, push the HDD toward the bracket (in the
direction of the arrow illustrated below) to secure it in place.
CNJ1
(5) #3
Bracket
(4) [Peel]
(5) #1
Protection film (5) #2
[Loosely Tighten/
Secure]
6-32 UNC, x4
Heat radiation sheet Aluminum

surface
FR1H7040.EPS
(5) #4
T (8) Install the connector and CNN08A board to the HDD.
O
P
HDD
DETAIL A
Bracket Heat radiation sheet
HDD
FR1H7036.EPS
(6) Install the HDD together with the bracket as a whole.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal procedures.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(9) Connect the connector (CNJ2) to the HDD. When the shield plate (345N1234C) is used:
NOTE (1) Remove the shield plate together with the fans as a whole.
When the HDD (ST52160N/QM32100SE-S) is to be replaced with a new one (2) Remove the fans.
(DK32DJ-18MW/ST33607LW), the bracket that retains the HDD should also be
replaced with a new one (356Y0200). (3) To a new shield plate (345N1368A), attach the fans and another new shield plates
(345N1366B).
HDD HDD
(ST52160N/QM32100SE-S) (DK32DJ-18MW/ST336607LW) (4) Install the shield plate (345N1368A) together with the fans as a whole.
(1), (2) [Remove] (3), (4) [Attach]

Guard
Fan Fan
Bracket (356N5849A) Bracket (356Y0200) FR1H7041.EPS
(10) Replace the shield plate.

Guard
NOTE
Replacement of the shield plate differs depending on the parts used. Replace it as Fan Label face
appropriate with reference to the relevant procedures. Shield plate (345N1368A)
BR M4x8, x3
Shield plate (345N1234C)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE BR M4x8, x3 Shield plate (345N1366B)
Fan mounted locations BR M4x35, x2 FR1H7043.EPS
When the shield plate (345N1368) is used:

(1) Remove the shield plate together with the fans as a whole.
(2) Replace the shield plate (345N1368) with a new one (345N1368A).
(3) Install the shield plate (345N1368A) together with the fans as a whole.
FR1H7042.EPS
Guard
Fan
Label face
Shield plate
(345N1366B) [Replace]
BR M4x35, x2 Shield plate (345N1368) Shield plate (345N1368A)
BR M4x8, x3
FR1H7044.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(11) Format the HDD and reinstall the software. BLANK PAGE
16.2 Formatting Hard Disk in the Maintenance Utility Volume
16.1 Installing the Software (Application) in the Maintenance Utility Volume
(12) Turn ON the power and make sure that the machine starts up normally.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MC - 264 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 265
15. FDD 15.2 Replacing FDD
15.1 Setting FDD FDD Replacement Procedure

Short-pin settings for each FDD are illustrated below.
Lower front cover, upper right-hand side cover, upper left-hand side cover, upper front
For 850S0086 cover
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CN1, 2 from the VOL08A board; CNJ1, 2 from the FDD).
(3) Remove the FDD together with the bracket.
FDD
FR1B1267.EPS
(2) (2)
For 850S0087/0088/0089 CN2 CN1
(2)
(3) CNJ2
T
FDD ON
FR
(2)
CNJ1
FR1B1268.EPS (3)
Bracket
BR M4x8, 4
FDD FR1H1525.EPS
(4) Remove the FDD from the bracket.
(4)
FDD
Sems M3x6, 4
FR1H1247.EPS
(5) Attach a new FDD to the bracket.
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MC - 266 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 267
(6) Make sure that the short-plug setting on the FDD is at initial setting. BLANK PAGE
15.1 Setting FDD
(7) Reinstall the FDD together with the bracket.
(8) Connect the connectors (CN1, 2 from the VOL08A board; CNJ1, 2 from the FDD).
(8) (8)
CN2 CN1
(8)
CNJ2
(7)
T
ON
FR
(8)
CNJ1
(7)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x4
FDD FR1B1238.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MC - 268 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 269
16. Monitor 16.2 Replacing the Monitor
16.1 Cleaning Monitor WARNINGS

When replacing the monitor, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker. If you replace the monitor
(1) Wipe the monitor screen with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral-detergent solution.
with the circuit breaker ON, you could receive a shock.
Sufficiently wring the cloth before wiping the monitor screen. Since the monitor contains high-voltage generating parts (see the figure below), never touch
NOTE them. If any foreign matter enters the monitor, be sure to remove it. If it is allowed to stay, a
risk of fire or electric shock will be caused.
Do not use alcohol. Alcohol is strongly permeative, so that if there is any small scratch
or crack in the acrylic plate, it may accelerate such a scratch or crack. : Never touch the shaded portions.
Board (700V max.)

(2) Clean the monitor screen with a dry cloth. Board
Anode cap
Flyback transformer
(2) Monitor screen
T
ON
FR Board (700V max.)
Anode lead
Deflection yoke coil (approx. 12kV)
(250V max.) FR1H4022.EPS
Remove the upper left-hand side cover, upper right-hand side cover, and front cover.
(1) Remove the power switch cover.
Even when the power switch cover is removed, the connectors are still connected.
(2) Disconnect connectors LED08A CN1 and CN2.
(3) Open the bracket after removing two screws.
(3)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H1501.EPS
(2)
(1) LED08A CN1, 2
T
ON Power switch cover
FR
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MC - 270 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 271
(4) Disconnect connectors PNL CN3 and CRT CN1 through CN4. 16.3 Monitor Fuse
(4)
CRT CN4 (4)
(4) CRT CN2 Fuse Mounting Diagram
CRT CN1 (4)
CRT CN3
(4) FR
ON
T
PNL CN3
T
ON
FR
FR1H4023.EPS
(5) Remove the monitor together with the bracket.

(6) Separate the two mounting brackets from the monitor.
(6)
Bracket F1
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H1929.EPS
Fuse Rating
Location Name Rated voltage and amperage
Between power supply unit and monitor F1 250 V, 3 A
NT
RO
F Checking Fuse
(5)
Monitor Glass-tube fuse
BR M4x8, x4
Measure the resistance across the fuse. If the measured resistance value is 100 or
greater, the fuse is considered to be blown.
(6)
Bracket
BR M4x8, x2
FR1H4021.EPS
(7) Accomplish monitor installation by reversing the removal steps.
Fuse
FR1H1924.EPS
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should be
measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the
measured value of the fuse.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MC - 272 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MC - 273
Action to Be Taken for a Blown Fuse BLANK PAGE

Replace the fuses.
Replacement procedure
(1) Remove the upper right-hand side cover.
3. Removing and Installing the Covers
(2) Replace the fuse between the power supply unit and monitor.
FR
ON
T
T
ON
FR
F1 (fuse)
(250V, 3A) Transparent cover
FR1H1925.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 274
17. PC Boards 17.2 MTH08A Board
17.1 Board Arrangement Diagram CAUTION

The PC boards of the machine are mounted as indicated below:
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
LED08A
When removing or installing the MTH08A board, see the following.
VOL08A 17.21 Removing and Installing the MTH08A/D, SNS08A, and DRV08A boards
LED08B
MTH08A board
CN25
NFB1/F1
CN30 CN26 CN23
NFB5/F5
TP7 CN22
NFB4/F4
CN27 CN18 CN28
CN17
CN16
CN15 CN19
CN14
CN13
T CN12
ON CN11
FR
CN10
CN8 NFB2/F2
CN9
SCN08A CN6 CN20
CN7
DRV08A PMT08A
CN5
CN4 CN3
SNS08A
CN29
CPU90F/
LAN90B CN2 CN1 NFB3/
F3
DMC08A CN21
MTH08A/D or
HCP08A
NFB6/F6 CN24
IMG08B/H FR1H1350.EPS
Fuse Ratings
IMG08A Location Name Rated voltage Rated amperage
NFB1/F1 250 V 2A
BCR08A IMG07B NFB2/F2 250 V 2A
MMC90A
or NFB3/F3 250 V 2A
DIM08A
CPU90E NFB4/F4 250 V 5A
NFB5/F5 250 V 2A
NFB6/F6 250 V 3A
FFM
T
ON
FR
FR1H1352.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
MC - 276
Checking the Fuses 17.3 MTH08D Board
For no-fuse breaker (NFB)
CAUTION
The no-fuse breakers (NFB1-NFB6) are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and
must be so at installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
during transit, press all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric
are depressed to ON. parts mounted on the board.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
ON position OFF position
FR1H1353.EPS
When removing or installing the MTH08D board, see the following.
17.21 Removing and Installing the MTH08A/D, SNS08A, and DRV08A boards
For directly-mounted fuse
Measure the resistance value across the fuse. If the measured resistance value is 100 or
greater, it is judged that the fuse has been blown.
MTH08D board
CN30 CN25
F6 CN26 CN23 CN22
Fuse F5 F1
CN27 CN18 CN28

Tester CN17
TP5
CN16 TP7
CN15 CN19
CN14
CN13
CN12
CN11
CN10
FR1H1914.EPS CN8
CN9
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES CN6 CN20
S1
CN7
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should ON position
be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the CN5
measured value of the fuse. CN4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN3
You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board F2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CN29
is mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse OFF position
CN2 CN1
with the board installed in the machine is 1 or greater, it is highly probable that the fuse
is blown. In such an instance, demount the board and check whether the fuse is actually CN21
blown.
F3 CN24
FR1H1927.EPS
Switch Setup
Replace the boards. Setting the S1
bit Description Setting
SDRAM type selection
1, 2 OFF
OFF (both bits): 128MB SDRAM
DIMM CL use
3 OFF
OFF: Not used
Refresh cycle setting
4 OFF
OFF: 4K refresh
DIMM use
5, 6 OFF
OFF: Not used
DIMM size selection
7 ON
ON: 64MW
8 Undefined OFF
FR1H1928.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
MC - 278
Fuse Ratings 17.4 CPU90E Board
F1 125 V 2A
CAUTIONS
F2 125 V 2A
After the CPU90E board is replaced, clear the contents of the backup memory and set the
F3 125 V 2A
date and time.
F5 125 V 4A 2.3 Clearing Backup Memory, 2.4 Setting Date and Time
F6 125 V 5A When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
Checking the Fuses electric parts mounted on the board.
If the lithium cell is drained, replace the board as a whole.
Glass-tube fuse The old board replaced should be sent back to the Parts Center (factory).
If the cell is replaced improperly, it may explode. When the lithium cell is to be replaced, a cell
Remove the fuse from the circuit board and then measure the resistance across the fuse designated by Fuji or its equivalent should be used. The drained cell should be disposed of in
with a tester. If the fuse is not conducting, you should conclude that the fuse is blown. accordance with the instructions provided by Fuji.
CPU90E Board
S6 S1 S7 S2
RS-422 RS-232C
position position OFF position OFF position OFF position
Fuse
FR1H1924.EPS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
ON position ON position ON position
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
As regards the MTH08D board, the LEDs indicate blown fuses. If a certain fuse is normal,
the LED mounted near the fuse glows. If the fuse is abnormal, its LED goes off. If the LED CN2 CN1
is extinguished, it is highly probable that the associated fuse is blown. In such an instance,
remove the fuse to check for fuse blowout.
F1/LED (D1), F2/LED (D2), F3/LED (D3), F5/LED (D5), F6/LED (D6) NFB4/F4 1 2
You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board
is mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse
is blown. In such an instance, demount the board and check whether the fuse is actually CN19 CN7 910
blown. NFB3/F3 CN15
NFB2/F2
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should
CN18
be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the CN11 CN10 CN8 CN6 NFB1/F1
S5 LED LED
Action to be Taken When the Fuse Has Been Blown D6 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Replace the fuses.
STRAIGHT CROSS TX RX CL
position position
FR1H1938.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 280
Switch Setup Checking the Fuses
Switch Function Factory Setup at For no-fuse breaker (NFB)

setup installation
General-purpose setup switch.
All bits OFF
Installation The no-fuse breakers (NFB1-NFB4) are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and
S1 The software reads the setting of this switch. style dependent must be so at installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration
1) S2-1 and S2-2 (to be set up in the same manner) during transit, press all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they
Performs battery backup function ON/OFF setup. OFF ON
are depressed to ON.
2) S2-3
Turns ON or OFF the MTH08A NMI signal issuance
function. The OFF position must be selected because the OFF OFF
MTH08A does not currently have the NMI signal issuance
S2 function. ON position OFF position
FR1H1353.EPS
3) S2-4
Turns ON or OFF the boot ROM write function.
This function is not going to be used for the time being OFF OFF For directly-mounted fuse
because it is operative only when the flash EEPROM is
used as the boot ROM. Measure the resistance value across the fuse. If the measured resistance value is 100 or
S3 Issues a manual reset. greater, it is judged that the fuse has been blown.
S4 Issues a manual NMI.
STRAIGHT Installation Fuse
Effects ID-Network line connection style
S5 position style dependent
(CROSS/STRAIGHT) changeover.
Effects IDT communication line signal level RS-422 Installation
S6 position style dependent
(RS-422/RS-232C) changeover.
Turns ON or OFF the power remote control function for Tester
the IDT.
1) S7-1 and S7-2 (to be simultaneously set up) ON ON
Turns ON or OFF the IR-to-IDT power remote control
S7 function.
2) S7-3 and S7-4 (to be simultaneously set up)
Turns ON or OFF the IDT-to-IR power remote control ON ON
function.
TR1H1009.EPS FR1H1914.EPS
Fuse Ratings SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

Location Name Rated voltage Rated amperage For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should
NFB1/F1 250 V 1A be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the
NFB2/F2 250 V 1A
NFB3/F3 250 V 1A is mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse
NFB4/F4 250 V 2A with the board installed in the machine is 1 or greater, it is highly probable that the fuse
is blown. In such an instance, demount the board and check whether the fuse is actually
blown.

Replace the boards.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 282
17.5 IMG07B Board 17.6 IMG08A Board
CAUTION CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric
parts mounted on the board. parts mounted on the board.
IMG07B Board IMG08A Board

CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1
D2 D1 CN6
CN3 D3 D4 D2 D1
CN4
CN5
S1 S1
F01 F01
AB E
23
AB E
23
CD
CD
4 56
4 56
789 789
FR1H1930.EPS
Set to "4". Set to "1". FR1H1931.EPS
Switch Setup Switch Setup

Make sure that the switch (S1) on the IMG07B board is set to 4. Make sure that the switch (S1) on the IMG08A board is set to 1.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 284
17.7 IMG08B/H Board 17.8 DMC08A Board
CAUTION CAUTION
IMG08B Board DMC08A Board

CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1
D6 D5 CN3
D2
D1
D2 D1
CN3
D4 D3
S1 S1
F01 F01
AB E
23
AB E
23
CD
CD
4 56
4 56
789 789
Set to "2". FR1H1932.EPS Set to "0". FR1H1934.EPS
IMG08H Board
Switch Setup
CN2 CN1
Make sure that the switch (S1) on the DMC08A board is set to 0.
LED20 LED21 LED22 LED23

(D2) (D3) (D4) (D5)
CN3
S1
F01
AB E
23
CD
4 56
789
Set to "2". FR1H1933.EPS
Switch Setup
Make sure that the switch (S1) on the IMG08B board is set to 2.
Make sure that the switch (S1) on the IMG08H board is set to 2.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 286
17.9 HCP08A Board 17.10 CPU90F Board
CAUTION CAUTION
NOTE
HCP08A Board
With board version N or later, the software version of the machine should be updated to A09 or
CN2 CN1 later. Earlier software versions do not support a newer LSI (discontinuation supported) on the
daughter board (ETH90F board) of the CPU90F board.
CPU90F Board
7 1 9 1 CNSI0 LED T1, 2
8 14 10 2
No short pin Short pin
(OPEN) LED7 LED5 LED3 LED1 3
JP1 JP2 2
LED6 LED4 LED2 LED0
1
3 2 1
LED SW1
CN2 CN1
LED3 LED2 LED1

789
4 56
AB E
CD
23
F01 LED6 COL NFB1/F1
LED5 DUP
Set to "5". FR1H1935.EPS
LED4 LINK
Switch Setup ETH90F/H board
T4
LED3 100M
Make sure that the switch (SW1) on the HCP08A board is set to 5.
LED2 RX NFB2/F2
CNPC1
LED1 TX
DIS1 DIS2 SW1

OFF position OFF position
789
4 56
AB E
CD
23
F01
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
ON position ON position Set to "6".
FR1H1936.EPS
Switch Setup
Make sure that the CPU90F board is set as follows.
CNSIO: No short pin (open)
T1, T2: Nos. 2 and 3 are shorted.
DIS1: Nos. 1, 3, and 4 are OFF; only No. 2 is ON.
DIS2: All OFF
SW1: 6
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 288
Fuse Ratings 17.11 LAN90B/D Board
NFB1/F1 250 V 1A
CAUTION
NFB2/F2 250 V 3A
Checking the Fuses proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric
NOTE
The no-fuse breakers (NFB1-NFB2) are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and
must be so at installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration The LAN90D board is a substitute for the CPU90F board. When replacing the CPU90F board
during transit, press all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they with the LAN90D board, update the main unit software to version A18 or later. If the software is
are depressed to ON. not updated to version A18 or later, the LAN90D board does not deliver the same performance
as the CPU90F board.

FR1H1353.EPS LAN90B/D Board
S3
For directly-mounted fuse CN2 CN1
F01
AB E
23
CD
4 56
greater, it is judged that the fuse has been blown. 78 9
Fuse
Set to 6.
S1 Switch for
CN7 CN6 resetting the
Tester LAN90B board
S2
D10 100
OFF position
D13 TX
D12 RX
1 2 3 4 5 6
FR1H1914.EPS
D11 FDP02 ON position FR1H1937.EPS
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES Switch Setup

For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should Make sure that the LAN90B board has been set as shown below.
be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the
measured value of the fuse. Setting the S2
is mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse bit Description Setting
1-3, 5, 6 To be determined Always OFF
is blown. In such an instance, demount the board and check whether the fuse is actually
blown. ON: Function test (FT)
4 Always OFF
OFF: OS boot (NORMAL)
FR1B1500.EPS
Action to be Taken When the Fuse Has Been Blown Setting the S3
Replace the boards. Set tp 6.
05.30.2002 FM3405 03.20.2004 FM4275
MC - 290
17.12 DRV08A Board For directly-mounted fuse

CAUTION greater, it is judged that the fuse has been blown.
Fuse
Tester
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When removing or installing the DRV08A board, see the following.
DRV08A Board
FR1H1914.EPS
CN15
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
TP1 TP7 For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should
CN5 be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the
CN13 measured value of the fuse.
TP5 CN6 You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board
CN12 is mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse
CN1
NFB12/F1 is blown. In such an instance, demount the board and check whether the fuse is actually
TP6
TP3 CN14 CN16
CN11 blown.
TP4
CN10 CN20
TP2 CN4
CN8 CN9
CN26 Action to be Taken When the Fuse Has Been Blown
Replace the boards.
Fuse Ratings
NFB12/F1 250 V 1A
Checking the Fuses

The no-fuse breakers (NFB12) are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and must
be so at installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration during
transit, press all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they are
depressed to ON.

FR1H1353.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 292
17.13 SNS08A Board Checking the Fuses

CAUTION
The no-fuse breakers (NFB3) are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and must
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure be so at installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration during
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric transit, press all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they are
parts mounted on the board. depressed to ON.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When removing or installing the SNS08A board, see the following. FR1H1353.EPS
For directly-mounted fuse
SNS08A board Measure the resistance value across the fuse. If the measured resistance value is 100 or
greater, it is judged that the fuse has been blown.
NFB2/F2
TP1 TP2 CN2 CN3
Fuse
CN4
NFB1/F1
CN20 CN19
CN12
NFB3/F3
CN10 Tester
CN21
CN15
CN1
CN11
CN17
CN16
CN23
CN22
CN13 CN7 CN5 CN18
CN24 FR1H1914.EPS
CN8 CN9 CN6 CN14 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

FR1H1351.EPS
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should
Fuse Ratings be measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the
NFB1/F1 250 V 5A is mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse
NFB2/F2 250 V 2A with the board installed in the machine is 1 or greater, it is highly probable that the fuse
NFB3/F3 250 V 1A is blown. In such an instance, demount the board and check whether the fuse is actually
blown.

Replace the boards.
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
MC - 294
17.14 LED08A Board 17.15 LED08B Board
CAUTION CAUTION
LED08A board LED08B board

CN3 CN2 READY : READY lamp (green) D1: Cassette ejection lamp (green)
CALL : CALL lamp (yellow) D2: Cassette insertion lamp (green)
ERROR : ERROR lamp (orange)
POWER : POWER lamp (green) D2 D1
CN1
READY
CN1
CALL FR1H1918.EPS
ERROR 17.16 VOL08A Board
POWER
CAUTION
FR1H7001.EPS When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
VOL08A board
CN2 CN1
Brightness Buzzer
adjustment trimmer FR1H1919.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 296
17.17 BCR08A Board 17.21 Removing and Installing the MTH08A/D, SNS08A, and
DRV08A boards
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure Removing and Installing the MTH08A/D
parts mounted on the board. Removal procedure
(1) Remove the following cover:
BCR08A board Upper left-hand side cover
Upper rear side cover
3. Removing and Installing the Covers
(2) Remove the PC board brace.
CN1 CN2
MTH08A/D board
O NT
FR
FR1H7002.EPS
Plastic washer
17.18 FFM Board [Remove]
B3x6, x2
PC board brace
17.19 SCN08A Board

FR1H3029.EPS
17.20 PMT08A Board

(3) Disconnect the connectors.
10.3 Checking and Replacing PMT08A Board REFERENCE
The connectors need to be disconnected from the following PC boards:
CPU90E: CN6 to CN8, CN11, CN18, and CN19
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(4) Remove all the boards except the MTH08A/D board. (5) Remove a memory board.
Below is illustrated an example where the CPU90E board is removed. Other boards NOTE
should also be removed in a similar manner.
To remove a memory board, perform the steps indicated below. If you do not follow
these steps, the connector claws become damaged.
MMC90A board
(1) Push the connectors left-hand claw open.
MTH08A/D board (2) Open the memory board to an angle of about 30 to 40.
(3) Pull out the memory board.
Top view
(1) Connector (2) (3)

Left-hand
claw
30 40
MMC90A board
FR1H7018.EPS
DIM08A board
(1) Simultaneously open the claws on both ends of the connector by pressing them
#1 CPU90E board
[Loosen] T4x8
outward.
(2) Remove the DIM08A board by pulling it horizontally.
#2
[Remove] T4x8 Top view
FR1H7017.EPS
(1) Claws on both ends (2)

Connector
DIM08A board
FR1H7019.EPS
MTH08A/D board
T
ON
FR
MMC90A/
DIM08A board
FR1H7026.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(6) Remove the hard disk drive. (9) Remove the MTH08A/D board.
13.2 Replacing the HDD NOTE
(7) Remove the fan (FANV1) assembly. When removing the MTH08C/D board, hold the board by hand to detach it.
(8) Disconnect the connectors and terminals.
(8)
T
#1 [Disconnect] Connectors ON
N T MTH08A/D board
FR
(7) F RO CN28
#1 [Disconnect]
Connectors
CN19
A
[Remove]
CN20 B3x6, x10
CN29
(7)
#2 CN24
[Disconnect]
BR4x8, x2
DETAIL A
MTH08A/D board
Fan (FANV1) assembly (8)
#2 [Disconnect] Connector and Terminals FR1H7021.EPS
CN27 TB1
Installation procedure
Red +5V (TB1-1)
Red +5V (TB1-2)
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
Black GND (TB1-3)
Black GND (TB1-4) x2 NOTE
Rear When installing a memory board, observe the following precautions:
FG
FR1H7020.EPS
Do not touch the connector section of the memory board. Handle the memory board
only by its edges.
Open the CN17/CN18 claws, align the cuts in the memory board with the protrusions
in the CN17/CN18 socket, hold both ends of the memory board, and insert the
memory board horizontally into the socket.
FRONT
MTH08A/D board
MMC90A board CN18

MMC90A/DIM08A board CN17
FR1H7027.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Removing and Installing the SNS08A, DRV08A boards
DETAIL A [Disconnect] Connectors
Removal procedure
DRV08A board
(1) Remove the following cover:
Upper left-hand side cover CN5
Upper rear side cover CN13
CN6
3. Removing and Installing the Covers CN12
(2) Disconnect the connectors. CN1
CN16
CN14
T
ON CN4
FR
DRV08A board
CN8
A CN2 CN3
B DETAIL B [Disconnect] Connectors

F
R
SNS08A board O
N
T
CN4
CN2 CN3
FR1H7022.EPS CN12
CN10
CN11
CN15 SNS08A board
CN16
CN22 CN1
CN23
CN13 CN7 CN5
CN8 CN9 CN6 CN14
FR1H7023.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(3) Remove the PC board assembly.
NOTE (4) #2
The board assembly should be removed and installed along the rails. Bracket [Remove] BR4x8, x2
[Remove] BR4x8, x2 (5) #1

[Remove]
BR3x6, x7
DRV08A board
(4) #1
[Remove]
B3x10, x2
SNS08C board
Rails
Board assembly
(6) #1
[Remove]
B3x6, x7
(5) #2
[Remove]
DRV08A board
FR1H7024.EPS

(5) Remove the DRV08A board.
(6) Remove the SNS08C board. DRV08A board
SNS08A board
(6) #2
[Remove]
SNS08A board
FR1H7025.EPS
Installation procedure
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MC - 298 MC - 299
18. Cleaning IP
The screen switches to U-Utility.
After cleaning the IP, use the IP cleaned to perform IP conveyance checks. (12) Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence.
Cleaning Procedures M-Utility is activated.

(13) Select 3. TEST MODE and 1. ROUTINE MODE in sequence.
(1) Take out the IP from the cassette.
(2) Wipe the fluorescent surface of the IP with gauze.
After moving the gauze in a straight fashion, move the gauze in small circles, as
illustrated below, to wipe the IP clean.
If soils persist after cleaning with dry gauze, proceed to step (3). If soils are cleaned
off, proceed to step (4).
IP
FR1H1314.EPS
(3) Wipe the IP with ethanol-moistened gauze.

After wiping the IP with ethanol-moistened gauze, immediately wipe it with dry gauze
to remove traces of alcohol left on the fluorescent surface of the IP, and wait until it is
completely dry.
(4) Put the IP into the cassette with its fluorescent surface down.
IP Conveyance Check
(3) Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel.
(4) Select 3. TEST MODE, 2. AUTO MODE, and 2. PRIMARY ERASURE in
sequence.
A message prompting for the number of conveyances appears on screen.
(5) Enter the number of IPs cleaned as a value.
(7) Touch the RETURN button.
(8) Insert the cassette that contains the cleaned IPs into each of the shelves.
IP conveyance starts.
(9) Make sure that there is no offensive noise or odor from the machine during IP
conveyance.
(10) After the IP conveyance, take out the cassette and verify that the IPs are free of
scratch or other damage.
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 300 MC - 301
19. Tools Thin-blade screwdriver Phillips stubby screwdriver

Type: NO.110-4 Type: NO.135-4
19.1 Standard Tools
Manufacturer: PB Manufacturer: PB
NOTE Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been inspected and Remarks: Remarks:
calibrated.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed. FR1H1713.EPS FR1H1714.EPS
Thin-blade stubby screwdriver High-frequency screwdriver

Adjustable wrench 150mm Nippers 150mm Type: NO.195-2 Type: D-29
Type: W-120 Type: N-25 Manufacturer: PB Manufacturer: HOZAN
Manufacturer: HOZAN Manufacturer: HOZAN Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks: Remarks:
FR1H1705.EPS
FR1H1706.EPS Jeweler's screwdriver set Combination box-open-end wrench (5.5mm)
Long-nose pliers 150mm Pliers 150mm Type: NO.146 Type: M41-5.5
Type: P-22 Type: JP-200 Manufacturer: ENGINEER Manufacturer: KTC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks: Remarks:
FR1H1707.EPS
FR1H1708.EPS
Combination box-open-end wrench (7mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (8mm)
Type: M41-7 Type: M41-8
Water pump pliers Tweezers 125mm
Type: P-245 Manufacturer: KTC Manufacturer: KTC
Type: P-87

Remarks: Remarks:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
FR1H1709.EPS FR1H1710.EPS Combination box-open-end wrench (10mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (13mm)
Type: M41-10 Type: M41-13
Phillips screwdriver No. 1 Phillips screwdriver No. 2
Type: NO.6300-2 Manufacturer: KTC Manufacturer: KTC
Type: NO.6300-1
Manufacturer: VESSEL Manufacturer: VESSEL Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1

Remarks: Remarks:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 302 MC - 303
Allen wrench set Midget ratchet set Steel tape measure (5.5 m) Soldering iron (30W)
Type: BLX-9 Type: 7331 Type: WS5005 Type: Dash15
Manufacturer: Boudhus Manufacturer: CHAPMAN Manufacturer: NEOLOCK Manufacturer: HAKKO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1

Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
FR1H1723.EPS FR1H1724.EPS FR1H1733.EPS FR1H1734.EPS
Digital tester Crimp pliers Solder Desoldering tool with a vacuum attachment
Type: FLUKE77 Type: P-73 Type: NO.66 Type: US140
Manufacturer: FLUKE Manufacturer: HOZAN Manufacturer: HAKKO Manufacturer: EDSYN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Inspection and
calibration required
FR1H1725.EPS FR1H1726.EPS FR1H1735.EPS

FR1H1736.EPS
Wire stripper Scissors Adapter plug Penlight

Type: P-95 Type: Type: 999-1 Type: BF-318
Manufacturer: HOZAN Manufacturer: Any Manufacturer:

commercially available one Manufacturer: HAKKO MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Cutter Calipers Loupe Blower

Type: Type: N-15 Type: 10X Type: JUMBO
Manufacturer: Any
commercially available one Manufacturer: Mitutoyo Manufacturer: PEAK Manufacturer: HURRICANE
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1

Remarks: Remarks: Inspection required Remarks: Remarks:
A block gauge for use in
inspection requires calibration.
Steel rule (150mm) Steel rule (300mm) Cloth

Type: Type C Type: Type C Type:
Manufacturer: YAMAYO Manufacturer: YAMAYO Manufacturer:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1

Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Inspection required Inspection required
FR1H1731.EPS FR1H1732.EPS FR1H1741.EPS
05.30.2002 FM3405 05.30.2002 FM3405
MC - 304 MC - 305
19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments 19.3 Special Consumables

NOTE Electrical tape Cable tie
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been inspected and Type: 33+ Type: PLT1M
calibrated. Manufacturer: 3M Manufacturer: KITAGAWA
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been KOGYO
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed. Qty.: 1 Qty.: 50
Remarks: Remarks:
Ethanol Vacuum cleaner FR1H1745.EPS

FR1H1746.EPS
Type: Type:
Manufacturer:
Cable tie Cable tie
Manufacturer: Any commercially available one
Type: PLT1.5S Type: PLT2M
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Manufacturer: KITAGAWA
Manufacturer: KITAGAWA
Remarks: KOGYO KOGYO
Remarks:
Qty.: 50 Qty.: 50
Remarks: Remarks:
Dust-free paper Push-pull gauge

Type: Kimwipe Type:
Screw locking bond
Manufacturer: CRECIA Manufacturer:
Type: #1401B
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Remarks: Remarks: For 1kg.
Inspection and calibration Qty.:
required
Remarks:
Dosimeter
FR1H1749.EPS
Type:
Manufacturer:
Qty.: 1
Remarks:
Calibration required
FR1H1875.EPS
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
MC - 306 MC - 307
19.4 Semi-Standard Tools 19.5 Tools

Semi-standard tools are tools that are not needed normally, but improve ease of servicing Antistatic member positioning jig
when available.
PART NO.: Y12N0451
Manufacturer: Fuji Photo Film
Box driver (7 mm) Box driver (8 mm) Qty.: 1
Type: D-50 (2757) Type: D-50 (2758) Remarks:

Jig for positioning the antistatic
Manufacturer: HOZAN Manufacturer: HOZAN member for the shutter section
FR1H1876.EPS
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
IC clip IC clip
Type: TC-16 Type: TC-24
Manufacturer: 3M Manufacturer: 3M
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
05.30.2002 FM3405 08.31.2005 FM4710
Maintenance Volume Maintenance Utility (MU) Control Sheet MU - 1
Control Sheet
(FM2460)
11/20/99 05 Corrections (FM2638) MU-12, 14171
04/20/2001 06 Software update (FM3006) MU-19, 3341, 41.141.4,
4247, 56, 57, 61, 66, 67, 70, 73,
93, 96, 126
CR-IR341/CR-IR341P 08/30/2001 07 Support for plus

(support for software version A14)
MU-7, 20, 33, 35, 38, 40, 41,
41.1, 41.2, 41.441.8, 42, 44, 45,
(FM3115) 53, 54, 57, 59, 60, 62, 63, 66, 70,
Service Manual 05/30/2002 08
71, 75, 76, 119, 121, 122, 154
Addition of the information about software MU-155
installation. (FM3405)
03/20/2004 10 Configuration addition due to a software MU-7, 17, 18, 27, 30, 33, 34, 39,
update, DICOM setting addition, scanner 41.1-41.12, 42-45, 45.1-45.4,
invalid pixel/line setting change procedure 58, 59, 63-65, 65.1-65.4, 66-71,
addition, and other information additions, 74, 81.1-81.4, 110, 116, 162-168,
and typographical error corrections 170
Maintenance Utility (MU) 08/31/2005 11

(FM4275)
Revision (FM4710) MU-34, 41.1, 41.2, 41.8-41.10
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MU - 1

08.31.2005 FM4710
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU - 3
MU - 2
BLANK PAGE
1. Functional Organization of Service Utility
The Service Utility consists of three functions: Maintenance Utility, Configuration Setting, and
Image Processing Parameter Adjustment.
Maintenance Utility
It provides functionality necessary for maintenance of the FCR5000 (machine), such as
display of error log, and mechanical and electrical operations.
Menus are displayed through special manipulation (not open to the user) of the machines
operation panel to perform various functions.
The menu hierarchy of the Maintenance Utility varies depending on whether the machine is
in normal operation or otherwise (i.e., in the initialization sequence or in serous error).
Configuration Setting
It provides various functions required to set up and change configuration settings of the
machine.
Because reading and writing of files that can be edited on a personal computer (PC) is
supported, configuration setting may be performed on a PC running Windows 95. Setup can
be done efficiently by taking advantage of PCs ease of use, when, for example, initial
configuration setting is done or multiple items are changed collectively.
Configuration setting may also be implemented (settings may be changed) through manipu-
lation on the machines operation panel.
Image Processing Parameter Adjustment

It provides various functions required to set up and change image processing parameters.
A PC running Windows 95 may be connected on-line to the machine to rewrite various
image processing parameters.
Rewriting of image processing parameters that require repeated setting changes can be
implemented efficiently by registering several setting patterns in the PC, for example.
CR-IR341 Online PC
Maintenance Utility Image Processing Parameter
Adjustment
3.5-inch FD
1.44MB DOS formatted
Online PC
Configuration Setting
FR1H1136.EPS
009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MU - 2 009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MU - 3

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU - 4 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU - 5
2. Maintenance Utility Mode Transition Diagrams 2.2 Mode Transitions upon Abnormality Occurrence
Inactive
The following diagrams show the mode transitions to the machines maintenance utility
(abbreviated M-Utility).
2.1 Mode Transitions in Normal State Active
Transition caused by human

Inactive intervention
User operation OS boot mode
Breaker OFF Breaker ON User IDT operation
Service engineer
Active operation
Version display mode
(5 sec)
Transition caused by human Power switch ON
intervention Automatic transition
User operation (No human (NOTE 2)
OS boot mode intervention required) Power switch OFF
User IDT operation Initialization process Abnormality display
mode mode
Service engineer
operation Line failure
Version display mode Special touch
(NOTE 1)
(5 sec) Special
IDT utility mode Routine process mode Utility mode touch
Automatic transition
(No human
intervention required) QUIT
Initialization process Power switch OFF Power switch OFF
mode
End process mode Maintenance utility mode
UTL icon Power switch OFF
IDT utility mode Routine process mode Utility mode

NOTE 1: When a line failure occurs in the IDT utility mode, the system simply switches to the routine
Return key process mode. FR1H1400.EPS
Power switch OFF Special touch NOTE 2: When "system shutdown" is selected upon the occurrence of an IP search abnormality
QUIT (NOTE)
End process mode Maintenance utility mode
Power switch OFF

(NOTE) Precaution about selection of "QUIT"
The "QUIT" command works when the mode is switched from the utility mode to the maintenance
utility mode. If the mode is switched from the version display mode, the system does not transition
to the utility mode.
FR1H1399.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
When the routine screen is displayed

3. How to Activate and Exit M-Utility
(1) Press the U-Utility button.
3.1 Activating M-Utility The display switches to the U-Utility screen.
(2) Touch the upper left-hand corner of the touch panel, and then, within two seconds,
M-Utility can be started in one of the following different manners. touch the upper right-hand corner.
The M-Utility screen opens.
When the software version number is displayed during initialization process
Routine screen
Touch the upper left-hand corner of the operation panel, and then, within two seconds, touch (screen made to CSL specification) U-Utility screen
the upper right-hand corner.
M-Utility starts. Deleting images
waiting for
Processed image
When the screen reads STEP95, the operation panel is inoperative and does not Output
1 Touch panel
respond at all even if you touch it. In such an instance, perform a reset and wait until 2
Click sound
parallax correction
destination
selection
the software version number appears on the screen. 3

4 display FD operation
output
Menu selecting icon
8" x 10" film
reduced output
setup
0
Utility Return
CR-IR341 U-Utility button
M-Utility screen
Copyright (c) 1998 Fuji Photo Film Co.,Ltd
0. QUIT A B C
: Area to be touched 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
Software ID : 114Y5431003 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING D E F
3. TEST MODE
Software Version : A07 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 7 8 9
5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 4 5 6
7. FILE UTILITY
9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
does not appear. DEL BS ENT

Software version number output" button will not appear. Caps
: Location to be touched The IDT type includes CR-IR348CL connection.
FR1H1392.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 03.20.2004 FM4275
When an error screen is displayed 3.2 Exiting M-Utility

Touch the upper left-hand corner of the operation panel, and then, within two seconds, touch
the upper right-hand corner. To quit M-Utility, select 0. QUIT while the main menu is displayed. If the configuration file
has been edited using M-Utility, make your editing effective by resetting the machine after
you exit M-Utility.
Call maintenance personnel. NOTE
03D2 Switchback conveyance error. If M-Utility is entered during the initialization sequence, 0. QUIT does not appear. Thus,
after quitting M-Utility, the machine should be reset.
(1) While the M-Utility main menu is displayed, select 0. QUIT.

The display switches to the U-Utility screen.
(2) Press the reset button.
The reset button should basically be pressed. You may touch the Return button only
in cases where the automatic transport mode setup would be invalidated by a reset.
Stop alarm System down
: Area to be touched FR1B1137.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MU - 10
4. Common Operating Procedures for M-Utility 4.2 Quitting a Menu

The same selection and closing procedures apply to all the M-Utility menus. Selecting QUIT
When you select QUIT on a menu, one of the following results follows.
4.1 Selecting a Menu When a menu item is displayed, the system returns to the upper-level menu.
When the main menu is displayed, the system exits M-Utility and switches to the U-Utility.
There are two methods to select a menu in M-Utility.
The system stops the current menu execution (operation).
While the > cursor is displayed, enter a menu number. The system returns to the upper-level menu while continuing with the current menu execu-
The system displays the lower-level menu or immediately executes the designated menu tion (operation).
and shows the result.
Selecting STOP
Automatic menu selection upon a menu selection When you select STOP, the actuator or motor operation (DRIVE) ends.
When you select a menu, the system automatically selects the associated menu.
Example: 3. STOP is selected
Example) When you select 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY, 3. SENSOR, and 2. 0. QUIT
MONITOR in sequence 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
3. TEST MODE

The sensor list menu appears. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY
0. QUIT 9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C 4 5 6
>6
3. TEST MODE
D E F 0.QUIT
5. SCANNER UTILITY 1 2 3
1.MOTOR
7. FILE UTILITY 2.ACTUATOR
8. BACKUP MEMORY 7 8 9 3.SENSOR
0 . SP
9. HV OFF 4.UNIT
10. MENU SETTING MU > 2
>6 4 5 6
DEL BS ENT
0.QUIT
0.QUIT 1.NUMBER
1 2 3
1.MOTOR 2.DRIVE Caps
2.ACTUATOR 3.STOP
3.SENSOR MU:AUT > 3
0 . SP
4.UNIT
MU > 3
DEL BS ENT
0.QUIT
1.NUMBER
2.MONITOR
Caps
3.MONITOR ALL
MU:AUT > 3
MU:SEN > 2
11:FFM
1 - 11 : 11 D E F
MU:SEN > 2 0.QUIT

1.NUMBER 7 8 9
1:SA1 2:SA2 3:SA3 4:SA4 5:SA5
6:SA6 7:SA7 8:SA8 9:SA9 10:SA10 A B C 2.DRIVE
11:SA11 12:SA12 13:SA13 14:SA14 15:SA15 3.STOP
MU:AUT > 4 5 6
16:SA16 17:SA17 18:SB1 19:SB2 20:SB3
21:SB4 22:SB5 23:SC1 24:SC2 25:SD1 D E F
26:SD2 27:SD3 28:SE1 29:SF1 30:SF2
1 2 3
31:SF3 32:SF4 33:SZ2 34:SZ3
INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR 7 8 9
1 - 34 : 4
SA4 ----> Close 0 . SP
4 5 6
SA4 ----> Open
SA4 ----> Close
0 DEL BS ENT
1 2 3
0.QUIT
1.NUMBER Caps
0 . SP
2.MONITOR
3.MONITOR ALL
MU:SEN > DEL BS ENT FR1H1759.EPS
Caps
FR1H1235.EPS

05.31.99 FM2460 05.31.99 FM2460
MU - 12
4.3 Entering a Numerical Value BLANK PAGE
When a menu, such as an IP conveyance menu, is executed, it is necessary to enter param-

eters, such as the number of IP conveyances. In M-Utility, touch the virtual keyboard dis-
played on the right side of the operation panel to enter a value.
Displaying Desired Keyboard for Entry

Three types of virtual keyboards are available; by touching the or key, one of the three
virtual keyboards can be selected. Also, by touching the [Caps] key, the caps mode can be
toggled to the lower-cap display corresponding to the three types of virtual keyboards.
0. QUIT
3. TEST MODE
D E F
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY
7 8 9
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING 4 5 6
>3
0.QUIT 1 2 3
1.ROUTINE
2.AUTO MODE
TM > 2 0 . SP
0.QUIT
1.READING & ERASURE DEL BS ENT
2.PRIMARY ERASURE
3.SECONDARY ERASURE
TM:AM > 2 Caps
0 - 99999 : 1
FR1H1500.EPS
Correcting a value entry

You can correct a value entry with the [DEL] or [BS] key.
[DEL] key: Each time you touch this key, it erases the character located above the
cursor.
[BS] key: Each time you touch this key, it erases the character preceding (positioned
to the left of) the cursor position.
Example) Changing the numerical entry from 1244 to 1134
1) Touch the operation panel to position the cursor under 4.
2) Touch the [BS] key twice to delete 24.
3) Touch 1 and then 3.

11.20.99 FM2638 05.31.99 FM2460
5. Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING : Views or changes the setup in the configuration file. [7.]
The menu hierarchy of M-Utility varies depending on whether the machine is in normal 0.QUIT
operation or otherwise (i.e., in the initialization sequence or in serious error).
1.SYSTEM : Defines the overall setup information for the machine. [7.2]
5.1 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility during Normal Operation 2.PRINT : Defines the setup information related to film output formats. [7.3]
During normal operation (when the mode switches from U-Utility to M-Utility), the menus 3.REMOTE SWITCH : Remote switch ON/OFF setting for the intelligent hub. [7.5]
shown below may be used.
4.EQUIPMENT : Defines the setup information related to connected equipment. [7.6]
Menu Hierarchy during Normal Operation
5.LOCAL INTERFACE : Defines the setup information for communication requirements
MAINTENANCE UTILITY of serial line connection.
0.QUIT Not setting is needed because its default setting should be used. [7.7]
0.QUIT 1.IDT
2.LIF
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY: Displays, deletes, or saves the error log. [6.] 3.DIF
4.CSL
0.QUIT
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE : Defines the setup information for network connection
and communication. [7.8]
1.LIST : Displays the error log on screen. [6.1]
7.HOSTS ADDRESS : Sets an address of network connection. [7.9]
0.QUIT
8.DISTRIBUTION : Sets a destination of network connection. [7.10]
1.ALL : Displays all the error messages generated, in reverse chronological order.
9.ROUTING : Sets routing of network connection. [7.11]
0.QUIT
1.ERROR : Displays serious errors only.
10.NETMASKS : Sets a subnet mask of network connection. [7.12]
2.WARNING : Displays warning errors only.
3.BOTH : Displays all errors.
11.DICOM : Base on DICOM.
2.SUMMARY : Groups the generated errors according to error codes and displays the number
of occurrences (in four digits) for those errors. 3.TEST MODE : Used to check IP conveyance operation and so forth.
0.QUIT
Settings for auto conveyance and test processing are made. [8.]
1.ERROR : Displays serious errors only.
2.WARNING : Displays warning errors only. 0.QUIT
3.BOTH : Displays all errors.
1.ROUTINE : Cancels the settings made in "2. AUTO MODE" and reverts back [8.1]
2.CLEAR: Clears the entire error logs. [6.2] to the state suited for routine processing.
2.AUTO MODE [8.2]
0.QUIT
0.QUIT
1.ERROR LOG
1.READING & ERASURE : Performs an automatic conveyance sequence a designated number of
3.SAVE TO FD : Saves error log data and trace data to a floppy disk. [6.3] times to execute the reading and erasure processes.
2.PRIMARY ERASURE : Performs an automatic conveyance sequence a designated number of
0.QUIT times to execute the reading (no image output) and erasure processes.
1.ERROR LOG : Saves the error log to a floppy disk. 3.SECONDARY ERASURE : Performs an automatic conveyance sequence a designated number
of times to execute the erasure process only.
2.TRACE DATA : Copies the trace data upon occurrence of error to a floppy disk. NOTE: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual.
FR1H1384.EPS
Copies logged error messages having an extension between 001
and 005 to a floppy disk.
3.IOT DATA : Saves the latest IO trace data in memory to a floppy disk.
4.SAVE TO HD : Saves error log data to the hard disk. [6.4]
0.QUIT
1.ERROR LOG : Copies ERROR messages to the error0.log file and WARNING
messages to the ERRORX.LOG file.
NOTE: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual. FR1H1383.EPS

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
4.ELECTRICAL UTILITY : Conducts electrical-related diagnostic checks on the erasure lamp, 5.SCANNER UTILITY : Conducts main-scan system diagnostic checks and setups.
image memory, image processing board, etc. [9.] Used during checking or after replacement of main-scan system parts. [10.]
0.QUIT 0.QUIT
1.ERASURE LAMP TEST : Conducts an erasure lamp illumination test. [9.1] 1.INITIALIZE : Loads main-scan system parameters and performs initial
setting for the main-scan system. [10.1]
2.IMAGE MEMORY TEST : Conducts an image memory capacity diagnostic check
and marching test. [9.2] 2.POLYGON : Rotates and stops the polygonal mirror individually. [10.2]
3.DSP TEST : Performs self-diagnostic checks of all the image processing boards mounted
0.QUIT
in the machine. [9.3]
1.ON
4.LAN : Conducts network-related diagnostic checks. [9.4]
2.OFF
0.QUIT 3.LASER : Turns ON/OFF the laser individually. [10.3]
1.ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS : Displays the Ethernet MAC addresses of the CPU90E 0.QUIT
1.ON
and CPU90F.
2.OFF
2.PING : Executes "ping" by designating the LANC used (CPU90E or CPU90F) and the host
name of its connection designation (or IP address). 4.HV : Checks whether the high-voltage switch (software switch) is turned ON/OFF normally. [10.4]
3.CPU90F DMA : This menu should not be used. 0.QUIT
1.ON
5.HDD: Conducts hard disk drive diagnostic checks. [9.5]
2.OFF
0.QUIT 5.HV DATA : Sets the high voltage applied to the photomultiplier. Its setting range is
from 250 to 1000 V.
1.WRITE-READ VERIFY : Writes 1 Kbytes of monotonously increasing data onto the hard When it is set to 0, its setting is turned OFF. [10.5]
disk, and reads it back to verify that the written data and read
data agree with each other. 6.FORMAT : Temporarily sets the IP read start position (PIXEL) and read width (FREQ).
Writing the settings to the hard disk is done in "8. DATA MANAGEMENT."
6.FDD: Conducts floppy disk drive diagnostic checks. [9.6] "9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width" in Checks,
Replacement and Adjustment Volume [10.6]
0.QUIT
0.QUIT
1.WRITE-READ VERIFY : Writes 1 Kbytes of monotonously increasing data onto a floppy
disk, and reads it back to verify that the written data and read 1.DEFAULT : Sets the read start position and read width to their initial values.
data agree with each other.
0.QUIT
1.PIXEL AND FREQ
2.PIXEL ONLY
3.FREQ ONLY
2.FREQ ADJUST : Adjusts the read width.
3.PIXEL ADJUST : Adjust the read start position.
4.PIXEL POSITION CORRECTION: Changes the invalid pixel setting.
5.LINE POSITION CORRECTION: Changes the invalid line setting.
7.SHADING/SENSITIVITY : Temporarily records, calculates, and sets the shading or sensitivity

data in order to determine it.
Writing the settings to the hard disk is done in "8. DATA MANAGEMENT."
"9.2 Shading/Sensitivity Correction" in Checks, Replacement
and Adjustment Volume [10.7]
0.QUIT
1.REC MODE : Makes the shading correction data recordable.

08.30.2001 FM3115 03.20.2004 FM4275
2.CALCULATION : Calculates the shading, polygon or sensitivity correction data.

6.MECHANICAL UTILITY : Monitors individual operation of the motor, sensor status, etc.
0.QUIT Used for checking the motors and sensors. [11.]
1.SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY
0.QUIT
2.SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY FOR BAD CONDITION
3.SHADING AND POLYGON 1.MOTOR : Sets the pulse motor drive parameters and conducts pulse motor drive/stop tests. [11.2]
4.SHADING AND POLYGON FOR BAD CONDITION
5.POLYGON ONLY 0.QUIT
6.SENSITIVITY ONLY 1.NUMBER
3.SHADING / POLYGON CORRECTION : It is set to ON when the corrected data is to be 2.PARAMETER
enabled in routine mode. 3.DRIVE
0.QUIT
4.STOP
1.ON
2.OFF 2.ACTUATOR : Conducts solenoid, valve, pump, erasure lamp, and FFM drive/stop tests. [11.3]
4.SENSITIVITY DATA : Performs set sensitivity correction (e.g., leveling the sensitivities of
0.QUIT
multiple readers).
Writing the correction value to the hard disk is done in "8. DATA 1.NUMBER
MANAGEMENT." 2.DRIVE
5.HV DATA : Should not be used in the market. 3.STOP
3.SENSOR : Monitors the sensor status. Two monitoring methods are available:
6.PMT DATA : Should not be used in the market. one is for monitoring the sensors on an individual basis, and the other is
for monitoring all sensors at a time. [11.4]
8.DATA MANAGEMENT : Displays and writes to the hard disk the setup values for "6. FORMAT" 0.QUIT
and "7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY." [10.8] 1.NUMBER
0.QUIT 2.MONITOR
3.MONITOR ALL
1.SAVE SHADING AND POLYGON DATA : Writes the shading or polygon data to the hard disk.
4.UNIT
2.SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA : Writes the sensitivity correction data to the hard disk. 0.QUIT
1.IP FEED/LOAD UNIT : Performs operation tests on the IP removal mechanism.
3.SAVE FORMAT DATA : Writes the format data to the hard disk. Displays a message if any abnormality is encountered. [11.5]
0.QUIT
4.DISPLAY DATA : Displays set data for the format or sensitivity. NOTE 2
1.ARM HOME POSITION
2.FEED/LOAD
5.LOAD FROM FD : Reads the data in the floppy disk into the primary memory. The data read
is lost when the machine is reset. 2.UP-DOWN UNIT : Performs operation tests on the elevation unit. Displays a
0.QUIT
1.SHADING/POLYGON message if any abnormality is encountered. [11.6]
2.SENSITIVITY 0.QUIT
1.HOME POSITION
6.SAVE TO FD : Writes to a floppy disk the shading, polygon, or sensitivity data in the hard disk. 2.SETTING UNIT POSITION
9.DIAGNOSTIC : Executes all the diagnostic items. [10.9] 3.SIDE-POSITIONING GRIP : Performs operation tests on the side-positioning
conveyance grip mechanism. Displays a message
10.VIRTUAL IMAGE : Causes the scanner hardware to generate a virtual image signal, if any abnormality is encountered. [11.7]
0.QUIT
so that the resulting image is read to isolate the cause of trouble. [10.10]
1.HOME POSITION
0.QUIT 2.GRIP
1.LIGHT : Generates virtual light. 3.RELEASE
2.LOG AMP : Turns OFF the HV to generate an image signal of fixed output.
4.SIDE-POSITIONING UNIT : Performs operation tests on the side-positioning
3.SCN08 INPUT : Causes the SCN08 board to generate an image signal. mechanism. Displays a message if any abnormality is
4.ROUTINE : Cancel the virtual image signal generation mode to revert back to the initial state. encountered. [11.8]
0.QUIT
It should always be performed after the checks are completed in the virtual image
1.HOME POSITION
signal generation mode.
2.ACTUATION
NOTE 1: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual.
NOTE 2: The abbreviated alphabets displayed have the following meanings. 5.AFTER-READING GRIP : Performs operation tests on the after-reading
conveyance grip. Displays a message if any abnormality
MP: Number of invalid pixels HVDATA: Reading HV value [11.9]
is encountered.
TMP: Total number of invalid pixels PMTK: PMT sensitivity coefficient 0.QUIT
TML: Total number of invalid lines SAIP: IP sensitivity during sensitivity adjustment 1.HOME POSITION
RCNT: Reference frequency division value Xe: Erasure level dosage 2.GRIP
NCNT: Oscillation frequency setup value Z: Erasure level QL value 3.RELEASE
HVCNT: Center-sensitivity HV value SMD: SHD/polygon correction mode default value
FR1H1387.EPS
009-051-10 CR-IR341 Service Manual MU - 18 009-051-06

03.20.2004 FM4275 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
6.DRIVING GRIP : Performs operation tests on the subscanning driving grip [11.10] 8.BACKUP MEMORY : Initializes the backup memory. [13.]
mechanism. Displays a message if any abnormality is
0.QUIT
encountered.
0.QUIT 1.CLEAR
1.GRIP
2.RELEASE 9.HV ON/OFF : Turns ON and OFF the high-voltage switch (software switch).
3.D/A DATA If reading is performed with the covers opened,
the photomultiplier may be damaged. Thus, be sure to turn
7.DRIVEN GRIP : Performs operation tests on the subscanning driven grip [11.11] OFF the high-voltage switch. [14.]
mechanism. Displays a message if any abnormality is
encountered. 10.MENU SETTING : Sets various parameters for the exposure menu. [15.]
0.QUIT
1.GRIP
2.RELEASE 0.QUIT
3.D/A DATA
1.LIST : Display menus. [15.1]
8.MIRROR UP/DOWN : Not functional with CR-IR341. [11.12]
2.MOVE : Changes the display location of the menu. [15.2]
7.FILE UTILITY : Performs file-related operations such as saving parameter files to and
reading data from floppy disks. Used when the configuration data is
3.ROUTINE : Registers and deletes the routine menu. [15.3]
edited on a personal computer or when optional software is installed. [12.]
0.QUIT
4.EDIT : Edits the menu name and various parameters. [15.4]
1.FORMAT FD : Formats a floppy disk according to the 1.44MB MS-DOS format. [12.1]
5.COPY : Copies menus. [15.5]
2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION : Formats an image storage partition of the hard disk. [12.2]
6.DELETE : Deletes menus. [15.6]
3.BACKUP : Writes each setup file to a floppy disk. [12.3]
0.QUIT 7.FILMMARK : Edits film marks. [15.7]
1.SCANNER DATA : Saves the scanner setup files to a floppy disk.
2. CONFIGURATION DATA: Saves setup files (IRSET.CFG, FILFMT.CFG) to a floppy disk. NOTE: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual. FR1H4032.EPS
3. NETWORK DATA: Saves network-related setup files (RMT_SW.CFG, EQUIP, DEVICE,

HOSTS, CODEDSTB, ROUTE, NETMASKS, Base on DICOM) to a
floppy disk.
4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA : Saves image processing parameter files to a floppy disk.
5.CSL MENU DATA : Saves to a floppy disk the setup files related to CSL type
menu screens and magnetic card formats.
6.EDR PROCESSING DATA : Saves EDR parameter files to a floppy disk.
4.RESTORE : Reads each setup file from the floppy disk to the hard disk. [12.4]
0.QUIT
1.SCANNER DATA : Reads the scanner setup files from a floppy disk to the hard disk.
2. CONFIGURATION DATA: Reads setup files (IRSET.CFG, FILFMT.CFG) from the floppy
disk to the hard disk.
3. NETWORK DATA: Reads network-related setup files (RMT_SW.CFG, EQUIP, DEVICE,
HOSTS, CODEDSTB, ROUTE, NETMASKS, Base on DICOM) from
the floppy disk to the hard disk.
4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA : Loads image processing parameter files from a floppy
disk to the hard disk.
5.CSL MENU DATA : Loads the setup files related to CSL type menu screens and magnetic
card formats from a floppy disk to the hard disk.
6.EDR PROCESSING DATA : Reads EDR parameter files from a floppy disk to the hard disk.
5.EDR DATA [12.5]

0.QUIT
1.PARAMETER ONLY(SAVE TO FD) : Saves to a floppy disk the EDR intermediate processing
parameter files for images stored in the hard disk.
2.FULL(SAVE TO FD) : Saves to a floppy disk the EDR intermediate processing parameter files
and EDR reduced-image data for images stored in the hard disk.
3.PARAMETER ONLY(SAVE TO HD)
4.FULL(SAVE TO HD) Setting for remote maintenance
5.DELETE EDR BACKUP FILES ON HD
6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE: Reverts back to the immediately preceding [12.6]
version of system software.
7.EXECUTION : Loads a designated file from a floppy disk and executes it.
Used when optional files are installed. [12.7]
NOTE: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual.
FR1H1390.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3115 11.20.99 FM2638
5.2 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility in Initialization Sequence or in BLANK PAGE

Serious Error
During the initialization sequence or upon occurrence of serious error (i.e., when the mode
switches from the error message displayed status to M-Utility), the basic menu structure is
the same as in normal operation, except some of the menus are omitted.
For your reference, the upper menu hierarchy is shown below.
Menu Hierarchy in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Error

MAINTENANCE UTILITY
0.QUIT (not displayed during initialization)
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY
2.CONFIGURATION SETTING
3.ELECTRICAL UTILITY
4.SCANNER UTILITY
5.MECHANICAL UTILITY
0.QUIT
1.INITIALIZE : Loads and initializes the conveyance parameter. [11.1]
2.MOTOR
3.ACTUATOR
4.SENSOR
5.UNIT
6.FILE UTILITY
7.BACKUP MEMORY
8.MENU SETTING FR1H1397.EPS

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
2. SUMMARY: Displaying According to Error Code

6. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY: Error Log Utility
Error messages are grouped and displayed according to error codes.
With the error log utility (ERROR LOG UTILITY), the error log is displayed, cleared, and An example of its display is shown below.
saved. The trace data residing in the memory is also saved to a floppy disk.
| CODE DATE COUNT |

6.1 1. LIST: Displaying Error Log | 081D 1998.04.16 14:36 0012 |
| . |
The content of the error log is displayed.
| . |
Two modes of display are available: ALL for displaying all error messages generated in | . |
reverse chronological order, and SUMMARY for displaying them according to error codes.
| 1722 1998.04.16 10:12 0006 |
| 23E6 1998.04.16 09:58 0213 |
1. ALL: Displaying All Error Messages
| 0.END 1.NEXT 2.BEFORE (DEFAULT=1) : |
All error messages generated are displayed.
Error messages are presented in reverse chronological order.
The display content includes the date and time of an error code generated and detail
information. Selection of error level
An example of its display is shown below. Select one of the following error levels to display the error log.
1.ERROR (Error level 0, 1)
2.WARNING (Error level 2, 3)
| CODE DATE |
3.BOTH (Error level 0 to 3)
| 081D 1998.04.16 14:36 |
| 11.E738.000002.8A0AC1.000000.000C19.8 | Page flip
| 000001.000009.00001B |
Type in one of the following numbers and press the [ENT] key.
| . |
| . | 0.END (Exit the display function.)
| . | 1.NEXT (Display the next page.)
| 1722 1998.04.16 09:58 | 2.BEFORE (Display the previous page.)
| 85AA1319.05972166 |
| 0.END 1.NEXT 2.BEFORE (DEFAULT=1) : |
Selection of error level

One of the following error levels may be selected for display.
1.ERROR (Error level 0, 1)
2.WARNING (Error level 2, 3)
3.BOTH (Error level 0 to 3)
Page flip
Type in one of the following numbers and press the [ENT] key.
0.END (Exit the display function.)
1.NEXT (Display the next page.)
2.BEFORE (Display the previous page.)

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
6.2 2. CLEAR: Clearing Error Log 6.3 3. SAVE TO FD: Saving Error Log to Floppy Disk
All the error logs are cleared. Error log data and trace data is saved to a floppy disk.
(1) Select 2. CLEAR and 1. ERROR LOG in sequence. (1) Select 3. SAVE TO FD.
The following message appears. The following messages appear.
ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL ERROR LOGS ? 0.QUIT (Exit the menu.)
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2): 1.ERROR LOG (Overwrite an error log file onto the floppy disk.)
(2) Select 1. YES. 2.TRACE DATA (Overwrite trace data files having extensions .001 through .005
The following message appears, with all the error logs cleared. onto the floppy disk.)
ERROR LOGS ARE CLEARED. 3.IOT DATA (Save a file with a file name represented by the time it is saved, with
an extension .IOT.)
When 2. NO is selected, the menu display reverts back without clearing the error log.
4.NET WORK TRACE DATE
(Save the trace data file concerning the communication with the
console display software onto a floppy disk.)
NOTE
When saving "2. TRACE DATA" and "4. NETWORK TRACE DATA", use separate floppy
disks.
(2) Select the type of error log to be saved, using one of the numbers, 1 through 4.
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE XXXXXX TO THE FD?
(The "xxxxxx" portion indicates the type of error log to be saved.)
CAUTION
While a file is being saved, never power OFF the machine or press the FD eject button
because the floppy disk or floppy disk drive may be damaged.
(3) Put a floppy disk into the machine and select 1. YES.
The following message appears, with all the error logs saved to the floppy disk.
XXXXXXXXXX IS SAVED.
(XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.)
If all the files cannot be contained in a single floppy disk, the following message
appears.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.
1. CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2):
Additionally, type in one of the following numbers and press the [ENT] key.
1.CONTINUE Continue to write the error log file to the floppy disk.
2.CANCEL Stop writing the error log file to the floppy disk.

11.20.99 FM2638 03.20.2004 FM4275
6.4 4. SAVE TO HD: Saving Error Log to HD BLANK PAGE
The error logs are saved to the hard disk.

(1) Select 4. SAVE TO HD and 1. ERROR LOG in sequence.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE ERROR LOGS TO THE HD?
CAUTION
While a file is being saved, never power OFF the machine because the hard disk may
be damaged.
(2) Select 1. YES.

Then, the following message appears.
(XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.)

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
7. 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING: Configuration 7.1 Editing Various Setup Files

Utility A specific editing method is described below, using 1. SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) by way of
example.
With the configuration utility (CONFIGURATION SETTING), various setup files may be SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
viewed or modified. # at the beginning of a sentence means that the sentence is a comment, so the description
To view or modify various setup files, use the simple screen editor of the machine. Setup thereafter does not provide configuration setting. A comment describes remarks, such as explana-
files may also be edited on a personal computer running Windows 95 and then installed. tion about a setup item and choices of items.
represents a carriage return.
0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY #
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C Comment # IRSET.ORG/CFG A B C
3. TEST MODE #
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY Setup item IDT=1 D E F
7. FILE UTILITY #1.System Type
8. BACKUP MEMORY 7 8 9 Comment # 0:CSL / 1:IDT
9. HV OFF 7 8 9
10. MENU SETTING FR1B1207.EPS
>2 4 5 6
0.QUIT
1 2 3
1.SYSTEM
2.PRINT (1) Select 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING and 1. SYSTEM.
3.REMOTE SWITCH
4.EQUIPMENT
0 . SP The contents of SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) are displayed.
5.LOCAL INTERFACE
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEL BS ENT
#
7.HOSTS ADDRESS # IRSET.ORG/CFG A B C
8.DISTRIBUTION #
9.ROUTING Caps
10.NETMASKS
11.DICOM IDT=1 D E F
#1.System Type
FR1B1202.EPS
# 0:CSL / 1:IDT
Menu Hierarchy and Configuration Files FNT=0
7 8 9
#2.FONT(LANGUAGE)
2.CONFIGURATION SETTING : View or change the setup in the configuration file. # 0:JPN / 1:ENG / 2:GER / 3:FRN / 4:ESP / 4 5 6
# 5:ITA / 6:SWE / 7:FIN / 8:DEN / 9:NOR /
1.SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) : Define overall setup information regarding the machine. [7.2] # 10:KOR
# 7:Not Available 1 2 3
# 10:114Y5431030(Korean Option) is necessary.
2.PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) : Define setup information related to the film output format. [7.3]
IPS="172.16.0.1 " .
3.REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) : Remote switch ON/OFF setting for the intelligent hub. [7.5] 0 SP
#3.IP Address(CPU90E) (Length=15)
4.EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) : Define setup information related to equipment connected. [7.6]
DEL BS ENT
/sb0/SYSTEM/ETC/IRSET.CFG
5.LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) : Define setup information for communication
requirements over serial line connection. [7.7]
SAVE CANCEL Caps
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) : Define setup information for network-connected
communication. [7.8]
FR1B1208.EPS
7.HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) : Set up the address for network connection. [7.9]
8.DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) : Set up the distribution destination for network connection. [7.10]
9.ROUTING (ROUTE) : Set up the routing for network connection. [7.11]
10.NETMASKS (NETMASKS) : Set up the subnet mask for network connection. [7.12]
11.DICOM (DICOM) : Base on DICOM. [7.13]
NOTE 1: Titles in parentheses denote file names to be edited.

NOTE 2: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual. FR1H1502.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275 11.20.99 FM2638
(2) Touch the location to be edited. 7.2 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)

The cursor appears at the location touched.
The cursor can be moved by touching the , ,
, or key. Of the setup items of SYSTEM, some are only supported for the IDT type (IDT connection

and CR-IR348CL connection). For the machine of the IDT type, items marked by in the
(3) Using a virtual keyboard, edit it.
IDT type column shown in 7.2.1 List of Setup Items for SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) should
Display a desired virtual keyboard for entry. only be set.
Three types of virtual keyboards are available; by touching the or key, one of the
three virtual keyboards can be selected. Also, by touching the [Caps] key, the caps List of SYSTEM Configuration File Setup Items
mode can be toggled to the lower-cap display corresponding to the three types of 1.SYSTEM
virtual keyboards.
1.IDT: System Type 44.ID_DST: Distribution Code Setting
Using the [DEL] or [BS] key, modify the value. 2.FNT: FONT (LANGUAGE) 45.UID_STI: UID Issuance Type
[DEL] key: Each time you touch this key, it erases the character located above the 3.IPS: IP Address (CPU90E) (Length=15) 46.DEF_DENSITY: Image Density Device Default
4.IPI: IP Address (CPU90F) (Length=15) 47.JSTFY: Right/Left justify of long character type
cursor.
5.ILA: IDT Network Port 48.HQ_FUNC: HQ Function Setting
[BS] key: Whenever it is touched once, a character immediately before (to the left 6.SCD: System Code (Length=2) 49.DRC_FUNC: DRC Function Setting
of) the cursor is deleted. 7.SMJ: System Name (Length=6) 50.ID_INFO_TYPE: ID info. Type(CSL Type)
8.SID: System ID (Length=1) 51.ID_CODE_SET: ID info. code set
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 9.SFC: Manual Sensitivity Setting (CSL Type)
(CSL Type: Magnetic Card/ID-ONLINE)
52.SSS: Select Screen Save Display
If it is difficult to undo the editing with the [DEL] or [BS] key, touch the [CANCEL] key and 10.SFD: Manual Sensitivity Default (CSL Type)
53.DST_PADDING: Distribution Code Padding method
repeat from step (1) all over again. 11.LGR: Logical Reading (CSL Type)
54.ENV: Equipment name for version display
12.XRY: OverXray Flag (Max 9 character)
13.U_MF: User UTL Multi-Flame Button Control 55.ID_RET: Select retrieve key input timing
(4) Press the [SAVE] key. 14.SS1: Screen Save Timer 56.UID: UID Issuance
The edited contents are saved to the HD. 15.ITV: Time Put at Each Image Store for Accept
Reprinting (E-IF)
57.EXAM: Examination Number Field
58.L2430: Logical reading (15cm*30cm size)
16.CPS: The Number of Sheets of Continues of 24cm*30cm IP
Image Store (E-IF)
Virtual keyboard 59.ID_EXAM: Examination No. Display Mode (CSL Type)
The cursor appears 17.ID_EDR: Edr Mode Variation (CSL Type)
# 60.ID_DEPT: Department Name Display Mode (CSL Type)
at the location touched. 18.ID_FILING: Filing Mode
# IRSET.ORG/CFG A B C 61.DEPT_LENGTH: Department Name Length (CSL Type)
# 19.ID_FUNC: Function Setting (CSL Type)
62.MES_LENGTH: Maximum Text Length for On-line
20.ID_FILMC: Film Letter (CSL Type) Connection (CSL Type)
IDT=1 D E F 21.ID_BIRTH: Birthday Format (CSL Type) 63.SCS: Select specific character to be set.
#1.System Type 22.ID_SEARCH: Search Key (CSL Type) 64.PN_CS: CONVERSION OF PATIENT NAME
# 0:CSL / 1:IDT
23.ID_LENGTH: Patient's ID Length (CSL Type)
7 8 9 65.PN_FDS: FINP COMPONENT DELIMITER FOR
FNT=0 24.ID_PADDING: SINGLE BYTE REPRESENTATION
#2.FONT(LANGUAGE) Patient's ID Padding method (CSL Type) 66.PN_FDM: FINP COMPONENT DELIMITER FOR
# 0:JPN / 1:ENG / 2:GER / 3:FRN / 4:ESP / 25.RECEPT_LENGTH: MULTI BYTE REPRESENTATION
4 5 6
# 5:ITA / 6:SWE / 7:FIN / 8:DEN / 9:NOR / Reception No. Length (CSL Type) 67.PN_FCS1: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE BYTE
# 10:KOR 26. RECEPT_PADDING: REPRESENTATION
# 7:Not Available Reception No. Padding method (CSL Type) 68.PN_FCS2: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE BYTE
1 2 3
# 10:114Y5431030(Korean Option) is necessary. 27.EXAM_LENGTH: REPRESENTATION
Examination No. Length (CSL Type) 69.PN_FCS3: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE BYTE
IPS="172.16.0.1 " . 28.EXAM_PADDING: REPRESENTATION
0 SP
#3.IP Address(CPU90E) (Length=15) Examination No. Padding method (CSL Type) 70.PN_FCS4: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE BYTE
29.IFT: Reserve REPRESENTATION
DEL BS ENT 30.PRO: Function Protect 71.PN_FCS5: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE BYTE
/sb0/SYSTEM/ETC/IRSET.CFG
31.SF1: Read Sensitivity Semi-h REPRESENTATION
32.SF2: Read Sensitivity High 72.PN_FCM1: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI BYTE
SAVE CANCEL Caps REPRESENTATION
33.GRP: Film Sorting Group Code
73.PN_FCM2: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI BYTE
FR1B1203.EPS 34.PTR: FilmChar1/MenuName Start Pointer REPRESENTATION
35.UNQ: Film Sort Unique Code
(5) Back up the configuration file that has been set up. 74.PN_FCM3: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI BYTE
36.PCD: I/F Pixel Clock Rate for DMS REPRESENTATION
7.13 Backing Up Configuration File 37.PCL: I/F Pixel Clock Rate for LP 75.PN_FCM4: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI BYTE
38.CIM: IP Size Code Setting REPRESENTATION
(6) Press the RESET button. 76.PN_FCM5: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI BYTE
39.EBK: EDR Backup Flag
The machine is reset, so that the file that has been set up is effective. 40.EBA: EDR Backup Server Address (Length=15)
REPRESENTATION
77.PN_DD: DICOM COMPONENT DELIMITER
41.EM1,2,3,4,5: EDR Backup Menu Code (Length=4)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 42.U_LP: The Following Buttons & Icon Control
78.PN_DC: DICOM COMPOSITION
(FOR OEM) 79.MON: Display type on CRT Monitor

If there is any other configuration item to be set up, do not press the RESET button. The 80.BCR: BCR TYPE
43.ID_AP: Image Reversal Mode Variation
RESET button should be pressed after all the setups are finished. (CSL Type) 81.FLMW: Film size confirm window open
FR1B1204.EPS

11.20.99 FM2638 03.20.2004 FM4275
7.2.1 List of Setup Items for SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)

82.DK_FILM: Print HQ Image on 14*14 film(14*14 single format)
83.DCL: Clear the distribution code when re-outputing a image

System Setup (Item Numbers 1-12)
84.FCL: Put the filing switch off when re-outputing a image
Item IDT Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number type
85.IDNR_CB: "ID INFORMATION NOT REGISTERED" message
IDT connection type/CSL function 0: CSL
1 IDT 1
incorporated type changeover 1: IDT
86.U_0810: User UTL 08*10 film setting Button Control
0: Japanese
1: English
87.RST_WRT: Reset image writing from shared memory after Happend HDD Write Error 2: German
"10" requires
3: French
software
88.RST_CBC: CBC Hard Reset 4: Spanish that is
FR1BA010.EPS
2 FNT 0 Font setup switching/language 5: Italian separately
designation 6: Swedish available.
NOTE 7: Finnish
8: Danish
Be sure to observe the LENGTH (digits) requirements specified for the following items. If a 9: Norwegian
wrong LENGTH is used, the setup results in error, so that the machine may not operate prop- 10: Korean
erly. Its IP address should be described in
IP address for standard LAN fifteen digits stuffed to the left.
3.IPS: IP Address (CPU90E) (Length=15) 3 IPS 172.16.0.1 (CPU90E) If the number of digits is less than 15, LENGTH
space should be added to the end to =15
4.IPI: IP Address (CPU90F) (Length=15)
meet the 15-digit requirement.
40.EBA: EDR Backup Server Address (Length=15)
Its IP address should be described
41.EM1,2,3,4,5: EDR Backup Menu Code (Length=4) in fifteen digits stuffed to the left.
If the number of digits is less than
15, space should be added to the
4 IPI 172.16.0.2 IP address for LAN board end to meet the 15-digit LENGTH
(CPU90F) requirement. =15
Even if the CPU90F board is not
available as an option, be sure to
set its IP address.
ID acquisition destination LAN 0: standard LAN (CPU90E)
5 ILA 1 Setup of destination to which ID-T
1: option LAN (CPU90F/LAN90B)
is connected.
D1: CR-IR341 Change
6 SCD D1 Unit code (2 characters)
D2: CR-IR342 prohibited.
5000: CR-IR341 Change

7 SMJ 5000 Unit character string (6 characters).
5000R: CR-IR342 prohibited.
Reader number
8 SID A A reader number that does not AZ

duplicate within the same network
should be assigned.
0: OFF
1: ON
Manual sensitivity setup/menu (Standard,Semi-High-Speed)
9 SFC 0 setup 2: ON
(Standard,Semi-High-Speed,
High-Speed)
0: Standard
1: Semi-High-Speed
10 SFD 0 Manual sensitivity default setup 2: High-Speed
3: Menu Default (=Memory)

Logical reading setup
It sets to determine whether to 0: OFF

11 LGR 0
read the data on the IP in sizes 1: ON
smaller than the actual IP size
(to implement logical reading).
0: LOG & MESSAGE

Caution:
12 XRY 0 Overexposure handling 1: LOG ONLY
Change
2: NONE
: If SFC or LGR is ON, ID/Menu cannot be inputted after screen preview. TR1B1105.EPS

08.31.2005 FM4710 08.30.2001 FM3115
ID Setup (Item Numbers 13-28) Item IDT Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number type
Item IDT Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks RECEPT_ Setting of receipt number 1 5: ID_INFO_TYPE=0
number type 25 5 character string length
LENGTH 1 16: ID_INFO_TYPE=1
Multiframe (2-in-1/4-in-1) key 0: OFF 0 : Pad with space to the head
13 U_MF 0
ON/OFF in UTL 1: ON (Ex." 123")
1 : Pad with zero to the head
Screen saver timer setting RECEPT_ (Ex."00123")
(variable in 1 minute increments) 26 0 Setting of receipt number padding
PADDING scheme 2 : Pad with space to the tail
0 60 [min] (Ex."123 ")
14 SS1 5 When a cassette is inserted, the (0: screen saver disabled). 3 : Pad with zero to the tail
screen saver, even if activated, (Ex."12300")
is automatically disabled.
EXAM_ Setting of examination number 1 10: ID_INFO_TYPE=0
Wait time for DMS E-I/F reoutput 27 10
15 ITV 30 0-60 [sec] LENGTH character string length 1 16: ID_INFO_TYPE=1
request interrupt
0 : Pad with space to the head
Consecutive storage process (Ex." 1234567")
16 CPS 5 count for DMS E-I/F reoutput 0-10 [sheets] 1 : Pad with zero to the head
request interrupt EXAM_ Setting of examination number (Ex."0001234567")
28 PADDING 0 padding scheme 2 : Pad with space to the tail
EDR setup range 0: AUTO, SEMI, FIX (Ex."1234567 ")
ID_ 1: AUTO, SEMI, FIX, SEMI-X 3 : Pad with zero to the tail
17 0
EDR Used to select the display range 2: AUTO, SEMI, FIX, SEMI-X, (Ex."1234567000")
for EDR process mode key. MANUAL
TR1B1104.EPS
0: DISABLE
ID_
18 0 FILING setup range 1: OFF, ON
FILING
2: OFF, ON*, ON
ID_ 0: DISABLE
19 FUNC 0 Function setup enabled/disabled 1: ENABLE
ID_ FILM character setting enabled 0: OFF

20 0 1: ON
FILMC /disabled
0: JAPANESE DATE
(H10.04.01)
1: ANSI LONG DATE
(1998.APR.01)
2: ANSI SHORT DATE
(1998.04.01)
3: AMERICAN LONG DATE
21 ID_ 2 Birth date input format (APR.01.1998)
BIRTH
4: AMERICAN SHORT DATE
(04.01.1998)
5: EUROPEAN LONG DATE
(01.APR.1998)
6: EUROPEAN SHORT DATE
(01.04.1998)
Search key type for ID online

(TYPE_B) 0: ID#
1: ID#, RECEPT#
ID_ Used to select either ID number,
22 0 2: ID#, EXAM#
SEARCH receipt number, or examination 3: ID#, RECEPT#, EXAM#
number to be displayed as
a search key during connection
with HIS.
ID_ Setting of ID number character 1 10: ID_INFO_TYPE=0
23 10
LENGTH string length 1 64: ID_INFO_TYPE=1
0: Pad with space to the head
(Ex." 1234567")
1: Pad with zero to the head
ID_ Setting of ID number padding (Ex."0001234567")
24 0 2: Pad with space to the tail
PADDING scheme
(Ex."1234567 ")
3: Pad with zero to the tail
(Ex."1234567000")
TR1B1106.EPS
009-051-06
04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
I/F Setup (Item Numbers 29-82) Item IDT Initial

Item Setup description Parameters Remarks
number type value
Item IDT Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used
number type 41 EM1 Space
when EBK = 1 for menu code designation.
LENGTH=4
No change Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used
29 IFT 0 I/F type RESERVE
required. 41 EM2 Space LENGTH=4
0:
NONE Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used
1:
TS (Temporary subtraction) 41 EM3 Space LENGTH=4
2:
ES (Energy subtraction)
3:
MS (Multilayer tomography) Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used
41 EM4 Space
LENGTH=4
4:
MX (Multi-integrated processing)
Function image protect 5:
WS (Whole spine)
Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used
(image protect on HIC)
6:
PS (IVP) 41 EM5 Space
when EBK = 1
LENGTH=4
7:
TM (Tomography) for menu code designation.
30 PRO 0
8:
TX (Temporary subtraction,
Use to set the type of screen U_LP OEM printer setting 0: OFF No change
overall processing) 42 1
that enables the screen protection 9: WX (Whole spine, overall 1: ON required.
function of HI-C. processing) 0: L-R reversal
10: EX (Energy subtraction, overall 1: T-B reversal
processing) Image reversal mode (orientation) 2: L-R,T-B reversal
43 ID_AP 0
11: AS (Inter-image operation) setting range 3: L-R reversal/90-deg.Rotation
99: ALL 4: L-R,T-B reversal/90-deg.Rotation
Sensitivity median shift 1 No change 0: DISABLE
31 SF1 50 (relatively high sensitivity) 0 299 required.
44 ID_DST 0 Distribution code setting
1: ENABLE
Sensitivity median shift 2 No change 0: <org root>.2.0.<Private Image UID'>

32 SF2 100 0 299 required.
(IDT Type)
(high sensitivity) 0: <org root>.2.1.<MAC Address>.
Setting of study instance UID type <Time Stamp>.<Unique ID>
0: space (10) (CSL Type)
1: space (2) + department name (8) Setting used to issue study 1: <org root>.2.1.<Accesion Number'>
2: department name (4) + menu (6) <org root>=
45 UID_STI 3 information for QA-DICOM output. 2: <org root>.2.2 1.2.392
3: department name (4) + film mark (6) .<Study Date + Modality(CR)>
Group information setup method Used to customize, on a hospital- .200036.9125
33 GRP 0
for sorting
4: unit code (1) + space (9) Indent by-hospital basis, how to bind .<Accesion Number'>
5: space (4) + MPM (4) + space (2) 3: <org root>.2.3
6: space (4) + film mark (6) images per study on the QA side .<Study Date + Modality(CR)>
7: department name (4) + MPM (4) + .<Patient ID'>
space (2) 4: <org root>.2.4
.<Study Date> .<Patient ID'2>
Position of film mark or menu .<Requesting Service'>
34 PTR 0 character string outputted with 0 F (hexadecimal notation) Indent
GRP (valid when GRP = 2, 3, 6) Default setting of image processing
density
Used to designate the machines

Unique information setup method 0: Space (10) default processing density.
35 UNQ 0
for sorting 1: patient ID number (10) Indent This setting is effective only when a
setting other than 0 or 1 is registered
from IDT3 or the like (in cases where
DEF_
46 0 IDT3, which cannot designate the
0: Standard Density
0: 1 sec DENSITY processing density, is connected via
36 PCD 1 Clock during DMS-I/F output 1: 2 sec 1: High Quality Density
IDT4, or where the processing density
is not designated due to a software
0: 1 sec (< 60m) bug of IDT4).
37 PCL 0 Clock during LP-I/F output 1: 2 sec (> 60m) Normally, the value that is set on
the IDT side or by the internal
It should be menu of the CSL type is effective,
DMS output code selection when set so its initial value need not be
0: Inch according to
38 CIM 0 "inch" and "metric" physical sizes changed.
1: Metric the
differ
processing <Variable part>
at the DMS. 0: Left justified; 1: Right justified
<Corresponding to each digit
0: OFF (not transmitted) of the variable part> Common to
Selection of a menu to transmit 1: MENU (menu selected with a: Patient ID DMS output,
39 EBK 0 EDR backup information to the IP EM is selected) 47 JSTFY 00010000 Definition of right or left justification b: Patient name CRT display,
address that is set with EBA 2: Full (all menus) 00001111 for long format c: Exposure menu name and FILM
d: Examination number output.
Transfer destination IP address e: Department name (alphanumeric)
The IP address should be described f-l: Reserved (default: left justified)
Transfer destination IP address for
in fifteen digits stuffed to the left. m-p: Reserved (default: right justified)
... the transmission of EDR backup LENGTH
40 EBA data through a network If the number of digits
NOTE
TR1B1009.EPS
=15
The transmission port is fixed is less than 15, space should be
at 90E. added to the end to meet the 15-digit
requirement. Be sure to observe the length (number of digits) specified for the following items. If the length
TR1B1008.EPS
(number of digits) is wrong, a setting error occurs so that the machine may fail to properly
operate.
40. EBA: EDR Backup Server Address (Length = 15 including a dot (.))
41. EM1, EM2, EM3, EM4, and EM5: EDR Backup Menu Code (Length = 4)

08.30.2001 FM3115 03.20.2004 FM4275
Item IDT Item IDT

Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks number type Item Initial value Setup description Parameters/Remarks
number type
No change
HQ_ required Examination/receipt number 0: Examination number
48 1 HQ function setting 0: disabled; 1: enabled 57 EXAM 0
FUNC except display setting 1: Receipt number
for USA
No change
DRC_ 24x30 cm IP pantomo logical 0: Pantomo size (15x30 cm) reading disabled
49 1 DRC function setting 0: disabled; 1: enabled required 58 L2430 0
FUNC except reading setting 1: Pantomo size (15x30 cm) reading enabled
for USA
ID_ ID_ CSL-type examination number 0: Examination number display/input disabled

0: Stand. 59 0 display setting 1: Examination number display/input enabled
50 INFO_ 0 ID# input type for CSL type EXAM
1: Long
TYPE
ID_ ID_ CSL-type department name 0: Department name display/input disabled

51 CODE_ 0
Acceptable character set during 0: CP850 60 0 display setting 1: Department name display/input enabled
ID online for CSL type 1: ISO8859-1 DEPT
SET
0: Blank screen DEPT_ CSL-type department name 1- 8: ID_INFO_TYPE=0

(Screen saver is disabled) 61 8
LENGTH character count setting 1-64: ID_INFO_TYPE=1
52 SSS 0 Screen saver selection 1: Pictures
(Multiple pictures are displayed
at regular intervals.) CSL-type communication 0: Maximum length of send/receive message
MES_ characters is 128 bytes
62 1 message character string length
LENGTH setting during ID online 1: Maximum length of send/receive message
0: Pad with space to the head characters is 256 bytes
(EX." 1234") Character code of special symbols
1: Pad with zero to the head with UK/US language setting 0: ISO-IR 6 (ISO646)
DST_ (EX."00001234")
63 SCS 0
(FNT=1) 1: ISO-IR 100 (ISO8859-1)
53 2 Distribution code padding setting (Only for Base on DICOM setting)
PADDING 2: Pad with space to the tail
(EX."1234 ") Setting for converting patient
0: Not converted
3: Pad with zero to the tail 64 PN_CS 0 name components from FINP
(EX."12340000") to DICOM 1: Converted
Setting of delimiter for patient 0: Space " "

Machine type display switching name components in FINP 1: Caret "^"
54 ENV CR-IR341 65 PN_FDS 0
setting (patient name in languages other 2: Comma ","
than Japanese)
0: The patient ID is automatically Setting of delimiter for patient 0: Space " "
cleared when the cassette is set name components in FINP
66 PN_FDM 0 1: Caret "^"
or when the menu select key is (patient name in Japanese
pressed, and the patient 2: Comma ","
ID_ Patient information acquisition language)
55 0 information is acquired from the
RET setting during ID online online destination. F: Family name
1: The patient ID is cleared when G: Given name
PN_ Setting of patient name
it is necessary to change the 67 "F"
components (for one component M: Middle name
patient ID, and the patient FCS1
in FINP) P: Prefix
information is acquired from the S: Suffix
online destination.
F: Family name
<CSL type> G: Given name
0: Study/Series information is not PN_ Setting of patient name
68 "FG"
components (for two components M: Middle name
numbered on the reader side. FCS2
in FINP) P: Prefix
1: Study/Series information is
S: Suffix
numbered on the reader side.
56 UID 0 Study/Series information <IDT type> TR1B1108.EPS
numbering setting 0: Study/Series information is not
numbered on the IDT side.
1: Study/Series information is
numbered on the IDT side.
TR1B1107.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3115 08.30.2001 FM3115
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU - 41.1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU - 41.2
Item IDT Item IDT

number type Item Initial value Setup description Parameters/Remarks Item Initial value Setup description Parameters/Remarks
number type
F: Family name
G: Given name
PN_ Setting of patient name Setting to specify whether or not
69 "FGM"
components M: Middle name DK_ 0: DISABLE
FCS3
P: Prefix
82 0 to output an HQ image in a single
1: ENABLE
(for three components in FINP) FILM
S: Suffix format to 14" x 14" film
F: Family name
G: Given name
70 "FGMP"
components M: Middle name Setting to specify whether or not
FCS4 0: NO.
(for four components in FINP) P: Prefix 83 DCL 1 to clear the "distribution code" at
S: Suffix 1: YES (clears the distribution code).
the time of image retransmission
F: Family name
G: Given name
71 "FGMPS"
components M: Middle name
FCS5 Setting to specify whether or not
(for five components in FIN) P: Prefix 0: NO.
S: Suffix 84 FCL 1 to turn OFF the "filing option" at
1: YES (turns OFF the filing option).
the time of image retransmission
F: Family name
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name
PN_
72 "F" components M: Middle name
FCM1 (for one component in FINP) P: Prefix Setting to specify whether or not 0: Displays the forced continuation key.
S: Suffix IDNR_ to display the forced continuation
85 1 1: Does not display the forced continuation
F: Family name CB key for the unregistered ID window key.
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name
PN_
73 "FG" components M: Middle name
FCM2 (for two components in FINP) P: Prefix
Setting to specify whether or not
S: Suffix
U_ to display the 8" x 10" film reduced 0: NO
F: Family name 86 0 output setup button in the U-Utility 1: YES
0810
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name menu screen
PN_
74 "FGM" components M: Middle name
FCM3 (for three components in FINP) P: Prefix
S: Suffix Setting to specify whether or not to
0: Does not write the image data into the
write the image data in the shared
F: Family name RST_ HDD when restarting.
87 0 memory into the HDD when the
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name WRT 1: Writes the image data into the HDD

PN_
components M: Middle name system has shut down due to a
75 "FGMP" when restarting.
FCM4 (for four components in FINP) 046X error.
P: Prefix
S: Suffix
0: Retries another HDD access without
F: Family name forcibly resetting the CBC.
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name 1: Retries another HDD access with the
PN_ Setting to specify whether or not to
76 "FGMPS" components M: Middle name
FCM5 (for five components in FINP) forcibly reset the CBC (data CBC forced to be reset.
P: Prefix RST_
88 0 controller LSI mounted on the * This function is effective only with a
S: Suffix CBC
MTH08 board) when HDD access machine incorporating the MTH board
0: Space " " which can forcibly reset the CBC.
Setting of delimiter for patient timeout (104X error) occurs.
77 PN_DD 1 1: Caret "^" MTH08D board: Of versions B or later
name components in DICOM
2: Comma ","
MTH08A board: Of versions E or later
F: Family name
G: Given name TR1B2005.EPS
Setting of patient name
78 PN_DC "FGMPS" components in DICOM M: Middle name
P: Prefix
S: Suffix
0: Type 1 (old type: LUT = linear)
79 MON 1 Monitor display mode setting 1: Type 2 (new type: LUT = nonlinear; change in
standardized image display mode)
0: BCR5242-STB (DENSEI)(~#5000)
80 BCR 0 Barcode reader type setting 1: NFT7175/F01RL (OPTOELECTRONICS)(#5001~)
Setting to determine whether to 0: No (output instruction is reserved without
FLMW display a window that requests the
81 1 displaying a window)
user to replace the film tray,
when DRY PIX is used 1: Yes (window displayed)
TR1B1109.EPS
009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MU - 41.1 009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MU - 41.2
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
Detailed Explanation of SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) Setup Items 10. SFD (default value used when manual sensitivity setting is enabled)
Items that are not fully described in List of SYSTEM Setup Items are explained in detail The default value is switched when manual sensitivity setting is enabled in 9. SFC.
below. They should be referred to as needed. 0: Standard
3. IPS (standard LAN address) 1: Semi-High-Speed
2: High-Speed
The IP address of the CPU90E board that comes standard with the CR-IR341.
3: Menu Default (The content previously selected in the menu is stored in memory.)
172.16.0.1 is set as its initial value ( denotes half-width space). When
the CR-IR341 is connected to a network for operation, it is necessary to determine a 14. SS1 (screen saver timer)
unique (non-duplicate) IP address over the single network and change it to that
address. The time until the screen saver is activated. Its initial value is 5 (minutes), and its
setting may be changed between 0 and 60 (in minutes).
Typically, because the IP address is also determined as the system configuration is
determined, the IP address assigned to the CPU90E board should be checked. When it is set to 0, the screen saver is disabled.
4. IPI (LAN board address) SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE

Screen saver: In order to protect burning of the operation panel screen, this function turns OFF
The IP address of the CPU90F/LAN90B board that comes as an option with the CR- the screen after a certain period of time has elapsed with no user operation.
IR341. 172.16.0.2 is set as its initial value ( denotes half-width space).
When the CR-IR341/CR-IR361 is connected to a network for operation, it is necessary
17. ID_EDR (EDR setup range)
to determine a unique (non-duplicate) IP address over the single network and change
it to that address. The selection range for AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X/MANUAL options of EDR function is
switched.
Typically, because the IP address is also determined as the system configuration is
determined, the IP address assigned to the CPU90F board should be checked. 0: AUTO/SEMI/FIX can be selected.
Even if the CPU90F board is not available, it should always be set; thus, an IP address 1: AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X can be selected.
should be assigned to it. 2: AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X/MANUAL can be selected.
5. ILA (selection of board for acquisition from IDT) 18. ID_FILING (selection menu for image resolution during OD-F filing)
The board that acquires ID information from the IDT is switched by a value of 0 or 1. The menu for selecting the image resolution during OD-F filing is switched.
0 : Standard LAN board (CPU90E board) 0: DISABLE (always saved in high resolution)
1 : Optional LAN board (CPU90F board/LAN90B board) 1: OFF/ON selectable
The setup of 5. ILA is effective for the IDT type only; thus, for the CSL type, its initial 2: OFF/ON*/ON
value should be used as is. ON*: The HQ image is reduced to the standard before transmission.
8. SID (reader number) ON: The image is transmitted without reduction. For example, the HQ image is
transmitted as is.
Symbol (number), from A through Z, used when several readers (FCR series
machines, including FCR3000) are installed. A unique symbol is assigned to each of 47. JSTFY (definition of right or left justification for long format)
the readers. It is valid when 1. YES (long format used) is set for 40. LTC in PRINT
Because this symbol is appended to the first digit of the image number, it can be seen (FILMFMT.CFG).
from which reader the image data has been read. Here, a 16-digit variable value (0: left justified; 1: right justified) is set. Each of the 16
digits is assigned to a (patient name), b (patient name), c (exposure menu name),
9. SFC (manual sensitivity setup selection menu) d (examination number), e (department name), and f-p (reserved).
Used to determine whether manual setting of sensitivity is enabled. By default, the first five digits are 00010. Thus, a (patient ID), b (patient name),
0: OFF (Manual sensitivity setting is disabled.) and c (exposure menu name) are left justified; d (examination number) is right
1: Standard/Semi-High-Speed can be selected. justified; and e (department name) is left justified.
2: Standard/Semi-High-Speed/High-Speed can be selected.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
50. ID_INFO_TYPE (ID# input type for CSL type) 64. PN_CS through 78. PN_DC (software version A12 or later)
If ID# input or type C of ID online is used with the CSL type, 1: Long should be set.
The following settings are made regarding the patient name information for the image
If type C of ID online is not used, 1: Long should not be set because it may cause that is subject to DICOM output (Base on DICOM) to QA-WS or CR-IR348CL.
trouble.
Definition of components of the name (Family name, Given name, Middle name,
Prefix, Suffix).
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
If the long type format is used with ID online, the host needs to support information type C.
Delimiter between components
<DICOM output with FINP input intact>

51. ID_CODE_SET (acceptable character set for the CSL-type magnetic
PN_CS=0
card and during ID online)
Name components and delimiters are not converted.
It should be set according to the character code used for the patient ID. Settings for PN_FDS/PN_FDM/ . . . . /PN_DC are ignored.
CP850: Character code specified by IBM. It includes special characters (such
as umlaut) used in Europe.
<Separated by delimiter when DICOM output is generated>
ISO8859-1: Character code specified by ISO.
PN_CS=1
56. UID (Study/Series information numbering setting): Software version Name components and delimiters are converted.
A10 or later Settings for PN_FDS/PN_FDM/ . . . . /PN_DC are effective. Cases where the setting
for each of the items is at its initial value are described below.
If the Study/Series information is not numbered on the IDT, or no numbering is
performed, it is set to determine whether the Study/Series information is to be
numbered or not on the machine. PN_FDS=O
0 : Numbering is not performed on the machine. Space is handled as a delimiter.
1 (default value): Numbering is performed on the machine (according to the format
that is set in 45. UID_STI).
PN_FDM=O
If numbering is performed on the IDT, the Study/Series information numbered on the
Full-width space is handled as a delimiter for a patient name in Kanji.
IDT is effective anyway.
PN_FCS1=F
PN_FCS2=FG
PN_FCS3=FGM
PN_FCS4=FGMP
PN_FCS5=FGMPS
PN_FCS1 through PN_FCS5 set components of a name (single-byte). If PN_FCS1
through PN_FCS5 are set as described above, they are defined as follows.
PN_FCS1: If there is only one component, it is interpreted as Family name. Assume

that the patient name is Fuji Taro. Then, if only Fuji is entered, Fuji is
interpreted as Family name.
PN_FCS2: If there are two components, they are interpreted as Family name and
Given name. Assume that the patient name is Fuji Taro. Then, if Fuji
Taro is entered, Fuji is interpreted as Family name and Taro as Given
name (when the delimiter is a half-width space).
PN_FCS3: Assume that the patient name is Rev. John M Smith Ph. D.. Then, if
Smith John M is entered, Smith is interpreted as Family name, John
as Given name, and M as Middle name (when the delimiter is a half-
width space).
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
PN_FCS4: If there are four components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given "82._DK_FILM (14" x 14" film output setting)
name, Middle name, and Prefix. Assume that the patient name is Rev.
John M Smith Ph. D.. Then, if Smith John M Rev. Ph. D. is entered, Allows you to generate the 14" x 14" film output of a 14" x 14" high-resolution image.
Smith is interpreted as Family name, John as Given name, M as
Middle name, and Rev. as Prefix (when the delimiter is a half-width "83. DCL" (distribution code setting)
space).
The "distribution code" usually clears when the image reader side retransmits an
PN_FCS5: If there are five components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given image. Enables you to prevent the distribution code from being cleared.
name, Middle name, Prefix, and Suffix. Assume that the patient name is
Rev. John M Smith Ph. D.. Then, if Smith John M Rev. Ph. D. is en- "84. FCL" (filing option setting)
tered, Smith is interpreted as Family name, John as Given name, M
as Middle name, Rev. as Prefix, and Ph. D. as Suffix (when the delim- The "filing option" usually turns OFF when the image reader side retransmits an image.
iter is a half-width space). Enables you to prevent the filing option from turning OFF.
"85. IDNR_CB8" (forced continuation key display setting)

PN_FCM1=F
PN_FCM2=FG Enables you to display the forced continuation key for the unregistered ID window.
PN_FCM3=FGM "86. U_0810"

PN_FCM4=FGMP
Enables you to let the U-Utility menu screen display the setup button for specifying
PN_FCM5=FGMPS whether or not to permit the 8" x 10" film output to reduce in size.
PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 set components of a name (double-byte). If
PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 are set as described above, they are defined as "87.RST_WRT"
follows.
Specifies whether or not to write the image data in the shared memory into the HDD
when the system has shut down due to the 046X error.
PN_FCM1: If there is only one component, it is interpreted as Family name.
NOTES
PN_FCM2: If there are two components, they are interpreted as Family name and
Given name. Be sure to press the reset switch to restart the machine after the system has shut
down due to an image data write error. If the circuit breaker is inadvertently turned
PN_FCM3: If there are three components, they are interpreted as Family name, OFF and then turned ON to restart, correct image data cannot be written.
Given name, and Middle name.
Circuit breaker
PN_FCM4: If there are four components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given
name, Middle name, and Prefix.
PN_FCM5: If there are five components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given
name, Middle name, Prefix, and Suffix.
PN_DD=1 [change prohibited]

It defines the delimiter for the patient name when DICOM output is generated.
PN_DD=FGMPS [change prohibited]

Press
It defines the arrangement of the components of the patient name when DICOM Reset switch
output is generated.
FR1H1503.EPS
Do not change the DICOM interface board (CPU90F board, LAN90D board) and the
LP interface board (IMG08A board) when the machine is to be restarted after the
system has shut down due to an image data write error. If the DICOM interface
board (CPU90F board, LAN90D board) and the LP interface board (IMG08A board)
are changed, mapping in the shared memory is changed, and as a result the correct
image data cannot be written.
03.20.2004 FM4275 08.31.2005 FM4710
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 7.2.2 For Installation by Copying Configuration Files

ID information or EDR data other than the image data is backed up in the HDD DOS
region when the image data write error occurs. If the data cannot be backed up in the If several CR-IR341 machines are installed within the same network, installation can be
HDD DOS region, the image data cannot be written again even if the machine is done by copying the setup contents of one machine to another.
restarted. Note, however, that the settings should be changed as appropriate for the following three
items of SYSTEM.
88.RST_CBC Items that Should be Changed for Second and Subsequent Machines
Specifies whether to retry the HDD access without forcibly resetting the CBC or to retry 3. IPS: Standard LAN IP address
the HDD access after forcibly resetting the CBC when the HDD access timeout (104X IP addresses that are not duplicated within the same network should be assigned.
error) occurs.
4. IPI: LAN board IP address
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
IP addresses that are not duplicated within the same network should be assigned.
The CBC refers to the data controller LSI mounted on the MTH08 board.
8. SID: Reader number
NOTE Reader numbers that are not duplicated within the same network should be assigned.
The CBC forcible resetting function is effective only with a machine incorporating the
MTH board which can forcibly reset the CBC.
MTH08D board: Of versions B or later
MTH08A board: Of versions E or later
08.31.2005 FM4710 08.31.2005 FM4710
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
7.3 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) Film Setup (Item Numbers 1-41)

Item
number Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
Settings are common both to the IDT type (IDT connection and CR-IR348CL connection)
and CSL type. 0: NO
1 BF 1 IP barcode display switching 1: YES
List of PRINT Setup Items 0: NO
2 EF 1 EDR mode display switching 1: YES
2.PRINT
0: NO
1.BF: Print barcode 26.CE: Print 14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field 3 IF 1 Image condition display switching 1: YES
2.EF: Print EDR mode 27.CSX0: Character Area0 (Standard) horizontal size
3.IF: Print image process condition 28.CSY0: Character Area0 (Standard) vertical size 0: NO
4 CF 1 Correction item display switching 1: YES
4.CF: Print L,S,CS,SS condition 29.CSX1: Character Area1 (Standard) horizontal size
5.ET: Print shot time 30.CSY1: Character Area1 (Standard) vertical size 0: NO
5 ET 1 Exposure time display switching 1: YES
6.HN: Institution name (Max Length=60) 31.CLX0: Character Area0 (Large) horizontal size
7.HP: 2byte code character(Japanese, Korean) 32.CLY0: Character Area0 (Large) vertical size FUJI FILM
6 HN Institution name 60Char
Institution name (Max Length=30) 33.CLX1: Character Area1 (Large) horizontal size HOSPITAL
8.GF: Print set process
34.CLY1: Character Area1 (Large) vertical size 9578 8E6D
9.GJ: Print engineer ID 8374 8343
35.FD1417:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation
10.MF: Print Menu 838B 8380
11.A1: Maximum age of monthly representation 9561 8940
35.FD1843:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation 7 HP 8140 8140 Institution name in Kanji S-JIS 30 Bytes (up to 15 Kanji
12.A2: Maximum age of daily representation 8140 8140 characters)
13.TH: Trimming (mammo) 8140 8140
14.TE: Trimming (others) 8140
15.CL: Representation of date
36.FC1:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation Set processing information 0: NO
16.AB: Representation of age 8 GF 1 display switching 1: YES
36.FC2:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation
17.FR1: Print image frame
36.FC3:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation 0: NO
18.FR2: Print image frame 9 GJ 0 Indent
36.FC4:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation 1: YES
19.FR4: Print image frame
36.FC5:8*10 film character fields position & rotation 0: NO
20.CR: Print compression rate 10 MF 1 Menu character string display
36.FC6:8*10 film character fields position & rotation switching 1: YES
21.MM: Margin
37.EM: Print Energy-Subtraction Param./PEM Param.
22.SG: Print Standard Image 11 A1 7 Upper-limit age in years for age 0 99
38.IN: Print film char2/examination number display in months
on 14*17, 14*14 film like HQ Image
39.IM: Image area move to the top of 14*17 film.
23.HG: Size selection of 14*17, 14*14 Upper-limit age in months for age
(only for 15*30, 35*35, 43*43) 12 A2 0 0 12
film character (Single format) display in days
40.LTC: Long type character format
24.OS: DR compression in reprint
41.FRSC: No Print Scale Trimming amount (mammo)
25.RF: Print reverse mark
42.TN: Print operator or technologist's Name
13 TH 0.0 The trimming amount (mammo) 0.0 25.0 (mm)
43.PS: Print pixel spacing [mm] (ex.: 0.05 -> 0.10) for four sides of the IP image in
44.RS: Requesting service characters. FR1B1205.EPS HR is set.
NOTE Trimming amount
(other than mammo)
Be sure to observe the LENGTH (digits) requirements specified for the following items. If a
14 TE 0 0 25 (mm)
wrong LENGTH is used, the setup results in error, so that the machine may not operate The numeral value for trimming
properly. of four sides of the IP image in
ST is set.
6.HN: Institution name (Max Length=60)
7.HP: 2 byte code character (Japanese, Korean) Institution name (Max Length=30) 0: JAPANESE DATE
(H10.04.01)
1: ANSI LONG DATE
(1998.APR.01)
2: ANSI SHORT DATE
(1998.04.01)
3: AMERICAN LONG DATE
15 CL 2 Date display type (APR.01.1998)
4: AMERICAN SHORT DATE
(04.01.1998)
5: EUROPEAN LONG DATE
(01.APR.1998)
6: EUROPEAN SHORT DATE
(01.04.1998)
TR1B1010.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Item Item
Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number number
0: AGE FD Position rotation designation

16 AB 0 Age/birth date display switching 35 0010 for 14" x 17" (35 x 43cm) areas 0
1: Date of Birth 1417
and 1.
Specifies the area position and
14x17 film: 14x17, 14x14, 18x43 single Position rotation designation
FD rotation with four digits (abcd).
image frame display 35 1131 for landscape 14" x 17"
1714 (35 x 43cm) areas 0 and 1.
14x14 film: 14x14 single image frame 0: NO a = Area 0 position
17 FR1 0 1: YES
display FD Position rotation designation 0: upper left, 1: upper right;
8x10 film: 8x10 single image frame 35 0010 2: lower left; 3: lower right
1843 for 1843 areas 0 and 1.
display b = Area 0 rotation
Position rotation designation for 0: No; 1: Yes
35 FD 0010
14x17 film: 18x43 LR/2on1 image 0: NO 8"x10" areas 0 and 1. c = Area 1 position
18 FR2 0 0810
frame display 1: YES 0: upper left, 1: upper right;
2: lower left; 3: lower right
14x17 film: 14"x17", 18x43, 8x10 0: NO FD Position rotation designation for d = Area 1 rotation
19 FR4 0 35 1131
4on1 image frame display 1: YES 1008 landscape 8"x10" areas 0 and 1 0: No; 1: Yes
FD Position rotation designation

Compression ratio display switching 35 0010
1414 for 14x14 areas 0 and 1
0: NO
20 CR 0 Used to determine whether the XXXX:
1: YES Valid when an image
compression ratio for the image for 1234 2345 Position rotation designation
reoutput is display. 3456 4567 for specific MPM code Area position rotation designation: output is to be
36 FC1 generated on 14" x 17",
5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8
14" x 14", 11" x 14",
0: image information dependent 7890 8901 or 8" x 10" film.
(default = transparent margin)
1: image information dependent XXXX: Valid when an image
21 MM 0 Margin designation switching 1234 2345 Position rotation designation
(default = black margin)
2: fixed to transparent margin 3456 4567 for specific MPM code Area position rotation designation: output is to be
36 FC2 generated on 14" x 17",
3: fixed to black margin 5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8
14" x 14", 11" x 14",
7890 8901 or 8" x 10" film.
0: NO (Normal)
22 SG 0 14x17/14x14 magnification mode XXXX:
1: YES (Magnify) Valid when an image
1234 2345 Position rotation designation
14x17 single character size 0: Standard 3456 4567 for specific MPM code Area position rotation designation: output is to be
23 HG 0 36 FC3 . . . generated on 14" x 17",
on 14x17/14x14 film 1: Large 5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. MPM1 MPM2 MPM8
14" x 14", 11" x 14",
7890 8901 or 8" x 10" film.
0: Depending on Image
DR compression enabled/disabled "1" cannot
24 OS 0 Information XXXX: Valid when an image
for reoutput be used. Position rotation designation
1: Depending on System Setting 1234 2345 output is to be
3456 4567 for specific MPM code Area position rotation designation: generated on 14" x 17",
36 FC4 . . .
0: NO 5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. MPM1 MPM2 MPM8 14" x 14", 11" x 14",
25 RF 2 Left/right character display reversal 1: YES (""or"R-reverse") 7890 8901 or 8" x 10" film.
2: YES ("AP"or"PA")
Position rotation designation Valid only when an
Area position rotation designation: image output is to be
0: both displayed 36 FC5 0020: 0317 for specific MPM code
MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8 generated on 8" x 10"
Display selection for film character 1: Only area 1 displayed (8 max.) areas.
26 CE 0 film.
area 1 and/or 2 2: Only area 2 displayed
3: not displayed Position rotation designation Valid only when an
Area position rotation designation: image output is to be
36 FC6 1030: ?3?? for specific MPM code MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8 generated on 8" x 10"
27 CSX0 500 Horizontal size for standard size area 0 2 - 500 (0.1mm) (8 max.) areas.
film.
28 CSY0 268 Vertical size for standard size area 0 2 - 268 (0.1mm) 0: NO
"Ene.-Sub." parameter/PEM
37 EM 2 1: YES (Ene.-Sub.)
parameter output.
29 CSX1 458 Horizontal size for standard size area 1 2 - 458 (0.1mm) 2: YES (PEM)
Check for necessity
30 CSY1 174 Vertical size for standard size area 1 2 - 230 (0.1mm) 0: NO to display this item
38 IN 0 Examination number display
1: YES before it is set.
31 CLX0 980 Horizontal size for large size area 0 2 - 980 (0.1mm)
Supported by A05 or
32 CLY0 268 Vertical size for large size area 0 2 - 268 (0.1mm) FCR9000-compatible format 0: NO (FCR9000 compatible)
39 IM 0 later; supported only
support setting for 14"x14" 100% 1: YES
magnification/pantomo for 15*30, 35*35,
33 CLX1 668 Horizontal size for large size area 1 2 - 668 (0.1mm) and 43*43.
34 CLY1 180 Vertical size for large size area 1 2 - 236 (0.1mm) 40 LTC 0 Use of long type format 0: NO (not used)
1: YES (used)
TR1B1011.EPS
XXXX:
XXXX XXXX
Setting of MPM code for output Up to eight four-digit MPM codes A wildcard
41 FRSC XXXX XXXX
with frame/without ruler are set. may be used.
XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX
TR1B1012.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Item BLANK PAGE

Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number
Setting to specify whether or not 0: Does not print out a radiologist name.
42 TN 0 Unalterable
to print out a radiologist name. 1: Prints out a radiologist name.
Setting to specify whether or not 0: Does not print out a pixel spacing.
43 PS 0
to print out a pixel spacing. 1: Prints out a pixel spacing.
Changing the font size for the 0: Does not change the font size.
44 RS 0 1: Generates a film output with the font
requesting department name
size enlarged.
TR1B2006.EPS
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
Detailed Explanation of Setup Items 24. OS (DR compression enabled/disabled for reoutput)
Items that are not fully described in List of Setup Items are explained in detail below. They Use to switch whether enable/disable of DR compression for image reoutput complies
should be referred to as needed. with image information or with machine setting.
6. HN (institution name) 25. RF (right/left character display reversal)
Institution name displayed when 2. FNT of SYSTEM is set to other than 0 When set to 1, a reversed character of R is displayed with reversal enabled. When
(Japanese). set to 2, either AP or PA is displayed for all images according to the exposure unit
and method used.
7. HP (institution name in Kanji)
Institution name in Kanji displayed when 2. FNT of SYSTEM is set to 0 (Japanese). 38. IN (examination number display)
To enter an institution name in Kanji, the Shift-JIS code should be entered with every Used to set whether to display the examination number within the ID card. Permission
four digits delimited by space. from the Service Headquarters is required before changing the parameter.
It should be noted that if 15 characters of Shift-JIS space code (8140) are entered in
40. LTC (use of long type format)
7. HP (institution name in Kanji), the institution name that is set in 6. HN (institution
name) is displayed. It sets whether to use the long type format as the film character format. When it is set
to 1: YES, the long type format is used, so that right or left justification of characters
13. TH (trimming amount for mammo type)
complies with the selection in 47. JSTFY of SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG).
The four sides of the IP image for HR is trimmed.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
14. TE (trimming amount for other than mammo type) The long type format function is intended to extend the number of characters outputted to the
HI-C655QA, film, and operation panel. When this function is used, the long character output
The four sides of the IP image for ST is trimmed.
is enabled in the setting of IDT-IV (A07/B07 or later).
15. CL (date display type)
A display sample is indicated. 41. FRSC (setting of film output with frame/without ruler): Software
17. FR1 (14"x17"/14"x14"/18*43 single image frame display) version A10 or later
The frame is not displayed if the format is misaligned. Used to determine whether to output film with frame/without ruler. It is set by the MPM
code.
18. FR2 (18*43 twin/2-in-1 image frame display) Up to eight MPM codes may be set. However, if without frame is set in FRT1/FR2/
The frame is not displayed if the format is misaligned. FR4, the resulting film output is without frame/without ruler.
Only when with frame is set in FRT1/FR2/FR4, the setting defined in FRSC is
20. CR (compression ratio display switching) effective.
Used to switch whether the compression ratio of the image is displayed or not during Setup example 1)
image reoutput.
FRSC= 0000 0200 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
21. MM (margin designation switching) With MPM codes of 0000 and 0200 only, the film output is with frame/without ruler.
Used to specify whether the margin is transparent or black. Setup example 2)
0: The margin is either transparent or black depending on the image information. FRSC= ???? XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
When not designated in the image information, it is transparent by default. With all the MPM codes, the film output is with frame/without ruler.
1: The margin is either transparent or black depending on the image information. Setup example 3)
When not designated in the image information, it is black by default.
FRSC= 020? XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: Always transparent.
With MPM codes of 0200-020F only, the film output is with frame/without ruler.
3: Always black.
22. SG (14x17/14x14 LP magnification mode)

Used to switch whether the output is magnified to 14"x17"/14"x14" LP before output.
Permission from the Service Headquarters is required before changing this parameter.
009-051-06
04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
Detailed Explanation about Area Indication Output Format of Area 0 and Area 1
Area indications for closely related ones of the PRINT setup items are detailed below. For areas 0 and 1, their output position and display position (rotational position) on each film
There are two types of area indications. may be set.
Area 0 Selection of area indication
The hospital name, patient name, sex, patient ID, age or birth date, exposure date, exposure With item 26. CE, indication of either area 0 or area 1 is selected.
time, set processing information, and department name are indicated.
Designation of area size
Example)
For the standard size, it is designated with 27. CSX0, 28. CSY0, 29. CSZ1, and 30. CSY1.
XXXXX Hospital name CSX0 CSX1
XXXXX Patient name
[ X] 7901900000 2 Sex, patient ID, age CSY0 CSY1
Area 0 Area 1
XXXXX 1998. 10. 16 [ 10:00 ] Exposure date, exposure time
FR1B1245.EPS
L->R***** ES 102-01 Set processing information
XXXXX -A000000 Department name For the large size, it is designated with 31. CLX0, 32. CLY0, 33. CLX1, and 34. CLY1.
FR1B1243.EPS
CLX0 CLX1
Area 1
The IP number, EDR mode/menu code, system ID/image number, image condition, normal- CLY0 Area 0 CLY1 Area 1
ization condition, correction item, engineer code, exposure bed information, and compres-
FR1B1246.EPS
sion code are indicated.
Example) Definition of area position and rotation
Gradation processing
The definition of area position and rotation is as follows.
IP number
No
rotation
EDR mode
90
Position Position rotation
Menu code 0 1
System ID
Image number
Frequency processing
Film area of one frame Film area of one frame
03012246 0200 0200
1. 0G#1. 6-0. 20 4R0. 5 3V1. 0 1D-USM
2. 0 20000 *1. 0*1. 0 Correction term
80KV10mAs XX: 22 System sensitivity
Position Position
Data compression code 2 3
Exposure table information

Definition of position Definition of rotation
Latitude FR1B1241.EPS
FR1B1244.EPS

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
With items 36. FC1 through 36. FC4 of Film Setup, four types of area displays may 7.4 Network-Related Setup Items
be set. For each of the types, up to eight MPM codes may be set.
For image data with MPM code that is not set, the setting of 35. FD1417 is used (for When a network connection is to be made, the following configuration utility setup data must
14"x17"). be entered.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING

A wildcard ? may be used for one letter of a MPM code that may be set with items FC1
through FC4. ? denotes any letter, from 0 to F. 0.QUIT
Example) 123? Represents a MPM code, from 1230 to 123F.
1.SYSTEM
2.PRINT
How to set up
3.REMOTE SWITCH
Position/rotation definition MPM code (Up to eight codes may be set)
4.EQUIPMENT
0031 : 0123 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 789A
5.LOCAL INTERFACE
90 rotation for area 1 (0: disabled, 1: enabled) 6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE

Position of area 1 (0: upper left, 1: upper right, 2: lower left, 3: lower right)
7.HOSTS ADDRESS
90 rotation for area 0 (0: disabled, 1: enabled)
8.DISTRIBUTION
Position for area 1 (0: upper left, 1: upper right, 2: lower left, 3: lower right)
FR1B1242.EPS 9.ROUTING
Setup example) 10.NETMASKS

FC1=0031:0123 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 789A
11.DICOM (Base on DICOM)
FR1H1407.EPS
Area 0
Area 1
Area 0 = position (0), rotation disabled (0)

Area 1 = position (3), 90 rotation enabled (1)
FR1B1247.EPS

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
7.5 REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) 7.6 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)

It sets remote switch ON/OFF of the intelligent hub. Because it is an indent item, it may not It sets to determine which HOST is requested to process filing function, display function,
be typically set. print function, and ID information acquisition function.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Format
Intelligent hub: A hub that complies with SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).
Function HostName ( HostName . . . )

Format
denotes a space.
IP address,root,parameter
Function (function)
Function requested for the host that is set in HostName (host name).
IP address (IP address)
OD_FILE Filing function
IP address that is set in the HOSTS file. DISPLAY Display function
7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) PRINT Print function
IDT ID information acquisition function
Parameter
HostName (host name)
When ON NOPK 1000
When OFF NOPK 0000 A host that is responsible for the function specified by Function (function) may be set.
denotes a space. If multiple hosts are set with IDT, the host that is first set is used preferentially. The next
host will be used when its immediately preceding host experiences failure or any other
trouble.
Setup Example
If multiple units are connected with PRINT, OD_FILE, and DISPLAY, the output designa-
REMOTE SWITCH is set to ON.
tion can be designated by user setting.
An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below.
With the CR-IR341, the number of hosts that may be set for one function is restricted as
follows.
IDT Up to five IDTs
| # |
| #RMT_SW.CFG | PRINT LOCAL and one host name, or up to two host names
| # | Other Up to two
| | It should be noted that the setup for HostName (host name) is as follows.
| [ON] | LOCAL
| #172.16.0.128,root,NOPK 1000" | A host connected over an E-I/F or serial line. It is designated when direct connection
| | is to be established.
| [OFF] | LOCAL_S
| #172.16.0.128,root,NOPK 0000" | A host connected over an E-I/F or serial line. It is designated when direct connection
| | is to be established. Note, however, that high-resolution data transfer is not sup-
| 172.16.0.128,root,NOPK 1000" | ported.
LOCAL_R
It is designated when print output is to be provided only during reoutput, without
generating printout during reading.
During reading, images are transferred only to the HIC/QA-WS, where image checks/
adjustments are performed, and then they are routed from the HIC/QA-WS, to the
CR-IR341, and to the printer for reoutput.
NOTE
No output can be generated directly to the printer from the CR-IR341 where
LOCAL_R setting is made.

11.20.99 FM2638 08.30.2001 FM3115
Host name that is set in the HOSTS file 7.7 LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE)
A network-connected host. It is designated when network connection is to be estab-
lished. It defines the setup information for communication requirements over serial line connection.
7.9 HOST ADDRESS (HOSTS) No change is necessary because the initial value is used as is.
NOTE
Setup Example
Only when CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FL-IM3543N is connected to CR-IR341 (A07 or
OD_FILE Network-connected to odf624.
later) (including cases where it is connected as a backup printer), the setup value for N1 in
DISPLAY Network connections to hic654 and hic655 (multiple connections) the 2. LIF: siosetup.lp file should be changed from 005 to 010.
PRINT LOCAL connection and network-connected to fn-ps551.
IDT Network-connected to fcridt4-1 and fcridt4-2.
| # |
| # EQUIP |
| # |
| # Function Host Name [Host Name]... |
| # Function = OD_FILE or DISPLAY or PRINT or IDT |
| OD_FILE odf624 |
| DISPLAY hic654 hic655 |
| PRINT LOCAL fn-ps551 |
| IDT fcridt4-1 fcridt4-2 |
Precaution When Used as CR-IR341P System

The CR-IR341P is only connectable to the CR-IR348CL, so that only DISPLAY and IDT
may be described as function names in the configuration.
A setup example is presented below.
| # |
| # EQUIP |
| # |
| IDT iip-1, iip-2 |
| DISPLAY iip-1 |

08.30.2001 FM3115 11.20.99 FM2638
7.8 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) Setup Example
It may define functions, communication protocols, and transfer rates of each host. The host hic654 setup content
must be a device that is connected to a network. Attributes of display function (DISPLAY) and active file enabled (HD_FILE) are set. The
protocol is set to FINP, with the system code and transfer speed omitted.
Format
odf624 setup content
HostName : Attr|Attr,[Protocol ID],[System code],[Speed]
An attribute of archive file enabled (OD_FILE) is set. The protocol is set to FINP, with the
system code and transfer speed omitted.
HostName (host name) fn-ps551 setup content
Host name that is set in the HOSTS file.
Attributes of film output enabled (PRINT) are set. The protocol is set to FINP, with the
7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) system code and transfer speed omitted.
Attr (attribute)
One of the following should be designated. Multiple attributes can be designated by delimit-
ing them by |. | # |
PRINT Film output enabled | # DEVICE |
HD_FILE Active file enabled | # |
| # Host Name:Attr|Attr,[Protocol ID],[System code],[Speed] |
DISPLAY Display function
| # Attr = PRINT or HD_FILE or DISPLAY or OD_FILE |
OD_FILE Archive file enabled | # Protocol ID = 0100(FINP) or 0110(FINP) or 0200(DICOM) |
| # System code = Hex 2 figures |
Protocol ID (protocol identification number)
| # Speed = Dec [Kbytes/sec] (default 8Kbytes/sec) |
It is set in four hexadecimal digits. It may be omitted by entering ,. When it is omitted, it is | hic654:DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0100,, |
set to 0100 (FINP). | odf624:OD_FILE,0100,, |
0001 DMSP | fn-ps551:PRINT,0100,, |
0100,0110 FINP (Fuji integrated network protocol)
0200 Base on DICOM
If it is necessary to use the image processing exclusive selection flag, the protocol Precaution When Used as CR-IR341P System
identification number needs to be set to either 0100, 0110, or 0200.
The CR-IR341P is only connectable to the CR-IR348CL, so that only HD-FILE and DIS-
System code (system type code) PLAY may be described as attribute names in the configuration.
It is set in two hexadecimal digits. It may be omitted by entering ,.
Speed (transfer speed)

| # |
It is set in decimal notation. It may be omitted by entering ,. When it is omitted, it is set to | # DEVICE |
8. | # |
| # Protocol ID = 0100(FINP) or 0110(FINP) or 0200(DICOM) |
| # Speed = Dec [Kbytes/sec] (default 8Kbytes/sec) |
| iip: DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0200,, |
009-051-05
11.20.99 FM2638
04.20.2001 FM3006 08.30.2001 FM3115
7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) Setup Example

CR-IR341 2 units
For all the hosts connected over the same network, their IP addresses should be set. IDT-IV 2 units
One host should be defined per line. Up to 127 hosts can be defined. HI-C 1 unit
OD-F 1 unit
Format
FN-PS551 1 unit
IP Addr Host Name An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below.
denotes a space.
| # |
IP Addr (IP address) | # HOSTS |
| # |
An IP address is set in the form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, using numerals ranging from 0 to 255. | # Host Name = Max 10 characters |
xxx denotes 0 through 255. | #(Available Character:a-z 0-9' -[37chars]) |
| # IP Addr Host Name |
NOTES | 172.16.0.1 fcr5000a |
To one CR-IR341 machine, be sure to assign both a standard LAN IP address (CPU90E) | 172.16.0.2 fcr5000a-1 |
and a LAN board IP address (CPU90F/LAN90B). | 172.16.0.11 fcr5000b |
Example) 172.16.0.1 fcr5000a ... CR-IR341#1 (CPU90E) | 172.16.0.12 fcr5000b-1 |
172.16.0.2 fcr5000a-1 ... CR-IR341#1 (CPU90F/LAN90B) | 172.16.0.21 fcridt4-1 |
Be sure to match the standard LAN IP address (CPU90E) and LAN board IP address | 172.16.0.22 fcridt4-2 |
(CPU90F) to the IP addresses set in item No. 3 IPS and item No. 4 IPI of SYSTEM: | 172.16.0.101 hic654 |
IRSET.CFG, respectively.
| 172.16.0.102 odf624 |
| 172.16.0.103 fn-ps551 |
Host Name (host name)
A host name is set within 10 characters, using lowercase alphabets (a through z), numerals
(0 through 9), and hyphen (-).
NOTES Precaution When Used as CR-IR341P System
If any alphabet is used in a host name, be sure to use lowercase letters. The CR-IR341P is only connectable to the CR-IR348CL, so that the host name (IP address)
The initial letter of a host name should always be a lowercase alphabet. that may be described in the configuration is only for itself and the CR-IR348CL.
| # |
| # HOSTS |
| # |
| # Host Name = Max 10 characters |
| #(Available Character:'a'-'z' '0'-'9' '-'[37chars]) |
| # IP Addr Host Name |
| 172.16.0.1 fcr5000 |
| 172.16.0.2 fcr5000-n |
| 172.16.1.20 CRxxxxxxxx |
* CRxxxxxxxx: CL host name (xxxxxxxx: CL product number)
CR-IR default setup value

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
7.10 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) 7.11 ROUTING (ROUTE)

It sets the distribution destination for network connection. One distribution code should be It sets the information about the router address in the network and about the network con-
defined per line. Up to 128 lines of distribution code can be defined. nection, when a router is used for connection to another network.
Format Format (A07 or Earlier)
Code Host Name ( HostName . . . ) Dst Addr [Host Name] [Host IP],[Seg Size],[Win Size],[Delay Timer],[Rate]
denotes a space. denotes a space.

Code (distribution destination code) Dst Addr (transfer destination IP address)
An IP address of a transfer destination. For the IP address of the transfer destination, a
A distribution destination code is set in eight alphanumeric characters or ?. ? denotes a transfer destination address of an individual host or a transfer destination network address
match with any one character. should be set. When the transfer destination network address is set, the host number portion
of the IP address should be set to 0.
Host Name (host name)
Host Name (name of router)
The host name that is set in the HOSTS file should be set. Up to four host names can be set It may be omitted when Host IP (IP address of router) is set.
by delimiting them with a space.
Host IP (IP address of router)
7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
Host IP may be omitted when Host Name that is set in the HOST file is set.
Setup Example Seg Size (TCP segment size)
The distribution code is set. The TCP segment size is set in bytes. Seg Size may be omitted.
HI-C AA0123?? Win Size (TCP window size)
An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below. The TCP window size is set in bytes. Win Size may be omitted.
Delay Timer (TCP ACK delay timer)
The TCP ACK delay timer value is set in multiples of the reference value. Delay Timer may
| # |
be omitted.
| # Codedstb |
| # | Rate (transfer rate)
| # Code Host Name [HostName]... | The overall transfer rate, up to the destination including any router, is set in bytes/sec. Rate
| AA0123?? hic654 | may be omitted.
Format (A08 or Later)
Precaution When Used as CR-IR341P System (Dst-Addr | Dst-Network-Addr) (Router-Name | Router-Addr),,,,

When connected as the CR-IR341P to the CR-IR348CL, DISTRIBUTION is used in a differ-
ent manner than with the CR-IR341 system (setting of distribution for network connection). denotes a space.
With the CR-IR341P, DISTRIBUTION is set only if multiple CR-IR348CL units are connected Dst-Addr | Dst-Network-Addr (destination IP address or destination network
to the CR-IR341P. IP address)
Appendix 9 Procedures for Connecting with CR Console (CR-IR348CL) in Installation Either the destination IP address or the destination network IP address is set.
Volume
Router-Name | Router-Addr (router name or router IP address)
Either the Host Name of the router or the IP address of the router is set.

08.30.2001 FM3115 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
7.12 NETMASKS (NETMASKS) 7.13 DICOM (Base on DICOM)

Perform DICOM setup for the CR-IR and CL.
It sets the network number and subnet mask when connection is established with another
network. Format
The subnet mask indicate a range the network number portion represents in the IP address
(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where xxx denotes 0 to 255). HostName,ServiceName:AEName,[PortNo.],[SOPType],[CompType],[Timeout1],
Format [Timeout2],[DensityType]
Network netmask HostName

Enter the host name that is defined by HOSTS or DEVICE.
denotes a space.
Network (network number) ServiceName
It sets a network number of the network to which the CR-IR341 is connected. Set STORAGE_U, for the local machine and STORAGE_P for the CL.
netmask (subnet mask) AEName

It specifies a range the network number portion represents in the IP address. Set the DICOM standard Application Entity name (consisting of up to 16 ASCII characters).
It is set in the form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx denotes a decimal numeral ranging from
0 to 255), and the bit of the portion handled as the network number is set to 1, while the bit PortNo.
of the portion handled as the host number is set to 0. Set the TCP port number that the Base-on-DICOM application uses.
It is classified into the following network classes according to the range of the network This entry is meaningless for the transmitting end. The default setting is 104.
number portion.
Class A 255.0.0.0 SOPType (SOP Class Type definition)
Class B 255.255.0.0 Although two options are selectable (1: Fuji Private; 2: OEM Private), choose 1.
Class C 255.255.255.0
CompType (image data compression definition)
The narrower the range of the network number portion, the greater portion may be handled
as the host number (the greater for classes C, B, and A in this order). Thus, more host Although two options are selectable (0: no compression; 1: JPEG compression), choose 1.
addresses (IP addresses) may be assigned within the same network (that is, a larger
network may be implemented). Timeout1
NOTE Set the timeout time (in seconds) for the TCP socket connect/recv command.
If the networks for the CPU90E and CPU90F are the same, the same net mask should be
set for both. If the CPU90F is not available, the net mask for the CPU90F is left on its Timeout2
default, regardless of its setting value. Set the timeout time (in seconds) for one-image transfer.
Setup Example
DensityType
Network 172.16.0.0
Set the output density for each output destination unit. 1 should always be set.
netmask 255.255.0.0
| # |
| # Network masks database |
| # |
| # only non-default subnet masks need to be defined here |
| # |
| # Network netmask |
| 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0 |

08.30.2001 FM3115 03.20.2004 FM4275
Setup Example 7.14 Backing Up Configuration File

The following example (bolded entry portion) shows how to enter the DICOM settings.
The configuration file that has been set is backed up.
CAUTIONS
| # |
Never power OFF the machine or press the FD eject button during file saving. The FD or
| # DICOM | FD drive may be damaged.
| # | Once a setup file is edited, be sure to reset the machine after exiting M-Utility.
| # HostName,ServiceName:AEName,[PortNo.],[SOPType], |
| # [CompType],[Timeout1],[Timeout2],[DensityType] | (1) Put a backup floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
| # HostName = Host name defined by hosts & device | (2) Touch the U-Utility button.
| # ServiceName = STORAGE_U or STORAGE_P | The screen switches to the U-Utility mode.
| # AEName = Application Entity Name defined by DICOM | (3) Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence.
| # (Max 16 ascii characters) | M-Utility is activated.
| # PortNo. = TCP Port Number connected to | Routine screen
(screen made to CSL specification) U-Utility screen
| # Dicom application(100:default). |
| # SOPType = SOP Class Type | Deleting images
waiting for
Processed image
| # 1:Fuji Private,2:OEM Private | Output
1 Touch panel
Click sound destination
parallax correction
| # CompType = Compression Type | 2 selection
3
| # 0:No(Implicit little endian),1:JPEG | 4
CRT test pattern
display
Multiframe forced
output
FD operation
Menu selecting icon
| # Timeout1 = connect/recv command Timeout [sec](0:endless) | 8" x 10" film
reduced output
setup
| # Timeout2 = Every Image Trans. Timeout [sec](0:endless) | 0
Utility Return
| # DensityType = Output Image Density |
| # 0:Standard Density | U-Utility button
| # 1:Standard Density or High Quality Density |

M-Utility screen
| # Which Density is to be chosen depends on ID Information. |
0. QUIT
| # ex) | : Area to be touched 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
A B C
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING D E F
| # fcr5000-n ,STORAGE_U :DPR_DICOM,,2,1,100,600,1 | 3. TEST MODE
5. SCANNER UTILITY
| # dest-1 ,STORAGE_P :DPR_DICOM,21760,2,1,100,600,1 | 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 4 5 6
7. FILE UTILITY
| fcr5000-n,STORAGE_U:DICOM_IR,,1,1,100,600,1 | 8. BACKUP MEMORY 1 2 3
9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
| CRxxxxxxxx,STORAGE_P:DICOM_IIP,21760,1,1,100,600,1 | NOTES: For the IDT type, the "menu selecting icon" 0 . SP
does not appear. DEL BS ENT

output" button will not appear. Caps
* CRxxxxxxxx: CL host name (xxxxxxxx: CL product number) The IDT type includes CR-IR348CL connection.
FR1B1086.EPS

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
(4) Select 7. FILE UTILITY. (6) Select 3. BACK UP, 3. NETWORK DATA and 1.YES in sequence.
0. QUIT >7
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY A B C A B C
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING 0.QUIT
3. TEST MODE 1.FORMAT FD
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY D E F 2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION D E F
5. SCANNER UTILITY 3.BACK UP
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 4.RESTORE
7. FILE UTILITY 7 8 9 5.EDR DATA 7 8 9
8. BACKUP MEMORY 6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE
9. HV OFF 7.EXECUTION
10. MENU SETTING 4 5 6 FUT> 3 4 5 6
>7
0.QUIT
1 2 3 1.SCANNER DATA 1 2 3
2.CONFIGURATION DATA
3.NETWORK DATA
0 . SP 4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA 0 . SP
5.CSL MENU DATA
FUT:RES>3
DEL BS ENT DEL BS ENT
Caps Caps
FR1B1200.EPS FR1B1225.EPS
Of the setup files, the following files are saved to the floppy disk.
(5) Select 3. BACK UP and 2. CONFIGURATION DATA and 1.YES in sequence.
REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG)
>7 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)
A B C
0.QUIT NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)
1.FORMAT FD
2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION D E F HOSTS ADDRESS (HOST)
3.BACK UP
4.RESTORE DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB)
5.EDR DATA 7 8 9
6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE ROUTING (ROUTE)
7.EXECUTION
FUT> 3 4 5 6 NETMASKS (NETMASKS)
0.QUIT DICOM (DICOM)
1.SCANNER DATA 1 2 3
2.CONFIGURATION DATA NOTE
3.NETWORK DATA
4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA 0 . SP The menu parameters saved in the floppy disk also contain the language setting for the
5.CSL MENU DATA machine. Thus, if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP,
FUT:RES>2
DEL BS ENT the file cannot be read during RESTORE.
Caps
(7) Select 0. QUIT repeatedly.
The screen returns to the U-Utility mode.
FR1B1214.EPS
Of the setup files, the following files are saved to the floppy disk.
SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG,IRSET.ORG)
PRINT (FILFMT.CFG,FILFMT.ORG)
IRSTATUS (IRSTATUS.CFG,IRSTATUS.ORG)
NOTE
The menu parameters saved in the floppy disk also contain the language setting for the
machine. Thus, if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP,
the file cannot be read during RESTORE.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
7.15 Network-Related Setup Example NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)
An example of how to change the settings of the network-related configuration file is | # |

presented below. Referring to this example, configuration file settings should be made as
| # DEVICE |
appropriate for each system configuration.
| # |
Setup Example 1
Two units of the IDT-IV are connected to the CPU90E board of the machine via a 10Base-T | # Protocol ID = 0100(FINP) or 0110(FINP) or 0200(DICOM) |
hub.
The OD-F624, HI-C654 and FN-PS551 are connected to the CPU90F board of the | # Speed = Dec [Kbytes/sec] (default 8Kbytes/sec) |
machine via a 10Base-T hub. | hic654:DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0100,, |
The machine and FL-IMD are connected via the E-i/f (IMG08A). | odf624:OD_FILE,0100,, |
The host is temporarily connected (including virtual equipment). | fn-ps551:PRINT,0100,, |
The Hostname of each CR unit installed at a hospital, including the CR-IR341 itself,
should be registered so that the configuration file can easily copied and restored to other
units. HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
A example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below.
| # |
| # HOSTS |
REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG)
| # |
| # Host Name = Max 10 characters |
| # | | #(Available Character:a-z 0-9' -[37chars]) |
| #RMT_SW.CFG | | # IP Addr Host Name |
| # | | 172.16.0.1 fcr5000a |
| 172.16.0.128,root,NOPK 1000" | | 172.16.0.2 fcr5000a-1 |
| 172.16.0.11 fcr5000b |
| 172.16.0.12 fcr5000b-1 |
| 172.16.0.21 fcridt4-1 |
EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) | 172.16.0.22 fcridt4-2 |
| 172.16.0.101 hic654 |
| # | | 172.16.0.102 odf624 |
| # EQUIP | | 172.16.0.103 fn-ps551 |
| # |
DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB)
| OD_FILE odf624 |
| DISPLAY hic654 | | # |
| PRINT LOCAL fn-ps551 | | # Codedstb |
| IDT fcridt4-1 fcridt4-2 | | # |
| # Code Host Name [HostName]... |
| AA0123?? hic654 |

03.20.2004 FM4275 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
NETMASKS (NETMASKS) Setup Example 2: QA-WS Connection

For the QA-WS connection, perform the following setup procedures.
| # | NOTES
| # | The HCP08A board (optional) and CPU90F board (optional) must be installed in the control
| # Network masks database | rack.
| # | The Fuji Base-on-DICOM option software must be installed.
| # only non-default subnet masks need to be defined here |
| # |
SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)
| # Network netmask |
| 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0 | For 2. IPS and 3. IPI, set appropriate IP addresses.
For 45. UID_STI, set an appropriate examination instance user ID.
EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)
Set the transfer destination QA-WS host name (qa-ws1) as the DISPLAY attribute.
To deliver the re-output from the QA-WS to the printer instead of directly delivering the
output from the image reader to the printer, set LOCAL_R as the PRINT attribute.
| # |
| DISPLAY qa-ws1 |
| PRINT LOCAL_R |
NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)

Set the host information about the transfer destination QA-WS.
| # |
| qa-ws1:DISPLAY,0200,, |
HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)

Set the IP address and host name of the local machine and transfer destination QA-WS.
| # |
| 172.16.0.100 fcr5000n-1 |
| 172.16.0.200 qa-ws1 |
ROUTING (ROUTE)
If the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader is not within the same network, set the
IP address of the router that serves as the exit of the local network. If the destination image
reader is within the same network, this setting is not required.

03.20.2004 FM4275 11.20.99 FM2638
NETMASKS (NETMASKS) Setup Example 3: Printer Output Setup for Each Network Connection
If the transfer destination QA-WS is not within the same network, set the subnet mask. If the
NOTE
transfer destination QA-WS is within the same network, there is no need to make this entry
again. The HCP08A board (optional) and CPU90F board (optional) must be installed in the control
rack.
DICOM (Base on DICOM)
Perform network-specific printer output setup as indicated below.
Perform Base on DICOM setup for both the local machine and transfer destination QA-WS.
The format to be used is indicated below. SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)
For 2. IPS and 3. IPI, set appropriate IP addresses.
HostName,ServiceName:AEName,[PortNo.],[SOPType],[CompType],[Timeout1],[Timeout2],[DensityType] EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)
HostName Set the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader host name as the PRINT attribute.
Enter the host name that is defined by HOSTS or DEVICE. Note that only one 5000 Series image reader unit can be added.
ServiceName
Set STORAGE_U for the local machine and STORAGE_P for the QA-WS.
AEName | # |
Set the DICOM standard Application Entity name (consisting of up to 16 ASCII | PRINT LOCAL fcr5000n-2 |
characters).
PortNo.
NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)
Set the TCP port number that the Base-on-DICOM application uses. This entry is
meaningless for the transmitting end. The default setting is 104. Set the host information about the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination.
SOPType (SOP Class Type definition)
Although two options are selectable (1: FINP; 2: OEM), choose 1.
CompType (image data compression definition) | # |
Although two options are selectable (0: no compression; 1: JPEG compression), | fcr5000n-2:PRINT,0100,, |
choose 1.
Timeout1
Set the timeout time (in seconds) for the TCP socket connect/recv command. HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
Timeout2
Set the timeout time (in seconds) for one-image transfer. Set the IP address of the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination.
DensityType
Set the output density for each output destination unit. 1 should always be set.
| # |
The following example (bolded entry portion) shows how to enter the above settings.
| 172.16.0.100 fcr5000n-2 |
| # |
| # DICOM | ROUTING (ROUTE)
| # | If the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader is not within the same network, set the
| # HostName,ServiceName:AEName, [PortNo.],[SOPType], | IP address of the router that serves as the exit of the local network. If the destination image
| # [CompType],[Timeout1],[Timeout2], | reader is within the same network, this setting is not required.
| # [DensityType] |
NETMASKS (NETMASKS)
| # |
| # ServiceName = STORAGE_U | STORAGE_P | QR_U | If the transfer destination QA-WS is not within the same network, set the subnet mask. If the
| # | QR_P | PRINT_U | PRINT_P | transfer destination QA-WS is within the same network, there is no need to make this entry
again.
| # |
| fcr5000n-1,STORAGE_U :5000_DICOM,,1,1,100,600,1 | Setup Example 4: CR-IR348CL Connection
| qa-ws1,STORAGE_P :hic655qa-scp,5045,1,1,100,600,1 |
Appendix 9 Procedures for Connecting with CR Console (CR-IR348CL) in Installation
volume
08.30.2001 FM3115 08.30.2001 FM3115
Setup Example of Conveyance Test Operation Mode

8. 3. TEST MODE: Operation Setup
An example of how to set the operation mode for checking the mechanism of the IP convey-
ance function is presented below.
It is used when the IP conveyance operation is to be checked and for other purposes. After
checking the conveyance operation, 1: ROUTINE should be selected to return the machine NOTE
back to the state suitable for routine processing. When 2. AUTO MODE is selected, be sure to set the operation mode of routine processing
(1. ROUTINE) before executing the routine processing. If the routine processing is executed
8.1 1. ROUTINE: Setting Operation Mode of Routine without this setting, operation error may result.
Processing
(1) Select 3. TEST MODE.
The settings made in 2. AUTO MODE are canceled and the machine is rendered into a (2) Select 2. AUTO MODE.
state appropriate for routine processing. The operation modes are displayed.
Be sure to perform this setup before performing routine processing after 2. AUTO MODE is (3) Select 3. SECONDARY ERASURE.
selected.
A prompt asking you to enter the number of times appears.
(4) Enter 5 (the number of times it is executed).
8.2 2. AUTO MODE: Setting Operation Mode of Conveyance (5) Select 0. QUIT to return to the U-Utility screen.
Test (6) Touch the RETURN button.
The mode returns to the routine screen.
With the settings of the operation mode and the number of conveyance, when the IP cas-
sette is put into the cassette set unit in the routine processing mode, IPs are automatically (7) Put the cassette into the machine.
conveyed a set number of times. IPs are conveyed the number of times that was set in step (4).
Three types of operation modes are available as follows.
1. READING & ERASURE

Reading operation is performed as usual to output an image, while the image on the IP is
erased.
This mode is used to test the image reading function, along with the IP conveyance function.
2. PRIMARY ERASURE
The image is read to detect the dosage on the IP, and IP erasure is performed according to
the dosage.
The image so read is not outputted because the objective of this mode is to detect the
amount of erasure for the IP.
This mode is used when it is not necessary to test the image reading function but the image
on the IP used for conveyance is to be erased.
3. SECONDARY ERASURE
The IP is conveyed through the reading unit without reading the image, and its erasure is
performed quickly regardless of the dosage on the IP.
This mode is used to merely check the mechanism of the IP conveyance function.

11.20.99 FM2638 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
9. 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY: Electrical Diagnostics 9.4 4. LAN: LAN Test
Diagnostic checks are performed to determine whether there is anything abnormal with the SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
electrical-related parts. For the machine with the LAN90B installed as a network board, those described or displayed as
Erasure lamp CPU90F should be read as LAN90B.
Image memory
Image processing board 1. ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS: To Display MAC Address of CPU Board
Network For the CPU90E and CPU90F boards, their Ethernet MAC addresses are displayed. If the
HDD CPU90F board is not installed, only the MAC address of the CPU90E is displayed.
FDD
2. PING: To Execute ping
9.1 1. ERASURE LAMP TEST: Erasure Lamp Turn-On Test Diagnostic checks are performed to determine whether communication can be established
between the destination host and the LAN (CPU90E/CPU90F) of the machine.
It can be checked to see whether the erasure lamp turns on or off. (1) Execute 2.PING.
Once executed, this mode ends with the No. of erasure lamp selected and its test result The following message appears.
displayed. INPUT THE CONNECTED HOST-NAME OR IP ADDRESS.
Meaning: Enter the host name or IP address of the host connected.
9.2 2. IMAGE MEMORY TEST: Image Memory Test
This mode is used to test the image memory that is a shared portion of the memory, and (2) Enter the host name or IP address of the host connected.
ends with its test result displayed. If the CPU90F board has been installed in the machine, the following message
If an error is detected, the mode ends with the error-causing memory address indicated in X, appears after input.
Y coordinates on the memory. SELECT BOARD.
1.CPU90E 2.CPU90F :
9.3 3. DSP TEST: Self Diagnostics of Image Processing Board Meaning: Select the board.
If the CPU90F board has not been installed in the machine, the following message
An image processing board is self-diagnosed, with the device name and diagnostic result appears.
indicated for each board. If an error is detected, the mode continues with diagnostics of the
CPU90F BOARD HAS NOT MOUNTED.
next board, with the device name and error code displayed.
Meaning: The CPU90F board is not available.
Device name (device name of image processing board)
/dsp/lp1, /dsp/lp2, /dsp/hy1, /dsp/hy2, /dsp/hy3, (3) Type in either 1 or 2.
/dsp/pm1, /dsp/pm2, /dsp/dms, /dsp/scn, /dsp/hcp A ping test is initiated, with the following message displayed.
lp1,lp2 : IMG08A PING TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
hy1,hy2,hy3 : IMG08B RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR)
hy1,hy2,hy3,hy4 : IMG08H Meaning: A ping test is now being performed.
pm1,pm2 : IMG08C
dms : DMC08A
scn : IMG07B
hcp : HCP08A
Diagnostic result
OK: Normal
ERROR (ZZZZZZ): Abnormal
NO EXISTENCE: DSP (board) is not available.

03.20.2004 FM4275 08.30.2001 FM3115
3. CPU90F DMA 9.5 5. HDD: HDD Test

This menu should not be used.
1. WRITE-READ VERIFY: Write and Read Tests to HD

Diagnostic checks are performed to determine whether the hard disk drive is operating
normally.
Execute 1. WRITE-READ VERIFY.
Once the test is executed, the following message appears.
HDD WRITE-READ VERIFY TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR)
Meaning: HDD WRITE-READ VERIFY is now being executed.
If anything abnormal is found during HDD device initialization, the process is inter-
rupted, with the following message displayed.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.
9.6 6. FDD: FDD Test
1. WRITE-READ VERIFY: Write and Read Tests to FD

Diagnostic checks are performed to determine whether the floppy disk drive is operating
normally.
(1) Put a floppy disk (1.44MB) into the floppy disk drive.
(2) Execute 1. WRITE-READ VERIFY.
Once the test is executed, the following message appears.
FDD WRITE-READ VERIFY TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: FDD WRITE-READ VERIFY is now being executed.
If anything abnormal is found during FDD device initialization, the process is inter-
rupted, with the following message displayed.

08.30.2001 FM3115 11.20.99 FM2638
10. 5. SCANNER UTILITY: Scanner Diagnostics and 10.4 4. HV: HV ON/OFF

Setting It is checked whether the HV switch turns ON/OFF normally.
(1) Select 4. HV and 1.OFF in sequence.
It is used during checking or after replacement of main-scan system parts. When the HV switch (software switch) is turned OFF, the following message ap-
pears.
10.1 1. INITIALIZE: Initial Setting of Main-Scan System THE HV IS TURNED OFF.
Execute 1. INITIALIZE.
The following message appears. (2) Select 4. HV and 2.ON in sequence.
SCANNER INITIALIZATION IS IN PROGRESS. The following message appears, with the HV (software switch) turned ON.
RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR) TURNNING ON THE HV IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: Scanner initial setting is now being performed. RESULT - OK
Meaning: HV turn-ON is now being performed.
10.2 2. POLYGON: Polygon Stop/Rotation
The polygon is activated individually. It is used during checking of the polygonal mirror. If anything abnormal is found during execution, either of the following messages
appears.
9.5 Checking and Replacing Polygonal Mirror Assembly in Checks, Adjustment and
Replacement of Parts Volume RESULT - HV ERROR Meaning: High-voltage power supply failure
(1) Select 2. POLYGON and 1. OFF in sequence. ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning: Analog power supply failure
With the following message displayed, the polygon stops. HV OFF Meaning: HV switch OFF
THE POLYGON IS TURNED OFF.
10.5 5. HV DATA: High-Voltage Setting
(2) Select 2. POLYGON and 2. ON in sequence.
With the following message displayed, the polygon starts to rotate. The high-voltage applied to the photomultiplier is set. It is used during checking of the
THE POLYGON IS TURNED ON. PMT08A board.
10.3 Checking and Replacing PMT08A Board in Checks, Adjustment and
Replacement of Parts Volume
10.3 3. LASER: Laser ON/OFF
(1) Select 5. HV DATA.
The laser is generated individually. It is used during checking of the SYN08A board.
9.6 Checking and Replacing SYN08A Board in Checks, Adjustment and Replacement
of Parts Volume INPUT HV VALUE.
(1) Select 3. LASER and 1. OFF in sequence. 250 - 1000 :
With the following message displayed, the laser is turned OFF. Meaning: Enter the HV value.
THE LASER IS TURNED OFF.
(2) Select 3. LASER and 2. ON in sequence. (2) Enter the HV value within a range from 250 to 1000.
As the laser is turned ON, the following message appears. If the HV value is entered outside the range from 250 to 1000, a prompt appears
asking you to enter the value again.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK Once a value within the range from 250 to 1000 is set, the following message
appears, with HV turned ON.
Meaning: Laser turn-ON is now being performed.
SETTING INPUTED HV VALUE IS IN PROGRESS.
If anything abnormal is found during execution, either of the following messages Meaning: HV value setting is now being performed.
appears.
RESULT - LASER POWER INSUFFICIENT
Meaning: The laser power is insufficient.
RESULT - LASER POWER ERROR

Meaning: The laser power is faulty.
11.20.99 FM2638 (1) 11.20.99 FM2638
10.6 6. FORMAT: Setting Read Start Position and Read Width 2. FREQ ADJUST: To Adjust Read Width
The read width is adjusted. The setup value is not written to the hard disk.
The IP read start position (PIXEL) and the read width (FREQ) are temporarily set. Note, (1) Select 2. FREQ ADJUST.
however, that because the setup value in the hard disk is not overwritten, the data so
obtained is lost upon resetting. The following message appears.
INPUT MAIN SCAN LENGH ADJUSTMENT VALUE.
Writing the settings to the hard disk is done in 8. DATA MANAGEMENT.
-5.00 - +5.00 :
For more detail about the procedures for adjusting the read start position and read width,
see the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment Volume.
(2) Enter the read width adjustment value over a range from -5.00 to 5.00 (in %).
9.1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width in Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment Volume Enter an incremental or decremental value in percentage relative to the current read
width.
FREQ
<Example>
(-) (+) Enter the read width adjustment
value (a value in percentage, To increment the read width on the output screen from 172 mm to 175 mm:
to which increments/decrements
relative to the current read width (175 - 172)/172 x 100 1.74
is converted).
Thus, enter 1.74.
The result is displayed.
RESULT - XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX represents the result (OK: normal, ERROR: error)
(-) (+)
3. PIXEL ADJUST: To Adjust Read Start Position
Enter the read start position adjustment value
(a value, which is converted from the output image The read start position is adjusted. The setup value is not written to the hard disk.
PIXEL to the actual dimensional value on IP) in pixels
(1 pixel = 0.1 mm). (1) Select 3. PIXEL ADJUST.
FR1H2000.EPS
1. DEFAULT: To Display Result after Setting Read Start Position and Read Width to INPUT INVALID PIXELS.
Their Default -999 - 999 :
The read start position (PIXEL) and read width (FREQ) are set to their default. The setup
values are not written to the hard disk.
(2) Enter the number of pixels shifted for the read start position over a range from -999 to
1. Execute 1. PIXEL AND FREQ, 2. PIXEL ONLY, or 3. FREQ ONLY. 999 (in pixels).
When it is executed normally, the following message appears. Ten pixels correspond to 1 mm in actual measurement on the IP.
FORMAT DATA IS SET TO THE DEFAULT VALUE. To shift rightward on the output image, enter a positive value, and to shift leftward,
Meaning: The format data is set to the default value. enter a negative value.
<Example>
Shifting the two-in-one image of 14"x17" leftward by 1 mm means that it is shifted
leftward by 2 mm on the IP because the reduction ratio is 1/2.
Thus, enter -20.
The result is displayed.
RESULT - XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX represents the result (OK: normal, ERROR: error).

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
4. PIXEL POSITION CORRECTION: Changing the scanner invalid pixel count setting (3) Enter a scanner invalid pixel count setting between -50 and 50 pixels.
Used to change the scanner invalid pixel count setting for each IP size. The setting can be 0. QUIT
saved on the hard disk. 1. 8x10 ST
(1) Choose "4. PIXEL POSITION CORRECTION".
The IP sizes then appear on the display.
0. QUIT
1. 8x10 ST 9. 35x43 ST
2. 10x12 ST 10. 24x30 HR
3. 14x14 ST INPUT THE PIXEL (CURRENT=3)
4. 14x17 ST -50 - 50 : xx [Enter the invalid pixel count.]
5. 18x24 ST A setting of 10 pixels is equivalent to 1 mm when measured on the IP.
6. 18x24 HR For rightward movement within the output screen, enter a plus value. For leftward
7. 24x30 ST movement, enter a minus (-) value.
8. 35x35 ST The display shows the result.
9. 35x43 ST RESULT - xxxxxxxxxx
10. 24x30 HR The "xxxxxxxxxx" portion indicates the result (OK: normal end; ERROR: abnormal
INPUT IP SIZE > end).
(4) Save the setting on the hard disk.
(2) Select an IP size. Choose "8. DATA MANAGEMENT" from SCANNER UTILITY, and then execute "3.
SAVE FORMAT DATA".
The current setting appears on the display.
When the execution ends normally, the following message appears.
0. QUIT
/sd0/SYSTEM/IMG/SCN/SNDPIXEL.DAT IS SAVED
1. 8x10 ST
Meaning: The file "/sd0/SYSTEM/IMG/SCN/SNDPIXEL" is saved.

9. 35x43 ST
10. 24x30 HR
INPUT IP SIZE >1 [IP size selection]
INPUT THE PIXEL (CURRENT=3) [Current setting]
-50 - 50 : 3 [To retain the current setting, press the ENTER key here.]
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
If you press the ENTER key to retain the current setting, you are returned to the format
selection screen.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
5. LINE POSITION CORRECTION: Changing the scanner invalid line (reading start (3) Enter a scanner invalid line count setting (the number of pixels for shifting the reading
position) setting start position) between 1 and 50 pixels.
Used to change the scanner invalid line setting for each IP size. The setting can be saved on 0. QUIT
the hard disk. 1. 8x10 ST
(1) Choose "5. LINE POSITION CORRECTION".
The IP sizes then appear on the display.
0. QUIT
1. 8x10 ST 9. 35x43 ST
2. 10x12 ST 10. 24x30 HR
3. 14x14 ST INPUT THE PIXEL (CURRENT=3)
4. 14x17 ST -50 - 50 : xx [Enter the number of invalid lines.]
5. 18x24 ST A setting of 10 pixels is equivalent to 1 mm when measured on the IP.
6. 18x24 HR For rightward movement within the output screen, enter a plus value. For leftward
7. 24x30 ST movement, enter a minus (-) value.
8. 35x35 ST The display shows the result.
9. 35x43 ST RESULT - xxxxxxxxxx
10. 24x30 HR The "xxxxxxxxxx" portion indicates the result (OK: normal end; ERROR: abnormal
end).
INPUT IP SIZE >
(4) Save the setting on the hard disk.

(2) Select an IP size.
Choose "8. DATA MANAGEMENT" from SCANNER UTILITY, and then execute "3.
The current setting appears on the display.
SAVE FORMAT DATA".
0. QUIT
When the execution ends normally, the following message appears.
1. 8x10 ST
/sd0/SYSTEM/IMG/SCN/SNDLINES.DAT IS SAVED

Meaning: The file "/sd0/SYSTEM/IMG/SCN/SNDLINE" is saved.

9. 35x43 ST
10. 24x30 HR
INPUT IP SIZE >1 [IP size selection]
INPUT THE PIXEL (CURRENT=3) [Current setting]
-50 - 50 : 3 [To retain the current setting, press the ENTER key here.]
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
If you press the ENTER key to retain the current setting, you are returned to the format
selection screen.
03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
10.7 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY: Setting Shading and Sensitivity To Calculate Correction Data

: 2.CALCULATION : 3.SHADING AND POLYGON
Correction Data : 2.CALCULATION : 4.SHADING AND POLYGON FOR BAD CONDITION
The shading and sensitivity correction data is recorded, calculated, and set. Note, however, : 2.CALCULATION : 5.POLYGON ONLY
that because the setup value in the HD is not overwritten, the data so obtained is lost upon
Execute 3. SHADING AND POLYGON, 4. SHADING AND POLYGON FOR BAD
resetting.
CONDITION or 5. POLYGON ONLY.
Writing the settings to the hard disk is done in 8. DATA MANAGEMENT.
When the recorded data is correct, the following message appears.
For more detail about the procedures for shading and sensitivity correction, see the Checks,
CALCULATION IS IN PROGRESS.
Replacement and Adjustment Volume.
9.2 Shading/Sensitivity Correction in Checks, Replacement and Adjustment Volume
Meaning: Correction data calculation is now being performed.
1. REC MODE: To Make Correction Data Recordable
The shading, polygon, and sensitivity correction data is made recordable. If the recorded data is incorrect, the following message appears.
Execute 1. REC MODE. THE DATA IS RECORDED WITH INCORRECT SIZE.
The correction data is now recordable, with the following message displayed. Meaning: The data has been recorded with wrong size.
THE SPECIAL MODE TO RECORD ADJUSTMENT DATA IS SET.
3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION: To Apply Correction to Image
Meaning: The correction data recording mode is set.
When 2. ON is executed, the corrected data becomes effective in the routine mode.
NOTE
Execute 3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION: 2. ON.
REC MODE (recording of correction data) is effective for a single reading. To record
correction data repeatedly, execute 1. REC MODE again. Once the shading/polygon correction mode is set to ON, the following message
appears
THE NORMAL MODE WITH SHADING & POLYGON CORRECTION IS SET.
To Test to Check If Image Size is as Specified Meaning: Shading/polygon correction mode is set to ON.
: 2.CALCULATION : 1.SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY
: 2.CALCULATION : 2.SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY FOR BAD CONDITION
If the process ends in error, the following message appears.
: 2.CALCULATION : 6.SENSITIVITY ONLY
(1) Select 1. SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY.
When the recorded data is correct, a prompt for input of dosage value appears as
follows.
INPUT DOSAGE VALUE. 4. SENSITIVITY DATA: To Enter S Value
0.50 - 9.99 :
The unit is in mR. It is used for set sensitivity correction (e.g., leveling the sensitivities of multiple readers).
(1) Select 4. SENSITIVITY DATA.
If the recorded data is incorrect, the following message appears. A message asking you to enter the current S value appears.
THE DATA IS RECORDED WITH INCORRECT SIZE. INPUT CURRENT S VALAUE.

1 - 999 :
Meaning: The data has been recorded with wrong size.
(2) Enter the current S value within a range from 0 to 999.

(2) Enter the dosage value.
A message asking you to enter a desired S value appears.
The calculation of the correction data is initiated, with the following message dis-
played. INPUT EXPECTED S VALUE.
CALCULATION IS IN PROGRESS. 1 - 999 :
Meaning: Correction data calculation is now being performed. (3) Enter the desired S value within a range from 0 to 999.
The calculation of set sensitivity correction value is initiated, with the following mes-
sage displayed.
INPUTTED S VALUE IS SET.

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
10.8 8. DATA MANAGEMENT: Displaying Data Setup Values and 4. DISPLAY DATA: To List Up Format/Set Sensitivity Data
Writing to HD Execute 4. DISPLAY DATA.
The setup value in 6. FORMAT or 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY is displayed or written to MP = XXXX TMP = XXXX TML = XXXX
the hard disk. RCNT = XXXX NCNT = XXXX HVCNT = XXXX
HVDATA = XXXX PMTK = XXXX SAIP = XXXX
1. SAVE SHADING AND POLYGON DATA: To Copy Invalid Pixels and Other Data into Xe = XXXX Z = XXXX SMD = XXXX
Secondary Memory
Meanings of the displayed data are as follows, where XXXX denotes four decimal digits.
It is used when shading or polygon correction is performed in 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY.
MP: Number of invalid pixels
Execute 1. SAVE SHADING AND POLYGON DATA.
TMP: Total number of invalid pixels
Once it is executed normally, the following message appears.
TML: Total number of invalid lines
RCNT: Reference frequency division value
Meaning: The file XXXXXXXXXX is saved.
NCNT: Oscillation frequency setup value
If it ends in error, the following message appears.
HVCNT: Center-sensitivity HV value
HVDATA: Reading HV value
PMTK: PMT sensitivity coefficient
2. SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA: To Write Sensitivity Data to Hard Disk SAIP: IP sensitivity during sensitivity adjustment
It is used when sensitivity correction is performed in 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY. Xe: Erasure level dosage value
Execute 2. SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA. Z: Erasure level QL value
Once it is executed normally, the following message appears. SMD: Correction mode default value
3. SAVE FORMAT DATA: To Write Read Start Position or Read Width Setup Value to
Hard Disk
It is used when the read start position or read width is set in 6. FORMAT.
Execute 3. SAVE FORMAT DATA.

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
5. LOAD FROM FD: To Read or Write Content of Primary Memory 10.9 9. DIAGNOSTIC: Self Diagnostics of Scanner
The shading, polygon, and sensitivity data in the floppy disk is loaded into the memory. It is
used when factory default data in the floppy disk is loaded, for example. A sequence of self-diagnostic checks related to the scanner are performed.
(1) Execute 5. LOAD FROM FD: 1. SHADING/POLYGON/2. SENSITIVITY. If an error occurs during execution, the error is displayed and the diagnostics continues.
The following message appears. Execute 9. DIAGNOSTIC.
PLEASE SET A FD. If it is executed normally, the following message appears.
ARE YOU SURE TO LOAD SHADING/POYGON DATA FILES FROM THE FD? SCANNER DIAGNOSTIC IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
Meaning: A floppy disk should be put into the floppy disk drive.
Meaning: Scanner self-diagnostics is now being performed.
Are you sure to load the shading or polygon correction data from the floppy
disk?
If it ends in error, either of the following messages appears.
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and type in 1. START POINT DETECTION ERROR Meaning: Start-point detection failure
Once the file is loaded from the floppy disk, the following message appears. EDGE DETECTION ERROR Meaning: Leading-edge detection failure
XXXXXXXXXX IS LOADED. HV ERROR Meaning: High-voltage power supply
If the process ends in error, the following message appears. failure
ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning: Analog power supply failure
FILE I/O ERROR.(FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name. POLYGON MIRROR ERROR Meaning: Polygon failure
LASER POWER ERROR Meaning: Laser power failure
6. SAVE TO FD: To Write Shading/Polygon/Sensitivity Data on Primary Memory to LASER POWER INSUFFICIENT Meaning: Insufficient laser power
FD
It is used when the shading, polygon, and sensitivity data is backed up.
(1) Execute 6. SAVE TO FD.
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE SHADING/POYGON & SENSITIVTY DATA FILES TO
THE FD?
Meaning: A floppy disk should be put into the floppy disk drive.
Are you sure to save the shading or polygon correction data to the floppy
disk?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and type in 1.
Once the file is saved to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
XXXXXXXXXX IS LOADED.
If the process ends in error, the following message appears.
FILE I/O ERROR.(FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Setting in Virtual Generation Mode for 3. SCN08 INPUT: Virtual Image for Generating Image Signal on SCN08 Board
Image Signal Select 3. SCN08 INPUT.
When an abnormal image occurs, a quasi-reading image is used to isolate its cause. When THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
this item is set and then IP conveyance is performed, a virtual image may be read and
Meaning: The quasi-reading mode is now set.
outputted to film.
NOTES 4. ROUTINE: To Cancel Virtual Generation Mode for Image Signal
To obtain a quasi-reading image, set either 1. LIGHT, 2. LOG AMP, or 3. SCN08 IN- Select 4. ROUTINE.
PUT and then return to the routine screen, before performing IP reading.
After the quasi-reading is completed, be sure to select 4. ROUTINE to cancel the quasi-
reading mode. THE NORMAL MODE WITHOUT VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
Judging from the virtual image, isolate the cause of the abnormal image. Meaning: The quasi-reading mode is now canceled.
3. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Abnormal Images in
Troubleshooting Volume
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
For PMT electrical input quasi-reading (LOGAMP), HV is forced to OFF. Thus, a HV-OFF warning
occurs when exiting M-Utility. However, it is not an error. So, press the CONFIRM button and
proceed with the operation.
For PMT electrical input quasi-reading (LOGAMP), a completely different signal than a normal X-ray
image is inputted as a quasi-image signal. Thus, minute flickering, which will not pose any problem
for a typical image, may appear as nonuniformity, depending on image processing requirements.
Even if nonuniformity occurs as a result of quasi-reading, no nonuniformity is often found on a
typical X-ray image.
If any nonuniformity is found during quasi-reading, adjustment should be made with a usual X-ray
image.
The IP conveyed should be completely erased. ID information and so forth should also be regis-
tered in a similar manner to the routine processing.
1. LIGHT: Virtual Image for Injecting Virtual Light of LED into Photomultiplier (LED
on PMT Board)
(1) Select 1. LIGHT.
INPUT THE LEDS LUMINESCENCE QUANTITY.
1. EQUIVALENT TO 2-3[microR]
2. EQUIVALENT TO 2-3[mR]
1 - 2 :
Meaning: Enter the luminescence quantity of the LED.
(2) Type in a value either 1 or 2.
The luminescence quantity of the LED is set, with the following message displayed.
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
2. LOG AMP: Virtual Image for Inputting Fixed Current into PMT Board (VH OFF on
PMT)
Select 2. LOG AMP.
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MU - 91
MU - 90
11. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY: Mechanical 11.2 2. MOTOR: Operation Tests on Motor

Diagnostics It is used during checking of the pulse motors.
1. NUMBER: To List Up No. of Pulse Motor
It is used during checking of the motors and sensors.
Execute 1. NUMBER.
A list of pulse motor numbers is displayed as follows.
11.1 1. INITIALIZE: Initialization of Motors, Actuators, and 1:MB1 2:MB2 3:MB3 4:MC1 5:MD1
Sensors 6:MD2 7:MD3 8:ME1 9:ME2 10:MF1
NOTE 2. PARAMETER: To Set Drive Parameter

When the mode is transitioned to M-Utility during initialization or while an error message is (1) Select 2. PARAMETER.
displayed, be sure to execute 1. INITIALIZE. If it is not executed, tests cannot be performed The following message appears.
because the motors, actuators, and sensors have not been initialized.
1:MB1 2:MB2 3:MB3 4:MC1 5:MD1
6:MD2 7:MD3 8:ME1 9:ME2 10:MF1
1. Execute 1. INITIALIZE.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR.
The motors, actuators, and sensors are initialized, so that tests can be performed.
1 - 10 :
Meaning: Enter the number of motor.
(2) Type in the number of motor from 1 through 10.

INPUT THE ROTATION DERECTION.
1.CW 2.CCW (FIXED=X)
Meaning: Enter the rotation direction.
X denotes the rotation direction (either 1 or 2) that is currently set.
(3) Type in the rotation direction (either 1 or 2).

INPUT THE TOTALNUMBER OF PULSES.
0 - 8388607(FIXED=XXXXXXX) :
Meaning: Enter the total number of pulses.
XXXXXXX denotes the total number of pulses that is currently set.
(4) Type in the total number of pulses.

INPUT THE HI-SPEED.
16 - 7200 (FIXED=XXXX) :
Meaning: Enter the high-speed value.
XXXX denotes the high-speed value that is currently set.

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 92
(5) Type in the high-speed value. (10) Type in the value of magnetic phase.
The following message appears. The following message appears.
INPUT THE LOW-SPEED. INPUT THE MOVE AND STOP MODE.
16 - 7200 (FIXED=XXXX) : 1. HI-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
Meaning: Enter the low-speed value. 2. LOW-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
3. HI-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
XXXX denotes the low-speed value that is currently set. 4. LOW-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
5. HI-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP
(6) Type in the low-speed value. 6. LOW-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP
7. HI-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP
The following message appears. 8. LOW-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP
INPUT THE SLEW UP TIME. 1 - 8(FIXED=X) :
1000/LOW-SPEED - 3000 (FIXED=XXXX) : Meaning: Enter the move and stop mode.
Meaning: Enter the slew-up time. 1: High power driving/energized stop, with power-down delay
XXXX denotes the slew-up time that is currently set. 2: Low power driving/energized stop, with power-down delay
3: High power driving/deenergized stop, with power-down delay
(7) Type in the slew-up time. 4: Low power driving/deenergized stop, with power-down delay
The following message appears. 5: High power driving/energized stop, without power-down delay
INPUT THE SLEW DOWN TIME. 6: Low power driving/energized stop, without power-down delay
1000/LOW-SPEED - 3000 (FIXED=XXXX) :
7: High power driving/deenergized stop, without power-down delay
Meaning: Enter the slew-down time.
8: Low power driving/deenergized stop, without power-down delay
XXXX denotes the slew-down time that is currently set.
(11) Type in the move/stop mode (1 through 8).

(8) Type in the slew-down time.
INPUT THE STOP MODE.
INPUT POWER DOWN DELAY TIME. 1. HALT 2.LIMIT
0 - 255 (FIXED=XXX) : 1 - 2(FIXED=X) :
Meaning: Enter the power-down delay time. Meaning: Enter the stop mode.
XXX denotes the power-down delay time that is currently set. X denotes the stop mode (1: HALT stop, 2: LIMIT stop) that is currently set.
(9) Type in the power-down delay time.

INPUT THE MAGNETIC PHASE.
1. 2 PHASE 2.1-2 PHASE
3. W1-2 PHASE 4.2W1-2 PHASE
1 - 4(FIXED=X) :
Meaning: Enter the magnetic phase.
X denotes the value of magnetic phase (1: 2-phase magnetization, 2: 1-2-phase
magnetization, 3: W-1-2-phase magnetization, 4: 2W-1-2-phase magnetization) that is
currently set.

11.20.99 FM2638 04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 94
3. DRIVE: To Drive Motor 11.3 3. ACTUATOR: Operation Tests on Solenoids, Pumps, etc.
The following message appears. It is used during checking of the erasure lamp, FFM, etc.
1:MB1 2:MB2 3:MB3 4:MC1 5:MD1 1. NUMBER: To List Up No. of Erasure Lamp, FFM and Other Actuators
6:MD2 7:MD3 8:ME1 9:ME2 10:MF1
INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR. Execute 1. NUMBER.
1 - 10 : A list of erasure lamps, FFM and other actuators is displayed as follows.
Meaning: Enter the number of motor. 1:SOLA1 2:SOLA2 3:SOLA3 4:SOLA4 5:PB1
(2) Type in the number of motor. 11:FFM
The motor is driven.
2. DRIVE: To Drive Actuator
4. STOP: To Stop Motor
When 11: FFM is selected
(1) Select 4. STOP.
The following message appears. (1) Select 2. DRIVE.
1:MB1 2:MB2 3:MB3 4:MC1 5:MD1 The following message appears.
6:MD2 7:MD3 8:ME1 9:ME2 10:MF1 1:SOLA1 2:SOLA2 3:SOLA3 4:SOLA4 5:PB1
INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR.
1 - 10 :
11:FFM
Meaning: Enter the number of motor.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR.
1 - 11 :
(2) Type in the number of motor.
Meaning: Enter the number of actuator.
The motor is stopped.
(2) Type in 11.

INPUT THE ROTATION DIRECTION.
1.CW 2.CCW (FIXED=X)
Meaning: Enter the rotation direction.
X denotes the rotation direction (either 1 or 2) that is currently set.
(3) Type in the rotation direction (either 1 or 2).

INPUT THE SPEED.
1. STANDARD SUBSCANNING
2. RAPID SUBSCANNING
3. CARRY OUT
1 - 3(FIXED=X) :
Meaning: Enter the rotation speed.
X denotes the rotation speed (1: standard subscanning, 2: fast subscanning, 3:
ejection) that is currently set.
(4) Type in the rotation speed.

FFM is driven.

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 96
When other than 11: FFM is selected 11.4 4. SENSOR: Operation Tests on Sensors
It is used during checking of the sensors. Operation tests on the sensors are performed.
The following message appears. When the sensor status changes, an audible beep alert is generated. If anything abnormal is
1:SOLA1 2:SOLA2 3:SOLA3 4:SOLA4 5:PB1 detected, an error message is displayed.
1. NUMBER: To Display Sensor No. List
11:FFM
Execute 1. NUMBER.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR. A list of sensor numbers is displayed as follows.
1 - 11 :
1:SA1 2:SA2 3:SA3 4:SA4 5:SA5
Meaning: Enter the number of actuator.
6:SA6 7:SA7 8:SA8 9:SA9 10:SA10
11:SA11 12:SA12 13:SA13 14:SA14 15:SA15
(2) Type in the number of actuator (either 1 through 11).
16:SA16 17:SA17 18:SB1 19:SB2 20:SB3
The actuator is driven.
21:SB4 22:SB5 23:SC1 24:SC2 25:SD1
26:SD2 27:SD3 28:SE1 29:SF1 30:SF2
3. STOP: To Stop Actuator
31:SF3 32:SF4 33:SZ2 34:SZ3
(1) Select 3. STOP.
The following message appears. 2. MONITOR: To Monitor Individual Sensor
1:SOLA1 2:SOLA2 3:SOLA3 4:SOLA4 5:PB1 (1) Select 2. MONITOR.
6:SVB1 7:SOLF1 8:SOLC1 9:LAMP STB 10:LAMP ON The following message appears.
11:FFM 1:SA1 2:SA2 3:SA3 4:SA4 5:SA5
INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR. 6:SA6 7:SA7 8:SA8 9:SA9 10:SA10
1 - 11 : 11:SA11 12:SA12 13:SA13 14:SA14 15:SA15
Meaning: Enter the number of actuator. 16:SA16 17:SA17 18:SB1 19:SB2 20:SB3
21:SB4 22:SB5 23:SC1 24:SC2 25:SD1
(2) Type in the number of actuator. 26:SD2 27:SD3 28:SE1 29:SF1 30:SF2
The actuator is stopped. 31:SF3 32:SF4 33:SZ2 34:SZ3
INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR.
1 - 34 :
Meaning: Enter the number of sensor.
(2) Type in the number of sensor.

Sensor monitoring is initiated, and, when the sensor status changes, the following
message appears.
XXXXX ----> Open
XXXXX ----> Close
Meaning: Sensor XXXXX becomes OPEN.
Sensor XXXXX becomes CLOSE.
009-051-06
04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 98
3. MONITOR ALL: To Monitor All Sensors 11.5 5. UNIT: 1. IP FEED/LOAD UNIT: Operation Tests on IP
(1) Select 3. MONITOR ALL. Removal Mechanism
A list indicating the numbers and status (0: OPEN, 1: CLOSE) of sensors are
displayed.
1. ARM HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of IP Removal Arm Mechanism
SA1 -17 : 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
SB1 - 5 : 1 0 1 0 0 Execute 1. ARM HOME POSITION.
SC1 - 2 : 0 0 The following message appears.
SD1 - 3 : 1 1 0
ARM H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
SE1 : 1
SF1 - 4 : 0 0 0 0 RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR)
SZ2 - 3 : 1 0 Meaning: IP removal arm home positioning is now being performed.
0:QUIT
2. FEED/LOAD: To Feed or Load IP Removal Mechanism
When the sensor status changes, the following message appears. (1) Execute 2. FEED/LOAD.
XXXXX ----> Open The following message appears.
XXXXX ----> Close INPUT THE MODE.
Meaning: Sensor XXXXX becomes OPEN. 1. NORMAL MODE
Sensor XXXXX becomes CLOSE. 2. STEP MODE
1 - 2 :
(2) Select 0. QUIT. Meaning: Select the operation mode.
The sensor monitoring is exited. 1. NORMAL MODE (normal mode)
2. STEP MODE (step mode)
(2) Enter the operation mode (either 1 or 2) of the IP removal arm.
SET THE CASSETTE TO SHELF1.
Meaning: Set a cassette into the topmost shelf.
(3) Set a cassette.
When 1. NORMAL MODE is selected
Once a sequence of operations is started, the following message appears.
THE FEED/LOAD PROCESS IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: Feed/load operation is now being performed.
When 2. STEP MODE is selected

Once the operation is started stepwise, the following message appears.
THE FEED/LOAD PROCESS IS IN PROGRESS.
ARE YOU SURE TO MOVE ON NEXT STEP?
Meaning: Are you sure to proceed to the next step?
Hit the ENT key to proceed to the next step (there are six steps).
(4) When the operation is completed, pull out the cassette.

RESULT - OK
If it ends in error, ERROR (XXXX) appears. XXXX denotes an error code.

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 100
11.6 5. UNIT: 2. UP-DOWN UNIT: Operation Tests on Elevation 11.7 5. UNIT: 3. SIDE-POSITIONING GRIP: Operation Tests on
Unit Side-Positioning Mechanism Grip
1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of Side-Positioning Mechanism Grip
1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of IP Removal Unit
Execute 1. HOME POSITION.
Execute 1. HOME POSITION.
MOVED TOWARD THE HOME POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
UP/DOWN UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: Side-positioning mechanism grip home positioning is now being performed.
Meaning: IP removal unit home positioning is now being performed.
2. GRIP: To Effect Grip Operation for Side-Positioning Mechanism
2. MOVE POSITION: To Input Unit Position
Execute 2. GRIP.
(1) Select 2. MOVE POSITION.
MOVED TOWARD THE NIPPING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
INPUT THE UNIT POSITION.
RESULT - OK
1 - 4 :
Meaning: Grip operation of the side-positioning mechanism is now being performed.
Meaning: Enter the unit position.

(2) Type in the unit position.
The following message appears. 3. RELEASE: To Perform Grip Release Operation for Side-Positioning Mechanism
MOVED-UP/DOWN IS IN PROGRESS. Execute 3. RELEASE.
Meaning: The elevation unit is now being moved.
MOVED TOWARD THE NON-NIPPING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: Grip release operation of the side-positioning mechanism is now being
performed.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 102
11.8 5. UNIT: 4. SIDE-POSITIONING UNIT: Operation Tests on 11.9 5. UNIT: 5. AFTER-READING GRIP: Operation Tests on
Side-Positioning Mechanism After-Reading Conveyor Grip
1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of Side-Positioning Mechanism 1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of After-Reading Conveyor Grip Mechanism
Execute 1. HOME POSITION. Execute 1. HOME POSITION.
MOVED TOWARD THE HOME POSITION IS IN PROGRESS. AFTER-READING GRIP UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR) RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR)
Meaning: Side-positioning mechanism home positioning is now being performed. Meaning: After-reading conveyor grip home positioning is now being performed.
2. ACTUATION: To Effect Side-Positioning Operation 2. GRIP: To Effect Grip Operation for After-Reading Conveyor Grip Mechanism
(1) Select 2. ACTUATION. Execute 2. GRIP.
The following message appears. Once it is executed normally, the following message appears.
1.NORMAL 2.STEP : MOVED TOWARD THE NIPPING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
(2) Enter the side-positioning operation mode (either 1 or 2). Meaning: Grip operation of the after-reading conveyor mechanism is now being performed.
When 1. NORMAL is selected If it ends in error, ERROR (XXXX) appears. XXXX denotes an error code.
When a series of side-positioning operations is initiated, the following message
appears. 3. RELEASE: To Release Grip Operation of After-Reading Conveyance Grip
Mechanism
SIDE-POSITIONING PROCESS IS IN PROGRESS.
ARE YOU SURE TO MOVE ON NEXT STEP? Execute 3. RELEASE.
Meaning: Side-positioning operation is now being performed. Once it is executed normally, the following message appears.
If it ends in error, ERROR (XXXX) is displayed. XXXX denotes an error code. RESULT - OK
Meaning: Grip release operation of the after-reading conveyor mechanism is now being
When 2. STEP is selected performed.
When the side-positioning operation is initiated in steps, the following message

appears. If it ends in error, ERROR (XXXX) appears. XXXX denotes an error code.
SIDE-POSITIONING PROCESS IS IN PROGRESS.
ARE YOU SURE TO MOVE ON NEXT STEP?
Meaning: Are you sure to proceed to the next step?
Hit the ENT key to proceed to the next step (there are four steps).
When the operation is completed, the following message appears.

RESULT - OK
If it ends in error, ERROR (XXXX) is displayed. XXXX denotes an error code.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 104
11.10 5. UNIT: 6. DRIVING GRIP: Operation Tests on 3. D/A DATA: To Display Data Related to Driving Shaft Grip Operation
Subscanning Driving Grip Mechanism Execute 3. D/A DATA.
1. GRIP: To Effect Driving Shaft Grip Operation DRIVING GRIP D/A DATA
(1) Execute 1. GRIP. DEFAULT CURRENT
The following message appears. RELEASE HIGH xxxx xxxx
INPUT THE GRIP SPEED. LOW xxxx xxxx
1. ST GRIP ST xxxx xxxx
2. HR HR xxxx xxxx
1 - 2 : Each item of the data is indicated in four decimal digits (xxxx).
Meaning: Enter the grip speed.
(2) Type in either 1 or 2.

DRIVE TIME : XXX
RESULT - OK
Meaning: Grip operation of the driving shaft is now being performed.
DRIVE TIME is displayed in units of 10 msec.
2. RELEASE: To Release Driving Shaft Grip

(1) Execute 2. RELEASE.
INPUT THE RELEASE SPEED.
1. HIGH
2. LOW
1 - 2 :
Meaning: Enter the release speed.

DRIVE TIME : XXX
RESULT - OK
Meaning: Grip operation of the driving shaft is now being performed.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 106
11.11 5. UNIT: 7. DRIVEN GRIP: Operation Tests on Subscanning 3. D/A DATA: To Display Data Related to Driven Shaft Grip Operation
Driven Grip Mechanism Execute 3. D/A DATA.
1. GRIP: To Effect Driven Shaft Grip Operation DRIVING GRIP D/A DATA
(1) Execute 1. GRIP. DEFAULT CURRENT
The following message appears. RELEASE HIGH xxxx xxxx
INPUT THE NIPPING SPEED. LOW xxxx xxxx
1. HIGH GRIP ST xxxx xxxx
2. LOW HR xxxx xxxx
1 - 2 :
Each item of the data is indicated in four decimal digits (xxxx).
Meaning: Enter the grip speed.
11.12 5. UNIT : 8. MIRROR UP/DOWN: Operation Tests on Light-

Collecting Mirror
This command does not function with the CR-IR341.
DRIVE TIME : XXX
RESULT - OK
Meaning: Grip operation of the driven shaft is now being performed.
2. RELEASE: To Release Driven Shaft Grip

(1) Execute 2. RELEASE.
INPUT THE NON-NIPPING SPEED.
1. ST
2. HR
1 - 2 :
Meaning: Enter the release speed.

DRIVE TIME : XXX
RESULT - OK
Meaning: Grip release operation of the driven shaft is now being performed.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 108
12. 7. FILE UTILITY: File Operation 12.2 2. FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION: Formatting HD Image
Storage Partition
File-related operation is performed. It is used when the configuration data is edited on a
personal computer. Format image storage partition of hard disk.
(1) Select 2. FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION.
12.1 1. FORMAT FD: Formatting FD The following message appears.
ARE YOU SURE TO FORMAT THE IMAGE PARTITION ?
NOTES 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
Before formatting a floppy disk, make sure that it does not contain any necessary data. Meaning: Are you sure to format the image storage partition?
Once it is formatted, the data in the floppy disk is completely lost.
If the floppy disk is write-protected, it should be write-enabled before putting it into the
floppy disk drive. Under the write-protected condition, the floppy disk cannot be format- (2) Select 1.
ted. Once it is formatted, the following message appears.
FORMATTING THE IMAGE PARTITION IS COMPLETED.
1. FORMAT FD: To Format FD Meaning: The image storage partition of the hard disk has been completely formatted.
(1) Select 1. FORMAT FD.
The following message appears. If the formatting ends in error, the following message appears.
PLEASE SET A FD. ARE YOU SURE TO FORMAT THE FD ? FORMATTING THE IMAGE PARTITION IS INCOMPLETED.
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : Meaning: The HD image storage partition formatting failed.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to format the floppy
disk?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1.
Once it is formatted, the following message appears.
FORMATTING THE FD IS COMPLETED.
Meaning: The floppy disk has been completely formatted.
If the formatting ends in error, the following message appears.

FORMATTING THE FD IS INCOMPLETED.
Meaning: The floppy disk formatting failed.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 110
12.3 3. BACKUP: Backing Up Various Data 2. CONFIGURATION DATA: To Save Machine Setup File to FD
(1) Select 2. CONFIGURATION DATA.
Various setup files are written to a floppy disk. The following message appears.
1. SCANNER DATA: To Save Scanner Setup File to FD PLEASE SET A FD.

ARE YOU SURE TO COPY CONFIGURATION FILES TO THE FD ?
(1) Select 1. SCANNER DATA. 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
The following message appears. Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the machine
PLEASE SET A FD. setup files to the floppy disk?
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY SCANNER DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the scanner
Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files
data to the floppy disk?
are copied to the floppy disk.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1. XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files .
are copied to the floppy disk. .
.
. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
.
When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears.
.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.
1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) :
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Replace it with another floppy disk.
Replace the floppy disk, and select 1.
Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is
Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Swap it for another floppy disk.
displayed.
Swap the floppy disk, and select 1.

For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
displayed. FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name.
The following files are saved to the floppy disk.
IRSET.CFG IRSET.ORG
FILMFMT.CFG FILMFMT.ORG
IRSTATUS.CFG IRSTATUS.ORG
SCN_ELVL.DAT SCN_IFMT.DAT
SCN_INT.DAT SCN_MAIN.DAT
SCN_POLY.POL SCN_POLO.POL
SCN_POLU.POL SCN_ISEN.DAT
SCN_SHDG.SHD SCN_SHDO.SHD
SCN_SHDU.SHD SNDPIXEL.DAT
SNDLINE.DAT
03.20.2004 FM4275 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 112
3. NETWORK DATA: To Save Network-Related Setup File to FD 4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA: To Save Image Processing Parameter File to FD
(1) Select 3. NETWORK DATA. (1) Select 4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA.
PLEASE SET A FD. PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY NETWORK DATA FILES TO THE FD ? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY IMAGE PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the network Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the image
data to the floppy disk? processing parameters to the floppy disk?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1. (2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1.
Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files
are copied to the floppy disk. are copied to the floppy disk.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
. .
.
.
.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. .
1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) : THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.

displayed. Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is
displayed.

RMT_SW.CFG EQUIP
HIPMENU.PRM HIPUMN.PRM
DVICE HOSTS
HIPMNRL.PRM HP.PRM
CODEDSTB ROUTE
HIPOP.PRM HPT.PRM
NETMASKS DICOM
HIPOPT.PRM HPTU.PRM
HIPOPTU.PRM HPU.PRM
HIPOPU.PRM PEM.PRM
HIPSTD.PRM PEMT.PRM
HIPSTDU.PRM PEMTU.PRM
PEMU.PRM
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 114
5. CSL MENU DATA: To Save CSL Type Setup File to FD 6. EDR PROCESSING DATA: To Save EDR Parameter File to FD
(1) Select 5. CSL MENU DATA. (1) Select 6. EDR PROCESSING DATA.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY CSL MENU DATA FILES TO THE FD ? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY EDR PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the console Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the EDR
menu data to the floppy disk? parameters to the floppy disk?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1. (2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select 1.
Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files
are copied to the floppy disk. are copied to the floppy disk.
. .
. .
. .
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE. When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears.
1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) : THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.
Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Replace it with another floppy disk. 1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) :
Replace the floppy disk, and select 1. Replace the floppy disk, and select 1.
Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is
displayed. displayed.
For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears. For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name. XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name.
The following files are saved to the floppy disk. The following files are saved to the floppy disk.
MPM_DEF.PRM FILMMARK.PRM IRMUMN.PRM MPMUMN.PRM
CDFORM.DAT BODYDISP.CFG NNUMN.PRM EDR.ABS
MENUDISP.CFG RTN_DISP.CFG
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 116
12.4 4. RESTORE: Reading Various Data 2. CONFIGURATION DATA: To Read Machine Setup File form FD to HD
(1) Select 2. CONFIGURATION DATA.
Various setup files are loaded from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The following message appears.
NOTE PLEASE SET A FD.
Before installing the configuration data that was edited on the PC or the like, make sure that ARE YOU SURE TO COPY CONFIGURATION FILES TO THE HD ?
the software versions for the machine where the data was extracted and the machine where 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
it is to be installed are the same. If the software versions are different, error may occur Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the machine
during installation. setup files to the hard disk?
1. SCANNER DATA: To Read Scanner Data from FD to HD (2) Select 1.
(1) Select 1. SCANNER DATA. Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears.
The following message appears. XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
PLEASE SET A FD. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.

ARE YOU SURE TO COPY SCANNER DATAS TO THE HD ?
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the scanner FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
data to the hard disk?
(2) Select 1.
The following files are read from the floppy disk to the hard disk.
Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears.
IRSET.CFG FILMFMT.CFG
IRSTATUS.CFG
If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed.

SCN_ELVL.DAT SCN_INIT.DAT
SCN_IFMT.DAT SCN_MAIN.DAT
SCN_POLY.POL SCN_POLO.POL
SCN_SHDG.SHD SCN_ISEN.DAT
SCN_SHDU.SHD SCN_SHDO.SHO
SNDPIXEL.DAT
SNDLINE.DAT
03.20.2004 FM4275 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 118
3. NETWORK DATA: To Read Network-Related Setup File from FD to HD 4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA: To Read Image Processing Parameter File from FD to HD
(1) Select 3. NETWORK DATA. (1) Select 4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY NETWORK DATA FILES TO THE HD ? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY IMAGE PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE HD ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the network Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the image
data to the hard disk? processing parameters to the hard disk?
(2) Select 1. (2) Select 1.

Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears. Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears.
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed. If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name. XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name.
The following files are read from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The following files are read from the floppy disk to the hard disk.
RMT_SW.CFG EQUIP HIPMENU.PRM HIPUMN.PRM
DVICE HOSTS HIPMNRL.PRM HP.PRM
CODEDSTB ROUTE HIPOP.PRM HPT.PRM
NETMASKS DICOM HIPOPT.PRM HPTU.PRM
HIPOPTU.PRM HPU.PRM
HIPOPU.PRM PEM.PRM
HIPSTD.PRM PEMT.PRM
HIPSTDU.PRM PEMTU.PRM
PEMU.PRM
11.20.99 FM2638 08.30.2001 FM3115
MU - 120
5. CSL MENU DATA: To Read CSL Type Setup File from FD to HD 12.5 5. EDR DATA: Saving EDR Calculation to FD
(1) Select 5. CSL MENU DATA.
The following message appears. NOTE
PLEASE SET A FD. The following menus should not be used.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY CSL MENU DATA FILES TO THE HD ? 3. PARAMETER ONLY (SAVE TO HD)
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 4. FULL (SAVE TO HD)
3. DELETE EDR BACKUP ON HD
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the console
menu data to the hard disk?
1. PARAMETER ONLY (SAVE TO FD): To Save EDR Calculation to FD
(2) Select 1. (1) Select 1. PARAMETER ONLY.
Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears. A list of up to ten images stored in the HD is displayed according to the following
format.
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. .
.
If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed. .
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) 0.END 1-10.SELECT 11.NEXT 12.BEFORE (DEFAULT=11) :
Meanings of the items are as follows.
6. EDR PROCESSING DATA: To Read EDR Parameter File from FD to HD
XXX : Reference number (1 to 999)
(1) Select 6. EDR PROCESSING DATA.
YYYY.MM.DD : Image exposure date
ZZZZ : Image number (A001 to A999)
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY EDR PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE HD ? It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : whether the previous page and/or next page is available.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the EDR
parameters to the hard disk? (2) Type in 1 through 10, 11, or 12 to select an image to be saved to a floppy disk
(i.e., an image for which EDR calculated value is to be saved).
(2) Select 1. When either 1 through 10 is typed in, the following message appears.
Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears. PLEASE SET A FD.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE EDR PARAMETER DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to save EDR
calcu.lation to the floppy disk?
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) (3) Select 1.
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name. Once the data is copied to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
IRMUMN.PRM MPMUMN.PRM
NNUMN.PRM EDR.ABS
11.20.99 FM2638 08.30.2001 FM3115
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MU - 122 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MU - 123
2. FULL (SAVE TO FD): To Save EDR Calculation and Image Data to FD 12.6 6. PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE: Reverting Back to
(1) Select 2. FULL. Previous Version of System Software
A list of up to ten images stored in the HD is displayed according to the following
format. (1) Select 6. PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ The following message appears.
ARE YOU SURE TO INSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION ?
.
1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) :
.
. Meaning: Are you sure to revert back to the previous version?
0.END 1-10.SELECT 11.NEXT 12.BEFORE (DEFAULT=11) :
(2) Select 1.
Once the system software reverts back to its immediately preceding version, the
Meanings of the items are as follows. following message appears.
XXX : Reference number (1 to 999) PREVIOUS VERSION SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED.
YYYY.MM.DD : Image exposure date Meaning: The system software reverts back to its previous version.
ZZZZ : Image number (A001 to A999)
It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on (3) Reset the machine.
whether the previous page and/or next page is available.
(2) Type in 1 through 10, 11, or 12 to select an image to be saved to a floppy disk
(i.e., an image for which EDR calculated value and image data are to be saved).
When either 1 through 10 is typed in, the following message appears.
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE EDR DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to save both EDR
calculation and image data to the floppy disk?
(3) Select 1.
Once the data is copied to the floppy disk, the following message appears.

08.30.2001 FM3115 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 124
12.7 7. EXECUTION: Loading and Executing File BLANK PAGE
Used for installing optional files and for other purposes.

(1) Select 7. EXECUTION.
A list of up to ten files stored in the floppy disk is displayed according to the following
format.
XXX) YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
XXX) YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
.
.
.
XXX) YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
0.END 1-10.SELECT 11.NEXT 12.BEFORE (DEFAULT=11) :
Meanings of the items are as follows.

XXX : Reference number (1 to 999)
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY : File name
It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on
whether the previous page and/or next page is available.
(2) Type in 1 through 10, 11, or 12 to select a file to be loaded.

When either 1 through 10 is typed in, the following message appears.
ARE YOU SURE TO EXCUTE SELECTED FILE ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to execute the
selected file?
(3) Select 1.
Once the file is executed, the following message appears.
XXXXXXXXXX IS EXECUTED.
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is executed.
If the execution ends in error, the following message is displayed.

11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 126
BLANK PAGE
13. 8. BACKUP MEMORY: Backing Up Memory
NOTE
Be sure to reset the machine after clearing the backup memory. Unless the machine is reset,
the backup memory is not cleared.
It is used when the backup memory is cleared.
(1) Select 1. CLEAR.

ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL THE BACKUP MEMORIES?
Meaning: Are you sure to initialize the backup memory?
(2) Select 1.
The backup memory is initialized, with the following message displayed.
Meaning: The backup memory is initialized.
(3) Repeat 0. ENT.

(4) Press the RESET switch of the machine.
The following files are cleared.

IMG
Set processing information, information for image number generation, HV ON/OFF
information
IPH
IP position information, subscanning grip correction information
PNL
Audible click tone enabled/disabled, parallax correction data
DST
Output LP information (NET/LOCAL)
JNL
Error log information
LIF
Format frequency information
MFC
Setup options information
CSL (for CSL specification only)
Multiframe-related information, set processing-related information, menu selection
information
009-051-06
04.20.2001 FM3006
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 128
To turn HV ON
14. 9. HV ON/OFF: High-Voltage Switch (Software
When the HV switch is in the OFF position, menu item 9 is displayed as 9.HV ON.
Switch)
0.QUIT
It should be turned OFF before opening the covers for checking. If not, the photomultiplier 1.ERROR LOG UTILITY
may be damaged. 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING
For the high-voltage switch, 9. HV OFF is displayed when menu number 9 is in ON 3.TEST MODE
status, while 9. HV ON is displayed when it is in OFF status. 4.ELECTRICAL UTILITY
To turn high-voltage switch OFF 5.SCANNER UTILITY
When the high-voltage switch is in the ON position, menu item 9 is displayed as 9.HV
7.FILE UTILITY
OFF.
8.BACKUP MEMORY
0.QUIT
9.HV ON
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY
10.IP UTILITY
2.CONFIGURATION SETTING
>
3.TEST MODE
4.ELECTRICAL UTILITY
(1) Select 9. HV ON.
5.SCANNER UTILITY
When the high-voltage switch is set to ON, the following message appears.
7.FILE UTILITY TURNING ON THE HV IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
8.BACKUP MEMORY
Meaning: The HV is now being turned ON.
9.HV OFF
10.IP UTILITY
If any error occurs, either of the following messages is displayed.
>
HV ERROR Meaning: High-voltage power supply failure
(1) Select 9. HV OFF. ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning: Analog power supply failure
The high-voltage switch is set to OFF, with the following message displayed. HV OFF Meaning: HV switch OFF
THE HV IS TURNED OFF.

(2) Select 0. QUIT.
(2) Select 0. QUIT.
11.20.99 FM2638 (1) 11.20.99 FM2638 (1)
MU - 130
1. LIST
15. 10. MENU SETTING: Menu Setting
Displays the content of each of anatomical region menus and routine menus. The
The menu configuration displayed on the operation screen is changed, and the image content of the menus that are not displayed (non-display menus) may also be dis-
processing (including optional) parameters are edited. played.
NOTES 2. MOVE
The current settings must always be backed up to the FD before modifying the menu.
12.3 BACKUP: Backing Up Various Data 5. CSL MENU DATA: To Read CSL Changes the display location (display order) of the menu. Whether the menu is dis-
Type Setup File from FD to HD played or not may also be set.
For the menu setting to be effective, it is necessary to reset the machine.
3. ROUTINE
Registers or delete the menu to or from the routine menu.
Summary of Function
With the menu setting, the menu displayed on the operation screen, parameters, and the 4. EDIT
display locations and setup contents of the icons may be edited through seven commands.
Edits the content of the parameter, such as EDR or IP that is set for each menu group.
Exposure menu selection screen (Example: Head) Parameter selection screen (Example: Chest)
2 FUJI TARO ***
1
ID#1234564756 2 FUJI TARO ***
ID#1234564756
5. COPY
SKULL, GENERAL
SKULL, GENERAL
AUTO *1.0 *1.0
Copies (duplicates) the existing menu to add a new menu.
PARANASAL SINUS 6. DELETE

AP TWIN 1
The routine menu for which
an image parameter has
MANDIBLE been set is registered. The image parameter is Deletes menus.
The routine menu is 12345. ON 18*43 displayed and edited.
ORBIT
displayed and edited.
CODE 7. FILMMARK (edit film mark)
RT L->R S-HIGH
HEAD, SOFT TISSUE

Adds or deletes a film mark. The display location of the film mark may also be set.
MENU
Display Format and Meaning
ANATOMICAL
REGION
ID Display menu
2 ID#1234564756
Anatomical region selection screen (Example: 1st page) Display menu
FUJIA001
TARO ***
2 ID#1234564756
2 ID#1234564756
2
XXY : ZZZZZZZZZZZZ
ID#1234564756
Display location 1 SKULL, GENERAL Display location (1-5)

Page number (two decimal digits)
The display locations of the Display location 2 PARANASAL SINUS
icons on the anatomical
region selection screen are
changed. Display location 3 MANDIBLE
Display location 4 ORBIT
Display location 5 HEAD, SOFT TISSUE

Page number 03
ROUTINE
FR1H1506.EPS
Page number 02
ANATOMICAL
REGION
Page number 01 FR1H1507.EPS
Example: The mandible is denoted by 013: MANDIBLE.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 132
Non-display menu 15.1 1. LIST: Displaying Menu

Non-display menu
The setting of each menu is displayed in list form.
The detailed procedures for displaying the menu CHEST are described below.
*XX : YYYYYYYYYYYY
(1) Select 1. LIST.
Item number (two decimal digits)
COMMAND>1
FR1H1508.EPS
Example: The tenth item of the non-display menu is denoted by *10: CHEST,
LYMPHA, FRN:C.
0.HEAD 1.NECK 2.CHEST 3.BREAST
Relevant Files 4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT
Each command for menu setting is implemented to read and/or write its relevant configura- 8.TEST *.ROUTINE
tion files. TYPE POSITION NUMBER OF SOURCE OR
A list of configuration files that are read and/or written by each command is summarized * TO SPECIFY ROUTINE
below.
LIST>
Command Relevant file and operation (R = read; W = write) File content
Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region to be displayed on screen. To
LIST
BODYDISP.CFG R
Exposure anatomical region display display the routine menu, type in *.
location information
MENUDISP.CFG R Exposure menu display location information

(2) Select 2. CHEST.
RTM_DISP.CFG R Routine menu display location information
MPM_DEF.PRM R Exposure parameter
LIST>2
MOVE BODYDISP.CFG R/W The following message appears.
MENUDISP.CFG R/W
MPM_DEF.PRM R 011:CHEST,GENERAL
ROUTINE RTM_DISP.CFG R/W Routine menu display location information 012:THORA.SPINE,FRN
BODYDISP.CFG R 013:UPPER RIB
MENUDISP.CFG R 014:LOWER RIB
MPM_DEF.PRM R
015:CLAVICLE
EDIT BODYDISP.CFG R
Meaning: Display menu of the first page.
MENUDISP.CFG R
MPM_DEF.PRM R/W
021:SCAPULA
STDMENU.PRM,OP.PRM,HP.PRM,
Fuji Standard image processing parameter R
PEM.PRM 022:STERNUM
User-defined image processing parameter R/W
STDUMN.PRM,OPU.PRM,HPU.PRM, 023:CHEST,PEDIATRICS
PEMU.PRM
024:THORA.SPINE,LAT
COPY BODYDISP.CFG R
025:CHEST,SOFT TISSUE
MENUDISP.CFG R/W
MPM_DEF.PRM R/W
Meaning: Display menu of the second page.
Fuji Standard image processing parameter R
User-defined image processing parameter R/W 031:SHOULDER JNT,FRN

DELETE BODYDISP.CFG R 032:SHOULDER JNT,AXL
MENUDISP.CFG R/W 033:WHOLE SPINE
MPM_DEF.PRM R/W 034:CHEST,GENERAL-2
Fuji Standard image processing parameter R 035:CHEST,PORTABLE
User-defined image processing parameter R/W
Meaning: Display menu of the third page.
FILM MARK FILMMARK R/W Film mark and display location information
TR1H1200.EPS
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 134
*1:CHEST,SPECIAL-1 15.2 2. MOVE: Changing Menu Display Location
*2:THORA.SPINE,AXL
*3:CHEST,PED.-1 The display location of the anatomical region and menu is changed, and the display status of
the anatomical region and menu is changed to either display or non-display mode.
*4:CHEST,SPECIAL-2
*5:CHEST,BL.VESSEL:C Changing Menu Display Location
*6:BRONCHUS:C The detailed procedures for changing the non-display menu *1: OPEN MOUTH of NECK
*7:CHEST,ESOPHAGUS:C to a display menu and for moving its display location to the first position on the second page
*8:CHEST,MYELO.,LAT:C are described below.
*9:CHEST,MYELO.,FRN:C (1) Select 2. MOVE.
*10:CHEST,LYMPHA,FRN:C COMMAND>2
*11:CHEST,LYMPHA,LAT:C The following message appears.
*12:SHLD.JNT,ARTHRO:C
*13:LUNG:T 0.HEAD 1.NECK 2.CHEST 3.BREAST
*14:MEDIASTINUM:T 4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT
*15:STERNUM:T 8.TEST *.MOVE
*16:THORA.SPINE,FRN:T TYPE POSITION NUMBER OR * TO MOVE POSITIONS

*17:THORA.SPINE,LAT:T MOVE>
*18:SHOULDER JOINT:T Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region to be changed. To change the
display location of the icon on the anatomical region selection screen, type
*19:CHEST,MAG:M in *.
Meaning: Non-display menu Changing Display Location of Icon on Anatomical Region Selection Screen
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When the ENT key is touched with a message displayed, its subsequent message that is not (2) Select 1. NECK.
displayed, if any, is displayed. When the ENT key is touched with the entire message dis-
MOVE>1
played, the LIST command is quitted, with a prompt displayed.
011:CERVICAL,GENERAL
012:CERVICAL SPINE
013:PHARYNX/LARYNX
014:CERVIC.PEDIATRICS
015:LARYNX(<35KV)
Meaning: Display menu of the first page.
*1:OPEN MOUTH
*2:CERVIC.,PED.-1
*3:CERVIC.BL.VESSEL:C
*4:PHARYNX/LARYNX:C
*5:CERVIC.ESOPHAGUS:C
*6:CERVICAL,MYELO.:C
*7:CERVICAL,LYMPHA:C
*8:THORA C.,MYELO:C
*9:CERVICAL SPINE:T
*10:PHARYNX/LARYNX:T
*11:CERVIC.,MAG:M
Meaning: Non-display menu
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 136
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE, Changing Display Location of Icon on Anatomical Region Selection Screen
PAGE NUMBER OR * TO LIST 2ND LEVEL The detailed procedures for moving the HEAD icon on the first page to the left position on
(P01) the top of the second page are described below.
Meaning: Select the display menu number to be moved. To confirm the display menu Anatomical region selection screen: 1st page
again, type in P + page number, and to confirm the non-display menu 2 FUJIA001
TARO ***
ID#1234564756
again, type in *.
Anatomical region selection screen: 2nd page
Example: To display the menu on the first page, type in P01. HEAD icon
FUJIA001
TARO ***
2 ID#1234564756
Destination
(3) Select *1. TEST
MOVE>*1
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE DESTINATION

OR PAGE NUMBER
MOVE>
Meaning: Type in the page number and display location of the destination to which the
selected menu is to be moved. To display the menu, type in P + page ROUTINE
number.
Example: To display the menu on the first page, type in P01.
ROUTINE
FR1H1509.EPS
(4) Type in 021 and touch ENT.

(1) Select 2. MOVE.
MOVE>021
COMMAND>2
After quitting the menu and restarting, the non-display menu *1: OPEN MOUTH
changes its status to a display menu and is displayed in the first position on the The following message appears.
second page.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 0.HEAD 1.NECK 2.CHEST 3.BREAST
With similar procedures, the display menu may be moved within the same page (its display 4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT
location may be changed), a display menu may be moved (changed) to a non-display menu, 8.TEST *.MOVE
and so forth.
TYPE POSITION NUMBER OR * TO MOVE POSITIONS
MOVE>
Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region to be changed. To change the
display location of the icon on the anatomical region selection screen, type
in *.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 138
(2) Select *.MOVE. 15.3 3. ROUTINE: Registering and Deleting (Disselecting)
MOVE>*
Routine Menu
11:HEAD 12:NECK Registering Routine Menu
13:CHEST 14:BREAST The detailed procedures for registering 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL to the routine menu of
NECK are described below.
15:ABDOMEN 16:PELVIS
(1) Select 3. ROUTINE.
17:UP.EXT 18:LOW.EXT
COMMAND>3
21: - - - - - - - - - - 22:TEST
23: - - - - - - - - - - 24: - - - - - - - - - - 0.HEAD 1.NECK 2.CHEST 3.BREAST
25: - - - - - - - - - - 26: - - - - - - - - - - 4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT
27: - - - - - - - - - - 28: - - - - - - - - - - 8.TEST *.ROUTINE
TYPE POSITION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE OR
SPECIFY TWO LOCATIONS TO EXCHANGE * TO SPECIFY ROUTINE
TYPE FIRST LOCATION ROUTINE>
MOVE> Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region for registration of the routine
menu. To display the routine menu, type in *.
Meaning: Select the menu number of the icon to be moved.
(2) Select 1. NECK.
ROUTINE>1
(3) Select 11: HEAD.
MOVE>11
012:CERVICAL SPINE
013:PHARYNX/LARYNX
TYPE ANOTHER ONE
MOVE>
015:LARYNX(<35KV)
Meaning: Select the destination menu number for the menu selected.
*1:OPEN MOUTH
*2:CERVIC.,PED.-1
(4) Select 21:- - - - - - - - - -.
MOVE>21
*4:PHARYNX/LARYNX:C
After quitting the menu and restarting, the HEAD icon on the first page is moved to
the left position on the top of the second page. *5:CERVIC.ESOPHAGUS:C
*8:THORA C.,MYELO:C
*9:CERVICAL SPINE:T
*11:CERVIC.,MAG:M
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE
OR PAGE NUMBER
(P01)
ROUTINE>
Meaning: Select the menu to be registered. To display the menu, type in P + page
number.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 140
(3) Select 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL. Deleting (Disselecting) Routine Menu
ROUTINE>011 The detailed procedures for deleting (disselecting) a routine menu are described below.
The following message appears. (1) Select 3. ROUTINE.
COMMAND>3
011:SKULL,GENERAL
012:PARANASAL SINUS
013:MANDIBLE 0.HEAD 1.NECK 2.CHEST 3.BREAST
014:ORBIT 4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT
015:HEAD,SOFT TISSUE 8.TEST *.ROUTINE
. TYPE POSITION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE OR
. * TO SPECIFY ROUTINE
. ROUTINE>
061:HEAD,MAG:M Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region for registration of the routine
062: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - menu. To display the routine menu, type in *.
063:AVE5CM16
064: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (2) Type in *.
065: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ROUTINE>*
TYPE NEW LOCATION NUMBER OR PAGE NUMBER The following message appears.
(P01~P06)
ROUTINE> 011:SKULL,GENERAL
Meaning: Specify where 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL selected is registered in the 012:PARANASAL SINUS
routine menu. 013:MANDIBLE
014:ORBIT
(4) Type in 034 and touch ENT. 015:HEAD,SOFT TISSUE
ROUTINE>034 .
After quitting the menu and restarting, the routine menu of 011: CERVICAL, GEN- .
ERAL is registered in the fourth position on the third page. .
061:HEAD,MAG:M
062: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
063:AVE5CM16
064: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
065: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE

OR PAGE NUMBER
(P01~P06)
ROUTINE>
Meaning: Select the routine menu to be deleted (disselected). To display the menu,
type in P + page number.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 142
(3) Type in 034. 15.4 4. EDIT: Editing Menu Names and Various Parameters
ROUTINE>034
Menu names and various parameters are edited.
The detailed procedures for editing NECK, 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL, [01] IP are de-
scribed below.
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE DESTINATION,
(1) Select 4. EDIT.
* TO DISSELECT OR PAGE NUMBER
COMMAND>4
(P01~P06)
ROUTINE>
Meaning: To delete (disselect) the menu selected, type in *. To display the menu,
4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT
type in P + page number.
8.TEST
TYPE POSITION NUMBER
EDIT>
(4) Type in * and touch ENT.
Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region to be edited.
ROUTINE>*
(2) Select 1. NECK.
After quitting the menu and restarting, the routine menu of 034 is deleted
(disselected). EDIT>1
012:CERVICAL SPINE
013:PHARYNX/LARYNX
015:LARYNX(<35KV)
*1:OPEN MOUTH
*2:CERVIC.,PED.-1
*4:PHARYNX/LARYNX:C
*8:THORA C.,MYELO:C
*9:CERVICAL SPINE:T
*11:CERVIC.,MAG:M
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OR PAGE NUMBER
(P01)
EDIT>
Meaning: Select the menu to be edited.
(3) Select 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL.
EDIT>011
The current setup values appear.
[00]EDR=0 [01]IP=0 [02]PICTURE=0
[03]FRAME=1 [04]U/D=0 [05]SPOT=0
[06]FILING=0 [07]L/R=0 [08]FILM2=
[09]D-CODE= [10]E-CODE=
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 144
[11]S/H=1 [12]MENU=CERVICAL,GENERAL (4) Select [01] IP.
[13]FILM1= [14]Skfix= EDIT>01
[15]S-SHIFT=*1.0 [16]R-POSI=01 [17]FORMAT=0 The following message appears.
[18]M-MODE=RT [19]COPY=01 [20]C-SHIFT=*1.0
[21]EDGE=0 [22]DIRECTION= [23]TURN=0 IP(0~9,A~F)=0
[24]S-CENTER=0 EDIT>
[25]MENU-J=\375B\4974\3335\3451\2121\2121\2121\2121
\2121\2121\2121\2121\2121\2121\2121\2121 (5) Type in 2.
GA GT GC GS EDIT>2
L [26]=0.9 [27]=F [28]=0.6 [29]=0.30 The value of IP is changed from 0 to 2, with the following message displayed.
R [30]=1.0 [31]=A [32]=0.7 [33]=0.10
S [34]=0.9 [35]=F [36]=0.6 [37]=0.30 TYPE ITEM NUMBER(DEFAULT=00)
RN RT RE OR PAGE NUMBER(P1~P5)
L [38]=4 [39]=R [40]=0.5 EDIT>
R [41]=4 [42]=R [43]=5.0 Meaning: Select the item number to be edited. To display all the item numbers, type in
S [44]=4 [45]=R [46]=0.5 *. To display the item numbers on a page-by-page basis, type in P + page
number.
DRN DRT DRE ORN ORD ORE
L [47]=5 [48]=A [49]=0.0 [50]=5 [51]=1 [52]=0.0
To quit EDIT, type in E/Q.
R [53]=5 [54]=A [55]=0.0 [56]=5 [57]=1 [58]=0.0
S [59]=5 [60]=A [61]=0.0 [62]=5 [63]=1 [64]=0.0 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
HDN HDT HDE HRN HRT HRE By touching the ENT key while a EDIT> prompt for input is displayed, the setting of the next
item number can be edited. For example, if the ENT key is touched without typing in 2 at
L [65]= - [66]= - [67]= - - - [68]= - [69]= - [70]= - - - step (5) above, then item [02] PICTURE subsequent to [01] IP can be edited.
R [71]= - [72]= - [73]= - - - [74]= - [75]= - [76]= - - -
S [77]= - [78]= - [79]= - - - [80]= - [81]= - [82]= - - - (6) Type in E/Q.
PRN PRE a-edge a-calc EDIT>E/Q
L [83]= - [84]= - - - [85]= - [86]= - 4. EDIT is exited.
R [87]= - [88]= - - - [89]= - [90]= -
S [91]= - [92]= - - - [93]= - [94]= -
Sstd Lstd
L [95]= - - - - - [96]= - - - - -
R [97]= - - - - - [98]= - - - - -
S [99]= - - - - - [100]= - - - - -
[*]=LIST [E/Q]=END
TYPE ITEM NUMBER(DEFAULT=00)
OR PAGE NUMBER(P1~P5)
EDIT>
Meaning: Select the item number to be edited. To display all the item numbers, type in
*. To display the item numbers on a page-by-page basis, type in P + page
number.
To quit EDIT, type in E/Q.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 146
15.5 5. COPY: Copying Menu (3) Select 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL.

COPY>011
A menu is copied. The following message appears.
The detailed procedures for copying the menu NECK, 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL are
described below. TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE DESTINATION
(1) Select 5. COPY. OR PAGE NUMBER
COMMAND>5 (P01)
The following message appears. COPY>
0.HEAD 1.NECK 2.CHEST 3.BREAST Meaning: Select the copy destination. To display the menu, type in P + page number.
4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT Example: To display the menu on the first page, type in P01.
8.TEST
TYPE POSITION NUMBER (4) Type in 021.
COPY> COPY>021
Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region to be copied. After quitting the menu and restarting, 011: CERVICAL, GENERAL is copied to the
first position on the second page.
(2) Select 1. NECK.
COPY>1
012:CERVICAL SPINE
013:PHARYNX/LARYNX
015:LARYNX(<35KV)
*1:OPEN MOUTH
*2:CERVIC.,PED.-1
*4:PHARYNX/LARYNX:C
*8:THORA C.,MYELO:C
*9:CERVICAL SPINE:T
*11:CERVIC.,MAG:M
(P01)
COPY>
Meaning: Select the copy source. To display the menu, type in P + page number.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 148
15.6 6. DELETE: Deleting Menu (3) Select 021: CERVICAL, GENERAL.

DELETE>21
A menu is deleted. The following message appears.
The detailed procedures for deleting the menu NECK, 021: CERVICAL, GENERAL are
described below. DELETE
(1) Select 6. DELETE. NECK-021"CERVICAL,GENERAL (Y/N)
COMMAND>6 DELETE>
The following message appears. Meaning: Are you sure to delete the menu selected?
4.ABDOMEN 5.PELVIS 6.UP.EXT 7.LOW.EXT (4) Type in Y.
8.TEST DELETE>Y
TYPE POSITION NUMBER After quitting the menu and restarting, the menu 021: CERVICAL, GENERAL is
DELETE> deleted.
Meaning: Select the number of the anatomical region to be deleted.

(2) Select 1. NECK.
DELETE>1
012:CERVICAL SPINE
013:PHARYNX/LARYNX
015:LARYNX(<35KV)
022: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
023: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
024: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
025: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
*1:OPEN MOUTH
*2:CERVIC.,PED.-1
*4:PHARYNX/LARYNX:C
*8:THORA C.,MYELO:C
*9:CERVICAL SPINE:T
*11:CERVIC.,MAG:M
(P01)
DELETE>
Meaning: Select the menu to be deleted.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 150
15.7 7. FILMMARK: Editing Film Mark 1. MOVE: Moving Film Mark

(1) Select 7. FILMMARK.
The film mark is edited. COMMAND>7
The detailed procedures for editing the film mark are described below. The following message appears.
0. ENTRY: Registering Film Mark

0.ENTRY 1.MOVE 2.EDIT 3.DELETE
(1) Select 7. FILMMARK.
TYPE FUNCTION NUMBER
COMMAND>7
FILMMARK>
Meaning: Select a film mark edit menu.
0.ENTRY 1.MOVE 2.EDIT 3.DELETE
TYPE FUNCTION NUMBER (2) Select 1. MOVE.
FILMMARK> FILMMARK>1
Meaning: Select a film mark edit menu. The following message appears.
(2) Select 0. ENTRY.
12:AP
FILMMARK>0
13:PA 14:L->R
15:R->L 16:L
12:AP
13:PA 14:L->R
21:R 22:LAT
15:R->L 16:L
23:OBL 24:ABC
21:R 22:LAT
25: - - - - - - - - - - 26: - - - - - - - - - -
23:OBL 24: - - - - - - - - - -
25: - - - - - - - - - - 26: - - - - - - - - - - 31: - - - - - - - - - - 32: - - - - - - - - - -
31: - - - - - - - - - - 32: - - - - - - - - - - 33: - - - - - - - - - - 34: - - - - - - - - - -
33: - - - - - - - - - - 34: - - - - - - - - - - 35: - - - - - - - - - -
35: - - - - - - - - - - TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE
TYPE NEW LOCATION NUMBER FILMMARK>
FILMMARK> Meaning: Select the menu number to be moved.
Meaning: Select the menu number for registration of the film mark.
(3) Select 24: - - - - - - - - - - . (3) Select 24: ABC.
FILMMARK>24 FILMMARK>24
TYPE NEW MARK STRING(MAX10CHAR)

TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE DESTINATION,
FILMMARK>
FILMMARK>
Meaning: Type in a new film mark name within 10 half-width alphanumeric characters.
Meaning: Select the number of the destination for the menu selected.
(4) Type in ABC.
FILMMARK>ABC
(4) Select 26: - - - - - - - - - -.
ABC is registered in 24:.
FILMMARK>26
After quitting the menu and restarting, 24 ABC selected at step (2) is displayed as
24: - - - - - - - - - -, while the 26: - - - - - - - - - - selected at step (3) is displayed as
26: ABC.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 152
2. EDIT: Editing Film Mark 3. DELETE: Deleting Film Mark

(1) Select 7. FILMMARK. (1) Select 7. FILMMARK.
COMMAND>7 COMMAND>7
0.ENTRY 1.MOVE 2.EDIT 3.DELETE 0.ENTRY 1.MOVE 2.EDIT 3.DELETE

TYPE FUNCTION NUMBER TYPE FUNCTION NUMBER
FILMMARK> FILMMARK>
Meaning: Select a film mark edit menu. Meaning: Select a film mark edit menu.
(2) Select 2. EDIT. (2) Select 3. DELETE.

12:AP 12:AP
13:PA 14:L->R 13:PA 14:L->R
15:R->L 16:L 15:R->L 16:L
21:R 22:LAT 21:R 22:LAT

23:OBL 24: - - - - - - - - - - 23:OBL 24: - - - - - - - - - -
25: - - - - - - - - - - 26:ABC 25: - - - - - - - - - - 26:DEF
31: - - - - - - - - - - 32: - - - - - - - - - - 31: - - - - - - - - - - 32: - - - - - - - - - -

33: - - - - - - - - - - 34: - - - - - - - - - - 33: - - - - - - - - - - 34: - - - - - - - - - -
35: - - - - - - - - - - 35: - - - - - - - - - -
TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE
FILMMARK> FILMMARK>
Meaning: Select the menu number to be edited. Meaning: Select the menu number to be deleted.
(3) Select 26: ABC. (3) Select 26: DEF.

SOURCE MARK STRING=ABC DELETE 26"DEF (Y/N)

TYPE NEW MARK STRING(MAX10CHAR) FILMMARK>
FILMMARK> Meaning: Are you sure to delete the menu selected?
Meaning: Type in a new film mark name within 10 half-width alphanumeric characters.
(4) Type in Y.
(4) Type in DEF. FILMMARK>Y
FILMMARK>DEF After quitting the menu and restarting, the menu 26: DEF is deleted.
After quitting the menu and restarting, ABC is changed to DEF.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MU - 154 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MU - 155
16. Software Installation Procedures 16.1 Installing the Software (Application)
The software is supplied on floppy disks (abbreviated FDs). If the hard disk has been CAUTION
replaced, format it before installing the software.
If the currently used software version is A08 or earlier, do not update it directly to version A13 or
later. You must first update the software to version between A09 and A12, and then to version
Installation FDs A13.
All the installation FDs are DOS 1.44MB formatted, 3.5-inch floppy disks. Two system disks
are supplied in addition to data disks. The number of data disks varies with the software
version. Installation Procedures
Before installing the software, check that the installation FDs are supplied as indicated in the If the hard disk has been replaced, format it before installing the software.
following list. 16.2 Formatting the Hard Disk
Name Storage device number Quantity Use

Install the software (application) by sequentially inserting the INSTALL system disk and
data disks into the floppy disk drive in compliance with the message appearing on the
System disk Format 114Y5431001A 1 disk (1st disk of the 2-disk set) For hard disk formatting operation panel.
Install 114Y5431002A 1 disk (2nd disk of the 2-disk set) For installation If any error occurs during the installation process, start all over again.
Data disk 114Y5431003A

One set (This number varies with
For application software
(1) Make sure that the machine is OFF.
Appl
the software version.)
If the power is ON, place the circuit breaker in the OFF position to turn OFF the
Software for editing the machine.
One set (This number varies with image processing
PC MENU EDITOR 114Y5431010A
the software version.) parameters and CSL type (2) Insert the INSTALL system disk into the floppy disk drive.
menu settings
TR1B1001.EPS
CAUTION
Do not erroneously interchange the INSTALL system disk and FORMAT system
disk. If you turn ON the machine with the FORMAT disk set in position, the system
automatically starts formatting the hard disk so that you will lose all the data that have
been saved on the hard disk.
(3) Turn ON the machine.

The following messages appear on the operation panel.
Attaching to DMA device...done.
Attaching to <floppy> device...done.
Loading /fd0/VXWORKS.ST...43992 + 66184 + 29428
Starting at 0x1001000...
The following messages appear and the software installation process starts.
-> Install utility. Version A00.
Attaching to <floppy> device...done.
Attaching to <SCSI> device...done.
Upon completion of SCSI device initialization, the following message appears.
Insert data floppy disk.
08.30.2001 FM3115 05.30.2002 FM3405
MU - 156
(4) Remove the INSTALL system disk, and insert data disk #1 into the floppy disk drive. List of install utility error messages
As indicated in the example below, messages appear to indicate that software files If an error occurs during installation, the install utility displays the following error messages.
are copied to the hard disk. When an error message appears, grasp its meaning, take proper remedial action, and
Copy </fd0/bootrom.sys> To </sd0/TEMP/BOOTROM.SYS> resume the installation process.
Copy </fd0/vxworks.st> To </sd0/TEMP/VXWORKS.ST> Could not initialize DMA device.
Copy </fd0/version.dat> To </sd0/TEMP/VERSION.DAT> An abnormality was detected during DMA device initialization.
Copy </fd0/script.txt> To </sd0/TEMP/SCRIPT.TXT>
The MTH08A or CPU90E board is faulty.
......
...... Could not initialize floppy device.
Insert next data floppy disk. An abnormality was detected during floppy device initialization.
(5) Insert the remaining data disks in numerical order. The CPU90E board is faulty.
As indicated in the example below, messages appear to indicate that software files Cannot open </fd0/bootrom.sys>,please setting boot disk.
are copied to the hard disk. The disk placed in the disk drive is not the installation system disk or the contents of
Create </sd0/LOG/CORE.DMP> the disk are damaged.
Create </sd0/LOG/IOT.001> Error loading file </fd0/bootrom.sys>
Create </sd0/LOG/TCB.001>
The contents of the file named bootrom.sys are illegal.
Create </sd0/LOG/ISC.001>
...... Cannot open </fd0/VXWORKS.ST>,please setting boot disk.
...... The disk placed in the disk drive is not the installation system disk or the contents of
Upon completion of log file initialization, the following message appears to indicate the the disk are damaged.
end of installation. Error loading file </fd0/VXWORKS.ST>
Install is complete. The contents of the file named VXWORKS.ST are illegal.
Could not initialize SCSI device.
The hard disk drive was not successfully mounted or formatted.
The MTH08A board, CPU90E board, or SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
Could not access HD device.
The hard disk drive was not successfully accessed.
The MTH08A or SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
error make directory:status= <********>
The directory was not successfully made (the ******** portion is a detail code).
The SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
Cannot open <********>
The file could not be opened (the ******** portion is a filename).
The floppy disk or SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
error copy file:status= <********>
The file could not be coped (the ******** portion is a detail code).
The floppy disk or SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
error rename directory: status= <********>
The directory name could not be changed (the ******** portion is a detail code).
11.20.99 FM2638 (1) 11.20.99 FM2638 (1)
MU - 158
error open directory: status= <********> 16.2 Formatting Hard Disk

The directory was not found (the ******** portion is a detail code).
CAUTION
error create file:status= <********>
For the CSL-type machine for use in the U.S., if the hard disk is formatted and software is
The file could not be generated (the ******** portion is a detail code).
reinstalled, be sure to install the Menu default FD for USA setup file as well.
error file size.
The file size is illegal. Formatting Procedures
The floppy disk is faulty. The hard disk should be formatted only when a hard disk access error frequently occurs or
the data on the hard disk is lost wholly or partly.
(1) Make sure that the machine is powered OFF.
If the power is ON, place the circuit breaker in the OFF position to power OFF the
machine.
(2) Put the FORMAT disk into the floppy disk drive.
CAUTION
If you change your mind and do not want to format the hard disk, remove the FOR-
MAT disk from the floppy disk drive before doing anything. If you power ON the ma-
chine with the FORMAT disk inserted into the floppy disk drive, the system automati-
cally initiates the hard disk formatting sequence without asking for the users confirma-
tion.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 160
16.3 Installing Menu Default FD for USA Setup File (Only for (7) Select 7. FILE UTILITY, 4. RESTORE and 5. CSL MENU DATA in sequence.
Use in USA/CSL Type) 7. FILE UTILITY

8. BACKUP MEMORY A B C
For the CSL-type machine for use in the U.S., if the hard disk is formatted and software is 9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
installed, be sure to install the Menu default FD for USA setup file as well. >7 D E F
0.QUIT
Installation 1.FORMAT FD 7 8 9
2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION
(1) Put the Menu default FD for USA setup file floppy disk into the FD drive. 3.BACK UP
4.RESTORE 4 5 6
(2) Touch the U-Utility button. 5.EDR DATA
6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE
The screen switches to the U-Utility mode. 7.EXECUTION 1 2 3
FUT> 4
0.QUIT 0 . SP
M-Utility is activated. 1.SCANNER DATA
(4) Select 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING and 1. SYSTEM in sequence. 2.CONFIGURATION DATA
3.NETWORK DATA DEL BS ENT
4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA
5.CSL MENU DATA
0. QUIT FUT:RES>5 Caps
3. TEST MODE
FR1BA009.EPS
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY (8) Remove the Menu default FD for USA setup file floppy disk from the FD drive.
7. FILE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY 7 8 9 (9) Select 0. QUIT repeatedly.
9. HV OFF
10. MENU SETTING
>2
The screen returns to the U-Utility mode.
4 5 6
0.QUIT
1.SYSTEM
2.PRINT
1 2 3 The machine is reset so that the setting of the file installed becomes effective.
3.REMOTE SWITCH
4.EQUIPMENT 0 . SP
5.LOCAL INTERFACE
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE
7.HOSTS ADDRESS
DEL BS ENT
8.DISTRIBUTION
9.ROUTING
10.NETMASKS
11.DICOM Caps
>1
FR1BA007.EPS
(5) Set the language setting item, FNT, to 1.
#
# IRSET.ORG/CFG A B C
#
IDT=1 D E F
#1.System Type
Language
setting item # 0:CSL / 1:IDT
7 8 9
FNT=1
#2.FONT(LANGUAGE)
# 0:JPN / 1:ENG / 2:GER / 3:FRN / 4:ESP / 4 5 6
# 5:ITA / 6:SWE / 7:FIN / 8:DEN / 9:NOR /
# 10:KOR
# (7,10:Not Available) 1 2 3
FR1BA008.EPS
(6) Touch the [SAVE] key.

The edited content is saved to the HD.
11.20.99 FM2638 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 162
ETC
17. List of Software Files
IRSET.ORG Machine definition file (original)
Definition of machine status, etc. (setup value, default value described)
17.1 SYSTEM
IRSET.CFG Machine setup file (user setup)
SYSTEM FILMFMT.ORG Format setup file (original)
Definition of film character format (setup value, default value described)
BOOTROM.SYS Boot file
FILMFMT.CFG Format setup file (user setup)
SCRIPT.TXT Startup script
IRSTATUS.ORG Machine status-related item film (original)
VXWORKS.ST OS, BSP
Definition of items, such as IP conveyance mode
VERSION.DAT Version information definition file
IRSTATUS.CFG Machine status-related item file (user setup)
For application startup opening screen
EOUIP Connected unit candidate file
DPR.ABS Main program file Definition of connected unit (IDT or LP), etc.
FFASC8.FNT ASCII fonts (8 dots) CODEDSTB Distribution code definition file
FFASCW8.FNT ASCII white fonts (8 dots) HOSTS Connected host setup file
FFASC16.FNT ASCII fonts (16 dots) Correspondence table between connected host name and IP address
FFASC24.FNT ASCII fonts (24 dots) DEVICE Device setup file
Correspondence table between host name and device connected to
FFASCE8.FNT ASCII external fonts (8 dots)
that host
FFRMN8.FNT CodePage850 (8 dots)
ROUTE Route setup file
Host name that has routing capability is described.
OPTION.001 Soft key
FFANK8.FNT JIS X0201 (half-width 8 dots) Remote monitor function
FFANK16.FNT JIS X0201 (half-width 16 dots) OPTION.002 Soft key
FFANK24.FNT JIS X0201 (half-width 24 dots) Image processing with 2 unsharp mask sizes
FFKNJ16.FNT JIS X0208 (Kanji 16 dots) OPTION.003 Soft key
Online connection
FFKNJ24.FNT JIS X0208 (Kanji 24 dots)
OPTION.004 Soft key
2430 mammo
NETMASKS Subnet mask file
Subnet mask per domain/host is described.\
RMT_SW.CFG Remote power config file
Remote commands for the host applicable to remote power control are
described.
DICOM Base on DICOM connection information file
Connection requirements for the host applicable to Base on DICOM
connection are described.

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
MU - 164
IDM CSL
HIPMENU.PRM Standard image processing parameter file MENU_WIN.JPN CRT display/touch panel control file
Fuji standard menu data (image processing with same unsharp mask MENU_WIN.ENG CRT display/touch panel control file
size)
MENU_WIN.GER CRT display/touch panel control file
HPUMN.PRM Standard image processing parameter file
Institution-specific menu data MENU_WIN.FRN CRT display/touch panel control file
HIPMNRL.PRM Standard image processing parameter file MENU_WIN.ESP CRT display/touch panel control file
Fuji standard menu data (image processing with independent unsharp MENU_WIN.ITA CRT display/touch panel control file
mask sizes) MENU_WIN.SWE CRT display/touch panel control file
HIPSTD.PRM Mask/frequency/gradation table MENU_WIN.DEN CRT display/touch panel control file
Fuji standard table (standard image processing table)
MENU_WIN.FIN CRT display/touch panel control file
HIPSTDU.PRM Mask/frequency/gradation table
Institution-specific table (standard image processing table) MENU_WIN.NOR CRT display/touch panel control file
HIPOP.PRM Optional image processing parameter file BODYDISP.CFG Exposure anatomy display information setup file
Fuji standard table MENUDISP.CFG Exposure menu display information setup file
HIPOPU.PRM Optional image processing parameter file RTN_DISP.CFG Routine menu display information setup file
Institution-specific table MPM_DEF.PRM Exposure parameter setup file
HIPOPT.PRM Optional mask filter table FILMMARK.PRM Film mark character setup file
Fuji standard table (optional image processing table)
CSL_ICONS.CFG Icon data file
HIPOPTU.PRM Optional mask filter table
CARDFORM.CFG Magnetic card specific information setup file
Institution-specific table (optional image processing table)
SIOSETUP.CSL Data link layer setup parameter definition file
HP.PRM Hyper image processing parameter file
Fuji standard table PNL
HPU.PRM Hyper image processing parameter file MESSAGES.JPN Display message definition file
Institution-specific table Message data indicated on the display (Japanese)
HPT.PRM Hyper mask filter table MESSAGES.ENG Display message definition file
Fuji standard table (hyper image processing table) Message data indicated on the display (English)
HPTU.PRM Hyper mask filter table MESSAGES.ESP Display message definition file
Institution-specific table (hyper image processing table) Message data indicated on the display (Spanish)
PEM.PRM PEM processing parameter file MESSAGES.FRN Display message definition file
Message data indicated on the display (French)
Fuji standard table
MESSAGES.GER Display message definition file
PEMU.PRM PEM processing parameter file Message data indicated on the display (German)
Institution-specific table
MESSAGES.ITA Display message definition file
PEMT.PRM PEM unsharp mask data table Message data indicated on the display (Italian)
Fuji standard table (PEM processing table)
MESSAGES.SWE Display message definition file
PEMTU.PRM PEM unsharp mask data table Message data indicated on the display (Swedish)
Institution-specific table (PEM processing table)
MESSAGES.DEN Display message definition file
Message data indicated on the display (Danish)
MESSAGES.NOR Display message definition file
Message data indicated on the display (Norwegian)
MESSAGES.FIN Display message definition file
Message data indicated on the display (Finnish)
ICONS.PNL Integration file for icons used on PNL
Multiple icon files are integrated into a single file.

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
MU - 166
IPH SCN
PUL_PARA.FIL Pulse motor parameter definition file SCN_IFMT.DAT Format set data file
Pulse motor parameters complying with the mechanical control specifi- Data regarding set-specific format
cation are defined. SCN_MAIN.DAT Main-scan control data file
IPH_TIME.FIL Conveyance timer file Data for controlling the optics, synchronization, image signal system,
Timeout times complying with the mechanical control specification are light-collecting system
defined. SCN_INIT.DAT Main-scan initial setup data file
RETRYCNT.FIL Subscanning parameter file Scanner initial setup parameter
Conveyance parameters complying with the subscanning control SCN_ISEN.DAT Sensitivity set data file
specification Data regarding set-specific sensitivity
SCN_ISEN.ORG Sensitivity set data file
IMG
Data regarding set-specific sensitivity (factory-default original, file
CRT_FORM.DAT Monitor character format information name written to the FD with UTL)
Referenced when CRT characters are created.
SCN_SHDG.SHD Shading correction data file
IMG_SIZE.DAT Shading correction result
DEL_TABL.FIL Erasure conveyance speed table determination file SCN_SHDG.DEF Shading correction data file (default data)
For table determination complying with the erasure control specification Shading correction result (for institution with poor tube conditions)
DEL_DEFN.FIL Erasure conveyance speed definition file SCN_SHDG.ORG Shading correction data file
Conveyance speed table complying with the erasure control specifica- Shading correction result (factory-default original, file name written to
tion the FD with UTL)
CRT_TEST.DAT Test pattern file SCN_POLY.POL Polygon correction data file
Test pattern data Polygon correction result
SCN_POLY.DEF Polygon correction data file (default data)
EDR Polygon correction result (for institution with poor tube conditions)
MPMPRM.PRM EDR standard parameter SCN_POLY.ORG Polygon correction data file
Parameters for each menu are defined. Polygon correction result (factory-default original, file name written to
IRMPRM.PRM EDR standard parameter the FD with UTL)
Histogram parameters are defined. SCN_ELVL.DAT Erasure level detection data file
MPMUMN.PRM EDR user parameter Table for erasure dose detection
Menu parameter definition for specific institution SNDPIXEL.DAT Invalid pixel setting file
IRMUMN.PRM EDR user parameter SNDLINE.DAT Invalid line setting file
Histogram parameter definition for specific institution
NNPRM.PRM Standard neuro parameter MICRO
Standard parameter for neuro analysis
DSP4M1J.S24 Image processing -program
NNUMN.PRM Specific neuro parameter
Specific parameter for neuro analysis

EDR.ABS EDR program
EDR software program

03.20.2004 FM4275 03.20.2004 FM4275
MU - 168
LIF 17.2 LOG

LPLFMT0J.DAT B4 format file
LPFMT1J.DAT 14" x 17" format file LOG
MCFFMT0J.BIN Film character format file ERRLOG0.000 Error log save file
Saved only to the FD in error log (level 0) maintenance utility.

ERRLOGX.000 Error log save file

Saved only to the FD in error log (other than level 0) maintenance
MICRO utility.
DSP10M1J.S24 Image processing -program ISC.000 ISC log save file
ISC log journal (extensions 001 to 005 denote normal logs, while
011 to 013 denote dumb logs
SED_MFC.000 SED log save file (MFC)
DSP11M2J.S24 Image processing -program SED log journal
DSP20M1J.S24 Image processing -program SED_JNL.000 SED log save file (JNL)
DSP21M1J.S24 Image processing -program SED_PNL.000 SED log save file (PNL)
SED log journal
SED_IPH.000 SED log save file (IPH)
SED log journal
SED_IMG.000 SED log save file (IMG)
DSP31M2J.S24 Image processing -program SED_IIF.000 SED log save file (IIF)
SED log journal

SED_CSL.000 SED log save file (CSL)
SED log journal
DIF
SED_DST.000 SED log save file (DST)
SIOSETUP.DMS Data link layer setup parameter definition file SED log journal
Data link layer setup parameter for DMS (E-IF) connection SED_LIF.000 SED log save file (LIF)
SED log journal
MICRO
SED_DIF.000 SED log save file (DIF)
DSP0M2J.S24 Image processing -program SED_FOT.000 SED log save file (FOT)
IIF SED log journal
SIOSETUP.IDT Data link layer setup parameter definition file SED_FIN.000 SED log save file (FIN)
SED log journal
Data link layer setup parameter for IDT (serial) connection
SED_DOT.000 SED log save file (DOT)
HCP SED log journal
IOT.000 IOT data
MICRO
IOT data journal
DSPHM1J.S24
SMCU_LIF.000 External unit communication log (serial LP)
External unit communication log journal
SMCU_DIF.000 External unit communication log (serial DMS)
LAN
LANCONT.ABS LAN board control program

03.20.2004 FM4275 11.20.99 FM2638
MU - 170
SMCU_IIF.000 External unit communication log (serial IIF) BLANK PAGE
GD_IPH.000 Global data (IPH)
GD_CSL.000 Global data (CSL)
GD_DST.000 Global data (DST)
GD_LIF.000 Global data (LIF)
GD_FOT.000 Global data (FOT)
GD_FIN.000 Global data (FIN)
GD_HCP.000 Global data (HCP)
GD_DOT.000 Global data (DOT)
GD_IMM.000 Image management system data
External unit communication log journal (history information, etc.)
GD_QUM.000 Queue management system data
External unit communication log journal (history information, etc.)
CORE.DMP Core dump

03.20.2004 FM4275 11.20.99 FM2638
Service Parts List Control Sheet SP - 1
Control Sheet
03.30.2002 12 CorrectionFM3332 All pages
01.15.2004 13 CorrectionFM4219 SP-7, 10, 12, 14, 18 23, 25, 27,
29 123
CR-IR341/ CR-IR341P 08.31.2005 14 CorrectionFM4656 SP-2, 19 25, 29, 31, 37, 39, 47, 57,
61, 63, 67, 69, 73, 79, 83, 89, 91, 92,
99, 100, 103 105, 107, 112, 113,
115, 119, 120
Service Manual
Service Parts ListSP
Note to be taken when the Service Parts List is used
The Service Parts List shall be managed using the information common to both English and Japanese
versions.
Thus, it should be noted that the document numbers and revision numbers are managed according to the
numbers used in the Japanese version.
009-051-14
08.31.2005 FM4656
CR-IR341 Service Manual SP - 1
Reference list AC 5000 9848 600 02111 /2 20.10.2009
FUJI CODE DESCRIPTION PHILIPS CODE RANK REMARKS P - LIST

104N0043 Photo Sensor 4512 131 36001
104N0044 Photo Sensor 4512 131 36011
104Y0162 Photo Sensor 4512 131 36021
107Y0163B Solenoid 4512 131 36031
107Y0166 Solenoid Assembly 4512 131 36041
113Y1038 Board Assembly 4522 500 23391
113Y1324J SCN08A 4512 131 36061 > -> 113Y1324/M
113Y1324M SCN08A 4512 131 36062 REC see 'Scanner compatibility'
113Y1325D SED08A 4512 131 36051 REC
113Y1328G PMT08A 4512 131 36071 REC
113Y1395 Board Assembly 4512 131 36081 REC
113Y1555C MTH08D 4512 156 07061 REC
113Y1583A DIM08A 4512 156 07071 REC
113Y1584B LAN90B 4512 131 98081 REC
113Y1660A CNN08A 4512 156 07331
113Y1682B LAN90D 4512 156 07311 REC
113Y7012D/E IMG07B 4512 131 36091 REC
113Y7015C MMC90A 4512 131 36101 REC
113Y7034J CPU90E 4512 131 36111 REC
113Y7035P CPU90F 4512 131 36121 > -> 113Y1682
113Y7041G HCP08A 4512 131 36131 REC
113Y7042D MTH08A 4512 131 36141 > -> 898Y0837
113Y7043A LED08A 4512 131 36151
113Y7044E/F SNS08A 4512 131 36161 REC
113Y7046A LED08B 4512 131 36171
113Y7047N DRV08A 4512 131 36181 REC
113Y7067B VOL08A 4512 131 36191
113Y7070A BCR08A 4512 131 36201
114Y5431001A01 Format FD 4512 116 02901 in InCenter
114Y5431002A01 Install FD 4512 116 03001 in InCenter
114Y5431003A08 Application FD 4512 201 00111
114Y5431003A19 Application FD 4512 201 00118 in InCenter
114Y5431026A00 DICOM option 4512 116 03101 in InCenter
114Y5431101A BOOT ROM 4512 131 36211 > -> 114Y5431101A02
114Y5431101A02 PROM CPU90E 4512 131 36212
114Y5431204A BOOT ROM 4512 131 36221
115S0072B Thermo Switch 4522 500 24741
115S0083 Thermo Switch 4522 500 24701 > -> 115S0136
115S0136A Thermo Switch 4522 500 24702
118SX070A Motor 4512 131 36231 REC
118YX159 Stepping Motor 4522 500 22141 REC
118YX700B Motor 4512 131 36251 > -> 118YX700D
118YX700D Motor 4512 131 36252 REC
119Y1097 Fan 4522 500 27101
119Y1107 Fan 4512 131 36261
119Y1119 Fan 4512 131 36271
119Y1700 Fan 4512 131 36281
120Y0074A Socket 4512 131 37191
120Y0075A Socket 4512 131 37201
123N0006A Lamp 4512 131 36291 > -> 123N0008
123N0008A Lamp 4512 156 07401 REC
124Y0045C LD Assembly 4512 156 05691 REC see 'Scanner compatibility'
124Y7000C LD Assembly 4512 131 36301 REC see 'Scanner compatibility'
125N0094G Power Supply 4512 131 36311 > -> 125N0094H
125N0094H Power Supply 4512 131 36312 > -> 125N0094J/K
125N0094J/K Power Supply 4512 131 36313 REC
128S0392 Switch 4512 131 81561
128Y0200 Switch 4522 500 26401
128Y0241A Micro Switch 4512 156 02091
128Y0258B Micro Switch Assembly 4512 131 36331
133Y1031B Motor Pump 4512 131 81571 REC
133Y2029 Motor Pump 4512 131 36341 REC
134Y0050 Solenoid Valve 4512 131 36351 REC
134Y0056C Solenoid Valve 4512 131 81581 REC
136Y6102C Cable 4512 156 07781
136Y8515 Cable 4512 156 07791
137N2001 Fuse Holder 4512 131 98151
138S0107 Ferrite Bead 4512 131 98161
305N0014A Nut 4522 500 23581
309S0025 Washer 4512 156 02481
316S0146 Clamp 4512 156 05901
316S3067 Latch 4512 156 07701 > -> 316S31576
316S3156 Latch 4512 156 07702
317N1047A Cap 4512 131 37211
317N1049A Cap 4512 131 37221
318N1014A Bushing 4512 156 02501
318N1042A Bushing 4512 131 37231
318N1051A Bushing 4512 131 37241
318N1059A Bushing 4512 131 37251
318S3050 Grommet 4512 156 02531
322N0020A Bearing 4512 131 37261
322N0021A Bearing 4512 156 05771
322SF002 Bearing 4512 156 02571
322SF004 Bearing 4522 500 24291
322SF012 Bearing 4512 131 37271
322SF017 Bearing 4522 500 22211
322SF021 Bearing 4512 156 02581
322SF029 Bearing 4522 500 23291
322SF041 Bearing 4522 500 22231
322SF043 Bearing 4522 500 22751
322SF044 Bearing 4512 156 02591
322SF050 Bearing 4522 500 23081
322SF050 Bearing 4522 500 23081
322SF061 Bearing 4522 500 22081
322SF061 Bearing 4522 500 22081
322SF069 Bearing 4512 156 02601
322SF103 Bearing 4512 156 02621
322SF109 Bearing 4512 156 02651
322SF126 Bearing 4512 156 02661
322SY048 Plain Bearing 4512 131 98181
322SY054 Plain Bearing 4522 500 23441
322SY055 Plain Bearing 4512 156 02681
322SY061 Plain Bearing 4522 500 27651
322SY064 Plain Bearing 4512 131 98191
322SY067 Plain Bearing 4512 131 37291
322SY093 Plain Bearing 4512 131 37301
322SY097 Plain Bearing 4512 131 98201
322SY103 Plain Bearing 4522 500 27601
322SY112 Plain Bearing 4522 500 24341
322SY121 Plain Bearing 4512 131 37311
322SY146 Plain Bearing 4512 131 98211
323N0017 Belt 4522 500 25701
323N0033 Belt 4512 131 36361
323N1221A Belt 4522 500 25671
323S3066 Timing Belt 4522 500 23561
323S3072 Timing Belt 4512 131 36881
323S3073 Timing Belt 4522 500 29251
323S3077 Timing Belt 4512 131 36891
323S3082 Timing Belt 4512 131 36901
323S3098 Timing Belt 4512 131 36911
323S3220 Timing Belt 4512 131 36931
323S3255 Timing Belt 4522 500 23571
323S3281 Timing Belt 4512 131 36951
323S3283 Timing Belt 4512 131 36961
323S3287 Timing Belt 4512 131 36971
323S3288 Timing Belt 4512 131 36981
323S3289 Timing Belt 4512 131 36991
323S3290 Timing Belt 4512 131 37001
323S3295 Timing Belt 4512 131 37011
324N3038C Timing Belt Wheel 4522 500 23101
324N3041E Timing Belt Wheel 4522 500 22981
324N3041E Timing Belt Wheel 4522 500 22981
324N3093A Timing Belt Wheel 4522 500 25121
324N3098B Timing Belt Wheel 4512 156 02731
324N3106B Timing Belt Wheel 4522 500 23541
324N3121 Timing Belt Wheel 4512 131 98811
327N1121608A Spur Gear 4512 131 88431
327N1124001A Spur Gear 4512 156 07711
327N1201603A Gear 4512 131 89971
329N7003B Cam 4512 131 37321
329N7005D Cam 4512 131 37331 > -> 329Y0015A
329N7006C Cam 4512 131 37341 > -> 329Y0016A
329Y0015A Cam 4512 131 37332
329Y0016A Cam 4512 131 37342
332N3463A Stopper 4512 131 89281
333N7000B Reel 4512 156 05781
334N2339B Roller 4512 131 98251
334N2714A Plastic Roller 4512 131 37351
334N3453A Rubber Roller 4512 131 37021
334N3456B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37031
334N3457B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37041
334N3459B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37051
334N3460B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37061
334N3461B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37071
334N3462B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37081
334N3463B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37091
334N3464B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37101
334N3465B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37111
334N3466B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37121
334N3467B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37131
334N3488A Rubber Roller 4512 131 37141
334N3489A Rubber Roller 4512 131 37151
334N3556 Rubber Roller 4512 156 07021
334N3721 Rubber Roller 4522 500 22992 > -> 334N3556
334N3784B Rubber Roller 4512 131 37161
334N3785C Rubber Roller 4512 131 37171
334N3786A Rubber Roller 4512 131 37181
334N5004B Brush Roller 4512 131 36371 > -> 334N5014
334N5014 Brush Roller 4512 131 36372
334Y2197B Plastic Roller 4522 500 27461
334Y3153C Rubber Roller Assembly 4512 131 36381
334Y3154A Rubber Roller Assembly 4512 131 36391
334Y3160 Rubber Roller 4512 131 36401
337N0043 Wheel 4512 156 02901
337S0003 Wheel 4522 500 23781
340N0152 Trimmer 4512 131 36411
341N0745 Arm 4512 156 02911
345N1236B Louvre 4512 156 07161
345N1237B Louvre 4512 156 07171
345Y0158A Cover 4512 131 36421
347N0636 Spacer 4512 156 02951
347N0727 Spacer 4512 156 05911
347N1261 Spacer 4512 156 02971
347N1490A Spacer 4512 156 05921
350N1981B Cover 4512 131 98381
350Y1313A FDD cover 4512 131 37362
350Y1314C Lower Front Cover Assembly 4512 156 07971
356N5815B Bracket 4512 131 81221
356N5828C Bracket 4512 156 05931
356N5949A Bracket 4512 156 07121
356N5966 Bracket 4512 156 05941
356N5967 Bracket 4512 156 05951
356N5975A Bracket 4512 156 05851
356Y0174 Bracket 4512 156 05841
356Y0200 Bracket Assembly 4512 156 07361
357N7028A Base 4512 131 37371
360N0339A Housing 4512 156 05791
362N0468 Spacer 4512 156 05961
362N0469A Support 4512 156 05861
362N0474B Support 4512 156 05871
363N1708A Guide 4512 156 03191
363N1755D Guide Plate 4512 131 36431
363N1777C Guide Plate 4512 131 37381
363N1788B Guide 4512 131 88021
363N1813B Guide 4512 156 07111
363N7105B Guide 4512 156 07621
363N7106B Guide 4512 156 07581
363N7108B Guide 4512 156 07631
363N7109B Guide 4512 156 07641
363N7111A Guide 4512 156 07651
363N7112A Guide 4512 156 07591
363N7115B Guide 4512 156 07601
363N7116B Guide 4512 156 07611
363Y0274B Guide Plate 4512 131 36441
363Y0275B Guide Plate 4512 131 36451
363Y0276B Guide Plate 4512 131 36461
363Y0278C Guide 4512 156 07661
363Y0279C Guide 4512 156 07671
363Y0280C Guide 4512 156 07681
363Y0281B Guide 4512 156 07691
363Y0282A Guide Plate 4512 156 07081 > -> 363Y0357
363Y0283B Guide 4512 131 36471
363Y0284A Guide 4512 131 36481
363Y0285B Guide Plate 4512 131 36491
363Y0286B Guide Plate 4512 131 36501
363Y0292A Guide Plate 4512 131 36511
363Y0294A Guide 4512 131 36521
363Y0296B Guide Plate 4512 131 36531 > -> 363Y0492
363Y0308A Guide Plate 4512 131 36591
363Y0310A Guide 4512 131 36601
363Y0311 Guide 4512 131 36611
363Y0320 Guide Plate 4512 131 36621 > -> 363Y0485
363Y0357 Guide 4512 156 07082
363Y0485 Guide Plate 4512 131 36621
363Y0492 Guide Plate 4512 131 36532
363Y1822A Guide Plate 4512 131 36631
363Y1823A Guide Plate 4512 131 36641
367N1006 Caster 4512 133 70551
370NB020 Hose 4512 131 37391
370NB033 Hose 4512 131 37401
370NB045 Hose 4512 156 07041
370NB060 Hose 4522 500 22651
370NB075 Hose 4512 131 37411
370NC020 Hose 4512 131 37441
370NC0323 Hose 4512 156 07051
370NC070A Hose 4512 131 37451
370NC180 Hose 4512 156 03281
371S0003 Nozzle 4512 131 37461
372S0049A Joint 4512 156 05971
372S0050A Joint 4512 131 88761
372S0053A Joint 4512 156 05981
372S0055 Diverge Tube 4512 131 37471
372S0060 Joint 4512 156 05991
375S0040 Packing 4522 500 23251 REC
376N0182A Mechanical Filter 4512 131 36651
376N0183 Mechanical Filter 4512 131 36661
376N0184 Mechanical Filter 4512 131 36671
379N0113A Radiator Plate 4512 156 07341
383Y0057 Wire 4512 131 36691
383Y0058 Wire 4512 131 36701
383Y0059 Wire 4512 131 36711
383Y0060 Wire 4512 131 36721
383Y0061 Wire 4512 131 36731
383Y0062 Wire 4512 131 36741
383Y0063 Wire 4512 131 36751
383Y0064 Wire 4512 131 36761
383Y0065 Wire 4512 131 36771
384N0045 Tape 4512 156 07131
384N0046 Tape 4512 156 07141
384N0047 Tape 4512 156 07151
386N0726 Shock Absorber 4512 131 36781
386Y0021 Vibration Proof Rubber Assembly 4512 131 36791 > -> 386Y0021A
386Y0021A Vibration Proof Rubber Assembly 4512 131 36792
387N0088 Antistatic Brush 4512 156 07191
387N0095A Antistatic Brush 4512 156 07201
388N1073 Compression Coil Spring 4512 156 03341
388N1075A Compression Coil Spring 4522 500 25851
388N1701 Compression Coil Spring 4512 156 03351
388N2222 Extension Spring 4522 500 25611
388N2227A Extension Spring 4522 500 25721
388N2228B Extension Spring 4522 500 25751
388N2229B Extension Spring 4522 500 25761
388N3075A Torsion Coil Spring 4512 156 07421
388N5184A Leaf Spring 4512 156 03401
388N5214 Leaf Spring 4512 156 02631
392N0005A Suction Cup 4522 500 27591 > -> 334N0010
392N0010 Suction Cup 4512 156 05821 REC
398N0057D Shutter 4512 156 07761
602Y0105 Mirror Assembly 4512 131 37481
603N0162B Filter 4512 131 37501
603Y7001 Filter 4512 131 36801
606Y0032C Light-collecting Guide Assembly 4512 131 36811 REC
615Y7000B Polygonal Mirror Assembly 4512 131 36821 REC
815Y7003 SYN08A Assembly 4512 131 36831 REC
822Y7001 Cassette Set Unit 4512 156 07091
831Y7000 IP removal unit 4512 156 05891
839Y0022B/C Scanning Optics Unit 4512 156 05701 > see 'Scanner compatibility'
839Y0046 Scanning Optics Unit 4512 131 37511 see 'Scanner compatibility'
839Y0047 Scanning Optics Unit 4512 131 89291 see 'Scanner compatibility'
839Y7003E Scanning Optics Unit 4512 131 37511 > see 'Scanner compatibility'
840Y0082A Lamp Unit 4512 156 07031
849Y0086A Monitor 4512 131 36841 REC
850S0080 HDD 4512 131 36862 > -> 850Y0113/ 0114
850S0086 FDD 4512 131 36851 > -> 850S0087
850S0087 FDD 4512 131 36852 > -> 850S0088
850S0088 FDD 4512 131 36853
850S0121 HDD 4512 131 36861 > see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
850Y0112 HDD 4512 156 05881 REC see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
850Y0113D HDD 4512 156 05751 > see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
850Y0114 HDD 4512 156 05761 > see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
850Y0130 HDD Kit 4512 156 05762 > see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
850Y0131 HDD 4512 156 07322 > -> 850Y0144
850Y10019 HDD 4512 156 07324 REC see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
852N0016 Bar Code Reader 4512 131 36871 REC
852N0019C Bar Code Reader 4512 156 07011 REC
898Y0837 Kit MTH08D+DIM08A 4512 131 98801
898Y0864 HDD Attachment Kit 4512 156 07351 see 'HDDs in AC500 ....'
898Y0901 Kit 898Y0901 4512 156 07371 complete IP removal arm
898Y0973 Antistatic Kit AC5000 4512 131 89541 > -> 898Y1030
898Y1030 Antistatic Kit AC5000 4512 131 89542 > -> 898Y1087
898Y1087 Antistatic Kit AC5000 4512 131 89543
AC500, AC5000 and Cosima - Scanning Optics Unit compatibility 2009/10/20
1. Overview
scanning AC500 AC5000 Cosima Laser Unit Scanner board SCN 08 Lowest Software Release Spacer, 2 x
units - #3804 3805 - 4113 #5001 - - #3240 3241 - 3421 #5001 - - #2067 #2068 - 124Y7000 124Y0045 - 113Y1324J 113Y1324K - A06 (AC500) A10 (AC5000) 898Y0835
839Y7003D/E X X X X X no need no need 1)

839Y0022B/C X X X X X X 1)
839Y0045 X X X X X X by factory
839Y0047 X X X X X X X X X X included
839Y0049A X X
839Y0047 = 839Y0045 + 898Y0835

898Y0835 = 2 x 347N1797A
1) If the scanning optics unit must be replaced by 839Y0047 the two spacers 8 x11 mm have to be installed according to the attached Fuji document.
2. Parts to be ordered
Depending on the type and the serial number of the reader or the installed scanning optics unit order the parts mentioned below.
Replacement of: Replaced by: To be ordered by Philips number:
839Y7003D/E 839Y0047 + 124Y0045C + 113Y1324M + actual software + 1) 4512 131 89291 + 4512 156 05691 + 4512 131 36062 , SW via InCenter
839Y0022B/C 839Y0047 + 1) 4512 131 89291
839Y0045 839Y0047 4512 131 89291
839Y0049A 839Y0049A 4512 131 98712

PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
DMC HAMBURG
Service Design PCR 2008/05/21 B.Freytag file:HDD_AC5xx_2.doc 1/1
PCR - Service Information

HDDs in AC 500 / AC 5000 / Cosima Reader
# xxxx = last four digits of the serial number of a reader

- # xxxx = up to serial number xxxx
# xxxx - = from serial number xxxx onwards
AC 500 AC 5000 Cosima Philips Code Fuji Code Description

Parts to be ordered in case of a first replacement of the hard disk:
- # 2084 - # 2215 - 4512 156 07324 850Y10019 HDD
4512 156 07351 898Y0864 HDD Attachment kit
4512 156 07361 356Y0200 Bracket Assembly
# 2085 - # 2670 # 2216 - # 2670 - 4512 156 07324 850Y10019 HDD

4512 156 07331 113Y1660A Conversion Board
4512 156 07341 379N0113A Radiator Plate
4512 156 07361 356Y0200 Bracket Assembly
# 2671 - # 5170 # 2671 - # 5610 s/n not 4512 156 07324 850Y10019 HDD
available. 4512 156 07331 113Y1660A Conversion Board
Check at site. 4512 156 07341 379N0113A Radiator Plate
# 5171 - # 5611 - s/n not 4512 156 07324 850Y10019 HDD

available. 4512 156 07341 379N0113A Radiator Plate
Check at site.
Parts to be ordered in case of further replacements:

all all all 4512 156 07324 850Y10019 HDD
4512 156 07341 379N0113A Radiator Plate
Types of used HDDs (history):

850S0107 ST52160N
850S0121 QM32100SE-S
850S0080 WDE4550-003
850S0085 WDE91000-003
850S0095 ST318416N
4512 156 07321 850Y0117 DK32DJ-18MW (Hitachi)
4512 156 07322 850Y0131 ST336607 LW, 36GB
4512 156 07323 850Y0144 ST373207 LW, 73GB
current delivery: 4512 156 07324 850Y10019 ST373455 LW
Service Parts List SP - 2 Service Parts List SP - 3
REF.NO. Quantities of recommended spare parts

How to Use Service
REF. NO. is a parts number indicated in the It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in
Parts List Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts stock a certain quantity of parts according to
having different functions, they are clearly the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the parts,
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL as follows. For periodically replaced parts,
RANK NUMBER columns. hold them in stock separately.
Handling RANK characters (parts that are Adjust the stock quantity of service parts
PART NUMBER
handled in a special manner during parts depending on the number of working units
operation, such as replacement) PART NUMBER is a code number that is (N).
unique to each part.
It is assigned only to applicable parts. Quantity used in a single system : Q
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty
An alphabetic letter at the right-most position
R Must be returned. Repairable
of the code number has the following mean- N=1
ing.
Q
Must be returned.
Not repairable Rank A = 1 + Q x 0.3
(We use for analysis.)
For hardware Rank C = 1 + Q x 0.05
Must Not be returned.
(Consumable part. The alphabet denotes the version number of a Rank D = 1 + Q x 0.02
T Not repairable
Not applicable for free part. If parts have different version numbers, 2N10
of charge.)
they are upward-compatible. Rank A = 2 + N x Q x 0.3
without
R, Q, T
Must Not be returned. Not repairable For software Rank C = 2 + N x Q x 0.05
The alphabet denotes a difference in the Rank D = 1 + N x Q x 0.02
Export regulation-applicable character specifications. Parts differing in the suffix are 11N300
(Parts without the following character are not compatible with each other. Although the Rank A = 3 + N x Q x 0.3
not controlled by Export regulation.) version is indicated by a number, it is omitted. Rank C = 3 + N x Q x 0.05
Character Significance Rank D = 3 + N x Q x 0.02
PART NAME
+ Parts applicable to export regulations.
PART NAME represents a general name of a Precautions to be Observed When Re-
part. turning Parts in Need of Repair
Fault RANK characters (which provide
reference for determining the recom- QTY. When returning a component in need of
mended stock quantity) QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in repair, pack it in the same manner as for the
each unit. supplied substitute, using the substitute
All parts are assigned either A through E.
packing materials.
A parts with -S assigned to the end of the
Character Significance The use of different packing materials or
quantity represents a small part that is
A Consumable parts or parts that will be packing methods may incur damage to
replaced at short intervals. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a part
packed component during transit.
Parts that may become faulty accidentally is ordered in quantity of 1 , a pack con-
B
and have a relatively high failure rate. taining 50 pieces of that part is supplied.)
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF,
C but are expected to have a relatively high
failure rate.
REMARKS
D Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, The REMARKS column indicates a unique
but are expected to become faulty.
name of a part or its relevant information of
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis,
or parts that may be needed in case of note.
E unexpected accidents such as man-induced
damage. SERIAL NUMBER
The units may contain different parts depend-
<The RANK guide>
ing on their shipment control number. SE-
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control
RANK characters, and Export regulation- number to which the relevant parts are appli-
applicable character are assigned in that cable. If the SERIAL NUMBER column is
order. blank, the parts are applicable to all the
Thus, at least one character or up to three relevant units.
characters are assigned in the RANK The shipment control number is represented
column. by lower four digits of seven-digit number
indicated on the rating indication label.
009-051-14 009-051-12
CR-IR341 Service Manual SP - 2 CR-IR341 Service Manual SP - 3
08.31.2005 FM4656 03.30.2002 FM3332
INDEX 01A INDEX 01B INDEX 01C INDEX 04E INDEX 04F INDEX 04G
1 2 3 5 6 7
COVER 1 COVER 2 COVER 3 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 5 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 6 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 7
INDEX 02A INDEX 02B INDEX 03A INDEX 05A INDEX 05B INDEX 05C
1 2 1 1 2 3
FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 1 FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING
CONVEYOR 1 CONVEYOR 2 CONVEYOR 3
INDEX 03B INDEX 03C INDEX 04A INDEX 05D INDEX 05E INDEX 06A
2 3 1 4 5 1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 1 BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING BEFORE-SIDE-POSITIONING SIDE-POSITIONING
INDEX 04B INDEX 04C INDEX 04D INDEX 06B INDEX 06C INDEX 06D
2 3 4 2 3 4
UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 2 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 3 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 4 SIDE-POSITIONING SIDE-POSITIONING SIDE-POSITIONING
FR1Z0001.EPS FR1Z0002.EPS
009-051-12 009-051-12
03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
CR-IR341/CR-IR361 Service Manual SP - 4 03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
CR-IR341/CR-IR361 Service Manual SP - 5
INDEX 06E INDEX 07A INDEX 07B INDEX 11 INDEX 12A INDEX 12B
5 1 2 1 2
SIDE-POSITIONING AFTER-READING CONVEYOR 1 AFTER-READING CONVEYOR 2 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT CONTROLLER 1 CONTROLLER 2
CONVEYOR 5
INDEX 07C INDEX 08A INDEX 08B INDEX 12C INDEX 13 INDEX 14
3 1 2 3
AFTER-READING CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 CONTROLLER 3 OPTION CABLE
INDEX 08C INDEX 08D INDEX 09 INDEX 15 INDEX 16 INDEX 17

3 4
ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 4 LAMP UNIT CONNECTION DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE TABLE OF SCREWS /
WASHERS INDICATION
SYMBOLS
INDEX
INDEX 10A INDEX 10B INDEX 10C INDEX 18
1 2 3
SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 SUBSCANNING UNIT 3 LIST OF QUICK WEARING The number in the shaded area in
PARTS each unit that comes after INDEX
indicates the parts list section
number.
FR1Z0004.EPS
FR1Z0003.EPS
009-051-12 009-051-13
03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
CR-IR341/CR-IR361 Service Manual SP - 6 01.15.2004 FM4219
1 1
01A COVER 1 COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
D 1 345N1237B Louver 8
Upper Left-Hand Side Cover
D 2.1 350Y1216A 1
Assembly
1 D 2.2 350Y1358
1 For PHILIPS
FR1Z0005.EPS Assembly
D 2.3 350Y1359 1 For SIEMENS
5 Assembly
D 3.1 350N2001E Upper Left-Hand Side Cover 1
D 3.2 350Y1319 Upper Left-Hand Side Cover 1 For PHILIPS
2-B3X6 4 6 D 3.3 350Y1337 Upper Left-Hand Side Cover 1 For SIEMENS
D 4 388N5703A Flat Spring 60
D 5.1 350Y1219 Upper Rear Cover Assembly 1
D 5.2 350Y1364 Upper Rear Cover Assembly 1 For PHILIPS
39
D 5.3 350Y1365 Upper Rear Cover Assembly 1 For SIEMENS
DETAIL B D 6.1 350N1999E Upper Rear Cover 1
7
D 6.2 350Y1317 Upper Rear Cover 1 For PHILIPS
8 4 D 6.3 350Y1335 Upper Rear Cover 1 For SIEMENS
38 2 D 7.1 350Y1220 Lower Rear Cover Assembly 1
D 7.2 350Y1366 Lower Rear Cover Assembly 1 For PHILIPS
40 B D 7.3 350Y1367 Lower Rear Cover Assembly 1 For SIEMENS
3 9
B D 8.1 350N1998F Lower Rear Cover 1
D 8.2 350Y1316 Lower Rear Cover 1 For PHILIPS
35
11 D 8.3 350Y1334 Lower Rear Cover 1 For SIEMENS
37 10 D 9 382N0999 Sponge Tape 1 T3 x W10 x L558

12 D 10 382N0997 Sponge Tape 1 T12 x W15 x L558
D 13 347S0280 Spacer 10
14
Upper Right-Hand Side Cover
D 14.1 350Y1214A 1
Assembly
Upper Right-Hand Side Cover
D 14.2 350Y1354 1 For PHILIPS
13 Assembly
36 Upper Right-Hand Side Cover
17 Assembly
D 15.1 350N2003E Upper Right-Hand Side Cover 1
16 D 15.2 350Y1321 Upper Right-Hand Side Cover 1 For PHILIPS
D 15.3 350Y1339 Upper Right-Hand Side Cover 1 For SIEMENS
4 1 D 16.1 352N0395 Panel 1
2-W3 15
D 16.2 352Y0052 Panel 1 For PHILIPS
2-S36
42 D 16.3 352Y0053 Panel 1 For SIEMENS
Lower Right-Hand Side Cover
D 17.1 350Y1215B 1
1 Assembly
20
19 D 17.2 350Y1356A 1 For PHILIPS
21 Assembly
D 17.3 350Y1357A 1 For SIEMENS
29 Assembly
19 D 18.1 350N2002H Lower Right-Hand Side Cover 1
41 D 18.2 350Y1320 Lower Right-Hand Side Cover 1 For PHILIPS
22 D 18.3 350Y1338 Lower Right-Hand Side Cover 1 For SIEMENS
28
26 23
A 27
1 25
25
24
18
DETAIL A
30
FR1Z0006.EPS
009-051-12 009-051-12
03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
1
01A COVER 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. BLANK PAGE
D 19 382N0987 Sponge Tape 2 T12 x W10 x L148
D 21 382N0935A Tape 2
D 22 382N0934A Tape 2
A 23 376N0183 Mechanical Filter 1
D 30.1 350Y1206F Lower Front Cover Assembly 1
D 30.2 350Y1314C Lower Front Cover Assembly 1 For PHILIPS
D 30.3 350Y1332C Lower Front Cover Assembly 1 For SIEMENS
31 ***
32 ***
33 ***
34 ***
A 35 376N0184 Mechanical Filter 1 T7 x W153 x L223
D 37.1 350Y1261 Cover 1
D 37.2 350Y1380 Cover 1 For PHILIPS
D 37.3 350Y1381 Cover 1 For SIEMENS
D 38 345N1236B Louver 2
D 39 388N5244A Flat Spring 2
D 40.1 350N2037B Cover 1
D 40.2 350Y1347 Cover 1 For PHILIPS
CR-IR341:
#5001 or later
E 42 405Y0158 Label 1
009-051-13 009-051-12
01.15.2004 FM4219
2 2
01B COVER 2 COVER 2 01B
1
Lower Left-Hand Side Cover
E 1.1 350Y1217 1
Assembly
2
Lower Left-Hand Side Cover
D 1.2 350Y1318 1 For PHILIPS
Assembly
3
FR1Z0007.EPS Lower Left-Hand Side Cover
Assembly
7
D 2.1 350Y1218 Cover 1
8
9 D 2.2 350Y1362 Cover 1 For PHILIPS
4 D 3 345N1236B Louver 2
8 D 4 345N1237B Louver 2
10 D 5.1 350N2006E Cover 1
11
5 D 5.2 350Y1345 Cover 1 For PHILIPS
6
4-S36 D 5.3 350Y1346 Cover 1 For SIEMENS
12
A 6 376N0182A Mechanical Filter 1 T7 x W223 x L315
20 14 D 7 350N2007A Cover 1
13
38 D 8 388N5244A Flat Spring 2
17 D 9 350N2000H Lower Left-Hand Side Cover 1
15
21 19 18 D 10 382N0992 Sponge Tape 1 T3 x W10 x L494
22 2-BR48 16 D 12 382N0975 Sponge Tape 2 T12 x W10 x L40

D 16 352N0394 Panel 1
2-BR48
25
36 D 21 350Y1213 Upper Front Cover Assembly 1
28
39 E 22 356N5847C Bracket 2
3-BR48 37
2-Q46 D 23.1 350Y1285A Upper Front Cover 1
D 23.2 350Y1352 Upper Front Cover 1 For PHILIPS
36 D 23.3 350Y1353 Upper Front Cover 1 For SIEMENS

27
A D 25 382N1069 Sponge Tape 1 T3 x W10 x L150
29 36
30 E 27 356N5972A Bracket 1
D 28 316S3067 Latch 1 TL-231No.1 (1677)
32 D 29.1 350Y1205C FDD FDD Cover 1

D 29.2 350Y1313A FDD FDD Cover 1 For PHILIPS
D 29.3 350Y1331A FDD FDD Cover 1 For SIEMENS
31
D 30 345Y0174 Light Protect Plate 1
33
34
31
DETAIL A
CR-IR341:#2041 or later
35
23
8-BR48
2-T48
FR1Z0008.EPS
009-051-13 009-051-12
01.15.2004 FM4219
2
01B COVER 2
D 38.1 350Y1327A Lower Left-Hand Side Cover 1
D 38.2 350Y1360 Lower Left-Hand Side Cover 1 For PHILIPS
D 38.3 350Y1361 Lower Left-Hand Side Cover 1 For SIEMENS
E 39 382N1159 Tape 1 W19 x L230
CR-IR341:
E 40.1 405N2314A Label 1 For CR-IR341
#5000 or earlier
CR-IR341:
D 40.2 405N2878 Label 1 For CR-IR341
#5001 or later
D 40.3 405N2462 Label 1 For PHILIPS
D 40.4 405N2551 Label 1 For SIEMENS
For CR-IR361
D 40.5 405N2608 Label 1
Japan only
For CR-IR341
D 40.6 405N2607 Label 1
Japan only
009-051-13 009-051-12
01.15.2004 FM4219
3 3
01C COVER 3 COVER 3 01C
D 1 363N7109B Guide 1
4-BR48
E 2 319N3349A Shaft 4
E 3 356N6012A Bracket 1
3 D 4 363N7108B Guide 3
FR1Z0009.EPS
2
3-BR48
D 7 363Y0281B Guide 1
2 4 D 8 363N7105B Guide 1
E 9 332N0502 Stopper 1
1 5-BR412 D 10 363Y0280C Guide 1

D 11 363Y0279C Guide 1
5
D 12 363Y0278C Guide 1
E 13 138S0132 Ferrite Bead 1
2-BR48
6 D 14 363N7111A Guide 1
7 D 15 363N7112A Guide 1
D 16 363N7106B Guide 1
20 8
D 17 363N7115B Guide 1
19 D 18 363N7116B Guide 1
5-BR412
D 19 113Y7046A LED08B LED08B 4
4-T46 E 20 356N5841A Bracket 4
18 2-B36 2-B36
10 D 21 322N0022A Sliding Tape 1 W20 x L510
17 9 D 22 322N0023A Sliding Tape 1 W20 x L565
D 23 322N0024A Sliding Tape 1 W20 x L630
16 11 E 24 357N1114D Base 1
E 25 346N0975A Sub Plate 1
15 D 26 317N1049A Cap 2
D 27 357N7028A Base 1
28
D 28 332N0460C Stopper 1
2-BR412
13
27
14 12
26
23
9-M36
24
25 22
21
FR1Z0010.EPS
009-051-12 009-051-12
03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
1 1
02A FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 1 FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 1 02A
E 1 347S0295 Spacer 3
D 3 363N1769 Guide Plate 1
FR1Z0011.EPS D 4 363Y0492 Guide Plate 1
E 5 363N1812 Guide 1
3 D 6.1 367S1078 Caster 4
3-B36
1 3-B36
D 6.2 367N1006 Caster 4
D 7 367Y2012 Adjuster Assembly 4
D 8 363Y0293A Guide Plate 1
E 9 363N1973C Guide Plate 1
4
E 10 355N0499D Frame 1
23
E 11 356N5928 Bracket 1
D 12 365S0028 Rail 2 203-16-5619
E 13 356N5921B Bracket 1
24 E 14 356N5942A Bracket 1
2-T4X6
(3B) E 15 356N5927C Bracket 1
22
E 17 356N5924D Bracket 1
13 E 18 356N5969A Bracket 1
2-T46(3B)
17 2 E 19 308S1422610 Sems Screw 2-S M2.6 x 10
3-BR48 5
CR-IR341:
12 14 X E 20.1 356N5970 Bracket 1
2-BR48 #2040 or earlier
2-BR48
2-BR48 CR-IR341:
4-T46 3-BR48 #2041 or later
(3B) 2-BR8 E 20.2 356N6219 Bracket 1
11 16 CR-IR361:
6-BR412 #2001 or later
6-BR412 CR-IR341:
2-BR48 2-T46(3B)
12 18 #2041 or later
E 21 356N6216 Bracket 1
15 CR-IR361:
#2001 or later
CR-IR341:
E 22 356N6218 Bracket 1
CR-IR361:
X
#2001 or later
4-T46(3B) 19 CR-IR341:
10 #2041 or later
BR48 2-T46(3B) D 23 382N1156 Sponge Tape 1
CR-IR361:
20.1 #2001 or later
20 CR-IR341:
#2041 or later
D 24 382N1155 Sponge Tape 1
CR-IR361:
#2001 or later
9
44-BR
612
8 7
2-T4X6
(3B)
21 20.2
T4X8
2-BR4X8
FR1Z0012.EPS
009-051-13 009-051-14
01.15.2004 FM4219
2 2
02B FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 2 FRAME & POWER SUPPLY 2 02B
DETAIL E E 1 356N5936A Bracket 1

FR1Z0013.EPS E 4 356N5932B Bracket 1
E 6 310N0603A Pin 2
35 E 7 401N0744A Counter Plate 1

E 8 401N0742B Counter Plate 2
10,36,37,38,39 E 9 356N5935 Bracket 1

2-BR48
CR 10 125N0094K Power Supply 1 JPS-1
4-B36 15 D 11 119Y1119 Fan 2
E 12 318S1121 Bush 2 TB-1520
2-BR412 4-B36 E 13.1 316N0348 Clamp 1 Japanese, USA
11 D E 13.2 316N0349 Clamp 1 Europe
4-M330
4-BR48
12 15 E 14.1 318S1055 Bush 1 Japanese, USA
9 E 14.2 318S1177 Bush 1 Europe
4-M330 CR-IR341:
16 D 15.1 387N0088 Antistatic Brush 2
11 #2368 or earlier
CR-IR341:
#2369 or later
D 15.2 387N0112/A Antistatic Brush 2
A CR-IR361:
33 21 3-BR4x8 E 16 356N6015 Bracket 1
34 E 17 382N0977 Shock Absorber 1
32
E 18 382N0978 Shock Absorber 1
22 E
31 E 19 352N0392C Panel 1
31 32 21 C
21
3-BR48 21 40 D 21 382N1035 Sponge Tape 4 T12 x W20 x L80
E 22 382N0975 Shock Absorber 2 T12 x W10 x L40
26
41 E 24 352N0391B Panel 1
B E 25 382N0976 Shock Absorber 1
27 E 27 356N5800B Bracket 1
3-BR48 D 28 365N0091 Rail 2
5-TR46
E 29 355N0498H Frame 1
DETAIL A 3 28
2-BR48 E 30 356N5799C Bracket 1
2-BR48 5-TR46 D 31 387N0095/A Antistatic Brush 2
5-T46
2 D 32 386N0726 Shock Absorber 2
2-BR48
E 33 345Y0158A Cover 1
4
2-BR48 E 34 318N3015 Grommet 4
2-BR48 2-BR48 D 35 322N0033 Sliding Tape 4 W35 x L620
BR48 3-BR48
1 AT 36 137S1192 Fuse 6 250V4A
BR48
5
137S1076 Fuse F2, F3, F9~12
4-BR48
30
5 5-TR46 29 AT 37 137S1193 Fuse 2 250V0.5A
2-BR48 6 28 137S1077 Fuse F4, F5
2-BR48 7 AT 38 137S1194 Fuse 1 250V2A
8 DETAIL B DETAIL C DETAIL D
18 137S1079 Fuse F6
2-BR48 22 23 17 13 AT 39 137S1195 Fuse 4 250V5A
14
137S1080 Fuse F1, F7, F8, F13
CR-IR341:
24 E 40 356N8850 Bracket 1
19 #5001 or later
D 41 382N0994 Sponge Tape 1 T12xW10xL140
25 20
2-BR48
FR1Z0014.EPS
009-051-14 009-051-14
08.31.2005 FM4656
1 1
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 03A
D 1 107Y0163A/B Solenoid 4 SOLA1 to 4

D 2 319Y1132A Shaft Assembly 4
E 3.1 *** Arm 4 # 5116 or earlier
FR1Z0015.EPS
E 3.2 *** Arm 4 # 5116 or earlier
E 3.3 341N0954A Arm 4 # 5117 or later
D 4 322SF109 Bearing 4 FLW684ZZA
3.3 E 5 362N0450A Support 4 For REF3.1,3.2 # 5116 or earlier
D 6 388N2389A Extension Spring 4
E 7 319N3335A Shaft 4
D 8 388N3076A Torsion Coil Spring 4
3.2
E 9 341N0860B Arm 4
E 10 347N0745 Spacer 4 Dia.4 x 20
E 11 308S1422610 Sems Screw 4-S M2.6 x 10
5 E 12 356N5913A Bracket 1
2 4 E 13 356N5896A Bracket 1
3.1 B36
E 14 356N5947 Bracket 1
E3
D 16 388N3075A Torsion Coil Spring 4
1
D 17 322SY064 Plain Bearing 4 80F-0160
D 18 398N0057D Shutter 4
D 19 322SY054 Plain Bearing 4 80F-0605
6 E 20 356N5908 Bracket 4
7
D 21 387N0181 Antistatic Brush 4 L130
43-B36 BQ410 4-BR430
4-Na4 D 22 382N1693 Tape 4 L170
20
REF.3.1REF.3.2REF.3.303BREF.26.2
4-B36
4-B310 REF.21REF.22
19
18 REF.3.1 or REF.3.2 should be replaced with both REF.3.3 and REF.26.2 of Index 03B.
REF.21 and REF.22 should be replaced in combination.
17 10
9
3-BR48
11
21 16 13
2-B36
11
22
14
12 2-BR48
15
FR1Z0016.EPS
5-BR48
009-051-14 009-051-14
08.31.2005 FM4656
2 2
03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 03B
E 1 898Y0534 24*30HQ Kit 1 Optional

42 E 2 363Y0287 Guide Assembly 4
1 BQ41030
E 3 363N1787A Guide 1 Optional
2 8 FR1Z0017.EPS E 4 332N3463A Stopper 1 Optional
7 BR48 D 5 388N1142 Compression Coil Spring 1 Optional L43.1
3 Q312
9
BR48 E 6 356N5917D/6416B Bracket 1 Optional
S310 SW3
Q312 15 D 7 363N1708A Guide 4
SW3 4 Q312 10 41 D 8 362N0441B Support 4
BR48
30 Q312 BQ41030 D 9 332N3464A Stopper 4
S310 D 10 384N0047 Tape 4 7 x 160
SW3 12
BQ410
17 ***
BR48
SW3
32 33 13 D 12 362N0440A Support 4
Q312
Q312 D 13 332N3465A Stopper 4
SW3 Y
SW3 ***
2-Q48 31 S310 D 15 384N0045 Tape 8 16 x 45
6 BR48
D 16 363N1813B Guide 4
BR48
5 34 D 17 384N0046 Tape 4 39 x 50
X 15 BR48
E 18 356N5914C Bracket 4
16
D 19 363N1788A Guide 4
35 E 20 347N0704 Spacer 8 Dia.3 x 2.5

2-Q48 18(Ver.C) E 21 313N0967 Stay 4
29 D 22 322SY146 Plain Bearing 8 HPF-0505
13
36 /For tiers NO.1~3
28 36
22 D 24 388N1143 Compression Coil Spring 4 L31.3
BQ410 18(Ver.B) D 25 104N0044 Photo Sensor 4 SA3,7,11,15
BR48 19 E 26.1 *** Bracket 4 # 5116 or earlier
E 26.2 356N8486 Bracket 4 # 5117 or later
37 4
BR48 E 27 356N6200 Bracket 1
/For tiers NO.4
Q412 2-B310
E 28 356N5897E Bracket 4
Y 22
X 23 E 29 356N5902C/6415B Bracket 4
BR48 20
Q412 21 E 30 356N5905D Bracket 4
B310
Q412 24 D 31 363N1787A Guide 4
BR48
BR48 D 32 332N3463A Stopper 4
Q412 D 33 363N1786A Guide 4

B310 D 34 332N3462A Stopper 4
D 35 363Y0289 Guide Assembly 4
B36
D 36 388N1142 Compression Coil Spring 8 L43.1
E 37 356N5904C/6414B Bracket 4
26.1 26.2
BR48 25 D 38 104N0043 Photo Sensor 4 SA1,5,9,13
2-Q412 BR48 E 39 356N5912B/C Bracket 4
27 E 40 356N6201 Bracket 1
2-Q412 E 41 363Y0357 Guide 1
Hexagon socket head bolt with BQ4 x 10 (SCM
D 42 308S8190410 16
spring and plain washers )
2-Q412 38
39 Z
REF.26.1REF.26.203AREF.3.3
2-Q412
Z REF.26.1 should be replaced with both REF.26.2 and REF.3.3 of Index 03A.
40
2-BR48
FR1Z0018.EPS
009-051-14 009-051-14
08.31.2005 FM4656
3 3
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 03C
D 1 388N2306 Extension Spring 4 L117.5

D 2 360N0339A Housing 8
D 3 322N0021A Bearing 8
10
11 FR1Z0019.EPS
12 D 5 334Y3160 Rubber Roller 4
E 6 356N5895B/C Bracket 1
D 7 104N0044 Photo Sensor 1 SA17
13 D 8 388N2407 Extension Spring 4 L104.8
E 9 356N5948 Bracket 3
14 E 10 308S3420210 Double Sems Screw 8-S M2 x 10
BR48 15 D 11 128Y0241A Micro Switch 4 SA2,6,10,14
W3 D 13 128Y0258B Micro Switch Assembly 4 SA4,8,12,16
BR48
B36 E 14 356N5910C Bracket 4
D 15 388N5214 Leaf Spring 4
1
DETAIL A (4/4 Places
2
3
7
6
4-BR412
BR48
5 3
B36
2
8
5
B36
4 4-BR412
B36
(4/4 Places
FR1Z0020.EPS
009-051-12 009-051-13
03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
1 1
04A UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 1 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 1 04A
Q425
SW4
E 1 318N1049 Bush 1 Dia.4 x 12
1 D 2 327N5202004A Gear 1
2 D 3 322SF126 Bearing 3
3
FR1Z0021.EPS
E 4 319N3339A Shaft 1
Q412 E10
E 5 347N1480A Spacer 3
35 SW4 E 6 318N1048 Bush 2 Dia.4 x 8.5
36 4 D 7 327N1201603A Gear 2
34
A E 9 347N0746 Spacer 1 Dia.4 x 25
E8
Q412 37 E 11 356N6410 Bracket 1
SW4 B D 12 322N0028A Shaft Support 4
33 D 13 334N3488 Rubber Roller 3
32 E 14 356N6388 Bracket 1
38
D 15 383Y0065 Wire 1
42 2-A410
37 E 16 319N3447 Shaft 1
31 E 17 347N0240 Spacer 1 Dia.3 x 8
Q412 BR48 BR48
30 E4 40 D 18 322SY067 Plain Bearing 2
6 SW4
41 39 D 19 334N3489 Rubber Roller 1
SW4
E 20 356N6411 Bracket 1
SW4
7 W4 D 21 363Y0276B Guide Plate 1
2-BR48 3 W4 D 22 363Y0275B Guide Plate 1
29 2-BR48 D 23 363Y0274B Guide Plate 1
SW4 2-BR416 E 24 356N6409 Bracket 1

W4 E 25 347N0701 Spacer 1 Dia.4 x 22
A D 26 363N1763A Guide 1
28 2-B36 30
BR430 S36(3B) D 27 388N1701 Compression Coil Spring 1 L21
27 B 43
S38
26 E 28 356N5816B Bracket 1
44 5 E 29 347N0524 Spacer 2 Dia.3 x 10

25
W4 E 30 347N1479A Spacer 3
C W4 258-3M-9
SW4 D 31 323S3255 Timing Belt 1
/UNITTA 258-3M-9
SW4 D 32 324N3121 Timing Belt Wheel 1
2-BR48 Q412
SW4 E 33 318N1042A Bush 1 Dia.4 x 6.5
BR48 24 6
21 E10 E 34 319N3338A Shaft 1
D 35 327N4201R04A Gear 1
3-B310
7
W4 E 36 318N1057 Bush 1
3 SW4
B36 22 D 37 322SF069 Bearing 2 6900ZZNR
19
B36 E 38 356N5819B Bracket 1
E3
20 4-BQ410 E 39 356N6364 Bracket 1
18 B36 9 8 5
16 17 BR48
BR48 D 40 118YX165 Stepping Motor 1
MB3,
C BR430 103H7123-0642
15 2-B36
14 D 41 324N3093A/B Timing Belt Wheel 1
B310 B312 E 42 356N5818A Bracket 1
2-BR48 B36
B36 23 E 43 401N0741 Counter Plate 1
B310 E 44 356N5824B Bracket 1
10
B310
13
B36
B310 12
11
2-BR48
2-BR48 FR1Z0022.EPS
009-051-12 009-051-14
03.30.2002 FM3332(1)
2 2
04B UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 2 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 2 04B
E 2 319N3447 Shaft 1
D 3 383Y0065 Wire 1
FR1Z0023.EPS E 4 347N0524 Spacer 1 Dia.3 x 10
BR312 3 CR-IR341:
4 BR48 #5000 or earlier
BR36
CR-IR361:
#2442 or earlier
CR-IR341:
5 E 6.1 356N5817C Bracket 1
CR-IR361:
BR36
1 2 6.1 CR-IR341:
E 6.2 356N8785A Bracket 1
#5001 or later
CR-IR341:
#5000 or earlier
A 7.1 133Y2029 Motor Pump 1 PB1 (CM-15)
CR-IR361:
#2442 or earlier
BR48 CR-IR341:
A 7.2 133Y1031A/B Motor Pump 1
11 #5001 or later
CR-IR341:
#5000 or earlier
D 8.1 134Y0050 Solenoid Valve 1 SVB1 (SV2013FD)
CR-IR361:
8.1 10 #2442 or earlier
9 14 D 8.2 134Y0056B Solenoid Valve 1
CR-IR341:
16.1 #5001 or later
13 2-B310
2-WP48 D 9 128S0392 Switch 1 SB5 (1000m/mH20)
12 B36
(3B) 15 7.1 E 10 308S1422614 Sems Screw 2-S M2.6 x 14
B310
18
37 E 11 371S0003 Nozzle 1
38 CR-IR341:
23 19 #5000 or earlier
20 E 12 356N5945 Bracket 1
17 CR-IR361:
21 2-Q412
#2442 or earlier
18 2-SW4
D 13 370NB033 Hose 1 Dia.4 x Dia.4 x L33
29 22
30 D 14 370NB075 Hose 1 Dia.4 x Dia.7 x L75
E3
E3 E 15 372S0055 Diverge Tube 1
30 42.1 CR-IR341:
31 39 41 3-Q412 42.2 #5000 or earlier
29 40 3-SW4 D 16.1 370NB060 Hose 1 Dia.4 x Dia.7 x L60
36 CR-IR361:
33 #2442 or earlier
CR-IR341:
B36 D 16.2 370NB045 Hose 1 Dia.4 x Dia.7 x L45
#5001 or later
D 17 370NB020 Hose 1 Dia.4 x Dia.7 x L20
E 18 372S0050 Joint 2
E 19 372S0048 Joint 1
2-BR48 E 20 372S0053 Joint 1
CR-IR341:#5001 or later 26
25 E 21 316S0146 Clamp 1
6.2 MB1,
E4 D 22 118YX164 Stepping Motor 1
103H7123-0612
27 D 23 322SF061 Bearing 2
23 E 24 347N0636 Spacer 1 Dia.8 x 4
24
8.2 BR48 234-3M-9
B36 D 25 323S3073 Timing Belt 1
35 E3 /UNITTA 234-3M-9
D 26 324N3041E Timing Belt Wheel 1
34 33 B36
32 D 27 324N3123B Timing Belt Wheel 1
29 E 28 341N0866C Arm 1
30
31 E3
E 29 315S0011/0040 Retaining Ring 4
CSDia.6
30 /CS Ring Dia.6
2-B310 29 D 30 322SY061 Plain Bearing 4
28
7.2
16.2
FR1Z0024.EPS
009-051-13 009-051-14
01.15.2004 FM4219
2
04B UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 2
E 31 341N0864 Arm 2
E 32 347N0276 Spacer 1 Dia.4 x 11.5
D 33 322SF103 Bearing 2 FLWA674ZZA
D 34 104N0044 Photo Sensor 1 SB3
E 36 347N0734 Spacer 1 Dia.4 x 7.5
E 37 341N0865A Arm 1
E 38 347N0831 Spacer 1 Dia.8 x 13
E 39 319N3337B Shaft 1
D 40 104N0043 Photo Sensor 1 SB1
E 41 356N5813A/B Bracket 1
E 42.1 356N6706 Bracket 1
E 42.2 356N6707 Bracket 1
009-051-13 009-051-13
01.15.2004 FM4219
3 3
04C UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 3 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 3 04C
EF (TAC)
E 1 372S0049 Joint 2
/EF elbow (TAC joint)
E 2 372S0053 Joint 2 BF3.2
E 3 316S0146 Clamp 5 BS-04
FR1Z0025.EPS
Dia.1.5 x Dia.3.5 x
D 4 370NC020 Hose 1
L20
E 5 372S0060 Joint 1 BTU-4 x 2.5-BSN
Dia.1.5 x Dia.3.5 x
D 6 370NC180 Hose 1
L180
CR-IR341:
#2711 or earlier
D 8.1 322SY103 Plain Bearing 2 80F-0304
R-IR361:
#2005 or earlier
CR-IR341:
#2712 or later
D 8.2 322SY048 Plain Bearing 2 80F-0303
CR-IR361:
#2006 or later
E 9 356Y0174 Bracket 1
E 10 356N5967 Bracket 1
E 11 362N0469A Support 1
D 12 322SF103 Bearing 2 FLWA674ZZA
E 13 347N0727 Spacer 2 Dia.4 x 2
Dia.4
E 14 309S0002 Polypropylene Slider
/For looseness
E 15 362N0468 Spacer 1 L38
A 16 392N0010 Suction Cup 2
89-14
A 17 375S0040 Packing 2
/Gasket 89-14
13 See 04B CR-IR341:
12 Dia.1.5 x Dia.3.5 x #2711 or earlier
D 20.1 370NC070 Hose 1
E3 1 2 L70 CR-IR361:
E3
3 #2005 or earlier
4 6 CR-IR341:
3 B36 B36 Dia.1.5 x Dia.3.5 x #2712 or later
22 5 3 D 20.2 370N0323 Hose 1
See 04B L74.5 CR-IR361:
7 9 #2006 or later
B36 8
B36 E 21 347N1490A Spacer 1 L47.5
8 D 22 362N0474B Support 1
2-B310
3 E 23 356Y0284 Bracket Assembly 1
B36
20
E 24 898Y0901 kit 1 /Suction Cup
B36 10
Assembly
3
21 2 1 *REF.20.2REF.8.2
19
REF.20.1REF.8.1
2-B36 11
2-B36
*The REF. 20.2 and REF. 8.2 must be paired.
15
18 Q312 The REF. 20.1 and REF. 8.1 must be paired as well.
12
17
Na3 13
14
16
2-B36 E3
17
16 E3
23 See 04B
24
FR1Z0026.EPS
009-051-13 009-051-13
01.15.2004 FM4219
4 4
04D UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 4 UP-DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 4 04D
D 1 334N3461A Rubber Roller 1

1 D 2 334N3459A Rubber Roller 1
E 3 363N1762D Guide Plate 1
FR1Z0027.EPS E 4 356N5944 Bracket 1
2 D 5 113Y1395 Board Assembly 1 SB4
3 D 6 334N3462A Rubber Roller 1

E 7 363Y0310A Guide 4
E 8 363Y0486 Guide Plate 1
B36 2-BR48 D 9 334N3460A Rubber Roller 1
E 10 313N1030 Stay 1
D 11 322SF050 Bearing 8 WBC8-14ZZA
4 B36
D 12 360N0339A Housing 8
5 X
B36 D 13 388N2390 Extension Spring 2 L89.7
2-B36 D 14 327N1121608A Spur Gear 4
2-A38
D 15 113Y1038 Board Assembly 1 SB2
6
9 E 16 347N1196A Spacer 1
E 17 308S1422614 Sems Screw 2-S M2.6 x 14
7 E 18 346N0979A Reinforcement 1
7 BR48 D 19 305N0014A Nut 1
Dia.50 Dia.6.35 D-
E 20 337S0003 Wheel 1
5063
MB2,
D 21 118YX164 Stepping Motor 1
7 8 103H7123-0612
2-B36 D 22 388N2391 Extension Spring 2 L84.4
2-B48 E 23 319N2940 Shaft 1
7 D 24 322SF017 Bearing 2 WA676ZZA
D 25 324N3098A/B Timing Belt Wheel 1
D 26 324N3041E Timing Belt Wheel 1
Y 291-3M-9
D 27 323S3287 Timing Belt 1
/UNITTA 291-3M-9
D 28 324N3125 Timing Belt Wheel 1
X D 29 324N3038C Timing Belt Wheel 1
Y
10
11
12
13
14
11 12
11 14
13
12
22 19
28
27 16 2-A38
E6 WP(3B)
15
29
11
12
E6 22
23
24 17
25
BR430 24 18
20
21
2-A410
E4

Fuji FCR 5000 Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Fuji FCR 5000 Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AC5000 9848-600-02111/2 MON: 4512-984-30121 0.

FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

CR-IR341 (FCR 5000)

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the unit of radiation,

FCR is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright 1998-2005 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored

Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Steel rule (300mm) ECN No. FCR-A014

Used to indicate the section you should refer to.

Precautions for Optical Parts

Check on Drive Mechanisms Other General Precautions

2. Safety Against Laser Radiation BLANK PAGE

Precautions Against Laser Exposure

Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure

Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance

Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure

Labels and Protective Housings for Laser Safty

CR-IR341 Service Manual Contents

8.6 Error Handling ................................................................................................... MD-153

Troubleshooting (MT) 03D6 After-Erasure Conveyance Error ........................................................ MT-178

3. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Abnormal Images ...................................... MT-248

17. PC Boards .................................................................................................................... MC-274

009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.16 009-051-06

Maintenance Utility (MU) 7.12 NETMASKS (NETMASKS) ................................................................................. MU-62

009-051-10 CR-IR341 Service Manual 0.20 009-051-10

Installation (IN) 5. Temporary Placement ..................................................................................................... IN-70

Performance check (PC)

Supplementary Note about Machine Name

Organizational Differences from Preceding Manuals 9000 series CR-IR341 Remarks

Chapter F1 Error Code Maintenance Volume:

Chapter F7 Service Modes The details of functions are given.

Compiled as one Troubleshooting

Chapter Z3 I/O Layout Drawings Maintenance Volume:

Remedies based on troubleshooting flows

This product complies with

MODEL CR-IR 341

HHS Label #1 HHS Label #2

Class 3B Panel Label

HHS Certification and

EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 3B Panel Label List of Labels

Ratings Indication Label

FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

2. Labels MODEL CRIR341

Ratings Indication FR1B1039.EPS

Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit

Protective Housings of Machine

Upper rear cover

Lower rear cover

Upper right-hand FR1B1049.EPS

Lower front cover Lower inner front cover

124, 128, 129, 136, 140, 164,

CR-IR341/CR-IR341P 08/30/2001 07 Additional information for LAN board

Machine Description (MD) 135, 138, 140, 143145,

009-051-11 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 1

1. Overall Configuration and Nomenclature of 1.2 Configuration of Machine

Scanning optics unit

NOTE: An alphabet in parentheses denotes a unit symbol. FR1H1222.EPS

009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 2 009-051-04 CR-IR341 Service Manual MD - 3

2. Features of Machine 2.2 Image Network I/F Option